You are on page 1of 805



The Pali Alphabet Vowels a i I u e o

Consonants unvoiced unaspirate Gutturals (or Velars) Palatals Retroflexes (or Cerebrals) Dentals Labials Semi-vowels Sibilant Aspirate k c t t p y s h r unvoiced aspirate kh ch

voiced unaspirate g j d d b 1 1

voiced aspirate gh jh dh dh bh lh v

nasala n n n n m

th ph

The anusvra (the pure nasal m) does not change before y, r, /, v, s, and h; and in that position it comes before all other consonants in the alphabetical order. For example, samvara and samsaya come before saka. Before other consonants, m may change to the class nasal, i.e. that in the same line in the table above. For example, -mk- may be written -nk-, -mcmay be written - n o ) . Thus samgha is the same as sangha, samcaya as sancaya, etc. Even when the anusvra is written, its place in the alphabet is that of the equivalent class nasal.



a kh


a kh



Published by

The Pali Text Society Oxford 2001

2001 Pali Text Society


o 86013 394 x

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or any information storage and retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from the Pali Text Society.

Printed in Great Britain by

Antony Rowe Ltd, Chippenham, Wiltshire


Professor R.F. Gombrich and Professor K.R. Norman

lbh vata me suladdham vata me yass me kalynamitt bahussut anukampak atihakm ovdak anussak


The first Pli-English dictionary, published in two volumes in 1872 and 1875, was the work of Robert Caesar Childers. His main source was Abhidhnappadipik, a dictionary in Pali,

probably of the late 12th century, which was itself based on the Sanskrit Amarakosa. He was able to consult Singhalese bhikkhus, but had access to very few Pali texts. Even so, his dictionary is an admirable work and a considerable achievement for its time.

As European knowledge of Pali texts grew, Childers' dictionary became unsatisfactory, and one of the aims of Thomas William Rhys Davids, the founder of the Pali Text Society, was to produce a Pli-English dictionary better able to serve the needs of those wishing to read or indeed edit Pali texts. In the early years of the last century he tried to find scholars throughout Europe to co-operate in producing such a dictionary, but he met various setbacks and disappointments, and after the First World War had ended most hopes of international cooperation, he at last decided that he himself would launch what he thought of as a provisional dictionary, with Dr. William Stede as co-editor, and using some material provided by other scholars. This invaluable dictionary was published from 1921-1925.

Meanwhile, in Copenhagen, Dines Andersen and Helmer Smith had begun to produce the Critical Pali Dictionary, the first fascicle of which appeared in 1924. They had the benefit of the work of Carl Wilhelm Trenckner (1824 - 1891), who, while making transcripts of most of the Pali manuscripts in the rich Copenhagen Collection, and of others from London, had made preparations for a dictionary, writing small paper-slips containing words and references, observations on grammar and syntax, and quotations illustrating secular and daily life. Andersen and Smith possessed a wide knowledge of Pali combined with expertise in philology, in


grammar, in Sanskrit and in other Indo-Aryan languages, and they laid strong and solid foundations for the Critical Pali Dictionary. It is a giant work, an exhaustive dictionary, and for any serious Pali scholar, indispensable. Fascicles continue to be produced, but it will be many years before it is completed.

In the Foreword to the first fascicle of the Pali Text Society's dictionary, Rhys Davids wrote:

'It has been decided ... to reserve the proceeds of the sale [of the first edition] for the eventual issue of a second edition which shall come nearer to our ideals of what a Pali Dictionary should be.'

This was the task I began several years ago. Within a very short time I realised that so little could be left unaltered that I had to produce a completely new dictionary, not a revision of the existing one. Rhys Davids' dictionary is only one of my sources, although an important one. The dictionary does however remain essentially a dictionary of the texts published by the Pali Text Society.

This dictionary has two main aims: first, to help its user read and understand the Pali Canon and its commentaries; and second, to provide a picture of the language, syntax, and even grammar of these texts. To achieve the first aim, I have tried to define all the words which appear in the texts in so far as that is possible given the fallibility of even the most recent technological aids and the limits of human capability. For the second, I have extensively used quotation to illustrate meaning, rather than providing mere references, and have given detailed information on declension and especially on parts of verbs. As a secondary aim was to produce a relatively concise dictionary, there are some things this dictionary is not. It is not an etymological dictionary, its primary reference being to Sanskrit. It is not a concordance, but quotes selectively. I have tried to show the range of texts in which a word appears, but the emphasis is on canonical texts, with less reference to commentaries. Not every compound is listed, only those where the members do not appear independently, or where the meaning might not be immediately apparent. Negative forms and many forms with su-, du(r)- or ni(r)- are given under the primary word.


The writing of this dictionary presented two main difficulties. The first is that it proved impossible to be sure of the meaning of some words, where etymology and context were not sufficient to produce certainty. There are, therefore, more queries remaining than one would like. The second difficulty concerns the texts themselves. It is likely that most users of this dictionary will also be using mainly the editions of the Pali Text Society. The majority of these editions were made many years ago, sometimes from only one or a very few manuscripts, by editors who had little help to aid their decisions. The consequence is a considerable number of doubtful readings. I have therefore very often quoted from the Burmese, Singhalese and Thai editions. Sometimes it is possible to express a preference for one or the other reading, sometimes each reading could be justified, sometimes no reading is really convincing. I give these alternative readings so that the reader may consider and choose, and to point out the fallibility of all editions.

I have tried to give the quotations as they appear in the texts, but I have regularised some spellings: whatever the edition has, I always write final anusvra (eg ~am ca, not -an ca; -am yeva, not -anneva), and vy- (not by-).

It hardly needs to be said that I, as any writer of a dictionary, depend on the work of previous and present scholars, in particular of the writers of the Pali Text Society's first Pli-English Dictionary and of the continuing Critical Pali Dictionary. Generally I make no

acknowledgement to these scholars in the articles of the dictionary, but I do so now, for my debt to them is great.

Darwin College Cambridge 2001

Margaret Cone



(references are to vol., page, and line unless otherwise specified)

A Abh Abh-sci Abhidh-av Ang Ang-a Ap Ap-a p.&r. Aup As

Ahguttaranikaya, ed. R. Morris, E. Hardy, PTS London 1885-1900 Abhidhnappadipik, ed. W. Subhti, Colombo 1900 Abhidhnasci, index and notes to Abh, W. Subhti, Colombo 1893 Abhidhammvatra, ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, PTS London 1915 Angatavamsa (including parts of Ang-a) ed. J. Minayeff, JPTS, 1886, pp. 33 -53 Samantabhaddik (Angatavamsa-atthakath); see Ang Apadna, ed. M.E. Lilley, PTS London 1925-27 Visuddhajanavilsini (Apadna-atthakath) ed. C.E. Godakumbura, PTS London 1954 pastamba's Srautastra Aupaptika Sutra, ed. E. Leumann, Leipzig 1883 Atthaslini, ed. E. Mller, PTS London 1897

Bhi Vin Bv Bv-a

Bhiksuni-Vinaya, ed. G. Roth, Patna 1970 Buddhavamsa, ed. N.A. Jayawickrama, PTS London 1974 (by poem and verse) Madhuratthavilsini (Buddhavamsa-atthakath), ed. LB. Horner, PTS London 1946

Cp Cp-a

Cariypitaka, ed. N.A. Jayawickrama, PTS London 1974 (by vagga, poem and verse) Paramatthadipani (Cariypitaka-atthakath), ed. D.L. Barua, PTS London 1979

D Dth

Dighanikya, ed. T.W. Rhys Davids, J.E. Carpenter, PTS London 1890-1911 Dthvamsa, ed. T.W. Rhys Davids, R. Morris, JPTS, 1884, pp. 109-151 (by chapter and verse)


The Dhtukathpakarana and its commentary (Ppk-a I), ed. E.R. Gooneratne, PTS London 1892

Dhtum Dhtup

Dhtumanjs, see Dhtup The Pli Dhtuptha and the Dhtumanjs, ed. D. Andersen, H. Smith, Copenhagen 1921 (by root-number)

Dhp Dhp-a Dhs Dip

Dhammapada, ed. O. von Hinber, K.R. Norman, PTS Oxford 1994 (by verse) Dhammapada-atthakath, ed. H.C. Norman, PTS London 1906-14 Dhammasangani, ed. E. Mller, PTS London 1885 Dipavamsa, ed. and translated H. Oldenberg, London 1879 (by chapter and verse)

GDhp Gv

The Gndhari Dhammapada, ed. J. Brough, London 1962 Gandavyha, ed. Suzuki, Idzumi, Kyoto 1934-36

It It-a

Itivuttaka, ed. E. Windisch, PTS London 1889 Paramatthadipani (Itivuttaka-atthakath), ed. M.M. Bose, PTS London 1934-36

Ja Jina-c Jinak Jinl Jm

The Jtaka together with its commentary, ed. V. Fausboll, London 1877-96 Jinacarita, ed. W.H.D. Rouse, JPTS, 1905, pp. 1 -31 (by verse) Jinaklamli, ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, PTS London 1962 Jinlankra, ed. J. Gray, London 1894 Jtakaml, ed. H. Kern, Harvard University Press, Cambridge Mass. 1943

Kacc Khp Kkh Khuddas Kv Kv-a

Kaccyanapakarana, ed. E. Senart, J As, 1871, pp. 1 -339 Khuddakaptha, ed. H. Smith, PTS London 1915 (by poem and verse) Kankhvitarani, ed. D. Maskell, PTS London 1981 Khuddasikkh, ed. E. Mller, JPTS, 1883, pp. 86-121 Kathvatthu, ed. A.C. Taylor, PTS London 1894 Kathvatthu Commentary (Ppk-a III), ed. N.A. Jayawickrama, PTS London 1979

M Mhbh Mhbv Mhv

Majjhimanikya, ed. V. Trenckner, R. Chalmers, PTS London 1887-1902 Mahbhrata, ed. V.S. Sukthankar et al., Poona 1933Mahbodhivamsa, ed. S.A. Strong, PTS London 1891 Mahavamsa (and Culavamsa), ed. W. Geiger, PTS London 1908, 1925 (by chapter and verse)

Mil Mil-t Moh

Milindapaho, ed. V. Trenckner, PTS London 1880 Milindatik, ed. P.S. Jaini, PTS London 1961 Mohavicchedani, ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, A.K. Warder, PTS London 1961



Manorathaprani (Anguttararkya-atthakath), ed. M. Walleser, H. Kopp, PTS London 1936-57

Mp-t MPS Mvu

Sratthamanjs (tik on Mp), Rangoon 1961 Mahparinirvnastra, ed. E. Waldschmidt, Berlin 1950, 1951 Mahvastu, ed. E. Senart, Paris 1882-97


Nmarpapariccheda, ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, JPTS, 1913-14, pp. 1 -114 Nettipakarana, ed. E. Hardy, PTS London 1902 Mahniddesa, ed. L. de La Vallee Poussin, E.J. Thomas, PTS London 1978 Cullaniddesa, ed. W. Stede, PTS London 1916 Saddhammapajjotik (Mahniddesa-atthakath), ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, PTS London 1931, 1939

Niddl Nidd II Nidd-a I

Nidd-a II

Saddhammapajjotik (Cullaniddesa-atthakath), ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, PTS London 1941

Paiica-g Patis Patis-a PDhp Pet Pjl Pj II Pp Pp-a

Paiicagatidipani, ed. L. Feer, JPTS, 1884, pp. 152-61 (by verse) Patisambhidamagga, ed. A.C. Taylor, PTS London 1905-07 Saddhammappaksini (Patisambhidamagga-atthakath), ed. C.V. Joshi, PTS London 1979 Patna Dharmapada, ed. M. Cone, JPTS, XIII, pp. 101-217 Petakopadesa, ed. A. Barua, PTS London 1949 Paramatthajotik I (Khuddakaptha-atthakath), ed. H. Smith, PTS London 1915 Paramatthajotik II (Suttanipta-atthakath), ed. H. Smith, PTS London 1916-18 Puggalapahnatti, ed. R. Morris, PTS London 1997 Puggalapahnatti-atthakath (Ppk-a II), ed. G. Landsberg, C.A.F. Rhys Davids, (JPTS, 1913, pp. 170-254), included in Pp

Ppk-a Pv Pv-a Ps

Pancappakarana-atthakath Petavatthu, ed. N.A. Jayawickrama, PTS London 1977 (by poem and verse) Paramatthadipani (Petavatthu-atthakath), ed. E. Hardy, PTS London 1894 Papaiicasdani (Majjhimanikya-atthakath), ed. J.H. Woods, D. Kosambi, LB. Horner, PTS London 1933-38


tik on Ps, Rangoon 1961




S S. Dhtup Sadd Saddh Samantak Ss Siks Sn Sp Spk

Samyuttanikya, ed. L. Feer, PTS London 1884-98 Sanskrit Dhtuptha, in N.L. Westergaard 1841 Saddaniti, ed. H. Smith, Lund 1928 -54 Saddhammopyana, ed. R. Morris, JPTS, 1887, pp. 35 -98 (by verse) Samantaktavannan, ed. C.E. Godakumbura, PTS London 1958 (by verse) Ssanavamsa, ed. M. Bode, PTS London 1897 Siksasamuccaya, ed. C. Bendall, St Petersburg 1897-1902 Suttanipta, ed. D. Andersen, H. Smith, PTS London 1913 (by verse) Samantapsdik (Vinaya-atthakath), ed. J. Takakusu, M. Nagai, PTS London 192447 Sratthappaksini (Samyuttanikya-atthakath), ed. F.L. Woodward, PTS London 1929-37

Spk-t Sp-t Sv

tik on Spk, Rangoon 1961 Sratthadipani (tik on Sp), Rangoon 1960 Sumahgalavilsini (Dighanikya-atthakath), ed. T.W. Rhys Davids, J.E. Carpenter, PTS London 1886-1932


Dighaikyatthakathtik, ed. L. de Silva, PTS London 1970

TB Tel Th, ThI

Taittiriya Brhmana Telakathagtha, ed. E.R. Goonaratne, JPTS, 1884, pp. 49 -68 (by verse) Theragth and Therigth, ed. H. Oldenberg, R. Pischel, 2nd edition, with Appendices by K.R. Norman, L. Alsdorf, PTS London 1966 (by verse)

Th-a Thi-a Thp Tikap Tikap-a

Paramatthadipani (Theragth-atthakath), ed. F.L. Woodward, PTS London 1940-59 Paramatthadipani (Therigth-atthakath), ed. W. Pruitt, PTS Oxford 1998 Thpavamsa, ed. N.A. Jayawickrama, PTS London 1971 Tikapatthna, ed. C.A.F. Rhys Davids, PTS London 1921 Tikapatthna-atthakath (Ppk-a V), ed. C.A.F. Rhys Davids, PTS London 1921

Ud Ud-a Udna-v Utt Utt-vn

Udna, ed. P. Steinthal, PTS London 1885 Paramatthadipani (Udna-atthakath), ed. F.L. Woodward, PTS London 1926 Udnavarga, ed. F. Bernhard, Gttingen 1965 Uttardhyayanastra, ed. J. Charpentier, Uppsala 1922 Uttaravinicchayo, ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, PTS London 1927 (by verse)


Vibh Vibh-a Vin Vin-vn Vism Vism-mht Vjb Vmv VS Vv Vv-a

Vibhahga, ed. C.A.F. Rhys Davids, PTS London 1904 Sammohavinodani (Vibhanga-atthakath), ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, PTS London 1923 Vinayapitaka, ed. H. Oldenberg, London 1879-83 Vinayavinicchayo, ed. A.P. Buddhadatta, PTS London 1927 (by verse) Visuddhimagga, ed. C.A.F. Rhys Davids, PTS London 1920-21 Visuddhimagga-mahtik, Rangoon 1960 Vajirabuddhitik (tik on Sp), Rangoon 1960 Vimativinodani (tik on Sp), Rangoon 1960 Vjasaneyi-samhit Vimnavatthu, ed. N.A. Jayawickrama, PTS London 1977 (by poem and verse) Paramatthadipani (Vimnavatthu-atthakath), ed. E. Hardy, PTS London 1901


Yamakapakarana, ed. C.A.F. Rhys Davids, PTS London 1911-13


Works Cited

L. Alsdorf

1957 1962 1967 1971 1977

'Bemerkungen zum Vessantara-Jtaka', WZKSO, I, pp. 1-70 'Uttarajjhy Studies', IIJ, VI, pp. 177 foil. Die rya-Strophen des Pli-Kanons, Wiesbaden 'Das Jtaka vom weisen Vidhura', WZKS, XV, pp. 23 -56 'Das Bhridatta-Jtaka', WZKS, XXI, pp. 25-55

A.L. Basham W.B. Bollee J. Brough T. Burrow

1951 1970 1962 1955 1956 1973 1984

History and Doctrines of the jivikas, London Kunla Jtaka, edited and translated, PTS London The Gndhrl Dhammapada, London The Sanskrit Language, London 'Skt. lubh 'to disturb", JRAS, pp. 191 -200 'Sanskritp- "go, move, pass, traverse'", IIJ, XV, pp. 81-108 'Vedic urvri: "Lady of choice, wife'", JRAS, pp. 209-216

C. Caillat

1965 1968

'Les derives moyen-indiens du type krima9, JAs, 253, pp. 289-308 'La finale -ima dans les adjectifs moyen- et neo-indiens de sens spatial', Melanges d'indianisme la memoire de Louis Renou, Paris


'Pali ibbha, Vedic ibhya- , Buddhist Studies in Honour of LB. Horner, ed. L. Cousins et al., Dordrecht, pp. 41-49


'Pronoms et adjectifs de similarite en Moyen Indo-Aryen', Indianisme et Bouddhisme, Melanges offerts Mgr. Etienne Lamotte, Louvain-la-Neuve, pp. 33^0

J. Charpentier


'Some Sanskrit and Pali Notes', Indian Linguistics, II, pp. 45 -71 'PH kannik = Circular Roof-Plate', JAOS, 50:3, pp. 238-243 'The Parts of a vin\ JAOS, 50:3, pp. 244-253

A.K. Coomaraswamy 1950a 1950b

R.O. Franke


'The Buddhist Councils at Rjagaha and Vesli', JPTS, pp. 1 -80

W. Geiger


A Pali Grammar, translated by B. Ghosh, revised and edited by K.R. Norman, PTS Oxford


C. Hallisey


'Apropos the Pali Vinaya as an historical document: a reply to Gregory Schopen', JPTS, XV, pp. 197-208

S. Hamilton M. Hara O. von Hinber

1996 1992 1967 1970

Identity and Experience, London 'A Note on Dhammapada 97', IIJ, XXXV: 2-3, pp. 179-191 'Pali ulloka-\ KZ, 81, pp. 247-53 (= 1994, pp. 1-8) 'Gth anacchariypubbe assutapubb', KZ, 84, pp. 5-10 (= 1994, pp. 17-24)


'Die 'dreifache' Wirkung des karma", IIJ, XIII:4, pp. 241 -49 (= 1994 pp. 39-51)


'Reste des reduplizierten Aorists im Pali', MSS, 32, pp. 65-72 (= 1994 pp. 52-61)


'On the tradition of Pali texts in India, Ceylon and Burma', Buddhism in Ceylon and Studies on Religious Syncretism in Buddhist Countries, ed. H. Bechert, Gttingen, pp. 48-57

1979a 1979b

'Pli kathatV, IIJ, XXI, pp. 21-26 (= 1994 pp. 107-115) 'A Vedic verb in Pli: udjita\ L. Sternbach Felicitation Volume, Lucknow, pp. 819-822


'ber drei Begriffe der buddhistischen Rechtssprache: issaravat, giv und bhandadeyya', Indologica Taurinensia, VI, pp. 275-79 (= 1994 pp. 117-22)


'Remarks on the Critical Pli Dictionary (II)', KZ, 94, pp. 10-31 (= 1994 pp. 123-61)


'The ghost word dvihitik and the description of famines in early Buddhist Literature,, JPTS, IX, pp. 74-86

1982a 1982b 1983 1986 1990

'On the Perfect in Pali', KZ, 96, pp. 30-32 (= 1994 pp. 173 -76) 'Pli as an artificial language', Indologica Taurinensia, X, pp. 135-37 'Notes on the Pali Tradition in Burma', NA WG, 3, Gttingen, p. 72 Das ltere Mittelindisch im berblick, Vienna

Khandhakavatta: Loss oftext in the Pli Vinayapitaka?' JPTS, XV,

pp. 127-38 1994 K. Hoffmann 1960 Selected Papers on Pli Studies, PTS Oxford 'Ved. ucchvanka-, ucchlankh-, Pli ussankha-', IIJ, IV, pp. I l l -18


E. Hultzsch


Inscriptions ofAsoka, Oxford

N.A. Jayawickrama E.H. Johnston

1971 1931

The Chronicle of the Thpa and The Thpavamsa, London 'Notes on some Pali Words', JRAS, pp. 565-92

H.Kern F.B.J. Kuiper

1916 1948

Toevoegselen op 't Woordenboek van Childers, Amsterdam Proto-Munda words in Sanskrit, Amsterdam

S. Lienhard


'On the meaning and use of the word indagopa\ Indologica Taurinensia, VI, pp. 177-88

H. Lders

1907 1954

Das Wrfelspiel in alten Indien, Berlin Beobachtungen ber die Sprache des buddhistischen Urkanons, Berlin (= BSU)


'Bhrhut und die buddhistische Literatur', Abhandlungen fr die Kunde des Morgenlandes, XXVL3, reprinted Liechtenstein

M.A. Mehendale P. Mus

1955 1939

Review of H. Lders 1954, BDCRI, XVII: 1, pp. 53-75 La Lumiere sur les Six Voies, Paris


1956 1964 1977 1984

The Path of Purification, Colombo The Pitaka-disclosure, PTS London The Guide, PTS London The Path of Discrimination, PTS London 'Studies in Vinaya technical terms I-III', JPTS, XXII, pp. 73 -150 'Middle Indo-Aryan Studies I V , JOI(B), XV, pp. 112-17 (= 1990, pp. 42-46)

E. Nolot K.R. Norman

1996 1965


'Middle Indo-Aryan Studies VI', JOI(B), XVI, pp. 113-19 (= 1990, pp. 77-84)


'Notes on Anoka's Fifth Pillar Edict', JRAS, pp. 26-32 (= 1990, pp. 68-76)

1969 1971

The Elders' Verses I, PTS London The Elders' Verses II, PTS London


K.R. Norman


'The Buddha's view of devas\ Beitrge zur Indienforschung (Ernst Waldschmidt zum 80. Geburtstag gewidmet), Berlin, pp. 329-39 (= 1991, pp. 1-8)

1979 1981a

Two Pali Etymologies', BSOAS, XLII, pp. 321 -28 (=1991, pp. 71-83) 'Devas and Adhidevas in Buddhism', JPTS, IX, pp. 145-55 (= 1991, pp. 162-71)

198 lb

'Notes on the Vessantara-jtaka', Studien zum Jainismus und Buddhismus, ed. K. Brhn, A. Wezler, Wiesbaden, pp. 163-74 (=1991, pp. 172-184)


'The metres of the Lakkhana-suttanta', Buddhist Studies in honour of Hammalava Saddhatissa, ed. G. Dhammapala et al., Nugegoda, pp. 176-88 (= 1992a, pp. 45-59)


'The Dialectal Variety of Middle Indo-Aryan', Sanskrit and World Culture, ed. W. Morgenroth, Berlin (= 1992a, pp. 115-25)


'Pali Lexicographical Studies I V , JPTS, XI, pp. 33 -49 (= 1992a, pp. 157-72)


'Pali Lexicographical Studies V , JPTS, XII, pp. 49-61 (= 1992a, pp. 257-68)


'Pali Lexicographical Studies VI', JPTS, XIII, pp. 219-227 (= 1993, pp. 72-79)

1990 1991 1992a 1992b 1994 1997

Collected Papers Volume I, PTS Oxford Collected Papers Volume II, PTS Oxford Collected Papers Volume III, PTS Oxford The Group of Discourses, PTS Oxford Collected Papers Volume V, PTS Oxford The Word of the Doctrine, PTS Oxford

R. Pischel

1900 1957

Grammatik der Prakrit-Sprachen, Strassburg Comparative Grammar of the Prakrit Languages, (= English translation of 1900), Benares



The Commentary on the Verses of the Theris, PTS Oxford

W. Rahula


History of Buddhism in Ceylon, Colombo


L. Renou


'Les elements vediques dans le vocabulaire du Sanskrit classique', JMs, 231, pp. 337-38

G. Schopen Lily de Silva

1989 1978

'The Stpa cult and the extant Pali Vinaya', JPTS, XIII, pp. 83-100 ' Cetovimutti, pannvimutti and ubhatobhgavimutti', Pli Buddhist Review, 111:3, pp. 118-45

Pe Maung Tin R.L. Turner

1971 1975

The Path of Purity, PTS London Collected papers 1912-73, London

A.K. Warder N.L. Westergaard W.D. Whitney

1967 1841 1879

Pli Metre, PTS London Radices Linguae Sanscritae, Bonn A Sanskrit Grammar, Leipzig



abl. absol. abstr. ace. act. ad adv. AMg aor. tm. AS

ablative absolutive abstract noun accusative active referring to, commenting on adverb ArdhamgadhI aorist tmanepada ASokan Inscriptions G: Girnar; K: Klsi; Dh: Dhauli; J: Jaugada; M: Mnsehra; Sh: Shhbzgarhi; S: Spr; Y: Yerragudi RE: Rock Edict; PE: Pillar Edict Bulletin of the Deccan College Research Institute, Poona Burmese edition, Chatthasangiti-pitakam, Rangoon, 1956Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit (as in BHSD) Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, F. Edgerton, New Haven, 1953 Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar, F. Edgerton, New Haven, 1953 bahuvrihi compound Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, London = H. Lders 1954 causative A Comparative Dictionary of the Indo-Aryan Languages, R.L. Turner, London 1966 Singhalese edition, Buddha Jayanti Tripitaka Series, 1959-; Simon Hewavitarne Bequest, Colombo, 1917compare comparative conditional compound, compounds A Critical Pali Dictionary, begun by V. Trenckner, revised, continued and edited by D. Andersen, H. Smith et al., Copenhagen 1924commentary, commentaries dative A Dravidian Etymological Dictionary, T. Burrow and M.B. Emeneau, (2nd edition) Oxford 1984 demonstrative

BDCRI Be BHS BHSD BHSG bhvr. BSOAS BSU caus. CDIAL Ce cf compar. cond. cpd, cpds CPD ct, cts dat. DED demonstr.


denom. desid. dv. ed eds Ee eg ep. esp. etc f figfii foil. fpp fut. gen. id ie IF ifc iic

denominative desiderative dvandva compound edited by editions (ie Be, Ce, Ee, Se) European edition for example epithet especially et cetera feminine figuratively footnote and following (lines) future passive participle future genitive grammatical technical term the same that is Indogermanische Forschungen in fine compositi (at the end of a compound) in initio compositi (at the beginning of a compound) Indo-Iranian Journal, The Hague imperative impersonal indeclinable infinitive instrumental interrogative intransitive Journal of the American Oriental Society, New Haven Journal Asiatique, Paris Journal of the Oriental Institute, Baroda Journal of the Pali Text Society, London, Oxford Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, London

imperat. impers. ind. inf. instr. interrog. intrans. JAOS JAs JOI(B) JPTS JRAS


karmadh. KZ lex. lit loc. m mc metaph. mfh. mi. ms(s) MSS n. NAWG neg. no. nom. Npr. num. onomat. opp. opt. orig. p., pp. Par. part. pass. perf. Pkt pi. poss. postp. pp pr. prep. prob. pron.

karmadharaya compound Zeitschrift fr Vergleichende Sprachforschung lexica literally locative mascune metri causa metaphorical(ly) masculine, feminine and neuter, ie adjective Middle Indian manuscript(s) Mnchener Studien zur Sprachwissenschaft neuter Nachrichten der Akademie der Wissenschaften in Gttingen negative number nominative proper name numeral onomatopoeic opposite (in meaning to) optative original(ly) page, pages parasmaipada participle present participle passive perfect Prakrit plural possibly postposition past participle present preposition probably pronoun


qv, qqv redupl. rel. S. seil. Se sg. subst. superl. sv SWTF

which see reduplicated relative Sanskrit scilicet (understand, supply) Thai edition, CD-Rom, Mahidol University Computing Center, Bangkok singular substantive superlative sub voce (under that word) Sanskrit-Wrterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden, E. Waldschmidt et al., Gttingen 1973Tamil tatpurusa compound transitive tatsama (same as Sanskrit) technical term Vedic Sanskrit varia lectio (variant reading) variae lectiones (variant readings) vocative volume wrong reading, wrong readings = N.L. Westergaard 1841 Wiener Zeitschrift fur die Kunde Sd- (und Ost-)asiens

Ta tatp. trans. ts t.t. Ved. vi vll voc. vol. wr, wrr Wg WZKS(O)

note that: represents the head-word of the article represents the stem of the nearest preceding word in bold characters * denotes the quotation is from a verse portion of the text ** denotes the quotation is from a portion of the text in the vedha metre stands between identical passages * stands between parallel, not quite identical, passages


Order of the Pali letters

a i i u e o m k kh g gh n c ch j jh n t th d dh n t th d dh n p ph b bh m y r 11v s h


2^, the letter or sound 'a'; -kara, m. [a + kra1; ts], the letter or sound 'a'; Sadd857,3i; Ja I 503,21' (~o niptamatto; see a6-); Sp 1022,H; 1399,26 (dighan ti dighena klena vattabbam krdi, rassan ti tato upaddhaklena vattabbam ~'-di, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr krdi); Ud-a 181,n (~assa kram katv); Ap-a430,i6 (patisedhe vuddhitabbhve ... ~o); '-gama, m., the addition of the augment (see a5-); Sadd 835,is; lopa, m., elision o/'a'; Sp 213,9; -vanna1, m., the vowel 'a' or 'a'; Sadd 606,28. a2-, the preverb - shortened before double consonants, as in akkosati, akkhti etc; Sadd 836,3o/o//. a3- (an- before vowels), [S. a-, an-], a prefix having a negative or privative or contrary sense, compounded with 1. nouns and adjectives; 2. infinite forms of the verb; 3. (occasionally) finite forms of the verb; Abhll47; Sadd 8%9,20 foil.; see anajjhagam (.sv adhiVg), analllyati, andiyi; Examples of I. and 2. are given under their positive form. a4-, the base of some pronouns and adverbs; see ayam, asu, atra, ato. a5-, [ts], the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in aor. and cond. tenses (often, however, omitted); occasionally placed before the preverb, cfeg aparibrhayi, Ja V 361,16*. a6-, a particle, according to cts, in anantaka, apassato, apilandhana, apucchasi, apunappunam, abhvetv1, abhsitv, amajjapa, asincati qqv. a7, m. [ts], a name o/Visnu; Sadd 638,22 (ko ca a ca iso ca kes ti samso ... asaddena vinhu ... vutto). amsa 1 , m. [S. ama], share, portion, part; Abh 485; 1102; Sadd 567,23; Spkl 305, is (~o tikotthso vuccati); Mp III 248,12; ifc see atiV- (jvacceti2), angaf(sv gacchati), ek'-, paccuppann'-, pativims'-, mett,-, sukk'-; see also sa5, ekamsika. amsa2, m. [ts], the shoulder; Abh264; 1102; Vinll 217,19 (pattam thavikya pakkhipitv ~e laggetv); A I 61,30 (ekena ... ~ena mtaram parihareyya; Mp II 121,13: ekasmim amsakte thapetv); Sn 609 (na givya na ~ehi na udarena); Ja I 9,18 (khribhram ~e katv); VI 562,13* (~ato); Ap 541,17 (~ehi samadhrayum); ifc see antar'-, ek'-, put'-; -ksva, n., a yellow shouldercloth; Vism 65,22; -kta, m.n. [amsa + kta1], "shoulder-prominence", the shoulder; Vin III 127,4 (~ena pahram adsi); Ja VI 562,25'; Ps III 378,21 (dve ~ni); Spklll 244,8 (dvinnam ~nam antare); Dhp-aIV 136,1; -baddha, m., a shoulder-strap; Vin II 143,18* (in uddna: thavik ~am ca, Be, Ee so; Ce -bandhakam; Se -vaddham ca); Ap310,i6 ( ^ ne datv, Be, Ee so; Ce -bandhe; Se -vaddhe); -baddhaka (and -bandhaka), m., a shoulder-strap; Vin 1204,9 (~o, Be so; Ce -vattako; Ee -bandhako; Se -vaddhako) * II 114,7 (Be so; Ce -bandhako; Ee, Se -vaddhako); Vv 33:215 (~am, Be so; Se -bandhakam; Ce, Ee -vattakam); Sp 350,25 (~ena, Be so; Ce, Se -vaddhakena; Ee -vattakena); -bandhana, n., a shoulder-strap; It-all 67,33 (~am, eds so) = Sv528,n (Be -baddhakam; Ce, Ee -vattakam; Se -vaddhakam); -vattaka (and -vaddhaka),/w., a shoulder-strap; Vin I 204,9 (~o, Ce so; Be -baddhako; Ee -bandhako; Se -vaddhako) * 11114,7 (Ee, Se -vaddhako; Be -baddhako; Ce -bandhako); Vv 33:215 (~am, Ce, Eeso; Be -baddhakam; Se -bandhakam); Sp 350,25 (~ena, Ee so; e-baddhakena; Ce, Se -vaddhakena); Vin-vn 859 (~e). amsa3, m. [S. -asra], point, corner; edge, facet (frequently in combination with numerals); Vv 64:2 (phalehi ~ehi ativa sahgata; Vv-a 275,25: ~ehl ti kubbaraphale patitthitehi hetthima-amsehi); As 317,23 (cathi ~ehi yuttam caturamsam); Vv-a 304,1; ifc see atth'(svattha2), yat'- (^vyamati), catu-r-, cul'- (.svculla1), cha-1- (sv cha2), ti-y-, solas'-; see also amsi, assa2. ams, / (and ?) [S. aras, n., S. lex. ara, m.], a particular disease, hemorrhoids, piles; A V 110,7 (imasmim kye vividh bdh uppajjanti... madhumeho ~ pilak); Nidd I 370,10 (madhumehena ~ya pilakya ... phuttho); Sadd 567,23 (~ ti arisarogo); see also ansa. a m s i , / [S. ari], an edge; a corner; a facet; Vv 78:2 (ekamekya ~iy ratan satta nimmit; Vv-a 303,29: atthamsesu thambhesu ekasmim amsabhge); Ps III 112,17 (tassa [phalakassa] cha ~iyo, chasu ~isu cha kappsapindiyo pupphit); see also amsa3. amsika, m. [from amsa2], one who carries (something) on the shoulder; Sadd786,2o (sisena vahati ti sisiko, evam ~o). amsu, m.n. [S. am^u], I. a thread, filament; fibre; Abh 1121; Vism 622,34 (tantumhi tantumhi -umhi ~umhi); Sp 1118,5 (kusal itthiyo tihi ~hi suttam kantanti); As 316,7 (tassa tassa pana -uno); ifc see kosiy'-(^vkosiya2); 2 . a ray, a sunbeam; Abh 64; 1121; Sadd395,25; ifc see nan'-, dhammavar,-; -mli(n),m., the sun; Abh 63; Bv-a45,2i; ifc see jina-, buddh'-. amsuka, n. [S. amuka], cloth; Abh 290; Sadd 353,6. amseti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup amsayati, Wg 35:64], strikes; collides; Sadd 567,22 (amsa sanghte: ~eti -ayati). amhati,/7r. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup amhate, Wg 16:34], goes; Sadd457,32foil, (ahi pilahi gatiyam: ~ati... nippdo pi

samno -ati gacchati gantum sakkoti ti ahi). akam, aor. 1 sg. o/karoti qv. akamsu, aor. 3 pl. o/karoti qv. akattha in Ee at Pv-a 45,23-24 is wr for akkuttham (Be, Se so). akan^akam in Ee at Pv-a 161,15 is wrfor akantakam (Be, Ce, Se so). akati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup akati, Wg 19:30], moves tortuously\ Sadd 322,24 (aka kutilagatiyam: ~ati); 468,8. akattha, aor. 2 pl. o/karoti qv. akanittha, n. (or m.) and - , [BHS akanistha; cfS. akanistha], \.( the name of one of the highest classes of devas, the fifth class of suddhvsas qv; D i l 286,23* (panitatar dev ~ yasassino; Sv 739,34: ye te yun ca pannaya ca ~ jetthak sabbadevehi panitatar dev); III 237,20 (panca suddhvs, avihatapp sudasssudassi ~); MI 289,23 (-nam devnam); Bvl:21 (bhassar subhakinh vehapphal ~ ca devat); Patis I 84,2 (hetthato brahmalokam pariyantam karitv uparito ~e deve anto karitv; Patis-a297,26: -e ti uttamatthena na kanitthe); Kv208,i2 (-nam devnam sojasa kappasahassni yuppamnam, Be, Se so; Ee akanitthagnam, prob, wr); 2. (n.) the world of the akanittha devas; Pp 17,23 (sudassiy cuto -am gacchati); Pj I 166,15 (ymato yva -am); Dhp-aIII 290,1;-gmi(n), mfn. [akanittha + gmi(n)1], going to the akanittha world; D III 237,23 (panca angmino ... uddhamsoto ~i); S V 237,15; Patis I 16114; Pp 17,18. akampaniya, mfn., neg.fpp o/kampati qv. akampi(n), mfn. [from kampati], not shaking, not trembling; Mil 138,9(achambhi~iavedhl). akampiya, mfn. and n., neg.fpp o/kampati qv. akammaka, m/(-ik)w. [a3 + kamma + ka2], 1. not connected with or dependent on (past) action; Mill37,1 (~ena hetun); 2. [S. akarmaka], (gr.t.t.) not connected with a patient, intransitive; Sadd 11,27 (akammik); 328,32 (-0 'yam dhtu). akammaneyya, mfn. [S. akarmanya], not ready or fit for any work; inert; Ja IV 383,26* (bham pasreti -am) = 385,7*; see also kammanna, kammaniya. akamha, aor. 1 pl. o/karoti qv. akariya inEeatSp6\\,i is wrfor akiriy (Ce, Se so) or akiriyam (Be so). akarum, aor. 3 pl. o/karoti qv. akalana in Ee at It-a II 12,11 is wrfor kalana qv. akalu, n. [S. agaru, aguru], the fragrant resin or wood of Aquilaria agallocha; aloes; Ja IV 440,23* (aham ca kho -urn candanarn ca silya pimsmi, Ee so; Be, Ce agalum; Se aggalum; 442,8". klkalum ca rattacandanam ca); VI 144,23* (-candanavilitt, Ee so; Be, Ce agalu-; Se aggalu-); Mil 338,13 (in cpd, Ce, Ee so; Be agalu-; Se aggalu-); see also agaru1, agalu. akalla l , mfn., see sv kalla. akalla2, ., seesv kalla. akallaka, akalyaka, mfn. [a3 + kalla + ka2], ill; not fit; Vin III 62,20 (Sp382,2o: nham - 0 ti nham gilno ti attho); Ja III 464,4 (bhavam -0 ti bhavantam patijaggitum gato 'mhi); Vin-vn 489; Utt-vn503; Patis-a 232,11 (gilno hi - 0 ti vuccati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee akalyako).

akavtaka, mfn. [a3 + kavta + ka2], without a door; Vin II 148,8 (te vihr ~ honti); -baddha, mfn., not closed with a door; not constructed with a door; Vin-vn 2307 ([vihre] ~asmim dukkatam paridipitam). akassana, n. [a3 + kassana1], not lessening; not making thin; Dhtum404 (thlkassane, so read with Cel Ee thla kassane). ak, aor. 3 sg., 2 sg. o/karoti qv. akci(n), mfn. [prob, from kca2 qv], flawless; without blemish; Vv 60:1 (abhiruyha ngam ~inam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr kcinarn; Vv-a 253,2: -inan ti niddosam sabalavankatilakdichavidosarahitan ti attho, jniyan ti pi pli). akmaka, m/(-ik)w. [a3 + kma + ka2; BHS id.], unwilling; not wishing (to); Vin III 13,6 (maranena pi mayam te~ vinbhavissma); D1115, is (Gotamo -nam mtpitunnam ... pabbajito); Ja IV 31,13* (-0 v hi aham carmi) = Cp 3:11:12 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr akmo); Ja IV 35,2i* (akmik paddhacar 'mhi tuyham, Be so; Ce baddhacar 'smi; Ee wr baddha carmi; Se patthacarmi). akra, m.,seesv2^. akrabhva, m., see sv kra. akruna, ^^^vkarun. aksi, aor. 3 sg, 2 sg. o/karoti qv. aksiya, m. [= aksika, qv sv ksika; or = *ksiya < S. karsika], royal servant; tax-gatherer; Ja VI 212,7*(~ rjuhi vnusitth; 215,21 fall.: - . . . tiidam ca idam ca balim ganhath ti rjhi anusitth aksiyasankht rjapuris viya). akiflcaflfla- in Ee at D I 35,20, Pet 148,7 and Ud-a 151,16 is wrfor kincaiina- qv. akissava, mfn. [?], (according to et) without wisdom; SI 149,2* (nivutam marine -am; Spkl 215,6: kissav vuccati pann, nipanno ti attho) quoted Nett 132,14*. akukkukajta, mfn. [?], without shoots;! MI 233,is (passeyya mahantam kadalikkhandham ujum navam -am, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se akukkutajtam; Ps II 279,16: -an ti pupphagahanakle anto angutthappamno eko ghanadandako nibbattati, tena virahitan ti attho) = S III 141,28 (Be, Ce so; Ee wr akukkajtam; Se akukkujakajtam) * AII 200,22 (slalatthim ujum navam akukkuceakajtam). akujana in Ee at SI 33,10* is wr for akjana (or akujjano) qv sv kjana. akujjana, see sv kjana. akufo in Ee, Ce at Pet 203,16 and akuto in Ee at Pet 203,19 are wrrfor akto (Be so). akutoci-upaddava, mfn. [a3 + kutoci + upaddava], free from misfortune from any source; Ja V 378,1* (kacci rattham anuppilam-am; 378,25': kutoci anupaddavam). akutobhaya, mfn. [a3 + kuto + bhaya; ts], having nothing to fear from anywhere, from any quarter; secure; where there is nothing to fear from any quarter; SI 192,31* (desentam virajam dhammam nibbnam -am; Spkl 278,28: nibbne kutoci bhayam n' atthi nibbnam pattassa v kutoci bhayam n' atthi ti nibbnam -amnma) = Th 1238; A III 69,n* (ye ca kme parinnaya caranti -); Dhp 196 (nibbute -); Vv 50:23 (rammi kilmi modmi -; Vv-a 216,7: attnuvdabhaydinam drpagatatt -); Thi 135 (sambuddham

~am); Ja IV 71,21* (nirsanko asoko ~o); Ap 589,8; Ps II 81,25 (imasmim pi nma~e aranne); Pj 134,10 (-t). akuppiya, mfn., neg.fpp (ofcaus.) o/kuppati qv. akusalaka, mfh. [a3 + kusala + ka2], unskilled, unskilful; Vin II 159,34 (tena ~ena cit vank bhitti paripati). akopiya, mfn., neg.fpp ofcaus. o/kuppati qv. akka, m. [S. arka], 1. the sun; Abh 63; 1102; Sadd 521,29 (~oti suriyo); ifc see bl' - (^vbla1); 2. the name of a plant, Calotropis gigantea; Abh 581; 1102; MI 429,22 (tarn jiyam ... yy' amhi viddho yadi v ~assa yadi v santhassa ...; Ps III 142,11: akkavke gahetv jiyam karonti tena vuttam ~ass ti); Sp 626,31 (-pupphdihi); -nla, m., the stalk of the akka plant; Vin I 306,8 (bhikkhu ~am nivsetv; Spll35,i: -an ti mayam); Ud-a 78,25 (~ni chinditv vkehi palivethetv nivsanaprupanam katv acchdesi). akkanta, /w/H.,/?/?o/"akkamati qv. akkandati,/?r. 3 sg. [S. krandati], laments, wails, cries; SIV 206,25* (~ati parodati; Spklll 76,n: anibaddham viya palpam palapanto kandati). akkamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Vkram], steps on, treads upon; presses upon; Vin I 118,25 (bhikkh andhakre kyam pi civaram pi ~anti); II 128,22 (~atubhante bhagav dussni); 175,5 (na ... sa-uphanena sensanam ~itabbam, yo ~eyya patti dukkatassa); M II 93,2 (na bhagav celapattikam -issati); Ja IV 206,9* (rajj ti v ~e kanhasappam); V 433,30 (pdena pdam ~ati); VI126,10* (arajam bhmim ~a); Mil 220,21 (ummattako khittacitto jalitam pi jtavedam ~ati); PsII 210,15 (hatthena tulam ~ati); Spkl 117,10 (pdam pasretv pacchimacakkavlamukhavattiyam ~ati); akkamanta, m/(~anti)tt., Ap211,23; PsII 259,29 (tsam... psndlni ~antmam); Nidd-al 333,4 (amittam givya ~anto viya); neg. anakkamanta, mfn., Ps III 323,7; aor. 31yg..(a)akkami, Ja IV 330,9*; Ap 514,22 (sirasi ~i tad); Sp 1209,16; (b) akkamitthal, Bv 2:52 (ma nam kalale ~ittha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ~ittho [2sg. ?]; Bv-a 89,38: buddho kalale m itth ti attho); 3 pi. akkamimsu, Vin II 129,10 (bhikkh kukkuccyant [dussam] na -imsu); 2pi. akkamittha2, Dhp-aIII 136,19; absol. (a)akkamma, [S. kramya], Ja III 141,3* (sukkhapannam va akkamma); Cp 3:7:3; (b) akkamitv, Vin III 38,33 (~itv pavattesi); MI 324,14 (pdena v angram ~itv); Ja II 42,4; neg. anakkamitv, Dhp-a I 83,20; (c)akkamitvna, Ap 514,23; Bv2:52 (-itvna mam buddho ... gacchatu); pass. pr. 3 sg. akkamiyati, Pv-a 225,26 (yath kaddamo na ~iyati eva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kaddame); pp (a) akkanta, mfn. and n. [S. krnta], \.(mfn.) (i)(pass.) stepped on; trodden upon; pressed upon; A I 8,12 (sliskam ... hatthena v pdena v ~am; Mp I 55,25foil.: pden' eva ~am nma hoti, hatthena uppilitam rlhisaddavasena pana ~an t' eva vuttam); Ja I 71,9; VI432,10 ([dvrni] ekya niy ~ya pithiyanti); Ap 119,15 (~am ca padam disv; Ap-a 394,24: ~an ti akkamitam dassitam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee akkamamnam dassitam, prob, wr); Mil 152,27 (~o pi pso na samvarati); SpkII 241,28 (cariya adisv me ~o si); neg. anakkanta, mfn., not stepped on; Ps III 162,7; (ii) (act.) who has stepped on, trodden upon; who has stepped on to a shoe or sandal;

Vin IV 201,17 (~assa v patimukkassa v omukkassa v agilnassa dhammam deseti; Sp 895, is: kevalam pdukam akkamitv thitassa); Sp 1175,23 (aggim puriso viya, Be, Ce so; Ee akkamanapuriso; Se aggi-akkamanapuriso); It-a 170,22 (aggim ~ena viya sahas tato oramitabbam); 2. (n.) stepping, treading upon; Vism292,32 (ekena pdena lekham kkhane yeva parinibbyi); Ps II 46,20 (bhmim ~klato pabhuti); akkanto in Ee at Sp 1379,18 is wr for okkanto (Be, Ce, Se so); (b)akkamita,m/., trodden; Ap-a 394,24 (akkantan ti ~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee akkamamnam, prob, wr); fpp akkamitabba, mfn., Vin II 116,25 (na bhikkhave adhotehi padehi kathinam akkamitabbam); Vism 342, is; neg. anakkamitabba, mfn., Sp 1249,i. akkamana, n. [S. kramana], 1. stepping on; treading upon; Ja I 339,23 (-tthne); Ps I 284,2 (param param thnam ~ato) = Spklll 141,21 (~ato, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -tya); SpkII 228,10 (saha ~ pitthi... bhijji); Th-al 90,23 (pdehi ~e); 2. something to step on or tread upon (shoes or sandals); Ap404,i3 (Kakusandhassa munino... divvihram vajato ~am ads' aham); anakkamana, n., the not stepping on; Sp 1209,18 (idam tva bhagavato ~e kranam); Bv-a 89,39. akkavtam in Ee at Vin II 154,15 is prob, wr; read apesim yamakakavtam with Be,Ce, Se. akkuttha, mfn.,pp o/akkosati qv. akkulo, ind. [either meaningless or= kula qv; cfJPTS 1886, pp. 94-95], an exclamation (designed to terrify); Ud5,5 (yakkho bhagavato... lomahamsam uppdetukmo... tikkhattum ~o pakkulo ti akkulapakkulikam aksi; Ud-a 66,22foil.: tyo vre ~o pakkulo ti bhimspetukmatya evarpam Saddam aksi, anukaranasaddo hi ayam ... avyattakkharam tikkhattum attano yakkhagajjitam gajji... keci pana kulavykula iti padadvayassa pariyybhidhnavasena -o bakkulo ti ayam saddo vutto ti vadanti... apare pana akkhulo bhakkhulo ti plim vatv ...); (a)-pakkulik,/, the cry of akkulo pakkulo; ? or confusion, dismay; ? Ud 5,5 (~am aksi); see also akkhula. akketi, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup arkayati, Wg 32:101], praises; Sadd 521,28 (akka thavane:... ~eti -ayati akko); pass. pr. 3 sg. akkiyati, Sadd 521,29 (~iyati abhitthaviyati). akkocchi, aor. 3 sg. o/akkosati qv. akkosa, m. [S. kroSa], shouting at; abuse; reviling; Abh 899; 1093; Vin IV 4,32 (hinena pi -na khumsenti); MII 62,2 (n* eva dnam alattha na paccakkhnam aniiadatthu -am eva alattha); A III 66,13 (sanghe... bhinne annamahnam ~ ca honti); Sn 623 (~am vadhabandham ca aduttho yo titikkhati); Ja VI 187,25'; Mil 8,28 (~amyeva paribhsam yeva patilabhati); -vatthu, n. [akkosa + vatthu1], basis, ground of abuse; Vin IV 309,n (dasahi v ~hi akkosati) = Ja I 191,5; Dhp-a I 212,3 (coro si blo si mlho si ottho si gono si gadrabho si nerayiko si tiracchnagato si n' atthi tuyham sugati duggati yeva tuyham ptikankh ti dasahi ~hi akkosanti paribhsanti); anakkosa, m, absence of abuse; not reviling; Ap 264,15 (-ass' idam phalam). akkosaka, m/(-ik)/i. and m. [akkosa + ka2; S. kroSaka],

(one) who abuses, scolds, reviles; VinI 335,38* (~assa, in uddna); SI 85,3i* (~o ca akkosam [labhati]); Jail 349,27 (tassa mt kodhan ahosi... akkosik paribhsika); Spl65,i2 (~ garahak); MpIII 94,27 (dasahi akkosavatthhi ~o); Pv-a 251,26 (samanabrhmannam ~o); -paribhsaka, w/(akkosikaparibhsik). and mf, (one) who abuses and insults; VinV 196,16 (bhikkhunmam ~o hoti); A II 58,8 (akkosikaparibhsik); 111252,2 (yo so bhikkhave bhikkhu ~o ariypavdi brahmacrinam); Vibh247,6 (kulni... ~ni); Dhp-aIV 41,2o; anakkosaka, m., anakkosik,/, (one) who does not abuse; Dhp-a II 150,21 (anakkosik); ~-paribhsaka, m. anakkosikaparibhsik,/, (one) who does not abuse and insult; AII 58,27; 58,36 (bhariy ... anakkosikaparibhsik samanabrhmannam). akkosati (and akkoseti, ~ayati), pr. 3 sg. [S. krogati], scolds, abuses, curses, reviles (usually + ace, occasionally + gen.); VinII 296,23 (upsake... ~mi paribhsmi); III 184,i (~issanti paribhsissanti); MI 140,16 (pare tathgatam -anti paribhsanti); A I 127,13 (~eyya pi mam paribhseyya pi mam); IV 345,3 (bhikkhnam ~ati paribhsati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se bhikkh); Ja I 225,28 (yad te Nando ~ati); V 17,2* (~ati pitaram mtaram ca); Sp 738,6 (khumsenti ti ~enti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -anti); (a) neg. anakkosa(t), mfn., Ja III 27,2* (anakkosam); (b) akkosanta, m/(~anti)w., VinV 65,33 (~antiy); Ja III 27,5'; IV 197,21* (-ante pasamsati); Mil 171,18; Spkl 229,7; neg. anakkosanta, mfn., SI 162,16 (tvam amhe anakkosante ~asi); Vv-a69,2i; (c) akkosenta, mfn., Sp 753,17 (~ento, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -anto); aor. 3 sg.(&) akkocchi,Dhp 3 (akkocchi mam avadhi mam) = Ja III 212,6* (212,20*: ayam mam ~i; c/Sadd 833,6: kup cchi... akkocchi); (b)akkosi, Mil 221,26 (asabbhhi pharushi vchi ~i paribhsi); SpkII 147,18; Dhp-a I 43,2o; (c)akkosesi, Mhv 37:154; 3 pi. akkosimsu, VinV 65,35; Mp I 438,16; absol (a)akkositv, Ja III 460,11; It-al 86,20; Thl-a29,6 (khinsavatherim ganikvdena ~itv tato cut); neg. anakkositv, Ja I 323,6; (b) akkositvna, Ap82,9; (c) akkosayitvna, Ap613,n; (d) akkosetv, Ja II 351,7' (param na ~etv, Ee so; Be, Ce anakkosetv; Se akopetv); pass, akkosiyamna, mfn., MI 334,8; Ja V 295,17 (~iyamno pi paribhsiyamno pi); pp (a) akkuttha, mfn. and n. [S. krusta], l.(mfn.) reviled, scolded, railed at; MII 3,33 (~o ca pana Prano Kassapo dhammakkosena); Sn 366; Ja VI 187,20 (kenaci ~ v paribhatth v bhaveyya); Mil 222,6; 2. (n.) reviling, scolding; Pv-a 45,23 (~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr akattha); vandita,n., reviling and respect; Sn 702 (Pj II 492,9: ~-vanditan ti akkosam ca vandanam ca); Thi388; ~-santa, mfh., being reviled; or calm when reviled; Jail 348,24* (--sant vadhadandatajjit ... bhariy, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se akkuddhasant; * AIV 93,16: eds akkuddhasant); akkuttham in Ee at Ud-a 291,26 is wrfor akutthim (Be, Ce, Se so); akkuttho in Ee at JaV 113,n* is wr for akkuddh 0 #v ^vkujjhati; (b) akkosita, mfn. and n., I. (mfn.) scolded, reviled; Nidd-al 465,19 (upavadito ti ~o); 2. (n.) abusing, reviling; Vin V 77,20 (~e patti pcittiyassa); Ap 264,n

(nbhijnmi... samyatnam tapassmam katam ~am may, Be, Ce so; Ee utthhitam, Se upatthhitam, prob, wrr; cf 264,15: anakkosass' idam phalam); fpp akkositabba, mfn., Vin II 255,22 (na ... bhikkhu ~o paribhsitabbo); Mil 210,14; Dhp-alV 219,24; caus. aor. 3sg. akkospesi, JaV 107,3 (mandukena ... rjnam akkospesi); absol. akkospetv, Ps II 420,24; pp akkospita, mfn., Sv 276,29. akkosana, ., ~, / [S. lex., BHS kroSana], abusescolding; Abh759 (~am); JaV 107,28' (~am... ahosi); Vibh 353,6 (y paresam ~ vambhan); Vism 29,s foil. (~ ti dasahi akkosavatthhi ~am); Sv 75,23 (tayo sambhr akkositabbo paro kupitacittam - ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ~an ti); Cp-a 220,15 (parihsehi ~ehi ca); Sadd 814,8 (~am akkoso). akkha1, m.n. [S. aksa1], I. an axle, an axle-tree; Abh375; 893; VinI 231,37 (yugena yugam cakkena cakkam-na ~am pativattesi) ^ D i l 96,n; S IV 177,2 (~am abbhanjeyya); Ja 1192,24 (yugakotim ca ~ni pdam ca nissya); Mil 27,3 (~o ratho ti na hi bhante ti); 2. the collar-bone; ifc see adh' - (sv adho); 0> -aggakila, m., a linch-pin; Abh 374; '-hata, mfn. [akkha + hata1], fixed on an axle; Mill 173,26 (cakkaratanam... ~am manne titthati); A I 112,5 ([cakkam] -am manne atthsi; MpII 181,13: akkhe pavesetv thapitam iva); -cchinna, mfn., whose axle is broken; SI 57,22* (visamam maggam ruyha -o va jhyati) = Mil 66,30*; -bandhanayotta, n., an axlerope; Ja I 192,2; -bhagga, mfn. [akkha + bhagga1], with a broken axle; JaV 433,8 (~am ca ynam); see also akkhi2. akkha2, m. [S. aksa2], \.a die; dice; Abh 532; VinII 10,20 (~ena pi kilanti; Sp621,t2: ~en ti gulena); D i l 348,19 (dve akkhadhutt ~ehi dibbimsu); SI 149,24* (yo ~esu dhanaparjayo); JaV 155,23* (~assa phalakam); VI 318,30* (tarn yam ~ehi ajesi jte); 2. the name of a tree, Terminalia bellerica, beleric myrobalan (the seeds of which were used as dice); Abh 569; Samantak734 (kanhavantakkhacinc); 3. a certain weight; Abh 479 (~o msak panca); -kkhayikachtaka, m. or n., the famine when the seeds of beleric myrobalan were eaten; Mhv 32:29 (~e); -devi(n), m., a dice-player, a gambler; Abh 531; -dhutta, m., a gambler; one addicted to dicing; Abh 531; M III 170,7 (~o ... puttam pi jiyetha); Sn 106 (itthidhutto surdhutto ~o ca yo naro); Ja VI 274,10*; ifc see kt'- (sv kta2); -ml,/, a string of seeds, a rosary; Mhv 46:17 (ekvalim gahetvna -amak kira); 57:6; anakkha, m(fn)., (one) who is not a gambler; JaV 117,3r (anakkhkitave ti~e akitave ajtakare c' eva akeratike ca). akkha3, n. [S. aksa3], a sense-organ; Abh 149; 893 (~am indriye). akkha4, ifc for akkhi1 qv. akkhaka, m. [S. aksaka], the collar-bone; Abh 278; Sp 549,8 (adhakkhakan ti ~ato patthya adho); 902,10 (~nam upari); Sv604,io (dve ~); ifc see adh'(svadho), ubbhJ- (svubbham); 0 , -atthi,., the collar-bone; Vism 254,2 (dve ~ini) = Vibh-a237,3.

akkhana', see sv khana. akkhana2, n., lightning-, Jail 91,ir (~am vuccati vijju); Mp II 380,1; see also akkhana. akkhanavedhi(n), mfn. [BHS aksanavedhin; according to BHSD < S. khana, "target"], (probably) piercing the target; A I 284,15 (yodhjivo drepti ca hoti ~i ca; MpII 380,1: ~i ti avirdhitavedhi, akkhanam v vijju vijjantarikya vijjhitum samattho ti attho) * II 170,30; Ja III 322,22 (~im dhanuggaham pakkospetv); IV494,21* (isssino... drepti ~ino pi; 497,30': aviraddhavedhino vijju-lokena vijjhanasamatth v); VI 129,27 (~Inam dhanuggahnam pancasatni). akkhan,/, lightning; Abh48 (~ vijj); see also akkhana2. akkhata, mfn., neg. pp o/khanati' qv. akkhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup aksati, Wg 17:2: aks vyptau sahghte], pervades; counts, reckons; ? Sadd 329,25 (akkha vyattisankhtesu: ~ati akkhi akkham). akkhadassa, m. [cfS. aksadarSaka, aksadrsj, a judge; a magistrate; Abh341; Vin III 47,2 (~ mahmatt; Sp 309,9: ~ ti dhammavinicchanak te dhammasabhyam nisiditv apardhnurpam cornam hatthapdacchejjdim anussanti); Ap 304,28 (agamsim vinicchayam purato ~nam idam vacanam abravim); Mil 114,28 (senpati purohito ~o bhandgriko). akkhanti, see sv khanti1. akkhay a, see sv khaya2. akkhayita, mfn., neg. pp o/khinoti qv. akkhara1, m.n. and ~, / [S. aksara], 1. (.) the imperishable (= nibbna); Abh 7; 1063; Sadd 70,29* (anantam ~am dipo accantam); 2. (m.) a vowel; a letter, phoneme (a, etc); Abh 348 (vanno tu ~o); Sadd 604,24 (te akrappabhuti ekacattlisa sadd ~ nma bhavanti); 857,31 (~ato krapaccayo hoti akro kro icc evamdi); Nidd-a 1264,16 (nakkhattarj-r-iva traknan ti ettha rakrgamo viya avijjamnassa ~assa gamo); 3. (m.f and n.) a sound; a syllable; Vin IV 15,12 (~ya vceti akkhara-akkharya patti pcittiyassa); SI 38,21* (chando nidnam gthnam ~ tsam viyanjanam); Dhp 352 (~nam sanniptam jann pubbparni ca); Ap43,4 (ettha me vimati n'atthi ~e vyanjane pi v; c/Ap-a 283,9: vinayapitakapariypanne akrdike --e); Ps II 53,H (tathagato daharakle ~ni sampindetv padam vattum sakkoti); Pv-a280,io (sa iti na iti du iti so iti ca imni cattri ~ni); Sadd 357,28 (atth* - ekapadam); 907,7; ifc see acckkhara, adhik'-, ant'- (^vanta1), n'-; 4. (m.n.) a written character; Abh 1063 (~am lipimokkhesu); Ja II 90,15 (kande ~ni chinditv); IV 7,20 (suvannapatte likhitni ~ni disv); Mil79,28; Sp 867,3 (~ni likhantassa anguliyo dukkh bhavissanti); Ps V 42,1 (manpni vata -ni samasisni samapantini caturassni ti); Mpl 93,23 (nidhikumbhiy... psnapitthe ~esu upanibaddhesu yva - dharanti tva nidhikumbhi natth nma na hoti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce ~ni) = Sadd 927,19 (~ni); Thp 189,34; 5. (n.) an expression; a word; D III 86,26 (tad eva pornam aggannam ~am anusaranti); 93,14 (khattiyo tv eva dutiyam ~am upanibbattam); '-attha, m. [akkhara + attha2], the literal meaning; Ja II 108,1; Sadd 809,23; -cintaka, m, a grammarian

(prob, in the Sanskrit or Pninian tradition); Vism 310,2o; Sp209,27 (~ pan* ettha idam lakkhanam vadanti); Pj I 17,34 (dikammakattam - icchanti); Ud-a55,15 (evam tva ~, atthakathcariy pana...); Sadd 516,27 (~ pana kriy ice api padam icchanti); 680,13 (~ehi kato na adhun amheh' eva, quoting Kaccyana); 696,12 (evam ~nam matavasena attho veditabbo, gmik pana...); 779,20 (ekacce ~ vibbhantabuddhino); -cinti,/, grammar; grammatical theory; Ps II 34,17 (brhman tisu vedesu kusal honti, gahapatayo nnvohresu cJ eva ~ya ca); -iift, mfn., having knowledge of letters, able to read; Sv 715,7; -padaniyamita, mfn., metrically arranged; Sv684,n; Pj II 142,20; -ppabheda, m. (and n. ?), phonology and etymology; DI 88,6 (tinnam vednam... skkharappabhednam); Sv 247,25 (~o ti sikkh ca nirutti ca) = MpII261,21; Mil 178,i6(~am); -paveni,/, an orthographic system; Jinak93,6; -pin4a, m., an aggregate of letters or syllables; Dhp-a IV 70,23; -mandira, ., a library; Jinak 104,29; Mikhanasippa, n., the craft of writing; Ud-a 205,13; -lopa, m., elision of a syllable or letter; Sadd 632,23; 843,6; -vipallsa,m., the transposition or permutation of syllables; Sadd650,i; 670,28; 739,24; -sankanti, / , the carrying on of a syllable into the following pda; Sadd 630,27 (~-vasena); 631,31; -sannidhna, n., juxtaposition of syllables, of the same syllable; Sadd39,12 (vasena... santehi mahito hito); -samaya, m. [cf S. aksarasammnya ?], the traditional list of letters, the alphabet; Dhp-a I 180,9 (~am na jnti); Sadd 131,21 (kumrake ~am ugganhpent gar). akkhara2, see sv kharal. akkharik, / [from akkhara1], a letter-game; Vin III 180,28 (~ya pi kilanti; Sp 621,22: ~ ti vuccati kse v pitthiyam v akkharajnanakil); D17,1; Nidd I 379,13. akkhavta, m. [S. lex. aksavta, aksapta], an arena or enclosure for gaming or for wrestling; Ja IV 81,23 (yuddhamandalam sajjpetv ~am kretv). akkh, aor. 3 sg., 2 sg., o/akkhti qv. akkh ti in Ee at Pet 87,22 and 168,12: read akkhti with Be and Vin II202,5. akkhta(r), m. [S. khytr], one who tells; one who names; a preacher, a teacher; D I 4, is (ito sutv na amutra ~ imesam bhedya); M III 8,13 (bhagav ... anakkhtassa maggassa ~) = Kv229,i; SI 11,24* (akkheyyam ca parinnya ~ram na mannati; cf Spkl 45,iofoil: khinsavo bhikkhu ~ram puggalam na mannati, ~ran ti kammavasena krakam veditabbam, akkhtabbam kathetabbam puggalam na mannati) = It54,4* (It-all 32,33: krakdisabhvam kinci attnam na pacceti); Dhp 276 (tumhehi kiccam tappam -ro tathagata); Sadd 730,26 (~ari). akkhti and akkhyati \ pr. 3 sg. [S. khyti], declares, announces; tells, tells about; teaches; Vin II 202,5* (asandiddho ca ~ti); IV 12,6 foil. (chabbaggiy bhikkh... imassa sutv amussa akkhyanti imassa bhedya... akkhyatha...); SI 32,10* (tarn me ~hi pucchito); Sn 87 (~ti vibhajati idh' eva dhammam); 505

(~hi me bhagav yaMasampadam); Vv 1:7 (-mi te bhikkhu); Ja IV 226,9* (~eyya tippni parassa dhiro; 226,2r: cikkheyya); 384,12* (-tha me mnav etam attham); VI 318,20* (~hi no, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee akkhehi no,prob. wr; 318,24.* cikkha amhkam); 518,3* (taggha te mayam -ma); Niddl 260,7 (ito sutv amutra akkhyanti imesam bhedya); Mil 269,29 (sakk nibbnassa sacchikiriyya maggo ~tum); akkhti in Ee, Seat SI 38,7* and 38,io* is wrfor akkhto (Be, Ce so); fut. 3 sg. akkhissati, Pv 36:64; 1 sg. akkhissam, Sn 997 (etha mnava -issam, sunotha vacanam mama); JaV 41,4* (etesam aham -issam ydiso mama dohalo); 3pl. akkhyissanti, VinlV 12,12 (katham hi nma... akkhyissanti); akkhyanta, mfn., Ja III 106,6' (akkhyantassa pubbakhyino); aor. 3 sg. (a) akkh, Ja II 152,12*; VI 181,24* (supanno Kosiyass' ~; 182,3': supanno cikkhi); (b) akkhsi, AIV 106,5* (iti buddho ... dhammam -si); Sn 1131; Ap499,n (anakkhtam ca -si); 2 sg. (a) akkh, Ja VI 359,20* (359,28': tvam -si vadesi); (b) akkhsi, Ja V 307,16*; 1 sg. (a) akkhim, Ja V 77,22* (tassham -im vivarim guyharn attham; 78,26': -in ti kathesim); (b)akkhsim, Ap 612,9; 3 pl. akkhamsu, Ja III 481,8* (akkhamsu mt pita ca bhtaro, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se akkhimsu); absol. akkhya, Sn 829 (~ya vdam parisya majjhe; Niddl 169,22: vdam -ya cikkhitv); pass, pr 3 sg. akkhyati2, is declared; is called, is stated to be; is named; esp. aggam ~ati, is called the most excellent; D I 116,18 (Gotamo... puthutitthakrnam aggam -ati); MI 24,29 (ayam imesam dvinnam puggalnam... hinapuriso -ati); SI 86,33 (hatthipadam tesam aggam -ati yad idam mahattena); A V 21,15 (yvat... satt... tathagato tesam aggam ~ati araharn sammsambuddho); Vibh 379,26 (etam olrikam -ati); Mil 118,23 (sabbe atikkamma cakkavattimani aggam -ati); pp akkhta, mfn. [S. khyta], told, declared, taught; called, named; Vin III 20,6 (bhagavat anekapariyyena kmnam pahnam -am); MII 11,3 (~ may svaknampatipad); SI 38,io* (rgo uppatho ~o, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr akkhti); Dhp 275; Sn 276 (-am pi na jnti dhammam); Ja IV 222,26* (panko eso va -o brahmacariyassa); Mil 333,28 (phalni... bhagavat -ni); Sv 17,19* (vinayo ti -o); SpkII 387,19 (~-tt); pada, n., (gr.t.t.) a (finite) verb; Ps I 3,4 (harati ti padan ti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se khytapadan ti)= Ud-a6,7 (Ce, Ee akkhyta-; Be, Se khyta-); anakkhta, mfn. and ., l.(mfn.) not declared, not told; not described; MI 331,8 (anakkhtam kusalam); III 8,13 (anakkhtassa maggassa akkht); Pv 31:12; Ap499,n; Mil 24,2 (anakkhtam yevham Ngasenam jnissmi ti); 2. (n.) the indescribable; Dhp 218 (chandajto anakkhte; Dhp-a III289, xifoll.: anakkhte ti nibbne ... avattabbatya ~am nma); durakkhta, mfn., badly preached, incorrect; MI 67,i (durakkhte dhammavinaye duppavedite); AI 34,4 (durakkhtatt); Mp IV 41,3 (ekapadam pi durakkhtam aniyynikam apassanto); svkkhta, svkhta, svkhyta mfn., wellpreached; Vin III 19,15 (evam svkkhte dhammavinaye pabbajitv); MI 141,20 (svkkhto ... may dhammo); S IV 300,30 (dhammassa svkkhtat, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee

svkhytat); AI 34,7 (svkkhtatt); Sn 567 (svkkhtam brahmacariyam); Mil 415,8 (svkkhto dhammo supatipanno sangho ti); Vism213,i6/o//.; Sadd 326,24 (keci pana svkhto ti ca svkkhto ti ca svkhyto ti ca padam icchanti, tattha pacchimni sakkatabhsto nayam gahetv vuttni, itaram yaththitarpanipphattivasena); fpp (a) akkheyya, mfn. and n., to be named; to be told, to be expressed; what can be expressed or described, a nameable object; SI \\,22* foil. (~-sannino satt ~asmim patitthit... ~am ca parinnaya akkhtram na mannati; Spkl 44,ifoll.: ettha devo manusso gahattho pabbajito ... Tisso Phusso ti din nayena ~ato sabbesam akkhnnam... vatthubhtato paiicakkhandh ~ ti vuccanti) = It53,24*foil. (It-all 31,29: akkhyati kathiyati pannpiyati ti~am kathvatthu); Sn 808 (nmam evvasissati ~am petassa jantuno); (b) akkhtabba, mfn., to be named; to be told; Spkl 45,12; Mp IV 198,5; see also khyti. akkhna, n. [S. khyna], telling, announcing, teaching; a tale, a recitation, a legend; D I 6,12 (pekkham ~am panissaram) = Niddl 366,23 (Nidd-al 391,3i: -an ti bhratarmyandikam); D III 183,13; M III 167,19 (na sukaram~ena ppunitum yva dukkh niray); ifc see itthambht' - (^v ittham), utukkhna (sv utu); anakkhna, n., not telling; no need for telling; MI 503,5 (Gotamo -am yeva aksi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anakkhtam yeva akkhsi); see also khyna. akkhyati l see sv akkhti. akkhyati2, 3 sg. of akkhti qv. akkhyi(n), mfn. [S. khyyin], telling; announcing; Ja III 105,20* (pubb* ev' ~ino raja ekadatthu na saddahe; 106,5'foil.: pubbam eva rjakulam parva akkhyantassa pubbakkhyino...); Niddll 270,2; ifc see atth'(sv attha2), kirn- (^v ka3). akkhyika, mfn. \from akkhyi(n)], telling; describing; Ja III 535,12' (piyakkhnam ~ mayham tutthidnam dehi, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se piyakkhnam gatass). akkhyika,/ [S. khyyik], a story, a tale; ifc see l o k \ samudd' -; see also khyyik. akkhi1, n. [S. aksi] (pl. nom. ace. akkhi [cf S. dual aksi ?] a^akkhini; //c-akkha), the eye; Abh 149; 1109; Vin I 77,25 (sace kho Upli rpam sikkhissati ~ini dukkh bhavissanti); III 53,12 (nimittam karoti -im v nikhanissmi bhamukam v ukkhipissmi); MI 383,27 (puriso akkhikahrako gantv ubbhatehi ~Ihi gaccheyya); Sn 197 (-imh); 608 (na kannehi na -ihi, Ce, Ee, Se so; ite~ibhi; = Mil 196: Ceso; Be-ii;Se~ibhi; Ee omits); Pv 21:27 (-Tni ca paggharanti); Ja I 483,29* (-1 bhinn pato nattho); II 357,6* (rakkhe ~i va pandito, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -im; cf however K.R. Norman, 1987, pp. 33-4, for akkhi <*aksin); V 286,11 (atha nam -ini pretv olokeyysi); VI 294,10* (khippam kujjhanti rjno sken' -i va ghattitam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -im); Ap 374,10 (-i me na nimilati); Vism 185,15 (-inam pi nimmilitabhvo); Sp 1030,2i (yo dvflii v ekena v -in na passati); Ps II 177,28 (pannmaye-imhi appam parittam rgadosamoharajam); Dhp-a 19,20 (-1 me vuso vt vijjhanti ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; 2te~Ini); Cp-a 173,23 (yakkhnam -inirattnihonti animisni ca); Mhv 36:82 (karoti rattan* ~ini); ifc see

kakkat'- (svkakkata2), kakkatak'-, kalra- (,sv kalra2), timiratamb'-, nippakhum'- (sv pakhuma), pupphit'-; -kta, n. [akkhi + kta1], 1. the corner of the eye\ Ja VI 540,2' (ubhapassesu setehi ~ehi samanngat); Niddl 355,5 (~ni bhagavato lohitakni); As 306,25; 2. the eyeball, ? Sv 772,9 (udaramamsa-otthamamsaakkhiktdini luncitv luficitv khdiyamnam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -akkhikdini) = Ps I 273,22 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se udaramamsam otthamamsam ~' -dini) * Mp III 359,12 (eds -akkhikamamsdmi); ~e in Ee at As 307,4 is wr for akkhikpe (Be, Ce, Se so); -kpa, m., the eyesocket; MI 80,20; JaIV 407,8 (akkhi ~ato mucci); -kpaka, m., the eye-socket; Vism361,2i (assu... ~e pretv titthati v paggharati v); As 306,23; Spk II 354,23; -koti,/, the corner of the eye; Ja HI 410,19 (~iy oloketv); Dhp-a II 240,23; -ga, n. [akkhi + ga2], an eyelash; Abh259 (pakkhumam ~am); -ganda, m., the whole eye;l the eyeball; Sv451,i5 (annesam hi ~ aparipunn honti... viniggatehi pi gambhirehi pi akkhihi samanngat honti, Ce, Ee so; Be -bhand; Se -gend) = Ps III 384,19 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -bhand); ifc see visla-; see also parininnakkhigandaka; -gtha, m., an excretion from the eye; Pv-al98,i6 (akkhimalan ti ~am); -gthaka, m., an excretion from the eye; Sn 197 (savati... akkhimh ~o); Thi-a240,2o; -cakkala, n., the circle of the eye, the eye; Sp 1028,26 (ekena uddham ekena adho ti evam visamajtehi ~ehi samanngato); -trak,/, the pupil of the eye; the eye; M I 80,20 (me akkhikpesu ~ gambhiragat ... dissanti); Sp 1213,12 (yath ca antepurikdayo mattam dassetv...); MpII 73,8 (nflaparikammam karonto kese v... ~ya v karoti); [c/Sp-t (5*0111 264,22: ~ ti akkhibhandak; Se akkhigandak]; -dala, n., the eyelid; Sv 194,i6(hetthimam ~am adho sidati, uparimam uddham lahgheti); Thi-a240,i9; (--maijhe); -nikhanana, n. [cfS. aksiniknam], closing the eyes; blinking, winking; Kkh 28,16 (~'-di nimittakaranam); -nimesana, n., blinking of the eyes; Sv482,i9 (~-mattena nnattam pannyati, Ce, Ee so; Be akkhinimisa-; Se akkhinimmissa-) = Ps I 226,11 (Ce, Ee so; Be akkhinimisa-; Se akkhinimmila-); -pa{ala, -pattaka,., eyemembrane; As 307,16 (satta ~ni); Spk II 354,23 (akkhikpake ~ehi parivrito mamsapindo) = Bv-a33,3i (eds akkhipattakehi); -paka, m., inflammation of the eyes; Sp 1029,8; -pra, mfn.9 filling the eyes; Ja VI 191,26 (so ~am assum niggahetv); -loma, n., an eye-lash; Niddl 355,1; As 306,25 (~ehi paricchinno); see also anjanakkhika, anjitakkha, atiyakkha, anakkhika, alrakkha, ubhayakkhikna (^vubhaya), ekakkhi(n), ekakkhikna (^veka), gavakkha, gavakkhita, tambakkhika, paccakkha, parokkha, mandakkha, rattakkha (.yvratta1), lohitakkha. akkhi2, m. [cf akkha1], an axle; Mhv 38:94 (datvna ratham jinnena -m -akkhin). akkhi(n), m. [from akkha2], a gambler; Jail 357,6* (pubbe v' ajjhbhavam tassa rakkhe ~i va pandito; see K.R. Norman, 1987, pp. 33-4). akkhim, aor. I sg. o/akkhti qv.

akkhika1, m. [from akkha2], a dice-player, a gambler; Sadd 787,9 (akkhena dibbati ti ~o). akkhika2, n. (?) [akkhi1 + ka2], the eye; ifc see addh'-; (.yvaddha1); -mamsa, ., the fleshy part of the eye; MpIII 359,12 (uckramamsa-otthamamsa-akkhikamamsdini luncitv luncitv khdiyamnam; ^ Ps I 273,22: eds -akkhikutdini); -hraka, m., one who removes eyes (?possibly akkhika3 qv); MI 383,26 (seyyath ... puriso ~o gantv ubbhatehi akkhihi gaccheyya). akkhika3, m. [from akkha2?], a seed of Terminalia bellerica, beleric myrobalan (used as dice); -haraka, m., one who collects seeds (or to akkhika2 qv); MI 383,26 (seyyath... puriso ~o gantv ubbhatehi akkhihi gaccheyya). akkhika4, ., the mesh, the hole (of a net); ifc see jar-. akkhitta1, mfn. [pp of*2 + khipati1; S. ksipta], caught; drawn away, tossed away; Ja III 255,22* (santi anfie pi sakun... ~ vtavegena, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ukkhitt; 256,3' foil.: vtavegena kaddhit). akkhitta2, mfn., neg. pp o/khipati1 qv. akkhipi in Ee at Spk I 293,33 is prob, wrfor okkhipi (Be, Ce, Se so). akkhula, m. (?), one who destroys (in an exclamation designed to terrify); Ud-a68,8 (apare pana ~o bhakkhulo ti plim vatv akkhetum khepetum vinsetum ulati pavattau" ti ~o, ad Ud 5,4, eds akkulo pakkulo ti); see also akkulo. akkhetum, ind. [inf. of*2 + khinoti], to destroy, put an end to; Ud-a68,8 (~etum khepetum vinsetum ulati pavattau" ti akkhulo). akkhepa, m. [S. ksepa], 1. pronouncing; reviling; objection; ? Sadd 559,18 (sara -e: sareti sarayati); 2. convulsion; ? Sadd 334,28 (raghi laghi gatyakkhepe, gatyakkhepo gatiy ~o; cf however S. Dhtup Wg 4;35-7: aghi vaghi maghi gatyksepe, dvandva?); ifc see gaty-. akkheyya, mfn.,fpp q/*akkhti qv. akkhobbha, mfn., neg. fpp of khobheti, caus. of khubbhati qv. akkhobhani, (m)f(n). [from khobheti, caus. of khubbhati qv; cf S. ksobhana], unshaking; imperturbable; JaV 322,2i* (kass* es mahati sen... -1 apariyant sgarasseva miyo; 323,4': ~I ti khobhetum na sakk); see also akkhohini. akkhobhani,/ [cfBHS aksobhini], a very high number (1012 or 1013); Sadd 802,5 foil, (nahutam ninnahutam ~i, Ee so; vi akkhohini); see also akkhohini. akkhosanam in Ee at Ap-a 120,7 is wr for akkosanam (Be, Ce, Se so). akkhohini, / , 1. [S. aksauhini], a complete army; Abh 384; Ja VI 434,23 (atthrasahi ~ihi saddhim sabbe yuddhasajj hutv nikkhamantu, Ce, Ee so; Se atthrasaakkhobhinihi; Be atthrasa-akkhobhanisankhya senya); 439,i (atthrasahi ~Ihi, Ce, Ee so; Se akkhobhinihi; Be atirasa-akkhobhanisankhya senya); 2. [BUS aksobhini], a very high number; Abh 475 (nahutam tath ninnahutam pi ca ~i); ifc see catuvisati- (.sv catufr]); -ghta,m., the slaughter of a complete army (or of

millions); Mhv 25:103 (katam -am saranto; cf 25:108: -mahsenghto) ^ Thp215,i4 (-senghtam); s e e also akkhobham. akhanima, mfn. [a3 + khana + ima2 ?], not dug, not dug up; JaV 169, r (anvakul ti na avakul - ukklaviklabhvarahit v samasanthit). akhnisum, aor. 3 pl. o/khanati 2 qv. akhnayi, caus. aor. 3 sg. o/khanati 2 qv. akhilaka, mfn. [a3 + khila1 + ka2, or a3 + khilaka], free from spikes or prickles; JaV 203,3* (-ni ca avantakni ... kimrukkhaphalni tni, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se akhilakni; 206,5.* -ni ti akcni nikkantakni, Ee so; Be atacni nippannni; Ce avkni nibbasanni; Se apkni nibbanni). akhytavasena in Ee at Kkh 20,26 is wr (or alternative form) for khyta- qv. aga, m. [ts], a tree; Abh 539; 1117; Sadd330,3i* (imni pana rukkhassa nmni... ~o nago ...). agacchati in Ee at Ap 160,9, and agacchanti in Ee at Ap 19,14 and Sv 865,26 are wrr for agacchati and agacchanti (Be, Ce, Se so). agacchamnaka, mfn. [neg. o/gacchati + ka2], who do not go, who do not (want to) go; Dhp-a I 397,9 (aham hi tya saddhim ~e givya gahetv no pahinmi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce agacchamne). agattitni in Ee at It-al 133,24 is wr for aghattitni (Be, Ce, Se so). aganhaka-itthi in Ee at Sp 468,25 is prob, wr for aganhanaka- (Be, Ce, Se so). agati1, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup agati, Wg 19:31], moves tortuously; Sadd 468,8 (aga kutilyam gatiyarn: ... ~ati); see also aggati. agati 2 ,/, see sv gati. agatika, mfn. [ts], without resource; helpless; Cp 3:9:6 (so 'ham~otattha;Cp-a 234, n foil.: so aham evambhto pdapakkhavekallena gamanavirahito mtpitunnam apagamanena v appatisarano). agada, m.n. [ts], a medicine, esp. an antidote; Abh 330 (bhesajjam ~o); Ap41,2 (yath visdo puriso visena paripilito -am so gaveseyya); Mil 152,25 (visam halhalam pi khyitam -am sampajjati); 302,14 (visam sito ... -am alabhamno ... akle marati); Sv 67,22 (tatho aviparito desanavilsamayo c' eva punnussayo ca -o ass ti dakrassa takram katv tathagato ti veditabbo); Ih-a II 131,27 (amatarn vuccati -am, tena majjanti" ti amatamad sapp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee vuccati agatam); ifc see dhamm*-; '-angara, m.n., a medicinal ash or powder; Mil 216,16 (-am vanamukhe odaheyya; Ps IV 2,i6: jhmaharitakassa v malakassa v cunnam); '-malaka, n., the health-giving or medicinal fruit of the malaka tree; Sp42,i3 (devat -am agadaharitakam ... haranti); Mhv 5:26; -haritaka, -haritaka, n., the health-giving or medicinal fruit of the haritaka tree; Ja I 80,12; Sp 42,13; Mhv 5:26. agandhaka, m/(-ik). [a3 + gandha1 + ka2], with no scent; Dhp 51 (yath pi ruciram puppham vannavantam ~am) = Th323; Ja III 253,12* (mala sereyyakasseva vannavant agandhik); 253,22' (anfiam pi puppham vannasampannam -am); see also sagandhaka.

agandhika, m. (?), the name of a plant; ? Sp 836,10 ( -puppham karirapuppham jivantipuppham). agaru1, n. [S. agaru, aguru], the fragrant resin or wood of Aquilaria agallocha; aloes; Abh 302 (~u cgaju); Ja VI 510,14* (vilimpitv -candanena ca); Mil 382,4 (kapprgamtagaracandanakunkumdini); Vism 241,15; Vibh-a 223, is; ifc see kl-; see also akalu, agalu. agaru2, mfn., see sv garu. agarpamo inEeatAp 319,32 is wr for agadpamo (Be, Ce, Se so). agalu, agalu, n. [S. agaru, aguru], the fragrant resin or wood of Aquilaria agallocha; aloes; Abh 302 (agaru cgalu); Ja IV 440,23* (~um candanam ca, Be, Ce so; Ee akalum; Se aggalum); Ap 348,28 (khippam pabbatam ruyha -urn aggahim aham, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce agarum); 349,1 (-urn anulimp' aham, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce agarum); see also akalu, agaru'. agmaka, mfn. [a3 + gma1 + ka2], where there are no villages; without habitation, uninhabited; VinlV 230, is (~e aranne; Sp 912,32: gmbhvena -an ti vuttam); Ja I 36,13 (-e aranne); Vism 269,26; Sp 1052,7 (~e ce ti gmanigamanagarasimhi aparicchinne atavippadese); PsI 233,7(pabbajitv-e aranne viharati); II 391,15 (idarn pana -am mah -arannam). agra (and sometimes gra; ifc also -gra), n. (and m.) [ts], a house; the household life; Abh 205 (-am); Vin I 181,23/0//. (na-y-idam sukaram -am ajjhvasat ekantaparipunnam ... brahmacariyam caritum, yannnharn kesamassum ohretv ksyni vatthni acchdetv -asm anagriyam pabbajeyyan ti); D I 88,32/0//. (sace -am ajjhvasati rj hoti cakkavatti... sace ... -asm anagriyam pabbajati araharn hoti sammsambuddho); MI 91,24 (tvarn -am ajjhvasasi kme paribhunjasi); 279,12 (dve - sadvr); 519,16 (sunnarn pi -am pavisati); SIV 249,9 (asapatti -am ajjhvaseyyan ti); A I 49,15 (gihinam -am ajjhvasatam); 156,18* (dittasmim -asmim); Dhp 13 (yath -am ducchannam vutthi samativijjhati); 140 (-ni aggi dahati); Sn 805 (vinbhvasantam ev* idam iti disv ngram vase); Pv 47:4 (sunis homi -assa ca issara); Thi 376 (sukhit ehi -am vasa); Jal 51,2 (sace - nikkhamma pabbajissati buddho bhavissati); IV 154,25* (krayant nagarni - ca disampati); Patis I 176,23 (-an ti vihro addhayogo ..., Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gran ti); Ap61,i9 (nikkhamitv -amh pabbajissati); 546,1 ( ^ va tad mayam ... vicarimh ... komribrahmacariyarn); Pet 220,4 (evam nicesu pi -esu jto hoti, so read with Nnamoli, 1964, p. 297 ? eds niccesu); Mil 88,15; Vism 593,22; Sv42,3 (ranno Idlanattham patibhnacittavicitram -am akamsu); Spkl 52,25 (-an timtugmena saddhim geham); Th-al 126,12 (-asm ti gehato gharvsato v); Q)-a210,4 (tayo pi bhav dittam -am viya... upatthahimsu); Sadd921,i (mattbhedo tva -am gram); agr in Ee at Sp 852,27 is wr for angr (Be, Ce, Se so); ifc see agygra, ajjhgre, vasath-, itth'-- (jvitthi), uposath-, kr- (^vkr), kt- (^vkta1), kotth(^vkottha2), citta- (yvcitta2), tina-, dhanii- (^vdhanna1), nl-, pariy--, pn-, bandhan-, bhanda-, bhus-, yann-, rj-, vsa-, vhan-, santh-, sunn-;

-muni, m., a sage who lives a household life; Nidd I 58,n (ye te agrik ditthapad viniitassan, ime ~ino, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gramunayo); -vsa, m., household life; Th 1107 (~ena alam nu te idam); anagra, angra, mfn., m. and n., 1. (mfn. and m.) without a house, homeless; (one) who has left a household life; a homeless ascetic; D III 160,12* (yadi tarn upeti, so read with K.R. Norman, 1984, p. 180; Be angriyatam; Ce angriyatam; Ee, Se angriyatam); MII 62,28 (~ mayam gahapati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee angra); Dhp404 (asamsattham gahatthehi angrehi cbhayam); Sn639 (yo 'dha kme pahatvna angro paribbaje); Pv 14:5 (alen ~ ca); JaV 252,19* (adhanassa angrassa bhikkhuno; 253,8': gharavsam pahya angriyabhvam pattassa); Ps I 111,is (bhikkhu pi n' atth' assa agran ti ~o); It-all 163,6 (~ ti pariccatta-agr pabbajit, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee angra ti); 2 . (n.) the homeless state; the ascetic life; Sn 376 (yo v agr -am eti; Pj II 368,7: ~am eti pabbajati); muni, m., a homeless sage; Nidd I 58,13 (ye te pabbajit ditthapad viniitassan ime ~-munino, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ime angramunayo); sgra, m(fn). and n., 1. (mfn.) (one) who lives in a house; It 111,19* (~ anagra ca, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se angra; It-all 163,5: -tigahatth); It-all 163,sfoll. (~ hi angrnam dhammadnasannissit angra ca ~nam paccayadnasannissit); 2. (n.) sharing a house, sleeping under the same roof; Vin II 279,15 (anujnmi bhikkhave thapetv ~am yath anne purise patipajjanti evamtasmim drake patipajjitun ti; Sp 1295,2i: sahgraseyyamattam thapetv); see also agga2, ekgrika (sveka), kotthgrika (.svkottha2), dvgrika, bandhangrika, bhandgrika, sattgrika. agraka (ifc also -graka), n. [agra + ka2], a small house, a cottage; a hut; MI 450,35 (ekam ~am oluggaviluggam); Jail 69,i5* (dseyya no ~am); VI 81,26*; ifc see pamsv--. agri(n), mfin). [S. agrin], one who has or lives in a house; a householder; a housewife; a lay person; Vin IV 343,10 (gihini nma ~inl vuccati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se grini); Sn 376 (yo v agr anagram eti ~ino v pan' upsakse); Th 1009 (~isu pabbajitesu cpi; Ih-alll 104,2i: ~is ti gahatthesu); Vv 52:9 (~ini sabbakulassa issar; Vv-a225,26: ~ini ti gehassmini); Ja III 234,3* (~ino annadapnavatthad); anagri(n), mfln)., not living in a house; a homeless ascetic; Ap 424,31 (agr abhinikkhamma ~i bhavissati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee angri). agrika, agriya, grika, griya, mfn., m., n. and ~&,f [from agra; cf BHS grika], 1. (mfn. and m.f) belonging to a house; living in a house; a householder; a housewife; a lay person; Abh446 (gahatthgrik gihi); Vin I 272,6 (mayam kho cariya ~ nma, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se grika); IV 285,26 (y pana bhikkhuni ~assa v paribbjakassa v ... samanacivaram dadeyya; 285,30: ~o nma yo koci agram ajjhvasati); Nidd I 380,5 (atthi agriyassa vibhs, atthi pabbajitassa vibhs, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se agriyassa); Ap67,i8 (~o bhavitvna, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se griko); Mil 350,25 (gihi ~a kmabhogino); As 373,13 (grikena pi angrikena pi dipetabbam, agriyo hi ekacco ..., Ee so; Be, Se griko

piekacco; Ge~enpi anagrikenpi... agriyo); Sp 473,3 (agriynam, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se grikanam); Ps II 392,29 (tumhe agriy nma mahjat); 2. (mfn. and n.) belonging to the household life; what is part of the household life; the occupations of a householder; Sp 203,27 (agrassa hitam kasivanijjdikammam agriyan ti vuccati tarn ca pabbajjya n' atthi) = Spkll 180,11 = Ud-a309,7; agrikabhta, agriyabhta, mfn., (while) being a householder, leading a householder's life; Vin I 17,8 (kme paribhunjitum seyyathpi pubbe ~o) * D i l i 235,11 (Ce, Ee agriya-; Be, Se grika-); MI 504,18 (aham... pubbe agriyabhto samno pancahi kmagunehi samappito); A III 375,9 (kusalo tvam pubbe ~o Vinaya tantissare ti, Ce so; Be agriya-; Ee, Se grika-); Ud 57,22 (irigha tvam Sona tatth' eva ~o samno buddhnam ssanam anuyunja, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be grika-); agriyamuni, m., a lay sage; Ja I 109,27' (~I ti gihi gataphalo vinntassano, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se griya-) ^ It-al 150,14 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee griya-); anagr ika, anagriya1, angrika, angriya, mfn. and m., not belonging to a house or the household life; (one) who does not live a household life; a homeless ascetic; Ja IV 340,9* (ye keci atthi saman... ksvavatth anagriya ti); Ps I 167,35 foil. (agriyo hi... anagriyo pi..., Be, Ce so; Se griko ... angriyo; Ee wr griko ... angariyo); Dhp-al 239,4 (agrikassa... ~assa, Be so; Ee angrikassa; Ce agriyassa ... ~assa; Se agrikassa ... angrikassa); Pj II 73,ii (te duvidh honti agriy anagriya ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee agriy anagriya ti); anagriyamuni, m., a homeless sage; Ja I 109,27' (~I titathrpo va pabbajito, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anagriya-) * It-al 150,15 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anagriya-); see also anagriya2, grika. aglha in Ee, Se at Pp 32,34 is wrfor glha qv. agiddhit, / , abstr. [a 3 + giddhi(n) + t], lack of greed; freedom from eager desire; Ja II 293,15* (tasm mattannut sdhu bhojanasmim ~, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce agiddhat; 294,s': ~ pi sdhu, pliyam pana agiddhim ti likhitam, tato ayam atthakathptho va sundarataro, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce agiddhat pi sdhu). agidha, mfn. [from a3 + *gidh?], without greed; Ap-a513,i3 (apihgidhan ti pindaptam paticca apiharn apagatapiham ~am nittanham); see also apihgidha sv pih. agilyati in Ee, Se at M I 354,25 is wrfor gilyati qv. agiha, mfn. [S. agrha], homeless, without a house; Sn 456 (sanghtivsi ~o carmi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se agaho; Pj II 403,1: ~o tiageho, nittanho ti adhippyo); 464 (ye kme hitv ~ caranti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se agah); 487 (Gotamam... ksyavsim ~am carantam, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se agaham). agga 1 , mfn. and n. [cf S., BHS agra, S. agrya], 1. (mfn.) the first, foremost; topmost; better; excellent, illustrious; the best, chief (very often iic); (n.) the best part; the ideal; a most excellent thing; the best of its class or type; Abh 696; 715 (~am pathamam); 843; Vin III 90,20 (ayam ~o mahcoro yo asantam abhtam uttarimanussadhammam ullapati); 133,23 (etam -am etam settham etam mokkham ...); D I 124,4 (sila-

pannnam ca pana lokasmim -am akkhyati); II 4,20 (Vipassissa ... svakayugam ahosi -am bhaddayugam); 15,io (dhammat es... sampatijto bodhisatto... sabhim ca vcam bhsati - 0 'harn asmi lokassa jettho 'harn asmi lokassa); SII 29,6 (na ... hinena ~assa patti hoti, ~ena ca ... -assa patti hoti); III 156,6 (ktgrassa y kci gopnasiyo... ktam tsam -am akkhyati); IV 315,4 (ekam khettam -am ekam khettam majjhimam ekam khettam hinam); A I 15,8 (appamattik es bhikkhave vuddhi yadidam nativuddhi, etad -am vuddhinam yadidam panrivuddhi); 11151,8* (-assa data labhatepun' -am); It87,19/0//. (yvat ... satt apad v dvipad v... tathagato tesam -am akkhyati; c/lt-all 105,17/0//.: makro padasandhikaro, -0 akkhyati ti padavibhgo); 88,2 (ye ... buddhe pasann ~e te pasann, ~e kho pana pasannnam ~o vipko hoti); Pv 38:47 (sadevakassa lokassa buddho - o pavuccati); Ja V 127,18 (esa kumro sakalajambudipe dhanuggahnam - 0 bhavissati); Ap 164,i (yath samuddo udadhmam ~o); Mil 182,27 (sabbadhannnam sali -am akkhyati); Mhv 3:33 (vinayannnam -ena); ifc see anik'-, ambil'-, yat'-, dhan'-, bal'-, bhav'-, madhur'-; 2. (n.m.) the top, point; tip; (often ifc); Abh 542; 843; D I 75,17 (tni [uppalni] yva c' ~ yva ca ml sitena vrinabhisannni); SHI 155,27(pabbajalyako pabbajam lyitv ~e gahetv); A l l 201,18 (mle chetv ~e chindeyya); Sn217 (yad -ato majjhato sesato v pindam labhetha); Ja V 31,24* (rukkhassa v te papatmi -); Pj II 16,12 (thale nikkhittapadumnam -ni miltni); ifc see ariguT - (sv anguli), adh' - (sv adho), ayogga' (sv aya[s]), r'- (svr1), uddh'- (.svuddham), up'-, ek'-, kar'(sv kara1), kalp' -, kuficif - (sv kuficati), kus' - (sv kusa'), kp'-, khur- (jvkhura 2 ), jivh'-, tikkh'-, tikhin'-, phussit1'-, mandal'-, vT- (-swla1), veT- (svvelu), vellit'-; 3. (n.) beginning; first portion; first fruits; Abh715 (-am... di); 843; Pj II 270,7 (nipphajjamnesu sassesu khettaggam rsaggam kotthaggam kumbhi-aggam bhojanaggan ti imni panca -ni deti); Dhp-alV 99,12; ifc see arun'-, kalp'-, kumbhi-, khal'- (svkhala1), khalabhand'-, khett'-, dyan'-, phal'-; cases used adverbially: instr. aggena, beginning from; according to; ifc see ovarak'-, pariven'-, psd'-, bhikkh'- (sv bhikkhu), yad-, vass' -, vihr'-, seyy' - (sv seyy); abl. aggato, before, in front; in the presence of; Abh 1148; 1194; ThI394 (myam viya -ato katam); Ap301,i5 (evam jino viyksi bhikkhusanghassa -ato); Spkl 261,34 (pure hoti ti -ato hoti); loc. agge, from, after, since; ifc see ajja-t-, ajja-d-, tad-, dahara-t-, yad-; agga iic: the top ..., the pre-eminent...; the top of..., the tip of...; the first...; '-agga, -m-agga, mfn. andn.m., 1. (mfn.) the very best, the most excellent; VinlV 232,30 (aggamaggni bhojanni denti); Ja III 473,22' (-am panitam deyyadhammam vicinitv, Eeso; Be, Ce, Se aggam); Sp 465,22; 2. (n.m.) the very tip, the very end; Dhp-all 120,10 (khurnam -an' eva temimsu, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se agg n' eva); III 428,8 (itarni ~esu parimiltni); '-ankura, m., the top shoot; Ja I 219,1 (nigrodhapotakassa -e khdmi); III 389,22'; '-ankuraka, w.,

the top shoot; Vin II 161,29 (-am me udaram chupati); ' -anguli, / , the finger-tip; Ja VI 404,22 (-isu ptesi); 0 , -sana, ., the first or chief seat; Vin II 161,17 (so arahati -am aggodakam aggapindam); MI 28,n (aho vata aham eva labheyyam bhattagge -am; Ps I 145,32: -an ti sanghatthersanam); Ja I 219,23; Dhp-alV 177,24 (jarjinnamahallakabrhmano ... brhmannam -e nisidi); '-sanika, 0,-saniya, m(fn). [BHS agrsanika], one who has the first or chief seat; Ps III 83,19 (majjharjassa nagare - brhman nma mayan ti rjagehe bhunjanti); 1h-al 78,12 (mahkosalaranno aggsaniyassa brhmanassa putto hutv nibbatti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee agghpaniyassa) * II 170,4 (eds -assa); 0, -upatthaka,m., ' -upatthik,/, the chief personal (male or female) attendant; Bv 2:214 (Tapassubhallik nmaahesum -); 3:32 (Nand c' eva Sirim ca ahesum aggupatthik, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -, prob, wr); 4:25; '-upatthka, m., the chief personal (male) attendant; Dil 6,16; Spkl 313,23; Thp 254,s; '-upatthyik,/, the chieffemale supporter; Dhp-al 417,2o; Ud-a 122,25; Thp254,s; -knk,/ [agga + krik2], (first or best action); a first taste, a sample; Vin III 80,30 (bhikkhnam -am adsi; Sp 465,20foil.: aggapindam sabrahmacrinam datv va bhunjati... -an ti aggakiriyam, pathamam laddhapindaptam aggaggam v panitapanitam pindaptan ti attho, y pana tassa dnasankht aggakiriy s na sakk datum; Sp-t[Be] II 273,2foil.: yasm kiriyam datum na sakk tasm dnasankhtya aggakiriyya yuttam pindaptam eva idha upacravuttiy aggakiriy ti gahetabbam); -kulika, mfin). [BHS agrakulika], (one) belonging to an esteemed or chief family; M II 55,25 (-assa putto, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be aggakulassa); Pv 30:6 (ayam kumro nagarass' imassa - o bhavissati; Pv-a 199,11: -o setthakuliko bhavissati ti attho); Thi-a246,n (- vibhavasampann pi patiparicrik cetik viya); -konatth in Ee at Sv 925,33 is wr for aggakond (Be, Ce, Se so) or for aggakonth; -gimha, m. [agga + gimha1], the beginning of summer, the first month of the hot season; Ja V 203, is* (vanam yath -e suphullam; 206,17': -e ti vasantasamaye); -ja, mfn. [agga + ja2], first-born, elder; first-appeared; Abh 254 (-0 pubbajo jettho); JaV 404,10' (- iva s pi navajjhmakkhette pathamajt viy ti, Ce so; Ee aggij iva; Be, Se aggijl iva); Ap 229,21 (-am puppham dya; cf Ap-a470,n: aggajanmakam puppham gahetv); -jivh,/, the tip of the tongue; Vism 263,34; Spklll 197,8; -ftfia, mfn. and n. [cf S. agrani, ace. agranyam], 1. (mfn.) chief, principal; primitive, original; Abh 695 (param -am uttaram); D III 86,25 (tad eva pornam -am akkharam; Sv 868,32: -am akkharan ti lokuppattivamsakatham; cf Mvul 340, n: paurnam aksaram agninyam); 225,1 (bhikkhu porne -e ariyavamse thito); AII 27,16 (ariyavams - rattann vamsann porn ...; Mp III 45,io: - ti agg ti jnitabb); IV 246,1 (pane' imni... dnni mahdnni -ni rattannni); 2. (n.) the beginning of things; origin; DIU 4,12 (na hi... bhagav -am pannpeti; Sv818,i2: -an ti lokapannattim, idam nma lokassa aggan ti evam jnitabbam pi


aggamariydam na tarn pannpeti ti vadati); 2S,sfoll.; -t,/, abstr., pre-eminence; chief position; Abhll68; DIU 155,H* (-am vajati kmabhoginam); Ap 319,15 (atulo -am gato); 512,17 (devesu -am patt); Kv 556,2 (huneyynam -am gato); -tta, n., abstr., pre-eminence; chief position; Ap 490,30 (manjussarnam bhikkhnam -am anuppunim); 537,22; Ps III 407,7; -danta, m., the tip of a tooth or tusk; Ja I 321,12 (tassa dve pi ~e chindi); 433,15 (-e vivaritv sitam akasi); Spk I 66,1 (-e dassento); aggadantam in Ee a t Th354 is wr for aggam dantam (Be, Ce so); -dna, n., \.a gift of the best; the best gift; VinUI 39,i8 (y methunam dhammam deti s -am deti); Ap 208,io (ngasettho may dinno ... -am may dinnam); 2. the gift of the first-fruits; Sv588,is; Dhp-al 98,8foil.; -dvra, m., the top of the door or gate; (or the first gate opened 1 a way to leave the town secretly); SI 226,18 (Vepacitti asurindo ... -ena assamam pavisitv ... Sakko devnam indo ... dvren' eva assamam pavisitv); Ja II 140,10 (-en' eva nikkhamitv); III 337,15 (~ena palyitv); -dhamma, m. and mfn., 1. (m.) the best doctrine; the best state or condition; Th94 (aggapattena -o sudesito); Thi 432 (ppuna bodhim ca -am ca); Ap 100,27 (buddho -assa kovido); Dhp-al 97,9 (-am pana arahattam... pativijjhitum); Nidd-al 297,10 (tt); 2. (mfn.) whose doctrine is best or first; Dip 4:17 (aggasantike gahetv - tathagata); -nakha, m., the tip of the nail; VinlV 221,11 (yva ~); DU 347,19 (yva ~ gthena makkhito); Ja IV 470,12 (-ehi vinam vdenti); Mp III 319,22 (~ato patthya); -nagara, n., a chief city; the chief city; Vin I 229,10 (idam -am bhavissati Ptaliputtam) = D II 87,34; Ja IV 245,23 (tava nagaram sakalajambudipe -am tvam aggarj); -nikkhitta, mfn., installed as the best (of a class); Ap 38,24 (vinaye ~o); Bv 1:59 (dhutagune ~o; Bv-a50,i: -0 ti aggo settho kotibhto ti thapito); Mil 343,24; -nikkhittaka, mfn., id.; Dip4:17 (- ther aggam akamsu sangaham); -pakatima(t), mfn., of the highest nature; JaV 351,25* (evam - evam uttamasattavo; 352,2': - ti aggasabhvo); -paftftatti,/ [BHS agraprajnapti], designation as best (of its class); All 17,12 (catasso im... -iyo); -(p)patta, mfn. [agga + patta3], having reached the highest (state); M I 386,25*; A I 241,29 (~o srappatto); Th94 (-ena aggadhammo sudesito; Th-al 206,10: -na ti aggam sabbannutam sabbehi v gunehi aggabhvam setthabhvam pattena); -pada, n. [BHS agrapada], the best word, the best teaching; the best state or place; S IV 379,20 (yad idam -asmim; Spk III 114,3: -asmin ti desanya, desana hi idha -an ti adhippet) * A V 321,6 (Mp V 79,13: -asmin ti nibbne); -padose, ind. [agga + padosa2], in the early evening; Ja VI 396,5 (-e yeva ukksatasahassena dhnyamnena gantv); -(p)pasda, m., the best trust; trust in the best; A l l 34,n (cattro 'me ... ~; Mp III 74,2: aggesu pasd agg v pasd ti ~); -pii?4a> ^., the first or best food; Vin II 161,7; MI 28,17 (labheyyam bhattagge aggsanam aggodakam ~am; Ps I 145,33: ~an ti sanghattherapindam, sabbattha v

agganti panitdhivacanam etam); Ja II 316,25* (tedandiko bhunjati -am); -pindaka, m., the first or best food; Ja VI 140,33' (~am labhant, Ce so; Be, Se aggapindam; Ee aggapindikam,/?ro&. wr); -pindika, m., one who receives the best food; Ja VI 140,4* (~ pi; 140,33': atha te aggodakam aggapindam labhant ~ pi honti, Be, Se so; Ce aggodakam aggapindakam; Ee aggodakam -am, prob, wr); -puggala, m., the best of men; Vin II 28,26* (sayambh ~o, in uddna); Sn 684 (so sabbasattuttamo -0); Vv 64:27; Ap65,i4 (sayambhum -am); Mil 111,9*; Ud-a 155,20* (tathagato hi vuccati -0); Vv-a86,6 (tt); -purisa, m., the best or the pre-eminent person; Vin IV 63,6 (ayy bhante ~); Sp 1098,11 (pabbajitnam pancannam satnam -o); Ja I 272,29 (jambudipe -o bhavissati); Mil 362,10 (thero Sriputto dasasahassimhi lokadhtuy ~o thapetv dasabalam lokcariyam); -bija, ., a plant propagated by cuttings; Vin IV 35,9 (~am nma ajjukam phamjjakam hiriveram ...); D I 5,31 (mlabijam khandhabijam phalubijam -am bijabijam eva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr aggabhijam); Sp 762,10; -m-agga, see sv aggagga above; -rasa, m.n., the first or best juice or drink; the best flavoured foods; Ja II 97,17* (na majjati" -am pivitv; 97,20': -an ti sabbapathamam gahitam muddikrasam pivitv); Sv853,2i (imni loke-ni); Mp III 314,10 (bhojanarasesu pyso sneharasesu gosappi kasvarasesu khuddamadhu anelakam madhurarasesu sakkar ti evam dayo - nma); ^parititta, mfn., completely satisfied with the best flavoured foods; A III 237,14 (puriso parititto na afinesam hinnam rasnam piheti); -va(t), mfn., of great eminence, excellent; A I 70,33 (-vati ca paris anaggavati ca paris; Mp II 144, is: -vau" ti uttamapuggalavati aggya v uttamya patipattiy samanngat); neg. anaggava(t), mfn., inferior; A I 70,33; -vara1, m. [agga + vara1], the best gift, the best wish; Cp -a 76,8 (varuttame ti varesu uttame -e); -vara2, mfn. [agga + vara2], the best; Dip 6:68 (gacchantu -am sanghadassanam); -vda, m., the original doctrine; the best doctrine; Dip 4:17 (sabbo pi so theravdo -0 ti vuccati); -vdi(n), m(fn)., (one) who proclaims the highest, the best; T h l l 4 2 (dydako hehisi -ino); -sassa, n., first-fruits; MpIII 250,5 (navasassni ti -ni); Mil 8,22 (-am abhinipphannam); -svaka, m., a chief disciple; Vin II 199,26 (bhagavato- Sriputtamoggalln); Ja III 191,4; Bv2:212; Vism234,3*; Dhp-al 340,is; -svik,/, a chief female disciple; Ja I 15,25; Bv 2:213; Dhp-a 1340, is (Khem Uppalavann ti dve-); -sufifia, n., the topmost void; PatisII 179,3 (katamam -am aggam etam padam ... yadidam ... virago nirodho nibbnam); anagga1, mfn., without a limit; without a point; Vin II 95,26 (tehi ce ... bhikkhhi tasmim adhikarane vinicchayamne -ni cJ eva bhassni jyanti na c' ekassa bhsitassa attho vinnyati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anantni; Sp 1197,19: anantni... jyanti ti aparimnni ito c' ito ca vacanam uppajjanti, eds so) * 305,5 (-ni, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anantni); ati-agga, mfn. and n., the very best, the most excellent; the very top; Mil 278,18 (buddho -tya


anupamo); Sv 549,1 (tesam ~e bhavissanti); see also akkhaggakila (yvakkha1), aggesara, anaggapakkhika, Isakaggapavellita (svisakam), uddhaggika (svuddham), etadagga, kanayaggasadisa, giraggasamajja (sv giri). agga 2 , n. [< *ag-ra, cf K.R. Norman, 1986, pp. 394-95], house, hall; ifc see uposath'-, khur'- (svkhura1), dn'-, dhammasavan'-, bhatt'-, vass'-, salk'-; see also agra, jantagga. aggati,/?r. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhtup agati, Wg 19:31], moves crookedly, Dhtum 29 (aggo tu gatikotille); Sadd 334,4 (agga kutilagatiyam: ~afi ti aggi, kutilam gacchati ti attho); see also agati'. aggamano in Ee at Ap331,8 is wr; Be, Ce, Se m' ekaggamano. aggamsi in Ee at Niddl 418,20 is wr for agamsi (Be, Ce, Se so). aggayha, ind. [absol. of * + ganhti; cf S.Vgrah], taking, accepting; Bv2:62 (ajaplarukkhamlasmim nisiditv tathagato tattha pysam aggayha Neranjaram upehiti, Ce, Eeso; Be, Se paggayha) = Ja I 16,4* (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se paggayha); see also aggahita2, aggahetv2. aggala, aggala, m.n. [S. argala; BHSargada], 1. a bolt or bar for fastening a door (or window); the doorpanel or door; Vin I 248,2 (lindam pavisitv ukksitv -am kotehi vivarissati te bhagav dvram) = D I 89,31 (Sv 252,24: -an ti kavtam); A IV 359,1 (-am kotesi); Ja V 293,20 (s dvram addhavivatam katv ekam hattham kavte laggetv ekena -am uppiletv); VI 276,3* (esik parikhyo ca palikham -ni ca... passa; 276,8". -ni ti nagaradvrakavtni); 444,10* (ummaggadvram vivarimsu yantayutte ca ~e; 444, ir: scighatikasampannni dvrakavtni); Th-aII 220,30 (-am vuccati avijj nibbnapurappavesanivranato); Ap-a 106,21 (sandhikavtehi ca -ehi ca cittit); ifc see citr'-, phassif-, phussit'-; 2. a patch; Vin I 290,2 (ayam ca me antaravsako chiddo, yannnham -am acchupeyyam, samantato dupattam bhavissati majjhe ekacciyan ti; Sp 1128,17: -am acchupeyyan ti chinnatthne pilotikakhandam thapeyyam); Ja VI 71,8 (tehi paribhuttam jinnapilotikam -am datv ranjitv sayam paribhunjati); Sp 647,2i (dubbalatthne pathamam -am datv); Ud-a292,2 (-nam anekavannabhvena); Vin-vn 569 (-am datv); nuppdana- in Ee at Ps IV 157, is is prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se aggalatthnuppdana-; -fthapana, n., the placing or fixing of a door-bolt or door-panel; Vin IV 47,23 (~aya; 47,31: ~y ti dvratthapanya; Sp 783,26: ~y ti sakavtakadvrabandhatthapanya, sakavtakassa dvrabandhassa niccalabhvatthy ti attho); Vin-vn 1105 (-ya tu bhikkhun limpitabbam); -tthambha, m., the post to which the bolt is fastened; Abh217 (kapisiso 'ggalatthambho); Sp 1207,2o; -tthambhaka, m., id; Pj I 54,9(dvinnam vtapnakavtaknam majjhe thito-o); -dna, n., the putting on of a patch; Ja I 8,31 (jinnassa hi tunnam v -am v ktabbam hoti); SpkII 170,8; -psaka, m., [aggala + psaka1; AMg aggalapsaga, BHS argalapga] the socket or post which receives or holds the bolt; Sp 1207,24 (kapisisakam nma dvrabham vijjhitv tatia pavesito -0 vuccati, scik ti tattha majjhe chiddam katv

pavesit); -phalaka, n., the panel of a door; Mill 95,23 (puriso lahukam suttagulam sabbasramaye -e pakkhipeyya; Ps IV 145,23: -an ti kavtam); -vatti,/, the post to which the bolt is fastened; Vin II 120,17 (anujnmibhikkhave kavtam ... -im ...; Sp 1207,2o: ~i nma dvrabhya samappamno yeva aggalatthambho vuccati, yattha tini cattri chiddni katv sciyo denn); -sci,/, a bolt-pin, a bolt, MI 126,3 (-im gahetv sise pahram adsi); Spk I 48,7 (~i viya vinivijjhitv gato); Ud-a298,7 (-im uparighatikam ca dahitv sutthutaram kavtam thaketv ti attho); niraggala, niraggala, m/n. and n., \.(mfn.) [S. nirargala], unbarred, unimpeded; free; MI 139,16fall, (ayam vuccati... bhikkhu ukkhittapaligho iti pi... -0 iti pi... bhikkhuno pancorambhgiyni samyojanni pahinni honti... evam ... bhikkhu -o hoti; Ps II 116,7: etni hi kavtam viya nagaradvram cittam pidahitv thitatt aggal ti vuccanti... tesam ... bhinnatt -o ti vutto) = AIII 84,14 fall. (Mp III 264,8: nlvaranakavtam ugghtetv thito); Th526 (-0 nibbanatho visallo; Th-aII 220,3i: aggalam vuccati avijj nibbnapurapavesanivranato tadabhvato -0); Kv 107,4; Thi-a268,35 (ukkhittapalighatya ... tya); Nidd-al 86,1 (tt); 2. (mfn. and n.) [BHS nirargada], unrestricted, unlimited (of a gift or sacrifice); the name of a brahmanical sacrifice; SI 76,21* (assamedham purisamedham sammpsam vjapeyyam -am mahyann mahrambh; Spk I 144,27 foil.: assamedhan ti disu pornarjakle kira sassamedham purisamedham sammpsam vcapeyyan ti catri sahgahavatthni ahesum yehi rjno lokam sanganhimsu ... evam ... sangahitam rattham iddham c'eva hoti... manuss mud ... aprutagharadvr viharanti, idam gharadvresu aggalnam abhvato -an ti vuccati... aparabhge pana ... brhman ... panca yafine akamsu ... n' atthi ettha aggalo ti - o . . . sabbamedhapariyyanmassa assamedhavikappass' ev' etam adhivacanam) ^ AIV 151,8* * Sn303; Vv 64:31 (imam -am yannam yajiitv tividham visuddham; Vv-a 285,12: anvatadvratya ca muttacgatya ca -am); Ja IV 302,10' (sammpsam v vjapeyyam v -am v yajanto suvannaypam usspeti). aggalu- in Ee at Vv-a 237,1 is wr for agalu-, or for agaru- (Be, Ce, Se, Vv 53:7 so). aggahi, aggahi, aor. 3 sg. o/ganhti qv. aggahita1, mfn. [pp of * + ganhti; BHS grhita; cfS. Vgrah], kept back; -tta, n., abstr., holding in, keeping back; Niddl 37,11 (macchariyam... katukaficakat -am cittassa; Nidd-a 1113,29 fall.: paresam upakrakarane dndin krena yath na sampasriyati ti evam varitv gahitabhvo cittassa) * Dhsll22 ^ Vibh 357,29; anaggahita, mfn., not kept back; A III 50,2i* (cattam ca muttam ca -am, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se anuggahitam); citta, mfn., with generous heart; A III 172,io (--citto, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se anuggahita-; Mp III 291,23: -citto ti aggahitacitto muttacgo hutv, eds so); see also aggayha, aggahetv1. aggahita2, mfn., neg.pp o/ganhti qv. aggahetv 1 , ind. [absol. of * + ganhti; cf S. Vgrah], seizing; D III 92,15 (tarn enam aggahesum -a" etad


avocum ..., Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se, D III 92,7 Ee gahetv); JaV 441,30 (pannni -, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se harpetv); see also aggayha, aggahita1. aggahetv2, neg. absol o/ganhti qv. aggahesi, aor. 3 sg., 2 sg. o/ganhti qv. aggi, m. [S. agni] (sg. nom. aggi, aggi; gen. aggino, aggissa; loc. aggimhi, aggismim; pi nom. aggi, aggayo; ace. aggi; cf Sadd 183,20foil.; iic, before a vowel, sometimes written agy-),; flames; conflagration; Abh 34; Vin I 149,6 (gmo -in daddho hoti); II 120,25 (jantghare -i mukham dahati); D II 333,5 (uddhanam ropetv-im denti); MI 86,10 (kinti... na -i daheyya na udakam vaheyya); 487,25 (yo te ayam purato ~i, nibbuto so -i, ito katamam disam gato); II130,5 (siy nu kho tesam -inam nndruto abhinibbattnam kiiici nnkaranam); SI 4\,22+foil (kirn su pannnam -ino ... dhmo pannanam -ino); AII 68,3 (y t honti pad -ito v udakato v...); III256,i2 (pane' ime... dinav -ismim); Dhp 140 (atha v' assa agrni ~i dahati pvako); Sn 62 (-1 va daddham anivattamno); Ja I 216,6 (im dve skh evam ghamsamn -im vissajjessanti); 216,28 (sakun ... -imhi patitv patitv vinsam ppunimsu); IV 221,20* (-1 pi te na hpito); Bv2:92 (niraye pi dasasahassi ~I nibbanti tvade); Kv 332,19 (passati -im jalantam); Mil 96,15 (kattham manthayitv -im nibbattetv); Bv-a294,3o(yath ~i nirpadno nibbyati); Sadd 334,4 (aggati ti -i, kutilam gacchati ti attho); ifc see avic'- (svavici2), ahpit'- (.svhpeti2), ind'-, udar'-, kapputthn'-, pataggi, parikkhep'-, susn'-; 2. cremation fire; a pyre (as ordeal or for suicide); Vin I 345,21 (mtpitunnam sariram citakam ropetv -im datv); Ja I 294,16 (-im pavisitv tumhe saddahpessmi ti); VI 304,6* (sabbe -im pavekkhma, n'atth' attho jivitena no); 495,28* (-im nijjlayitvna ekajlasamhitam tatthame maranam seyyo ...); 3. the ritual fire, the sacrificial fire; (one of) the three fires of brahmanical ritual; the god Aggi Bhagav; Abh 419 (ghapacchavaniyo dakkhinaggi tayo 'ggayo); Vin I 31,6 (tejatil -i paricaritukm na sakkonti katthni phletum); D II 244,4* (-i pajjalito si kusapattaparitthato); III 217,20 (tayo -1, huneyyaggi gahapataggi dakkhineyyaggi) * AIV 44,28foil; MI 344,4 (yam catutthasmim thane khiram hoti tena -im jhanti); AIV 42,8 (aham hi bhante ~im dhtukmo ypam usspetukmo); V 234,15 (te tarn rattim tikkhattum paccutthya panjalik -im namassanti); Dhp 107 (yo ca... ~im paricare vane); Sn/>. 21,7 (brhmanassa nivesane ~i pajjalito hoti huti paggahit); ThI87 (~im candam ca sriyam ca devat ca namassi 'harn); Ja 1285, ufoll (putta, mayam tava jtadivase -im gahetv thapayimha ... tarn ~im dya aranfiam pavisitv -im bhagavantam namassamno brahmalokaparyano hohi); 494,n (-im bhagavantam gomamsam khdpessmi); VI 202,21* (mahsanam devam anomavannam yo sappinsakkhi bhojetum -im); 206,7* (na tyate paricinno ca ~i dosantaram maccam anariyakammam); 207,18* (-issa brahm parieriko); Ap 3 3 9,11 (aham -im paricare tato me suddhi hehiti); Vism 219,34 (yo cyam brhmannam havaniyo nma -i yattha hutam mahapphalan ti); ifc see hut'-, (^v huta'), huneyy,-,

gahapat'-, jt'- (^vjti), dakkhin'-, dakkhineyy'-; 4. (metaphorically) mental fire, fever; DIU 217,19 (tayo -1, rgaggi dosaggi mohaggi) ^ A IV 43,29 foil * Vibh 368,19 * Nett 126,s; Ap29,i9 (dayhamno tih' -ihi bhavesu samsarim aham); 403,5 (nibbanti me tayo -1 labhmi vipulam sukham); ifc see dos'- (wdosa 2 ), moh'-, rag'-; -m-sina, mfn., sitting near a fire; MI 79,30* (naggo na c' ~o; Ps II 48,3o: -0 ti aggim pi na upagato)= Ja I 390,32* (391,5: na aggim gamma nisidin tidipeti); -kapalla, n. [aggi + kapalla1], afire-pan; Ja VI 8,is; Cp-a220,i6; -kunda, n. [aggi + kunda' ], a fire-pan; Vism-mht(ite) I 44,5 (kattham pakkhipati -e); -kkhandha, m., a mass of fire; a huge blazing fire, a bonfire; Vin I 26,6 (mahrjno ... atthamsu seyyath pi mahant -); SII 85,2 (cattrisya v katthavhnam mah ~o jaleyya); Th 1156 (m ppacitte sdi -am va pakkhim); Ja VI 330,9 (khajjopanakappamno aggi... cattro -e atikkamitv); Ap33,2o; Patisl 125,4 (uparimakyato -0 pavattati hetthimakyato udakadhr pavattati); Mil 132,32; -cunna, m.n., a spark; Ja III 510,ii (dve skh aMamannam ghattesum tato dhmo uppajji -ni patimsu); Spk II 101,30 (-0 nikkhamati ti, Be, Ce so; Ee -a; Se aggivanno); -ja, mfn., or -j,/ [aggi + ja 2 ], fire-born; or a kind of creeper; Ja V 404,3* (kl nidghe-r-iva --r-iva, Be, Se so; Ce aggajt' iva; Ee aggijf iva; 404,9'foil: kl nidghe-r-iv ti nidghasamaye klavalli viya, --r-iv ti aggijl iva, s pi nijjhmakhettesu taruna-utthitaklavalli viy ti attho, Be so; Se surattataruna-; Ce aggajt' iv ti aggaj iva s pi navajjhmakkhette pathamajt viyti; Ee aggijt' iv ti ~ iva s pi navajjhmakkhette pathamajt viy ti); -jaggaka, -jagganaka, mfh.9 who tends afire; SpkII 82,2 (--puriso viya ... blaputhujjano, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -jaggikapuriso); 82,32 (-jagganakapuriso viya, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -jaggikapuriso); -jalana, -jlana, n., lighting a fire; Spk II 167,14 (-jalandini karoti) = Pj I 242,18 (-jlandii); -jla, m., - , / , 1. a plant, Grislea tomentosa; Abh 589 (~ tu dhtaki); Ja V 404,10' (aggij-r-iv ti - iva, Be, Se so; Ce aggajt' iv ti aggaj iva; Ee aggijt' iv ti aggij iva); Bv-a 253,12 (mtukucchito suvannalatto ~o viya nikkhami[?]); 2. [aggi + jla2, jl2], aflame; Jal 31,15 (- viya lohitadhram uggiramnam tassa mukham); Vism 171,11 (-am olokentassa nimittam uppajjati); Dhp-all 28,12 (vedanhi -hi viya paridayhamnassa); III38,10 (uddhanato - utthahitv chadanam ganhi); Bv-a209,20 (-ena chrikbhto); -juhana, -jhana, ., offering in the fire; Ja II 43,14 (pornakapandit pi - e vaddhi atthi ti sannya); VI 522,26' (-ampitay akatam bhavissati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se aggijhanam); 526,2' (--katacchum, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se aggijhanaka-); Spkl 233,9 (-ena); -jhanaka, mfn.y connected with offering in the fire; Ja VI 526,2' (--katacchum, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce aggijuhanakatacchum); -ttfia, .(?), the place for the (ritual) fire; JaV 155,4* (-am parimajjantam Isisirigam upgami; 155, ir: -an ti aggislam); -tthna, n.y a place for the fire; a fireplace, hearth; Vin II 120,24 (anujnmi bhikkhave khuddake jantghare ekamantam -am ktum, mahallake majjhe ti); 154,3; -tpa, zw., the heat of or from a


fire; Ap 458,5 (unhe vttape tassa ~ena v puna); -dahanam in Ee at Ja VI 529,9' is prob, wr; Be, Ce aggijuhanakatacchum; Se aggijuhanam; -dna,n., lighting afire, setting fire (to); Jail 270,8'; Spklll 18,n (gmaghtakacornam grnam parivretv ~am viya);-niksi(n), m(fn)., what resembles fire, the sun; Ja III 320,26'; phlima, mfn., blossoming in the sun; Ja III 320, is* (padumam yath -niksiphlimam; 320,26': ~in suriyena phlitam vikasitam); -pajjota, w., light of or from a fire; A l l 140,s; -paricarana,n., attendance on the ritual fire; Dhp-al 199,16 (~-tthnam agamsi); Th-all 84,B; -paricaranaka, m(fh)., one who tends the ritual fire; Sp994,30 (aggik t i ~ ) * Sv 811,23; -paricariy, 0 -pricariy,/, attendance on, or care of, the ritual fire; D 1101,31 (~am, Ce, Ee, Seso; Be aggipricariyam); MI 82,18 (santi... eke samanabrhman evamvdino evamditthino ~ya suddhi ti); Dhp-a II232,16 (tava ~, Ce so; Be, Se -pricariy; Ee wr aggiparicriy); Pj II 456, is (-am vin brhmannam yannbhvato); -paricraka, -paricrika, mfn., who tends the ritual fire; S IV 312,6 (brhman ... udakorohak -, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee aggiparicrik) * A V 263,9 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se aggiparicrik); Sp 972,23 (Uruvelavsiparicraknam tpasnam); -paricita, -parijita, mfn., damaged by fire; Vin II 109,26 (anujnmi bhikkhave... phalam paribhunjitum aggiparicitam satthaparicitam ...; Sp 767,7: aggiparijitan ti aggin parijitam adhibhtam daddham phutthan ti attho, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se aggiparicitan ti aggin paricitam); -pki(n), m(fn)., who eats food cooked on the fire (a class of ascetics); Ap 18,23 (~ianaggi ca); -pricariy, / , see sv aggiparicriy above; -pin4am in Ee at Sp 465,20 is wr for aggapindam (Be, Ce, Seso); -mantha, m., a plant, Premna spinosa; Abh574 (~o kanik); Sp835,i4 (~o, Be, Ce so; Ee aggimattho, Se aggimattho, prob, wrr); Vin-vn 1343; -mli(n), m, the name of a (mythical) ocean; Ja IV 139,25 (~im nma gat, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr aggimlam); 140,2* (~i ti vuccati); -mukha1, m., a kind of snake; Pj II 458,n* (santatto bhavati* kyo dattho ~ena v) = As 300,20*; Spklll 6,17 (cattro sivis ti katthamukho ptimukho ~o satthamukho ti); -mukha2, n., the front of a fire; loc. ~e, adv., in front of a fire, near to afire; Ja IV 498, r (kapputthnaggim patv Mahmeru pi~e madhusitthakam viya viliyat' eva); -yyana, n., a house for the ritual fire; JaV 158,16* (samant ~am; 159,12': ~-sankhtam aggislam samant, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee aggiyyatanasankhtam); Pj II 174,29(~e thitoaggi, Ee so; Be, Ceaggiydhne; Se aggiypane); -latthi,/, a fire-column (a kind of tree 1); Thi-a 214,5 (ukkbhrin ti keci pathanti, -im viy ti attho, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se ukkgrin ti... angatthilatthim; see O. von Hinber, 1980, p. 20); -vijanaka, n. (orm.), a fan for the fire; Ps II 229,2 (vidhpanen ti ~ena); -saMita, m., the plant leadwort; Abh 580 (cittako tv ~o); -sama, mfn. [aggi + sama3], 1. being a mass of fire; filled completely with fire; Ja VI 54,12* (bhims ~ jl kos dayhanti bhgaso); Pj II 481,1 (agginisams ti ~su); 2. like fire; JaV 269,22* OohatomWmri

pavajjanti tattam ^-dakam); -sdhrana, mfn., subject to, vulnerable to, fire; A III 259, is (~ bhog); - s l , / (and ~a, n.), a fire-room (where water is heated), a heated hall; a room for the ritual fire; Abh 214 (jantgharam tv ~); Vin I 25,19* (viharemu ajjunho -amhi, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se aggisaranamhi); 49,6 (sace ~ uklp hoti ~ sammajjitabb); II 154,5 (bhikkh parivene taham taham aggitthnam karonti, parivenarn uklpam hoti... anujnmi bhikkhave ekamantam ~am ktun ti); Jal 8,14 (~yam angrakapalladru-dini); Ap 39,3 (jantgharam ~am ... mpayitv); Sv 270,1 (~am katv... aggim paricaranto acchati); Dhp-aI 319,26 (udakassa tattabhvam gamayamno -yam eva atthsi); - s i k h , / , aflame; the crest of a fire; DII 260,6* (dev jalam ~-r-iva); Ja V 213,21* (k dissati ~ va dre); 268,i* (tassa ~ ky niccharanti); -huta, n., the fireoblation; the sacrificial fire; Ud-a 75,17 (~am juhanti ~am paricaranti); -hutta, n. [S. agnihotra], 1. the oblation to Agni, the rite of the fire-oblation; the ritual fire; Vin I 36,n* (katham pahinam tava ~am) = JaVI 220,ii*; SI 167,21 (aggim juhati ~am paricarati; Spkl 233,ii: agyyatanam sammajjanpalepanabalikammdin payirupsati); Dhp 392 (sakkaccam tarn namasseyya ~am va brhmano); Th341 (yajim uccvace yanne ~am juhim aham); JaV 205,8* (na m'aj^a mant patibhanti tta na ~am; 207,23'foil.: mahbrahmuno rdhanatthya kattabbahomavidhpandiyannakiriy pi me na patibhti, Be so; Ce, Se -vidhmandi-; Ee kattabbam havyadhmdi -); VI 211,25* (tarn ~am saranam pavissa, split cpdl 215,ir: tarn rjnam rjamahmattam v dya aggihuttatthnam geham pavisitv, Ce, Ee so; Be aggijuhanatthnam geham; Se aggijhanatthnageham); Ap 160,28 (~am ca me atthi); 2. (according to et) the ladle (and other tools 1) for the fire-oblation; Ja VI 525,28* (dya beluvam dandam ~am kamandalum, possibly split cpd; 526,2': ~an ti aggijuhanakatacchum, Be, Ceso; Ee, Se aggijhanaka-); missa, n., various tools etc for the fire-oblation; Vin I 33,6 (te jatil kesamissam jatmissam khrikjamissam ~-missam udake pavhetv, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be aggihuta-; Sp972,10: kesamissan ti disu kes eva kesamissam, esa nayo sabbattha; Sp-t[i?e]III 208,4: aggihutamissan ti dabbi-di-aggipjopakaranam)= Ap-a 556,26 (Ee so; Be, Se aggihuta-); mukha, mfn., of which the fireoblation is the chief or foremost; Vin I 246,33* (--mukh yanna) = Sn 568; -huttaka, n., the fireoblation; Ja VI 522,6* (duyyittham te navamiyam akatarn ~am; 522,26': aggijuhanam pi tay akatarn bhavissati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se aggijuhanam); -hotta, n. [- aggihutta], the fire-oblation; Ps III 209,24 (agygre ti slyam, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~-slaya; Be aggihomaslyam); Pj II 456,20 (aggihuttamukh yann ti vuttam, ~-setth padhn ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se aggihutta-); -homa, n., oblation in the fire; DI9,s(Sv93,r. -an ti evarpena drun evam hte idam nma hoti ti aggijuhanam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee aggijuhanam) quoted Vism 30,12; anaggi, m(fn)., who eats only uncooked food (a class of ascetics); Ap 18,23 (aggipki ~I ca; Ap-a 222,23: ekacce ~I agglhi apacitv makam eva


khdanti); ati-aggi, m., too hot a fire; Mil 277,29 (~in odanam uttarati); see also aggini, agyantarya, agygra, agydhna, agyyatana, agyloka, anaggipakka, anaggipakkika, havaniya, udaggihuttam, ghapacca, gini, jatharaggiteja(s). aggika1, m. [S. agnika], a kind of snake or insect; Ap 347,23 (enimig varh ca pasad khuddarpak - jotik c' eva vasanti mama assame, or possibly aggika2). aggika 2 , aggiya, m(fn). [from aggi], one who tends the ritual fire; Vin I 71,25 (ye te ... - jatilak; Sp 994,30: - ti aggiparicaranaka); D i l 339,25/0//. (-0 jatilo arannyatane pannakutiy vasati); Pj II 436,16 (kena pana na parivasitabbam, aggiyehi jatilehi). aggini, m. [S. agni], fire; Sadd 186,1 \foll; 186,27 (sakkatabhsyam agni iti sannogavasena vuttassa Magadhabhsam patv ~i ti nissannoganakravasena uccrit pli dissati...); 648,10 (aggimhi ~iti gini ti ca); -sama, mfn. and n., filled (to the brim) with fire; being a mass of fire; a mass of fire; Sn668 (-am jalitam pavisanti, Ce, Ee so; better agini- mc ? Be ginisampajjalitam; Se -am pajjalitam; Pj II 480,10: samantato jalitam sabbadissu v samam jalitam aggim); 670 (atha lohamayam pana laimbhim~am jalitam pavisanti paccanti hi tsu cirarattam -su samuppilavso, Ce, Ee so; better agini- mc? Be ginisampajjalitam pavisanti; Se -am pajjalitam; Pj II 480,26: -s ti aggisamsu); see also aggi, gini. aggiya, seesv aggika2. aggesara, mfn. [loc. of agga1 + sara; S. lex. agresara], going in front, leading; Mhv 66:88 (sayam ~o bhetv vatim pvisi nibbhayo); 72:94. aggha1, m. [S. axgha], price, worth; Abh 1048 (-0 mle); Vin II 51,28 (sangho tassa bhikkhuno tsam pattinam y patti dashapaticchann tass -ena samodhnaparivsam detu); II 159,i (yato tay... -o kato gahito rmo); SI 19,18* (yanno... samena dinnassa na -am eti); ThI25; Ja 1124,28 (pancannam assasatnam ekam tandulanlikam -amakasi); Mil 244,1; Ps I 149,18 (tarn -ena parihyati); ifc see app'-, man'-, sam-; -kraka, m., a valuer; Ja I 124,ii (-0, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se agghpaniko); -tthapana, n., the setting, fixing of prices; Ja I 99,s; -padalakkhanam inEeat JaV 473,12 is wr; read anaggham padalakkhanam nma with Be, Ce, Se; -vaddhanaka, mfn., relating to increasing the value; Sp 671,28 (-am h' idam sikkhpadam); -samodhna, mfn., inclusive (punishment) whose extent is determined by the most serious offence; Sp 1182,i7/o//.; 1188,i6/o//.; anaggha, mfn., priceless; beyond price; Ja I 126,2 (mayam pubbe pathavim ca rajjam ca -an ti sannino ahumha); 253,6 (so kira manto ~o mahraho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee aggho); Sv 674,9 (pathavi namakim agghati maharjti, ~ bhanteti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~an ti); Dhp-a III 120,16 (imni pana cattri -an' eva ahesum); Bv-a 187,24 (himavantato -am lohitacandanam haritv); Mhv 26:25; see also anagghika, koti-agghaka, kotidhanagghaka. aggha2, m.n. [S. argha, arghya], hospitality, respectful reception of a guest; an offering of water etc to a guest; Abh424 (~am agghiyam); 1048 (-0... pjane);

DII 240,17* (sanam udakam paijam madhupkam ca brahmuno ~e bhavantam pucchma; cfSv 664,16: idam paribhunjath ti vadanto ~e bhavantam pucchma ti dim ha) * Ja IV 396,8* (396,9': ~e ti atithino dtabbayuttakasmim ~e bhavantam pucchma)^ 476,30* (477,6': ~e ti ime sabbe pi sandayo ~e bhavantam pucchma); aggham karoti, accepts as a guest-offering; DII 240,17* (~am kurutu no bhavam; cf Sv 664,8: -an ti atithino upanametabbam vuccati) ^ Ja IV 396,8* (396,10: imam no ~am bhavam patiganhtu) ^ 476,30*; see also agghiya2. agghati,pr. 3sg. [S. arghati], 1. is worth, has the value of; deserves; Dhtup 32 (aggha agghane); Dhtum39; Vin III 67,36 (na panca msake ~ati); A III 50,12 (idam ... candanaphalakam ~ati adhikasatasahassam); Ja VI 174,19 (mayam tassa paricrake pi na -ma); Sv 674,10 (khattiy nma kim -anti maharj ti); Dhp-a III 35,19 (sabbe va mayam dsattam upagacchant manim ngghma); frequently in phrase kalam na agghati (solasim), is not worth a (sixteenth) part (of); Vin II 156,5*; SI 233,2* (kalam ngghanti sojasim); Dhp 70 (na so sankhatadhammnam kalam ~ati sojasim); Vv 20:7; Ja IV 252,27* (satam sahassam dubbhsitnam kalam pi ngghanti subhsitassa); aor. 3pi. agghimsu, Dhp-a I 416,6 (sanghanavakena laddhacivarastak sahassam ~imsu, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be sahassagghanak honti); 2. is proper, is fitting; Dhp-a I 439,19 (so... cintesi evam vicaritum mayham ngghati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ayuttam); fpp (a) agghiya1, mfn., to be valued; valuable; ifc see kimagghiyam (svka 3 ); neg. anagghiya, mfn., priceless, beyond price; Mil 192,3 (anagghiyo, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anagghaniyo); see also anagghika; fpp (b) neg. anagghaniya, mfn., priceless; Mil 192,3 (bhikkhubhvo ... atuliyo appamno anagghaniyo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anagghiyo); caus. pr. 3 sg. agghpeti, values; puts a price on; has a price put on; has something valued; Ja I 124,12 (hatthi-assdini c' eva manisuvanndini ca -eti); II 3\, s foil, (asse -ehi... mlam hpetv -eyysi ti); Mil 192,3 (na sakk kenaci -etum); Sp474,29 (-etha); agghpenta, mfn., Vin III 67,36 (harpetv agghpesi, tarn agghpentam na panca msake agghati, pass. ? acc. absol. ?); Jal 124,15 (-ento); aor. 3 sg. agghpesi, Vin III 67,35; Ja I 124,27 (rj tarn purisam pakkospetv asse -esi); VI 546,27 (gone -ento viya ... kumre -esi); Ps V 36,io (rj ekam ekam kambalam -esi); absol. (a)agghpetv, Jal 124,12; VI 577,10' (mam tto nikkhasahassam -etv... Kanhjinam ... sabbasatena-esi); Sp305,n; Mhv 27:23 (-etv katam kammam tesam mlam adpayi); (b) agghpetvna, Ap 63,5. agghana, n. [from agghati], valuing, valuation; Dhtup 32 (aggha-e); Jal 125,15 (aham... pancannam assasatnam ekam tandulanlim -bhvam jnim, Ce, Ee so; Be agghanakabhvam jnmi; Se ekatandulanliagghanabhvam jnmi). agghanaka, mfi-\k)n. and agghanika, mfn. [agghana + ka2 or + ika], having the value of, worth; (very frequent ifc); Vin III 47,4 (yo pancamsakam v atirekapancamsakam v -am adinnam theyyasankhtam diyati,


eso coro nma) * IV 226,27; Sp671,3o (ettakam eva me -am civaram dehi ti); 930,13 (kittakam -am dtukm' atth ti); Ih-a 1145,11 (idam na bahum -am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee bahu-agghanakam); ifc see dasavyaggh'- (jvdasa1), sakalajambudip' -, satasahass' -, sahass'-. agghnaka- in Ee at Ja VI 113, is' is wr, prob, for agghpanaka- qv. agghpanaka, agghpanika, agghpaniya, m. [from agghpeti], a valuer, appraiser; Ja I 124,14 (ayam -0 evam agghpento, Ce, Eeso; Be, Se agghpaniko); 125, \6 (kim agghati ti agghpanikam pucchatha dev ti, eds so); Th-a I 78,12 (so kira ... mahkosalaranfio agghpaniyassa brhmanassa putto hutv nibbatti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se aggsaniyassa); -kamma, ., the business or office of a valuer; Ja I 124,19 (esa mayham -am ktum sakkhissati, Ce.Eeso; Be, Se agghpanika-); 124,20 (-am, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se agghpanika-); IV 137,19 (nam ij agghpaniyakamme thapesi, eds so); -tthna, n., the office of valuer; Ja I 126,7 (bodhisattass' eva agghpanikatthnam adsi, eds so); VI 113,18' (-e thit, Be, Ce so; Se agghpana-; Ee wr agghnaka-). agghpeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of agghati qv. agghika, see sv agghiya3. agghiya 1 , mfn.,fpp o/agghati qv. agghiya 2 , n. [S. arghya], respectful reception of a guest; an offering of water etc to a guest; Abh 424 (aggham -am); JaV 324,5* (patiggahitam yarn dinnam sabbassa -am katam; 324,15': yena mayam pucchit tarn amhehi patiggahitam nma tumhehi ca dinnam eva nma, ettvat imassa janassa sabbassa -am tumhehi katam) = VI 516,8* (516,12': sabbam etam tumhehi dinnam may ca patiggahitam eva hotu, sabbassa tumhehi mayham -an ti -am nivediyam katam, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sabbassa tumhehi mayham -am nivedanam [Se nivedayam] katam); see also aggha2. agghiya 3 , agghika, n. [?], a (temporary) decorative cetiya or column; Ja VI 580, is* (-ni ca titthantu yena maggena ehiti; 581, r: puppha-agghiyaratana-agghiyni ca ti); Ap 33,16 (-am sukatam katv satahattham samuggatam diyaddham hatthasatam pi vimnam nabham uggatam, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce diyaddhahatthapatthatam; Ap-a266,i4: satahattham uggatam ubbiddham diyaddhahatthasatam vitthatam vimnam nabhasi kse uggatam -am sukatam sundarkrena katam katv, eds so); 33,is (katvna -am tattha tlapantihi cittitam, Ee so; Se kusalapantlhi; Be, Ce katvna hammiyam; Ap-a 266, \ifoli: tatth ti tasmim cetiyapjanatthne ... -am katvna, eds so); 101,26 (-am krayitvna jtipupphehi chdayim); Spklll 219,33 (pane' agghikasatni); ifc see kancan'-, dinn'-, dhaj'-, puppha-, suvann'-. agy antarya, m. [aggi + antarya1], danger from fire; Vin 1112,37 (ime antarya, rjantaryo corantaryo ~o ...; Sp 1057,25: davadho v gacchati vse v aggi utthahati ayam-o); II244,16. agygra, m. [aggi + agra; S. agnygra], a hut for the (ritual) fire(s); Vin I 24,2i (sace te Kassapa agaru, vaseyyma ekarattam -e); IV 109,2 (yena... jatilassa assamo ten' upasankami, upasankamitv -am pavisitv); D I 101,22 (-am karitv aggim paricaranto acchati); MI

501,25 (Bhradvjagottassa brhmanassa ~e tinasantharake; Ps III 209,24: -e ti aggihottaslyam, Ce, Se so; Ee wr aggihottaslaya; Be aggihomaslyam); Ja VI 535,22* (rukkh... assamam ubhato thanti -am samantato); Ap356,n (-am aks' aham); Sadd625,i4 (tisu vyanjanesv eko sarpo lopam ... -am). agydhna, n. [aggi + dhna; S. agnydhna], the placing, establishing of the ritual flre(s); Th-aII 84,io (arannyatane aggihuttaslyam -am katv hutim pagganhanto aggidevam paricarim, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se agygram). agyyatana, n. [aggi + yatana], a hut for the (ritual) fire(s); JaV 4,5* (ambapakkam ... pnii nam gahetvna -am harim; 4,27': attano aggihuttaslam harim); Spkl 233,ii (aggihuttam paricarati ti -am sammajjanupalepanabalikammdin payirupsati, Be, Se so; Ee a ggyyatanam); see also aggiyyana sv aggi. agyloka, m. [aggi+ loka], the light of or from afire; As 148,24 (candloko suriyloko -o pannloko, quoting AII 139,26: eds aggloko). agha1, n. (and m.) andmfn. [ts]f 1. (n.m.) evil; sin; pain, distress; Abh 84; 89; 940 (ppasmim ... dukkhe vyasane cgham); MI 500,4 (ayam... kyo... sallato -ato bdhato... samanupassitabbo); SI 22,2i* (chandajam -am chandajam dukkham); Thi491 (km rogo gando -am; Thi-a262,i2: dukkhuppdanatthena -am); JaV 100,2* (sabbe bhog vinassanti ranno tarn vuccati -am); Sp 171,32 (bhavam me Gotamo saranam paryanam -assa tt hitassa ca vidht ti; cfSp-t[Be]l 414,2: -ass ti dukkhato ti vadanti, ppato ti pana attho yutto, nissakke c' etam smivacanam) ^ Sv 229,19 (Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -assa ght) * Ps I 130,38 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -assa hant) * Ud-a287,i6 (-assa ght); Sadd527,3i/o//. (-an ti dukkham ... -otikileso); 2. (mfn.) bad; dangerous; see iic below; -gata1, ., evil; distress; Th321 (abblham -am vijitam ... ce ossajjeyya, Be, Ce so; Ee wr aghatam; [Se aghatajivitam?] Th-aII 137,22: vibdhanasabhvatya agh nma rgdayo aghni eva -am); -jta, m/h., distressed; SI 54,26* (-assa ve nandi nandijtassa ve agharn); -m-miga, m., a dangerous wild animal; Ja VI 247,26* (khajjamnam ... luddehi vlehi -ehi ca); 507,5* (acch nma -; 507,20': aghakar mig, dukkhvah mig ti attho); anagha, mfn., without sin; faultless; Sadd527,3o (agharn agho -0); see also aghvi(n). agha 2 , n. (and m. or mfn. ?) [?] the air, the sky; space; (void, unrestricted; 1); Abh 46 (surapatho -am); 940 (gagane); D i l 12,11 (y pi t lokantarik - asamvut andhakr andhakratimis; Sv433,is: - ti niceavivat, asamvut ti hetth pi appatitth; cf BHSD svv agha and lokantarik for suggested reading - aghasamvut, and interpretation as agha1) = Mill 120,9 = All 130,26; MI 423,n (ajjhattam paccattam ksam ksagatam -am aghagatam vivaram vivaragatam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit -am ... vivaragatam)^ Dhs 638 (As 326,2: na hahnati ti -am, aghattaniyan tivutto); Ja IV 154,15* (-e vehsayam thit; 154,19': - ti appatighe kse); 484,12* (-asmi konc); V 14,24* (-amhi); Sadd442,n* (kso... antalikkham -am nabham); -gata2, ., sky; space;


MI 423,11 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit) * Dhs 638 (As 326,3: agham eva-am); -gmi(n), mfn., moving through the sky, through space; SI 67,I5* (seto himavatam settho dicco -inam) quoted Mil 242, 10*; see also aghasigama. aghatam in Ee at Th321 is wr for aghagatam qv sv agha'. aghasigama, mfn. [loc. o/agha 2 + gama], going through the sky, through the air; Vv 16:1 (hay adhomukh ~ ball Java; Vv-a 78,32: -a ti vehsangam). aghvi(n), mfn. [agha1 + ()vi(n); BHS aghvin], suffering pain; being in misery; D i l 148,4 (Mall... ~ino dumman cetodukkhasamappit); Ud 15,2* (Ud-a 121,2: ~ino ti kyikacetasikadukkhena dukkhit); Sn 694 (atto vyasanagato -i). agheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup aghayati, Wg 35:84], does wrong, sins; Sadd 527,30 (agha ppakarane: -eti -ayati agham). anka1, m. [ts], a sign, a mark; a brand; Abh 55; 1043 (lakkhane ca -0); Mil 79,23 (yo balivaddnam -ena jnti lakkhanena jnti, Ce, Ee so; Be angena; Se arigato); Sadd 325,27 (aki lakkhane: ankati -0); ifc see sas'-. anka2, m. [ts], 1. the lap; Abh276; 1043 (ucchange... -o); Vin II 114,21 (bhikkh ~e pattam nikkhipanti); D II 20,20 (rj atthakarane nisinno Vipassikumram ~e nisidpetv); Ja III 209,2* (-asmim te nisinno va so te mammni checchati); IV 375,12 (annatarya itthiy -e nipanno); 435,12* (sandakadyinam ~e vaddho smi); Ap 575,3 (sisam mam, ~e s katv sayi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ahge); Mp IV 146,6 (pitu ~e vissatthangapaccangassa drakassa sayanam); 2. the hollow above the hips where infants are carried; DII 19,25 (kumrassa dhtiyo upatthpesi... anna dhrenti ann -ena pariharanti); M II 97,12 (mam dhti -ena vhitv); Th 299 (-ena puttam dya); Ja VI 513,5 (dve drake ~ena dya pakkamimsu); Ap 526,18 (~ena -am gacchmi); Sp 204,22 (dhtihi -ato -am haritv dhriyamno); Dhp-all 273,19 (mataputtakam -en' dya); ankapangula in Ee at Spklll 15,28 ([sivis] dasitv knam pi karonti khujjam pi pithasappim pi ankapangulam pi ti) is perhaps wr (for aftga-?); Be, Ce, Se ekapakkhalam; Spk-t(e)II 327,28: ekapakkhalan ti ekadukkham. ankati, anketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup ankate, ankayati, Wg 4:13; 35:74], marks; brands; Dhtup 3 (anka lakkhane); 535; Dhtum 10 (aki lakkhane); 745; Sadd 325,27 (aki lakkhane: ~ati anko); 521,4 (aki lakkhane ... ~eti -ayati); absol. anketv, Jal 451,25 (lakkhanena -etv); 11399,4 (ambni -etv gahitni); pp ankita, mfn. [ts], marked, branded; Abh 263; Sadd 859,9; ifc see cakk'-; kannaka, m/h., with marked (pierced) ears; Jail 185,10* (185,23': viddhakanno chiddakanno). ankana, n. [ts], marking; branding; Sadd 521,4 (anketi ankayati -am anko). ankura, m.n. [S. ankura, m.], a sprout; a shoot; Abh 543 (-0); Mil 50,26 (puriso parittam bijam pathaviyam nikkhipeyya tato ~o utthahitv...); 251,21 (tni -ni); Sp764,i9 (-0 ca niggacchati); 1090,12 (bhmito -am utthahati); Spk I 250,14 (bijam ... -am utthpeti);

Mhv 15:43 (-0); Saddh273 (bij -am); ifc see agg'(^vagga1), buddh'-. ankuraka, n. [ankura + ka2], a sprout; a shoot; ifc reeagg'-Cyvagga1). ankurita, mfn. [ts]> sprouted; having sprouts; Mhv 46:10 (vicchinne paccaye ck tad -e viya). ankusa, m. [S. ankura], a hook I. for controlling and driving an elephant, a goad; Abh 367; Vin II 196,3* (damayanti ~ehi kashi ca); ThI49 (puriso -am dya dehipdantiycati); Ja VI 489,2 (-e mani); Sv 702,6 (-0 ti matthake viijhanakakutilakantako); metaphorically: a goad, a spur; Spk I 170,22 (angate kulaputtnam '-attham); Ps I 234,22 (tarn yeva -am katv); Th-al 188,14 (idam eva mtuvacanam arahattuppattiy -am jtam); ifc see accankusa; 2. for use in plucking fruit from trees (a requisite of an ascetic), a crook; Ja V 232,10* (kim -am ca pattam ca ... ganhsi); VI 529,9 (kaddhitv phalnam ganhanattham -am ca ... dhrento); 3. for hanging something up; Sp 326,26 (-ato niharantassa); 4. as the name of a guide-line or strategy for interpretation; Pet 3,23*; 259,16*; Nett 2,9 (katame pafica nay, nandiyvatto tipukkhalo sihavikkilito dislocano -0 iti); Ud-a 9,17 (in cpd); -gayha, n. [from ankusaggaha], the art of elephant-driving; M II 94,15 (kusalo tvam hatthruyhe ~e sippe ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ankusaganhe; Ps III 323,20: -e sippe ti ankusagahanakasippe, Se so; iteankusagahana-; Ce, Ee ankusaganhaka-); -ggaha, w., [ankusa + gaha2], "one who holds the hook", an elephant-driver; Dhp 326 = Th77; Sadd709,i; -lagga, mfn., fixed on a hook; Ps II 421,4 (mahjanassa atthini kotiy kotim hacca thitni, paccekabuddhnam -ni). ankusaka, m. [ankusa + ka2], a hook I. for controlling and driving an elephant, a goad; Ja III 431,6 (hatthimendo hatthim ruyha ... -ena kkim ... paharati); Cp-a 207,15; 2 . for use in plucking fruit, a crook; Ja III 22,6' (-ena skham onmetv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nametv); Mp IV 58,20 (-am gahetv namanakiccam); 3. for hanging something up; for attaching to something; Sp326,i8 (-e laggetv thapitabhandam); 383,3 (ktapso nma yassa ante... -o v anno v koci dandako baddho hoti yo tattha tattha laggitv skarassa gamanam nivreti); -yatthi, / , a hooked stick, a crook; (or dvandva?) Ja II 68,23 (pacchim ca -im ca gahetv, Ce, Ee so; Be ankusayatthim; Se ankusam ca yatthim ca). anketi, see sv ankati. ankola, m. [ts], the plant Alangium hexapetalum; Abh 557; Ja VI 535,9* (- kaccikr ca); Ap 15,22 (- bimbijl); 199,16 (-am pupphitam disv). ankolaka, m. and n. [ts], l.(m.) the plant Alangium hexapetalum; Ap 362,io (- bimbijl, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kolak); 2 . (n.) the flower of the plant Alangium hexapetalum; Ja IV 440,7* (-am ocinmi; 442,4': ' -dini pupphni ocinmi). ankya, m. [S. lex. id.], a small drum; Abh 143. anga 1 , ind. [ts], a particle implying irony or impatience: indeed! oh! Abh 1139; see kim ariga svka 3 .


anga2, n. (and m.) [S. ahga,.], a part of the body; a limb, member; an integral part of anything; a constituent part of a whole, a subordinate division; a limb or aspect of something as a characteristic sign, an attribute, a quality; as a determining characteristic or factor, a cause; Abh 278; 955 (-am tathvayavahetusu); Sadd333,n (~an ti yesam kesanci vatthnam avayavo sariram pi kranam pi ca vuccati); Vin I 303, l (pancahi... -ehi samanngato gilno supatthko hoti); II 150,11 foil, ([mancassa] -ni bahum suttam pariydiyanti. anujnmi bhikkhave ~e vijjhitv atthapadakam vetun ti); III 120,35 (~assa parmasanam); IV 46,22 (haccapdako nma manco ~e vijjhitv thito hoti); D I 120,io (pancahi... -ehi samanngatam brhman brhmanam pannpenti); 111227,6 (cattari sotpannassa -ni); MI 446,28 (bhadro assjniyo ... ranfio -an t'eva sankham gacchati; Ps III 162,20: yattha katthaci gacchantena hattham viya pdam viya anohy' eva gantabbam hoti, tasm -an ti sankham gacchati, catsu v senangesu ekam -am hoti); SI 188,31 (cathi... -ehi samanngat vc subhsit hoti; Spk I 272,8: -ehi ti kranehi avayavehi v); IV 238,9 (pancahi... -ehi samanngato mtugmo ekanta-amanpo hoti purisassa); A I 16,23 (ajjhattikam... -an ti karitv nnnarn ekam -am pi samanupassmi yam evam mahato anatthyasamvattati yatha-y-idam ... pamdo; Mp I 84,24: -an ti kranam); 286,2 (tflii... ~ehi samanngato mitto sevitabbo); III 33 6,15 (dyakassa tin' ~ni honti); Thi 379 (evam tuvam... sakesu -esu jaram gamissasi); Ja III 50,3* (-am etam manussnam bht loke pavuccati); Ap44,i (eteh' -ehi sampanno khattiyo ti pavuccati); Cp 2:2:3 (caturo -e adhitthya semi vammikamuddhani; Cp-a 117,26: caturo -e ti cattri -ni); Mil 365,22 (ghorassarassa ekam -am gahetabbam); Vism502,n* (-nam sithilibhv); 529,21 (-nam ca vavatthn); Sp 28,4 (katham [buddhavacanam] -vasena navavidham, sabbam eva h' idam suttam geyyam veyykaranam gth udnam itivuttakam jtakam abbhutadhammam vedallan ti navappabhedam hoti); Ps I 83,7 (bodhiy bodhissa v -oti bojjhango); II 133,16 (kacchapassa cattro pd sisan ti pane' eva -ni honti); Spkl 238,2 (dhammo ti padena ditthi sankappo vymo sati samdhi ti pane' ~ni gahitni); Pj I 31,5 (pntiptassa pafica --ni bhavanti); Patis-a 95,3i (bujjhanakassa -o bojjhango); imin p' angena, with that characteristic; in that way; for that reason; D I 113,30; M i l 168,1 (imin p'~ena na arahati so bhavam Gotamo amhkam dassanya upasankamitum); A I 211,23 (imin p' -ena arahatam anukaromi; Mp II325, \r. imin pi gunangena); ange in Ee at PsII 301,15 is prob, wr for anke {Be, Ce, Se, Sv 705,12 so); ifc see atth' - (sv attha1), abbhoksik' -, ^annak,-, uttam'-, uposath'-, ek'-, eksanik*- (^veka), kt'- (jvkta1), komal'-, khalupacchbhattik'-, catur-, chal-(5vcha2), tad-, teclvarik,-, dhuf-, nav'-(^vnava 2 ), nesajjik'-, pamsuklik,-, paccanga, pane'-, pattapindik,(svpatta2), padhniy'-, pindaptik'-, bojjhanga, bhav'-, yathsanthatik'-, rj*-, rukkhamlik,-, ved'-, satt'(.yvsatta4), sambojjhanga, sapadnaerik'-, sotpattiy-, sosnik'-; -m-angni,, limb by limb, all the

limbs; Vin III 37,35 (tassa ~ni vtupatthaddhni honti); MI 129,16 (kakacena cor ... ~ni okanteyyum); Vv 38:2 (~ehi sabbaso dibb sadd niccharanti); ^-atthilafthi,/, ?Thi-a214,5 (ukkgrinti keci pathanti, ~im viy ti attho, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce ukkbhrin ti... aggilatthim; see O. von Hinber, 1980, p. 20); -kta, n. [anga + kta2], cheating by (the use of) a part of the body; Sv 79,5 (~am nma ganhanto pacchbhge hatthena tulam akkamati dadanto pubbbhge) = Spk HI 305, is; -jta, ., the organ of generation (of either sex); Abh 273; Vin I 191,3 (rattacitt pi ~am chupanti); Jail 359,14; Mil 124,21 (bhikkhuniy -am); Ps III 377,22 (vatthaguyhan ti vatthena guyhitabbam -am vuccati); -paccanga, n. and mfn.j 1. (n.) one limb or another; one limb after another; all the limbs or parts; MI 81,9 (seyyath pi nma sitikapabbni... evam eva ssu me -ni bhavanti); 133,37 (so alagaddo ... hatthe v bhya v annatarasmim v -e daseyya); 395,32 (kusalo tvam rathassa -nan ti); Ja IV 324,16; Mil 303,20 (dayhantehi -ehi); Sp 1027,7 (yassa pana kinci -am isakam vankam ...); 2. (mfn.) with all one's limbs; Pv24:ll (tato tuvam ~ suer piyadassan, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se -1); -paccangi(n), mfn., having all one's limbs; Pv24:ll (tuvam -i, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee arigapaccang; Pv-a 158,10: paripiinnasabbangapaccangavati); -papurana, n. enveloping with one's limbs; JaV 330,7*; -m-angni, see above; -raga, m., unguents or cosmetics for the body; Vin II 107,25; Vin -vn 2825; Matthi,/ [cfS. angayasti, "slender form"], the body; a slender body; Sv93,u (-im disv, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se angulatthim; Sv-ptI 167,11: -in ti sariram); As 403,9 (evam no ~i susanthit bhavissati, Be so; Ce ahgulatthi; Se arigasandhi; Ee wr angulitthi); Thi-a214,2 (anginin ti sampannam); -vata, m., rheumatism; Vin 1205, is; Sp 1091,17 (-0 ti angamahgesu vto, Ee, Se so; Be hatthapde vto; Ce omits); -vikkhepa, m., a gesture; Abh 101; -vijja,/, the art of prognosticating from parts of, or marks on, the body; DI9,7 (- vatthuvijj; Sv93,n: angalatthim disv vijjam parijapitv ayam kulaputto dhanav no v sirisampanno v no v ti divykaranavasena - vutt); Ja I 290,io (-ya cheko); Niddl 372,21; Mil 370,5; pthaka, m., an expert in this art; Ja II 21,12 (ito kira sattame divase puttam vijyissati ti pthak hamsu); Ps V 10,i4; As 180,15; -sattha, n. [anga + sattha3], the science of prognostication from characteristics of or marks on, the body; Sv 92,11 (hatthapddisu yena kenaci evarupena angena samanngato dighyu yasav hoti ti dinayapavattam -am); -hra, m., a gesture; Abh 101; Vv-a 174,is (vasena, so read? Be, Ce, Se angabhra-; Ee paccangabhra-); ananga, l./i. (or mfh.l), not (being) a limb, not an integral part (of oneself); Ja VI 297,14* (- va hi te bl yath pet tath' eva te, so readl [or. - v ti]; eds anangav hi; 297,22'foil.: kincpi jetthakanitthabhtaro ahgasamatya angan ti vutt, ime pana dussil tasm angasam na honti); Vibh-a 200,30 (tassa tt); 2. (n.) [cf S. ananga, 'kma'], a love affair; sensual pleasure; Panca-g 93


(srajjati c' -esu); -'-sangavaddhana, mfn., increasing attachment to sensual pleasure; Saddh 361 (angam aninditangya ~'-sangavaddhanam); see also atthangika, ekangika, ekdasangika (JV ekdasa), caturangika (sv catu[r]), ti-v-angika, du-v-angika, pancangika, hinarigat (sv jahati). angana1, n. [S. angaria, angaria], a place to walk in; open space, a court; a clearing; Abh 218; 859; Vin II 218,2 (bhikkh pativte p' ~e sensanam pappothesum); Ja I 109,20' (-e ti manussnam sancaranatthne anvate bhmibhge); 250,2 (idam thnam -am jtam); Ps III 71,24 (-arnhi mate [candle]); Sadd 333,28* (vivate bhmibhge ca -an ti); ifc see ks'- (sv ksa2), udangana, ek'-, cetiy'-, rj'-, subh'-. angana2, n. [BHS id.], a speck of dirt; a blemish; a moral blemish, defilement; Abh 859 (kilese ca male cnganam); MI 24,19 (ekacco puggalo sngano va samno atthi me ajjhattam -fin ti yathbhtam na ppajnti); A V 92,16 (puriso... sakam mukhanimittam paccavekkhamno sace tattha passati rajam v -am v tass' eva rajassa v -assa v pahnya vyamati; Mp V 41,12: -an ti tatthajtam ahgakjatilakdi); Vibh 368,8 (rgo -am doso -am moho -am); Nett 88,1 (- ca upakkiles ca); Sp 157,16 (-ena hi cittam upakkilissati); Sadd 333,28* (rgdisu kilesesu panke kyamalamhi ca... -am); -nsana, mfn., removing defilements; Utt-vn 1 (vanditv ... ganam -am); anangana, mfh., free from blemish; spotless; Vin III 4,18 (samhite citte parisuddhe pariyodte -e vigatpakkilese; Spl57,i6: vihatargdi-anganatt -e, tt yeva vigatpakkilese) * DI 76,H; Dhp 125 (suddhassa posassa -assa); Sn517 (vigatarajam -am visuddham); JaV 302,3* (mukham... subham sunettam virajam ~am); Bv8:10 (-nam virajnam); sangana, sngana, mfh., blemished; full of depravity; MI 24,is; Sn279 (dubbisodho hi ~o). angati, angeti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup angati, angayati, Wg5:38; 35:74], goes; Dhtup25 (anga inga... gamanatth); Dhtum 32 (agi igi... gatyatthadhtavo); Sadd 333,13 (agi... gamane: ... ~ati ~eti). angada, n. [ts], a bracelet; Abh287 (keyram-am); JaV 400,19' (cittangad ti citrehi ~ehi samanngat); VI 590,7* (~am manimekhalam sass sunhya pahesi); Mhv 76:109 (in long cpd). angadi(n), mfn. [from angada], wearing a bracelet; JaV 9,25*(kyri ~i). angan, / [ts], a woman; Abh 230; Sadd363,3i*; Mhv 33:85 (vararigan). angahetuka, m. [?], a kind of wild bird; Ja VI 538,12* (godhak ~). angra, m.n. [ts], charcoal; heated charcoal; embers; Abh36 (unhabhasmasmim ~o); D i l 166,28 (vibhattni bhagavato sarirni, ito -am harath ti); MI 324,14 (kumro... hatthena v pdena v ~am akkamitv khippam eva patisamharati); A III 407,12 (~ni dittni); Sn 668 (~e santhate senti); Th 702 (mahgini... ~esu ca santesu nibbuto ti pavuccati); Ja I 73,14 (kimsukavann - ksen' gantv bodhisattam patv dibbapupphni hutv vikirimsu); 238,15 (jhmakhettam disv ~am viyhitv); VI 248,18* (patanti -ann-iv' accimanto; 248,20': jalitangr

viya); Ap 405,6 (~ va mahi); Dhp-aHI 137,10 (sakunandakni ~esu pacitv); Vibh-a493,34 (bhasmpaticchanno viya-o); Sadd 600, H (kattham purisena -am katam); ifc see agad' -, kul'-, jham'-; -katha, n., a pot or pan for burning charcoal; a firepan; a brazier; Vin III 107,n (s isspakat sapattim -na okiri) = Sil 260,15; Sv 261,6 (~Q aggim katv); 0 -kapalla, n., a pot for burning charcoal; a firepan; a crucible; Ja VI 66,4 (usukro ~e usurp tpetv); As 333,9 (sitasamaye -am haritv); Ps V 54,10 (ukkarn bandheyy ti -am sajjeyya); Spkl 296,16 (-e aggim karoti); -kammakara, m., a charcoal-burner; Ja VI 209,25'; -ksu,/, a charcoal pit (with burning coal); Vin III 20,32 (-uy dittya; Sp220,2o: -uy ti angrapunnakpe angrarsimhi v); MI 74,12 (-u sdhikaporis pur' angrnam vitacciknam vitadhmnam); AIII 380,16; Sn 396 (abrahmacariyam parivajjayeyya -um jalitam va); Ja I 233,19 (asitihatthya gambhirya -uy); -gabbhaka, mfn., containing, filled with charcoal; Cp 1:10:14 (mahantam aksi citakam katvn, -am; Cp-a 106,20: angrabharitabbhantaram ... mahantam citakam aksi); -gabbhe, ind., within the hot embers; Ja III 55,i (drni sankaddhitv angre katv mayham rocehi, aham attnam pariccajitv ~e patissmi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se angramajjhe); Cp-a 106,15 (tay kate -e); -citaka, m., -citak,/, a pile of hot charcoal; JaV 491,16 (ayam Sutasomo -am mam ca slam tacchantam passati, Be, Ce so; Ee wr mam saslam; Se -am passati pi mam slam ...); VI 577,3' (idni mamakyo -ya ropito viya); Sp 511,io(-e nipann); -mamsa, n., roasted meat; Mhv 10:16; -masi, m. (orfi), soot; Dhp-aIII 309,19 (chrikya okinnammakkhitam); -rasi, m., a heap or mass of hot charcoal; Ja III 55,9; Sp220,2i; Cp -a 106,34 foil, (mama sarirassa jhpanasamattho ayam M ti... tath pajjalitam -i [eds so] tad mama pavitthassa usumamattampi nhosi); -vassa, m.n., a shower of hot charcoal; Ja I 73,14 (-am samutthpesi, kimsukavann angr ksen' gantv..., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee angrakavassam) = Spk I 323,19; Vism 376,10 (Mrena -e pavattite); see also ingla. angraka, m. [ts], 1. the planet Mars; Sv95,8 (0,-digahasamyogo); 2. charcoal, hot charcoal; -vassa, m. orn., a shower of hot charcoal; Ja I 73,14 (-am samutthpesi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se angravassam). angri(n), mfn. [BHSUngarin, c/MvuIII 93,10*], covered in crimson; Th 527 (~ino dni dum; Th-a II 223, ufoll.: angrni viy ti angrni rattapavlavannni rukkhnam pupphapallavni, tni etesam santi ti -ino, atilohitakusumakisalayehi angravutthisamparikinn viy ti attho) = Ja I87,i*. angrika, m. [S. ngrika], a charcoal-burner; Ja VI 206,27* (- lonakr ca sd; 209,25': - ti ahgrakammakar). angi(n), mfn. [S. angin], having limbs or parts; having a body; who has a limb; ThI297 (kP -inim va takkrim ... mam... ohya; Thi-a 214,2: kl ti tasslapanam, -inin ti angalatthisampannam; see O. von Hinber, 1980, p. 20); Sadd 720,19 (yena vydhi-


mat angena ~ino vikro lakkhiyyati, tattha tatiy vibhatti hoti); ifc see catur-, samangi(n). angigato in Ee at Sv 313,33 is prob, wr for angato {Be, Ce, Se so). anguttha, m. [S. angustha], the thumb; the big toe; Abh 266; Vin III 34,34 (sratto ~am angajtam pavesesi); Mil 261,8 (sivisassa ... hattham v ~am v dajj); Ap 300,6 (~am pimsayi pde mama psnasakkhar) = Ud-a264,26* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee abbhutth phassayi, perhaps wr); Mil 230, I; Sp214,n (~ena nbhim parmaseyytha); ifc see pd'-, hatth'-; -ganan, / , counting on the thumbs (and fingers); Ja 1462, li (aham ~am jnmi); 462,22'; -pada, ., a thumb-mark; S III 154,31 (vsijate ... dissati -am, Be so; Ee, Ce, Se dissanti angutthapd) = AIV 127,8; -sneha, m., moisture from the thumb; Pv30:2. angutjhaka, m. [anguttha + ka2; AMg amgutthaya], the thumb; the big toe; Ja IV 378,5 (tad Ditthamangalik utuni hoti, ath' ass ~ena nbhim parmasi, kucchiyam gabbho patitthsi); V281,I; Sp 1026,28 (alacchinno ti yassa catsu ~esu ... eko v bah v ~ chinn honti); Spkl 290,9 (thero ~am jlpesi); Pj I 159,9 (~ato c' assa khiram nibbatti); ifc see pd' -. angutthiganan,/ [angutthi (= anguttha or anguli?) + ganan], counting on the thumbs and fingers; Ja I 462,2i* (n' ~am yti, Ee so; Be ngutthigananam; Ce, Se nangutthagananam; 462,22': ~ ti angutthaganan vuccati, ayam msikagano angutthagananam na gacchati... parikkhayam gacchati ti attho, Be, Ee so; Ce nangutthaganan ti angutthaganan vuccati; Se nahgutthagananam yti ti...). angula, m.n. [S. ahgula, m.], 1. a finger; Vin IV 262,29 (dvisu ~esu dve pabbaparam dtabb); Ap 422,17 (kso minitum sakk rajjuy ~ena pi); PatisI 125,30 (angulangulehi aggikkhandho pavattati; Patis-a 403,28: angulihi afigulihi); Spkl 227,4 (tvam dvih' ~ehi pidahitabbam mukham... pidahitum na sakkosi); Ap-a 109,4 (pancahi ~ehi); ifc see pane'-; 2. a finger as measure, a finger's breadth; Abh 195 (~am); Vibh-a 343,28 (sattadhannamsappamnam ekam -am, ten* ~ena dvdasangulni vidatthi); ifc see atth'(.yvattha2), catur-, du-v-, dv-; -kale, ind.y when there is a finger's breadth of shadow (from the klatthambha,); Ps I 122,21 (dvarigulakle bhattam gahetv - bhunjati); see also anguli, caturangulika. angulatthim in Ce, Ee, Se at Sv93,n is wr for angalatthim (Be so). anguli, / [ts]9 I. a finger (often in pi. including the thumb); (occasionally) a toe; Abh 266 (karaskhnguli); Vin I 77,is (sace kho Upli lekham sikkhissati -iyo dukkh bhavissanti); III 160,3 (Dabbo Mallaputto tejodhtum sampajjitv -iy jalamnya purato purato gacchati); DII 96,22 (Licchavi -i pothesum); III 85,20 (rasapathavim -iy syi); Sn 610 (na hatthehi na pdehi na ~ihi nakhehi v); Th 1055 (~i p' ettha chijjatha) quoted Mil 395,12* (Be ~i; Ce, Ee, Se ~im); Ja I 7,25' (atisambdhe cankame... cankamantassa paricchede pakkhalitv nakh pi ~iyo pi bhijjanti); 111416,3 (~iy ca muddik atthi); Ps I 58,11 (adhomukh

~iy bhmim likhant tunhi ahesum); Dhp-aIV 222,20 (dasasu ~isu visati muddik); Patis-a 80,32 (nakh -inarn aggapitthesu thit visati); ifc see agg'- (j-vagga1), ganthik,- (^vganthik), cT- (.svculla1) digh'-, pane'-, pd'-, 111^3^-, vank'-, vatt'-, hatth,s 2. the measure angula; a finger's breadth; Sp 1321,25; Ps III 394,2o(~ampiad<angulimattam pi parisato bahiddh na gacchati); ifc see atth'- (^vattha2); '-agga, n. [anguli + agga1], the finger-tip; Kv 315,3; Sv 235,33; Ps IV 88,16 (ten* eva ~ena tarn ~am na sakk phusitum); -kosaka, m., a thimble; Sp 1206,27 (patiggahan ti ~am); -chinna, mfn.y whose finger has been cut off; Vin I 91,10 (~am pabbjenti); Kv31,3i; -(j)jalana, n.9 the blazing of the finger; Sp 579,8 (~am adhitthya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -jlanam, prob, wr); -patoda, m., poking with the fingers; tickling; Urt-vn 115; -patodaka, m., poking with the fingers; tickling; Vin III 84,21 (bhikkhum ~ena hsesum); DI 91,17 (annamanfiam ~ena sanjagghant sankilant); Utt-vn 168; -pada, n., a finger-mark; S III 154,30 (vsijate dissanf eva~ni)^ A IV 127,7; -potha, m., snapping the fingers; JaV 67,16 (mahjano... celukkhepe ca -e ca pavattesi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -phote); VI 344,4' (~, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -phot); -pothana, ., snapping the fingers; Ja I 394,24 (~esu, Ce, Se so; Ee ~ena, prob, wr; Be -photanesu); Th-all 173,8 (~-mattam pi khanam, Ce so; Ee -potthana-; Be, Se -photana-)* TO-a75,i4 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se -photana-); -mna, mfn. [anguli + mna2], being the size of a finger (or of a finger's breadth); Mhv28:14; -mudda,/, 1. a signet ring; Abh 287; 2. a kind of reckoning on the fingers (cf Sadd 803,6-7); Spklll 113,13 (muddiko ti ~ya gananya kusalo); 3. a position or gesture of the fingers;! Ap-a547,13 (samuddan ti angulimuddya sam sutthu dassetabbato samuddo; c/Spklll 295,28: Saga^adeven, eva khatatt sgaro, khato me ti hatthamuddya niveditatt samuddo ti); -muddika,/ [anguli + muddika1], a signet ring; Vin II 106,32 (~am dhrenti); Ja V 439,27 (rj pi 'ss ~am adsi); Ps II 194,21 (dasasu angulisu ~); -vethaka, -vethanaka, m., a ring; a finger-stall or bandage; ? Sp 764,32 (ek amlik lata hoti, ~o viya vanappagumbadandake vetheti); Vism 446,5 (sasambhrasotabilassa anto tanutambalomcite ~-santhne padese, Ee, Ce so; Be, Se -vedhaka-) * Nidd-al 167,23 = Nidd-all 72,n (Ee so; Ce -vethana-; Be, Se -vedhaka-) = As 310,23 (Ce, Se so; e-vethanaka-; ^-vedhaka-); mutt,/, a kind of pearl; Sp 75,4 (Sp-t[Be]I 162,2: ahguliyakasanthn muddiksanthn ti attho); Mhv 11:14 (... valayangulivethak kakudhaphalapkatik ice et atthajtiyo mutt); -sankhalik, / , an interlacing of fingers; Ps II 85,27 (ubhohi passehi ~am viya gahanavanam pavisitum asakkont); see also angula, kanitthangulinakha, ganthikangulika (^v ganthik), caturangulika, paneahgulika. angulika, m. [anguli + ka2], one who carries something with his finger(s); Sadd786,2i (sisena vahati ti sisiko, evam amsiko ... ~o). angulika, / [anguli + k2], a small finger;! Sp996,4


(unnigand nma honti gothanik viya ~ viya ca tattha tattha lambanti). angulifthi in Ee at As 403,9 is wr, prob, for angalatthi (Be so). anguliyaka, n. [S. lex. id.; cfAMg amgulijjaga], a fingerring; Abh 286 (~am ahgulybharanam). anguleyyaka, n. [= anguliyaka qv\ a finger-ring; Jail 444,7' (nikkham ca tipancahi suvannehi katam -am, Ce, Ee so; Se ariguliyakam; Be angulimuddikam). ageyya, n. the name of a branch of statecraft or of a treatise on statecraft; ? Sv 93,18 (khattavijj ti 0 -msurakkhdinitisattham, Ce, Ee so; Be abbheyyamsurakkharjasatthdisattham; Se ajjheyya-; Sv-ptI 167,12: anginosattham~am; v/abbhino ... abbheyyam) * Ud-a 205,25 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se abbheyyamsurakkhdi-). acakkhuka, mfn. [a3 + cakkhu + ka2; cf S. acaksuska], without sight, blind; without insight, without understanding; D I 191,12 (sabbe va kho ete... paribbjak andh ~, tvam yeva nesam eko cakkhum); AII 72,6 (avijjnivut pos andhabht ~); Ud67,34 (annatitthiy ... paribbjak andh ~; Ud-a 341,8 foil.', andh ti panncakkhuvirahena andh, ten' ha ~ ti, panfi hi idha cakkh ti adhippetam); Patisl 129, I 6 (andho lokasannivso ~o); YamI 97, n (~nam); Vism20,i8 (porn pan' hu cakkhu rpam na passati acittakatt cittam pi rpam na passati -tt); Ud-a 342,34 (te jaccandh ~); see also sacakkhuka. acandamullokika, mfn. [a3 + canda + ullokika], not or never looking up at the moon; Sadd 744,16 (asuriyampassni mukhni ~ni mukhni). acittaka, mfn. [a3 + citta1 + ka2], 1. without thought or mind; senseless, unconscious; Ja III 273,19 (idam ~am kalingarakandam pi tava gunam jnti sacittako manussabhto pi aham na jnmi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee acittam); Vibh419,29 (asannasatt dev... acetanak ~ ptubhavanti); Kv519,i8 (~assa maggabhvan ti); Mil 77,28 (kin nu kho tvam mahrja tasmim samaye ~o ahosi ti); Ps III 52,22 (kyadando pi ~o va hoti); Spklll 95,30 (nirodhasampattito pubbe addhnaparicchedakle yeva ettakam klam ~o hutv tato param sacittako bhavissmi ti); Dhp-all 42,14 (pupphni ~ni pi); 2. without feeling, feigned; Ja IV 58,3' ([skhallena] acetas ti ~ena); 3. without intention, without awareness; VinV 125,2 (atth' patti ~o apajjati sacittako vutthti; Sp 1380,2: ~o apajjati ti disu sahaseyydipannattivajjam asancicca pajjanto ~o apajjati); of a rule or offence where responsibility is not avoided by a lack of intention or knowledge; Sp 662,20 (idam sikkhpadam chasamutthnam, kiriyam nosaMvimokkham ~am pannattivajjam ...); 688,7 (pattiyeva sa-usshatt -tt ca sikkhpadassa); 860, n (vatthu-ajnanatya c'ettha -t veditabb); see also sacittaka. acittidnam in Ee at D i l 357,31 is wr for acitkatam dnam (Be, Ce, Se so). acintita(r), acinteta(r), m. [neg. agent noun from cinteti qv\> one who does not think; Ja VI 43,30' (avitakkit ti avitakkitro ~ro, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee acintetro); 44,2' (te imass' atthassa avitakkit ~ro, Ce, Ee so; Se avitakkitro ~ro; Be avitakkitro only).

acirakapakkantam in Ee at MII 253,26 is prob, wr for acirapakkantam (Be, Ce, Se so). acirapakkante in Ee at SV 260,25 is wr for acirapakkante qv sv cira. acivaraka, m(fn). [a3 + civara + ka2], (one) who has no bhikkhu'^ robe; Vin I 909\sfoll. (bhikkh ~am upasampdenti, nagg pindya caranti... na ... ~o upasampdetabbo); Vism 115,24 (tarn ~assa bhikkhuno dadeyya); Sp 667,3 (nivsetum v prupitum v ~nam bhikkhnam labbhati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se acchinnacivaralnam). acelaka (and acelaka), mfn. and m. [a3 + cela + ka2], unclothed, naked; a naked ascetic; one who belongs to a sect of naked ascetics; Abh 440 (digambaro ~o nigantho); 1110 (naggo tv ~e pi ca); Vin IV 92,4 (yo pana bhikkhu -assa v paribbjakassa v paribbjikya v sahatth khdaniyam v bhojaniyam v dadeyya pcittiyam; 92,8: ~o nma yo koci paribbjakasampanno naggo); MI 77,28 (~o homi muttcro hatthpalekhano; Ps II 43,26: ~o ti niccelo naggo); 281,33 (nham bhikkhave ~assa -mattena smannam vadmi); Jal 390,11 (bodhisatto... jivikapabbajam pabbajitv ~o ahosi rajojalliko); III 246,18 (anne ~ gamimsu); Mil 201,30 (yad Devadatto manusso ahosi ~o Krambhiyo nma); Sp990,29(ayampana naggaparibbjakass' eva jivakassa v ~assa v dtabbo); Ps II 233,23 ([Makkhali Gosalo] stakam chaddetv -o hutv palyi); IV \89,6foll. (~o gato udhu alankatapatiyatto ... ~o gato mahjanassa pana alahkatapatiyatto viya upatthsi); Dhp-a I 309,3 (kadci ~o hoti kadci jivako kadci niganthako kadci tpaso, Ce, Ee so; Be buddhasvako ... jivako ... nigantho ...; Se sevako... nigantho...); III489,n (apaticchannehi ~ehi ime niganth varatar); Pj II 291, I 5 (naggiyan ti 0-ttam); -pli,/, the tenets or discipline of the naked ascetics; Sv 841,6 (amhkam ~-mattam pi n' atthi kuto parisuddhapli; Sv-ptIII 27,i: --gatatthamattam pi n' atthi); Ps III 274,16 (annataram v pana tapogunan ti ~im sandhy' ha, surpnavirati ti attho, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se acelakaladdhim; Ps-t [Be] III 132,5: acelakapatipattidipakagantham); see also acela .sv cela. acorharana, mfn. [a3 + cora1 + harana], not to be taken by thieves; Khp8:9 (~o nidhi; Pj I 224,20: na corehi harano ~o corehi dtabbo na hoti ti attho) * Saddh 589; Mil 320,30 (yath ... kso ... duppasaho -o anissito ... evam eva ... nibbnam ... ~am ...). acorik,/, see sv coraka'. ace- [S. aty-] is the usual form of the prefix ati- before vowels other than 1. In words of more than three syllables the vowel following ace- is often strengthened; see acckkhara, accbhikkhanam, accyika, accsana, acehita, accpaseva(t), aecodaka, aecodara. acca, see accyam. accagam, aor. 3 sg. c/atigacchati qv. accag, accagum, accag, aor. 3 sg. and 3 pi. of atiVg qv. accankusa, mfn. [ati + ankusa], beyond the control of the goad; DII 266,5* (~o va ngo; Sv 702,8: ankusam atito hoti ankusena vijjhiyamno pi vasam na gacchati).


accajanta, neg. o/cajati qv. accatari, accatri, aor. 3 sg. o/atitarati qv. accati, pr. 3 sg. [S. arcati], praises, honours; Dhtup 47 (acca... pjyam); 544; Dhtum54 (accccane); 760; Sadd 335,23 (acca pjyam: ~ati); inf. accitum, Ja VI 180,15'; pp accita, mfn. [S. arcita], praised, honoured; Abh 750; 841; Ja VI 180,9* (ayam selo ~o mahito sad); Ap-a 494,9 (~o pjito ti attho); caus. pr. 3 sg. acceti 1 , accayati 2 , honours; Sadd 529,24 (acca pjyam: ~eti -ayati); aor. 3 sg. accayittha, Dth 5:66. accana, n., - a , / [S. arcana, arcana], honouring; homage; offering; Abh 425 (~ pj); Dhtum54 (accaccane); Sadd 883,27* (upasaddo ... ~e). accanta, mfn. and n. [S. atyanta], 1. (mfn.) "beyond the (usual) end or limit"; excessive, very great; perpetual; absolute, complete; most commonly accantam, adv., excessively, exceedingly; perpetually; absolutely, completely; SI 130,20*(~am hataputt 'mhi; Spkl 191,14: ettha antam atitam ~am, bhvanapumsakam etam); Ja I 224, r (na -am sukham edhati niccakle sukhasmim yeva patitthtum na sakkoti); III 12,10* (~am pjanraho); V 454,10* (sivam ~am acalitam asankhatam; 455,32': -an ti anatitam avinsadhammakam); VI 517,13* (asammodiyam pi vo assa ~am mama kran); Ap 350,18 (sayane ... ~am pupphasanthate, Ce so; Be, Se acchanne; Ee accantapupphasanthate); 532,6 (muhuttam ... ~am...); Kv 212,23* (~am sukham eva tarn); Mil 413,25 (yogin ... sankhrnam... nirlhanijjivatam -am sunnatam diyitabbam); Ud-a 271,27 (~am eva kilesnam samucchinnatt); Th-all 181, is (-tya); Saddh288; 2. (n.) the absolute (ie nibbrra); Sadd 70,29* (imni pana nibbnassa pariyyavacanni... anantam akkharam dipo ~am); -kodhana, mfn., extremely angry; Abh 732; -tirokkhatta, n., the being very much apart or secret; ? Nidd-a 1297,2 (lokuttaro ~ glho); -dussilya, n., extremely evil conduct; Dhp 162; -nittha, mfn., of absolute, constant perfection or firmness; D II 282,32 * S III 13,6 * A I 291,26 (Mp II 381,25: ~o ti antam atikkantanittho, akuppanittho dhuvanittho ti attho); Mill 4,24 (sabbe va ~am nibbnam rdhenti); Mp IV 42,22 (khayavayasankhtam antam atit ti accant, accant nitth ass ti ~o, ekantanittho satatanittho ti attho); -pariyosna, mfn., having an absolute, constant ideal; D II 283,1 * SHI 13,7 * A I 291,27; -piyavdi(n), mfn., always speaking kindly; Ja VI 473,3* (~ini, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se accantam piyabhnini); -brahmacri(n), mfn., living the holy or celibate life absolutely, constantly; D II 283,1 * S III 13,7 * A I 291,27; -yogakkhemi(n), mfn., having absolute, constant peace from exertion; D II 283,i * SHI 13,7 * A I 291,27; Mp IV 42,24 (~I ti accantam yogakkhemi, niccayogakkhemi ti attho); -ruci, mfn., having superior splendour, surpassing in splendour; Th 692 (sa ve ~i ngo Himav v' anfie siluccaye, Ce, Ee so, prob, wrfor accaruci [Be, Se, A III 346,i8*5o]); -vanna, mfn., exceedingly beautiful; Ja V 446,9* (447,2r: nccantavann ti na abhirpavau"); -virodha, m., a strong objection; Sadd902,n (nanu ca iti -e); -samyoga, m., (gr.t.t.) uninterrupted

connection; continuance; Sadd 715,9 foil. (kladdhnam -e [dutiy]; cf PnII.3.5); Sp \01,2&foll. (suttante tva -'-attho sambhavati, yam hi samayam bhagav brahmajldini suttantni desesi accantam eva tarn samayam karunvihrena vihsi, tasm tadatthajotanattham tattha upayoganiddeso kato); Ps I 151,18 (~e upayogavacanam); Ud-a 31,29^0//.; Vv-a 71,25; -sanghika, mfn., exclusively belonging to the sangha as a whole; Ps II 91,27 (ayam vihro -0, ekam puggalikatthnam karohi ti); -samipavacana, mfn., indieating a very near object; Sadd 267,6 (imasaddo ~o); -sila, mfn., of excessive behaviour; JaV 448, is* (449,18': ~s ti atikkantasilsu); -suddhika, mfn., believing in or seeking absolute purity; Niddl 315,11 (ye te samanabrhman ~ samsrasuddhik akiriyaditthik sassatavd); see also ati-anta ^v anta1. accantika, mfn. [cf S. atyantika], continuous, constant; absolute; Th-al 119,10 (sumuttiko ti sundar -tya apunabbhavik muttietass ti); II 11,34 (~ena damanena); -sangahakarana, n. [accantika + sahgaha1 + karana], constant kindly favour; Cp-a 328,22 (janassa ~ena); anaccantika, mfn., not absolute; temporary; Vism 611,26 (ekekam khandham ~-tya di-antavantatya ca aniccato... sammasati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr aniccantikatya); 652,2 (ato tvaklikato, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr aniccantikato); Ud-a 271,26 (tassa upasantassa bhvato). accamaMissam, accamaflfiisum, aor. 1 sg. and 3 pl. o/atimannati qv. accambila, mfn. [ati + ambila], too sour; Sp 181,13 (alonam atilonam anambilam ~am); see also ati-ambila sv ambila. accaya, m. [S., BHS atyaya], 1. lapse, passing; pas sing away; end, death; Abh 404 (palayo maccu cccayo); Sadd 777,7 (vijjamnassa p ' - e : atito himo nihimam icc di); Ja III 159,4' (attano atthassa ~ena); 491,28' (phalnam ~ena tato rukkhato disodisam vihangam gacchanti, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee ~e); ifc see atth'- (^vattha2]; ins tr. ~ena, and, more rarely, abl. ~, loc. ~e (+ gen. or ifc), (i) after the lapse (of), at the end (of), after; Vin I 2,28 (satthassa ~ena); D117,19 (dighassa addhuno -ena); SI 69,28* (ahorattnam ~e); V 262,20 (ito tinnam msnam ~ena tathagato parinibbyissatl ti); Pv25:l (ahorattnam ~ rj kalam kari tad); Ja IV 108,26* (ahorattnam ~e); Cp 3:6:2 (ahorattnam ~ena; Cp-a216,8: bahunnam samvaccharnam atatt anekesam ahorattnam ~ena); Mil 88,29 (tass rattiy ~ena); also + acc. Ap37,2i (~ena ahorattam ...; cf Ap-a 276,11 foil.: aho ca rata" ca ahorattam, bahnam samvaccharnam atikkamen ti atho); Sv 550, is* (ito sattham ~e, or sattha-m'e ?); ifc see katiphaccayena; (ii) after the death (of); Vin I 77,13 (kena nu kho upyena Upli amhkam ~ena sukham ca jiveyya); II 287,31 (kankhamno ... sangho mam' ~ena khuddnukhuddakni sikkhpadni samhaneyya); D II 140,14 (bhagavato... ~ena); 154,8 (yo vo... may dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paniiatto so vo mam' ~ena satth); A III 295,25 (sakkom' aham gahapati tav' ~ena drake posetum); Vv 84:42 (mtpitunnam ca yo -ena); Ja I 248,26 (bodhisatto setthikule nibbattitv pitu -na


setthitthnam ppuni); Sp 212,22 (pituno -ena); Ps I 295, i8 (so tesam ~em dyajjam na labhati); Vin-vn2736 (mam' -e); 2738 (pancannam -e); 2. going beyond (the norm); transgression; offence; A b h l l l 7 (-o 'tikkame dose); Vin V 148,25 (-o tena samo n' atthi); S I 25,2* (tathgatassa buddhassa... ^ na vijjanti); JaIV 384,13* (gantvna tarn patikaremu -am; 384, i6': -am patikarissma desessma khampessm ti); Mil 420,9 (khamatha me bhante Ngasena mama -am); Sp314,i (itaram pana thlatt -tt ca thullaccayam); Mhv 37:23 (khama me tarn mam' -am); ifc see thull' -; accayo mam (no) accagam, a fault has overcome me (us), ie has been committed by me (us); Vin IV 18,33 (-o mam bhante accagam yath blam yath mlham yath akusalam y 'harn evam aksim; Sp 750, is: -o ti apardho); MI 438,23; SI 24,i4 (-o no bhante accagam); AI 54,23; am (-ato) passati, recognises an offence (as being such); Vin I 315,16 (tumhe ... -am -ato disv yathdhammam patikarotha); D I 85,23; A I 103,15 (-am -ato passati); Ja VI 299,8* (ev' etam khalitam mayham etam passmi -am); am (-ato) deseti, confesses to an offence (as being such); Vin I 314,23 (mayam... bhagavato santike -am -ato desem ti); SI 239,i6 (so bhikkhu tassa bhikkhuno santike -am -ato desesi, so bhikkhu na patiganhti); Ap46,i4 (-am desanatthya sayambhum upasankamim; Ap-a290,6.* -am apardham desanatthya paksanatthya); Ud-a 380,12 (handa mayam samanam Gotamam upasankamitv payirupsitv -am desent khampeyym ti); -am -ato patiganhti, accepts (the confession of) the fault, pardons the offence; Vin IV 18,35 (tass me bhante ayyo -am -ato patiganhtu yatim samvary ti); D I 85,19; MI 438,27; A I 59,20 (yo ca -am -ato passati yo ca -am desentassa yamdhammam patiganhti); accayo in Ee at Spk II 14,7 is wr for uccayo (Be, Ce, Se, Dhp so); -desan,/, confession of an offence; Ja III 38,23'; V 379,22 (-am patigganhanto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr accayena desanam); Sp 1387,3 \foll; -patiggahana,., pardon, absolution; JaV 380,17; duraccaya, mfh., difficult to overcome; hard to get beyond or cross over; D II 274,5* (ppimayogni -ni); Dhp 336 (tanham loke -am; Dhp-a IV 45,4: atikkamitum pajahitum dukkaratya -am); Sn945 (kmapanko -o); It 95,2* (chetv sotam -am). accayati \ see sv accati. accayati2, see sv acceti2. accayam in Ee at Sil 205,10 and 205,17 is wr for accagam (Be, Ce, Se so). accaruci, aor. 3 sg. o/atirocati qv. accasar1, see sv accsar. accasar2, accasar3, aor. 3 sg. and2 sg. /atisarati qv. accasarim, accasari, accasaro, aor. o/atisarati qv. accasri, see sv atisarati. accahasi, aor. 3 sg. o/atiharati qv. acckkhara, mfn. [ati + akkhara1; for -a- see svacc-], (gr.t.t.) having (metrically) too many syllables; Sadd 610,21* ('-dike dose vivajjetv); see also adhikakkhara. accdna^thnan ti in Be, Se at Thi-a 63,24 is prob, wr

for accdhnatthnan ti (Ce, Ee so). accdya in Be, Se at Thi-a 63,24 is prob, wr for accdhya qv. accdhna, n. [S. atydhna], the act of placing upon; a butcher's chopping block; Thi-a 63,24 (adhikuttan ti chindandhitthn, -tthnan ti attho, yato khandhe accdhya satt kmehi chejjabhejjam ppunanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se accdnatthnan ti); Sv-pt II 95,15 (adhikuttanakalingaram yam -an ti pi vuccati). accdhya, ind. [absol. of *ati + dahati; cf S. atyVdh], putting on top of; on top of; D II 134,30 (pde pdam accdhya) * SI 27,22 (SpkI 79,23: accdhya ti ati-dhya, isakam atikamma thapetv); A I 114,15 (sihaseyyam kappeti pde pdam accdhya; Mp II 185,13: vmapdam dakkhinapde ati-dhya); Thi-a 63,24 (khandhe accdhya satt kmehi chejjabhejjam ppunanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se accdya, prob, wr); see also accdhyitv, ati-dhya. accdhyitv, ind. [absol. of *ati + dahati? cfS. atyVdh], putting on top of; Spk II 167,10 (pde pdam accdhyitv, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dhyitv); see also accdhya, ati-dhya. accbhikkhanam, ind. [ati + abhikkhanam; for - see .yvacc-), too frequently, too often; accbhikkhanasamsagga, m., too frequent meeting, meeting too often; JaV 233,20* (-... mitt jlranti; 234,12': -ti ativiya abhinhasamsaggena). accyam is interpreted by ct and Sadd as < api ca ayam or < aticca ayam (cf Ved. atyyam), but perhaps is rather <atha ayam; Ja III 334,22* (accyam majjhimo khando Dhammatthassa bhavissati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee athyam; 335,rfoll.: accyam majjhimo khando ti api ca ayam majjhimo kotthso, atha v acc ti aticca, ime dve kotthse atikkamitv thito ayam majjhimo khando ... mayham bhavissati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee athyam majjhimo khando ti; Ce atha v accyan ti aticca); Sadd 635,9 foil. (vuttirakkhanatthne apicasaddassa ikrassa lopo hoti pakrassa ca cakrattam: accyam majjhimo khando ... atha v vuttirakkhanatthne aticcasaddassa tikralopo hoti: accyam majjhimo khando). accyata, mfn. [ati + yata], very much stretched or extended; over-strung (opposite to atisithila/- high, sharp; Vin 1182,3o(vinya tantiyo - honti; Sp 1081,21: -ti ati-yat kharamucchit, Be so; Ee, Se wr accyik ti; Ce omits) * A III 375,10; Sadd 91,10 (brhman... yatena sarena majjhimyatena sarena -ena ca sarena vedam pathanti); see also ati-yata. accyik, mfn. and n. [cf S., BHS tyayika; for -- see ^vacc-], \.(mfn.) (i) urgent, pressing; Vin I 139,13 (sace pan' assa -am karaniyam); MI 149,1 (kincid eva -am karaniyam uppajjeyya); A I 239,28 (tin* imni... kassakassa gahapatissa -ni karanlyni; cf Mp II 354,2: -ni ti atiptikni); Ja I 338,31' (antogehe -am pi kiccam anoloketv); II47,21 (mayham kammam -n ti); Mp I 425,4 (pit mam -kammena kumbhakrassa santikam pahini ti); Vin-vn 1804 (kicce -e); (ii) irregular; beyond normal bounds; Ja VI 549,6* (brhmanena dhanesin -ena luddena; 549,33': ativiya luddena pamntikkantena); Sp 729,1 (accekaclvaran ti -am


clvaram vuccati); Spk I 66,13 (accayo ce na vijjeth ti sace -kammam na bhaveyya); 2. (n.) urgent business; urgency; Dhp-al 18,8 (mayham -am n'atthi); accyika in Ee, Se at Sp 1081,21 is wr for accyata qv; see also acceka. accraddha, mfn. [ati + raddha1], I. undertaken or practised excessively; Th638 (~amhi viriyamhi satth... vinopamam karitv me dhammam desesi; Th-all 270,7 foil.: vipassanam bhventena may samdhin samarasam akatv ativiya viriye paggahite); Ja IV 131,2 (vyamanto ~ena viriyena); Sp 12,5 (mama ~am viriyam); 2. too much exercised; working excessively; Vism 136,6* (mnasam ~am nisedhetv samam eva pavattaye); -viriya, n. and mfn. 1. (n.) too great exertion; Vin I 182,38 (~am uddhaccya samvattati) = A III 375,19 (Mp III 390,11: accraddhan ti atiglham); M III 159,21 (~amkho me udpadi); Pet 187,9; Vism 137,12 (tt); Sp 163,24 (~amcittassa atilmaviriyam cittassa); Spk I 87,6 (ayam tya klam katv devaloke nibbatto); 2. (mfn.) exerting oneself too much; Vin I 182,i (tassa ~assa cankamato pd bhijjimsu); Ja I 317,14 (-0 hutv ativegena samanadhammam karonto). accrambha, m. [ati + rambha], too great exertion; Cp-a 279,16 (~ena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr acchrambhena). accvadati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + 2 + vadati; cf S. ativadati], speaks or addresses in an excessive or improper way; (tries to) surpass in speaking; Vin IV 224,10 (uyyojesi jivake et bhikkhuniyo ~ath ti; Sp 906,19: atikkamitv vadatha akkosath ti vuttam hoti); 263,15 (s bhikkhuni tassa bhikkhuno bhunjantassa pniyena ca vidhpanena ca upatitthitv ~ati; Sp 922, is: pabbajitacrittam atikkamitv gehasitakatham katheti ti attho); Ja V 433,28 (itthi purisam ati vijambhati vinamati vilasati vilajjati..., Ce, Ee, Se so; Be acccarati) * Dhp-alV 197,1; accvadanta, mfn., Sil 204,8(addasamBhandam ca nma bhikkhum ... Abhinjikam ca nma bhikkhum annamaniiam sutena -ante ehi bhikkhu ko bahutaram bhsissati ko sundarataram bhsissati; SpkII 173,24foil.: atikamma vadante ... ativiya vdam karonte ti attho); aor. 2pi. accvadittha, Sil 205,19 (ye tumhe evam... annamannam sutena ~ittha); 1 pi. accvadimha, SII 205,12. accsana, mfn. or n.. [ati + asana2; for -a- see svacc-], eaten too much or very much; or too much or very much eating; Ja I 185,4* (~assa puriso paysassa pi tappati; 185,6': ~ass ti karanatthe smivacanam, ati-asanena atibhutten ti attho). accsanna, mfn. [S. atysanna], very near; too near; very close; A V 15,25 (sensanam ntidram hoti nccsannam); Sp 81,12 (uyynam ... nagarato ntidram nccsannam); Ps II 154,35 (thero hi... ~o hutv gacchanto pi pdasaddena na bdhati); Spk II 376, is (so [vihro] vnijagmassa ntidro nccsanno gamangamanasampanno vivitto appasaddo); Ud-a 323,16 (vihrnam pana nagarato ntidratya nccsannatya); Mhv 15:8 (purassa -tt asruppam); loc. ~e, adv., very near; too close; Vin I 39,3 (yam assa gmato n' eva atidre na ~e); D i l 265,11 (me bhagav n'eva atidre bhavissati na ~ saddam ca kho sossati ti); Ja VI 294,7*

(ntidre bhave ranfio nccsanne vicakkhano); Vism 182,33 (~e [thitassa] bhayam uppajjati); Spl29,i8 (~e nisinno sanghattanam karoti). accsarati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + 2 + sarati2; cfS. atyVsr], goes too far; Pj II 21,16 (accraddhaviriyena hi uddhacce patanto ~ati, atisithilena kosajje patanto paccsarati). accsar, accasar 1 ,/ [from accsarati ?], falsification, deceit; Niddl 79,24 (y evarp my myvit ~ vancan nikati ...kuhan ..., Be so; Ee, Se accasar; Ce accay) = Vibh 358,3 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee accasar; Vibh-a 493,17 foil.: katv ppam paticchdanato aticca saranti etya satt ti -) = Pp 19,30 (Be, Se so; Ce accasar; Ee acchdan). acchita, mfn. [ati + ahita; for -- see sv acc-; cf also S. atyhita], very cruel, very unfriendly; Ja IV 46,24* (~am kamma karosi luddarn; 46,27': hitam atikamma thitatt -am) ^ VI 306,26* (307, r: -an ti hittikkantam ati-ahitam v). a c c i , / (andm. ?) [S. arci, m., arcis,/.], a ray of light; a flame; Abh 35; 1102 (jlamsusv ~i); Vin I 25,30 (hat ngassa ~iyo honti, iddhimato panathitanekavann ~iyo honti); MII 130,6 (siy ... tesarn agginam ... kinci nnkaranam ... ~iy v ~im vannena v vannarn ...; Ps III 359, is: ~iy v ~imhi... bhummatthe hi etam upayogavacanam); HI 183,30 (mahnirayassa puratthimya bhittiy ~i utthahitv pacchimya bhittiy patihannati); S IV 290,27 (~i nikkhamitv tinni jhpesi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr acchi); AIV 103,5 (~i vtena khitt yva brahmalok pi gacchati); Sn 1074 (~I yath vtavegena khitt, Be, Ce so; ifekhitto; Se~i... khittam); Ap 441,25 (pabbatagge yath ~i); Mil 40,23 (kin nu kho mahrja y purime yme -i s majjhime yme ~I ti); Spk II 255,2 (telappadipassa jhyato ... ~im ca vannam ca advayam samanupassati); acci ca in Ee at Sp 837,4 is wr for acchiva- (Be, Ce, Se so); -ma(t), mfn. and m., \.(mfn.) flaming, glowing; brilliant; Mil 152,13 (aggi -m ca vannim ca pabhassaro ca); Vv 38:8 (pabhassaram -mantam); Th527 (te -manto va pabhsayanti); JaV 266,11* (niray ... ghor -manto mahabbhay, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -mant; 272,13': kammanibbattnam accinam atthitya -manto) ^ Niddl 405,5*; JaVI 448,32* (sattiyo teladhotyo -mant pabhassar, Be, Ee so; Ce -manti; Se acchimanto); 2. (n.) fire; Abh 34; As 300,11* (acci -mato); Sadd 334,8* (vessnaro ca -m); see also khuddakaccika, vitaccika. accibaddha, acchibaddha, mfn. [?], laid out in squares or laid out in strips; Vin I 287,8 (addasa kho bhagav Mgadhakhettam acchibaddham plibaddham mariydabaddham singhtakabaddham, Be so; Ce, Se accibaddham; Ee accibandham, prob, wr; Sp 1127,4: acchibaddhan ti caturassakedrakabaddham, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se accibaddhan ti). accukkaftha, mfn. [ati+ ukkattha], (of a robe) pulled up too high; M II 139,21 (na ca tassa bhoto Gotamassa kye clvaram -am hoti; Ps III 393,nyb//.: yo hi yva hanukatthito ukkhipitv prupati tassa ~am nma hoti... yo pi ubhato ukkhipitv udaram vivaritv yti tassa pi ~am hoti); see also accokkattha. accuggata, mfn. [ati + uggata; cf BHS atyudgata], risen


out (of); raised high; high, tall; lofty; haughty; AIV 100,13 (Sineru ... pabbatarj ... catursitiyojanasahassni mahsamudde ajjhoglho catursitiyojanasahassni mahsamudd ~o); Ja II 44,3 (aggi jalitv ~hi accii pannaslam jhpesi, Ce, Se so; Ee wr aggii; Be paccuggathi accii); VI 133,21* (eko ahosi nigghoso bhesm ~o saddo); 516,27* (~ hi Sivayo; 516,30'. ~ ti atikuddh); Ap 75,4 (yaso ~o mamam); Bv 1:53 (nabhe -am dhiram candam va gagane yath; Bv-a48,2o: -an ti abhinavoditam); Mil 164,12 (acal hi s ... pabbajj mahati ~, yad idam bhikkhubhmi); 346,9* (yath ~o eso Himav so bhavissati); Sp 329,14 (udakato ~assa pupphassa); Spk III 154,24 (~am vipulam mahantam hatthiratanam); see also accuggamma. accuggamma, ind. [ati + absol of uggacchati; cf BHS abhyudgacchati], rising out (of); being raised above; Vin 16,35 (uppalni... udak accuggamma thitni, Ee so; Be udakam; Ce, Se titthanti; Sp 963,15: udakam accuggamma thitni ti udakam atikkamitv thitni, Be so; Ee, Se ... titthanti ti... titthanti; Ce omits) = D II 38,33 {Be so; Ce, Se titthanti; Ee thanti) = MI 169,17 {Be udakam; Se udakam... titthanti; Ce, Ee titthanti); Mil 375,7 (padumam udak accuggamma thti); see also accuggata. accunnati, / , see sv accunnati. accunha, mfn. andn. [ati + unha], 1. {mfn.) very hot; too hot; DU 177,28 (samavepkiniy gahaniy samanngato ntisitya nccunhya) = MII 95,2i = A III 65,19; Ja III 423,9 (nahnodakam pi ~am katv); Spkl 323,22 (~ kukkul); accunham in Ee at Ja II 435,22' is probably wrfor abbhunham {Be, Ce, Se so); 2. {n.) excessive heat; Sn 966 (sitam ~am adhivsayeyya, Ee, Se so; Be, O a t h ' unham; Pj II 573, A foil: sitam ca unham ca); -(g)gahanika, mfn., whose digestive heat is excessive; Ps III 326,17 (atisitagahaniko hi sitabhir hoti ~o unhabhir, tesam padhnamna ijjhati) * Mp III 257,27; see also ati-unha {sv unha), abbhunha. accuta, mfn., neg. pp o/cavati qv. accuti-, see svcutx. accuddhumta, mfn. [ati + uddhumta], over-inflated; very swollen; Ps I 107,6 (atimno... -bhvapaccupatthno) = Nidd-al 63,33; -kucchit, / , abstr., the having a very swollen belly; As 404,25 (alamstako nma ~ya utthito pi stakam nivsetum na sakkoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se abbhuddhumtakucchitya) = Nidd-al 345,18. accunnati, accunnati,/ [ati + unnati], raising oneself very much; very great pride; Ps I 170,24 (jti-duii nissya cittassa unnativasena pavatto mno -vasena atimno); see also abbhunnati. accupatthapento in Ee at JaV 124,10 is wr for apaccupatthapento {Be, Ce, Se so). accupati, aor. 3 sg. [o/*ati + uppatati, single -p- mc\ flew up through; Ja IV 250,14* (mendantaram ~I kulinko; 250,17". ~1 ti atigantv uppati, kse sisnam vemajjhe atthsi ti attho). accubbha, mfn. [ati + ubbha], absolutely full or complete; very much fulfilling; Cp-a47,n {[adCp 1:5:2] -an tipi ptho ... ativiya paripunnan ti attho, Be, Se so;

Ce, Ee acchan ti, prob, wr); Sadd 410,18 (Cariypitake ... ~am sgrQpaman ti... -an ti ativiya ycaknam ajjhsaya-m-pranam, akkhubbhan ti pi ptho). accussanna, mfn. [ati + ussanna], too thick; in lumps; Vin II 151,25 (anujnmi bhikkhave ssapakuttam sitthatelakan ti, ~am hoti... anujnmi bhikkhave colakena paccuddharitun ti; Sp 1219,7: bindu bindu hutv titthati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se vindum hutv). accpaseva(t), m(fn). [ati + o/upasevati; for -seesvacc-], attending (someone) too much; being too much with (someone); Ja III 526,1* (anatth tta vaddhanti blam ~ato; 526, is': blam apannam atisevantassa). acceka, mfn. [= accyika #v], urgent, pressing; irregular; Vin III 261,21 (-civaram uppajjeyya, ~am mannamnena bhikkhun patiggahetabbam); Sp 728,25 (~amidanti); -civara, ., a robe or material for a robe given not at the usual time (because of pressing reasons of the giver); Vin III 260,33 (anujnmi bhikkhave ~am patiggahetv nikkhipitun ti; Sp 729,1: -an ti accyikam clvaram vuccati); Sp 1122,9; Vin-vn 864; anaccekacivara,., what is not an accekacivara; Vin III 262,19; Sp 729,26. acceti1, accayati1, see sv accati. acceti2, accayati2, pr. 3 sg. [S. atyeti], I.passes (of time), elapses; passes by, eludes; passes by, neglects; D i l i 185,14* (atth ~enti mnave; Sv948,n: evarpe puggaleatth atikkamanti,tesu na titthanti); SI 3,4* (~enti kl tarayanti rattiyo); Th 145 (~ayanti ahoratt; Th-all 23,16: atikkamanti lahum lahum apagacchanti ti attho); Ja IV 127,14* (eko va macco ~eti eko va jyate kule; 128,24': ito paralokam gacchanto satto eko va -eti atikkamati); 165,22* (appam pi ncceti sa bhripanno; 166,9". appamattakam pi attano attham na -eti ntivattati na hpeu" ti attho); 2. goes beyond; oversteps; overcomes; becomes free of; Sn 184 (viriyena dukkham ~eti); 781 (sakam hi ditthim katham ~ayeyya); JaV 153,18* (puryam amhe ~eti; 153,23" yva esa amhe ntikkamati); VI 359,23* (velam na ~eti mahsamuddo); Pj I 195,8 (rpino v arpino v ti evamdim pannattipatham ~enti); Mhv 37:248 (maccum ~etum); accetha in Ee at Ja VI 17,5* is prob, wrfor appetha {Ce so); absol. aticca [S. atitya], passing beyond; overcoming; being beyond; transgressing (against); SI 53,3* (kathamvidho dukkham aticca iriyati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr kathamvidham); Sn519 (samsram aticca kevali so); 804 (yo ce pi [vassasatam] aticca jivati); Ja V 396,22* (sabbni bhtni aticca Vsavo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adhicca); 424,22* (ete pati pafica-m -aticca nri); Vv-a 72,28 (aticca cro aticro); pp atita, mfn. and n. [ts], 1. {mfn.) (i)past, gone by; former, belonging to past times; Vin 1220,28 (~ni kho me dve msni); D II 198,18 (sabbe te sankhr ~ niruddh viparinat); III 216,16 (tayo addh, -0 addh angato addh paccuppanno addh); SI 140,11* (ye ca ~ sambuddh ... ye ca buddha angat yo c' etarahi sambuddho); V315,3 (~esu me... kmesu kmacchando pahino); Th 1036 (ye purn~ te); JaV 462,15 (~asmim hi kale mahsamudde cha mahmacch ahesum, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit kale);


Ap 135,i (~Q ca bhave); Cp 1:9:1 (~su jtisu); Vibh 367,22 (-am v addhnam rabbha kankhati); Mil 323,6 (nibbnam na -am na angatam na paccuppannam); Sv 382,2 (ye te ~ dhamm te etarahi n'atthi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atitadhamm); Cp-a216,8 (bahiinnamsamvaccharnam-tt); Mhv 18:56 (~e tamhi satthe); atitam addhnam, adv., in the past; D II 82,12 (ye te ahesum -am addhnam arahanto sammsambuddh); MI 8,4 (ahosim nu kho aham -am addhnam); S V 415,6 (ye hi keci... -am addhnamkulaputt... pabbajimsu); Ja III 43, I* (ahu -am addhnam samano, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee~am addhne, prob, wr; 43,6': -am addhnan ti ~e addhne); (ii) having neglected; transgressing; Dhp 176 (ekam dhammam -assa musvdissa jantuno) = It 18,14*; ifc see khan- .yv khana1; (iii) having passed beyond, overcome, escaped from; Vin 125,24* (bhayam ~o); SI 143,9* (jtijaram ~); Th413 (satth hi vijesi maggam etam sang jtijarbhay -am); Ap 424,6 (-o visayam tesam); Sp694,20 (tanhya dsavyam -tt); Sv 702,8 (accankuso hoti ahkusam -o hoti); ifc see kl- (^vkla1), khay- (svkhaya2); 2. (n.) what is past; the past; (a story of) the past; A III 400,7 (-am kho ... eko anto angatam dutiyo anto); Sn851 (-am nnusocati); Ja I 213,10 (bhikkhhi ycito -am hari); VI 439,9* (-ena nnuvijjhanti pandit; 439, 13': atitadosam gahetv mukhasattihi na vijjhanti); Kv 121,15 (-amatthi, -am atitabhvam na jaha" ti); Sv913,20 (-am eva mahne samano Gotamo jnti na angatam); acc. atitam, loc. atite, atitasmim, adv., in the past; Ja I 98,8 (-e Ksiratthe Brnasinagare Brahmadatto nma rj ahosi); IV 398,3 (assa ~e lmakajtiyo paksetv); VI 251,2* (-am addh apardhitam may; 251,10': ekamsena may atitakammam apardhitam virdhitam); Dhp-a III 42,16 (-asmim hi Brnasivsino satta gopladrak...); Cp-a 12,34 (~e kira ekasmim kappe); ifc see anantara- (sv antara); ' -amsa, m. [atita + amsa1 ], the past; D II222,19 (n' eva - ' -amse ... na pan' etarahi); A III 373,4* (-'-amse cha satthro); Thi314 (khditni -'-amse); Dhs 1038 (dhamm... atit -'-amsena sarigahit; As361,i6: kotthsena gananam gat); - ' -attha, mfn. and m. [atita + attha2], 1. (mfn.) who has missed his profit; AIV 228,4* (vnijo va -'-attho cirattam anutapessati; Mp IV 117,4: - ' -attho ti hpitattho); 2. (m.) the sense of the past (tense); Sp 288,13 (karissati ti idam - ' -atthe angatavacanam, aksi ti vuttam hoti); Bv-a252,2 (vandmi ti abhivandim, -'-atthe vattamnavacanam datthabbam); As 309,17 (patihanni v ti - ' -attho); Sadd 819,19 (-' -atthe); -m -attha, mfh., who has missed his profit, neglected the goal; Ja V 77,23* (~-m-attho kapano rudmi; 78,26': -'-attho atikkantattho hutv); m-addhne, in the past; Ja III 43,1* (ahu ~-m -addhne samano, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se atitam addhnam); anantara, mfh., immediately preceding; Ja V 458,27 (so kira -nantare attabhve yakkho hutv); Vism 553,17 (-anantara cuti); Sp 525,17 (-nantarapadam); klika, mfn., belonging to or referring to past time; (belonging to) the past tenses; Pj I 194,24 (purnam klikam kammam); Pj II 16,24 (--kliknam pi hi chandasi vattamnavacanam akkharacintak

icchanti); Nidd-al 387,20 (--klikassa sabbadhammassa ntabhvam dasseti); Sadd 49,27 (parokkhhiyyattanaijatanivibhattiyo klik); cra in Ee at Jail 167,25 is wr for aticra qv; yobbana, mfn., whose youth has passed; Sn 110 (yobbanoposo neti timbarutthanim); neg. anatitayobbana, mfh., whose youth has not passed, still young; Ud-a256,is; vacana, n., (gr.t.t.) a past tense; Sp 1277,3 (idam pana simsyam vacanam); Bv-a 99,38 (--vacane vattabbe vattamnavacanam vuttam); Sadd 49,28 (parokkhhiyyattanaijatanivibhatyantni padni vacanni); vatthu, n., a story of the past (esp. the central portion of a Jtaka story); Jail 333,27 (sabbam vatthum Pakinnakanipte Surucijtake vibhavissati); 111524,15 (--vatthumhi); Spll50,2i (vatthum haritv kathesi); satthuka, mfn., no longer having a master or teacher; D i l 154,4 (satthukam pvacanam n'atthino satth) quoted Mil 98,32; Th-aIII 81,9 (yadi pyam satthuko carimo klo); neg. anatitasatthuka, mfn., still having a master or teacher; Sp4,2i (yva ca dhammavinayo titthati tva anatitasatthukam eva pvacanam hoti); ssana, mfh., disobeying advice or instruction; Ja III 256,17*; anatita, mfh., 1. not having past or overcome; subject to; DII 23,10 (kim ... aham pi jardhammo jaram -0 ti); M III 179,27 (jtim -o); SI 97,17 (sabbe satt... maranam ~); Vism 366,14 (--tt); Patis-a652,3i (~-tya); 2. not past, not gone beyond; not overcome; Spkl 331,6 (sakadgmimaggena -am ... kmadukkham acceti); anatam in Ee, Se at Ja V 455,32' is wr for anttitam (Be, Ce so). accokkattha, mfn. [ati + pp of *o2 + kasati3, kassati', cfS. avakrsta; -kk- by analogy with accukkattha qv], (of a robe) pulled down too far; M II 139,21 (na ca tassa bhoto Gotamassa kye civaram accukkattham hoti na ca -am; Ps III 393,12 foil.: yo yva gopphak otretv va prupati tassa -am hoti... yo ekamsam katv thanam vivaritv yti tassa pi -am). accogjha, mfn. [ati + oglha], too extravagant; AIV 282,2i (samam jivikam kappeti na -am na atihinam; Mp IV 138,8: nccoglhan ti ntimahantam). accodaka, n. [ati+ udaka; for -o- see .svacc-], too much water; Dhp-a I 52,20 (tay katasassam n' eva -ena na anodakena nassati); accodako in Ee at Spk I 38,28 is wrfor acchodako (Be, Ce, Se and Vin III 108,22 so); see also ati-udaka (yv udaka), anodaka (sv udaka). accodara, n. [ati+ ndam; for -o- see sv acc-], too much of a belly; a greater belly; Ja IV 279,19* (udaram nna annesam suva -am tava; 279,23'foil.: annesam udaram udaram eva manne, tava udaram pana ati-udaram). accodta, mfh. [ati+ odta], too white; too pale; Vin IV 7,10 (lihgam ... atikanham -am); MI 88,9 (khattiyakann... ntikli na -); Ja VI 3,6; Spkl 125,8 (odtatthnam -an ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr accodatan); Vin-vn 2489. accha1, mfn. [ts], clear; pellucid; transparent; clean, pure; Abh670 (-0 pasanno vimalo); 1025; D I 76,22 (mani veluriyo ... -0 vippasanno anvilo; Sv221,8: -0 ti tanucchavi);MI 100,15 (puriso ... -e v udapatte sakam


mukhanimittam paccavekkhamno); Sil 281,5 (-am pattam gahetv; SpkII 239,12: vippasannavannam mattikpattam); Vv 79:10 (-ena vrin); Th 199 (-ya atibharitya amataghatikyam); Ja II 100,26* (yathodake - e . . . so passati sippikasambukam ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sippi ca macchagumbam, prob, wr); VI 278,2* (najjyo... ~ savanti ambni); Mil 35,i (vinivaranam cittamhoti -am); Sp 318,27 (tesam -tya); 481,12 (nesam mukhavanno adhikataram pasanno - 0 ...); acchat in Ee at Sp 1095,5 is wr for icchat (Be, Ce, Se so); daka, mfn. and n., \.(mfn.) having clear water; Vinlll 108,14 (daho ~o sitodako stodako ...); MI 76,27 (pokkharani ~ stodak); Ud84,i4* (gantvna buddho nadikam Kukuttham -am stodakam vippasannam) * D II 135,4* (see below); 2. (n.) clear, clean water; Ap 368,24 (~amhi vicaram); Sp 838,33 (tattha -am v sincitv); odi, mfn., having clear water; D i l 135,4* (gantvna buddho nadikam Kakuttham stodikavippasannam, Ee so, mc for acchodika- ? or wr ? Be acchodakam studakam vippasannam; Ce, Se acchodakam stodakam) * Ud84,H* (see above); odika, mfn., having clear water; Th 113 (~ puthusil ... sel;Th-aI 237,2*foil.: acchodak tivattabbe, lingavipallsena - ti vuttam); acchodiko in Ee at Sp 512,10 is prob, wr for acchodako (Be, Ce, Se so); -kafiji, / , -kanjik,/, clear rice-gruel; Vin I 206,29 (~iy attho hoti... anujnmi bhikkhave -in ti; Be, Ce so; Ee, Se acchakanjikan ti; Sp 1092,2i: acchakanjikan ti tandulakamand, Ee, Se so; Be acchakanjiyan ti tandulodakamando; Ce omits); anaccha, mfn., turbid; Abh669. accha2, m. [S. rksa], a bear; Abh 612 (~o ikko ca); 1025; Vin 1220,10 (luddak ... -am hantv); A III 101,31 (dipin v -ena v taracchena v); Ja IV 326,2; V 197,29* (sdayim -am sughorarpam); VI 507,5* (kanhajatino ~ nma aghammig); Cp 3:13:2 (~ehi mahisehi ca); Mil 23,22 (mahisaparivrito viya ~o); Mhv5:31 (kammraslsu ~ ktni ptayum); see also ikka. accha3 = acchi1 ifc; seeseV-. acchako in Ee, Se at JaV 71,1*: read acchakokataracchayo. acchati (and accheti), pr. 3 sg. [BHS acchati; for meaning cf S. ste; according to CDIAL 1031: < S. kseti], is; sits; remains, stays; continues (doing something); sits idle, sits doing nothing; (often used as an auxiliary with part, or absol.); Sadd 451,31 (sa upavesane: ... sati ~ati); 836,23 (dhtussaro rasso hoti sannogakkhare pare -ati, sannoge ti kirn, upsati); Vin I 160,3/o//. (chabbaggiy bhikkh theresu bhikkhsu ukkutikam nisinnesu pavrayamnesu sanesu -anti... -issanti... yo-eyya; Sp 1074,15: -anti tinisinn va honti na utthahanti); II 195,n (manuss psdesu p i . . . chadanesu pi rlh -anti); IV 178,29 (sabbam bhikkhnam vissajjetv appekad anasit -anti); D I 101,23 (aggim paricaranto -ati); III94,19 (ganthe karonta -anti, Be, Ceso; ^-enti; Se gacchanti; Sv870,3i: -anti ti vasanti, -entT ti pi ptho, es' eV attho); AII 15,6* (yatam care yatam titthe yatam ~ yatam saye; Mp III 17,n: ^ ti nisideyya); Vv 74,1 (yatuY -ati devasangho samaggo); Th 936 (smannattho ti -ati); Thi 54 (madhum pit va

-are); Ja IV 25,io* (sibbam -asi); VI 439,6 (nikkammako -issati); 518,6* (yattha tvam saha puttehi saha bhariyya c' -asi, eds so, fut. ? possibly wr for vacchasi; 519, r: -asiti vasissasi); 557,16* (te nna puttak ... khiraplt va -are); Ap269,i6 (thpo 'yam paluggo -ati vane); Mil 88,16 (bahimukho yeva pana -mi); Ps II 49,12 (matako viya -ati); Dhp-a II 3,7 (ds ... pitthim me rujati ti vatv -itum labhanti yeva); imperat. 3 sg. (a) acchatu, Ja IV 306, ie; Sp 1000,9; (b) acchatam, Ja VI 506,8* (-atam saha puttehi); 549,7* (idh' eva -atam Kanh; 550,4". ayam Kanhjin idh'eva hotu); 2 sg. (a) accha, Ja VI 522,17* (gaccha ntikule ~a); (b) acchassu, Ja VI 18,27** 423,7* (idh* evatva -assu yva rjna dakkhisi; 423,irr idh' eva tva ~a yva ...); aor. 3sg. acchi, Vin IV 308,22 (nilino -i); Cp 3:7:2; Dhp-a I 424, M (tantam pasrento-i); 1 sg. (a)acchim, Ja VI 17,8* (sake muttakarisasmim acchham samparipluto; 17,24': acchhan ti -im aham); (b) acchisam, Th 487 (katvna kutim -isam; l h - a l l 204,io: -isam vasim, nisidim c' eva nipajjim ca); 3pl. acchimsu, Ja VI 6,29 (sapp... matthake phanam katv -imsu); Sp 227,23 (niliyims ti ekasmim okse paticchann -imsu); 1120,8 (gamesun ti upacre -imsu); fpp acchitabba, (mf)n. impers., Vin I 160,15 (na... sanesu -itabbam); JaIII 244,2' (atisambdhe okse... -itabbam). acchana, n. [from acchati], sitting; Sadd453,3i (sankase -e, -am nisidanam). acchandit in Ee at Patisl 124,24 is wr for acchandik (Be,Seso). acchanna1, mfn., pp o/acchdeti qv. acchanna2, mfn., neg. pp o/chdeti1 qv. acchara, n. [= acchariya qv], a wonderful thing, a marvel; amazement; Vin II 251,9* (-am, in uddna); Sv228,n* (bhaye kodhe pasamsyam turite kothalacchare ... kare menditam budho) = Ps I 129,33* = MpII 105,25* = Sadd40,27*; Sadd861,2i ( bhuso caritabban ti -am, evam accheram acchariyam); see also acchera. accharaka, see sv accharik. acchara 1 ,/ [cf AMg acchar, BHS acchat; Trenckner (Notes 76) connects with cchurita], 1. snapping of the fingers (-am paharati; as a gesture of command; of annoyance, refusal, contempt; also as a gesture of pleasure); Jail 447,28 (bodhisatto -am paharitv); IV 124,20 (rj -am paharitv nassa vasali... ti tajjesi); 336,5 (-am paharitv morim vasspesi); Sv43,i6 (-yoggan ti acchariyam, -am paharitum yuttan ti attho); Ps II 389,17 (kim tvam etth ti -am pahari, so thtum asakkonto tatth, eva antaradhyi); 111161,8 (daharo... -am pahari, asso gantv ... bhattam bhunji); Spk I 293,32 (ek pi gyi ek pi nacci ek pi -am pahari); Cp-a213,i (tvam ito afinattha yhi ti tassa -am pahari); 2. bringing together the finger-tips (to take a pinch); Spk I 99,16 (-ya gahitam pi nakhena phletv parassa datv); Dhp-a III 19,io (asukena nma -ya ganhitv tanduldini dinnni); 3. (as measure) a pinch; JaV 385,19 (-am sakkharya ... dehi); 4. a finger 's snap, a short moment; Abh 66 (khano das' -); Patis-a 317,34 (-mattam v dasaccharmattam v khanam sampattim


thapetum); -kkhana, m. [acchar + khana1 ], the time of a finger's snap, a moment, Spkll 99,30 (ekasmim hi ~e anekni cittakotisatasahassni uppajjanti); ifc see ek'-; (a)-ggahana, ., a pinch; Dhp-all 213,u (mattam siddhatthakam laddhum vattati); -sanghta, m., a finger-snap, a moment; A I 10,19 (--mattam pi ce... bhikkhu mettacittam sevati; Mp I 70,17*. accharpaharanamattam, dve ahguliyo paharitv saddakaranamattan ti attho); Th405 (mattam pi cetosantim anajjhagam) * Thi 67; Mil 142,6 (mattam pi). acchar2, / [S. apsaras, apsar] ( -narn and -sam ?), a celestial nymph, a female divinity; Abh 24 (~yo); VinUI 17,22 (kidis nma t ayyaputta -yo ysam tvam hetu brahmacariyam carasi ti); M I 253,9 (ekamekasmim ktgre satta satta ~yo); Vv 11:2 (im ca te~yo samantato naccanti gyanti pamodayanti); 16:3 (~ kmavannini); Thi 374 (vicarasi Cittarathe va -); Ja IV 450,n* (parivrit -sam ganena, Ee, Se so; or -sanganena?ite, Ce -nam; see also below); V 152,26 (Sakko ... ekam -am pesetv silam assa bhindpessmi ti); VI 269,28* (tidivokacar va ~); Ap610,i8 (- viya devesu ahosim rpasampad); Mil 169,27 (tathagato... tassa bodhanahetu kakutapdiniyo -yo dassesi); Mp I 317,9 (Nandatthero ~nam hetu rattindivam samanadhammam karoti); Mhv 25:102 (ntakajanayogena -hi vibhsite); -sangana, m. [acchar + sangana2], a troop of nymphs; Vv 17:3 (tvam -am imam dadallamn yasas virocasi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -sangamam; perhaps better accharasam [] ganam; Vv-a89,i9: imam accharnam devakannnam ganam samham attano yasas dadallamn); 82:1 (parivrito -ena) * Ja IV 450,n* (Ee, Se accharsam ganena; Be, Ce accharnam ganena). accharik,/ [acchar1 + ik], snapping of the fingers; M III 299,26 (balav puriso appakasirena-am pahareyya); AIV 263,19 (ek ca gyi ek ca nacci ek ca --am vdesi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be accharam; Mp IV 130, H: pnitalam vdesi); Vism48,3 (~ya sannam adsi); Sp 363,3 (nmena pakkosati -am v hanti, so read with vll Ee accharakam; Be, Ce, Se accharam). accharituttha in Ee and acchariyatuttha in Ce at Pv-a 243,7 are prob, wrrfor aparituttha qv. acchariya, mfn. and n.(m.) [S. Scarya; by Pali grammarians said to be related to Wear + (c/Pn. 6:1:147); or to acchar1; see Sadd 861,20/<?//.], 1. (mfn.) wonderful, surprising, strange, marvellous; unusual, exceptional, of rare occurrence; Abh 736; Vin V 137,2 (attha ~ abbhut dhamm mahsamudde) * AIV 198,5; DU 145,3 (cattro 'me... ~ abbhut dhamm nande); III 191,3 (~nam rasnam samvibhgena); Mill 118,23 (-... tathagata acchariyadhammasamanngat ca); A III 356,14 (~ h' ete ... puggal dullabh lokasmim ye amatam dhtum kyena phusitv viharanti); Thi517 (~am abbhutam tarn nibbnam si rjakannya); Ja IV 197,25* (~am bhojanam laddh); Mil 8,21 (tayo ~ abbhut dhamm pturahesum); Dhp-a III171,10 (aho buddhnam kath nma ~); Ih-a I 119,12 (-tya); acchariy in Ee at SI 136,19 (im <- gthyo) is prob, wrfor anacchariy (Be, Ce, Se so);

2. (n. [and m.]) a wonderful thing; a marvel; S IV 371,io (~am ca vo bhikkhave desissmi -gmim ca maggam); Ja I 223,23 (tarn -am disv); IV138,n (evarpni ~ni disv); V 363,5' (ito pubbe pana idam -am may n' eva sutam na ditthan ti); Ap 147,5 (tarn ca -am disv abbhutam lomahamsanam); Bv 1:65 (anne bah - abbhut lomahamsan); Pet247,n (cattro -); Nett 55,11* (tanhakkhayo -am ca abbhutam... nibbnam etam sugatena desitam); Sp 30,11 (anekni ca -ni pturahesum); Bv-a53,7(te-e dassento); Cp-a 100,6 (pathavikampdayo ... - pturahesum); Mhv 3:40 (-nichesum lokenekni nekad); acchariyam is used often as an exclamation (frequently combined with abbhutam/how wonderful! what a wonderful thing! it's a marvel! Vin I 348,38 (-am vata bho abbhutam vata bho yva pandito ayarn Dighvukumro); D I 60,9 (-am vata bho abbhutam vata bho puMnam gati punnnam vipko); III 115,17 (-am bhante abbhutam bhante tathgatassa appicchat santutthit sallekhat); MI 508,33 (-am bho Gotama abbhutam bho Gotama yva subhsitam cJ idam bhot Gotamena); SII 36,24 (-am bhante abbhutam bhante yatra hi nma ekena padena sabbo attho vutto bhavissati); Ud 35,22 (-am vata bho abbhutam vata bho; Ud-a219,i6: garahanacchariyam nma kir' etam); Ja VI 94,5 (-am vata bho); Mil 28,9 (-am bhante Ngasena abbhutam bhante Ngasena aticitrni panhapatibhnni vissajjitni); '-abbhutacittajta, mfn., filled with wonder and amazement; MI 254,2 (dev ca Tvatims -); SI 156,20; Ja I 408,5 (ativiya tathgatassnubhvena -0 ahosi); Ud-a200,22; Cp-a5,7(dev ... tathgatam upasankamitv - panjalik namassamn payirupsanti); '-abbhutajta, mfn., id.; Ja I 66,7 (rj ... mahpurisam disv -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee acchariyabbhuto jto); Mil 122,8 (vimhito -0); Sp 1006,23 (tarn disv sabbe - ahesum, Be, Ceso; Ee, Se wr acchariyabbhtajt); -manussa, m., a wonderful, exceptional man; A I 22,14 (ekapuggalo ... loke uppajjamno uppajjati -o; Mp I 113,11/0//.: -o ti acchariyo manusso, acchariyo ti andhassa pabbatrohanam viya niccam na hoti" ti attho, ayam tva saddanayo, ayam pana atthakathnayo accharyoggo ti acchariyo accharam paharitv passitabbo ti attho); Jal 277,7 (aho buddha nma~); Vism 93,9; -rpa, mfn. and .., absolutely wonderful, very marvellous; a very wonderful thing; Ja IV 264,8 (-am kira ptihriyam bhavissati); 452,28* (-am vata ydisam ca) * VI 243,27*; anacchariya1, mfn. and n., not marvellous, not surprising; natural; not unusual, unexceptional; a natural thing or occurrence; Vin II 17,31 (-am kho pan' etam bhante yam ayyo Sudhammo puna-d-eva Macchikasandam paccgaccheyy ti); D II 93,11 (-am ... yam manussabhto klam kareyya); S IV 301,21 (~arn kho pan' etam yam mam bhagav evam vykareyya); Ja IV 153,ii (bahhi thambhehi psdakaranam nma -am); Vism 634,22 (-am vuso kathesi); Sp 580,1; Ps IV 117,21 (~-tt); Mpl 329,5 (-am... Sriputtassa idni katannukatavedit); Dhp-a III 134,11 (sace ayam annassa pi evarpam psdam karissati ayam psdo ~o bhavissati); 1h-all 235,20 (ayam dhammo... abhinh-


uppattikatya ~o, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se abhinhapavattikatya na acchariyo); -am, adv., naturally; not surprisingly; Mill 131,29 (-am te Jayaseno rjakumro pasldeyya); Ap-a 95,26 (-am mahrja ayam ... rjadhit... attnam rakkheyya); see also acchara, acchera. accharuj in Ee at Dhp-alV 163,10 is wr for acchariy (Be, Ce, Se so). acchda, m. [S. cchda], covering; clothing; ifc see ghs' -. acchdana, n. (and mfn.?), [S. cchdana, n.], 1. (n.) covering, clothing, cloth; protection; Abh290; 1104 (chadane 'cchdanam vatthe); SV 151,22 (lbhi c'eva hoti ~assa); A III 50, I 9* (dadti... -am sayanam ath' annapnam); Vv22:5 (-am ca bhattam ca... adasirn); Th698 (ghsam -am laddh); Ja I 307,10 (itthiy hi smiko -am nma); Cp 1:6:3; Mil 279,12 (keci -am [denn]); Mhv34:6 (timsabhikkhusahassassa ad-ni ca); for acchdana- in eds at D i l i 160,11* read chdanawith metre; ifc see ghs'-; 2. (mfn.) having a covering, being clothed; ? Ap-a473,24(ajinuttaravsano ti ajinamigacammam uttarsangam katv nivsino ~o ti, eds so). acchdana, / [from acchdeti], covering, concealment; deceit; Pp 19,30 (my myvit -, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se accsar; ^ Vibh 358,3: eds accsar qv). acchdi(n), mfn. [from acchda?], having a covering; ifc see anacchdi(n). acchdita1, mfn., pp o/acchdeti qv. acchdita2, mfn., neg. pp o/chdeti 1 qv. acchdeti, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cchdayati], covers; clothes or presents with (clothes, instr.); puts on (clothes, ace); Vin III 215,13 (Upanandam civarena -essmi); D II133,15 (ekena mam -ehi ekena nandam); Pv 36:39 (-ayissam samanam yugena); Ja IV 172,3 (na cattri vatthayugni -essasi); Ap2,27 (sabbam dussam samhantv -emi ticivaram, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce ticivar; Ap-a 107,9: tecivarehi -emi ti sambandho); 380,20 (icchamno c' aham ajja dusseh' -ayeyya tarn); Th-al 212,6 (ksyni vatthni -ento); acchdeti in Ee at Pet 87,2i is prob, wr; read na ca chdeti ssanam with Be, Ce, Vin II 202,4% and AIV 196,17*; aor. 3 sg. acchdesi1, Vin III 11,20 (bhagavantam ... ticivarena -esi; Sp 200, is: ticivaram bhagavato adsi, idam pana voharavacanamattam hoti); MI 353,14(ekamekam ca bhikkhum paccekadussayugena ~esi); Ud-a 78,27 (acchdanam annam kinci apassanto akkanlni chinditv vkehi palivethetv nivsanaprupanam katv ~esi); 3 pl. acchdesum, SI 177,2 (nam brhmanamahslam putt... dussayugena ~esum); AIII 239,28; absol. (a) acchdetv, Vin I 20,7 (kulaputto kesamassum ohretv ksyni vatthni ~etv) ^ D I 60,18 * MI 163,30; Jal 254,6 (sisam nahpetv ahatavatthni ~etv, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se acchdpetv); Mil 88,3 (theram... kambalena -etv); (b) acchdayitvna, Vv 46:7 (ambe ~ayitvna, Ce, Ee so; Se ambeh' ~ayitvna; Be ambehi chdayitvna); Pv 10:6 (vattheh' -ayitvna); Ap479,2o; pp (a) acchanna1, mfn. [S. cchanna], clothed (with); covered; Vin III 215,26 (ky ham tena ~o pi

karissmi); Jal 500,26' (vatthayugena ~); 111323,23* (Manojam passa semnam -am samhi lohite; 324,5': ^an ti nimuggam); (b) acchdita1, mfn. [S. acchdita], clothed (with); DU 134,is* (tena ~o satth hemavanno asobhatha); anacchditakopina, mfn., with their private parts uncovered; Saddh 106; caus. absol. acchdpetv, causing to put on; presenting; clothing (with); Vin I 22,12 (kesamassum ohrpetv ksyni -etv); DII 19,2i (rj nemitte brhmane ahatehi vatthehi -etv). acchdesi 1 , aor. 3 sg. of acchdeti qv. acchdesi 2 , aor. 3 sg. o/chdeti 1 qv. acchdesi 3 , aor. 3 sg. o/chdeti 2 qv. acchrambhena in Ee at Cp-a279,i6 is wr for accrambhena (Be, Ce, Se so). acchi 1 , n. [AMg id.; S. aksi], the eye; a hole; Abh 149; Sadd332,31* (cakkh' akkhi ... pekkhanam -i); Sp291,26 (tattha tattha -ini dassetv mlkammdini v katv kottitakyabandhanam pi na vattati; S p - t [ ^ ] I I 120,15: -ini ti kunjaracchisanthnni); ifc see kakkatak* -; see also akkhi1, accha3, uddhacchika (jvuddham), ubhayacchikna (^vubhaya), ekacchikna (^veka), kukkutacchikageha (svkukkuta1), sukhumacchika. acchi 2 , is an occasional spelling o/acci qv. acchi 3 , aor. 3 sg. o/acchati qv. acchika, n. [acchi1 + ka2], an eye; ifc see addh'(svaddha1). acchijja, absol. o/acchindati qv. acchidam, acchid, aor. 3 sg. o/chindati qv. acchiddaka, mfn. [a3 + chidda + ka2], without holes or breaks; -ganan,/, counting in an unbroken series; Sv 95,20 (ganan ti -a; Sv-pt I 168,2: prasikamilakkhakdayo viya navantavasena ganan -); Spk III 113,12 (ganako ti ~aya kusalo); Ud-a 205,9 (ganansippan ti sippam); see also acchiddaganan; -pthaka, m., (an accountant) who counts in an unbroken series; Sv 157,i9(ganak ti-, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee acchiddapthak; Sv-pt I 284,7: navantdividhin pavatto gananagantho antar chiddbhvena acchiddako ti vuccati, tarn gananam upanissya jivanti acchiddapthak); see also acchiddapthak sv chidda. acchindati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cchinatti], tears off; removes, removes forcibly; tears away from; robs (someone, ace. or gen.); plunders; deprives (of); Vin III 254,31 (civaram datv kupito anattamano -issati); IV 247,21 (-eyyav -peyya v; 247,28: -eyy tisayam -ati); Jail 327,17* (satim matim -anti pamattassa); IV 249,18 (vatthni -eyyth ti); Sp 908,28 (parikkhre v -anti); Ps III 354,14 (yam amhkam deti tarn -eyya); Vin-vn 190 (nivattham pana vattham yo -ati parassa ce); (a) acchinda(t), mfn., Sp723,i8 (-ato ek patti); Vin-vn 836; (b) acchindanta, m/(~anfi)/i., Cp 3:14:3 (-anto puram mama); Sp 917,2 (ekam -antiy); Vin-vn 835 (-antassa); aor. 3 sg. acchindi1, Vin III 254,28 (Sp723,i4: - i ti balakkrena aggahesi); Dhp351 (acchindi bhavasallni, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee acchidda; Dhp-alV 70,18/?//.: sabbni pi bhavagmini sallni acchecchi, Ce, Ee so; Be acchindi; Se acchejji; perhaps to chindati #v); Ja III 384,17 (sabbam tarn parihram -i);


IV 343,1 (tarn gmam -i); 3 pl. acchindimsu, Vinlll 212,2 (cor... te bhikkh -imsu; Sp665,io: musimsu pattacivarni tesarn harims ti attho); IV 63,8 (tsam bhikkhuninam pacch gacchantinam antarmagge cor -imsu ca dsesum ca; Sp805,3o: pacch gacchantinam pattacivaram cor harimsu); absol (a) acchijja, S I 127,6* (acchiija nessati maccurjassa prarn, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se acchejja; Spkl 188,5/?//.: -itv nayissati, maccurjassa hatthato ~itv nibbnapram nayissati ti vuttarn hoti); Sadd 857,18; (b) acchejja2, SI 127,3* (acchejja tanham; cf Mvu III 285,6*: cchetva trsnm, v/acchetva); (c)acchinditva1, Vinlll 197,29; Mil 109,30 (tass te natak smikam -itv annassa dtukm, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce smik); Thi 444 (okaddhati vilapantim -itv kulagharassa, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be kulagharasm; Thi-a249,2: mama jtakulagehato); Ja II 422,5' (annesam yasam -itv attano ganhti); III 179,7 (hatthato kumram -itv); Mil 20,H (te paresam bhoge -itv); Sadd857,is; (d) acchinditvna, Cp 3:14:5; Saddh 122 (-itvna annonnam); pass, acchijjanta, mfn., Ps IV 58,io (mamyite vatthusmim ... acchijjante pi socanti) * Nidd I 50,8 * 122,4; pp acchinna1, mfn. [S. cchinna], 1. removed forcibly, taken away; plundered; Vin I 343,35 (kotthgaram ca -am); III 234,29 (-am patilabhitv harati; Sp 688,29: cor acchinditv niratthakabhvam natv patidenti); 255,19 (idam me bhante civaram bhikkhussa smam datv -am nissaggiyam); Nidd I 50,s; Sp 358,15 (balakkrena-am); 2. robbed; Vin IV 80,8 (ayam ... pacch gacchanto corehi-o); 245,22 (im bhikkhuniyo ~ bhavissanti); civara, m/h., whose robe has been taken away or stolen; Vinlll 212,30 (--civaro v hoti bhikkhu natthacivaro v; 213, A foil.: civaro nma bhikkhussa civaram -am hoti rjhi v corehi v dhuttehi v yehi kehici v -am hoti); Vin-vn 833 (--civarasspi anpatt' padsu pi); neg. anacchinnacivara, mfn., Sp 665,26; civaraka, mf{clvarik)., whose robe has been taken away or stolen; Vinlll 213,27 (civarake bhikkh upasankamitv); IV 278,25 (anpatti civarikya v natthacivarikya v); Sp 1394,27; caus. pr. 3sg. acchindpeti, Vinlll 255,6 (acchindeyya v -eyya v); IV 224,6 (katharn hi nma amhkam uddositam -essanti ti); 247,37 (acchindati v -eti v); aor. 3 sg. acchindpesi, Ps III 61,2 (thnantaram -esi); 3 pl. acchindpesum, Vin IV 224,14 (bhikkhuniyo uddositam -esum). acchindana 1 , n. [from acchindati], removing; robbing; Sp 1307,8; Ps III 119,i (gatgatnam 0,-attham magge titthato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr acchindanttham); Dhp-a III 70,22 (senpatitthndi-acchindandikam); Bv-a74,i (bhandacchedabhayam disv ti bhandassa -ena bhayam disv ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee avacchindanena). acchindana 2 , neg. o/chindana qv. acchindpana, n. [from caus. of acchindati], causing to remove forcibly, to take away; Vin-vn 2105. acchindi 1 , aor. 3 sg. of acchindati qv. acchindi2, aor. 3 sg. o/chindati qv. acchinditv 1 , absol. of acchindati qv. acchinditv2, neg. absol. o/chindati qv. acchinna1, pp o/acchindati qv.

acchinna 2 , neg. pp o/chindati qv. acchibaddha, see sv accibaddha. acchiman4ala, n. [cfaccibaddha ?], a circular piece of a strip (of robe-material);? Sp725,23 (yadi tato unakaparicched honti antamaso -pamn pi). acchiva, m. [S. lex. akslba], the name of a tree, Hyperanthera moringa; Ja VI 535,19* (- sibal rukkh); Sp 837,4 (in cpd, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr acci ca). acchupanta, mfn., neg. o/chupati qv. acchupeti,/?r. 3 sg. [caus. of*+ chupati], inserts; puts on or in; Vin I 290,2 foil, (yannnham aggalam -eyyam ... so bhikkhu aggalam -esi... addasa ... tarn bhikkhum aggalam -entam ... aggalam ... ~emi; Sp 1128,n: aggajam -eyyan ti chinnatthne pilotikakhandam thapeyyam, Ee, Se so; Be chiddatthne... laggpeyyam; Ce omits); pass. pr. 3 sg. ? acchupiyati, VinII 112,36 (bahalni [patta-]mandalni na -iyanti... anujnmi bhikkhave likhitun ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -iyanti). acchecchi, aor. 3 sg., 2 sg. o/"chindati qv. acchejja1, absol. of acchindati qv. acchejja2, mfn., neg.fpp o/chindati qv. acchejji, aor. 3 sg. o/chindati qv. accheti, see sv acchati. acchetv, neg. absol. o/chindati qv. accheda1, m. [cf S. lex. ccheda], removing; robbing; Nidd I 50,8 (mamyitam vatthum -sankino pi phandanti, Be, Ceso; Ee, Se mamyitavatthu-; Nidd-al 163,29foil: acchinditv pasayha balakkrena ganhissanti ti uppannasankino pi calanti) * 122,4. accheda2, neg. o/cheda qv. acchedana, n. [S. lex. cchedana], robbing, plundering; Ja VI 544,27* (-assa bhymi; 544,30': acchinditv gahanassa bhymi); Sadd 473,9 (lupa -e). acchera, mfn. and n. [= acchariya #v; AMg id.], wonderful, marvellous; surprising; a wonderful thing; a marvel; Vv 47:9 (passa Mtali -am cittam kammaphalam idam); Pv 35:9 (tarn ca disvna -am abbhutam lomahamsanam); Th552 (nyam ajyatano dhammo n' - 0 na pi abbhuto); 1085 (-am vata buddhnam gambhiro gocaro sako; Th-aIII 142,26: -am vat ti acchariyam vata); Ja VI 97,14* (-am vata lokasmim uppajjanti vicakkhan); Ap 124,18 (-am loke uppannam buddhasetthassa vhas); Sadd 861,21 (-am acchariyam); -kamma in Ee at Ja VI 24,25*: read accherakam mam with Be, Ce, Se; -tara, mfn., more wonderful; Vv 84:13; -rpa, mfn., absolutely wonderful, very marvellous; SI 181,5* (-am patibhti mam idam); Pv 30:1 (-am sugatassa nnam); see also acchara. accheraka, mfn. and n. [acchera + ka2; AMg accheraga, accheraya], marvellous; a marvel; Vv 84:12 (yam vo sutam v athav pi dittham -am); Ja VI 24,25* (-am mam patibhti); 513,26* (idam -am disv abbhutam lomahamsanam); Bvl:9 (satth... dassesi -am ptihiram); 1:28 (devat hasanti mahhasitam disvn' -am nabhe); ati-accheraka, (mf)n. (what is) exceedingly wonderful; a great marvel; Ja I 279,30 (imin vnarindena -am katanti)=Cp-a230,i9. aja, m., aj,/ [ts], a goat; (m.) a he-goat, a billy-goat;


(f.) a she-goat, a nanny-goat; Abh 502 (~o chakalako... warn tu aji ~a); Mill 167,24 (ass gon gadrabh ~ mig); A l l 207,29 (ettak ~ hannantu yannatthya); Ja III 125,6* (yam etarn parisappasi ~ kn va ssape); 401,27* (sarabhesu manam katv -a so nvabujjhatha, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se ~yo); IV 251,21 (s pi ~ attan katen' eva mat ti); V 241,24* (hantv uranim ajiyam -am ca); Mil 100,6 (gadrabh ~ pas); Pj I 17,33 (na h' ettha ~am gmam neu* ti disu viya dikammakattam akkharacintak icchanti); Sadd345,i (imni pan' assa pariyyavacanni ~o elako urabbho avi mendo ti); 0, -elaka, AI., '-elak, [aja + elaka1], goats and sheep; (and perhaps two kinds of goats 1); D I 141,27 (tasmim yanne n' eva gvo hannimsu na ~ hannimsu); MI 162,5(~amjtidhammam); SI 76,25* (~ ca gvo ca); Th957 (~am dsidsam ca dummedh sdiyissanti; c/Th-a III 85,36/o//.: ~an ti ejak nma aj yeva, te thapetv avases pasujti aj nma, ~-ggahanen' eva gomahisdinam pi sangaho kato); Ja VI 111,13* (pasum mahisam ca ~am ca hantvna); Nidd I 1,14 (dsids ~); Kv 268,8 (~am patigganheyya); Sadd 345,5 (~an ti ajato elakassa visum vacanato ejakasaddena mendo pi gahetabbo); 751,8 (~am ~ v); (a)-patha, m., a goat-track; Nidd I 155,6 (Nidd-al 280,3: ajehi gantabbam maggam); Mil 280,23 (caramno ~am sankupatham); Vism 305,16 (~sankupathdini gantv); (a)-pada, mfn., "goat-footed", cloven like a goat's hoof; MI 134,17 (alagaddam ... ~ena dandena... nigganheyya); Spkl 135,4 (-en a dandena givya gahetv); Ud-a 233,7 (~ena dandena... uppijetv); (a)-padaka, n.(7) part of the nose (shaped like a goat's foot); Sp 1026,21 (yassa ~e v ekapte v dvepte v yattha katthaci ns chinn hoti; cf As 310,29: ghnam ... ajapadasanthne padese ... titthati); (a)-pla, m., a goat-herd; Ja IV 250,4 (~nam pamdena); Dhp-al 176,23 (~o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce ajaplako); (a)-plaka, /w./(-ik). and n. 1 (m.f) a goat-herd; Vin III 38,14 (annatar ajaplik); Ja IV 476,8 (~ehi saddhim vaddhati); Sp 957,25 (tassa kira nigrodhassa chyya ~ gantv nisidanti); 2. (n.) the bush Costus speciosus; Abh 303 (kuttham tu -am); 1120; (a)-lakkhana, n., signs of health or omen on a goat; D I 9,21 (Sv94,is: evarpnam ajdinam mamsam khditabbam evarpnam na khditabban ti); Nidd I 381,30; (a)-lan4ika,/, a pellet of goat's dung; Ja I 419,16 (~ labhanto); Dhp-all 70,11; (a)-vata, -vatta, n. and mfn. [aja + vata2 or vatta2], I. (n.) living in the way of goats, living as goats do (a practice of certain ascetics); Nidd I 310,14 (govattam v -vattam v ... dya samdya, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce omit, but read govatam); Spkll 399,5 (~-govatasankhtam vatam); 2 . {mfn.) living as goats do (as an ascetic practice); Ja IV 318,8 (govat hutv uyynam agamamsu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ajavattagovatt); (a)-visnavaddhik, (m)f{n)., with points like goats' horns; Vin I 186,12 (~ uphanyo dhrenti, Be, Se so; Ck-vattik; Ee -bandhik); Sp 1084,13 (-'-disu pi es' evanayo, eds so); see also ajakara, ajagara. ajaka, m. (and ~a, / ?) [aja + ka2; cf S. ajak, ajik], a

(young) goat; Vin II 154,10 (~ pi pasuk pi uparope vihethenti); Sp 683,22 (' -disu pi es' eva nayo, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se ajikdisu); Ud-a 64,3 (keci panhu ~e viya satte lpeu* ti Ajakalpako ti); see also ajik. ajakara, m. [= ajagara qv], a large snake; Ja III 484,16* (tesam ~am medam accahsi bahtaso, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se ajagaram; split cpd; 485, ir: -am medan ti ajakaramedam, Ee so; Be ajagarnam medam; Ce, Se ajagaramedam). ajagara, m. [ts]9 "goat-swallower", a large snake; Abh 651; Ja VI 507,2* (sapp ~ nma avis te mahabbal); Ap 16,20 (oguh ~ ca vasanti talke, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajagr); 129,3 (~o mam pilesi ghorarpo mahabbalo); 347,10 (ugghak ~ tattha jtassare bah); Mil364,11; Sp 1175,2(magge ~ nipajjanti); Spkll 232,8 (~o siglam vissajjetv); see also ajakara. ajacca, mfn. [a3 + jacca], of low birth; Ja VI 100,9* (jtimantam ~am ca aham ujjugatam naram ativelam namassissam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jtivantam ~am; 102,7': ujjugatam ekam pi naram hinajacco v hotu jtisampanno v ... namassissan ti); ajacco in Ee at Ja III 19,22* is prob, wr for sujacco (Be, Ce, Se so). ajati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup ajati, Wg 7:55], goes; throws; Dhtup 58 (aja vaja gamane); Dhtum71; Sadd 344,32 (aja khepane ca, gati-apekkho yeva cakro: ~ati ajo). ajaddhuka, ., or - , / [cfS. jagdhv, jagdhum, Vjaks], abstention from eating; MI 245,13 (aham c' eva ... ~am patijneyyam im ca me devat dibbam ojam lomakpehi ajjhohareyyum, Ce, Ee so; Be ajajjitam; Se jaddhukam; Ps II 290,7 [Ee]: ~an ti abhojanam) = II 93,23 (Ce, Se so; Be ajajjitam; Ee omits); see also ajaddhumri, ajaddhumrik. ajaddhumri, / (or -i(n), mfn 7) [cf S. jagdhv, jagdhum, Vjaks], death by starvation; (or dying from starvation; 7); Ja VI 63,15* (yo pi catutthe bhattakle na bhunje ~i va khudya miye, Ce so; Ee ~i va; Be ajutthamri va; Se ajjhutthamri; possibly read -im va, cognate ace; 63,20': ansakamaranam eva, Ce, Ee so; Be anthamaranam; Se sannamaranam iva; see for antha K.R. Norman, 1966, pp. 117-19); see also ajaddhuka, ajaddhumrik. ajaddhumrik,/ [cfS. jagdhv, jagdhum, Vjaks], death by starvation; AIV 283,6 (~am vyam kulaputto marissati, Ee, Ce so; Be ajetthamaranam; Se addhamrakam; Mp IV 138,24 [Ee]: -on ti anthamaranam; see for antha K.R. Norman, 1966, pp. 117-19); see also ajaddhuka, ajaddhumri. ajana, n. [ts], instigating, moving; Sadd 864,7. ajaneti, pr. 3 sg. [neg. o/janeti^v svVjan], does not produce; Kv 576,22 (ajtarn ~eti asanjtam asanjaneti anibbattam anibbatteti). ajamoda, (and ajamoja?) m.(?) [S. ajamod], name of a plant or spice, perhaps caraway; Vv-a 186,23 (in long cpd; Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajamoja). aj,/, see.svaja. ajnmi in Ee at Jail 243,25 is wr; read ma jnrni ti with Be, Ce, Se. ajnika, mfn., seesvjmakz.


ajniyam in Ee at Ap 106,22 is wr; Be, Ce, Se, Ap-a 380,29 khamaniyam. ajniyo inEeatJ&l 194,25 is wr for jniyo (Be, Ce, Se so). ajneyya- in Ee at Pet 152,17 is wr, prob, for jniya (or jneyya) qqv. ajyare in Ee at S I 35,i* is wrfor jyare (Be, Ce, Se so). ajik (and ajiy ?), / [ts]9 a young she-goat; Vin III 166,34 (addasamsu chakalakam ~ya vippatipajjantam); Jal 240,18 (ranno ~ caramn cor haranti); III278,1 (Sakko ... asurakannam ... ~am katv attan ajo hutv); V 241,24* (hantv uranim ~am ajam ca,ite so; Ee, Ce, Se ajiyam; 243,24': uranikam ca ~am ca ajam ca hantv, eds so); ()-khdaka, mfn, eating goats; who eats goats; JaI240,26(ettakamklamrjakule~o esa coro ti); -khyita, (a)-kkhyita, mfn, chewed by goats; Vin V 129,15 (aparni pi panca pamsuklni gokhyitam ~am thpacivaram ...) * Sp 1344,10; -khira, ., goat's milk; Vin IV 88,34; (a)-gopaka, m., a goatherd; Ja 1240, is; see also ajaka, aji. ajinna, n. [S. ajirna], indigestion; '-sank,/, suspicion, fear of indigestion; Jail 362,20 (tumhe gacchatha, mayham ~ atthi ti); see also ajiraka2. ajinnaka, n. [ajinna + ka2], indigestion; MpIII 352,17 (0> -divasena vipajjeyya). ajina, n. [ts], the hairy skin of an animal; esp. the skin of the black antelope (worn as a garment and used as a covering by ascetics); Abh442 (cammam tu ~am); D I 167,i (~ni pi dhreti... kusaclram pi dhreti...); Sn 1027 (ekamsam ~am katv); Ja IV 387,9* (jat ca kes ~ nivatth, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ~ni vatth; 387,18': sakhurni ajinacammni nivatth, Be, Se so; Ce cammani nivatthni; Ee cammni vatthni); VI 61,3* (~amhi hannate dipi; 61,13". cammatthya cammakran); 563,3* (~ni paridahitv); Ap21,io (~am pattharitvna pathaviyam nisidi so); 91,21 (~ena nivattho);424,n (pattharitv 'jinam cammam, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se 'jinacammam); ifc see khara- (svkhara1), khur- (.yvkhura2), danta(svdanta1); ' -uttamavattha, mfn, wearing an antelope skin as an outer garment; Ap 129,H (~o 'ham, Ee so, perhaps wr; Se ajinuttaravattho; Be, Ce ajinuttaravso); 0, -uttaranivsana, mfn. [ajina + uttara1 + nivsana1], wearing an antelope skin as an upper garment; Ap23,29(jatbhrenabharito~o, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ajinuttaranivs, aham); '-uttaravsana, mfn. [ajina + uttara1 + vsana1], id.; A p l 9 , n (jatkhribharit -a, Be, Ce so; Se -vsino; Ee te jat khribhrik ajinuttaravasino); 244,9 (vkaciradharo sim ~o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -vasano; Ap-a 473,23: - 0 ti ajinamigacammam uttarsangam katv nivsino acchdano ti attho); 348,i (sabbe -, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -vsino); '-pasevita, mfn. [ajina + upasevita2], sewn, covered with an animal skin; Ja V 407,4* (~am atricchakoccham; 407,28': ~m ti upari atthatena ajinena upasevitam); -kkhipa, m. orn. [ajina + khipa2], a cloak of antelope skin; Vin I 306,1 (sdhu bhante bhagav bhikkhnam -am anujnt ti; Sp272,2i: ~an ti salomam sakhuram ajinamigacammam); MI 78,12 (ajinam pi dhrenti -am pi dhrenti; Ps II 45,20foil.: ajinanti ajinamigacammam, ~an

ti tad eva majjhe phlitam, sakhurakan ti pi vadanti) ^ A I 240,32; Ja VI 569,14* (dhrentam ~am); -camma, n., the skin of the black antelope; Ja II 269,15 (vakkalni nivsetv ca prupitv ca ~am ekamsam katv); V 316,2 (attano nisidanam ~am mahantam katv pasretv); Ap 348,15 (--saddena vanam saddyate tada); Spkl 181,25 (ajinakkhipanivattho ti sakhuram -am ekam nivattho ekam pruto); -cammaka, n., the skin of the black antelope; Ap 348,5 (pothent ~am); -patta,/ [ajina + patta1], a bat; Abh646; -ppavem, / , a covering or rug made from pieces of antelope skin sewn together; Vin I 192,17 (bhikkh uccsayanamahsayanni dhrenti, seyyathidam ... assattharam rathattharam ~im kadalimigapavarapaccattharanam; Sp 1086,19: M ti ajinacammehi mancappamnena sibbitv kat paveni) ^ D17,11; Ja 153,9 (~iy ganhimsu); -yoni, m., (a source of hides): an antelope, a deer; Abh 617 (mago ~i ca); -sti,/, a garment made of skins; Dhp 394 (kirn te jathi dummedha kirn te ~iy) = Ja 1481,28*. ajini, aor. 3 sg. o/jayati qv. ajira, n. [ts], a court, a yard; Abh 218 (~am caccarnganam); ifc see ghara-; see also ajira. a j i , / [c/aja, aj], a nanny-goat; Abh 502 (uranitu ~iaj); Jal 241,9* (~iy pdam olubbha; 241,13': ajya pdam gahetv); V 241,24* (hantv uranim ~iyam ajam ca, Ee, Ce, Se so, ace, or = ajikam ? Be ajikam; 243,24': uranikam ca ajikam ca ajam ca hantv); Sp 841,5 (gosappin ycito ~iy sappi-dihi deti); see also ajik. ajiraka1, mfh. [/romjirati1], not growing old; free from decay; Dhp -a III 122,13 (satt pana ~ nma n' atthi ti). ajiraka2, m. [fromyir3ti]; AMgajira, ajiraga], indigestion; Jal 404,7 (yvadattham subhojanam bhunjitv --ena marissati); II 362,21 (kknam -onman' atthi); III 213,26 (migapotako bahum tinam khditv -ena klam aksi); 389,6 (bahum gocaram gahetv -na dubbalo ahosi); see also ajinna, ajinnaka. ajuttha, mfn. [S. ajusta], unwished-for, unwelcome; Ja VI 63,15* (~-mri, Be so; Se ajjhutthamri; Ce ajaddhumri; Ee ajaddhumri). ajeli, m. ? [?], a plant or its fruit; Ap 446,21 (kumbhamattam gahetvna ~im jivajivakam chattapannam gahetvna adsim satthuno aham ... yam phalam adadim tad ..., Be, Ce so; Ee ajelarn; Se anjalim). ajja1, ind. [S. adya], today; now; just now; at the present time; Abh 1155; Vin I 102,34 (ajj' uposatho pannaraso); IV 87,5 (sannidhikrakam nma ajja patiggahitam aparajju khditam hoti); 131,31 (ajjav hiyyo v pare v); D I 108,2 (ativiklo kho bho ajja samanam Gotamam dassanya upasankamitum); 205,5 (aklo kho mnavaka, atthi me ajja bhesajjamatt pit); II22,15 (alam dan' ajja uyynabhmiy); 134,10 (ajja kho pan' nanda rattiy pacchimayme... tathgatassa parinibbnam bhavissati); 162,17 (ajja satthaparinibbuto samano Gotamo); MI 393,18 (aklo kho ajja bhagavato vdam ropetum, sve dn' aham... bhagavato vdam ropessmi); II 186,10 (katam me ajja bhattakiccam); SI 92,29 (ajja pana... setthi gahapati mahroruvaniraye paccati); A I 277,8 (yatth* ajja bhagav ekarattim


vihareyya); Sn75 (nikkran dullabh ajja mitt); 508 (bhagav hi me sakkhi Brahm' ajja dittho); Vv 83:16 (ajj' eva buddham saranam vajmi); Th246 (ah tuyham pure saddh s te ajja na vijjati); 889 (brahmajacco pure sim... so 'jja putto sugatassa); Thi41 (ajja me sattami ratti yato tanh visosit); Ja I 279,3 (ajja tarn syam dipakato gacchantam eva ganhissmi ti); 1133,25* (tay' ajja gutta viharemu divasam); V 23,24* (pasadam imam khdamam ajja muiica); 258,6* (ajj' eva pabbajissmi ko jann maranam suve); VI 28,6* (ajj' eva kiccam tappamj; 136,7* (ajja vo pacchim ratti); Ap 101,17 (ajj* eva dni pabbajj ajj' eva upasampad ajj' eva parinibbnam); Cp 3:9:7 (katham me ajjaktave); Mil 9,7 (ajja pabbajitam musvdena niggahessmi ti); Sp 247,7 (ajja ymi sve ymi); Mhv 15:64 (sabbe mam ajja passantu Ojadipamhi mnus); ajjato, from today; Ja VI 45,7 (ajjato patthya); Sp 1265,14 (ajjato patthya mayham salakabhattam ganhath ti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce ajja); Vv-a246,22 (tvam ajjato patthya dvram rakkhanto nisida); Mhv 47:28; Sadd 704,8 (ajjato patthya); -kla, m., this time, today; Ja VI 180,3* (~am padam gaccham; 180,4': aham -am pto va padam mahmaggam gacchanto); Dhp-a I 53,9 (yva ~); -t,/, the present time; SI 83,29 (~am ca bhikkhave rj Pasenadikosalo imam rattim dukkham sessati parjito ti, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se ajjeva); Sp 113, IA foil, (ajjatagge ti -am dim katv... ~an ti ajjabhvan ti vuttam hoti) = Sv 236,6 foil. * Spkl 136,23 foil; -divasa, m.., the present day, today; Ps III 179,21 (tato patthya yva ~); Mhv 32:23 (katam punnam yv' ~ tay); 0 -ratti,/, this night; tonight; Ja III 23,3 (~iyam paccsasamaye satth parinibbyissati); 506,6 (anacchariyam ~im hatabhandam haritum); Ap 584,22 (maranam uparundhati ~im mahvira ppunissmi nibbutim); -satthim, ind., since six days ago, for six days; SI 170,20* (balivadd ... ~im na dissanti); -(s)suve, ind., today or tomorrow; Pv 36:5 (~e jivitassparodho); Ja III 260,12* (~e ti puriso sadattham nvabujjhati); V 66,9* (~e ti samseyya); see also ajjatagge, ajjadagge, ajjanho. ajja2, n. [S. jya], melted or clarified butter (for pouring into the fire at sacrifices); Ja III 425,27* (dhammo mato tassa bahtam ~am aham karissmi, so read ? Be pahuttam ajja; Ce bahtam ajja; Ee bahutam ajj; Sepahnam ajja; 426,2': tassham dhammassa idam matakabhattam karissmi ti attho); VI 207,2* (~ena-maggim idha tappayitv, so read ? eds ajjhena). ajjam in Ee at Sp 1075,28 is wrfor ajja {Be, Ce, Se so). ajjaka, ajjuka, m.n. [S. lex. arjaka, m.], name of a plant, perhaps white basil; Abh579 (ajjuko sitapannse); VinlV 35,9 (aggabijam nma ajjukam phanijjakam hiriveram) ^ Spkll 272,10 (~am, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ajjukam); Sp 836,2 (phaggavapannam ajjukapannam phanijjakapannam); Vin-vn 3091 (pannni ~' -dlnam). ajjanho, ajjunho, ind. [prob. < S. adya + ahnah (so CPD); according to H. Kern, 1916, p. 68, haplology for ajja-*junho], this day, the rest of this day and night; Vin 125,19* (viharemu ~o aggislamhi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se ajjunho); 111220,29 (~o bhante gamehi, Be so; Ce

ajjunho; Ee, Se ajjunho; Sp672,12foil.', bhante ajja ekadivasam amhkam tittha, adhivsehi ti attho; Sp-t[ite] II 406,24: ~o ti pthe ajjunho ti pi pathanti); IV 80,2 (-0 ayy gametha, Be so; Ce ajjanho; Ee, Se ajjunho); V 10,3 (yasm Upanando Sakyaputto upsakena ~o bhante gamehi ti vuccamno ngamesi, Be so; Ce ajjanho; Ee, Se ajjunho). ajjatagge, ind. [ajjato + agge (agga1), or ajja-t-agge, with -t- as sandhi consonant; cf BHS adygre, adydagre], from this day onward; henceforth; Vin I 4,25 (upsake no bhagav dhretu ~e pnupete saranam gate ti) * A I 56,io (Mp II 114,25: ~e ti ajjatam dim katv evam ettha attho datthabbo ajjatan ti ajjabhvam, ajjadagge ti v ptho, dakro padasandhikaro, ajja aggam katv ti attho); Vin I 56,7 (y s bhikkhave may rlhi saranagamanehi upasampad anunnt t 'ham ~Q patikkhipmi); MI 380,17 (~e samma dovrika varmi dvram niganthnam niganthlnam); A III 392,19 (esham bhante -e sanghe dnam dassmi ti); IV 206,15 (na dn' aham bhikkhave -e ptimokkham uddisissmi ti); Ja VI 344,18 (ayam -e mama putto); Mil 88,4; Sp 977,27 (~e dni thero mayham bhro); Pj II 196,18 (~e parjito tvam); see also ajjadagge. ajjatana, mj(~\)n., m and ~ i , / [S. adyatana], \.(mfn.) referring or belonging to today; modern; present; Dhp 227 (pornam etam Atula n' etam ~m iva; Dhp-a III 328,13: idam nindanam pasamsanam v ~am va adhun uppannam viya na hoti); Th552 (nyam ~o dhammo n' acchero na pi abbhuto); Sp 1304,4 (yva ~am klam kena nitanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ajjatanaklam); 2. (m.) the period of the current day; this day, today; Vin I 229,19 (adhivsetu no bhavam Gotamo ~ya bhattam saddhim bhikkhusanghen ti) = D I 109,23; Vin II 275,17 (anujnmi bhikkhave ~ bhikkhunisangham pavretv aparajju bhikkhusangham pavretun ti, eds so; CPD would read ajj' attan); Jail 409,7 (tato patthya kira yv' ~); PsII 213,29 (idam ~ya idam svtanya bhavissati tinesam na hoti); Dhp-a 1275,2 (yv* ~); 3. ajjatam,/, (gr.t.t.) the aorist tense; Sadd29,24 (ettha pana ~iy); 59,8 foil. (~i ti ken' atthena ~i, ajja pabhuti atite kle bhav tabbcakabhven ti); 821,23 (~i 1 urn, 0 ttha ...); 830,23 (kara ice etassa dhtussa ksdeso hoti v -iyamvibhattiyam: aksi...). ajjati, ajjeti, ajjayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. arjati, arjayati], acquires, obtains; Dhtup73 (ajja... ajjane); 548; Dhtum 87; 769; Sadd 345,8 (ajja ... ajjane: ... ~ati); 530,25 (ajja patisajjane: ~eti -ayati); pp ajjita, mfn. [S. arjita], acquired, obtained; Pj 1223,10; Saddh 98; fpp (a) ajjaniya, (b) ajjitabba, (c)ajjeyya, mfn., to be acquired; Pj I 223,5 foil, (eso nidhi sunihito ... ajeyyo ti... ajjeyyo ti pi ptho, tassa ajjitabbo ajjanaraho hitasukhatthikena upajjetabbo ti attho ... sunihitassa ajjeyyattam \oittam bhaveyya, na ca sunihito ajjaniyo ajjito eva so, Ce, Ee so; Be acceyyo ti pi ptho, tassa accitabbo accanraho hitasukhatthikena upacitabbo ti attho ...; Se ajayyo ti pi ptho tassa ajitabbo ajinraho hitasukhatthikena upacitabbo ti attho ...). ajj attam in Ee at Mp II 130,9 is wrfor ajjhattam qv. ajjadagge, ind. [= ajjatagge qv; cf BHS adydagre], from


this day onward; Th485 (~e mam Sopka dassanyopasankama, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se ajjatagge; Ih-aII 203,13: ~etidakaro padasandhikaro, ajja agge dim katv ajja patthya, ajjatagge ti pi pli, eds so); Spl73,i5 (ajjatagge ti... ~e ice eva v ptho, dakro padasandhikaro, ajja aggam katv ti vuttam hoti) * Sv 236,8 = Mp II

ajjana, n. [S. arjana], getting, acquiring; Saddh98 ('-dini dukkhni anubhotv); Sadd345,8 (ajja... ~e: ~am ajjanakiriy); raha, mfn, worthy of being acquired; Pj I 223,6 (ajjitabbo ~o hitasukhatthikena upajjetabbo, Ce, Ee so; Be accitabbo accanraho; Se ajitabbo ajinraho). ajjava, jjava, m.n. [from uju; S. rjava, n.], straightness, uprightness; D III 213, I (~am ca lajjavam ca; Sv 981,2: yo sa ujubhvo idam ~am nma); A III 248, n (~ena javena maddavena khantiy soraccena; MpIII 323,28: ~en ti ujubhvena avankagamanena); Sn292 (~am maddavam tapam ... avannayum) * Ja HI 274, i*; Dhs p. 7,29 (-o ca maddavo ca); Dhs 1339 (-t ajimhat avankat akutilat ayam vuecati ~o); Sadd 807, n (ujuno bhvo jjavan ti ca idam akkharacintaknam rueivasena vuttam, sogatamatavasena pana ujuno bhvo ~o ti kro rassattam pajjati so ca saddapullingattam yebhuyyena); an ajjava, m., lack of uprightness; crookedness; Vibh 359,30 (yo ~o ~-t jimhat vankat kutilat, ayam vuecati ~o); Sv 980,29 (gomuttavankat candavankat nangalakotivankat ti tayo ~). ajjitabba, mfn., fpp of w&d& qv. ajjuka, see sv ajjaka. ajjukanna, m. [cfS. ajakarna], the name of a tree; Ja VI 535, is* (ajjun ~ ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjukanna). ajjunho, see sv ajjanho. ajjuna, m (and mfnl) [S. arjuna], l.(m.) the tree Terminalia arjuna; Abh 562 (~o kakudho); Ja VI 535, is* (~ ajjukanna ca); Ap 346,3 (~ atimutt ca); Bv 8:23 (bodhi tassa bhagavato ~o ti pavuecati); 2. (mfn.) belonging to the arjuna tree; ? Ap 450,20 (gahetv ~am puppham, Be, Ce, Ee so; or split cpd ? Se ajjunapuppham). ajjupekkhya in Ee at Ap 320,23 is wr; Be, Ce ajjhupekkhiya qv sv ajjhupekkhati. ajjeti, ajjeyya, seesvajjati. ajjh- is the form of the preverb adhi- before vowels except I. ajjha [adhi + a5] properly preverb, is sometimes written separately in tmesis; Bv 2:207 (agram ajjha so vasi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se agram ajjhvasi jino) * 3:26 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se agramajjhe) * 4:19 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se agram ajjhvasi so); ajjha is also occasionally found as preverb with verbal forms other than the past tense; see ajjhapatv, ajjhabhseyya; ajjha in Ee at A I 279,26* is prob, wr; Be, Ce ajjhag; Se addh; ajjha in Ee at M II 63,4 is wrfor ajja (Be, Ce, Se so). ajjhakkha, m. [S. adhyaksa], a superintendent; Abh 343; 1066; see also atiyakkha. ajjhagam, ajjhagamsu, aor. 1 sg., 3 pi o/adhWg qv. ajjhagam, aor. 3 sg. o/adhigacchati qv. ajjhag, aor. 3 sg., 2 sg., /adhiVg qv.

ajjhaghayi, aor. 3 sg. [ofcaus. o/*adhi + ghati], made plunge into; made go far into; Ja V 255,16* (tarn va otarani Gang ... samuddam ~ayi agati yattha pakkhinam; Ee so, possibly wr; Be, Ce, Se samuddam ajjhaghsi; CPD would read samuddamajjhag 'hsi; cf256,\r: agati yatth ti samuddamajjham sandhyha; c/MvuIII 454,2*: samudram abhisreti agati yatra paksinm). ajjhagum, ajjhag, aor. 3 pi o/adhWg qv. ajjhat in Ee at Vv 34:7 is wrfor ajjhag (Be, Ce, Se so). ajjhatta, mfn. and n. [prob, from ajjhattam^v, but cfS. adhytma], inner; subjective; within oneself; what is internal; oneself; Abh 1040 (sasantne ca visaye gocare 'jjhattam uccate); SII 125, zfoll (yam kinci rpam ... ~am v bahiddh v ... ye keci sankhr ... ~ v bahiddh v, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce ... ~am ... ~am ...; note that on most occurrences of this passage the descriptions of vedan, saiin and sankhr are omitted); Nidd I 1,19 (~ km bahiddh -- ajjhattabahiddh km); Vibh 26,2 (tividhena vedankhandho atthi -o atthi bahiddho atthi ajjhattabahiddho); Dhs 1044 (ye dhamm tesam tesam sattnam ajjhattam paccattam niyat patipuggalik updinn rp vedan ... vinnnam ime dhamm ~); Vism661,2i (-am abhinivisitv ~ vutthti); ifc see gocar' -, niyak' -; ' -ajjhatta, (mf)n., (what is) inward as being internal (as opposed to external); It-all 168,H (ajjhattik dhamm bhir dhamm ti ettha vuttam ~am); Ud-a 374,19 (ayam ajjhattasaddo cha ajjhattikni yatanni ti disu -e gato); Sadd906,9; -bahiddha, mfn., inward and outward; personal and external; Niddl 1,19; Dhs 1046; Vibh 115,2 (tini sacc siy ajjhatta siy bahiddh siy ~). ajjhattam, ind. [S. adhytmam], concerning oneself in oneself; inwardly, personally; in regard to oneself (opp. bahiddh); VinUI 4,9 (~am sampasdanam cetaso ekodibhvam avitakkam avieram... dutiyam jhnam upasampajja vihsim; cfSp 147^,23foil: attani jtam attano santne nibbattan ti ayam ettha attho); D II 300,11 (atthi me ~am kmacchando ti pajnti); III 49,20 (~am vpasantacitto); S V 143,14 (tvam bhikkhu ~am v kye kynupassi viharhi... bahiddh v kye kynupassi viharhi); A I 40,n (~am rpasanni bahiddh rpni passati); It 82,7* (~am samayam cittam santim evdhigacchati); Sn 1111 (~am ca bahiddh ca vedanam nbhinandato); Th 272 (cankame cankamim so 'harn ~am susamhito); Sv 250,1 (~am kodhdipaccatthike bahiddh ca sabbarjno vijeti ti vijitvi); Mp II 130,9 (kmabhavo -am nma jtam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajjattam); Ap-a 191,13 (bahiddh v anavassuto ~am aparidayhamno); (a)-cinti(n), mfn., occupied in thought with internal things; Sn 388 (~i na mano bahiddh nicchraye sarigahitattabhvo; Pj II 374,20: tilakkhanam ropetv khandhasantnam cintento); (a)-bahiddh, ind., inwardly and outwardly; in regard to oneself and to others; D II 292,2 (~ v kye kynupassi viharati; Sv 765,15: klena attano klena parassa asssapasssakye); M III 112,8 (so ~ sunnatam manasikaroti); JaV 83,ir (~-samutthnehi hirottappehi); -vhana in eds at Pet 94,13 is prob, wr for


ajjhvhana qv; -samutthna, m/h., originating from within or in regard to oneself; Ja 1207,17 (imassa n' eva ~ hin atthi na bahiddhsamutthnam ottappam); It-al 157',8 foil (~ hin); Ud-a 126,3 (~o bdho bahiddhsamutthno tanko). ajjhattika, mfn. and n. [S. dhytmika], personal; internal, inward; belonging to oneself (opp. bhir,); what is personal, what belongs to oneself D III 243,14 (cha ~ni yatanni, cakkhyatanam sotyatanam ...); MI 185,14 (pathavidht siy ~ siy bhir); 190,26 (yato ...~am c' evacakkhum aparibhinnam hoti bhir ca rp ptham gacchanti tajjo ca samannhro hoti evam tajjassa vinnnabhgassa ptubhvo hoti); SI 73,2 (bhir h' es rakkh n' es rakkh ~); Ja IV 402,12 (koci-d-eva ycako bhiravatthum aycitv ~assa nmam ganheyya); VI 164,12' (niyam puttan ti -puttam); Niddl 346,24 (~am vuccati cittarn); Vibh 392,20 (katamni attharasa tanhvicaritni ~assa updya); Sv 312,27 (ssanato bhir et samdhibhvan na ~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr jjhatt); Ps II 230,23 (manodvre pana ~o mano nma bhavangacittam); Spk I 254,5 (aham pi ~am kasim kasitv). ajjhapattam, ajjhapatt, ajjhappatt [prob, redupl aor. /adhipatati qv, S. *adhyapaptat, taken as f of pp, and altered to agree with subject; see O. von Hinber, 1974, pp. 65-72. The spelling with -pp- reflects ct analysis as from -ppunti], rushed at, rushed on; reached; D i l 259,1* (pakkhi ... vehsay te vanam ajjhapatt; cf S. apaptan; Sv 689,2: imam mahvanam sampatt); SV 146,19 (sakunagghi lpamsakunam sahas ajjhapatt aggahesi, so readl eds ajjhappatt); Sn 1134 (evam p' aham ... mahodadhim hamsa-r-iv' ajjhapattam, so readl eds ajjhapatto; NiddII[#e] 209, s: adhigacchim); Ja II 450,27* (vitatapo ajjhapatt, so read ? eds ajjhappatto; 451,s'folL: vigatatapohutv upagato tarn khditum pakkhanto ti attho); 111296,2* (bhujangamo kakkatam ajjhapatt, so read ? eds ajjhapatto); VI 566,30* (tarn ajjhapatt rjaputtim udakena abhisiiicatha, so read ? eds ajjhapattam; 567, r; attano santikam pattam, pdamle patitv visannibhtan ti attho); see also udapatt, udapattsi sv uppatati.. ajjhapatv, absol. [formed on basis of supposed pp ajjhapatt qv], hurrying to, reaching; Bv 10:3 (tarn ajjhapatv upanisidi; Bv-a 184,24: tarn sonarukkham parva adhipatv upagamm ti attho). ajjhaparam in Ee at S V 218,19 is wr for accasar3 qv sv atisarati. ajjhappatt, ajjhappatto, see sv ajjhapattam. ajjhabhavi, aor. 3 sg. o/adhibhavati qv. ajjhabhsi, aor. 3 sg. [o/*adhi + bhsati1], addressed; VinI 21,12 (Mro... bhagavantam gthya ~i); SIV 117,14 (Mahkaccno te mnavake gthhi -i); ; Sn p. 46,18 (s devat bhagavantam gthya ~i); Vv 84:2 (amnuso mnuse~i); JaV 51,8* (ngo ... luddakam ~i); 3 sg. tm. 1. ajjhabhsatha, addressed; spoke; Ja IV 210,19* (phandanarukkho pi tvade ~atha); V 340,20*; 2. ajjhabhsittha, Ja IV 234,29* (rjnam Klingam taramno ~ittha); VI 448,14* (pesiye Mttha; 448,18': adhiabhsittha puretaram eva abhsittha); 1 sg.

ajjhabhsim, MI 171,2; 3pl. ajjhabhsimsu, SI 124,17 (Mram ... gthya ~imsu); see also ajjhabhseyya. ajjhabhseyya, opt. 3 sg. [o/*adhi + bhsati1, see ajjha-, and BHSG 32:8 for adhyabhsati in Mvu], would address; JaV 351,3*(yathca myyam Sumukho ~eyya pandito); see also ajjhabhsi. ajjhabh, aor. 3 sg. o/adhibhavati qv. ajjhayana, n. [S. adhyayana], study, learning by heart (of the Vedas); Mil 225,31 (in cpd: -ajjhpana-); Th-a II 85,8 (tissannam vedasankhtnam vijjnam -ena samannamattena tevijjo); Nidd-al 211,18 (ajjhenena v ti -vasena v, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ajjhyanavasena); As 111,33 (jetthasisso ... sayam adhiyamno itare pi drake attano attano -kamme pavattayati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjhesane); Sadd 322,28 (i ~e, ~am uccranam sikkhanam v); see also ajjhna, ajjhena. ajjhavhari, aor. 3 sg. [of *adhi + ava + harati; cfS. abhyavaVhr], ate; Ja II293,13* (bhojanam ~i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ajjhuphari; 292,20' foil.: ambarasam ajjhohari); see also ajjhoharati. ajjhavodahi, aor. 3 sg. [of *adhi + odahati; perhaps original *ajjhavdahi changed under the influence of ct odahi], put down in; JaV 365,29* (panjare ~i; 366,3': M ti odahi thapesi); see also ajjhohita. ajjhgamam, aor. 1 sg. [of *adhi + 2 + gacchati; S. adhyVgam], / attained; Ap 49,9 (bodhim ~am aham, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ajjhagamam). ajjhgamum, aor. 3 pl. [of adhi + 2 + gacchati; S. adhyVgam], they found; SI 12,13* (pariyesamn njjhgamum, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se njjhagamum; perhaps read na ca jagmum, see O. von Hinber, 1982, pp. 31 foil). ajjhgre, ind. [adhi + loc. of agra], at home, in one's house; A I 132,3 (sabrahmakni ... tni kulni yesam puttnam mtpitaro - pjit honti; Mp II 203,15: sake ghare) = It 109,21. ajjhcarati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS adhycarati], 1. practises, commits (an offence); Vin III 241,35 (imin imam cetpehi ti ~ati, patti dukkatassa; Sp700,i: -v ti adhibhavitv carati, vitikkamavcam bhsati ti attho); MI 523,4 (abhabbo so panca thnni ~itum); Mil 266,31 (yam kilesam lokavajjam abhabbo khinsavo tarn ~itum); Patis-a216,i3 (vitikkamati ti ~ati); As 89,24 (yam hi kyena dussilyam ~ati tamh samvaro kyiko veditabbo); (a) ajjhcara(t), mfn., Sp 536,8 (ekenpi krena ~ato); (b) ajjhcaranta, mfn., Sp 1323,20 (yam ~anto pattim pajjati); 2. has sexual intercourse with; aor. 2 sg. ajjhcari, Vv-a240,27 ([parabhariy] m agam tim ~i); 3pl ajjhcarimsu, Ja IV 231,18 (te annamannam ~imsu, Ce, Ee so; Be ajjhcram carimsu; Se omits); absol. ajjhcaritv, Sv 1043,6 (bahurn assmanakam ~itv); pp ajjhcinna, mfn., habitually done, practised; Vin II 80,34 (bahum assmanakam-am hoti); 305,6 (kappati bhante... idam me cariyena ~am tarn ajjhcaritun ti); Ud 29,1 (so tassa vasalavdo digharattam ~o, Ee, Seso; Be, Ce, Ud-a 194,8 samudcinno; Ud-a 194,13: ~o ti pi pathanti). ajjhcra, m. [BHS adhycra], misconduct; transgression (esp. sexual); Abh430; Vin III 121,8


(kyasamsaggam sampajjeyy ti -o vuccati); IV 128, n (-am paticchdeti); JaV 429,22 (tesam... annamaraiam patibaddhacittnam... paticchannokse -o pavatti); Mil 127,20 (m tvam sanniptam -am eva manni); Sp 213,30 (s ca ten' eva -ena gabbham ganhi); Ap-a 509,8 (ssane osakkamne satta bhikkh catunnam parisnam --am disv); ajjhcram in Ee at JaV 318,18* is wr for ajjhvaram (Be, Ce, Se so); anajjhcra, m., not transgressing; Nett 44,15; Mil 127,24. ajjhcrika, mfn. [ajjhcra + ika], who commits an offence, who transgresses; Sp 1414,7 (ekasikkhpadam pi -puggale asati paniiattam n' atthi). ajjhcre, ind. [adhi + loc. of cra], as regards conduct; Vin I 63,33 (adhisile silavipanno hoti ~e cravipanno hoti; c/*Sp989,2i (prjikam ca sanghdisesam ca panno adhisile silavipanno nma, itare pancpattikkhandhe panno -e cravipanno nma). ajjhcinna, mfn.,pp of ajjhcarati qv. ajjhjiva, n. [abstracted from ajjhjive qv], way of life; Ps IV 38,12 (-am adhiptimokkham ca rabbha uppannavivdo nma). ajjhjive, ind. [adhi + loc. of jiva], as regards way of life; MII 245,17 (sanghe vivdam janeyyum ~e v adhiptimokkhe v; Ps IV 38,7: jlvahetu v jivakran). ajjhna, n. [= ajjhayana qv], study; Dhtum580 (i -e gatimhi ca); see also ajjhena. ajjhpajjati, pr. 3 sg., 1. [BHS adhypadyate] commits an offence; incurs; is guilty of; Sp 259,30 (patti pana yo nam -ati tarn parjeti tasm prjik ti vuccati); As 219,6 (yya cetanya catubbidham vaciduccaritam bhsamno -ati nma ayam uppajjitv tath -itum na defi ti anajjhpatti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajjhpajjhati nma ... ajjhpajjhitum ...); ajjhpajjanta, m/(~anti)., Vin III 164,16 (prjikam dhammam -anto); IV 237,13 (sanghdisesam -antiy); 2. [c/pajjati ?] reaches; pp ajjhpanna, mfn. (often confused with ajjhopanna qv), 1. (act.) (i) who has committed, become guilty of (an offence); Vin I 49,19 (sace upajjhyo garudhammam ~o hoti parivsraho); V 55,6 (Thullanand bhikkhuni jnam prjikam dhammam ~am bhikkhunim n' ev' attan paticodesi na ganassa rocesi); A IV 277,6 (garudhammam ~ya bhikkhuniy); Mil 255,1 (yo koci gihi prjikam --o bhaveyya); neg. anajjhpanna, mfn., Vin III 166,12 (suddho hoti puggalo annataram prjikam dhammam anajjhpanno); (ii) who has reached, obtained; Ps II 384,12 (nattam panntabhvam pkatabhvam ~o); 2. (pass.) (i) committed; ? Vin 1103,37 (santi nma patti ~ v hoti pajjitv v avutthit, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ~o ... avutthito); neg. anajjhpanna, mfn., VinI 103,28 (asanti nma patti anajjhpanna v hoti pajjitv v vutthit, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se, Sp 1034,28 anajjhpanno v... vutthito; Sp 1034,28^0//.: yam pattim bhikkhu anajjhpanno v hoti pajjitv v vutthito ayam asanti nma pat ti, eds so); (ii) reached by, connected with; ? Ap-a 103,19 (samatimsaprami, thi sam sutthu punn sampunn samanngat samangibht - samyutt ti timsapramisampunn, eds so).

ajjhpatti, / [BHS adhypatti], transgression; committing (of an offence); Vin II 243,36 (prjikassa dhammassa ~i hoti); anajjhpatti, / , nontransgression, the not committing (of an offence); VinV 91,2i (pancahi pattikkhandhehi rati... akiriy akaranam -i vel-anatikkamo) ^ Dhs 299 (cathi vaciduccaritehi rati... ~i)= Vibh 106,33; As 219,7. ajjhpana1, n. [from caus. of adhiyati; S. adhypana], teaching, instruction; Mil 225,31 (in cpd: ajjhayanaajjhpana-); ifc see ajjhena-; -para, mfn., intent on teaching; It-all 140,1 (yaju-dimantapadnam ~am tevijjam brhmanam na vadmi). ajjhpana2, n. [from jhpeti], not burning; Ja VI 311,7' (allahatthassa -am nma). ajjhpanna, mfn., pp o/ajjhpajjati qv. ajjhpannaka, m. [ajjhpanna + ka2], one who has committed (an offence); VinI 121,2 (antimavatthum ~o patijnti); 167,34 (na antimavatthum -assa nisinnaparisya pavretabbam). ajjhpilita, mfn. [pp of *adhi + 2 + pfleti], harassed, tormented; Pv-a 180,21 (khuppipsya -, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se att pflit; Ce attit pilit). ajjhpekkhimsu, aor. 3 pi. [of *adhi + ape(k)khati, perhaps with strengthening of vowel following ajjh-, cf&cc-; or with augment preceding apa-], they considered, regarded; Ap 181,13 (yakkhnam samayo si avidre mahesino yena kiccena sampatt ~imsu tvade; Ap-a 452,28: tasmim desanakle adhi-apekkhimsu visesena passanasil ahesun ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adhipekkhimsu, prob. wr). ajjhbhava, m. [from ajjhbhavati; cf S. abhibhava ?], domination, subjugation; defeat (in dicing ? see K.R. Norman, 1987, p. 33); Jail 357,6* (pubbe v' -am tassa rakkhe akkhi va pandito; cf 357,15' foil.: tassa ppamittassa -am tena abhibhavitabbam attano lbhayasajivitam, yath nam so na ajjhbhavati tath pathamataram eva ... rakkheyya); see also anajjhbhva. ajjhbhavati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + 2 + bhavati; cfS. abhibhavati ?], dominates, subjugates; ? Ja II 357,16' (yath nam so na -ati). ajjhya, m. [cf S. adhyya], 1. chapter or section of a book; Abh911; 2. study; recitation; Nidd-al 198,2i (ajjhenena v ti 0-karanena v, Be, Ce, Seso; tesajjhya-) ^ 211,18 (Be, Se ajjhyanavasena v; Ce, Ee ajjhayanavasena); Ap-a 430,18 (sissnam savanadhrandivasena hitam ajjheti cinteti -am karoti ti ajjhyako cintako ti attho, Ee, Ce, Se so; Be sajjhyam). ajjhyaka1, m. [cf S. dhyyika], one who studies (the Vedas); a studious, learned person, a scholar; D I 88,4 (-0 mantadharo tinnam vednam prag) = A I 163,n * Ap37,n (Ap-a 275,32: ~o ti paresam vedattaydim vcet); Th 1171 (-0 pi ce assa tinnam vedna prag); Ja VI 201,27* (-nam); Ap-a 430,14/0//. (ajjheti cinteti ti ajjhyi, ajjhyi yeva - 0 . . . sissnam savanadhrandivasena hitam ajjheti cinteti ajjhyam karoti ti -0 cintako ti attho); Sadd 322,32 (-0 ajjhyati ti -0 mante parivatte ti attho); an ajjhyaka, m, one who does not study (the Vedas); Mil 154,4; Ud-a51,i4 (na japanu" ti ajap, mantnam - ti attho).


ajjhyaka2, see sv jhyaka. ajjhyati, pr. 3 sg. [prob, denom. from ajjhya], studies, learns; Sv 247,16 (~atl tiajjhyako mante parivatteti ti) = MpII 261,12; Sadd 322,29 (adhiyati adhiyati ~ati adhite); see also ajjheti, adhiyati. ajjhyi(n)1, mifn). [S. adhyyin], one who studies (the Vedas); Ap-a 430, u (ajjheti cinteti ti ~i, ~i yeva ajjhyako, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ~i). ajjhyi(n)2, see sv jhyi(n). ajjhrma, m. [abstracted from ajjhrme qv], the territory, grounds of a park; VinlV 162,20 (yo pana bhikkhu ratanam ... annatra ~ ugganheyya; 163,25foil.: ~o nma parikkhittassa rmassa anto-rmo, aparikkhittassa upacro). ajjhrme, ind. [adhi + loc. o/rma], within the park; Vin I 187,3i (na ca bhikkhave ~e uphan dhretabb); IV 162,16; Sp 934,22 (~e rjgrdini karonti); Vin-vn713. ajjhruha, ajjhrha, mfn. [V/ajjhrhati], growing in and up over (as a parasite); dominating; S V 96,8 (santi... mahrukkh anubij mahky rukkhnam ~ yehi rukkh ajjhrlh obhaggavibhagg vipatit senti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjhrha); AIII 63,12 (nivaran cetaso ~ pannya dubbalikaran, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ajjhrha) quoted As 382,22 {Be so; Ce ajjhrlh; Ee ajjhroho; Se ajjhrlh); Ja III 399,3* (ajjhrha 'bhivaddhanti brahantarn pi vanaspatim, Be so; Se hi vaddhanti; Ce, Ee ajjhrlh; 399,14". nigrodhdayo rukkh ~ hutv mahantam pi anfiam vanaspatim atikamma vaddhanti ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ajjhrha); anajjhruha, anajjhrha, mfn., not dominating; SV 97,4 (bojjhang ... cetaso ~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anajjhrh). ajjhruhati, see sv ajjhrhati. ajjhrlh, mfn., pp of ajjhrhati qv. ajjhrha, see sv ajjhruha. ajjhrhati, ajjhruhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf BHS ahyrohati], grows in and up over (as a parasite); spreads over, dominates; SI 221,34* (~ati dummedho, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ajjhruhati; Spkl 343,2: -all ti ajjhottharati) = Nett 173,3* (Ce, Ee so; Be ajjhruhati); Vibh-a370,i2 (~ati, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee ajjhruhati); pp ajjhrlh, ajjhrlh, mfn. [cfS. adhyrdha], I. (act.) having grown in and up over; Ja III 399,3* (~ 'bhivaddhanti brahantarn pi vanaspatim, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se ajjhrha); 2. (pass.) grown over, grown upon; spread over, dominated; S V 96,8 (rukkh ~ obhaggavibhagg vipatit senti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ajjhrlh); neg. anajjhrlha, mfn., not spread over or dominated; Patis-a98,13 (dutiyajjhnasmim hi samdhi... vitakkavicrehi anajjhrlhatt). ajjhroha, m., name of a mythical sea-monster; Abh 673; Ja V 462,17 (nando timando ~o, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ajjhohro) * Sv 487,5 = Spk II 88,12 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjhoharo); ajjhroha in Ee at As 382,22 is prob, wr for ajjhrha. ajjhvara, m. [itf/Sadhyvara], companion, member of a retinue; Ja V 318, is* (bhavantam ~am katv, Be, Se so; Ee ajjhcram; Ce ajjhcram; 318,24'foil.: parisam parivrarn katv); 326,3* (bhtur ~ mama; 326,13': mama

bhtu paris hutv gat); 327,29*. ajjhvasati, pr. 3 sg. [S. adhyVvas], inhabits; dwells in, lives on (as ruler or owner); esp. agram ~ati, lives the settled life of a house-holder; Vin III 104,7 (annataram bhikkhum iitak etad avocum ehi bhante agram ~ ti); IV 224,31 (gahapati nma yo koci agram ~ati); D I 87,8 (brhmano Pokkharasdi Ukkattham ~ati); II 16,13 (sace agram ~ati rj hoti cakkavatti); MI 91,22 (na tvam agram -eyysi na kme paribhunjeyysi); S III 146,2 (eko yeva so psdo hoti yam aham tena samayena ~mi); Ja V 450,17* (rj ca pathavim... ~e vijinitv); Ap 94,6 (ktgravarpetam vyamham -issati); Kv 167,34 (puttasambdhasayanam ~eyya); Mil 88,15 (kincpi agram ~mi bahimukho yeva pana acchmi); (a) ajjhvasa(t), mfn., Vin III 12,io (na-y-idam sukaram agram ~at); A I 49,15 (gihinam agram -atarn); (b) ajjhvasanta, mf~antl)n., SI 100,31 (rannam... pathavimandalam abhivijiya -antnam); IV 249,12 (asapatti agram ~anti); Jail 314,26 (~anto); Mil243,4 (gihi odtavasano kmabhogi puttadrasambdhasayanam ~anto); Ps III 300,2 (agram ~antenapi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~entena); Dhp-al 6,25 (sakk geham ~anteh' eva punnni ktum); (c)ajjhvasamna, mfn., Ja I 56,io; II 391,ii (agram ~amno, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee agramajjhe vasamno); Vism 419,3; Ps II 187,3 (agram ~amno); cond. 3 sg. ajjhvasissa, JaV 414,30 (sace pana satth agram ~issa) * Sadd 52,20 (~iss); Ps II 2,21 (sace bhagav agram ~issa ksikavattham eva adhrayissa); aor. 3 sg. ajjhvasi, D II 272,15 (eko pana devo te va kme ~i; Sv708,n: nikantim chinditum asakkonto kme ~i tatth' eva vsiko ahosi); AIV 105,11 (pathavim... abhivijiya ~i); Ap 354,14 (puram ~i tad); 1 sg. ajjhvasam, AIV 89,21 (pathavim ... abhivijiya -an ti, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ~in ti); absol. ajjhvasitv, D III 76,24 (tarn ypam usspetv ~itv tarn datv vissajjetv; Sv 857,5: tattha vasitv); Sp 1116,3 ([Sakko] cariyassa sarire ~itv); pp (a) ajjhvuttha, mfn. and n., 1. (mfn.) lived in, inhabited, occupied; Vin II 210,32 (~am v anajjhvuttham v); Sil 106,1 (nagaram... pubbakehi manussehi ~am); Ja II 333,20 (kasmim kle bhante ayam psdo Bhaddajittherena ~o ti); Ap 401,24; Vism 213,2 (buddhagunnussatiy ~am c' assa sariram pi); neg. anajjhvuttha, mfn., Vin II 208,28 (sace vihro anajjhvuttho hoti); DIII 207,10 (santhgram acirakritam hoti anajjhvuttham samanena v brhmanena v); Pj II 566,27 (kinci thnam jardihi anajjhvuttham nddakkhim); see also anajjhvutthaka; 2. (n.) inhabiting; Spk II 118,5 (mahkutumbikena ... nagaram ~-klo viya); pp (b) ajjhvasita, mfn., lived in; Pet 154,13 (yo olrikamhi kilese ~e, so read with Mnamoli, 1979, p. 211 ? eds ~o). ajjhvasatha, m. [abstracted from ajjhvasathe qv; c/*ajjhrma], the inside or environs of a house or dwelling; Vin IV 163,14 (annatra ajjhrma v ~ v; 163,26: ~o nma parikkhittassa vasathassa anto-vasatho, aparikkhittassa upacro). ajjhvasathe, ind. [adhi+ loc. o/vasatha; cf ajjhrme], within a house or dwelling; Vin III 239,7 (anpatti


ajjhrme v -e v); IV 163,10; Vin-vn 713. ajjhvasana, n. [from ajjhvasati], living on; living in; Ja II 403,5' (Brnasim gahetv -ato Brnasiggaho); Sv957,3(agram -samattho). ajjhvahana, n. [from *adhi + vahati], bringing towards, bringing near; attraction; Pet 94,8 (paficasu kmagunesu -na kmsavo); 94,13 (-am kmsavassa lakkhanam, so read with Nnamoli, 1979, p. 126 ? eds ajjhattavhanam). ajjhvuttha, mfn., pp 0/ajjhvasati qv. ajjhsa, m. [= ajjhsaya qv], intention; wish; Ap85,6 (kathayanto ca tarn pafiham -am prayissati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ajjhsayam); 85,10 (-am tesam premi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ajjhsayam). ajjhsane in Ee at Ud-a46,8 is prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se ajjhene. ajjhsaya, m. [BHS adhyaSaya], 1. lair; resort; As 314,19 (sotam p'etam bilajjhsayam ksasannissitam kannacchiddakakpake yeva -am karoti); 2. disposition; motivation, intention; desire, wish; Abh 766; Ja I 88,17 (bhagav tesam -am oloketva); IV 237,16 (tumhkam pana ko -0 ti, pabbajitukmo 'mhi ti); 239,16 (pucchitv -am assa sutv dnakranam jnissmi ti); V 3,26' (chando ti -0); VI 546,25 (-am me tta matthakam ppehiti); Nidd I 64,13 (sakam laddhim sakam -am sakam adhippyam... accayeyya); Sp 1165,6 (ma mam ekabhikkhu pi jnt ti imin -ena); Dhp-aIII 217,9 (satth tass' -am viditv); As 334,24 (~ato); Cp-a27,i6 (alobhajjhsaydayo cha bodhisattnam -); nurpa, mfn., fitting one's wish or disposition; Sv 732,26 (attano -ya desanya); am, -ena, adv., according to one's wish or disposition; Ja III 437,19 (attano -am dutiyagthya vuttya); IV 309,8 (ses pi attano ~ena tarn tarn gtham abhsimsu); VI 301,31' (idni tava -am karom ti); Spk II 171,3 (satthu -en' eva); Ud-a249,27 (svakena nma satthu -am patipajjitabbam); nusandhi, m., connection, development (of a sutta^ because of, or according to, the disposition (of the hearers); Sv 122,22 foil, (tayo hi anusandhi pucchnusandhi -i yathnusandhi); Ud-a4,3o; see also attajjhsayika (sv atta[n]), saya. ajjhsayam, ind. [adhi+ acc. o/saya], as to the intention, state of mind; D i l 224,9 (tinnavicikiccho ... so bhagav... -am dibrahmacariyam; cf Sv658,nfoli: karanatthe paccattavacanam, adhiksayena uttamanissayabhtena dibrahmacariyena pornabrahmacariyabhtena ca ariyamaggena tinnavicikiccho); III 39,14 (svak vinit asssappatt patijnanti -am dibrahmacariyam; c/Sv 835,n/o//.: -an ti uttamanissayabhtam ... idam vuttam hoti... aijhsaydibrahmacariyabhtam ariyamaggam pretv arahattdhigamavasena asssam patta patijnanti ti). ajjhsita, mfn. [pp of *adhi + sayati], intent on, bent on; attaching oneself to; Mil 361,30 (jhnajjhsitatapavaravihri, Ee so; Be, Ce jhnajjhosita-; Se jhnajjhyi-); Pv43:4 (-0 mayham ghare, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ajjhosito; Pv-a267,17foil: mama gehe tanhbhinivesavasena abhinivittho); see also ajjhosita. ajjhharati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + 2 + harati; cfS. adhyharana,

adhyhra], (gr.t.t.) supplies, infers; Sadd 619,8 (-an); absol. ajjhharitv, Sadd 339,9 (sayam ev ti padam -itv); pp ajjhharita, mfn., supplied, inferred; Sadd 339,25 (tumhehi -ito sayamsaddo); fpp ajjhharitabba, mfn., Sadd 265,5. ajjhhra, m. [S. adhyhra], (gr.t.t.) supplying (in an elliptical expression); Sadd 727,11 (uppannan ti -vasena). ajjhittha, mfn., pp o/ajjhesati qv. ajjhinamutta, mfn. [adhi + ina + mutta1], released from debt;? Sadd619,n (-0). ajjhitt in Ee at D II 289,2 and Sv 740,28 (ajjhitt panh) is wr; Be, Ce, Se ajjhitthapanh. ajjhipekkhitabb in Ee at Ps III 133,7 is wr for ajjhupekkhitabb (Be, Ce, Se so). ajjhupagacchati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + upa + gacchati; cfS. abhyupagacchati], comes to, reaches; enters (a state); consents to, agrees; ThI474 (~e ghtam yo vinri evam satthuno vacanam; Thi-a 260,3: -e ti sampaticcheyya); aor. 3 sg. ajjhupgami, Ja II 403,3* (sannamam ajjhupgami); 3 pi. ajjhupgamum, Ja V 323,io* (sabbe panjalik hutv isinam ajjhupgamum; 323,13': isinam santikam upagat); p p ajjhpagata (and ajjhupgata, prob, mc rather than from * ajjhupagacchati), mfn., I. (act.) who has come to, reached; entered upon; agreed to; gone over to; Vin III 24,4 (bhikkhcariyam -o ti bhikkhu); D III 81,15 (te tumhe settham vannam hitv hinam attha vannam -); A V 87,3i; Vv 17:2 (tuvam si - yasassini); Th587 (smannam -assa); 1109 (sabbam pahya idam ajjhupgato); Ap47,i (hinattam ajjhupgato); Mil 300,31 (-0 kapiniddam); Vibh-a 327,24 (~-tt); 2. (pass.) reached, entered upon;? Sp239,8 (buddhdihi -am bhikkhcariyam) = Vibh-a 327,23. ajjhupagamana, n. [from ajjhupagacchati; cfS. abhyupagama], consent, agreeing to; Vin II 97,34 (kammassa kiriy karanam upagamanam -am adhivsan); 104,5; V 156,23. ajjhupgata, mfn., mc for ajjhupagata qv sv ajjhupagacchati. ajjhuphari, aor. 3 sg. [of *adhi + upaharati], ate; J II 293,13* (bhojanam -i, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se ajjhavhari; 293,21': ambarasam ajjhohari). ajjhupekkhaka, mfn. [from ajjhupekkhati], disinterested, impartial; looking on without interfering; Vism 467,3 (tatramajjhattat ... sampavattnam jniynam -srathi viya datthabb) = As 133,22; As 196, i7(-tsankhtena majjhattkrena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajjhpekkhkatasankhtena) * Vism 321,25 (-ttasankhtena); Cp-a287,27 (-0 ca hoti upekkhthniyesu dhammes ti). ajjhupekkhana, ajjhupekkhana, n., - , / [from ajjhupekkhati; BHS adhyupeksana], disinterestedness, impartiality; unconcern; looking on without interfering; Nidd I 501,12 (y catutthe jhne upekkh upekkhan - cittasamat) * Vibh230,i2; Ps I 298,30 (ajjhupekkhanat); Dhp-aIV 3,i8 (tattha adhivacanam -am eva bhro); Cp-a232,i8 (na kho pana m'etam patirpam yadidam ime satte evam ppapasute ... disv


-am); As 133,21 (cittacetasiknam(a)-vasena). ajjhupekkhati (and occasionally ajjhpekkhati), pr. 3 sg. [BHS adhyupeksati], looks on without interfering; views with impartiality or disinterestedness; tolerates, condones; Vinll 78,34 (tvam... amhe Dabbena Mallaputtena vihethiyamne -asi ti); A III 435,12 (yasmim samaye cittam -itabbam tasmim samaye cittam na -ati); Ja I 147,21 (Devadattassa pakkhik bhikkhuni kucchin gabbham pariharati, Devadatto ca tarn -ati); V 229,5 (tumhe ... vinicchaymacce lancam gahetv lokam vinsente kasm -atha); Niddl 508,22* (samhitacittapannya ~eyya); (a)ajjhupekkha(t), mfn., MII 223,13 (~ato); (b) ajjhupekkhanta, m/(-anti)w., Ja V 8,5' (-anti); Ud-a262,23 (bhagav -anto nisidi); aor. 3sg. ajjhupekkhi, Mil275,9 (piye putte... tena brhmanena latya anumajjiyante disv -i); 3pi. ajjhupekkhimsu, MI 155,25 (-imsu kho); absol. (a)ajjhupekkhitv, SV 440,11 (dittam... celam v sisam v -itv); PatisI 91,33; 1h-a I 207,11 (akkhirogam -itv); (b) ajjhupekkhiya, Ap 320,23 (ukksitam ca khipitam-iyamnav, Be, Ce so; Se -ya, Ee ajjupekkhya, wrr ?) * Bv 1:52 (Be, Ee so; Ce -itva; Se -itvna); (c) ajjhupekkhya, Ap 320,23 (Se so; Ee ajjupekkhya; wrr? Be, Ce ajjhupekkhiya); jfc/? ajjhupekkhitabba, mfn., A I 126,9 (atthi... puggalo ~itabbo na sevitabbo); IV 45,23 (katthaggi... klena klam -itabbo); Ps III 133,7 (anekaratanapr mahnv bhinnaphalantarena udakam diyamn muhuttam pi na -itabb hoti, Be, Se so; Ee wr ajjhipekkhitabb); fpp neg. anajjhupekkhitabba, m/n., Ps III 133,8 (ayam pi anajjhupekkhitabbo, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se na -itabbo). ajjhupekkh, / [BHS adhyupeks], disinterestedness, impartiality, unconcern; Pet 149,11 (upekkhca - ca). ajjhupekkhita(r), m. [from ajjhupekkhati], one who looks on with disinterestedness, detachment; M III 85,i; S V 69,9 (so tathsamhitam cittam sdhukam - hoti) = Vibh 227,22. *ajjhupeti,/?r. 3 sg. [adhi + upeti; cfS. abhyupaiti], goes to; approaches; goes to meet; opt. J sg. ajjhupeyyam, D III 23,25 (tarn eva sayam ~eyyan ti); fut. 1 sg. ajjhupessam, Ja IV 440,10* (aham canammlini -essam) * 440,26* (rosit -essam; 442,10': sayane upagamissmi); aor. 3 sg. ajjhupesi, D III

ajjhuposatho in Ee at Sp 1060,13 is wr for ajjuposatho (Be, Ce,Seso). ajjhpekkhkatasankhtena in Ee at As 196,17 is wr for ajjhupekkhakakat- (Be, Se so; Ce ajjhupekkhat-). ajjheti1, see sv adhiyati. ajjheti2, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Vdhi, Vdhyai, but perhaps ajjheti1, cf S. adhyeti], cares for, longs for; broods; Sn948 (na so socati njjheti; Niddl 433,11 foil.: na upanijjhyati na nijjhyati na pajjhyati; Pj II 568,20: njjheti ti nbhijjhati). ajjhena, n. [= ajjhayana qv]> learning, study (esp. of the Vedas); recitation; Mil 199,17 (~am... brhman catuttham dhammam pannapenti punnassa kiriyya kusalassa rdhanya; Ps III 446,8: ~an ti mantagahanam); JaV 10,15* (~ni patiggayha; 10,i9': ~nl ti vede);

Vibh353,26 (ekacco... dhanena v -na v kammyatanena v... mnam jappeti); It-al 4,ifoll. (vuttasaddo ... ~e kathane t i . . . dissati... vutto gano vutto paryano ti disu ~e9 Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ajjhesane) * Ud-a 45,24/o//. (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ajjhesanakathandisu ... ajjhsane,prob, wrr); ifc see chand'(sv chanda2); ajjhena-m-aggim in eds at Ja VI 207,2* is prob, wr for ajjena-; see .yvajja2; -ajjhpana, ., learning and teaching; It-all 134,16 (lapitalpanamatten timantnam mattena); -kujja, ., useless studies; Sn242 (~am, Ee so; Ce ajjhenakujjham; perhaps wrr; Be, Se ajjhenakuttam; Pj II 286,2: nkatmaknatmajanakaganthapariypunanam, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se niratthakam anekaganthapariypunanam); see also ajjhayana, ajjhna. ajjhesaka, m. [BHS adhyesaka], one who requests (recitation of the dhamma,); ifc see dhamm'-. ajjhesati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS adhyesati], requests; asks (esp. for instruction or recitation of the dhamma; see Sp 1058,5/o//.); VinI 116,24 (te theram -anti uddisatu bhante thero ptimokkhan ti); II 300,16 (yasm Revato antevsikam sarabhnakam bhikkhum ~issati); AIV 153,8 (smam v dhammam bhsati param v ~ati); Nidd I 258,8 (pucchati papucchati ycati ~ati); Sp695,n (anumodanya ~ati dhammakathya ~ati); ajjhesanta, mfn., Nidd II [Be] 198,11 (~anto; Ee 11210,2); aor. 3sg. ajjhesi, Vinll 200,10 (Devadatto... yasmantam Sriputtam ajjhesi); Bv-a 12,M; 1 sg. ajjhesissam, Nidd II 210,10 (apucchissam aycissam ~issam); absol. ajjhesitv, Ps II 136,24 (paccsakle dhammadesanam ~itv); pp (a) ajjhittha, mfn. and n. I. (mfn.) [cf S. adhista, BHS adhyesta], requested; asked (esp. to preach the dhamma,); Snp. 218,13 (bhagav... brhmannam ~o puttho puttho pafihe vyksi); Ja VI 292,28* (~o na vikampeyya; 293,2': rann idam nma karohi ti ~o natto); Ap351,io (-0 kathayi buddho gambhiram nipunam padam); Dhp-alV 101,22 (satthr ~o); 2. (n.) a request; Sadd814,i8 (ajjhesanam -am); 815,2 (-e ... sattami vibhatti hoti); panha, m., the question asked; the chosen question; DII 289,2 (ye Sakkena devnam indena panh putth, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajjhitt panh; Sv 740,28: ajjhesitapanh patthitapanh, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se putthapanh); neg. anajjhittha, mfn., unbidden, uninvited; VinI 113,5 (chabbaggiy bhikkh sanghamajjhe anajjhittha dhammam bhsanti); Nidd I 230,7 (anajjhittho v dhammam bhanati); (b) ajjhesita, mfn., requested, asked; Niddl 211,5; Pj 1131,27(ekam-0 pi); Ud-a 277,19 (sabbe bodhisatt ... patisandhiggahanya ~, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee patisandhigahanamajjhesit); neg. anajjhesita, mfn., unbidden, uninvited; Niddl 68,9 (anycito anajjhesito; Nidd-al 198,15: annpito, na icchito ti eke);fpp ajjhesitabba, mfn., VinV 163,8 (paro v -o); Sp 1059,27. ajjhesan, / , - a , n. [BHS adhyesan, adhyesana], request, entreaty (esp. to expound or recite the dhamma); Abh 427; Vin I 6,23 (bhagav ... brahmuno ca -am viditv) = D II 38,19; Vism 712,2*; Sp 1058,5 (-a cy ettha sanghena sammatadhammajjhesakyatt v


sahghattheryatt v); It-al 4,7/0//. (vuttasaddo ... ~e kathane ti... dissati... vutto gano vutto paryano ti disu ~e, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce ajjhene) * Ud-a 45,24 foil. {Be, Ce, Se -ajjhenakathandisu ... ajjhene; Ee -ajjhesanakathandisu... ajjhsane, prob, wrr); Sadd 814,18 (-am ajjhittham); 693,27 (-ena); ajjhesanam in Ee at Ja II 327,16* is wr for ajjhenan ca (Be, Ce, Se so); ajjhesane in Ee at As 111,33 is wr; Be, Ce, Se ajjhayanakamme. ajjhesita, m/w.,/?/?o/ajjhesati qv. ajjhoksa, m. (and mfh. ?) [abstracted from ajjhokse qv], 1. (m.) the open air; VinUI 200,12 (-0); IV 45,16 (rukkhaml v ~ v nikaddhati); 270,15 (~o nma appaticchanno kuttena v kavtena v...); 2. (mfn.) being in the open air; Ps II 228,13 (vivittam -am bhmibhgam, Ee, Ce, Se so; Be abbhoksam; or ajjhoksam, ind. ?) -gata, mfh., being in the open air; Sil 230,20 (na -0 ramati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se abbhoksagato); see also abbhoksa. ajjhoksam, ind. [adhi + acc. /oksa], in the open air, in the open; Ps II 228,13 (vivittam -am bhmibhgam, Ee, Ce, Se so; Be abbhoksam; or ajjhoksa, mfh. ?). ajjhokse, ind. [adhi+ loc. o/oksa], in the open air, in the open; Vin I 15,24 (bhagav... ~e cankamati) * SI 212,6; Vin III 57,16 (bhikkhu ~e civaram pattharitv vihram pvisi); Dhp-aIV 101,20 (bahud eva rattim ~e vitinmetv); Vism380,20 (yasmato Sriputtassa ... navoropitehi kesehi ~e nisinnassa); see also abbhoksa. ajjhokirati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + o2 + kirati], bestrews; scatters down on; D II 137,20 foil, (yamakasl sabbaphliphull honti aklapupphehi, te tathgatassa sariram okiranti -anti abhippakiranti tathgatassa pjya, dibbni pi mandravapupphni... tathgatassa sariram okiranti -anti abhippakiranti; Sv 575,36: -anti ti ajjhottharant viya kiranti); see also avakirati. ajjhogahetv1, see sv ajjhoghati. ajjhogahetv2, ind. [absol. of adhi + o2 + ganhti?], grasping; Pj 1185,29 (yo ariyasaccni avecca passatl ti yo cattri ariyasaccni pannya ajjhogahetv passati, Ee, Ce, Se so; Be ajjhogahetv; or ajjhogahetv1 ?). ajjhoglha, mfn., pp o/ajjhoghati qv. ajjhoghaka, mfn. [from ajjhoghati], who has plunged into, entered; Ap-a468,3 (sahghassa vanarn -assa adadim). ajjhoghati,pr. 3 sg. [adhi+ oghati; cfS. abhyavaVgh], plunges into, enters; puts out (to sea); D I 101,5 (vanarn -ati); MI 72,23 (tathagato im attha paris upasankamati -ati); A III 368,24 (smuddik vnij... nvya samuddam -anti); Niddl 152,24 (oghati -ati pavisati); (a) ajjhoghanta, mfh., Pj I 176,15 (cakkaratanam ... samuddam -ati tasrnim -ante ...); (b) ajjhoghamna, mfh., Pj II 216,8 (pannya -amnam); aor. 3 sg. ajjhoghi, ajjhogahi, Ap 174,n (~i mahvanam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjhogahi); 350,5 (Anuruddho nma sambuddho ... vanarn ajjhogahi tad, Be, Ce, Se so, mc; Ee wr ajjhogahim); absol. (a) ajjhogahetv (and ajjhoghitv; sometimes written ajjhogahetv1, probably influenced by gahetv;

cfoghati), Vin III 18,30 (mahvanam -etv); DU 134,21 (nadim -etv nahtv ca pivitv ca paccuttaritv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjhogahetv) = Ud84,s; MI 359,15 (tarn vanasandam -etv, Be, Se so; Ee -itv; Ce ajjhogahetv); III 173,io (cakkaratanam puratthimam samuddam ~tv paccuttaritv, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se ajjhogahetv); Jal 7,4 (Himavantam -etv, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ajjhogahetv); Mil 300,27 (vanam -itv, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ati); Spkl 133,4 (arannam -etv, Be so; Ce, Se ajjhogahetv; Ee wr ajjhogetv); PsII 230,15 (tanh... -itv gilitv gahanavasena ajjhosnan ti vuccati ?); (b) ajjhogayha, Ap 363,19 (ajjhogayha vanam tad); pp ajjhoglha, mfn., who has plunged into, entered; immersed (in); A IV 100,12 (Sineru... catursitiyojanasahassni mahsamudde -o); Mil 348,1* (passaf rannake bhikkh -e dhute gune); Ps III 131,i (bhagav mahsaram ~ suvannamahnv viya); ppatta, mfn. [dvandva; or pp as action noun], immersed in, intimate; SI 201,17 (so bhikkhu annatarasmimkuleativelam patto viharati; Spkl 294,21: patto ti oghappatto). ajjhoghana, n. [from ajjhoghati], entering, plunging into; Ps IV 223,11 (dakkhinasamuddam -am); ifc see atth'-(^v attha2). ajjhogetv in Ee at Spkl 133,4 is wr, prob, for ajjhogahetv qv sv ajjhoghati. ajjhothapetv in Ee at Pv-a 148,26 is wr; read gmamajjhe thapetv with Be, Ce, Se. ajjhottata in Ee at Jal 363, is' and 1162,16' is wr for ajjhotthata qv sv ajjhottharati. ajjhottarati ti in Ee at Ap-a 178,27 is wr for ajjhottharati ti (Be, Ce, Se so). ajjhottari in Ee at Jal 330,20 is wr for ajjhotthari1 qv sv ajjhottharati. ajjhottaritv in Ee at Jail 62,2r is wr for ajjhottharitv (Be, Ce, Se so). ajjhotthata, ajjhotthata, m/.,/?/?0/ajjhottharati qv. ajjhottharana, n. [from ajjhottharati], covering, spreading over; overwhelming, flooding; Sp 1401,30; Spk II 80,6 (gvutaddhayojanamattam -am); Patis-a 612,23 (rgdayo hi 0,-atthena rajo nma); anajjhottharana, n., the not covering, not overwhelming; Jal 215,6 (imassa vanassa aggin -am); As 51,15 (--bhvena). ajjhottharati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + ottharati], covers, spreads over; overcomes, overwhelms; threatens; Vin I 111, 1 5 (chabbaggiy bhikkh simya simam -anti); 111,20 (yo -eyya); A III 92,2 (bhikkhum... mtugmo upasankamitv abhinisidati abhinipajjati -ati); Ja III 58,8 (abhikiranti -anti); Niddl 16,27 (te parissay tarn puggalam ... abhibhavanti -anti pariydiyanti); Mil 296,17 (api nu kho tarn ... udabindu dasa pi dvdasa pi yojanni -eyyti); Sv 264,2 (afinena v vacanena annam vacanam paticarissasi -issasi paticchdessasi ti attho); Th-all 175,22 (maccurj ... m jintu, m abhibhavatu m -at ti attho); (a) ajjhottharant, mfn., Ja VI 404,6 (samuddo viya -anto); Sv 575,36 (ajjhokiranti ti -ant viya kiranti); Ps II 160,17 (migajt ... vatim -ant pavisanti); (b)ajjhottharamna,mfh., Jal 72,23 (puna uttarapassena Mrabalam -amnam disv); Visml87,i;


aor. 3 sg. ajjhottharil, Ja I 330,20 (Kosalarattham mahoghena viya ~i, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajjhottari); Dhp-aIII 30,17 (setthidhitaram pubbasineho ~i); absol ajjhottharitv, Ja I 61,20 (gahitagahitni turiyni ~itv nipajjimsu); Nidd I 167,10; Mil 336,27; Spkl 60,24 (yam ca jalam talkam gahetum na sakkoti ~itv gacchati tarn ogho ti vuccati); pass. pr. 3 sg. ajjhotthariyati, A III 92,19 (mtugmena ... abhinipajjiyamano -iyamano) = Pp 67,28; Sp 1054,25 (varanappadeso ... udakena ~iyati); aor. 3 sg. ajjhotthari2, Vv-a48,i (gmapadeso ~i, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -lyati); pp (a) ajjhotthata, ajjhotthata, mfn., spread over, covered; overwhelmed; Ja I 363,18' (abhinivittho ~o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajjhottato); V91,25'; Dhp-all 214,21 (sakalasariram pitiy... ~am hoti); Pj II 391,4 (tya senya tt); Dth5:5; (b) ajjhottharita, mfn., spread over, covered; overwhelmed; Sp 768,23 (sace bhikkhu rukkhena v ~o hoti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee ajjhotthato); Pj II 140,27 (~- tt); fpp (a) ajjhottharitabba, mfn., Vin III 111,20 (na ... sirnya sim ~); Niddl 485,31; (b) neg. anajjhottharaniya, mfn., Sp 176,6 (udakena ~e thne); l h - a l l 175,27 (cathi oghehi ~am... sudipam); caus. pr. 3 sg. ajjhottharpeti, Sp 347,16 (ajjhottharati parena v ~eti). ajjhottharita(r), m. [from ajjhottharati], one who overcomes; Nidd (Be) II 252,25 (parissaye sahit rdhit ~ pariydit; cf Ee Nidd II 275,19); Ps I 160,12 (abhibhavit ~ ca bhaveyyam). ajjhottharitabbaka, mfn. [fpp of ajjhottharati + ka2], to be overcome or overwhelmed; Sp 458,1 (-sattnam). ajjhopanna, mfn. [pp of *adhi + o2 + pajjati; cf AMg ajjhovavanna; often confused with, and written as, ajjhpanna qv], addicted to, enthralled; D I 246,2 (panca kmagune gadhit mucchit ~, Be, Ce so; Ee ajjhpanna; Se ajjhosann) * MII 203,16 (Be, Ce, Ee ~o; Se ajjhpanno); S II 270,1 (tarn lbharn gadhit mucchit ~, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ajjhpanna); A V 178,6 (te ca bhoge ... ~o, so read ? Ce, Ee, Se aijhpanno; Be ajjhosanno); Ud 75,10 (mucchit ~); Nidd I 35,18 (giddh gadhit mucchit~ lagg; Nidd-al 109,30: kmanandiy adhi-opann ajjhotthat); Pet 157,2 (gahito ajjhosito kme ~o, so readl eds ajjhpanno); 219,7 (tehi kmehi samyutto viharati... ~o, so read 1 eds ajjhosanno); anajjhopanna, mfn., not addicted to; MI 369,28 (tarn pindaptam ... ~o ... paribhunjati; Ps III 50,6 foil.: na adhi-opanno, sabbam lumpitv ekappahren' eva gilitukmo kko viya na hoti ti attho); Sil 269,25 (agadhit amucchit ~, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anajjhpann); Mil 401,2 (siho ... laddh pi bhojanam agadhito amucchito -o paribhunjati, so readl Be anajjhosanno; Ce, Ee, Se anajjhpanno). ajjhopekkhati in Ee at Niddl 508,12* is wr for ajjhupekkhati (Be, Ce, Se so). ajjhobhavi, aor. 3 sg. [of *adhi + o2 + bhavati], has overcome, overpowered; Ja II 80,16* (tarn mam panko ajjhobhavi yath dubbalakam tath, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ajjhabhavi; 80,23': adhibhavi vinsam ppesi, Ee so; Be, Ce adhi-abhavi; Se abhibhavi). ajjhomaddati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + o2 + maddati], treads

upon, crushes down; AIV 191,11 (assakhalunko ... rathisam yeva ~ati). ajjhomucchita, mfn. [adhi + o2 + mucchit], swooning; clinging to (in longing); A III 57,27 (Bhaddya deviy sarire ~o). ajjholambati,^r. 3 sg. [adhi + o2 + lambati], hangs down (over); Mill 164,25foil, (yni 'ssa pubbe ppakni kammni... tni 'ssa... olambanti ~anti abhippalambanti... seyyath ... mahantnam pabbataktnam chy syanhasamayam pathaviy olambanti -anti abhippalambanti); SHI 137,19 (tass [nadiy] ubhosu tiresu ks ce pi jt assu te nam -eyyum); Saddh284 (ppaknikatni... ~anti mnasam). ajjhosa, absol. /ajjhosati qv. ajjhosati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS adhyavasyati], grasps, clings to; relishes; MI 328,16 (sace ... tvam bhikkhu pathavim -issasi; Ps II 407,21: pathavim ~ya gilitv parinitthpetv tanhmnaditthirii ganhissasi); II 263,8 (yad aniccam tarn nlam abhinanditum nlam abhivaditum nlam ~itun ti); Niddl 428,4 (atite sankhre tanhvasena ditthivasena nbhinandeyya ... na -eyya); absol. (a)ajjhosya [BHS adhyavasya], Mil 265,2 (tarn upekham abhinandati abhivadati ~ya titthati); S IV 71,11* (sdurn rasam njjhosya bhunjati); Kv 485,5 (dukkham ~ya titthanti ti); Mil 69,3 (ajjhattikabhire yatane abhinandanti abhivadanti ~ya titthanti); neg. anajjhosya, MI 270,n; SIV 36,34; Mil 69,9; ( b ) ajjhosa, S IV 73,20* (srattacitto vedeti tarn ca ajjhosa titthati) = Th98; (c) ajjhositv, Ps II 75,14 (~itv gilitv, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr ~etv); pp ajjhosita, mfn. [BHS adhyavasita], 1. (act.) attached to, grasping; being bent on; MI 65,18 (bhavaditthim ~); AII 25,28* (~ yattha paj visatt); Thi470 (~ asre kalevare; Thi-a259,i4: tanhvasena abhinivitth); Pv 43:4 (~o mayham ghare, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce ajjhsito; Pv-a267,nyb//.: mama gehe tanhbhinivesavasena abhinivittho); Pet 157,2; Mil 76,24 (eko... ~o eko anajjhosito); neg. anajjhosita, mfn., not grasping; Niddl 133,23; Mil 74,n (pabbajit anajjhosit kyam pariharanti); 2. (pass.) grasped, caught; SII 94,n (assutavato puthujjanassa -am mamyitam parmattham); A II 25,24* (yarn kind ... ~arn saccamutam paresam); Nidd I 64,28 (tassa s ditthi... ~); Mp II 139,20 (tt); eg. anajjhosita, w/., not grasped; S IV 213,2 (s anicc ti pajnti anajjhosit ti pajnti); fppajjhositabba, mfn., MI 109,36 quoted As 5,4. ajjhosanna, mfn. [pp of *adhi + o2 + sidati], exhausted, sunk down; Pet219,7 (tehi kmehi samyutto viharati... ~o, eds so, prob, wr for ajjhopanno). ajjhosna, n. (and m. ?) [BHS adhyavasna], grasping, clinging to; relishing; D II 58,34 (chandargam paticca ~am ~am paticca pariggaho; Sv 499,32: ~w. ti aham mamanti balavasannitthnam); MI 191,4 (imesu pancas' updnakkhandhesu chando layo anunayo ~am); 411,21 (ayam ditthi srgya santike ... ~ya santike, dat. for gen. ?); S V 89,3 (etth' ete uppajjanti samyojanavinibandh -; Spklll 150,10: ~ ti parinitthpetv gahan); Niddl 428,4 (abhinandanam abhivadanam -am gham); Dhs 1059 (... icch mucch-am gedho ... ayam


vuccati lobho); Pet 118,24; anajjhosna, n., lack of grasping\ MI 411,25 (~ya santike); Pet 124,19. ajjhosita, mfn., pp o/ajjhosati qv. ajjhosetabba in Ce, EeatPs II 75,n and 75,13 is wr for ajjhositabba (Be, Se so). ajjhosetv in Ce, Ee at Ps II 75,H is wr for ajjhositv (Be, Se so). ajjhohata, mfn.,pp o/ajjhoharati qv. ajjhohara in Ee at Spkll 88,12 is wr; Be, Ce, Se ajjhroha qv; see also ajjhohara. ajjhoharana, n. [from ajjhoharati], 1. bringing down or near; A V 324,18 (assjmyo ... yath kalim evam patodassa -am samanupassati; Mp V 80,8 (patodassa -sankhtam patanam passati ti attho); 2. eating, swallowing; Sp 923,8 (0,-attham dantehi sankhdati); Pj I 35,n; It-all 53,27; Sadd436,29 (gila ~e); ifc see brahman' -. ajjhoharati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + o2 + harati; cfS. abhyavaVhr], 1. [BHS adhyoharati], brings down or near; puts in; MI 245,14 (im ca me devat dibbam ojam lomakpehi -eyyum); 2. swallows, eats; Vin II 201,15 (bhisamullam ... -anti); Mil 138,24 (dvattikkhattum... so bhavam Gotamo mukhe lopam samparivattetv -ati); Ja II 105,23 (ambaphalam ... -itum asakkonto kakkretv nutthubhi); Mil 366,28 (kukkuto pathavim khanitv khanitv ajjhohram -ati); Cp-a 115,5 (mtaram vin na kind -issmi ti); (a) ajjhohara(t), mfn., Sp 838,27; Vibh-a 25,B (-ato); (b) ajjhoharanta, mfn., Sp 831,2 (-antassa); Th-aIII 139,15 (-antassa); aor. 3 sg. ajjhohari, S II 270,27 (-1); Ja VI 198,4* (ko mam ~I bhto oglham Yamunam nadim); 205,2* (tarn sgar' -i); Mhv 37:132 (~i); absol. ajjhoharitv, Ja I 460,24 (mamsam khditv -itv mukham punchitv); Vism 346,4; Spkll 153,7; pass, pr. 3 sg. ajjhohariyati, Vism 344,35; As 330,4; ajjhohariyamna, mfn., Ps I 209,21; Vism 265,23; PP(*) ajjhohata, mfn., I. (act.) who has swallowed; Saddh610 (-0 va balisam maccho); 2. (pass.) eaten, swallowed; Abh 757; Sp 825,5 (yena ekasittham pi -am hoti); Pj II 59,4 (accunhe hi mtar -e); As 330,16 (odanakummsdi v -am kucchim vitthambheti); (b) ajjhoharita, mfn., eaten, swallowed; Sp 821,12 (ekam pi sittham... -am hoti); fpp (a) ajjhoharitabba, mfn., to be eaten; Vin III 252,6; Mil 366,30; Vism 344,19; Nidd-all 88,9 (tt hro); (b) ajjhoharaniya, mfn. and n., (what is) fit to eat, eatable; to be swallowed; Vin IV 90,16 (yam kind -am eso haro nma); Ja II 8,6'; Kkh 113,28 (galena tya); Sv 669,22 (sakalagmam caritv pi -am dullabham eva); Spklll 176,7 (hre patiklasann ti odanakummsdimhi ~e patiklasann, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee odanakummsdim ajjhoharantass' eva); neg. anajjhoharaniya, mfn., Sp 710,24 (anajjhoharaniyatam pannatt); 713,16; see also ajjhavhari. ajjhoharitabbaka, mfn. [fpp o/ajjhoharati + ka2], to be swallowed, to be eaten; Ps I 207,35 (kabalinkro hro ti kabalam katv ~o haro) = Spk II 23,22. ajjhohnam in Ee at Pet 254,8 is wr for ajjhosnam (Be, Ce so).

ajjhohara, m.n. [cf S. abhyavahra], {.taking food, swallowing; Vin IV 67,36 (~e ~e patti pcittiyassa);; Mil366,28 (yogin... paccavekkhitv -am ajjhoharitabbam); 3. name of a mythical seamonster; Ja V 462,17 (nando timando -0, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce ajjhroho). ajjhohita, mfn. [pp /*adhi + odahati], placed upon or in; Jail 7,27* (unham v* -am mukhe; 8,7': mukhe -am thapitam); see also ajjhavodahi. ajhniya- in Ee at Pet 152,18 is wr, prob, for jniya qv. aftcatil,/?r. 3sg. [S. Dhtup ancati, Wg21:2], I. goes; honours; bends, curves; Dhtup45 (anca... gamane); 48 (anca pjyam); Dhtum48 (anca pjgate); Sadd 335,16 (aiicu gatipjansu; maggam -ati buddham -ati); Nidd-a II 69,13 (tiriyam -anti ti tiracchn, Be, Se so; Ce acchanu" ti; Ee anchanti ti); 2. [cf S. udancati], ladles out; Ja 1417,14' (udakam -anti ety tiudancani); ancmi in Ee at Th 750 is prob, wr for anchami (Be, Ce, Se so); pp aflcita, mfn. [ts], going, gone; curved, bent; Sadd335,n (uddham anuggantv tiriyam -o ti tiracchno) ^ Vibh-a 454,14; Ud-a 140,10 (tiriyam bhvena tiracchn, Ce, Ee so Be, Se anchita-; = It-al 128,5: eds anchita-); kanna, mfn., with ears curved, bent back; ? Vism 635,14 (ayam hatthi kanno pasritanariguttho sondam mukhe pakkhipitv, eds so; perhaps read anchita-? Vism-mht[2te] II 429,26: niccalatthapitakannaputo) = Vibh-a 489,30 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anjita-). aflcati2, pr. 3 sg. shrinks; declines; ? Sadd 338,21 (anca vyayagatiyam: vyayagati vinsagati -ati); Nidd-a I 113,21 (ycake disv katukabhvena cittam -ati sankoceti ti katukaficuko) = As 376,8. anceti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup ancayati, Wg 33:64], distinguishes, makes clear; Sadd 529,io (ancu visesane: -eti -ayati). aflchati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nchati, Wg 7:29; AMg anchai], stretches; pulls, drags, turns (on a lathe); Dhtup 53 (aficha yme); Dhtum64 (anch, yme bhave); Sadd 342,6 (achi yme: -ati); Vin IV 5,20 (~a kta vahassu kt ti, Se so; Ce anja; Be, Ee gaccha) ^ Ja I 192,5 (Ce, Se so; Ee anja; Be gaccha); D II 29\,\s foil. (dakkho bhamakro ... digham v -anto digham -ami ti pajnti rassam v -anto rassam -mi ti pajnti; Sv 764,16: -anto ti mahantnam bheripokkhardinam likhanakle hatthe ca pde ca pasretv digham kaddhanto) = MI 56,22 foil.; Spk I 258,3 (na hi te ekavram eva thanam -anti, punappunam -ant dhenum duhanti ti); Ps II 37,2 (tiriyam -anti ti tiracchn, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee tiriyam anchit tiracchn) = Nidd-a II 69,13 (Ee so; Be, Se ancanti ti; Ce acchanti ti); aiichanta, mfn., D i l 291,16 = MI 56,23; Spk I 258,4 (-ant, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr -anto); II 48,25 (puriso ito cito ca -anto kilamati); absol. anchitv, Spk II 48,29 (n' atthi tattha -itv vaddhanakiccam); Vibh-a 26,2i (-itv kaddhitv); pp aflchita, mfn., stretched; pulled; Sp 935,6 (yattakam hatthena -am hoti tattakamhi vethite ek patti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anjitam, prob, wr) * Vin-vn 2286; Ps II 37,2 (tiriyam ~ tiracchn, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anchanti ti); Ud-a 140,10 (tiriyam bhvena tiracchn, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ancita-) = It-al 128,5;


--kanna, mfn., with ears outstretched; 7 Vism635,i4 (ayam hatthi kanno pasritananguttho sondam mukhe pakkhipitv, so readl eds ancita-) = Vibh-a489,30 (Be, Ce, Se ancita-; Ee anjita-); see also ati-anchitum. aflchana, n. [S. nchana], pulling; ifc see thana-; -vissajjana, n., pulling and letting go; Thi-a239,i5 (yantasuttdinam - ' -din). aftjati1, afljeti, pr. 3 sg [S. anakti, anjayati, Wg 29:21], Dhtup69 (anja vyattimakkhanagatikantisu); Dhtum74 (anju vyattigatikantimakkhanesu); 1. smears, anoints; paints; makes clear; Vin I 203,33 (bhikkh anguliy -anti, akkhini dukkhni honti); Sil 281,12 (akkhini ca -eyysi); Sp 634,6 (akkhim -ati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -eti); 800,15 (na evam akkhini -enti ti); Dhp-al 21,io (imam bhesajjam -hi ti~pesi, Ee, Ce, Se so; Be ~ehl ti); Sadd 333,22 (~ati makkheti ti anganam); absol anjetv, anjitv, Sil 281,4 (akkhini -etv, Ee, Be so; Ce, Se -itv); Ja IV 219,16 (~etv); SpkII 240,5 (~etv); 2. goes; Vin IV 5,20 (~a kta vahassu kt ti, Ce so; Se ancha; Be, Ee gaccha) * Ja I 192,5 (Ee so; Ce, Se ancha; Be gaccha); pp anjita\ mfn. [BHS id.], painted; anointed; Ja I 483, is (ekam akkhim -am); Bv-a 149,28 (~ni akkhini); '-akkha, mfn. [anjita + akkha4], with anointed eyes; with eyes (as it were) painted; Ja IV 421,2* (-'-akkh; 421,5': anjitehi viya visuddhapancappasdehi akkhini samanngat); ananjitakkha, mfn., with eyes not anointed or painted; Ja IV 300,3'; neg. ananjita, mfn., not anointed; Ja VI 583,32' (ananjitam amanditam); caus. pr. 3 sg. afijpeti, Spklll 5,5 (tattya ayosalkya akkhini -etukmo ti); aor. 3 sg. afijpesi, Dhp-a 121,10; absol. anjpetv, As 138,31 (daharam kumram nhpetv... pupphni pilandhpetv akkhini -etv, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee anjetv; * Nidd-a 120,28: Be, Se anjetv; Ce, Ee anjitv). * aflj ati2, see sv afij ita2. ailjana1, m. [ts], the name of a tree or plant; Ja I 331,20 (-rukkhasraghatikavannamahmaccho); Ap 16,3 (asan ~ bah, Se so; Ee anjani; Be, Ce ajjun); Th-al 137,n/o//. (anjanavannapupphabhvato hi ~ vuccanti valliyo ... apare pana - nma mahgacch ti vadanti). anjana2, n. [ts], I. smearing, anointing;? D I 12,9 (natthukammam -am paccanjanam; c/"Sv98,i6: -an ti dve v tini v patalni nfliaranasamattham khranjanam) ^ M I 511,16 (-am paccanjanam natthukammam); 2. ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, used for decoration or as a medication; a pigment; Abh 306; Vin I 203,13 (anujnmi bhikkhave -am klanjanam rasanjanam ...); D I 7,20 (... -am mlvilepanam mukhacunnakam ...); Ap 312,15 (~am datv buddhe); Dhp-a II 25,14* (~nam khayam disv); Mhv5:28; anjanam in Ee, Se at Thi 411 is prob, wrfor anjanim (Be, Ce so); 3. the mineral antimony; JaV 416,27 (-manosilharitla-); 0, -akkhika, mfn. [anjana + akkhi1 + ka2], with eyes painted with collyrium; Th 960; '-upapisana, ^-upapimsana, n., perfume to mix with ointment; Vin I 203,14 (~ehi attho hoti ... anujnmi bhikkhave candanam tagaram..., Be, Ee so; Ce ' -Opapimsanehi; Se ' -upapimsanehi; Sp 1091,5: anjanena saddhim ekato pimsitabbehi); II 112,15

(bhindauY etam ... drupattam sakalikam sakalikam katv bhikkhnam ~am detha, Be, Ee so; Ce ' -papimsanam; Se -pimsanam); Mp III 253,21 (bhagav tarn [candanaphalakam] ... bhikkhnam '-papimsanatthya dpesi, Ce, Ee so; Be -pisanatthya; Se -pimsanatthya); Ap-a 117,2 (tarn pattam ... bhedpetv ~am katv, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ' -papimsanam ); -cunna, n., aromatic powder; As 13,33 (gaganatalam ~-samokinnam viya); -n}ik,/, a container for ointment; Ps III 303,4 (anjani ti ~); Th-alll 36,io; -nli,/, id., Thi-a246,io; -pabbata, m., a mountain of antimony; JaV 415,23; VI 528,27*; -mla, m., a precious stone; Ud-a 103,28 = Sadd 873,4; -salk, / [AMg amjanasalg], a stick for applying collyrium; Ja III 419,22' (akkhikotito ~ya niharitv, eds so); see also anjanisalk sv anjani1. anjani 1 ,/ [cfAMg amjaniy; BHS anjaniya], a box for ointment, a collyrium pot; Vin I 203,19 (anujnmi bhikkhave -in ti); Mil 65,3* (-1 va nav citt) = Th773; Thi 411 (koccham pasdam ~im ca dsakam ca ganhitv, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ~am; ThI-a246,io: anjananlim); Vin-vn3062; (!)-thavik,/, a bag for the collyrium pot; Vin 1204,8 (bhikkh anjanim ... hatthena pariharanti... anujnmi bhikkhave ~an ti); Sp 1091,12 (~ya, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se afijanathavikya, prob, wr); Vin-vn3065; (i)-salk,/, a stick for applying ointment; Vin 1203,34 (bhikkh ahguliy anjanti, akkhini dukkhni honti... anujnmi bhikkhave ~an ti); II 135,19 (anjanim pi ~am pi); Vin-vn 3065; see also anjanasalkw anjana2. afijanl 2 ,/ [ts], a kind of plant; Ap 16,3 (asan ~i bah, Ee so; Se anjan; Be, Ce ajjun). aftjayesu in Ee at Ja III 12,7* is wr for anjasesu (Ce, Se so). afij all, m. (and f.) [S. afijali, m.], the cupped hands; Abh 268; Mil 75,12 (mamam -ismim patitthpehi ti); A III 188,13 (sacham ~in v pivissmi bhjanena v); IV 164,i (dhannam hareyya ... ucchahgehi pi ~ihi pi); Vv-a 54,22 (ubhohi hatthehi pariggahetv -im prenti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anjalipram); esp. as raised to the head (as a gesture of respect or supplication); Vin II 6,29(~im paggahetv); D1118,31 (yena bhagav ten' ~im panmetv); 125,34 (~im pagganheyyam); SI 61,n* (sahghassa -im katv); Sn352 (ayam -I pacchimo suppanmito); Vv 83:15 (~im akarim tathgatassa); Ja I 35,5 (sirasi -im thapetv); III 348,24 (brhmano rjnam upasankamitv jaypetv -im paggayha); V 362,25* (-i 'ssa panmayi; 363, r: anjalim assa); V I 5 6 2 , H * (katvna -im); Ap48,4 (siras -im katv); 80,15 (-issa idam phalam) * 281,17 (-iy); 104,17 (yenyam -i dinno); Pet 168,16; Mil 95,9 (nipacca guruno pde sirasi -im katv); Ud-a 380,17 (appekacce bhagavato pde siras vandimsu appekacce -im panmesum); Mhv 18:33 (paggahetvna-im); anjalim in Ce, Ee at Pv-a 93,24 is prob, wr for atanim (Be, Se so); ifc see kat'(svkaroti); -kamma, n., a respectful salutation with cupped hands; Vin II162,20 (anujnmi bhikkhave yathvuddham ... -am); IV 52,17 (tadahupasampannassa bhikkhuno abhivdanam paccutthnam -am smici-


kammam ktabbam); A IV 130,11 (gahapamahslnam v -am sdiyeyy ti); Vv 5:6; Ja I 218,5 (-am samlcikammam ktabbam); Kv440,3o; Mil 8,27; -karaniya, mfn., worthy of respectful salutation; Dili 5,23 (esa bhagavato svakasangho ... dakkhineyyo ~o); It 88,12; Kv 549,23 (dakkhineyyo -o); see also katanjalika (.sv karoti), panjali. afijalika1, mfn., [anjali + ka2], with cupped hands raised; Vin I 3,24 (bhagavato purato atthsi -o bhagavantam namassamno, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce panjaliko); see also panjalika. afijalika2, m. ? [anjali + ka2], the raising of the cupped hands in respectful salutation; Ja III 175,3' (aham pakkhehi tava -amkaromi ti attho); Vv 1:5 (abhivdayim ~am aksim); see also panjalika. afijasa, mfn. and n., I. (mfn.) [S. lex. id.], straight, direct (of a road); upright (in morals); Th 35 (yo ariyam attharigikam -am ujum bhveti maggam amatassa pattiy; Th-al 105,9: akutilatthena -am); Thi99 (bhventi maggam -am); Vv 16:7 (adesayi... maggam c'imam akutilam -am sivam); 50:20 (ayam nirodho maggo ca -o amatogadho); Ja III 12,7* (katam ca ariyesu ca -esu ca, Ce, Se so; Be ajjavesu; Ee wr anjayesu; 12,\r: ujukesu akutilesu); Saddh 328; 2. (n. [and m. ?]) the direct road or way; Abh 190 (-am); Th 179 (patipaijissam -am amatogadham); Ja I 5,2* (na doso -assa so); Bv2:44 (sodhetum -am); Mil 217,12 (addas ... purnam maggam purnam -am pubbakehi sammsambuddhehi anuytan ti); Ps I 268,7 (tejodhtu anto pavittham pavittham paripceti, ksadhtu ~o hoti ?); Mhv 25:5 (sodhpetvna ... idhgamanam -am); Sadd 525,15 foil. (pakatimaggassa maggo pantho ... -am vatumyanam ... imni nmni, patipadmaggassa pana maggo ... -am vatumyanam nv ... anekni nmni); ifc see anil' -; paraddha, mfn., one who has missed the straight way; PatisI 129,19 (vipathapakkhanto lokasannivso -o); yana, m., [cf S. anjasyana, mfn.], the straight course; D I 235,18 (ayam eva ujumaggo ayam -o niyyniko; Sv400,s/o//.: -o ti ujumaggassa vevacanam, anjas v ujukam eva, etena yanti gacchanti ti -o). afijasa, ind. [ts], straight on; Sv400,8 (~ v ujukam eva, etena yanti gacchanti ti anjasyano). afijtapakkho in Ce, Ee at Cp-a233,io is wr for ajta(Be, Se so). anjnissati in Ee at Ps III 335,14 is wr for sanjnissati (Be, Ce,Seso). afljita1, mfn., pp o/anjati l qv. afijita2, mfn. [pp of *anjati2; S. rnjati], straightened, erect; -karma, mfn., with ears erect; Vibh-a489,30 (ayam hatthi -o pasritananguttho sondam mukhe pakkhipitv, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ancita-; = Vism 635,14: eds ancita-). afifia1, mfn. [S. ajna], not knowing, ignorant; Ud-a426,29 (attano hitam na jnti ti -o, avidv blo ti attho); Sadd 351,4 (ditthadhammikdayo atthe na nati na jnti ti -o, avidv blo ti attho). afifia2, mfn., pron. [S. anya], (sg. nom. m. - o , / -, n. -am, -ad; ace. mf -am, n. -am, -ad; instr. m.n. -ena, / -iss,

~ya; gen./dat. m.n. -assa,/ -iss; abl. m.n. -asm; loc. m.n. -asmim, / -iss; pi. nom. Iace. m. -e; / -, n. -ni, -; instr. m.n. -ehi, / -hi; gen. m.n. -esam, / -sam; loc. m.n. -esu, / -su), other; different; other than (+ abl.); another, a further, one more; somebody, something else; anything else; pi. (the) others, the rest; Abh 717; 802; 986 (vmato 'nfiasmim dakkhino); Vin 1248,16 (amhkam yeva patiganheyyum ... no -esan ti); III 144,34 (palyanti pi -ena pi gacchanti); IV 217,11 (na -sam bhikkhuninam roceyya); MI 30,27 (tarn [kamsaptim] ... -iss kamsaptiy patikujjitv) ^ Sv476,24 (Ee, Ce, Se so; Be -ya); MI 64,i (sunfi parappavd samanehi -e); SI 166,6* (vijjcaranasampanno so sujjhati na - itar paj); A IV 394,8 (-0 nna tena samayena Velmo brhmano ahosi); Khp 8:9 (asdhranam -esam); Dhp 158 (attnam eva pathamam patirpe nivesaye ath' -am anusseyya); Sn 189 (- pi pucchassu puth samanabrhmane); 677 (nahutni hi kotiyo panca bhavanti dvdasa kotisatni pun' -); 1052 (yam tarn apucchimha akittayi no, -am tarn pucchmi); Pv 14:2 (-su jtisu); Th 118 (-asseva sarmi attnam); Jal 151,i7(mamavram-assa ppehiti); 151,20 (m -am kinci sankittha mahrj ti); 256,17 (yo ~o pi... vymam karissati); 294,14 (aham eva paharim na ~o koci); II27,16 (-issguhya vaspesi); V 144,8*(etni sutv nirayni... -ni ppitthatarni c' ettha); Ap 59,24 (~e deve atibhomi); 443,2 (-am gatim na jnmi); Mil 40,2 (yo uppajjati so eva so udhu - 0 ti); 413,19 (tad uttamam -ad uttamam); As 337,4 (na -asm rpajanakapaccay uppajjanti); anna... anna..., another...; some... some...; Vin I 15,10 (-iss kacche vinam -iss kanthe mutingam); IV 35,28 (pattiy anuyunjiyamno -ena -ena paticarati); Dhp 165 (nnno -am visodhaye); 2. one ... another (different) ...; one thing ... another thing...; D I 157,16 (kim nu kho ... tarn jivam tarn sariram udhu -am jivam -am sariran ti); 187, A foil, (- va sanna bhavissati -0 att); MI 372,20 (-ad eva... kyadandam -am vacidandam -am manodandan ti); Mil \l\,\4foll. (-am kayiramnam -ena sambhavati); ' -afifia, mfn., each other; Vin I 335,26* (in uddna: paccropeyya -am, Be so; Ee -o; Ce annamannam; Se annofinam); JaV 267,13* (-am musale hantv, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be annofinam; Ce, Se annamannam); -m-afifia, mfn., pron. [AMg annamanna; BHS anyamanya] 1. one another; each other; Vin I 117,18 (-am p'ime saman sakyaputtiy na jnanti); IV 239,9 (-iss vajjapaticchdik); 239,34 (-iss kmme kariyamne patikkosanti); D I 20,17 (-amhi cittni padsenti); 56,24 (~assa sukhya v dukkhya v); MI 86,24 (-am pnihi pi upakkamanti); 214,25 (te -am panham pucchanti -assa panham putth vissajjenti); Sil 204,8 (-am sutena accvadante); Itlll,i6 (-am nissya brahmacariyam vussati); Sn 148 (nnnamannassa dukkham iccheyya); 936 (-ehi vyruddhe); Jal 254,27 (-am ghtayimsu); V lll,io (amacc -am avahasanti); Mil 57,16 (anallpo tesam -ehi ti); Pj II 204,11 (tarn hi sattnam -ato bhedanena vinsam karoti); Th-a III 84,36 (-asmim appatissav); Mhv 33:76 (-am khampayum); am, adv., towards one another; mutually, reciprocally; Vin IV


240,2 (-am vajjam paticchdenti); A III 247, n (~am agrav viharanti); Jail 353,23 (te -am veram bandhimsu); III 188,2 (dve pi -am patibaddhacitt ahesum); Cp 1:9:44 (-am sokanud vasma assame tad); Dhs 1077 (te -am het c' eva sahetuk ca); Mhv 36:83 (-am apekkhitv); 2. one after the other; now one... now another...; various, different', Mill 45,19 (tarn ca -am kyasamcram); SII 54,18 (-ehi padehi -ehi pariyyehi); Sn 600 (- hi jtiyo; Pj II 464,7: nnappakr tiattho); Ja I 185,3* (-ehi titthehi assam pyehi; 185,5': -ehi ti annehi annehi); 200,12 (-am hatthim nayimsu); Mil 36,28 (rj -am anusreyya anupeseyya); Nett 23,31 (aggi... updnavasena -ni nmni labhati); Dhp-al 399,15 (-esu kulesu sabbatthakam eva dpesi); khdik,/, the eating of one another, Mill 169,24 (Ps IV 213,16: -khadiktikhdanam) = S V 456,9; see also anfianna, aniionna; -d-attha, m., another object or aim; Sn 828 (na h' - ' atthi pasamsalbh; Pj II 541,3i: na hiettha pasamsalbhato anno attho atthi); It-al 110, is (kuhandito -ay' eva pana idam ... brahmacariyam vussatiti); -d-atthika, mfn.9 having another object or purpose; Vin IV 250,32 (katham hi nma bhikkhuniyo -ena parikkhrena annuddisikena sanghikena annam cetpessanti ti; 251,10: annass' atthya dinnena); Utt-vn 826; neg. anannadatthika, mfn., Vin IV 251,24; 'disa, mfn., of another kind; different; Mil 136,2 (kacci pana so bhavam Gotamo tdiso no -o ti); Ja VI 212,26*; Ps III 357,18 foil, (-am eva hi puthujjanassa padhnam -am sotpannassa); Pv-a243,i8 (tassa purimabhvato tarn dassetum); -kotthsiya, mfn. [from anna + kotthsa], belonging to a different group; Sp600,i9 (ekam ekam hi adhikaranam itaresam tinnam tinnam annabhgiyam annapakkhiyam -am hoti); -khantika, mfn. [anna + khanti1 + ka2], acquiescing in different views; D I 187,14; MI 487,8; -gatika, mfn., having recourse to someone else; Sv 548,32 (attagatik va hotha m -); -cetpana, n., or~l.,f, asking for something else; exchanging for something else;! VinV 87,33 (vinnatti -, in uddna; Sp 1309,23: vinnatti - . . . ti y pana bhikkhuni annam vinnpetv annam vinnpeyy ti dini nava sikkhpadni, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee annam cetpan); -titthiya, mfn. and m., belonging to another sect; a non-Buddhist; Vin I 101,4 (- paribbjak ctuddase pannarase atthamiy ca pakkhassa sannipatitv dhammam bhsanti); DIU 115,25 (- paribbjak); MI 381,28 (samano... Gotamo ... -nam svake vatteti ti); A V 347,5 (ime ... -); Ja II 415,16 (~ suriyuggamanakle khajjopanakasadis nippabh hutv); Vism 214,35 (-nam dhammassa attho vipallsam pajjati); -tama, -tara, seesvv; -d-attha, m, -d-atthika, mfn., see above; -ditthika, mfn., [aniia + ditthi+ ka2], having different views; D I 187,13; MI 487,s; As 255,10; -m-afifla, mfn., see above; -mokkha, mfn., to be released by another; Sn 773; Maddhika, mfn., following another doctrine; Sp 1034,24 (annatitthiy, ito -a ti vuttam hoti); Spkl 228,15; -vda\ m., another doctrine; another's doctrine; Ud-a340,i9 (attano vdarn paggayha -e khumsent); -vdaka, m

and n., \.{m.)one who speaks about something else, a prevaricator; Vin IV 37,i (-0 nma sanghamaijhe ... pattiy v anuyunjiyamno tarn na kathetukmo ... annen, annam paticarati); 2. (.) the offence of prevaricating; Vin IV 36,3 (sangho Channassa bhikkhuno -am ropetu); Utt-vn 77; -vadi(n), mfn., professing another doctrine; Th 86 (itobahiddh puthu-annavdinam); -vihatabhvam in Ee at Sp 359,8 is wr for annavihita- {Be, Ce, Se so); -vihita, mfn. {sometimes in Ee, Se written annvihita), 1. occupied with something else, distracted; Vin IV 269,n (-, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se annvihita); V 205,25 (-0, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se annvihito; Sp 1379,2i: -o ti annam cintayamno); Ja VI 62,27; Dhp-alH 381, is; (-0 viya ito c'ito ca olokento); Patis-a684,4 (mtpitunnam tya apassantnam); Vin-vn 692; neg. anannavihita, mfn., Ud-a 389,3; 2. differently ordered or determined; Niddl 265,n (kiles anfiajatik -); -vihitaka, mfn., occupied with something else; (repeated): directed to one thing... directed to another...; DIN 134,7 (-ena iinadassanena -am finadassanam pannpetabbam mannanti); JaIV 389,20 (nam -am... paharitv); Ps II 90,30foil; 263,30 (sakkaccam na sunti... -o hoti); -satthruddesa, m., adopting another teacher (one of the six abhithna^; Pj I 190,1 ( c / A I 27,34 foil.); anafifia, mfn., 1. not other, the same, identical; Vin IV 43,io (etad evapaccayam karitv -am); MI 256,20 (yath tad eva idam vinnnam sandhvati samsarati -an ti); Jail 120,io* (ayam eva s aham pi so -0); Kv30,8 (sace hi sandhvati sv eva puggalo ito cuto param lokam ~o h' evam maranam na hehiti); Pet 171,4 (es aham tattha anunnatt -t ti, Be so; Ce eso ... anannath ti; Ee es ... tt t ti); Patis-a 457,13 (rpdito attano tt); 2. not another, no more; D I 88,32 (mahpurisassa dve va gatiyo bhavanti -) * Sn/?. 106,9 * Kv286,i; 3. having no other, devoted to no-one else;? JaVI 296,6* (bhattram yev' udikkheyya anann' assa ca rjino, so read with CPD ? Ce, Ee -assa; Be na ca annassa; Se na annassa ca; 296,15': annassa ranno santike na bhaveyya, Ce, Ee so; Be santako; Se santike na bhaseyya); dheyya, mfn., not to be taken by another; not subject to another; Ja IV 111,27* (pathavi... ekass' eva siy dheyy; 112,19': ananndhin assa); VI 379,30* (s silavati dheyy, Ce, Eeso; Be, Se ananiiatheyy; 380,3': kilesavasena annena agahetabb, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be na thenitabb); neyya, mfn., 1. not to be led by someone else; not needing guidance from anyone else; Sn 55 (uppannanno 'mhi neyyo); 213 (netram annesam neyyam); Ja IV 283,10 (mayi sasneh asamhiracitt neyy); It-all 43,22 (--neyyatya buddho); 2. whither one cannot be guided by others; Vin I 36,28* (disv padam ... neyyam); satthuka, mfn., not having another teacher; Sp 173,18 (--satthukamtihi saranagamanehi saranagatam mam bhavam Gotamo dhretu) * Ps I 137,5. afiftamsu, aor. 3 pi. o/jnti qv. aftfiatama, mfn. [superl. o/anna 2 ; S. anyatama], one out of many; one or other of; MI 17,19 (ye hi...


parisuddhakyakammant aranfie vanapatthni pantni sensanni patisevanti tesam aham ~o, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se annataro); Mhv 38:14 (tesam ~o); Sadd 266,27 (annataraannatamasadd aniyamatth); 268, wfoll. afiatara, mfn., pron. [compar. of anna2; S., BHS anyatara], (sg. gen./dat. /~iss, ~ass, ~ya; loc. m.n. ~asmim, ~e; / ~iss, ~ya; pl. nom. m. ~e, ~; (/Sadd268,3I: anno anne ~o~e; and 269,\9 foil); 1. one of two; one of several; a certain... (often used as indefinite article: "a"); somebody, some...; VinI 128,34 (~asmim vse); III 37,14 (~o bhikkhu ~iss itthiy patibaddhacitto hoti); 196,15 (atthannam mtiknam ~ya mtikya ubbhatam hoti); D I 177,8 (~o ca kho pan' yasm Kassapo arahatam ahosi ti); M i l 108,29 (~iss itthiy mt klam akasi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se ~ass); S IV 341,23 (ye ca loke dussil ppadhamm Koliynam lambacjak bhat tesam ~ ti); Dhp 137 (dasannam ~am thnam ... nigacchati); Sn 35 (avethayam -am pi tesam); Jal 221,22 (~am padumasaram nissya); 111411,5* (imasmim yevanagare kule ~e ahum; 411,13': nmena v gottena v apkate ekasmim vessakule); IV 104,24 (tass' evaranno ~ya deviy kucchimhi); VI 283,2* (jayo mahrja parjayo ca yhatam ~assa hoti); Ap 466,26 (jto kule ~e); Pet 77,25 (~o pi paccayo); Mil 285,21 (~o Mrakyiko devaputto); Ud-a60,6 (~asm rukkhasusir kanhasappo nikkhamitv); Th-al 139,28 (~ya purnakutikya viharanto); 2. other, another; different; Abh 717; D I 17,33 (atha ~e pi satt, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anne); AIV 317,13 (~o pi kho bhikkhu); Ja II121,10 (tad cha bhtaro ~ ther ahesum); ifc see dev'-; '-amlatara, mfn., one or other; all kinds of; DIU 45,27 (ekacco tapassi sabbeh' eva imehi upakkilesehi samanngato assa ko pana vdo ~en ti); 145,28 (~esu ca adhikusalesu dhammesu); Mill 250,9 (~ena vyasanena samanngatassa); Niddl 102,15 (te dvsatthiy ditthigatnam ~amditthigatam ... gahetv); Vibh353,20 (jtiy v gottena v ... sutena v patibhnena v ~ena vatthun mnam jappeti); Mil 370,5 (~ena v buddhapatikutthena micchjivena nipphditam bhojanam); Pj II 110,17 (doso pi moho pi ~e pi kiles khin hon ti). annato, ind. [S. anyatas], X.from another, from somebody else; elsewhere; from elsewhere; Sn 790 (na brhmano ~o suddhim ha); Ja III 244,22* (disv vadmi na -0 savam); 376,24 (~o olokento); Ps III 301,6 (ito c' amh parihln - o ca); Pj 1145, is (sankrakt v ~o v kutoci); annato ... annato ..., in one direction ... in another...; Spkl 64,26 foil, (vacanam c' assa ~o gacchati kiriy ~o ti); 2. as another (thing), as different; S IV 50,20 (sabbanimittni ~o passati; Spk II 370, \r. anattato passati, no attato ti). aftflattha, ind. [= annatra qv; AMg annattha], somewhere else, anywhere else, elsewhere; Vinll 274,34 (bhattagge ... ~a sabbattha); D II 206,20 (na ~a bhagav tava ssan na --a sugata tava ssan, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se annatra); Jail 154,25 (~a yhi); VI201,22 (tassa -a patisandhi ny atthi devalokam eva gacchati ti); Vism 117,12 (~a gantukmassa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se annatra); 201,5 (uppanne tathgate ye keci mahesakkh devamanuss na te -a pjam karonti); Sp 1038,27 (ekattha kittetv -a

kittetum na vattati); Th-al 211,10 (~pi tass' eva kammassa vipkvasesen ti vuttam); Mhv 4:37 (~a agamimsu te); 0, -acariyaka, mfn., following a different teaching; D I 187,14 (dujjnam kho etam... tay aniiaditthikena... ~ena, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce annatrcariyakena; Sv 377, H foil.', annattha ca te cariyakam ahnasmim titthyatane cariyabhvo) * MI 487,9 (Ce so; Be annatrcariyakena; Ee aMathcariyakena; Se annatra cariyakena; Ps III 198,21 foil.: -na ti paccaykram ajnantnam annesam cariynam santike vasantena); see also annatra. afifiatthika, mfn., seesv anna. afiiiatra, ind. [S., BHS anyatra], 1. elsewhere, somewhere else; in another place; Vin II 174,5 (bhikkh... vihraparibhogam sensanam -a paribhunjanti); Pv 36:63 (kammam siy -a vedaniyam); JaV 252,17 (~pi vasantassa); Kv97,4 (n'atth' ~a brahmacariyavso ti); Mil 77,io (idha mato -a upapajjati); Vism 554,32 (-a agantv); Sp 978,28 (antaraghare v ~a v); annatra ... annatra ..., in one place ... in another ... ; Vin I 301,5 (~a vassam vuttho ~a civarabhgam sdiyissasi ti); 2. but for, besides, except, apart from; without (with abl. or instr. [and ace. 1]); Vin I 353,17 (eko adutiyo sukham phsu viharmi ~' eva hatthflii hatthinihi); IV 162,19 (~a ajjhrm); D I 168,29 (~a imin tapopakkamena); SI 101,24 (kim assa karaniyam -a dhammacariyya); Sn886 (-a sannya); Jail 77,2i (n* atthi no annam patisaranam -a vnarind ti); IV 35,4* (~a km paricrayanti; 35,10': vin kmena anicchya); 53,22* (~a thi brahmacariyam carma; 54,22*. t attano bhariy thapetv sesa-itthisu brahmacariyam carma); V 173,2i* (nnnatra manussalok suddhi ca samvijjati sanfiamo v); Pet 215,9 (na sakk mocetum -a ariyamaggena); Mil 26,19 (kim pana bhante ~a rpavedansaM^ankhravinnnam Ngaseno ti); 164,15 (~a tavdisena buddhimat); Vism 239,24 (~a buddhuppd); Pj II 294,22 (na sakk kinci dya gantum -a sucaritena); Sadd 899,29 (-a iti parivajjanatthe ~a buddhuppd abhisamayo n* atthi); 103,22 foil. (~a icc etena niptena yoge pancami vibhatti hoti tatiy ca nnnatra sabbanissagg sotthim passmi pninam ... kojneyya -a tathgatena); kim ~a ..., what but, what else is this but ?; D I 90,2i (kim ~a avusitatt ti); SI 29,2 (kim -a adassan ti); Sn206 (kim -a adassan); 0, -cariyaka, mfii., following a different teaching; D1187,14 (dujjnam kho etam ... tay annaditthikena ... ~ena, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se annatthcariyakena; Sv 377,14/0//.: annattha ca te cariyakam annasmim titthyatane cariyabhvo) * III 35,4 (eds so) * MI 487,9 (Be so; Ce annatthcariyakena; Ee annathcariyakena; Se annatra cariyakena; Ps III 198,21 foil.: paccaykram ajnantnam annesam cariynam santike vasantena) * II43,i2 (eds annathcariyakena); '-yoga, -yoga, mfn., following another discipline or religious practice; D I 187,14 (dujjnam kho etam... tay annaditthikena... ' -yogena, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se annattha yogena; Sv377,13foil.: annatra ca te yogo aniiiss yeva patipattiy yuttapayuttat) * III 35,4 (eds 0> -yogena) * M I 487,8 (Be, Ce, Ee -yogena; Se annatra


yogena; Ps III 188,20: aniiatra payogena) * II43,12 (Be, Ce, Ee -yogena; Se annatthayogena); see also annattha. afifiathatta, n., abstr., see sv annath. afifiath, ind. [S. anyath], 1. in a different manner; otherwise (than, abl); in the wrong way, falsely, erroneously; not so; VinlV 275,31 (duggahiten ti -a uggahitena); D III 103,25 (tatiY eva tarn hoti no ~); M III 210,26 (ye evam jnanti te samm jnanti, ye ~ jnanti micch tesam nnan ti); SIII 3,19 (tarn rparn parinamati ~ hoti); AIII 123,26 (yam kind Kakudho devaputto bhsati sabbam tarn tath, eva hoti no ~a); Sn 588 (yena yena hi mannanti tato tarn hoti ~); Vv 53:15 (m ca vitatham -* abhni); Ja III 457,7* (yo jnarn pucchito panharn ~ nam viykare); V91,8* (me ayyaputtassa mano hessati ~); Vibh 392,25 fall. (-' asmi tihoti... - bhavissan ti hoti); Pet 79,7 (~ nma savanena); Mil 30,14 (aham bhanmi yattake bhikkh icchati tattakehi bhikkhhi saddhim gacchat ti, ayam bhane Sabbadinno ~ bhanati); Vism 506,29 (samudayanirodhena hi dukkham nirujjhati na ~) Ps III 234,8 (kirn ubhayato ~ ti); Th-a II 269,6 (sildayo ca mndippahnena priprim gacchanti na ~ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit); annath ... annath..., in one way ... in another way ...; like this ... different...; D II 160, H (~ kho Vasetth tumhkam adhippyo ~ devatnam adhippyo ti); M I 340,30 fall. (~ ca kyena samudcaranti ~ vcya ~ ca nesam cittam hoti); S I 24,3* (~ santam attnam ~ yo pavedaye); ' -cariyaka, mfn., following a different teaching; MI 487,9 (dujjnam kho etam... tay annaditthikena ... ~ena, Ee so; Be annatrcariyakena; Ce, Ps III 198,2i Ee annatthcariyakena; Se aniiatra cariyakena) * II43,12 (eds so); (a)-tta, ., abstr. (and mfn. ?) [BHS anyathtva], 1. (n.) change, alteration; change of mind; doubt, anxiety; Vin III 20,i2 (appasannnam c' eva apasdya pasannanam ca ekaccanam ~ya; Sp 218,24: -y ti pasdannathbhvya vippatisraya); MI 448,9 (tassa mayham bhante ahud eva -am ahu domanassam); SHI 91,17 (tesam mamam apassantnam siy ~am siy viparinmo); A I 152,8 (uppdo panfiyati vayo pannyati thitassa ~am pafinyati); Pv 30:8 (tatr, assa cittass' ahu~am); Ja I 19,13 (buddha nma amoghavacan n* atthi buddhnam kathya -am); 147,10 (ass gabbhe paripkam gacchante indriynam -am hatthapdapitthiham bahalattam udarapatalassa ca mahantatam disv); Mil 209,7 (na bhaveyya arahato cittassa kinci -am); SpkII 266,15* (~am jar vutta); 2. (mfn.) changed; anxious; ? Ja I 33,19 (kesaggamattam pi cittam ~am nhosi, Ce, Ee so, or cpd citta-m-annathattam ? Be, Se cittassa) = Ap-a 36,25 (eds so) = Bv-a 149,35 (eds cittassa); -bhva, m., becoming different; I. change, alteration; Abh776; Vin II 284,23 (sabbeh' eva piyehi manpehi nnbhvo vinbhvo~o); D i l 118,29 (vinbhvo ~o); Spkl 355,25 (mittabhvato -o ma hot ti); ifc see v i p a ^ ^ ' - ; 2. a different existence; Ps II 408,30 (itthabhvo ti idam cakkavlam -o ti ito sesam ekunasahassam); Mp III 13,2 (-0 nma angatattabhvo); It-all 122,27 (uppattibhavantarasankhtarn ito -am... na atikkamanti); ifc

see itthabhV-; -bhvi(n), mfn., of changeable nature, inevitably changing; SHI 225,4 (cakkhum... aniccam viparinmi ~i); IV 23,26 (-1 bhavasatto loko bhavam evbhinandati) ^ Ud32,3i; anannathbhvi(n)1, mfn., not subject to change; Vin I 36,28* (disv padam... anannathbhvim; Sp 973,8: jtijarmarannam abhvena anannathbhvim); anafiflatha, mfn., not being otherwise; as it really is; true; D III 273,16 (dhammbht tacch tath avitath ~ samm tathgatena abhisambuddh); S II 26,5 (y tatra tathat avitathat t idappaccayat ayam vuccati... paticcasamuppdo); V435,19 (imni... cattri ariyasaccni tathni avitathni-ni); anafiftath, ind., not otherwise, accurately; as it really is; VinV 145,30* (tamtam vykatam ~); M i l 170,32 (tarn ca hoti bhtam taccham -); Vv 44:18 (tarn te viyksim - aham); ThI252 (saccavdivacanam -; Thi-a200,i7: saccavdino ... sammsambuddhassa ... vacanam ~ yathbhtam eva); anannathbhvi(n)2, mfn., being as it really is, being inevitably so; Mp II 227,9 (tvam pi evamdhammo ti codenti viya, tesam ca tarn vacanam ~-bhvitya devatya vykaranasadisam eva hoti). afifiadatthu (and occasionally afinadatthum), ind. [prob. anfia2+ imperat. of atthi1, "let the rest be (as it will)"], only, exclusively, absolutely; merely; rather, on the contrary; Abh 1140; D I 91,17 (~u mamam yeva manne va anojagghant); S IV 118,21 (na ... patirpam yo 'ham ~u mnavaknam sutv samanam Mahkaccnam akkoseyyam); V 6,16* (~u jayam jayam); Ja III 92,22 (-u sokbhibhto); Mil 133,17 (~u vimalataram yeva bhaveyya ti); Vism 656,17 (na domanassam pajjeyya ~u udsino bhaveyya majjhatto); Dhp-aI389,2i (-u garaham labhati); It-al 116,i9(-unibbnaninno, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -urn); Pj II 326,29 (dassanamatte pi cittam na nami ~u samvego eva udapdi); Mhv 12:18; -dasa, m(fn). [annadatthu + dasa2], seeing absolutely; the only seer (of Brahma or Tathagata,); D I 18,14 (aham asmi brahm mahbrahm abhibh anabhibhto ~o vasavatti; Sv lll,24/o//.: -ti ekamsavacane nipto, dassanavasena daso, sabbam passmi ti attho) ^ A III 202,11 (atth* vuso brahm abhibh anabhibhto ~o vasavatti); It 122,7; -hara, mfn., who merely, only takes; DIU 185,20 (~o amitto mittapatirpako); Ja VI 378,16 (evam te ~); see also ekadatthu ^v eka. aflftad, ind. [S. anyad], at another time, at other times; SIV 285,15 (yad ~ pi evarpo panho gaccheyya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se annatha); JaV 12,2i (vanacarako - pi tassa santikam gacchati); PsII 114,24 (etarahi pi - pi rupam aniccam dukkham anatt); Dhp-aIV 125,9 (na hi me - tya natthipv nma pakkapubb ti); Nidd-al 438,15 (na dittho ti - na ditthapubbo). afinavda1, see sv aniia2. aftftavda2, m. [ann + vda?], a statement of what is known; ? A I 197,34 (puggalo pafiham puttho samno ... -e na santhti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anntavde; Mp II 309,19: ntavde jnitavde na santhti... kathetabbaniymen' eva ... vimatim karoti). afiflassati, fut. 3 sg. o/jnti qv.


aftn, / [BHS jna], knowledge, philosophic insight; perfect knowledge, ie arahaty/wp; Abh436 (~ tu arahattam); MI 445,2 (pubbe appatarni c'eva sikkhpadni ahesum bahutar ca bhikkh ~ya santhahimsu; Ps III 155,r. arahatte patitthahimsu); SI 24,n* (~ya nibbut dhir); A III 192, n (no ce ditthe va dhamme ~am rdheyya); Dhs 555 (~ pann pajnan); annam vykaroti, proclaims one's arahatszp; VinI 183,20 (yannnham bhagavato santike ~am vykareyyan ti); SII 51,2 (yasmat... Sriputtena ~ vykat khin jti vusitam brahmacariyam...); J a l 140,15; ifc see samma-d-; '-atthika, mfn., anxious for knowledge; Pv 36:14 (Pv-a225,n: ~o ti jnanena atthiko); pe(k)kha, m/h., wishing for knowledge, wanting to know; D i l 150,15 (~o va pucchissati no vihespekkho; Sv 589,5: ntukmo va hutv); Mil 334,30; ' -indriya, n. [BHS jfiendriya], the faculty of knowing; D i l i 219,io (tin' indriyni anafintannassamitindriyam -am anntvindriyam; Sv 1002,33: annbhtam jnanabhtam indriyam); PatisI 115,29; Dhs 364 (y tesam dhammnam ntnam ditthnam... pann pajnan ... idam ... ~amhoti) = Vibh 124,26; Nett 171,12 (bhikkhu idam dukkhan ti... ayam dukkhanirodhagminipatipad ti yathbhtam pajnti, idam bhikkhave -am); Patis-a 86,30 (jnanakam indriyam ~am); -citta, n., thought for knowledge, the intention of gaining perfect knowledge; Vin 110,9 (sotam odahimsu -am upatthpesum); S II 267,8 (na ~am upatthpessanti) * A III 437,B; -vimo(k)kha, m., release through knowledge; S n l l 0 5 (~am pabrhi); see also afinavda2. afina1, n. [S. jfina], knowledge; D III 57,n (mayam ' -attham pi samane Gotame brahmacariyam carma); A I 199,13* (' -attham pasdattham); anafina, ., lack of knowledge; Pet 73,15* (kankhato ca ~am). aftfina2, n. and aMna2, mfh., ^e^vnna. atifinaka, n. [annna2 + ka2], ignorance, lack of understanding; Vin IV 144,10 (chabbaggiy bhikkh ancram caritv~ena pann ti jnant ti); Ps I 56,10 (~ena, te kira imassa suttassa attham nbhijnimsu). anfinino samdhibhtassa in eds at Pet 207,22 is prob, wr; rea<iannnasamangibhtassa with Nnamoli, 1979, p.2801 afita1, rnfn., pp o/jnti qv. aftfita2, mfn.y neg. pp o/'jnti qv. afifita(r), m. [from jnti; BHS jntr], one who knows, who understands; a knower; Vin 16,4* (desetu bhagav dhammam ~ro bhavissanti); D II286,14* (~ viharissmi; Sv739,27: - jnitukmo hutv viharissmi); A I 133,19 (~ro ca dullabh; Mp II 207,25: pativijjhanakapuggal pana dullabh). afifitaka1, mfn. [annta2 + ka2], unknown; unfamiliar; not one's own; VinI 133,27/0//. (passanti... ~am pattam ~am civaram; Sp 1065,29: -an ti annesam santakam); JaV 219,23* (~am smikehi padinnam dhamme thit ye paticchanti dnam; 224,24': -an ti mahrja annesam santakam tehi smikehi padinnadnam); Pet 79,20 (~am ghosam paresam deseti); -vesena, adv., in disguise; not in one's own form;

VinI 342,25 (Dighiti Kosalarj ... kumbhakranivesane -ena paribbjakacchannena pativasati); Jal 14,i (~ena pana me kilese jhpetv nibbnapattiy kiccam n' atthi); II 427,6 (bodhisatto ~ena rattibhge nagaram pariganhanto carati); IV 230,27 (~ena palyitv); Sp45,i4; Dhp-al 275,15 (attabhvam vijahitv ~ena tass santike gantv). anfitaka2, mfn., seesvntaka. afifttabba, mfn., jpp of jnti qv. afifttvi(n), mfn. [annta1 + ()vi(n); BHS jiitvin], who has complete insight; {completely understood ?) Dhs 555 (y tesam ~Inam dhammnam anfi pann... idam ... anntvindriyam hoti; As 292,1: ~inan ti jnitv thitnam) * Vibh 124,28; Pet221,i6; Nett60,28 (~ino indriyassa); As 291,30 (-ino catsu saccesu nitthitannakiccassa); ' -indriya, n., the faculty of (having) complete insight; D III 219,10 (tin* indriyni anannatannassmitindriyam annindriyam ~am; Sv 1002,36: ~an ti anntvisu jnanakiccapariyosnapattesu dhammesu indriyam, arahattaphalass, etam adhivacanam); PatisI 115,29; Dhs 555 (y tesam anntvinam dhammnam ann pann... idam... ~am hoti) = Vibh 124,31; Nett 171,19 (bhikkhu savnam khay ... khin jti vusitam brahmacariyam katam karaniyam nparam itthatty ti pajnti, idam bhikkhave ~an ti); afifiti1, pr. 3 sg., see sv jnti. afiti2, m, ^e^^vnti. aflfltum, inf. o/jnti qv. anfidisa, mfn., see sv anna2. aftflpetum, caus. inf. o/jnti qv. afiftya1, absol. o/jnti qv. anfiya2, see sv iiya. aftfiyamna, mfn., neg. pass, o/jnti qv. afiftvihita, see annavihita sv aniia2. afifisi1, aor. 3 sg. o/jnti qv. afifisi2, aor. 3 sg. o/jnti qv. afifiimsu, aor. 3 pl. o/jnti qv. afifiindriya, n., ^e^vann. afifleyya, mfn.,fpp o/jnti qv. afifiofifia, mfn. [S., BHS anyonya], 1. one another; each other; Abh 1200; Vism 521,22* (~am paticca); 2. one after the other; various, different; ~am, adv., Niddl 291,26 (nana vadanti vividham vadanti -am vadanti);-nissita, mfh., interdependent; supported by one another; It 111,20* (sgr angr ca ubho -); JaV 251,8* (mahsl... ~; 251,i6\- ~ ti skhhi skham mlehi ca mlam samsibbitv thit); Vism 597,8* (evam nmam ca rpam ca ubho ~); -bhojana, n., one another's food; Ja VI 354,25* (vitiharam ~nam, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee annamaiinabhojannam, unmetrical); -vivaresi(n), mfn., seeking faults in one another; A I 199,2* (~ino, Be, Se so; Ce annamanna-; Ee annamannam vivaresino); see also aiinanna, annamanna ^v aniia2. afihamna, mfn., o/asnti qv. at ata, n. and m(fh)., 1. (n.) [cf AMg adada], a high numeral; Abh 475 (ahaham ababam cJ evtatam); Sadd 801,27 (ahaham ababam ~am); 802,24 (visati ababni ekam -am visati ~ni ekam ahaham); 2. (m.) [BHS id.], the name of a hell or place in Avici (where one


suffers for an atata of years); SI 152,10 (seyyath p i . . . visati abab niray evam eko ~o nirayo; Spkl 219,1: vassaganan pi pan' ettha evam veditabb) * A V 173,14 (seyyath pi... ahah nirayo evam eko ~o nirayo) = Sn/?. 126,17. atati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atati, Wg 9:8], goes; roams; Dhtup84 (ata pata gamanatth); Dhtum 102; 525 (attane); Sadd353,2 (ata... gatiyam: -ati); atanta, m/(-anti)., Utt-vn 915 (gmantaram -antiy). atana, n. [ts], roaming; Dhtum 525. atanaka, mfn. [atana + ka2], roaming; wild; Ja V 105,25* (~ gvi, Be, Ce so; Ee -gvi; Se akatthan; 105,27': palyanasil). atani,/, [?], part of a bed or chair (probably the rails forming the frame); Abh 309 (mancange tv -i); VinlV 168,26 (bhikkhun mancarn v pitham v krayamnena attharigulapdakam kretabbam sugatangulena annatra hetthimya -iy; 169,1: thapetv hetthimam -im, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se~'\yzm,prob. wr); Ja IV 84,n (rj sokapareto sabbakiccni pahya mancassa -im pariggahetv vilapanto nipajji) * Pv-a 93,24 {Be, Se so; Ee, Ce anjalim, prob, wr); Sp 773,3i foil (masrako ti mancapde vijjhitv tattha-iyo pavesetv kato, bundikbaddho ti-ihi mancapde damspetv pallankasankhepena kato); Dhp-aIII 365,3 (dhammsanam patitthpesi tassa ghanarattasuvannamay pd ahesum tath catasso -iyo). atabandhana, see attabandhana sv atta2. atali, (m)f(n)., having several linings (of a certain kind of shoe); ? M II 155,7 (-iyo uphan rohitv; Ee, Ce so; Ztepataliyo; Se agaliyo; Ps III 411,15: -iyo tigananganauphan); SI 226,16 (Vepacitti asurindo -iyo uphan rohitv, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be pataliyo). afavi, / [ts]t I.forest; woods; Abh536 (-1... maharannam); Ja I 271,2 (imiss -iy visarukkh nma honti yeva); IV 325,26 (tarn -im pavisitv assamam katv); Vism380,i (drnam atthya sakatena -im gantv); Dhp-al 13,15 (aham dubbalo antarmagge ca amanussapariggahlt -1 atthi); II245,18 (pancasatnam cornam yo so imam -im pavisati tarn mretv tassa mamsalohitena tuyham balikammam karissm ti devatya ycanam katv); Patis-a 161,22 (-ito core netv nagarassa dakkhinadvre ghteyyum); 2. (pl) inhabitants of the forest; bandits; savage tribes; Ja VI 55,14* (-iyo samuppann rattham viddhamsayanti nam; 55,16': atavicor samuppann); Ap 354,15 (tassa raniio pamattassa -iyo samutthahum); Cp 3:2:6 (kupito ahosi paccanto -ihi parantihi); -arakkhaka, -rakkhika, m., a forest guard or guide; Jail 335,14 (-esu sabbajetthako, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -rakkhikesu); -pla, m., a forest guard or guide; JaV 22,22 (eko satthavhabrhmano -nam sahassam datv); -sankopa, m., unrest in forest districts; disturbance of bandits or wild tribes; A I 178,21 (bhayam hoti -0 cakkasamrlh jnapad pariyyanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -sankhepa; Mp II284,19: -oti ataviy sankopo, atavi ti c' ettha atavivsino cor veditabb) ^ HI 66,9 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -sankhepo). atavika, m. [ts], one who lives in the forest; Cp-a 190,23 (tehi parantihi -ehi paccantadeso kupito ahosi).

atta1, w. [ts]9 I. a watch-tower; Abh 204; 1126; VinI 140,29 (-0 krpito hoti); Niddl 374,13 (-ato -am gacchati); Sp 654,11 (-0 ti patirjdinam patibhanattham itthakhi kato bahalabhittiko catupancabhmiko patissayaviseso); Mp III 55,19 (sensanan ti manco ... lenam - o . . . ) ; Sadd 94,20*; 2. a platform; scaffolding; Sp 282,4 (-am v bandhanti); 884,2; see also attaka. afta2, m. [cf S. artha], lawsuit, legal case; Abh 1126; VinlV 225,i (-am karissmi ti dutiyam v pariyesati gacchati v); Ja I 405,5 (amhkam -am pacchind ti); 1175,3 (~e sahassam parjito viya); V 395,19 (na sakk ayam -0 vinicchitum); Sp 906,24 (~o ti vohrikavinicchayo vuccati yam pabbajit adhikaranan ti pi vadanti); Ps II 252,13 (rann vinicchitaklato patthya -o aparparam na sancarati); Dhp-al 353,10 (vinicchayam gantv tarn -am tlretv); As 31,11 (asakkhikam -am karonto viya, Ce, Se so; Be addarn; Ee attham); ifc see kt'- (^vkta2); -karana,., (the place for) dealing with lawsuits; seat of judgement, courtroom; DII 20,19 (raja -e nisinno, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee attha-); M II 122,2(-e nisinnassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee attha-); SI 74,16 (-e nisinno kho rj, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se attha-); Ps II 301,19 (etesarn atthya -am n' atthi); -kari,/, one of the parties in a lawsuit; Vin-vn2011 (y bhikkhuni ussayavd -1 mukhari vihareyya, Be so; Ee -kri); -kraka, m., -krik,/, one of the parties in a lawsuit; VinlV 224,30 (ussayavdik nma -krik vuccati); JaV 230,4 (manusse); Sp908,i3 (-0); Ps II 12,4 (dvinnam -nam attam chindanto viya); -bandhana, ., judicial imprisonment or confinement; ? Sp 997,26 (kram bhinditv ti -'-dim bhinditv, Be so; Ee, Se atabandhandim; perhaps wrr; Ce omits); see also attha2. atta3, mfn. [AMg id.; S. rta], distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt; Abh 1126; Sn 694 (ten' amhi -o vyasanagato aghvi; Pj II 489,11: -0 ti turo); Vv 80:9 (svham -o 'mhi dukkhena pilito); Ja IV 293,14* (putt mam' -; 293,17': mamam ca putt - tur); Ap 531,8 (tay na yuttam nibbtum ice ~ vilapimsu t, Ee so; Ce -am; Be, Se icchatt) = Thi-a 140,6* (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se icchatt); Ps III 180,24 (tena inena -o pilito); ifc see in'-, chat'-, vedan'-, scik'-; -ssara, m. [S. rtasvara], a cry of distress; Vin III 105,17 (s ssudam -am karoti; Sp 507,19foil.: ettha sudan tinipto, s atthikasankhalik -am turassaram karoti ti attho) = S II 255,14; Ja V 270,27 (mahantena -ena viravante); Mil 357,25 (-am karoti); Vism 314,25; see also atta4. aftaka1, m. [cf S. attaka], a (temporary) platform; scaffolding; Vin III 81,36 (-am bandhanti); Ja I 173,27 (kadci attakaluddak rukkhesu -am bandhanti); Sp466,24 (-0 ti vehsamanco vuccati yam setakammamlkairmialatkammdinam atthya bandhanti); 1053,30 (antonadiyam baddhe - pi); Sv 972,1 (santhgre cittakammam nitthpetv - muttamatt honti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr atthak); Dhp-aIII 476,17 (rj Sundariy sariram makasusne -am ropetv rakkhpesi); see also atta1. attaka2, mfn. (atta3 + ka2], distressed; afflicted; ? Pv-a 180,19 (scikatt tiptin lkhagatt -, Be, Se so; (^attik;eatthik).


attaniyam in Ee, Se at Sp 1204,14 is wr for ataniyam (Be, Ce so). aftahsa, m. [ts], a horse-laugh; a loud laugh; Abh 175 (~o mahhso); Ud-a67,i (yakkhnam hunkrasaddam bhtnam -am, Be, Ce so; Ee attassaram; Se mahsaddam); Bv-a 39,35 (mihitamattam akatv -am hasanti ti). atjna, n., a rubbing board; ? Vin II 105,28 (chabbaggiy bhikkh ~e nahyanti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se atthne; Sp 1199,19: ~am nma rukkham phalakam viya tacchetv atthapadkrena rjiyo chinditv nahnatitthe nikhananti tattha cunnni kiritv manuss kyam ghamsanti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se atthnam); 106,5 (na bhikkhave ~e nahyitabbam); Vin-vn 2783 (~e thambhakesu v nhyamno). attla, m. (and n. ?) [ts], a watch-tower, esp. above a gateway; Abh 1126; Ja III 477, is* (yad makasadthnam ~o sukato siy); Ap44,9 (satipatthnam ~am pann te caccaram mune); Ih-aIII 54,20 (thirehi ~ehi dvrakotthakehi); see also dalha-m-attalakotthaka. aftlaka, m. [ts], a watch-tower, esp. above a gateway; Abh 204; Ja II 244,23 (~am abhirhitv); VI 269,7* (~ otthagiviyo); 276,4* (~e ca dvre ca manimhi passa); Ap 43, is (~e ca vividhe kraye nagare bah); Spk I 313,29 (matamatamanusse... ~e thatv bahidvre khipanti); Mil 66,20 (gopuram krpeyysi -am krpeyysi); ifc see antar'-. a t t i , / [S. arti], sickness, disease; Sp 175,4 foil, (set M etth ti setattik ~i ti turat vydhi rogo). aftika, mfh. [atta3 + ika?], distressed, pained; Pv-a48,i8 (attiymi ti... ~ dukkhit amhi, Be, Se so; Ee dtukkhitt amhi; Ce omits); 180,19 (scikatt ti ptin lkhagatt ~, Ce so; Be, Se attak; Ee atthik). attita, m/.,/?po/attiyati qv. attiyati (and occasionally atyati), pr. 3 sg. [denom. from atta3; BHS artfyati arttiyati], is distressed, pained, disgusted; Vin I 88,5 (so tena ppakena kammena ~a& haryati jigucchati); D I 213,22 (iddhiptihriyena ~mi haraymi jigucchmi); MI 120,I (yuv mandanakajtiko... kukkurakunapena v manussakunapena v kanthe sattena ~eyya haryeyya jiguccheyya; Ps II 90,n: atto dukkhito bhaveyya); III 300,32 (manpmanpena ~ati haryati jigucchati); SI 131,12* (imin ptikyena ... ~mi haraymi); Pv 10:2 (~mi haraymi nagg nikkhamitum bahi); Ja II143,16 (so tena attiyati haryati jigucchati, eds so); Vism 48,27* (~mi haraymi); Sp467,2i (kad nukho gilnato muccissm ti ~anti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee atyanti); (a) attiya(t), mfn.y Nidd I 466,6 (~ato haryato jigucchato); Pj II 572,8 (~ato); (b)attiyanta,w/w., Vin III 68,21 (bhikkh sakena kyena ~ant haryant jigucchanx attan pi attnam jivit voropenti); JaV 114,26' (appiyyanto ~anto); Pj II 14,3; (c)attiyamna,/n/w., Vin III 24,26 (bhikkhubhvam ~amno haryamno jigucchamno; Sp 247,11 fall: bhikkhubhvan ti bhikkhubhvena, karanatthe upayogavacanam); SIV 62,25 (~amn haryamn jigucchamn, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr atthiyamn); Ja 166,17; Nidd I 480,2 (~amnassa); PsII 244,i (attano gunakathya -amn); absol attiyitv, MI 419,28 (evarpe te... manokamme

attiyitabbam... -itv); Bv-a73,i5 (manussakunapena v kanthe sattena attiyitv); pp attita, mfh. [AMg attiya; BHS artita], pained, distressed, grieved; Abh 1126; Pv 18:2 (bhtusokena -o); Th 157 (kmargena ~o); Ja IV 469,13* (so rj paridevesi puttasokena ~o); Vv-a311,n (atto ~o upadduto); Mhv6:21 (~o puttasokena); Saddh 205; fpp aftiyitabba, mfn. and n. impers., MI 419,27; A I 115,11 (tumhehi kyaduccaritena -am haryitabbam jigucchitabbam). attiyana, n. [from attiyati; cf BHS attiyan], distress; aversion; Dhp-a II179,15 (attano kyena ~am). attiyyanto in Ee at Pj II 41,6 is prob, wr for attiyanto or attiyanto (Be, Ce, Se so). atteti, ~ayati,/?r. 3 sg. [S Dhtup attayati, Wg 32:25], despises; Sadd 532,4 (atta... andare: ~eti ~ayati). attha1, m. [= attha2 qv; AMg id; this form used mainly in cpds, very frequently ifc], matter; meaning, sense; PatisI 174,7 (ken* ~ena buddho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atthena); Kv 164,31 (ken' -en ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atthena); Sadd 2,5 (kenJ ~ena dhtu); attha in Ee at As 31,ii is prob, wr for atta2 qv; attha in Ee at Sv 935,23 is wr for addha1 qv; ifc see app'-; ^ -uppatti/, an occurrence giving rise to the preaching of the dhamma; Mp I 18,H (ayam desana... katamya ~iy desit ti, Be, Se so; Ce katarya; Ee kataryam); Ud-a30,n (suttadesanya vatthubhtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppatti eva ~i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee suttadesanassa atthassa... atthuppatti eva atthuppattiko va) = It-a I 35,30 (Be, Se so; Ce atthuppatti yeva atthuppattiko; Ee atthuppatti eva atthuppattik); Pj II 46,17 (sabbasuttnam catubbidh uppatti attajjhsayato parajjhsayato ~ito pucchvasito ca ti); Vv-a5,6 (pathamavatthussa ayam ~i); Ap-a 275, is (tayo vinicchaye ~im katv); Bv-a 295,29 (imiss ~iy Vessantarajtakam kathesi); ' -uppattika, mfn., arising from an occurrence; Ud-a 29,26 (attajjhsayo parajjhsayo pucchvasiko ~o ti cattro suttanikkhep veditabb, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atthuppattiko) = Bv-a64,i4; -kath,/ [cfS. arthavda], "exposition of the meaning", commentary (as opposed to the text, pli; the early commentaries used by Buddhaghosa etc and the commentaries compiled by Buddhaghosa etc); Ja I 345,15 (parinibbute pana bhagavati sangitikrak ... tini padni ~am ropetv); 488,29' (pliyampana phalam ppeti ti likhanti tarn vyanjanam ~ya n' atthi); V413,i6 (purimanayo va bahsu ~su gato); VI 279,29' (-yarn pana hotu surikam mahrj ti ptho); Visml07,i6 (idam... n' eva pliyam na ~yam gatam kevalam cariyamatnusrena vuttarn); Sp41,n (sabbam buddhavacanam ugganhi saddhim ~ya); 280,30 (bhagavato hi adhippyam iiatv Uplittherdihi ~ thapit); 1273,8* (plim ~am c' eva oloketv vicakkhano sahghike paccaye evarn appamatto vibhjaye); Ps I 1,21* (atthappaksanattham - dito vasisatehi pancahi y sangit anusangit ca pacch pi); Mhv 33:100 (pitakattayaplim ca tass ~am pi ca mukhapthena nesum pubbe bhikkh); 37:234 (ktum -am mama potthake detha sabbe ti); Sadd 541,12 (attho kathiyati ety ti ~); 739,25 (pliyam... ~su pana...); ~-muttaka,/yi/fc., in-


dependent of the commentary, As 107,20 (idam muttakam cariynam matam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr vuttakam); 223,33 (ayam ettha muttako ekassa cariyassa mativinicchayo); see also atthakathika. attha2, num. [S. astau, asta], (mfn. nom.lacc. attha; instr./abl. -ahi, -hi; dat./gen. -annam; he. -asu; iic sometimes atth-), eight; Vin II 191,37 (tasmim magge -a purise thapesi); IV 52,12 (~a garudhamm); D II 109,6 (-a kho im ... paris); M III 222,12 (~a dis vidhvati); S III 153,14 (kukkutiy andni ~a v dasa v); AIV 155,20 (~ahi... dhammehi samanngato bhikkhu sabrahmacrinam appiyo ca hoti); Sn227 (ye puggal -a satam pasatth; Pj I 182,\ofoil.: - ti tesam gananaparicchedo ... satam pasatth ti sappurisehi... pasatth ... athav ... atthasatan ti tesam gananaparicchedo); Vv 34:8 (-' eva pindaptni yam dnam adadam pure); Th 1172 (yo so ~a vimokkhni... aphassayi); Ja I 168,16' (~asu mahnirayesu); 414,5* (catubbhi ~' ajjhagam -hi pi ca solasa, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -abhi pi); 483,21 (-a kahpane dandpessmi ti); IV 78,10 (~ahi gthhi mangalni kathetv); 96,5 (~a vareyci); V 164,3 (tikhinaslehi -asu thnesu vijjhitv); 254, w (sabbe pi -a parikkhre kyapatibaddhe katv);NiddI 143,6 (-annam vimokkhnam); Patisl 130,12 (-ahi purisadosehi dussati lokasannivso); Ap 20,2i (~a pupphe samnetv); Bv28:5 (~a sririk thp); Dhs 1424 (lobho -asu lobhasahagatesu cittuppdesu uppajjati); Vibh241,i5 (-annam maggangnam); Kvu 218,36 (-ahi nnehi sotpattiphalam sacchikaroti); Pet 23 8,11 (te atthangikam maggam bhvessanti -annam micchattnam pahnya, Be, Ce so; Ee wr atthannam); Mill94,16 (-annam... pubbe va angatam oloketabbam hoti); 291,19 (mlkro -ahi sumanapupphamutthihi bhagavantam pjetv); Vism 82,28 (bhikkhuninam -a [dhutangni]); 471,34 (~ahi kmvacarakusalehi); Ps I 125,2 (kasinaparikammam katv ~a sampattiyo nibbattenti); Bv-al5,n (~ahi kranehi bhagav tathagato ti vuecati); Mhv 36:35 (~asu thpesu chattakammam akrayi); Sadd 297,7; ifc see satt'- (sv satta4); '-amsa, mfh. [attha + amsa3], eightedged; eight-faceted; D I 76,22 (mani veluriyo ... ~o suparikammakato); Pv 38:28 (acchejjabhejjo jivo ~o gulaparimandalo); Ja VI 127,3* (~ sukat thambh); Dhs 617; Mil 282,19 (maniratanam ... ~am); 0, -aAga, mfh. [attha + anga2], of eight parts, eightfold; Abh 80 (upavse ca ~e); 0, -agamagga, m. [attha + ahga2+ magga], the eightfold path, the path with eight constituent parts; Th595 (bhveyya... ~am ariyam); '-aAgasila, n., the eightfold moral practice, the eight precepts; Mil 333,13 (pancasilam ~am dasasilam); ' -aftgasamanngata, mfn. [attha + anga2 + samanngata], 1. characterised by eight parts (ie by observance of the first eight precepts qqv sv sila); having eight constituent parts; A I 213,4 (~assa uposathassa); Spklll 63,3 (ariyamaggo... tta); Cp-a 130,2 (~assa ariyuposathasilassa); 2 . possessed of eight good qualities or of eight faults; D II 211,22 (~o saro); Mil 138,28 (~am... so bhavam Gotamo hram hreti); AIV 237',5fall. (~e... khette bijam vuttam na mahapphalam hoti... evam ... ~esu samana-

brhmanesu dnam dinnam na mahapphalam); Ja VI 340,37' (~am ambilodanam); -angasusamgata, mfn. [attha + anga2 + su1 + samgata], well joined with the eight parts; well endowed with eight parts or with eight qualities; SI 208,27* (~am uposatham upavasanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -susamhitam) * A I 144,2* * Thi 31 * Ja VI 118,23* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -susamhitam); AIV 271,23* (~ tdisi silavati upsik); ' -angasusamhita, mfn. [attha + anga2 + su1 + samhita], well joined or well endowed with eight parts; SI 208,27* (~am uposatham upavasanti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -susamgatam); Ja IV 320,20* (~am uposatham upavasmi) ^ VI 118,23* (Se so; Be, Ce, Ee -susamgatam); 'angupeta, mfn. [attha + anga2 + upeta], 1. characterised by the eight parts or factors (ie by the observance of the first eight precepts qqv svsWz); A I 215,15* (~assa uposathassa); Sn402 (uposatham... ~am); 2.possessed of eight (good) qualities; Sv 61,29* (~am giram abbhudirayi); '-anguposathi(n), mfn., observing the eight abstinences of an uposatha day; Mhv 36:84 (rj ... ~I); 0, -angula, mfn., of eight finger-breadths; to the extent of eight finger-breadths; Vin I 297,13 (anujnmi bhikkhave ymena -am... pacchimam civaram vikappetun ti); II 137,4 (anujnmi bhikkhave ... psakaphalakam sattangulam v -am v oghetv appetun ti); 138,7 (anujnmi bhikkhave paramam dantakattham); Sp 1037,28; Mhv 29:11 (~am bahalato lohapattam); 'anguli, mfh., of the height or extent of eight finger-breadths; Vin II 178,8* (in uddna: ~i ca pdak, Be, Ee so; Ce atthangulakapadakam; Se atthangulakapdak); Ja VI 281, fn 7, v3 (jambonadamayam psam caturamsam ~i, Be so; Se ~I; Ee athanguli; Ce omits); ' -attha, mfn., eight of each; eight every time; eight each; JaV 450,19* (ekamekya itthiy -a patino siy); Sp619,io (~a v dasadasa v uppalapupphdini suttena ... bandhitv); Mp V 70,23 (catusu maggesu catusu ca phalesu ~a hutv catusatthi dhamm priprim gacchanti); '-atthaka, mfn., being a group of eight each time; eight groups of eight each time; Spkll \%5,\foll. (sabbam ~am katv sabbatthakam nma dnam datv... so pi ~am nma catusatthi hoti ti catusatthi salkabhattni upanibandhpetv); Ap258,i5 (sabbadissu -am katv dvattimsa kapparukkh utthahimsu; = Spkll 189,3: Be, Ce, Ee attha attha; Se atthattham); ' -addhapada, mfn., who has four feet; Ja VI 354,20* (-0, Be so; Ce, Se -addhapdo, unmetrical; Ee wr addhatthapdo); ftsiti ! ,/, num. [attha + asiti], 88; Bv3:33 (so ~i hatthni aceuggato mahmuni); Vibh-a396,3i (-iy tikehi tikamtik nikkhitt); ftsiti2,m/., eighty-eighth; Ap 159,n (~imh' ito kappe); iha, n. or m. [attha + aha(n)], a period of eight days; D III 90,10 (slim hsi sakid eva -ya); -kutika, mfn. [from attha + kuti], consisting of eight huts; Sv 313,31 (-0 gmo viya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atthangiko); -kumbha, n. (attha + kumbha2], eight kumbha^; Vibh-a256,2i (ekamkhettam -am deti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se attha kumbhe); -kulika, m(fn)., (one) belonging to one of the eight chief families; ? a


member of a council; Sv519,i6 (te [suttadhr] pi vinicchinitv... coro ce ~nam denti; Sv-ptII 160,24: paramparbhatesu atthasu kulesu jt agatigamanavirat attha mahallakapuris -a); -konaka, mfn. [attha + kona+ ka2], with eight corners, octagonal; Sp 290,22 (~am pi solasakonakam pi karonti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -konam); "-kkhattum, -kkhattukam, ind., eight times; Dhs 222 (~um); 243 (apararn pi -kkhattukam); -guna, mfn., or -gunam, adv., eight times; eight times as much; Thi 153 (yattakam tulit es tuyharn dhit ... tato ~am dassam hirannam ratanni ca); Mp IV 117,7; -cattrisa(m), -cattrisa(m), -cattlisa1, -cattlisam, ^cattlisa1, -cattlisam, num., 48; Sn289 (~am vassni, Ee so; Ce -cattrisam; Be -cattlisam; Se -cattlisam); AIV 37,3 (~am ce pi vassni, Be, Ce so; Ee -cattrisam; Se -cattlisarn); Mil82,i4 (-cattlisa yojanasahassni, Be, Eeso; Ce, Se -cattlisa); Ps II 162,22 (brhman hi -cattJisam vassni komram brahmacariyam caritv, Ee so; Be -cattlisa; Ce -cattlisam; Se -cattjisa); It-a I 52,18 (~am angmino, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -cattlisam); Bv-a 197,11 ( -cattlisa itthisahassni, Be, Se so; Ce -cattlisa; Ee wr -catlisa); -cattlisa2, 0 -cattlisa2, mfn., forty-eighth; Ap 418,23 (Nalamlivaggo ~o, Ee so; Se -cattjiso; Be -cattlisamo; Ce -cattlisamo); -jti, mfn., of eight kinds; Mhv 11:14 (~iyo mutt); -tlisa(m), -tlisa(m), num., 48; Thp. 32,25* (in uddna: ~a gthyo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -tlisa); Ap 132,n (~am, Be, Eeso; Ce, Se -tlisam); 208,4 (in uddna: ~a gthak, Be so; Ce, Se -tlisa; Ee -tlisa); 243,18* (in uddna: ~a, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -tlisa); -timsa1, -tims, num., 38; Ja IV 73,n (~a mahmahgalni kathesi); Ap 144,5 (Subbat ~a te, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atthahimsu, prob, wr); 194, I; Mil 359,6 (~ ca rjaparis); PsI 254,29 (~ya kammatthnesu); Dhp-aIII 421,i (~ya rammanesu); -timsa2, mfn., thirtyeighth; Ap 115,16 (~amhi kappamhi); 134,3 (~e ito kappe); 294, n (Bodhivandakavaggo ~o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -timsatimo); -timsati,/, num., 38; Ap 342,2I (kkhattum, Be, Ce so; Ee attharase ca kkhattum; Se attharasa ca tikkhattum); -dantaka, -danta,/w., an eight-pronged rake; Sp550,i2; Sv 606,25 (~ehi vikiritv); Ps II 58,8 (-dantkrena); Thp 173, n (~ehi); atth-dasa, num., [S. astdaSan] 18; D I 13,i (~ahi vatthhi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atthrasahi); M i l l 216,3 (~a manopavicr veditabb, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se attharasa); Sadd 796,6 (attharasa ~a); see also attharasa; -divase in Ce, Ee at Spk I 305,25 and in Be, Ce, Ee at Dhp-al 275,i is prob, wr for atthamldivase (Se so); -dona, mfn., divided into eight measures; D I I 167,22* (~am cakkhumato sariram); -dh, ind., in eight parts; Abh656; D i l 166,14 (bhagavato sarirni - . . . vibhajhi ti); Vism561,i6*; -nakha, mfn., having eight nails or hooves; Ja VI 354,21* (mendo ~o; 354,29' foil: ekekasmim pde dvinnam dvinnam khurnam vasena); -navuti, atthnavuti, num., [S. astnavati], 98; Sn 311 (atthnavuti-m-gamum); Ja V 149,18' (~iy rogamukhnam); Bv 15:7 (~-sahassnam); Mil 100,20 (-i rog); -paficavanno in Ee at Ps V 35,14 is wr; read attha pancavanne with Be, Ce, Se;

-paiifisa1, -paftfisam, num., 58; Ap 572,i9 (ratann* -amuggato); Patis-a704,8* (~a); -pannsakkhattum, 58 times; Ap 53,9; -paflftsa2, mfn., fiftyeighth; Ap 51,27 (--kappamhi); -pannsa\ num., 58; hattha, mfn., being 58 hatthay in size; Ja V 37,5 (~-hatthya... sondya); Bv-a 192,5 (satth pana ubbedhato ~-hattho ahosi); -pannsa2, mfn., fiftyeighth; Ap-a304,i6(kappam atikkamitv); -pada, atthpada, n. [S. astpada], 1. a chequered board (for gambling or playing draughts, chess, etc); Abh 532 (atthpadam); VinUI 180,22 (~e pi kilanti; Sp620,3o: phalake jtam kilanti); D I 6,23 (~am dasapadam; Sv 85,18: ekekya pantiy attha attha padni ass ti ~am); 2. an arrangement of the hair; Th-aIII 36,6 (purimabhge kese kappetv najtassa paticchdanavasena kat kesaracan ~amnma); kata, mfn., arranged in an atthpada, plaited eightfold; MII 65,i* (atthpadakat kes, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se atthapdakat, prob, wr) = Th 772 (--kat, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce atthapdakat; 1h-a III 36,4: kat ti atthapadkrena kat sancit); ~-tthapana, n., arranging in an atthpada, eightfold plaiting; Jail 5,14 (in cpd); -padaka, n., crossweaving; a darn (in appearance like a chequered board); Vin I 297,23 (safightiy patt lujjanti... anujnmi bhikkhave ~am ktun ti); II 150,12 (anujnmi bhikkhave ange vijjhitv ~am vetun ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se vethetun ti); -parikkhrika, mfn., who has eight requisites; Sv206,32 (ayam tva ~assa parikkhramatt, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee attha-) = Ps II 212,25; -parivatta, mfn., consisting of eight items; AIV 304,22 (~am adhidevannadassanam); -pda, mfn. and m., \.(mfn.) eight-footed; JaV 377,2* (pitham ca ... ~am); 2 . (m.) [cfS. lex. astpada = Sarabha], an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) deer; Ja VI 538,6* (538,27': ~tisarabhmig, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); atthapdakat in Ce, Ee, Se at Mil 65,1* and in Se at Valll is prob, wr for atthapdakat qv; -msa, n., a period of eight months; Bv 12:21 (~am padhnam padahi jino); e in Ee at Ap 321,12, 523,26, 556,10 and 590,24 is prob, wr for addhamse or addhamse (Be, Ce, Se so); -msika, mfn., being at the age of eight months; lasting for eight months; Niddl 120,13; Bv-a296,36 (padhnacariy ... ~); -ratanika, mfn., measuring eight ratanay; Mil 312,20; attharasa1, num., and mfn., [cfS. astdaSan] 18; Vin I 355,7 (imehi... ~ahi vatthhi dhammavdijnitabbo, Be, Ce, Se so; Eewr ~ehi); III 204,26 (dvihuppanne mlaclvare ... ~e uppanne mlaclvare, for 18 daysl); V91,n (~a bhedakaravatthni); 147,30 (satam ~a c' eva, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee -a); Mill 62,io (~a... im... dhtuyo); JaIII 115,19 (Takkasilam gantv tayo vede -a ca sippni ugganhitv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -am); VI 542,9 (tassa sariram olokento ~a purisadose passi); Patis 65,27 (~a sankhrupekkh); Ap 92,23 (~am ca kkhattum so devarj bhavissati, Be, Ee, Se so, split cpd ? Ce --kkhattum so); 132,n (~asu kappesu); 342,21 ('-e kappasate devaloke ramissasi); Bv26:2 (-annam kotinam); Mil 106,2 (-ahi buddhadhammehi); Dip 6:1 (dve satni ca vassni -a vassni ca sambuddhe parinibbute abhisitto Piyadassano);


Mhv 38:45 (-a vihre... akrayi); ~-kotika, mfii., consisting of 18 crores; Sp 1220,28 (kotikam ekam nidhnam); atth-rasa2 mfii. [cf S. astdaSa], eighteenth; Ap 253,4 (-e kappasate yamkammam akarim tad tena kammvasesena patto me savakkhayo); 353,25 (-e kappasate Gotamo nma cakkhum... buddho loke bhavissati); Pj II490, n (-yam [gthyam]); atthrase in Ee, Se at Ap 342,2 I is prob, wr; Be, Ce atihatimsatikkhattum; attha-rasama, mfn., eighteenth; VinV 109,35; Kv 575,9 (vaggo ~o); Sp 41,26 (Asoko... tathgatassa parinibbnato dvinnam vassasatnam upari -e vasse sakalajambudipe ekarajjbhisekam ppuni); Mp II 124,32; -vanka, mfii., with eight facets; Ja VI 388,4* (-am maniratanam); -vatthuka, mfn., connected with eight bases or grounds; of eight kinds; Vin IV 221,4 (ayam pi prjik hoti asamvs - ti); V 210,7* (kaf ettha -); Ja III 442, ir (-' -dibhedam dandam); Sv 988,29 (satthari kankhau" ti din nayena gat ~ vimati); -vcika, mfn., involving eight proclamations; VinV 137,7 (- upasampad); Sp242,io/o//.; -vidha, mfn., eightfold; being of eight kinds; Jail 191,15' (ayam hi ~o lokadhammo); Vism 409,34 (-am lobhasahagatam cittam); Sp 312,8 (-am h' etam dukkatam nma); Mp II 165,20 (- upasampad); Ud-a 146,24 (tt); instr. -ena, in eight ways; Dhs 591 (~ena rpasangaho); Mil 302,22 (~ena... sattnam klakiriy hoti); -visa, -visam, num. and mfn., 28; Vin III 204,33 (dvihuppanne mlacivare... ~e uppanne mlacivare, for 28 days ?); Ap 106,7 (~e kappasate rj Samvasito ahu); Vibh 423,36* (-am ca kotiyo); Vibh-a 210,10 (-visdhikam ca vrasatam); -visati\/, m/m., 28; JaV 272,n(-i);NiddI 382,4 (~i nakkhattni); Mil 207,11 (~iy angehi samanngato); Sp 497,23;-visati 2 , mfii., twenty-eighth; Ap94,i2 (--kappamhi); -visatima, mfn., twenty-eighth; Ap 238,23 (Suvannabimbohanavaggo ~o); -satthi\ -satthim,/, num., 68; D i l 45,22 (-i bhikkhusatasahassam, Be, Ce, Seso; 2fe~im); Th/?. 108,7 (in uddna: gthyo ~i); Patis II 35,7 (~i vimokkh, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -I); Vism 588,36 (~i); Sp 82,23 (~iya lenesu); -satthi2, mfn., sixty-eighth; Ap 225,9 (-imh' ito kappe); -sata, -satam, num., 1.108; S IV 231,28 (~am pi may vedan vutt); Ja I 55,32 (~am brhmane nimantetv); Nidd I 49,24 (~am tanhvicaritam, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se ~a-tanhvicaritam); Mil 46,4 (~am vedan); Spk III 82,16 (~assa kranabhtam); 2. 800; Ja I 57,24 (ekena nam ~am nangalni, Ce so; Ee omits nangalni; Be eken' na-atthasatanangalni; Se ekena nni atthasatanangalni) * PsII 290,20 (ekena nam ~am yojenti); Bv-a214,23 (atthrase kappasate ti ito -dhikassa kappasahassassa accayen ti attho); Sadd 801,8 (satassa atiakam -am); -sattatil, -sattatim, / , num., 78; Ap 596,24 (in uddna: ~im eva, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce cha ca sattatim eva); Bv8:7 Hi)-kotinam); Sp250,3i (~i padni); Vibh-a 396,21 (~iypadehi); -sattati 2 , mfn., seventyeighth; Ap 208,13 (kappamhi solas' simsu khattiy); 0-8ahassa, num. and mfn., 8000; JaV 43,5* (~-ng); Spkl 280,33 (~ hatthing); see also atthahgika, addhatthapda, addhattharatana, kusatthaka

(^vkusa1), sabbatthaka. atthaka, m.n. [S. astaka], a group of eight; a whole consisting of eight parts; a section consisting of groups of eights; Abh479 (~am); VinV 137,24* (~ suppaksit); Mill l,2i(attha ~); Vv67:2 (atth' atthak sikkhit sdhurp); Patis I 117,31 (imni atth' ~ni catusatthi honti); Sv 1045,30 (~am nitthitam). atthakathika, m(fn). [from atthakath qv sv attha1], (one) who learns and recites the commentaries; one versed in the commentaries; Pj 1151,12 (dve suttantik bhikkh annamannam suttantam skacchanti... ~ atthakatham). atthakavaggika, atthakavaggiya, mfn., n. and m. [prob, from atthaka + vagga, but cf BUS arthavarglya], 1. (mfn. and n.) belonging to the Atthakavagga of the Suttanipta (Sn 766-975); a sutta from the Atthakavagga; Vin I 196,36 (sabbn* eva ~ni sarena abhsi) * Ud59,23 (Ud-a 312,16foil.: atthakavaggabhtni kmasuttdini solasa suttni); S III 9,19 (vuttam idam ... bhagavat ~e Mgandiyapanhe); Pet 215,24 (atthakavaggiyesu muni niddittho); Mp I 241,19 (atthakavaggiyni suttni abhsi, Be, Seso; Ee omits suttni); 2 . (m.) the Atthakavagga of the Suttanipta; Nidd I 1,4 (title: ~o, Ee, Se so; Be atthakavagga; Ce omits); 510,19 (~amhi solaso suttaniddes samatt, Ee, Se so; Be atthakavaggamhi; Ce omits); Spk II 258,26 (atthakavaggiye Mgandiyapanhe ti ~amhi Mgandiyapanho nma atthi, tasmim panhe) ^ Nidd-a 1309,20. atthak,/ [S. astak], the eighth day after the full moon in the two winter months; the festival held at that time; ifc see antar'-. atthangika, mfn. [attha2 + anga2 + ika], 1. having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts; Vin III 93,8 (cattro satipatthn cattro sammappadhn cattro iddhipd pane' indriyni panca balni satta bojjhang ariyo - o maggo); V 136,36 (~o musvdo); DI 157,3 (ayam eva ariyo ~o maggo seyyathidam sammditthi sammsankappo sammvc sammkammanto samm-jivo sammvymo sammsati sammsamdhi; Sv 313,3\foll.: pancangikam turiyam viya -0 gmo viya v atthahgamatto yeva hutv ~o, na angato anno maggo nma atthi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atthakutiko gmo); MI 118,6 (kummaggo ti... ~ass' etam micchmaggassa adhivacanam); SV 17,11 (yo... imin ariyena ~ena maggena sammangato ayam vuecati brahmaeri); AI 215,5* (etam hi -am h' uposatham; MpII 328,22: pntiptdini asamcarantena upavuttham uposatham atthahi ahgehi samanngatatt ~m ti vadanti) = Sn 401; AII 34,21 (ye ... ariye ~e magge pasann agge te pasann); Dhp273 (maggn' -0 settho); It 18,1* (passati... ariyam -am maggam dukkhpasamagminam); Vv22:10 (-am... sukhvaham uposatham satatam upvasim); Pv 38:48 (-ena maggena phusanti amatam padam); Th421 (ariyo ~o maggo dukkhpasamano sivo); Ja III 305,21' (ujun va -ena maggena nibbnam gatatt ujugatnam); Ap 6,12 (bhveth' -am maggam es buddhnussani); Vibh 104,36 (katamam dukkhanirodhagminipatipad ariyasaccam, ayam eva ariyo - o maggo); Pet 114,18 (cattro satipatthn yva ariyo - o maggo evam ete sattatimsa bodhipakkhik


dhamm); Mil 218,15 (pubbakehi tathgatehi anucinnam -am sivam maggam ... bhagav ... uppdesi); Vism 675,7 (-am micchmaggam pajahati); 2. possessing eight qualities', Abh 129 (-0 saro). atthapan, / [cf S. sthpana], arranging; fixing, causing to stay; Vibh 352,24 (iriypathassa v ~ thapan... kuhan) * Niddl 226,6 (thapan); Vibh 357,n (upanho ... - thapan, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce thapan) = Pp 18,2i (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee thapan); see also thapan. atthama, m/(- and ~\)n. and - 1 , / [S. astama], 1. (mfn.) eighth; Vin III 251,27 (~e arunuggamane); DU 109,3 (ayam -0 hetu... mahato bhmicalassa ptubhvya); Mill 222,27 (ayam -1 dis); AIV 390,6 (imin -na angena samanngato hoti); Sn230 (na te bhavam -am diyanti); Thi 38 (tass me -I ratti); Ja I 339,7' (ayam me -o supino); Ap38,8 (-e divase patte); Vibh 343,6 (ayam -o vimokkho); Kv 362,7 (~I s vinnnatthiti); Vism 678,9 (arah nma - o ariyapuggalo hoti); Sp 1136,4 (puggalassa dnam - [mtik]); Pj II 183,7 (-ya [gthya]); ifc see art'- (sv atta[n]); 2. (f., seil, ratti) the eighth day or night; Sil 221,2 (sattham... sno ratthapindam bhunjim -iy ann udapdi); Sn 570 (yam tarn saranam gamha ito -i cakkhum); Thi 44 (sattham ekapallanke nisidim ... -iy pde pasresim); esp. the eighth day or night of the lunar half-month; Vin I 102,4 (anujnmi bhikkhave ctuddase pannarase -iy ca pakkhassa sannipatitun ti); M I 20,29 (y t rattiyo abhinnt abhilakkhit ctuddasi pancadasl -1 ca pakkhassa); II 75,1 (uposatham ca upavasati ctuddasim paficaddasim -im ca pakkhassa); Sn402 (upavass* uposatham ctuddasim pancadasim ca -im); Vv 15:6 (ctuddasim pancadasim y ca pakkhassa ~ I . . . uposatham upavasissam); Ja II 369,1 (pakkhassa tayo divase ctuddase pannarase -iyam ca gacchati); Pj II 56,30 (ajja bhante kirn sattami udhu -4 ti); 3. (f., seil, vibhatti), (gr.t.t.) the vocative case; Sadd60,13* (mantan' ~I); 89,13 (bho puris ti -iy ekavacanam). afthamaka, mfn. and m. [atthama + ka2; BHS astamaka], \.(mfn.) eighth; Ap 50,23 (ito -e kappe cakkavatti bhavissati); 557,29 (y tay vannit vira ito-e dine, Eeso; Ce 'hani; Be, Se muni); ifc see atf- (sv attafn]), oj' (sv oj); 2. (m.) the eighth of the eight ariyapuggalay, persons striving after dxh&Xship, reckoned from the first, the arahat; the eighth is one who has begun on the sotpattimagga qv; Patis II 193,32 foil, (puthujjanakalynakassa pann-assa pannya dure suvidre ... -assa pann sotpannassa pannya dure suvidre; Patis-a643,3o: -ass ti arahattaphalatthato patthya ganlyamne atthamabhtassa sotpattimaggatthassa); Kv 243,26/0//. (-assa puggalassa ditthipariyutthnam pahinan ti); Nett 19,2 (yni -assa indriyni); 49,33 (~assa sotpannassa ca kmargavypd sdhran); Mp III 371,15 (-am hi atikkamitv pavattarucitya sotpanno accaruci); Ud-a 306,6 (pathamamaggattho so ~o ti vuecati). atthavavasena in Ee at Sv 1052,15 is wr for atthakavasena (Be, Ce, Se so). atth, aor. 3 sg. of titthati qv.

atthdasa, atthnavuti, atthpada, atthrasa, see ^vatia2. atthrasaka, n. m. [atthrasa + ka2], a group of eighteen; Vin II 6,25 (patippassambhetabbam -am nitthitam, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee patippassambhetabba-atthrasakam nitthitam); Vibh-a 76,13 (sabbni tni -ni); 465,14 (cha-ti). atthrasama, see sv attha2. atthsi, aor. 3 sg. of titthati qv. afthi, n. (and m. ?) [S. asthi], (sg. nom. -i, (and -im); acc. -im; pl. nom./acc. -I, -ini; cf Sadd233,i3/o//.), \.a bone; Abh 278; Vin I 83,3 (nhrurn chetv -im chindati); DII 293,14 (atthi imasmim kye ... taco mamsam nahr -I); MII 64,28* (passa ... rparn ... ~i tacena onaddham saha vatthehi sobhati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tancena; Ps III 302,16: tacena onaddhan ti allamanussacammena onaddham; or cpd., see below) = Th 770 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -im tacena; Th-a III 35,22/0//.: -im tacena onaddhan ti allacammena pariyonaddham ... -im pass ti yojan ... ye pana atthittacen ti pathanti tesam atthitacena onaddham sobhati onaddhatt atthitacena ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -issa tacena ti attho, prob, wr); S III 207,6 (kpotakni -ini bhavanti); A I 50,10 (kmam taco nahru ca -i ca avasissatu); Dhp 150 (-inam nagaram katam mamsalohitalepanam); Jal 399,6 (sabbe khditv -i sese akamsu); III 26,2 (ekassa sihassa mamsam khdantassa -i gale laggi); 155,20 (lhanato -ini haritv); 295,23' (-im eva taco ass ti atthittaco); Patis I 6,33 (~I abhinneyy); Kv 494,18 (mtukucchigatassa pacch kes lom nakh dant - i uppajjanti ti); Vism 192,12 (tassa tassa -ino); Mp II 73,13 (-imhi v dante v); ifc see akkhak' -, r' (^vru), kott,-, chav's 2. a stone or seed (of a fruit); Jail 104,23 (tassa -im attano uyyne roppetv); Mil 77,H; Sp837,i2 (-ini); ifc see amb'- (^vamba2), kappas'-, koF- (jvkola1), kosamb'-; -kankala, -kankla, m., a collection of bones; a skeleton; Vin IV 135,io (-'pam km) ^ MI 130,26; MI 364,H (goghtako ... -am ... nimmamsam lohitamakkhitam upacchubheyya); Sil 185,11 (ekapuggalassa ... kapparn sandhvato samsarato siy evarn mah ~o atthipunjo); Thi488 (km... sannibh, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -kanklasannibh); -kadalI,/, a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa sapientum); JaV 406,20 (moe ti-iyo, Be, Se so; Ce -I; Ee ~i); Nidd-al 396,18 (~i-phalehi katapnam); -cammamatta, mfn., reduced to skin and bones; Ja II 339,1 (parisussitv kis - va ahosi); It-al 103,13; -cchida, m(fn). [atthi + chida1], a breaker of bones; Mill 154,14* (- pnahar gavssadhanahrino, Ce, Ee, Seso; 5e-cchinn) = Vin I 350,i* (Se -cchidd; Be, Ce, Ee -cchinn) = Ja III 488,13* (Ee -cchidd; Be, Ce, Se -cchinn); -cchinna, m(fn).9 one who breaks bones; ? one with broken bones; ? Vin I 350,1* (- pnahar gavssadhanahrino, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -cchidd) = M III 154, H* (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -cchid) = Ja III 488,13* (Be, Ce, Se so; e-cchidd); -(t)taca, n. and mfn., 1. (n.) skin and bones; Mil 64,28* (passa... rpam... -na onaddham ... sobhati,Be, Ce, Seso; Ee wr -tancena; or separate words, see above) - Th 770 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atthim tacena; cf Th-alll 35,22foil.', atthim tacena


onaddhan ti allacammena pariyonaddham ... atthim pass ti yojan... ye pana ~en ti pathanti tesam -ena onaddham sobhati onaddhatt -ena ti attho); 2. (mfn.) who has bone for a skin (a crab); Jail 343,4* (~o vrisayo alomo;343,ir: atthim ev' assa tacakiccam sdheti ti-o) = III295,is*; -makkhik in Ee at Sp 715,26 is wr for atthipakkhik (Ce so) or atthipakkh (Be, Se so); -mifija,/i., -mifij,/, bone-marrow; Vin I 83,4 (atthim chetv -am hacca tittheyya); DII 293,14 (atthi imasmim kye ... atthi -, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -am); Ja VI 107,8' (atthini bhinditv-am khdanti); Mil 26,8 (atthi -a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -am); Vism 255>n foil. (-an ti tesam tesam atthinam abbhantaragatam minjam); Pj I 52,is (atthinam abbhantaragatam -am vannato setan ti vavatthpeti); -sankhalpam in Ee at A III 97,2 is prob, wr for -kahkalpam (Be, Se, Mp III 270,7 JO; Ce 0 -kankhalpam), but cf BHS asthiSakal, asthiSankal; -sankhalik, / [BHS asthisamkalik], a chain of bones, a skeleton; D i l 296,13 (passeyya sariram sivathikya chadditam -am samamsalohitam); Pv 24:10 (yad ca khyit si - kat); -saftghta, m. [BHS asthisamghta], a conjunction of bones, a skeleton; Niddl 181,13 (sariram... -am); JaV 256,19' (khine camme ca mamse ca ~o mivegena bhinno, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~e); Vism 354,26 (mamsam -am anulimpitv thitam); Dhp-all 28,H (bhijjamnesu -esu); Pj II 129,8 (parinibbutapaccekabuddhassa -am papte pakkhipitv); Vibh-a 354,33 (ayam kyasammato -o abhikkamati); -saficaya, m., a heap of bones; Sil 185,is* (puggalass' ~o)= It 17,13*; -saiifi,/ [BHS asthisamjn], the idea of bones; contemplation of the skeleton; Th 18 (kevalam -ya aphari pathavim imam); see also anatthika. atthi(n), mfn. [= atthi(n) qv; cfAMg atthi], needing; see idamatthit sv idam. atthika1, mfn. [= atthika1 qv; cf AMg atthiya], having a purpose or aim; having a desire or need for; Sp 877,9 (atthikatv ti -bhvam katv -o hutv ti, Ee so; Ce, Se atthiko; Be atthikabhvam ... atthiko); Spkl 177,26 (taya desanya ~ hutv, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se atthik); II 198,23 (atthikatv ti attnam tena dhammena ~am katv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atthnatthena dhamme, prob, wr); ifc see idam-. atthika2, n. [atthi + ka2; S. asthika], I. a bone; Vin II 115,14 (~ni... pattena niharanti); D II 344,22 (sabbe so yakkho amanusso bhakkhesi ~n' eva sesesi); M III 92,5 (~ni apagatasambandhni); Cp 2:2:4 (nhrhi -ehi v, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nahru-atthikehi); Mil 85,n (~ni dighni); Vism 264,25 (~ni katakatyanti); Pv-a 212,15 (kirn ~nam pjanen ti); ifc see r'- (jvru), chav'-; 2. a stone or seed (of a fruit); ifc see amb'- (yvamba2), tal's atthik in Ee at Pv-a 180,19 is prob, wr; Be, Se attak; Ceattik; atthik in Ee at Ap 358,13 is wr for addhik(ite, Ce, Seso); -sankhalik, / , a chain of bones, a skeleton; Vin III 105,15 (addasam ~am vehsam gacchantam); A III 324,11 (passeyya sariram sivathikya chadditam -am samamsalohitam); Ja I 433,17; Vism 192,27 (sakalyapi ~ya); -sanghtaka, m or n., a conjunction of bones, a skeleton; Sp 507,12 (atthi-

sahkhalikan ti setam nimmamsalohitam -am, Ce, Ee so; Se -sankhalikan ti... -sanghtam; Be -sankhalikan ti... atthisanghtam); -safirl,/, the idea of bones, contemplation of the skeleton (as a meditation exercise); SV 129,5 (Spklll 175,22: ~ ti atthikam atthikan ti bhventassa uppannasanfi); A l l 17,3; Ja I 433,16 (~ uppajji, sakalam pi tarn sariram atthikasankhalik viya pannyi); Vism 112,3. atthika3, mfn. [atthi + ka2], having a stone or seeds; Sp 1102,9 (cocapnan ti~ehi kadaliphalehi katapnam) = Nidd-a I 396, is (Be so; Se -kadaliphalehi; Ce, Ee atthikadaliphalehi); see also anatthika. atthikatv, atthikatvna (sometimes, esp. in Be, Se, atthimkatv; occasionally atthikatv), ind. [absoi, prob, from *attha1 + karoti; but cf BHS asthikrtya], making something one's aim or object; paying attention; Vin IV 144,32 (tvam ptimokkhe uddissamne na sdhukam ~ manasikarosi ti; Sp 877, s: ~ ti atthikabhvam katv, Ce, Se so; Be atthimkatv ti; Ee atthikatv ti); DII 204,27 (Mgadhake paricrake rabbha ~ manasikatv); SI 112,5 (te ca bhikkh - manasikatv ... ohitasot dhammam sunanti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be atthim katv; Spkl 111,25foil.: ~ ti atthikam katv ayam no attho adhigantabbo ti evam sallakkhetv, tya desanya atthik hutv, Ee so; Ce atthik hutv; Be atthim katv ti atthikam ... atthik ...; Se ~ ti atthikatv ... atthik ...); AII116,32 (ngo yam enam hatthidammasrathi kranam kareti... tarn ~ manasikatv ... ohitasoto sunti); Sn 317 (tad ~na nisamma dhiro); JaV 151,12* (yo koc' im - suneyya; 151,19': attano atthikabhvam katv atthiko hutv sakkaccam suneyya); Vism 442,18 (sakkaccam - dhammasavanam, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se atthimkatv); Saddh 220 (~na sdhukam). atthita1, mfn. [pp of *2 + titthati; S. sthita], undertaken, intended; Jail 247,15* (~am me manasmim me; 241 ,\rfoil.: yam tumhe kathetha tarn may adhitthitam eva). atthita2, mfn., neg. pp of titthati qv. atthiyamn in Ee at S IV 62,25 is wrfor attiyamn (Be, Ce, Se so). atthilla, atthila, n. [atthi + ilia; cf S. asthil], a bone (or small pebble) used for massage; Vin II 266,22 (bhikkhuniyo ~ena jaghanam ghamspenti; Sp 1293,15: ~en ti gojanghatthikena); 281,34* (-am, in uddna); Vin-vn 2956 (na ghamspeyya samani jaghanam atthildin). ad4ati,/?r. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup addati, Wg9:64], joins; attacks; Sadd 356,6 (adda [abhijyoge: -ati). addarukan ti in Ee at Sp 1211,5 is wr for addharukan ti (Se so) or addhadukan ti (Be so). acjUJha1, addha1, m.n. [S. ardha], 1. one half, half; a part; Abh 53 (-0 tv addho); 54 (addham vuttam samabhge); 995 (addho bhge); 1039 (-0... bhge); Thi88 (bahvatasamdn -am sisassa olikhim); JaV 156,25 (-suvannamayavattlbuno -ena sadisatya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee addhena); Patis-a 375,2 (kappassa -am gahetv); Sadd 774,25 (rattiy -am addharattam); 2. half a kahpana; Vin II 294,16 (deth' vuso sanghassa kahpanam pi -am pi pdam pi); Ja III 448,14 (eko


kahpano ~o pdo); Sv 935,23 (yo hi kahpanrahassa -am deti, so parassa ~am nseti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr attham); - ifc see chal- (.svcha2), di-y- (.svdvi); ' -akkhi, n., "Halfan eye", a sideways look, a glance; Ud-a 171,5 (sineharasavipphrasamscakena ~in bandhanti viya oloketv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr addhakkhika); 0, -akkhika, n. (?) [addha + akkhika2], "half an eye", a sideways look, a furtive glance; Dhp-alV 98,23 (satthram -na olokesi); Vism 76,28 (~ena lhanam olokentena); ' -acchika, n., "half an eye", a sideways look, a furtive glance; Sp808,32 (~ena olokayamn, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee addhacchikena); '-atthapda in Ee at Ja VI 354,20* is wr for atthaddhapada qv .yvattha2; -atthama, mfn., seven and a half; S i l 217,n (sattaratanam v... ngam ratanam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee addhattharatanam, perhaps wr); Ud40,8 (sattaratanam v ratanam v ngam osdeyya, Be so; Se attharatanam; Ce, Ee addhattharatanam, perhaps wr; Ud-a 246,2: ~-ratanan ti addhena atthannam pranni ~ni, Be, Se so; Ce pranan ti; Ee atthamam pranan ti); Sadd 766,14 (addham atthannam pranam yesan ti ~ni, ~ni ratanni pamnam etass ti ~-ratano hatthi); 0, -uddha, mfn. [S. ardhacaturtha, AMg addhuttha], three and a half; Abh 477; Ja I 82,30 (~ni ptihriyasahassni); V 417,2 (~ni itthisahassni; 418,24': -niti addhacatutthni, tini sahassni pancasatni ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits addhacatutthni); Vism 205,24*; Sadd 796,22 (addhena catuttho ~o); '-ekdasa, num., ten and a half; Vism 589,35 (~a dhtuyo rparn addhattham dhtuyo nmanti); As 327,10 (~annam rpyatannam); Vibh-a 73,7 (~ahi dhthi rpapariggaho); '-ocitaka, mfn., with half (the flowers) plucked off; Ja I 120,26 (-e pupphagacche datv); -kyika, mfn., of the size of half one's body; Vinll 150, is (chabbaggiy bhikkh ~ni bimbohanni dhrenti); -ksika, -ksiya, mfn., made of a sort of cloth from Ksi; ? according to ct: worth 500; Vin I 281,18 (Ksikarj JIvakassa... -ksikam kambalam phesi upaddhaksinam khamamnam, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -ksiyam; Sp 1119,3o/o//.: -ksiyan ti ettha ksi ti sahassam vuccati tarn agghanako ksiyo, ayam pana pancasatni agghati tasm ~-ksiyo ti vutto); -kuddaka, n., a half-wall; Vin II 152,17 (anujnmi bhikkhave -an ti, - uparito olokenti); -kumbhpama, mfn., like a half-filled pitcher; Sn 721 (~o blo rahado pro va pandito); -kusi, / , a short strip of cloth (part of a bhikkhuV robe); Vin I 287,23 (kusim pi nma karissati ~im pi nma karissati; Sp 1127,13: ~i ti antarantar rassapatnam nma); Sp 1273,24 (gantukapattam ropessmi ti ycantassa kusiy ca ~iy ca pahonakam dtabbam); Vin-vn 563 (kusim -im v); -canda, n., -candaka, m., a halfmoon, a semicircle; a semicircular arrangement of flowers; Ap 231,8 (~am may dinnam; Ap-a470,22: ~'-krena may anekapupphni pjitni ti attho); Sp290,8(chattapannesu makaradantakam v -candakam v chinditum na vattati); 620,14 ( -candako ti ~' -krena mlgunaparikkhepo); Ps III 370,16; Vin-vn 471 (addhacandakam eva); 3030 (chinditum addhacandam v panne

makaradantakam); -cla, .(?), a measure (of rice); ? Mil 102,io(vhasatam ... vihinam addhaclam ca vh vlhisattammanni dve ca tumb) quoted Spkll 100,i (Spk-t [Be] II 107,16: ~sn ti thokena nam upaddham, tassa pana upaddham adhikrato vhasatass ti vinnyati; addhacuddasan ti keci, addhacatutthan ti apare) ^ Mp I 59,22; -chakka, mfn., five and a half; ? MpIV 92,20 (~ehi jtakasatehi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -cchatthehi); As 31,34 (~esu jtakasatesu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee addhacchatthesu); -(c)chattha, mfn., five and a half; Sv612,i9 (~ni jtakasatni); 1064,8 (~ni panhasatni kathitni honti); -tiya, mfn. [BHS id.], two and a half; Abh 477; Ja I 68,14 (~ni [dhenusatni]); Ps IV 156,15 (~ ntakakotiyo); Vv-a 66,29 (-esu msesu vitivattesu); Sadd 796,23 (addhena tatiyo -o); -teyya, mfn., two and a half; Abh 478; Vin I 39,24 (saddhim ~ehi paribbjakasatehi); J a l 206,7 (~nam ntakakotinam); MpIV 187,13 (angminam ~ [pantiyo]); -telasa, -telasa, -terasa, mfn., twelve and a half; Vin I 222,12 (yannnham ~annam bhikkhusatnam ~ni mamsaptisatni patiydeyyam); D I 50,6 (~nam bhikkhusatnam); SI 192,10 (saddhim ~ehi bhikkhusatehi); Snp. 104,1 (mah... bhikkhusarigho ~ni bhikkhusatni); Sp 702,24 (Magadhanli nma -terasapal hotiti); Patis-a 685,13 (-terasni kotthasatni sodhpetv); -duka, see sv -ruka; -navama, mfn., eight and a half; PatisII 158,15 (~ni dhammasatni); Sp 81,28; Mhv 15:201 (sahassni); 0 -paocama, mfn., four and a half; Pj II 442,19 (~ni ca satni); -pallanka, n., a half-crossed-leg posture, ie with one leg straight; Vin II 280,10 (anujnmi bhikkhave bhikkhuniy -an ti; Sp 1296,io: -an ti ekam pdam bhujitv katapallankam); Ap 539,27 (~am bhuija, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee addha-); Vin-vn 2978 (gilny' -am vattati ti);-plaka, -plika, m(fn.), (half-covered?) one of a class of niganthay; Sp 1213,6 (yath setapat ~-niganth prupanti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se addhaplik niganth)= Kkh 147,28 (Be so; Ce, Ee addhaplaka-); -man4ala, n., a small panel (part of a bhikkhuV robe); Vin I 287,24; Spll27,i6 (-an ti khuddakamandalam); 1127,n (mandalam ca -am ca ekato katv sibbitam maijhimakhandam); Vin-vn 563 (-am, Be so; Ee addha-); -matta, mfn. [from addha + matt], (gr.t.t.) having the quantity of half a mora, being half the length of a short vowel; Sadd 605,29 (ses~vyanjan); -mna, mfn. [addha + mna2], measuring half a mna; Jal 468,1* (tasm harrni bhusam ~am; 468,7': ekampalpatumbam harmi ganhmi ti); [or n. and split cpdl] -msa1, m. [addha + msa1], (a coin worth) half a msa; Ja VI 346,28* (laddhna ~am); -msa2, m. [addha + msa2], half a month, a fortnight; VinII 182,22 (gamehi... ~am, ~assa accayena... pabbajissm ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee addha-); D II 315,4 (titthatu bhikkhave ~o); AIV 139,20 (ms pi sankht - pi sankht, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee addha-); Ja VI 536,9* (~am dhriyamnnam gandho tesam na chijjati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee addha-); 574,3 (~ena Jetuttaranagaram patto); Ap 374,12 (~e asampatte arahattam appunim); Bv9:19 (annakam ~am padhnam padahl jino); Vv-a 67,8 (imam


-am ... paricaratu); Mhv 3:11; -msaka, m., (a coin worth) half a msa; Pv31:4 (vicinim -am, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee addha-); Ja I 112,13 (ayam -am pi na agghati ti); VI346,12 (tarn eva -am vijjhitv suttakena vunitv); -msika, mfn. [from addhamsa2], 1. fortnightly; D I 166,15 (-am pi pariyyabhattabhojannuyogam anuyutto viharati, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee addha-; Sv 356,5: -an ti addhamsantarikam); 2. being a fortnight old; lasting for a fortnight; Niddl 120,9 (-0 pi cavati marati); Bv-a296,38 (~ [padhnacariy]); -mundaka, mfn., shaven over half the head; Mhv 6:42 (satta satni purise kretv -e); -yoga, m., a certain kind of house; Abh209 (-0; Abh-sci 10, n: ekapasse yeva chadanato addhena yogo addhayogo, garulassa pakkhena sadisachadanageham); Vin I 58,19 (atirekalbho vihro ~o psdo); II 146,29 (anujnmi bhikkhave panca lenni vihram -am psdam...; Sp 1215,12: -o ti supannavankam geharn); Niddl 67,12 (na tvham imamh... ~a nikkhamissmi; Nidd-a 1197,24: - ti tikuddageh, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nikundageh [?]); Patis I 176,23 (gran ti vihro -o...); -yojanika, mfn., extending half a yojana; Ja VI 426,5 (-am niah-ummaggam kretv); Ps IV 156,7 (petanagarni ca gvutikni pi -ni pi petabharitni honti); -ratanika, mfn., measuring half a ratana; Ja I 7,24' (cankame ratanike v -e v); -ratta, m.n.., -ratt,/, -ratti,/, [addha + ratta2, ratt, ratti; BHS ardhartri], midnight; Abh 70 (~o); A III 407,19 (abhido -am bhattaklasamaye); Ja IV 292,12 (vijjhpentass' ev' assa ~o jto); 293,3* (sudukkaram kammam ak... -e angate; 293,5': ~e angate yva diyaddhaym vymam karonto); Vv 81:16 (so -yam bodhya-m-abhinikkhami; Vv-a 315,25: -yan ti-iyam); Pv-a 152,14 (-e... sayanato utthahitv); Sadd774,25 (addham rattiy -am); addharattvapyi(n), mfn., drinking (only) at midnight; JaI 163,4* (migam... addharattvapyim, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -'-papyim; 163,13': ~e avapiva* ti addharattvapyi, Ce so; Ee addharattvapyi; Be, Se -e pam pivati ti - ' -papyf); -ruka, -duka, .(?), a certain way of shaping the hair on the stomach; Vin II 134,7 (-am krpenti, Ee, Se so; ite-dukam; Ce addhrakam; Sp 1211,6: udare lomarjithapanam); 144,30 (in uddna: -am, Se so; Be, Ee -dukam; Ce addhurakam); -solasa, mfn., fifteen and a half; Pj II 447,4 (addhatelasnam bhikkhusatnam patiyattam -annam ppunissati ti, kuto aparni tini satni ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -nam); see also upaddha. addha2 (and addha2), mfn. [S. dhya], rich; wealthy, well-to-do; Abh 725; 1039; Vin III 17,34 (idam ... kulam -am mahaddhanam mahbhogam); D I 134,22 (rj... ahosi -0 mahaddhano mahbhogo); S V 402,14 (catuhi... dhammehi samanngato ariyasvako -0 mahaddhano mahbhogo; Spklll 290,22: sattavidhena ariyadhanena -o c' eva mahaddhano ca); Vv 31:3 (~e kule sunis ahosim); Th783 (- dalidd ca, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se addh); Ja III 70,6* (y dalidd daliddassa - -assa kittim); IV 127,2* (- ca dalidd ca sabbe maccuparyan); V 452,24* (-am natv purisam mahaddhanam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se addham); Ap 580,12 (-0 santo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se addho); Pet 142,n (-0 v duggato v); Mil 128,6 (puriso -o mahaddhano

mahbhogo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se addho); Sp 207,8 (addh ... upabhogaparibhogpakaranamahantatya); Thi-a 117,21 (gunehi pana ayam then - yeva); Saddh316 (-t hi anant me paraloke bhavissati); -vda, m., talk of wealth, talk of being rich; A V 43,9 (puriso daliddo va samno -am vadeyya; Mp V 19,23: addho 'ham asm! ti vdam vadeyya); anaddha, mfn., poor; Ps HI 167,21 (anjhiyoti -o, Be, Seso; Ce, Ee na addho); see also anlhiya. addhaka1, n. or mfn. [addha1 + ka2], (being) half; Ap-a 267,32 (tadaddhakam tato -am tiyaddhasatayojanan ti attho); ifc see tad-. addhaka2, mfn. [addha2 + ka2], wealthy, rich; Pv20:2 (gahapati ~o dino); Ja IV 495,20* (na - balav tejavpi); su-addhaka, mfn., very rich; Ap75,io (jto mahsle -, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se su-addhake) = Ap 439,4 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se su-addhake). addh in Ee at Ps IV 157,27 and V 10,n is wr for addh (Be, Ce,Seso). addhnam in Ee at Ap 85,20 is wr for addhnam (Be, Ce, Se so). ana, n. [Mgid.; S. rna], debt; ifc see anana, sna; see also adhamanna, ina, uttamanna. anaka, m(fn). [from anati ? cf S. anaka], a speaker; ? small; ? Sadd 357,7 (anati, - o brhmano). anati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup anati, Wg 13:1], sounds; speaks; Dhtup 114; Dhtum 169 (ana... sadde); Sadd 357,7 (ana ... kana sadde: -ati); Sv 244,10 (brahmam -all ti brhmano, mante sajjhyati ti attho) = Ps I 109,23. anana, n. [from anati], sounding; speaking; It-all 141,i5/o//. (bhitappatt brahmassa ca -ato brhmano ... bhagav ... anuttarassa ariyamaggasankhtassa brahmassa vatt pavatt... tasm sabbaso bhitappatt brahmassa ca -ato kathanato bhagav paramatthena brhmano ti vuccati). anim, m or f. [S. animan, m.], minuteness; the ability to make oneself minute; Sadd 867,1 (~ mahim lahim); -laghimdika, -langhimdika, mfn., beginning with minuteness and lightness; Vism211,20 (-am v lokiyasammatam sabbkraparipram atthi, tath lokuttaro dhammo, Ceso;Be, Ee, Se -larighimdikam) = Sp 124,9 (-am, Be so; Ce, Ee anima-; Se -langhimdikam) = Pj I 108,29 (-am, Be so; Ce, Ee anima-; Se -larighimdikam) = Nidd-a 1265,28 (Be, Se -langhimdikam; Ce, Ee animalaghimdikam). anika, see sv anika. dim (sometimes written anu), mfn. and m. [ts], 1. (mfn.) small, minute, atomic; subtle; Abh 705; Vin I 5,10* (nipunam gambhiram duddasam -um rgaratt na dakkhanti); MI 129,27 (passatha... tarn vacanapatham -um v thlam v); Sn299 (disvna -uto -um); 802 (pakappit n'atthi - pi sanii); Ja III 12,8* (mahapphalam hoti -um pi tdisu; 12,17': -um pi ti appamattakam pi); IV 203,20* (ambaphalni... -ni thlni ca); Dhs 617 (rpam ... -um thlam); Mil270,26 (vtam dassehi... -um v thlam v); Patis-a 352,9 (sukhumnan ti-nam); Pafica-g41 (anun p i . . . micchjivena, Ee so); 2. (m.) a certain measure of length; a minute particle or atom; Abh 194 (chattimsa paramnnam eko


-u); Vibh-a 343,1 %foll. (chattimsa paramnavo ekassa -uno pamnam, chattimsa ~ ekya tajjriy pamnam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ami); Pp-a 172,9 (titthiynam pakatipurisdikassa pannpan); anu in Ce, Ee at Spkl 198,12 (satadh bhinnassa vlassa koti viya ~u) is perhaps wr; Be kotiy kotipatipdanam viya duranubodho, nanu ...; Se kotiy koti viya, nanu ...; -m-thla, mfn., fine and coarse; small and large; D I 223,8* (kattha digham ca rassam ca -am subhsubham) * Sn 633; Dhp265 (yo ca sameti ppni -ni sabbaso); Ja IV 192,6* (~ni); Sadd 630,9 (kvaci niggahitgamo ... ~ni sabbaso); -dhamma, m., a mean practice; Sn313 (eso ~o; Pj II 324,13foil.: lmakadhammo hinadhammo adhammo ... yasm v ettha dnadhammo pi appako atthi tasm tarn sandhy' ha); -matta, mfn., of small size, atomic; least; Mill 134,11 (~esu vajjesu bhayadassvi) = AII 22,33 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anu-); Sn431 (-ena pi punnena attho mayham na vijjati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -o pi); Dhp 284 (vanatho na chijjati ~o pi); Ja VI 477,10* (nbhijnmi dhirassa -am pi dukkatam); Vibh 247,26 (katame - vajj); Saddh 347 (anumatt, Ee so); -sahagata, mfn., having a very small part remaining; being very small; residual; SHI 130,30 (atha khv assa hoti yeva pancasu updnakkhandhesu ~o asmi ti mno ... asamhato, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se anu-); PatisI 73,io (angmimaggena -am kmargasamyojanam patighasamyojanam... attano cittassa upakkiles samm samucchinn honti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anu-); Kv81,i6 (~o kmargo pahino); Patis-a280,i5 (- ti anubht sukhumabht ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anu-). anuka, anuka, mfn. [anu + ka2; AMg anua], small; fine; Ap 532,14 (-am v mahantam v); Pj 1246,8 (~ti mamsacakkhussa agocar dibbacakkhuvisay); As 317,20 (thlam upanidhya tato khuddakataram anukam, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anum); -tara, mfn., smaller, finer; Pj I 47,25; -thula, mfn., fine and coarse; small and large; Sn 146 (ye keci pnabht' atthi... majjhim rassak ~). anthati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup anthate, Wg 8:8], goes; Sadd 355,17 (athi gatiyam: ... -ati). Vand, ? Dhtum 158 (anda andatthe dissate). an4a, n. (and m.) [ts], 1. an egg; Abh627 (-am); 1092 (kose khagdibije 'ndam); VinUI 3,31 (kukkutiy -ni); Ja III 269,9* (bhutv-am ca potam ca); Ap 61,21 (kiki va -am rakkheyya); Mil 49,2i (yam ca tattha kalalam yam ca -am); Ps II 259,4 (tattha nilamakkhik -ni thapenti); Pj II 317,9 (kiki sakunik ksapatanabhayena -assa upari uttnseti); Sadd 231,11 (~am); 871,26 (-0); 2. (n. and a testicle; the testicles; the scrotum; Abh273 (-am); 1092; Vin III 117,14 (bhikkhuno -am kanduvantassa); Sil 258,13 (~e khandhe ropetv gacchati... tesv eva -esu nisidati); Sp 510,7 (tassa... mahghatappamn - ahesum); ifc see kumbhanda; 3. a water-bag; ifc see camm'-; -kapila, n. an eggshell; Sp 140,4; -kosa, m. [anda + kosa1], an eggshell (or egg); Vin III 4,35 (patham abhinibbhid ahosi kukkutacchpakasseva -amh); AIV 126,3 (mukhatundakena v -am padletv); JaV 360, iv; Sv 688,32 (mtukucchito ca -ato ca ti dve vre jt ti dij);

-ccheda, -cchedaka, m., one who castrates, a gelder; JaIV 364,2* (gmesv eke purohit... -cched nilanchak; 366,22': balivadddiam -cchedak cy eva tisldi-ankakaranenalanchak ca); -ja, mfn. and m [anda + ja 2 ], 1. (mfn.) born from an egg; Abh 741 (- pakkhisappdi); MI 73,3 (catasso ... yoniyo ... - yoni jalbuj yoni...); SHI 240,is (- ng); 246,is (- supann); Ja II 53,15* (amittena -ena; 53,17': ~en ti andakose nibbattena ngena); VI 497,16* (-am ... moram dakkhisi); Pet220,n; Mil 267,16 (atthi loke satt - jalbuj ...); 2. (m.) a bird; a fish; Abh 624 (-0); 1079 (~o minapakkhisu); JaV 189,33* (pokkharanl sanchann-ehi; 190,16': sakunasanghehi okinn); 351,23* (pandito -0 iti); -bhri(n), m(fn)., carrying his testicles; Vin III 100,19* (-1 ah gmaktako) = SII 258,27*; -bhta, mfn., being an egg or in an egg; like an egg; Vin III 3,38 (avijjgatya pajya ~ya pariyonaddhya avijjandakosam padletv); SHI 1,20 (turo te... kyo ~o pariyonaddho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee addha-, prob, wr; Spk II 250,10: -0 ti andam viya bhto dubbalo); Jal 293,24* (- bhat bhariy); -sambhava, m(fn)., produced from an egg, a bird; Th 599 (apandaro ~o; Ih-a II 256,22: -o andajo kko); -hraka, m., one who takes or extirpates the testicles, a gelder; (or one who takes eggs 1); MI 383,25 (puriso -o gantv ubbhatehi andehi gaccheyya); see also apuccandat. andaka1, n. [anda + ka2], 1. an egg; Ja III 21,22* (kirn ~ ime; or kimandak? 21,25': kirn phalni nam' etni ti parimandalavasena pana - ti ha); 102,19 (ekasmim kkakulvake klakokil attano -am nikkhipitv); 267,24 (-ni c* eva chpake ca khditum); Dhp-a I 60,4 (dandakotiyam gahetv parivattetv upadhrento -ni disv); Pet 220,12; 2 . a growth on a tree; Ps II 331,9 (yath sadose rukkhe -ni utthahanti) = As 396, is. an4aka\ mfn. [?], harsh, rough; insolent; MI 286,36 (vc - kakkas; Ps II 331,9: ~ ti yath sadose rukkhe andakni utthahanti, evam sadosatya khumsanavambhandivacanehi ~ jt, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee andakajt); Dhs 1343 (y s vc - ast kakkas ... idam vuccati skhalyam); -vca, mfn., harsh in speech; Ja III 260,n* (-0 pharuso so, Ee so; Be kandaka-; Ce kantaka-; S'ekanthaka-; 260,19': -oti sadosavco). anduka, andka, anduva, n. [?], a roll (of cloth, etc); Ps II 158,29 (-am cumbatakam, Ce, Ee so; Be andupakam; Se andupakam); -vidhna, n., a way of dressing the hair (in a roll); Ud-a 171,4 (ullikhitan ti phanakdflii kesasanthpanam, -an ti pi vadanti, so read ? Ee andukvidhnanti; Be, Ce, Se addhakra-); ifc see jatanduva (^vjat), eel'-, vl'-. an4paka, n., a circular roll of cloth used as a stand for a vessel; Abh 458 (-am cumbatakam); ifc see tin'-, palT -. anna1, n. [S. arna], water; flood, stream; Abh 661 (dakam -o niram). anna2, n. [= anna qv; AMg id.], food; ifc see aparanna, pubbanna. annam in Ee at Sp 941,27 is wrfor annam (Be, Ce, Se so). annava, m.n. [S. arnava; cf also Ved. arnava, mfn.


"agitated, foaming"], the sea, the ocean; a stream; Abh 659 (-o sgaro); Vin 1230,23* (ye taranti -am saram; cfSp 1096,io: -an ti sabbantimena paricchedena yojanamattam gambhirassa ca puthulassa ca udakatthnass' etam adhivacanam, saran ti idha nadi adhippet); Sn 173 (ko 'dhatarati -am); Ja III 453,16* (eso hi atari -am; 453,20': ~an ti samsrasamuddam); 521,12* (abhitarp vicarma ~Q; 521,19': imasmim thne saro ~o ti vutto); V 401,5* (nvam samruyha parenti ~e); Ap 104,13 (mahsamuddo v' akkhobbho -ova duruttaro); Vism 597,3*; Ps II 109,3 (yam [udakam] pana gambhiram c' eva puthulam ca tarn -0 ti vuccati); ifc see knir'-; -kucchi, m.f, a cavity in the ocean; the ocean depths; Ja 1227,8' (t ... lohactiyo -iyam pavattant vicaranti); 501,31 (-im khobhetv blasuriyuggamanaklo viya); VI189,i6 (Bhridattanivesanam ~i viya ekasaddam ahosi); Sv 403,4 (bhagav -iyam suriyo viya jalamno). anha = aha(n) qv ifc; see also ajjanho. atakkaka, mfii. [a3 + takka2 + ka2], not mixed with buttermilk; Ja VI 21,i6 (alonake -e niddhpane udake sedetv, Ce, Ee so; Be atakke; Se alonakena atakkena ...). atakkajtika in Ee at Ud-a 52,27 is wr, prob, for acokkha- qv sv cokkha. atati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atati], goes constantly; Dhtum 177 (ata ... gamane); Sadd 360,12 (ata staccagamane ... -ati). atappa, n. (orm.) and - , [cfBHS atapa], 1. ( the name of one of the highest classes of devaj, the second class of suddhvsay qv; D II 52,17 (yena ~a dev ten' upasankamim); III 237,19 (panca suddhvs, avih ~ sudass sudassi akanitth); MI 289,22 (-nam devnam); Vibh425,i4 (-nam devnam sahavyatam uppajjanti; Vibh-a521,io; na kaiici sattarn tappanti ti-); Sv 740,5 (esa kira... -esu dve kappasahassni [vasissati]); 2. (n.) the world of the atappa devas; Pp 17,2i (avih cuto -am gacchati). atappaniya, mfn. [see tappati2, and cf S. tarpaniya], I. insatiable; Ja VI 209,14'; 2. not satiating; of which one cannot have enough; Sv 1060,6 ('-atthena panlto). atappaneyya, mfn. [= atappaniya], not satiating; of which one cannot have enough; Ap 548,io (s kanii ... -rpena hsabhvasamanvit). atalamphassa, mfn. [a3 + tala + phassa], bottomless; Abh 669 (agdham tv -am). atas!,/ [ts], common flax; Abh 452 (umm tu -I); Ps IV 77,12 (sace kjo hotukmo... anjanavanno v -pupphavanno v siyan tipattheti, Be, Se so; Ce anasi-; Ee apitapupphavanno). ati, ind. [ts], prefix to nouns, adjectives, adverbs; preverb to verbs; before vowels (except 1-) generally, but not always, taking the form ace-, sometimes with strengthening of following vowel; Abh 1138; 1182; Sadd 881,8*foil.; I. as prefix to nouns expresses: abundance, excess, superiority, transgression; the being beyond (the reach of); 2. as prefix to adjectives, adverbs expresses: very much, too much; 3. as preverb to verbs and their derivatives expresses: beyond, over; through; too much, very much, too far; 4. ati is sometimes inserted in

iterative cpds expressing: and, adding further, even more, etc; see cakkaticakka, mntimna; ati sometimes alternates with adhi or abhi qqv; ati + iva: (a) ativa [ts], I. very much, exceedingly; Abh 1138; Vv 84:17 (-a nijjhnakhamo); Th537 (-a phsu bhavati ekassa vasato vane); TM312 (-a paritappasi; Thi-a219,2i: - ti ativiya bhusam); Ja II 235,5* (-a hadayam nibbti); Ap 484,32 (sasanghe me katam karam -a vipulam tay); 542,14 (Gotamiparinibbnam atiV acchariyam ahu, Ce, Ee so; Be atev'; Se ati-acchariyam); Vism 481,28 (-a yatam samsradukkham); Pj II 183,25 (brhmano sakya ditthiy -a abhinivittho hoti); 2. much more than; Jail 413,26* (ativ* anne va pnino, Ee so, but prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se aticca); (b) ati-r-iva [BHS id.], excessively, exceedingly; D i l 264,17 (pabbato -a obhsajto hoti); Sn680 (kim devasangho -a kalyarpo); ativiya, excessively, very much, especially; much more than (instr./abl); D II 134,8 (-a tathgatassa parisuddho hoti chavivanno); Mill 176,11 (rj cakkavatti abhirpo hoti dassaniyo ... -a aniiehi manussehi); S IV 112,31 (-a mam tasmim samaye lobhadhamm parisahanti); Pv 20:10 (-a sobhamno); Ja 161,30 (-a pabbajjya cittamnami); 262,30 (ayam-a sro hutv katheti); 11241,23 (-a amhe bdhati ti); VI 549,25' (-a bhimsanako, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -); Kv 563,2 (buddhassa bhagavato uccrapassvo -a anne gandhajte adhiganhati ti); Mil 175,12 (-a annehi pindaptehi mahapphalatar); 420,1 (Milindo rj -a pamuditahadayo); Vism 39,15 (kim nu me ajja kammatthnam -a paksa" ti); Dhp-a II 71,n (ayam me -a upakrako ti); ateva [ati + eva2], very much; more than; JaV 63,n* (yathpi rammako mso gimhnam hoti brhmana atev' annehi msehi dumapupphehi sobhati; 64,2: ativiya annehi ekdasahi msehi); VI 529,30* (~a me acchariyam, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee wrath' eva; 531, r: -a me acchariyan ti ativiya me acchariyam). ati-afichitum, ind. [ati + inf. of anchati], to pull too much; to charge too much; Mp I 244,8 (~um na vattati, Be, Ce so; Ee ati-anjitum; Se ativancitum; Mp-t[5e]I 167,15*. -un ti ativiya kaddhitum) = Ap-a521,i9 {Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ati-ancitum; * Ih-a 1145,8: eds ativaddhitum). ati-aftjitum in Ee at Mp I 244,8 is prob, wr for ati-anchitum qv. ati-anusikkhissati in Ee at Ja II 99,io' is prob, wr; Be, Ce anusikkhissati; Se anusikkhati. ati-alliyitv, ind.. [ati + absol. of alliyati], leaning against too much or too closely; Sp 1283,25 (na there bhikkh anpakhajj ti there bhikkh ati-alliyitv na nisiditabbam). ati-dhya, ind. [absol. of *ati + dahati; cf S. aty Vdh], putting on top of; on top of; Spk I 79,23 (accdhy ti ati-dhya, isakam atikamma thapetv); Mp II 185,13 (pde pdam accdhy ti vmapdam dakkhinapde ati-dhya); see also accdhy, accdhyitv. ati-uddharati,/?r. 3 sg. [ati + uddharati], lifts too high; Ud-a 414,17* (nti-uddharati pdam, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ntidre uddharati; = Ps III 23,20*, Spk III 49,9*: eds ntidre uddharati).


*ati-upasankamati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + upasankamati], approaches too much or too closely; absol ati-upasankamitv, Mp II 198,17 (yo hi pallaggim -itv tappati tassa sariram jhyati); pass, ati-upasankamiyamna, mfn., Mp II 198,14 (kodhano atiseviyamno -iyamno pi kujjhati). ati-ummilaya(t), mfn. {caus. o/*ati + ummilati], opening the eyes too wide; Vism 125,2 (~ayato hi cakkhu kilamati). atikaddhati, pr. 3 sg. [c/Satikarsati], pulls or presses too much or very much; harasses;! Vin III 17,9 (vadeyyma kho tarn gahapati sace tvam ntikaddheyysi ti; Sp 21 1,H: yam te mayi pemam patitthitam tarn kodhavasena na -eyysi, sace na kujjheyysi ti vuttam hoti); pass, atikaddhiyamna, mfn., Sp 752,26 (parinibbnakle antar v -iyamnena upasampannassa bhtam rocetum vattati; Sp-t[ite] III 12,n: -iyamnena ti vadatha bhante kirn tumhehi adhigatan ti evam nippiliy amnena). atikassa, ind. [absol. of *ati + kasati3; cf S. atWkrs], drawing through, pulling through; JaV 173,1* (bhetvna nsam atikassa rajjurn) quoted Vism 304,29*. atikicca, n., see sv karoti. atikilamati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + kilamati], is very exhausted; is in extreme distress; Ja IV 284,19'(nitammmi ti ~mi); atikilamanta, mfn., Vibh-a259,30 (~anto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atikilanto); caus. pr. 3 sg. atikilameti, causes great distress to; Ja IV 13,5' (bhusam upatpenti -enti). atikisa in Ee, Se at Sp 1028,3 is wrfor atikisa qv sv kisa. atikosumbham, ind. [ati + kosumbha2 ?], ? Sadd 777,9 (sampati kosumbham acchdanam n' atthi -am ice di). atikkanta, mfn., pp o/atikkamati qv. atikkantik, / [atikkanta + ik], (a woman) transgressing, overstepping the bounds (of good behaviour); Mil 122,20 (coriy ... ppiy bhinnasimya -ya). atikkama, m. [S. atikrama], l. going over or further; passing, passing beyond; overcoming; SI 193,21* (pajjotakaro ... sabbatthitinam -am addasa) = Th 1244; Dhp 191 ([passati] dukkham dukkhasamuppdam dukkhassa ca -am); It 61,10* (kmanissaranam fiatv rpnam ca -am; It-all 41,29: atikkamanti eten ti -o atikkamanpyo); Ja IV 438,25' (himaccaye ti catunnam hemantamsnam -e); VI 60,4* (samanam hu vattantam yath dukkhass' ~o); Sp 335,23 (patitthitatthnassa -ena prjikam); ifc see kl- (svkala1); 2. overstepping; transgression; Abh 776; 1182; Sp 1012,33 (dasasu sikkhpadesu purimnam pancannam -o nsanvatthu); Spk I 66,16 (kassa -o n' atthi kassa apardho n' atthi); Saddh 64 (evam parassa dresu caturango -o); atikkama in Ee at Vism 621,25 is wr for abhikkama qv; anatikkama, m., not transgressing; Dhs299; Vism 7,30 (samdinnasilassa kyikavcasiko -o); duratikkama, mfn., hard to pass, to go beyond; hard to escape from; Udl8,i8* (yoga hi ~a); Ja VI 100,3* (nadi... gambhir ~); Bv 8:1. atikkamaka, mfn. [atikkama + ka2], going over; ifc see mtik-.

atikkamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atWkram], \.passes, passes through, passes by; elapses, passes (of time); steps over; goes beyond; surpasses; overcomes; Vin II 161,28 (imam nigrodham antar satthinam karitv -ami); IV 98,12 (deth* vuso bhattam pure klo -afi ti); Ja II 58,14' (mam samanadhammassa karanaklo m -atu); 297,6 (tathagato... sadevakam lokam pannaya -ati); Ap 27,28 (ntikkamanti tarn msam); Vism 86,14 (pathamajhnam -ati); Sp637,2o (asukam nma divasam ntikkamissati); Spk I 117,6 (ekam cakkavlam -ami ti); Vv-a 205, is (gmassa majjhena -anti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr majjhe na); Pv-a67,i9 (tassa gmassa dvrasamipena maggena -ati); (a)atikkama(t), mfn., Sp 352,24 (vihrasimam -ato pi); (b) atikkamanta, mfn., Ud61,7 (addas kho bhagav... mnavake avidire... -ante); Ud-a 111,23 (manussabhto manussasukham devabhto dibbasukham ubhayam -anto nibbnasukham labhati); neg. anatikkamanta, mfn., Ja III 188,23 (tantissarena gitassaram anatikkamanto); anatikkamante in EeatJa. VI 221,21' is wrfor anatikkante (Be, Ce, Se so); (c) atikkamamna, mfn., Vism 672,26 (puthujjanagottam ... -amnam ariyagottam); Spk I 23,24 (rattiyo -amn); 2. goes beyond, crosses; escapes from; Dhp 221 (samyojanam sabbam -eyya); Ja 1280,13' (attano pacemittam -ati abhibhavati); Pj II 387,4 (atha Mro ... atighoram tapam karoti kadci mama visayam -eyy ti bhito); atikkamanta, mfn., Nidd-a I 54,4 (samsram -anto); 3. oversteps; transgresses (against), passes by, neglects; commits adultery (with); Vin I 347,9 (na kho me patirupam yo 'ham pituvacanam -eyyan ti); AIV 201,12 (yam may svaknam sikkhpadam pannattam tarn mama svak jivitahetu pi ntikkamanti); Sn 396 (parassa dram ntikkameyya); Ja IV 53,20* foil, (mayam ca bhariyam ntikkamma amhe ca bhariy ntikkamanti; 54,2r: attano bhariyam-itv bahi afinam miccheram na karoma); V 2,5 (uposathakammam ntikkamissmi ti); atikkamanta, mfn., Pj II 297,14 (hirim -antam); neg. anatikkamanta, mfn., It-a I 142,32; aor. 3 sg. atikkami, S I 226,19; Ja IV 97,5 (rj anoloketv va ~i); Th-a III 104,8 (ayam navamo khano m tumhe -i ti); 3pi. (a)atikkamimsu, D i l 130,15 (pancamattni sakatasatni laram Klmam nissya nissya -imsu); Ja III 361,25' (arog kantram -imsu); (b) atikkamum, Ap 68,18 (timsavassasahassni... -um); Mhv4:3; part.perfact. atikkamitava(t), mfn., who has gone beyond; Nidd-a I 245,6 (tinnvi ti samsram -);absol., passing; passing through; surpassing; having gone beyond, beyond; beyond the norm; passing by, neglecting; transgressing; passing beyond, escaping, overcoming; (with expressions of time) after (cf atikkameti below); (a) atikkamma, atikamma, Vin I 12,15 (obhso loke pturahosi atikamma devnam devnubhvam); MI 192,17 (atikamm' eva sram); It 51,11* (atikkamma mradheyyam); Ap 550,14 (caturoghe atikkamma arahattam appunim); Ja I 262,19 (Ksirattham atikkamma); II 285,4' (atikkamma ycako si); V 42,22* (atikamma so satta giri brahante, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se atikkamma); Mil 118,23 (ete sabbe [manayo] atikkamma cakkavattimani); Sp 703,25 (tarn rjim


atikkamma); (b) atikkamitv, Vin III 62,13 (sunkatthnam -itv); Ja I 225,20 (dve tayo divase ~itv agamsi); II52, r (gijjho nma yojanasatam ~itv thitni kunapni avekkhati); 152,7' (aham eva sabbe tumhe ~itv sobhmi); 417,28 (tisso pabbatarjiyo ~itv... pannaslyam vasi); III255,i2(aMesamgijjhnam simam ~itv uccam uppati); V 225,14' (dhammam ~itv); Patis II 195,12 (neyyam ~itv nanam na ppavattati); Mil 336,27 (sabbaratanni -itv); Vism710,io (yuvemajjham ~itv); Dhp-al 96,7 (Sriputtathero pi pabbajitadivasato addhamsam ~itv); neg. anatikkamitv, not going beyond; not passing; not neglecting; Vin IV 95,24; Dhp-aI65,5 (tesam ovdam anatikkamitv); (with expressions of time) before; within; Ja I 162,29 (mtulena vuttavelam anatikkamitv, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee anatikkametv); II 135,23 (addhamsam pi anatikkamitv); Ap-a289,34 (sattadivasato orabhge sattadivase anatikkamitv); pass, pr. 3 sg. atikkamiyyati, is gone beyond, is escaped from; ? Nidd I 279,2 (rpam vibhoti vibhviyyati -iyyati); pp (a) atikkanta, mfn. [S. atikrnta], 1. (act.) (i) having passed through or by; having gone beyond, overcome, surpassed; having elapsed; Vin IV 190,11; D i l 128,26 (pancamattni sakatasatni ~ni); Sn 160 (kacci moham ~o); Th707 (~ bhay sabbe; Th-a III 14,29: sabbe pi bhay ekamsena ~ atit apagat ti attho); Ja II 128,10 (tini samvaccharni ~ni); V 260,12* (pankam rj ~o); Ap 544,5 (~e ca satthe); Mil 145,27 (arah sabbabhayam ~o ti); Vism424,3 (mamsacakkhum ~-tt); atikkantam, adv., excessively; very much; Nidd-all 101,33 (~am lonam atilonam); (ii) who has approached; Th 1037 (dassanya ~e...bah n vrayittha, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce abhikkante); 2. (pass.) transgressed; neglected; ? Ja V 265,22' (may sucaritadhammo ~o pitughtakammam katam); atikkanta in Ee at Ja III 340,17', Ps I 130,1 and Ud-a286,n is wr for atikanta^v svkanta; atikkanta-mnusaka, mf(-ti.)n., superhuman; Vin II 299,22 (dibbya sotadhtuy visuddhya ~-mnusikya) * Mil 19,6; DU 87,12 (dibbena cakkhun visuddhena ~-mnusakena) * Vibh 344,3; atikkanta -vara, mfn., beyond or above granting boons; Vin I 82,35 (vara kho ... tathagata ti); JalV 315,n; neg. anatikkanta, mfn., 1. not having passed or gone beyond; not having elapsed; not having transgressed; Nidd I 103,26; Ja IV 214,12; Vism 315,18 (anatikkantatt); Cp-al90,3o; 2. unsurpassed; Ap 427,4 (anatikkant appameyy tathagata); PP (b) atikkamita, (mf)n., transgressing; Nidd-a I 217,27 (avitikkamamatten ti na ~-mattena); fpp (a) atikkamaniya, atikkamaniya, mfn., to be passed, to be overcome; As 49,12 (rammanam katv atikkamaniyato oghehi atikkamitabb ti oghaniy); neg. anatikkamaniya, mfn., not to be passed; not to be transgressed (against); Vin II 256,32 (bhikkhuninam attha garudhamm paniiatt yvajivam anatikkamaniya); M III 121,4 (anatikkamaniya ca bodhisattamt hoti kenaci purisena rattacittena); Mil 74,30 (sikkhpadam ... anatikkamaniyan ti); duratikkamaniya, mfn., hard to pass, hard to get beyond; Pj II 568,2; (b) atikkamitabb, mfh., to be passed by; to be gone

beyond; to be transgressed against; Vin I 138,30 (na... vso -itabbo); SI 29,2; Sp 184,5; Ps IV 31,M (upekkh na -, kattabb janetabb ti attho); Pj II 97,7 (ayam lekh ntikkamitabb ti); caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) atikkmeti, -ayati, atikkameti [S. atikramayati], lets pass, makes pass over, takes over; lets elapse; Vin III 52,io (pdam sunkaghtam ~eti); 151,32 (pamnam v ~eyya); IV 281,31 (pancamam divasam ~eti); Ja I 151,5 (mayham vram -ehi ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atikkamehi ti); II 335,16 (manusse atavim ~eti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atikkameti); Mil 265,4 (so arah sayarn v pabbajeyya divasam v atikkameyya); Sp 1308,6 (civaraklasamayam -eyya, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se atikkameyya); Dhp-alH 150,16 (~essmi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atikkamessmi); (a) atikkmenta, atikkamenta, m/(~entl>2., Vin IV 272,27 (upacram ^entiy, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atikkamantiy); Th-aII 260,23; Ap-a446,27 (trayantam atikkamentam); neg. anatikkmenta, mfn., Sp 337,5 (anatikkmento, Be, Ce, Seso; Eeanatikkamanto); (b) atikkmaya(t), mfn., Vin III 196,io (~ayato); (c) atikkmayamna, mfh., Sp 1322,16; aor. 3 sg. atikkmesi, Vin III 62,28 (so bhikkhu tarn manim sunkatthnam ~esi); Dhp-al 240,15; absol. atikkmetv, atikkametv, Vin III 151,34; Ps III 286,23 (ekamsam atikkametv, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atikkamitv); atikkametv in Ce, Ee at Ps III 147,3 is prob, wr for atikkamitv (Be, Se so); absol. neg. anatikkametv, Ja I 162,29 (mtulena vuttavelam anatikkametv, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anatikkamitv); pp atikkamita, mfn., let pass, taken beyond; Vin III 234,18 (elakalomni tiyojanam ~ni nissaggiyni); fpp atikkametabba, mfn. and n., Sp722,n; 1250,2o; caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) atikkampeti, causes to let pass; makes (someone) go beyond; Ap-a293,9 (~eti); aor. 3sg. atikkampesi, Pj II 97,10 (mahjano ... kumram lekham ~esi); absol. atikkampetv, Ja VI 5,3 (pakativelam ~etv, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atikkamitv); Vv-a 314,8 (~etva). atikkamana, n. [S. atikramana], passing; going beyond; surpassing; transgressing; Sp 364,8 (tato ~e prjikam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atikkmeti); Spkl 24,5 (klnam ~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr atikkamnam); Th-a II 269,3 (pancannam sarignam ~ena); Sadd881,io (atisaddo ... ~e atirocati amhehi); anatikkamana, ., not passing, not going beyond; not transgressing; Vin II 256,30 (udakassa ~ya); Mil 356,12 (n ~ya); Patis-a 587,27 (annamannam -'-atthena); duratikkamana, mfh., hard to pass or get beyond; Nidd-a I 162,20 (ditthi yeva ~'-atthena gahanam); Thi-a 227,7 (-' -atthena). atikkamanaka, mfn. [atikkamana + ka2], passing; transgressing, overstepping; Ja I 153,9 (pannasannam -migo nma n'atthi); atikkamanaka in Ee at As 269,10 (atikkamanaka-rammannam) is prob, wr for atikkamana- (Be, Ce, Se so). atikkamnam in Ee at Spk I 24,5 is wr for atikkamanam (Be, Ce.Seso). atikkamita(r), m. [from atikkamati], a transgressor (against); Mp III 96,3 ([nbhijnmi ... gahapatnim ...] aticaritti~).


atikhana, n. [ati+ khana2], too much, too deep, digging; Ja II 296,20' (~ena tarn ca dhanam jivitam ca nsitan ti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se atikhananena). atikhanati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + khanati2], digs too much, too deep; Ja II295,20 (ettakena santutth hotha, m ~ath ti); 296,15* (tasm khane ntikhane); pp atikhta, (mf)n., too much, too deep, digging; Ja II 296,16* (khtena ca dhanam laddham ~ena nsitam). atikhta, (mf)n., pp o/atikhanati qv. atikhina, mfn. [prob. < *atiskirna (= *atistirna, c/Vskambh and Vstambh; see K.R. Norman, 1979, p. 325); cf also S. apa-sWkf, ava-s-Vkr, and W.. Whitney, 1879, 1087d], scattered; Dhp 156 (senti cptikhin va; Dhp-a III 132,24: cpto ~ cp vinimuttti attho; c/Udna-v 17:4 cptikirna; PDhp 230: cpdhikinno); Sadd 495, ufoll. (khi gatiyam: khinti ~o saro ... khinti ti gacchati ~o ti atigato). atiga, mfn. [ts], going beyond; escaping from; transgressing; ifc see asit- (.svasita3), ogh-, yoga-, sang-, sim-. atigacchati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atiVgam], goes past or over; overcomes; surpasses; Sadd 462,22 (~ati ti atikkamitv gacchati); aor. 3 sg. accagam, Vin IV 18,33 (accayo mam bhante ~ ... y 'ham evam aksim; Sp 750,16: mam atikamma abhibhavitv pavatto); D I 85,15 (accayo mam bhante ~a); AI 54,23 (iti mam eva tattha accayo -a; Mp II 102,12: apardho atikkamitv madditv gato, aham ev' ettha apardhiko); Sn 8 (sabbam ~ imam papancam; Pj II 21,27: ~ atikkanto samatikkanto ti attho); absol atigantv, Ja IV 250, \r (accupati ti atigantv uppati); pp atigata, mfn., having gone beyond; having gone too far; Ja III 484,29* (nsakkhtigato poso puna-r-eva nivattitum; 485,25': nsakkhi ~o); Vism234,n* (te pi ntigat maccum); Dhp-a IV 159,15 (rgdinam tt, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atitatt) see also atWg. atiganha(t), mfn. \ of *ati + ganhti], very much holding; completely encompassing; Pet 29,2 (imni solasa suttni sabbassanam ~anto titthanti, eds so). atWg, [S. atWg], goes beyond; overcomes; dies; aor. 3 sg. (a) accag, Dhp 414 (yo ... samsram moham accag); Sn 1040 (ko idha sibbanim accag); (b)atig, Mhv41:3 (navame hyane 'tig); (c)ati-ag, Nidd-all 10,20 (sibbanim accag ti tanham ati-ag atikkamitv thito); 3 pi. (a)accagum, It 93,14* (dukkham accagum, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ajjhagum); (b) accag, Th 663 (ye ca dukkhe sukhasmim ca majjhe sibbanim accag, Be, Ce, Se, Th-a II 278,26 so; Ee ajjhag); see also atigacchati. atiglayati, pr. 3 sg. [caus. of *ati + galati], makes vanish, makes waste away; Ja VI 211,28* (vedehi vittam -anti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atiglhayanti; 215,15': tassa santakam dhanam ~anti vinsenti viddhamsenti). atiglhita, mfn. [perhaps pp of denom. from atiglha qv sv ghati], hard-pressed, much oppressed; ? Ja V 401,14* (te bhattur atth ~ puna; 401,3r: paccatthikehi atipilit viluttaspateyy). atighamsitv, ind. [absol. o/*ati + ghamsati], crushing; rubbing out; Patis II 196,8 (buddhannam devamanussnam pannam pharitv ~itv titthati; = Niddl 180,2: eds abhibhavitv).

aticarana, n. [from aticarati; cf S. aticarana], (sexual) transgression; adultery; Jail 169,1; Ps IV 13,11; Pv-a 159,8. aticarati, pr. 3 sg. [S. aticarati], goes beyond the bounds; transgresses sexually (against), is unfaithful (to); commits adultery; Vin IV 225,26 (mayham pajpa" ~ati tarn ghtessmi ti); Pv 24:14 (n* etam channam na ppatirpam yam tvam -si mam); Ja III 303,17 (eko vijjdharo ... mahesiy saddhim ati); V444,6* (kam v itthi nticare tadannam; 444,IT: kataram annam purisam nticareyy ti); 449,16' (ayam mahallik idni mam na -issati); 453,1* (nriyo rakkhit ~anti smikam); aticarati in Ee at Pv-a 57,24 is wr; read kunjesu v ramati carati ti kunjaro with Be, Ce, Se); (a)aticaranta, m/(~anti)., Ja IV 300,17 (ayam pana brhmano -antam gonam tunde paharati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se carantam gonam dandena); V 4 44,19 (assabandhena saddhim -antim disv); Sv 996,6 (tarn ~anto mtugmo); neg. anaticaranta, mfn., JaV 124,3' (bhariyam samnento anaticaranto); (b) aticaramna, mfn., Pv24:14 (evam ~amnya smiko etad abravi); aor. 3sg. (a)aticri, DU 176,3 (itthiratanam rjnam Mahsudassanam manas pi no aticri kuto pana kyena, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ~i); (b) aticri, Ja IV 245, is; absol. (a) aticaritv, Ja III 502, is; Ps IV 12,2o; (b) aticaritt (following abhijnti qv), AIV 66,11 (nbhijnmi smikam manas pi ~itt, Ee so; Be, Ce aticarit; Se aticaritum); pp aticinna, mfn., transgressed, offended against; JaV 265,2* (~o may dhammo). aticarita(r), m.f [from aticarati], one who transgresses, commits adultery; AII 61,26 (nbhijnmi Nakulamtaram gahapatnim manas pi ~ kuto pana kyena; perhaps better absol.; Mp III 96,3: ~ ti atikkamit) * IV 66,11 (Be, Ceso; Ee aticaritt, Se aticaritum). aticariy, / [cf aticarati], (sexual) transgression; unfaithfulness; ifc see anaticariy; see also aticra. aticra, m. [ts], (sexual) transgression; unfaithfulness; adultery; Vv 15:8 (theyy ca ~ ca majjapn ca rak) ^ Ap260,i 1; Jail 167,25 (brhmanl dussil ppadhamm ~am carati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr atitacaram); 374,15 (~o nma ayye cittuppdamattena na hoti); VI311,13' (~assa oksam labhitv); Dhp-a III 348,16 (kulaputto tass ~ena lajjito). aticri(n), mfn. and ~ini, / [S. aticrin], transgressing, sinning; unfaithful; an unfaithful wife; Abh238 (~im); Vin III 107,10 (es... itthi... ~ini ahosi); S IV 242,6 (anotappi ca hoti ~i ca hoti); A III 261,9 (yebhuyyena bhikkhave mtugmo -1); Pv24:13 (tassham bhariy sim dussil ~ini); Ja V 269,18* (nriyo ca ~iyo nar ca paradrag); 447,13' (aticritya); Dhp-a III350,1 (~inim hi itthim smiko pi geh nfliarati); Sv 996,io (upsakassa bhariy ~inl ahosi); Pv-a 152,5 (s ~ini itthi);anaticri(n), mfn., faithful; Dili 190,10; S IV 244,21. aticinna, mfn., pp o/aticarati qv. aticiryati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + ciryati, or denom. from aticiramgrv; cfBHS aticiryati], delays too long; is late; Ja IV 459,1 (~ati me piyasmiko); Sp 47,4 (te -anti ti);

62 aticiryanta, m/f~anti)., Dhp-al 359,21 (tasmim ~ante); absol aticiryitv, JaV 438,27 (pithasappi deviy kujjhitv tvam -itv gatti, Be, Ce, Eeso; Se tvam kasm ajja ~anti gat si ti). aticca, absol. o/acceti 2 qv. *aticchati, pr. 3 sg. [AMg aicchai; cfS. rcchati, "goes"], imperat. 2 pi. aticchatha, (asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing in a civil way to give alms; opp. titthatha,) please go on; Ja VI 70,26 (bhante tumhakam dtabbayuttakam n' atthi ~ath ti); Mil 8,29 (~atha bhante ti vacanamattam pi vatt nma nhosi); Vism 343,27 (adadamn kecid eva ~atha bhante ti vadanti keci pana apassamn viya tunhi honti); Vv-a 101,1; 2sg. aticcha, Dhp-a IV 98,25 (~ tina vadeti, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se ~ath ti); caus. imperat. 2 sg. aticchpehi, make (him) go on; ask (him) to go further, Ja III 462,11 (ayye eko thero dvre thito ti vanditv ~pehi ti ~atha bhante ti). atijaccat,/, abstr. [from ati + jti1], the being of very powerful nature, 1 Mil 278,6 (agado ~ya pilya samugghtako rognam antakaro); see also atijtit jvjti1. atijalate in Ee at Ap 179,16 (dhpo 'tijalate) is wr; Be dhpyati jalate; Ce dhpeti; Se dipo ppajjalite. atitarati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atiVtf], passes over, crosses; goes beyond, surpasses; Sn381 (pannya tarn ntitaranti sabbe thito vajantam viya sighagmim; Pj II 372,19: yath koci thito gativikalo sighagminam purisam gacchantam ntitareyya); aor. 3 sg. (a) accatari, Sn 948 (yo 'dha kme accatari); (b) accatari, It 57,21* (so 'mam samuddam sagaham sarakkhasam sa-mibhayam duttaram accatari, Be, Se so; Ce accatari; Ee mibhayam) quoted Nett 155,15* = S IV 157,23* (eds accatari) = 158,21* (eds accatari); absol. (a) atitariya (and atitiriya ?), Sn 219 (ogham samuddam atitariya tdim; Pj II 275,10: atitariya ~itv atikkamitv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atitiriya, perhaps wr); (b) atitaritv, Pj II 275,10; pp atitinna, mfn., crossed; gone beyond; Pj II275,14 (~' -oghatt). atithi, atithi, m. [ts], a guest; a stranger, a newcomer; Abh424; D I 111,2foil, (ye kho pana keci... amhkam gmakkhettam gacchanti ~I no te honti, ~i pi kho pan' amhehi sakktabbgaruktabb ...); SI 162,5(api nukho te gacchanti mittmacc ntislohit ~iyo ti); Khp 8:7 (nidhi sunihito hoti... puggale ~isu v; Pj 1222,6: n' atthi assa thiti yamhi v tamhi v divase gacchati ti ~i, tamkhane gataphunakass' etam adhivacanam); Ja III 307,6' (sabbesam ~Inam gatgatnam gantuknam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~inam); IV 396,9' (~ino dtabbayuttakasmim agghe); V 388,7* (mogham c' assa hutam hoti... ~ismim yo nisinnasmim eko bhunjati bhojanam); VI 542,2* (atthiko viya yti -i no bhavissati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se ~i); Ap375,n (~im me gahetvna gacchim gmakam tad); Vv-a 24,7 foil, (duvidh hi gantuk -i abbhgato ti tesu kataparicayo gantuko ~i akataparacayo abbhgato... nimantito v bhattena ~i animantito abbhgato); -abhigamana, n., the approach, visit, of a guest; Q)-a 246,3; -karaniya, n., hospitality; Mil 186,25 (atithinam ~am katabbam); -bali, m., offering to a guest; AII 68,9; see also titheyya.

atidya, m., or atidyi(n), mfn. [from *ati + dayati1], flying; see kktidyi(n) .yv kka. atiditthiy, ind. [ati (= adhi ?) + loc. of ditthi], as regards belief, view; Vin I 63,34 (adhisile silavipanno hoti ajjhcre cravipanno hoti ~iy ditthivipanno hoti; Sp 989,23*. sammditthim pahya antagghikya ditthiy samanngato ~iy ditthivipanno nma) ^ \\ 4^5; see also ajjhcre, adhisile. atidisati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + disati], explains further; points out further; Mil 304,6 (akle maranam atthi ti yam vadesi ingha me tvam tattha kranam ~ ti). atidesa, m. [iS*. atideSa], (gr.t.t.) extended application (of a rule); extension; Sadd 920,15 (pakatassa atikkantena sdhanam ~o); antidesa (with rhythmical lengthening ?), m., absence of extension; ? Sadd 775,16 (~e ikrkr rassam, atidesarahite visaye kapaccaye pare ikra-kr rassam papponti). atidhamati,/?r. 3 sg. [ati + dhamati], blows (a conch) too much; beats (a drum) too much; Ja I 283,27* (dhame dhame ntidhame) ^ 282,22*; pp atidhanta, (mj)n., too much drumming; too much (conch-)blowing; Ja I 283,27* foil. (~am hi ppakam dhantena sat am laddham ~ena nsitam) ^ 284,22* foil. atidhvati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + dhvati; cf S. atiVdhv], runs past, outstrips; goes too far; goes against, transgresses; Mill 230,21 (janapadaniruttim nbhiniveseyya samannam ntidhveyy ti); S IV 230,24 (yam ca smam ntam tarn ca ~anti); It 43,13/0//. (dvflii... ditthigatehi pariyutthit devamanuss oliyanti eke '-anti eke...); Mil 13 6,1 (bl sabbam kammavipkajam yev ti -anti); Vism 594,16 (ucchijjati ti ganhanto ~ati nma); Ps IV 143,15 (samappavattesu assesu sarathino ayam oliyari ti tudanam v ayam ~ati ti kaddhanam v n' atthi); Ud-a352,23/o//.; atidhvanta, mfn., Sp 26,6 (dhammacintam ~anto acinteyyni pi cinteti); neg. anatidhvanta, mfn., Ud-a 151,2 (vohramattam anatidhvanten' eva); aor. 3 sg. atidhvi, Pj II 21,14 (yo nccasri ti yo ntidhvi); 1 sg. atidhvissam, Ap 176,10 (apardham aks' aham vanantam ~issam bhayabheravasamappito); absol. atidhvitv, Ps I 291,31 (cittuppdamatten' eva kusalam hoti ti ~itv dndini akaronto niraye uppajjati); JPP atidhvitabba, mfn., Mill 19,17 (satthu ssanam ~itabbam manneyya). atidhvana, n. [from atidhvati], the going beyond, going too far; transgression; PatisI 157,21 (oliyanbhiniveso bhavaditthi abhiniveso vibhavaditthi; Patis-a457,2: ucchedasannya nirodhagminipatipadatikkamanbhiniveso ti attho); Ps V 32,6 (atisro ti -am); anatidhvana, n., not going beyond, not transgressing; Vism 522,15 (janapadaniruttiy anabhiniveso samannya ~am); see also atidhonacri(n). atidhonacri(n), mfn. [ati+ dhona + cri(n); or perhaps atidhona = atidhvana qv], (according to ct) immoderate in the use of the requisites of a bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use of the requisites; Dhp240 (evam ~inam sakakammni nayanti duggatim; Dhp-a III 344,5: dhon vuccati cattro paccaye idamattham ete ti paccavekkhitv paribhunjanapann tarn


atikkamitv caranto -1 nma) quoted Pet 8,20* and Nett 129,28*; see also dhona, dhon. atinmeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS atinmayati, atinmeti], 1. spends (time), lets (time)'elapse; lets the time pass; Mil 139,14 (bhuttvi muhuttam tunhi nisidati na ca anumodanassa klam -eti); A I 206,3 (so tena lobhena abhijjhsahagatena cetas divasam -eti); IV 227,20* (ye khanam ndhigacchanti -enti te khanam); Mil 345,5 (nisajjatthnacankamehi rattindivam -enti); 2. makes pass; makes pass into, leads (someone) into; MII 138,22 (na ca vyanjanena lopam -eti); aor. 3 sg. atinmayi, Th 366 (bahu-d-eva rattim bhagav abbhokse 'tinmayi); 1 sg. (a) atinmesim, Ap 251,5 (rmam -esim lokajettham narsabham); (b) atinmayim, Ap 96,n (sambuddham... -ayim sagharam, Ee so; Se ~ayi; Ce sakam gharam; Be abhinmayim samgharam); absol. atinmetv, Ap254,i2 (sambuddham ... assamam -etv); Vibh-a462,24 (yathparicchedena avutthahitv klam -etv); pp atinmita, mfn., allowed to pass, let elapse; Mp III 331,2 (yuttapayuttaklassa tta); see also *atineti. atinigganhanto in Ee at Ja VI 417,7 is prob, wr for atinigganhanato (Ce so; Be, Se ativiya niggahito va). atinijjhyitatta, n., abstr. [from ati + pp of nijjhyati], excessive gazing upon; Mill 160,23 (-am kho me rpnam udapdi); 162,9 (-am rpnam cittassa upakkileso ti iti viditv) quoted Sp 163,25. atinipta, m., self-abasement; A III 430,5 (adhimnam thambham -am; Mp III 412,6: ~an ti hinassa hino 'ham asm! ti mnam). atinippiliyamna, mfn. [pass, of *ati + nippijeti], being very much pressed; Pj II 68,15 (kumro tehi ~o). atinicaka, mfn. [ati + nica + ka2], too low; Dhp-al 310,19 (cakkavlam atisambdham brahmaloko ~o). *atineti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. atinayati], brings up to; leads into, brings in; aor. 1 sg. atinesim, Ap 160,11 (nimantetv mahmunim ... -esim sakam gharam, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce abhinesim) ^ 249,9 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se abhinesim); absol. (a) atinetv, Vin II 180,25 (udakam ~etv udakam ninnetabbam); Ja IV 219,20 (gharam -etv, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se netv); Pj II 80,20 (kumro tarn tarn -etv imam khda imam bhunj ti vuccamno); Vibh-a440,24 (tarn disv rj antepuram -etv vallabhatthne thapesi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce abhinetv); (b) atinetvna, Ap249,io (-etvna, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se abhinetvna); fpp atinetabba, mfn., Vin II 180,25 (pathamam khettam kaspetabbam kaspetv vappetabbam vappetv udakam -etabbam; Sp 1274,16: ~etabban ti udakam pavesetabbam). atindriya, mfn., seesv indriya. atipatikkamitv, ind. (absol. of *ati + patikkamati), going too far back or away; Mp II 198,18 (yo hi pallaggim ... ~itv tappati tassa sitam na vpasammati). atipatati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atipatati], flies past; Ja IV 111,22* (~ati vayo khano tath' eva, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se adhipatati; 112,9'; ativiya patati sigham atikkamati); Th-al 245,6 (nipatati ti ati... na titthati); atipatanta, mfn., Th-al 245,9 (yobbannam ... ~antam, Ee so; Be, Se

abhipatantam; Ce adhipatantam); caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) atipteti, -ayati, 1. makes fly through or past; shoots; MI 82,36 (dhanuggaho ... lahukena asanena appakasiren' eva tiriyam tlacchyam -eyya); S V 453,15 (asanam -essanti) quoted Sv516,i4 (-ayissanti); Jail 91,20' (pacchbhgena kandam pavesetv purebhgena -eti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee abhipteti); 2. lays low; injures, kills; (and causes [someone] to kill; ?) D III 48,20 foil, (tapassi na pnam ~eti na pnam -ayati na pnam -ayato samanunno hoti, Be, Se so; Ce -eti... atiptpayati; Ee atippeti... -ayati; Sv 840,5: pnam na hanati); A III 205,27* (yo pnam -eti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr atimteti) * Dhp246 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se atimpeti); Pet 58,16* (yo pnam -eti); (a)atiptaya(t), mfn., DIU 48,2i (pnam -ayato); MI 404,24 (pnam -ayato, Be, Ce so; Ee atimpayato; Se atiptpayato) * SIV 349,9 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se atimpayato); (b) atiptayanta, mfn., Bv-a211,28* (pnam -ayanto); (c) atiptenta, mfn., SV 453,11 (addas kho yasm nando sambahule Licchavikumrake ... asanam -ente); Sp439,13 (jivitindriyam hi -ento pnam -eti ti vuccati); caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) atiptpeti, -ayati, causes to injure or kill; D III 48,21 (tapassi na pnam atipteti na pnam -ayati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se atiptayati); atiptpaya(t), mfn., D I 52,24 (pnam -ayato, Be, Ceso; Ee atimpayato; Se atippayato) = M I 404,24 (Se so; Ee atimpayato; Be, Ce atiptayato); see also atimpeti, adhipatati. atipatana, n. [ts], passing by; missing; Sadd 59,13 (klassa -am); ifc see kiriy-. atipatti, / [ts], (gr.t.t.) passing by; ifc see kl(sv klax); see also kltipattik sv kla'. atipatthenta, mfn. [ o/*ati + pattheti], desiring very much; Bv-a 269,23 (nibbnam ~ passantu me alankaran ti pi ptho, so read for Ee -0; Be, Ce, Se abhipatthent). atipanna, (mf)n. [pp o/*ati + pajjati; ts], unaccomplishment; failing; ifc see kiriy-. atipannaka, m/(-ik). [atipanna + ka2], failing; unaccomplished; Sadd 50,29* (na hi kriy nipphajjati nittham na gat ntipannik). atipassitv, ind. [absol. of *ati + passeti2 ?], outflanking;! Mill 132,4 (arannakam ngam -itv raiino ngassa givya upanibandhhi ti; c/PsIV 198,20: -itv ti disv). atipta, m. [from atipteti; cf S. atipta], 1. transgression; Abh 776 (atikkamo tv -o upaccayo); 2. laying low; striking down, killing; Sv 69,20 (pnassa -o pntipto, pnavadho pnaghto ti vuttam hoti); It-aII 48,31 (satthdihi abhibhavitv ptanam -o pnaghto ti vuttam hoti); Vibh-a 381,8 (pnassa -, ghtan mran ti attho); ifc see pn-. atiptaka, ?, [from atipta], the fleeting nature; ? Saddh49 (kirn na dipeti amhkam khanaggasstiptakam); see also atipti(n). atiptana, n. [from caus. of atipatati], laying low; causing to fall (quickly); It-all 48,29 (pnassa sarasen' eva patanasabhvassa antar eva -am atipto, sanikam pantum adatv sigham ptanan ti attho).


atipti(n), mfn., 1. [from caus. of atipatati] transgressing; attacking, injuring; Sn248 (giddh viruddhtiptino; Pj II 290,12: mohena dinavam apassant punappuna ajjhcrappattiy ~ino); ifc see ngakkhandh-, pn-; 2. [from atipatati], fleeting, fugitive; Saddh 50 (dullabham ~im ca laddh thnam imam budho). atiptika, mfn. [from atipatati or atipti(n) ?], urgent; MpII 354,2 (accyikni ti ~ni; Mp-t[Be]ll 192,11: sigham pavattetabbni). atippeti in Ee at D III 48,20 is wr for atipteti {or atimpeti) qqv. atippage, see sv page. atippago, seesv\>2igo. atibaddha, mfn. [pp o/*ati + bandhati], tied together, coupled; Vin IV 5,15 (mayham balivaddo sakatasatam ~am pavattessati ti); Ja I 191,27 (mayham eko gono ~am sakatasatam pavattetum samattho atthi ti); see also atibandhitv. atibandhitv, ind. [absol of *ati + bandhati], tying together, coupling; Vin IV 5,19 (sakatasatam ~itva) * Ja 1192,2i; see also atibaddha. atibdheti, pr. 3 sg. [ati + bdheti, S. atiVbdh], oppresses very much or too much; Ps II 48,29 (nivsanaprupane hi sati sitam v unham v na -eyya). atibheti, pr. 3 sg. [prob, for ativheti, caus. of ativahati qv], guides through; causes to be led through; Ja IV 366,27' (sattham abbhayanti ti satthavhnam hatthato satam pi sahassam pi gahetv satthe cora-atavim ~enti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se vahanti). atibhet v, ind. [absol. of *ati + bhen1], removing violently;! Mhv45:30. atibrhesi, aor. 3 sg. [of *ati + brheti], (he) strengthened, encouraged; JaV 361,23' (aparibrhayi ti... m bhyi ti vacanam bhananto ~esi mahsaddam nicchresi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be atibrhayi ti; et perhaps connecting with braviti ?). atibhaginiputta, m., one more (dear) than a sister's son, very much a nephew; Ja I 223,8 (kakkatako aha mtula... tvam pana ito nesi ti, bako piyamtulako ~o si me tvan ti, Ce, Ee so; Be bako na te mtulo aham na bhaginiputto si vata me tvanti; Se bako piyamtulo aham na bhaginiputto si...). atibhyati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + bhyati], is very much afraid; Mhv 14:6 (bahusu ditthesu ~issati); pp atibhita, mfn., very much afraid; JaV 144,19' (tassa ~-bhvam fiatv, Ce, Se so; Be ativiya bhitabhvam; Ee wr atitabhvam); Mhv 4:39 (~o ah rj). atibhufljitv, ind. [absol. o/*ati + bhunjati], eating too much; having over-eaten; Mil 153,25 (tarn yeva bhojanam ~itv); see also atibhutta sv bhunjati. atibhmim, ind. [ati + bhmi], beyond the limit; Ja III 484,10 (~im gantv). atibhoti, atihoti, pr. 3 sg. [S. atWbh], overcomes, surpasses; masters, gets the better of; Ja I 163,6* (chahi kalh'~oti, Ce, Ee, Se so; itekalhiti bhoti; 163,19': chahi kalhi luddakam ~oti; cf 163,25'foil.: aparo nayo ... kalhati kalyissati luddakam vaficessati ti bhoti ti bhaginim lapati); III 341,9* (sabbe panhe ~oti, Be so; Ee

atihoti; Ce, Se abhibhoti); Ap 34,10 (sabbe deve ~omi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se abhibhomi); 72,n (~onti na tass' bh candasr satrak, Be, Ce so; Ee atihonti; Se abhibhonti); 154,n (sabbe satte ~omi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be abhibhomi); Ap-a 569,6 (tassa cetiyassa pabham candasuriyatraknam pabh na ~onti); absol. atibhotv, Ap 49,14 (sabbe deve ~otv, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se abhibhotv). atimafiilati {and atimanneti), pr. 3 sg. [S. atimanyate], despises, slights, neglects; Vin III 7,2 (pacchim janat slimamsodanam ~issati); D III 86,19 (ye te satt vannavanto tedubbanne satte -anti); A I 149,29* (attnam ~asi, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee ~esi, prob, wr); Sn 104 (yo naro sam ntim ~eti, eds so); Jail 347,24* (annesu ratt -ate patim); VI 14,io* (ntimaniieti khattiyo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ntimannanti khattiy); Niddl 233,28 (ekacco param -ati jtiy v gottena v); opt. 3 sg. (a) atimanne, Sn 931 (silavatena nnfiam ~6); (b) atimaiineyya, Dhp 365 (salbham ntimanneyya); JaV 448,3* (laddh khanam ~eyya tarn pi); Vism67,n*; (c)atimanfietha, Sn 148 (ntimannetha katthacina kafici); (a) atimannanta, mfn., Ja IV 331,19' (~anto); Th-aIII 117,34; (b)atimaniiamna,mfn., Mil 180,13 (sandhanam ~amno); neg. anatimaniiamna, mfn., A III 225,3; aor. 2 sg. (a) atimanni, Ja II 29,22' (m mayham sahyam v sahyim v ~i); (b) atimannittho, Ja II 29,17* (dthini mtimannittho); 1 sg. (a) atimannim, Thi-a 76,22; (b) atimannisam, Pv 7:6 (sham puttabalpet smikam atimannisam); Ap 611,22*; (c)accamannissam, Ja IV 178,io* {Ee so; Be, Ce, Se atimannissam); 3 pl. (a) atimannimsu, Ja IV 155,6'; SpkII 106,13; (~imsu); (b) accamannisum, Ja IV 154,26*; absol. atimafinitv, Pj 11244,14 (Punnakasetthidhitaram ~itv, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se avamannitv); neg. anatimannitv, SpkII 109,21 (kafici pi anatimannitv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr atimannitv); ^ / ? atimannitabba, mfn., VinV 163,8 (ariyo v tunhibhvo ntimannitabbo); MII 242,12. atimanfian, / [from atimanfiati; BHS atimanyan], arrogance; contempt; Mil 122,27 (suddo ti~ n' atthi); see also atimna. atimathaka, mfn. [cf S. mataha, "little, poor", Pkt madaha, "small"], too short;? Vin II 138,10 (annatarassa bhikkhuno -am dantakattham khdantassa kanthe vilaggam hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atimandhakam; Sp 1214,i: ~an ti atikhuddakam, Be so; Ee, Se atimandhakanti; Ce omits). ati matt a1, see sv majjati. atimatta2, mfn. [S. atimtra], exceeding the measure, excessive; Abh 41; see also adhimatta. atimandaka, mfn. [ati+ manda+ ka2], very weak, tender; Saddh 273 (ankuram vtimandakam). atimandhaka, mfn. [?] too small;! Vin II 138,10 (annatarassa bhikkhuno ~am dantakattham khdantassa, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee atimathakam; Sp 1214,i: -an ti atikhuddakam, Ee, Seso; Beatimathakanti; Ce omits). atimamyati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + mamyati], makes too much of; spoils; Ja II 316,17 (amhkam rj ekarn tpasam -ati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ativiya mamyati). atimteti in Ee at A III 205,27* is wr for atimpeti or atipteti qqv.


atimna, m. [ts], high opinion (of oneself); pride, arrogance, conceit; MI 16,i (-oca ppako); Sn853 (~e ca no yuto); Th 428 (~o ca omno pahin); Ja VI 58,23' (aham asmi jtisampanno tL dinayappavattam -am ca); Niddl 233,27foil, (katamo ~o); Vibh346,is (mno omno -o adhimno); Mil 289, n (srambho mno -o mado pamdo); ifc see man'-; anatimna, m., freedom from conceit; MI 44,23; 363,24 (-am nissya atimno pahtabbo); niratimna, mfh., without conceit; Cp-a319,3i (~-t); see also atimaniian, adhimna, abhimna. atimni(n), mfh. [from atimna], proud, conceited; D III 45,16 (thaddho hoti -I); MI 44,23 (~issa purisapuggalassa anatimno hoti parikkamanya); Ja IV 145, I3 (ime Saky nma jtim nissya -ino); 381,25* (jtimado c a -t ca); anatimni(n), mfn., not conceited, free from pride; MI 363,34 (~issa); Sn 143 (suvaco c' assa mudu -i); Pj II 318, l (t); see also abhimni(n). atimpeti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. minti, caus. mpayati], injures, destroys; S IV 317,27 (yo koci pnam -eti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atipteti); Sadd 554,7 (mpa mpane ... yo pnam -eti); atimpaya(t), mfh., D I 52,24 (pnam ~ayato, Ee so; Be, Ce atiptpayato; Se atippayato) = MI 404,24 (Ee so; Be, Ce atiptayato; Se atiptpayato) * SIV 349,9 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atiptayato); pp atimpita, mfh., killed; S IV 319,22 (pno -o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atiptito); see also atipteti sv atipatati. atimutta, m. [S. lex., BHS atimukta], a kind of shrub (Gaertnera racemosa); Abh 577; Ap 15,21 (- asok ca). atimuttaka, m. [S. atimuktaka], a kind of shrub (perhaps Ougeinia oojeinensis); its flower; Abh 555; Ja IV 440,8* (aham ca ankolakam ocinmi -am sattaliyothikam ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adhimuttakam); Cp-a 243,1 (-susne vasimsu); - m l , / , a garland of atimuttaka; Vin II 256,1 (vassikamlam v -am v labhitv, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adhimattaka-) = AIV 278,7 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se adhimuttaka-). atimodati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + modati], rejoices very much; Dhp-al 132,23 (idha loke pi modati... paraloke pi ati yeva). atiyakkha, m. [prob, ati + akkha4; cf S. adhyaksa], overseer, superintendent; Ja VI 502,26* (~ vassavar itthgram ca rjino; but cf 504,22': ~ ti bhtavijj ikkhanik pi); see also ajjhakkha. atiyta in Ee at Pet 32,16 is prob, wr for abhiyta qv sv abhiyti. atiyti, pr. 3 sg. [S. atWy], 1. passes by; Ud-a 318,27 (-anti); 2. (re-)enters; A168,23 (ranno na phsu hoti -tum v niyytum v; Mp II 142,6: -tun ti bahiddh janapadacrikam caritv icchiticchitakkhane anto nagaram pavisitum). atiyitv in Ce, Ee at Mp II 241,28 and V 72,5 is wr for atisitv (Be, Se, A I 145,29 and V 226,23 so). atiriccati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atiricyate], remains, is left over (as a surplus); surpasses; Saddh23 (kin nu so ntiricceyya manusse Jambudipake); 126 (kim narakam ntiriccati); absol atiricca, Jinl 72 (ndena ndam

atiricc' upavinayati); pp atiritta, mfn. [S. atirikta], (what is) remaining, left over; extra, surplus; Abh 712; Vin IV 82,17/0//. (anujnmi bhikkhave gilnassa ca agilnassa ca -am bhunjitum, evam ca pana... -am ktabbam alam etam sabban ti); V 137,4 (attha anatiritt attha --a); Sp 297,30 (ito nam v -am v n' atthi); Dhp-aIII 262,20 (atthi kinci bhikkhusanghassa -an ti); As 47,19 (na het kho pana dhamm ti -am kho pana tipadam vuttam); Vin-vn 1303; Utt-vn641; ifc see giln-; neg. anatiritta, mfn., Vin I 213,32; II 301,io; Vin-vn 1314; Utt-vn 817. atiritam in Ee at It-a I 41,2 is wr for atiritam (Be, Ce, Se so). atiritta, mfn., pp o/atiriccati qv. atirittaka, mfh. [atiritta + ka2], (what is) left over; extra, surplus; Vin-vn 1311 (anatirittan tisannino ~e); ifc see giln-; anatirittaka, mfn., not left over, not surplus; Sp 839,11 (-am ajjhoharati, Ce, Ee so; Be anatirittakatam; Se anatirittam katam); Vin-vn 1375 (annam -am bhunjato); Utt-vn 582; 644. atiriva, seesvdXi. atireka, mfn. [from atiriccati; cf S. atireka, m.], (what is) extra, surplus; too many, too much, excessive; more (than); superior, higher; iic: more than...; an extra...; a greater, a superior...; ifc (following numerals); plus; atirekam, atirekena, atirekato, adv., especially; more, still more (than); Vin I 128,36 (sambahul vsik bhikkh sannipatimsu cattro v - v); IV 173,23 (yo pana bhikkhu sugatacivarappamnam civaram krpeyya-am v); MI 515,26 (-am kho pan' imassabhoto satthuno naggiyam mundiyam); AIII 215,16 (ice etam samasamam n' atthi kinci -am, handham -y ti; Mp III 306,5 foil.: mayham imehi kinci -am n' atthi... visesakranatthya patipajjmi ti attho); Th 424 (nttano samakam kanci -am ca mannisam); Jal 109,4 (-ni akkhayugdini phletv); 441,8 (mittasanthavo nma hinehi pi samehi pi -ehi pi kattabbo yev ti); IV 4,19* (laddh satasahassni -ni visati); Patis II 202,26 (~o hoti adhiko hoti viseso hoti); Mil 216,6 (te tena arigena -); Sv 828,i (sihassa -o asmimno hoti); Ps I 96,14 (dutiyabhikkhuto -ena pjaniyo); II 326,33 (~ni satta vassni nnkilikyo dassetv); Mp I 431,5 (-am bhunjitv klam aksi); Vibh-a486,i6 (ohilan ti -ato hilan); -tara, mfh., still more, greater; -am, adv., still more; Ja III 497,2i (-am pasiditv); VI 317,32' (mettacittam hi dnato -am punfiam); Ps III 312,24 (gunehi pana -0); Dhp-all 98,io (cathi samuddehi -ena assun); Ud-a 420,9 (bahu-d-eva rattim -am diyaddhaymam ... kathesi); anatireka, mfn., not very much, not excessive; Spkl 15,i6 (anatirekat); stireka, mfn., with a surplus; more than; D i l 93,7 (~ni... pancasatni Ndike upasak klakat... sambodhiparyan); Vv-a 234,4 (tassa vimnassa bh -ni visati yojanni pharitv titthati); Patis-a468,8 (saha adhikena vattanti ti samdhikni, -ni ti attho). atirocati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atWruc], shines magnificently; outshines, surpasses in splendour; Dil208,8 (te anrie deve -anti vannena c' eva yasas ca); A III 34,20* (cando... sabbe tragane loke bhya -ati); Dhp 59


(puthujjane ~ati pannya); Pv 21:59 (dasahi thnehi Ankuram Indako -ati); Ja V 358,24 (ayam hamso ... rattakambalasuttasikkya thapitakancanakkhandho viya -ati, Be, Ce, Eeso; Se ativirocati); Patis II 196,16 (bhagav va tattha ~ati yadidam pannya ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se abhirocati); Bv 2:185 (Rhumutto yath suriyo tpena ~ati); Mil 336,25 (silaratanapilandho ... bhikkhu ... adho pitiriyampi virocati -ati); atirocamna, mfn., Spkl 247,2i; aor. 3 sg. (a) accaruci, A III 346, I8* (sabbe accaruci ngo himavanne siluccaye) * Th 692 (Be, Se sa ve accaruci ngo; Ee, Ce sa ve accantaruci); (b) atirocatha, VinV 3,15* (dipe trakarj va pannya ~atha); 3 pi atirocisum, JaV 311,25* (samnavannarpena n' aMamanntirocisum). atirocana, n. [from atirocati], outshining; Spkl 349,4; Vv-a 125,7. ativaddhikyo in Ce, Ee at Cp-a 140,18 is prob. wr; Be, Se abhivaddhakyo. ativaddhitum, ind. [ati + inf. of (caus. of) vaddhati], to increase too much; Th-a 1145,8 (-urn na vattati; * Mp I 244,8: Be, Ce ati-anchitum; Ee ati-anjitum; Se ativancitum; = Ap-a 521,19: Be, Se ati-anchitum; Ce, Ee ati-ancitum). ativannati, pr. 3 sg., overpowers, overwhelms; D i l 267, is (na ... tantissaro -ati gitassaram, gitassaro v tantissaram, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ativattati). ativatta 1 , mfn., pp of ativattati qv. ativatta2, m. [from ativattati], overcoming; ifc see durativatta, svtivatta. ativatta(r), m. [from *ati + vacati; cf S. atiVvac], one who blames or insults; JaV 266,24* (isinam -ro; 272,21': -ro ti pharusavchi atikkamitv vattro); see also ativkya. ativattati, pr. 3 sg. [S. atiVvrt], goes beyond, escapes from; exceeds, overwhelms; goes too far; transgresses (against); Vin II 237,25 (mahsamuddo thitadhammo velarn ntivattati); DIU 182,14* (yo dhammam ati); SII 92,17 (viniptam samsram ntivattati); AIV 58,15 (itthi itthattam -ati); Th412 (jtijartivattate tarn; Th-a II 175,26: -ate uparpari ajjhottharati); Ja I 280,4* (dittham so -ati; 280,13': paccmittam atikkamati abhibhavati); IV 5,4* (tarn tdisam ntivatteyya cakkam; 6,2' foil: na -eyya nvatthareyya, ntivatteu" ti pi ptho nvattharatl ti attho); VI 534,7* (tinni ntivattanti samant caturahgul); Ap 21,22 (nnan te ntivattare); Mil 380,29 (samuddo... sakarn velarn ntivattati); Spkl 19,24 (nibbuyhmi ti thtum asakkonto -mi); neg. (a) anativattanta, mfn., Bv-a61,i2 (upekkham anativattantassa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anativattentassa, prob, wr) = Cp-a276,7; (b) anativattamna, mfn., Vism 149,16 (yuganaddhadhamm annamannam anativattamna hutv) * Nidd-al 134,5; Patis-a 587,34 (samatho ca vipassanam anativattamno kosajjaptam na karoti); aor. 3 sg. accavattatha, Ja III 484,27* (param ev' accavattatha); 3 pl (a) ativattisum, Ja VI 99,12* (petam te ntivattisum, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se petattam ntivattimsu); (b) ativattimsu, Ja VI 99,16'; absol ativattitv, Ja VI 114,2r; pp (a) ativatta1, mfn., 1. (act.) having overcome, gone beyond, passed; Ja I 58,6 (sesarukkhnam chy - jamburukkhassa chy parimandal thit, Ee so;

Ce anativatt; Be, Senivatt; = Ps II 291,4: eds nivatt; = Ap-a 62,32: eds vitivatt); 111485,22' (pitar akkhtathnato param -0 va); neg. anativatta, mfn., Th-al 174,14; 2. (pass.) passed beyond, overcome; Mil 146,21 (vihat avijj ... daddh sabbakiles - lokadhamm); (b) ativattita, mfn., having passed beyond, escaped; Ps II 415,12 (dasamattni brahmasahassni mama vasam -ni); fpp ativattitabba, mfn., Nidd-a I 204,16 (sukhena -ni na honti); caus. pr. 3 sg. (a)ativatteti, lets (time) pass; spends (time); Spkl 296,27 (kim me idni sajjhyen ti phalasampattisukhena klam -eti); ativattenta, mfn., It-all 117,28 (hravelam -ent, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ant, prob, wr); absol -etv, Vibh-a498,33 (haraklam -etv klarn karonti); (b) ativattpeti, lets (time) pass; Ps I 95,io (-eyyarn); see also adhivattati. ativattana, n. [from ativattati], going beyond; escaping from; Ud-a 346,2 (samsrato nativattanadipanam imam udnam udnesi); anativattana, n., not going beyond; not exceeding, not overwhelming; not escaping from; Patis I 16,6 (yuganandhassa -'-attho abhinneyyo); Ud-a 211,2 (jti -didukkhassa -ato); Pj II 35,5 (annamannam -ena); Ih-all 28,19 (mandapanno samsrassa -ato). ativassati, pr. 3 sg. [ati -1- vassati2], rains very much or too much; rains upon, rains into; Vin II 240,24* (channam -ati vivatam ntivassati) = Ud 56,33* = Th 447 (Th-a II 188,27/0//.: -ati ti pattivassam c' eva kilesavassam ca ativiya vassati... ntivassati ti ettha ati ti upasaggamattam, na vassati ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee avassati m' eva attho, prob, wr); Ja IV 94,13* (aklen' -ati, Ee so, perhaps wr ; Be, Ce aklena pi vassati; Se aklena pavassati); As 367,10 (ekacco hi devo -ti ti kuppati na vassati ti kuppati); aor. 3 sg. ativassi, M II 54,3 (Ghatikrassa kumbhakrassa vesanam sabbam temsam ksacchadanam atthsi, na ctivassi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Bern devo 'tivassi; or pass. ? Ps III 287,2: ekam pi udabindu ntivassi) quoted Mil 223,17 (Be na devo 'tivassi ti; Ce, Ee na cbhivassi ti; Se na cbhivassati ti); pass. pr. 3 sg. ativassiyati, is rained on; is sodden with rain; Pet203,2foil (rgena ntivassiyati ... dosena ntivassiyati... yo tassa dhammassa akusalo dhammo patipakkho tena ntivassiyati, so read with vl and Rnamoli, 1979, p. 2741 Be, Ee nbhiddhamsiyati... ndhivsiyati; Ce nbhidhamsiyati... ndhivsiyati); neg. anativassiyanta, mfn., Pet 204,7 (evam anativassiyantam cittam, so read with vl and ftnamoli, 1979, p. 276 ? Be, Ee anadhivasiyantam; Ce aviddhsiyantam); pp ativuttha, mfn., rained upon; Vism 345,10 (aklameghena -amhi, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se abhivutthamhi); see also ativassana, abhivassati. ativassana, n. [from ativassati; see vassana2], raining upon; Pet 203,i (tihi dhammehi ntivassanat, so read with ftnamoli, 1979, p. 274 ? Be, Ee nbhiddhamsit; Ce nbhidhamsit); 203,24 (desit dasa akusalakammapath -tya, so read with ftnamoli, 1979, p. 2751 Be, Ce, Ee adhivassanatya); Th-a II 188,35 (channassa duccaritassa pattivassdinam -ato);


anativassana, n., not raining upon; Pet 203,25 (desit ... dasa kusalakammapath tya, so read with Nnamoli, 1979, p. 2751 Be, Ee anadhivassanatya; Ce adhivassanatya). ativahati, pr. 3 sg. [ts], leads across; leads astray, deceives; Ja VI 206,4* (mygun ntivahanti panfiam; 209,6': ntivahanti ti na vancenti); cans. pr. 3 sg. ativheti, guides through; causes to be led across; Sv923,26 (ataviyam ssankatthnesu dnaslam kretv tattha gate bhojetv manusse datv -eti); see also atibheti. ativkya, n. [from *ati + vacati; BHS id.], abuse, blame, reproach; Abh 122; Dhp 320 (-am titikkhissam); Ja VI 508,16* (n' evtivkyam na labhe bhthi sakhikhi ca; 509,15': -am garahvacanam n' eva na labhati); see also ativatta(r). ativta1, mfn., pp o/ativyati qv. ativta2, m., see sv vta. ativyati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. atWv], blows through; blows strongly; pervades (with an odour or perfume); Mil 333,12 (vyanti ~anti pharitv titthanti); pp ativta2, mfn., blown through; exposed to the wind; Mil 9\,nfoll. (--tthnam parivajjaniyam... ko doso visamatthne sabhaye ~e ... ~e saddo avibhto hoti). ativha1, m., [BHS id.], what leads across; a guide, a conveyance; Th616 (silam settho -o yena yti diso disam; Th-aII260,25: yathicchitatthnam vheti samppeti ti -o ynam). ativha2, m, see sv vha. ativhika, m(fn). [ativha1 + ika], one who conveys or guides; Ja V 471,23 (tehi -purisehi parivuto, Ce, Ee, Se so; Beatavivsika-); 472,n (~ ... tato nivattimsu, Ce, Ee so; Se -puris; Be atavivsikapuris). ativijjhati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + vijjhati; cf S. atWvyadh], pierces through, penetrates; Dhp-a I 122, is (sabbakiles tatharpam cittam -anti yeva, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee ativiya vijjhanti); 122,I8 (evarpam cittam ... kiles -itum na sakkonti); absol. (a) ativijjha, M I 480,10 (paniiya ca nam -a passati); S V 226,13 (pannya ca ~a passmi); A II 178,29 (pannya c' assa attham -a passati); Th 1244 (pajjotakaro -a sabbatthitlnam atikkamam add); (b) ativijjhitv, Ud-a306,27 (attabhvam -itv); Spkl 279,19. ativimhayaniya, mfn. [c/vimhaya and S. vismayaniya], very astonishing; Th-al 196,22 (-am h* etam yadidam saccapativedho). ativiya, see sv ati. ativirocati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + virocati], shines magnificently; outshines; Vv 40:7 (te mam -anti, eds so; better metrically atirocanti, see L. Alsdorf, 1967, p. 329; Vv-a 180,27: devaputt mam atikkamitv virocanti); aor. 3 sg. (a) ativiroci, Ps IV 187,1 (cando ~i, Ce, Eeso; Be, Se atiroci); (b) ativirocittha, Ud-a415,24 (bhagav ... rattasuvannaghanapatim viya ittha). ativivaritv, ind. [absol. of *ati + vivarati], further revealing; making very clear; Nidd-a I 5,3 (vivaranena vivaritatthassa ... -itv kathanam ... uttnikaranam nma). ativisa, n. [BHS ativisa; cf S. ativisa, mfn., "counter-

acting poison"], a kind of plant; Vin I 201,2 (anujnmi bhikkhave mlni bhesajjni haliddam... -am ...); IV 35,1; Vin-vn 1327; see also ativisa. ativisa, / [S. ativisa], a kind of plant; Abh 586 (mahosadham tv ~); see also ativisa. *ativegyati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from ativega qv sv vega], hurries too much; aor. 2 sg. ativegyi, Mp I 428,18 (kumra m ~i, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se m ativegena gacchhi). ativetheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + vetheti], envelops, ensnares (further); presses; Vin II 101,13 (tamenam so nibbethentam -eti) = MII 248,11; Ja V 452,26* (rattacittam -ayanti nam sla mluvalat va knane; 454,31': dhanagahanatthya ativiya vethenti pilenti); pass. pr. 3 sg. ativethiyati, Sp 1199,4/o//. (-ti ti inghyasm ti divacanehi -iyati ... puna tena -iyamno sarmi kho ti patinnam datv). ativypetv, ind. [absol. of *ati + vypeti], making extend too far; having made too comprehensive; Sadd 920,16. atisagga, m. [S. atisarga], granting permission or leave; Sadd 815,17 (kmacram abbhanujnanam -0 tasmim ~e bhavam khalu puniiam karotu). atisankocaka, mfn. [ati+ sankoca + ka2; cf S. sankocaka], excessively contracting (the face); Nidd-a I 336,27 (korajikakorajiko ti s ankocasafikocako ~o ti vuttam hoti). atisajjana, n. [cf S. atisarjana], granting; instructing; Dhtup 303 (disa -e); 493; Dhtum 475; 572; Sadd 453,2 (disa ~e). atisandahati in Ee at As 111,8 is wr for abhisandahati qv. atisaya, m. and mfn. [S. atiSaya], 1. (m.) superiority, pre-eminence; excellence; excess; Abh 41; 761; 771; 1182; Pj II 488,i (na tassa vacanena koci ~o atthi); Sadd881,9* (atisaddo... ~e... pavattati); am, -ena, -ato, adv., exceedingly, especially, more (than); Spkl 327,28 (sdutaran ti ~ena sdum); Ud-a 275,15 (attano -ena piyam aniiam ... pariyesanto); It-all 126,20 (priprito -ato v silam assa atthi ti silav); Vv-a 135,26 (visesam ajjhag ti annahi -am adhigat); Pv a 86,10 (samalankatatar ti samm-ena alankat); 2. (mfn.) superior; preeminent; special; Ud-a 109,19 (lokuttarasukham eva anuttaran ti -an ti bhjesi ti); niratisaya, mfn., unsurpassed; It-al 6,23 (anannasdhran -); Th-al 6,16; stisaya, mfn. 1. [S. stiSaya], superior, best; pre-eminent; -am, adv., especially; pre-eminently; It-al 92,i (--tya); Vv-al21,i6 (tass sati pi annasmim sucaritakamme therassa katadnam eva -am hutv upatthsi); Th-al 58,26 (-am buddhapavedito ti nma); Cp-a215,n (kiiicpi - nekkhammaprami); 2. having a superior, inferior, lesser; Ud-a 109,18 (lokiyasukham sa-uttaram -am). atisayati, see sv atiseti. atisayana, n. [from atisayati, cf S. atisayana, mfn.], preeminence, excellence; Cp-a294,9 (abhijanaspateyyoliipateyyyurpatthnabandhiunittasampattinam -ato ca sflam paccavekkhitabbam). atisara, mfn. [from atisarati], (according to ct:) (one) who transgresses, an offender; one who goes far beyond; ? Ja IV 6,10* (-0 accasaro Mittavinda; 6,12:


atisari ti pi ~o atisarissati ti pi ~o ... tvam hi atidrunassa kammassa katatt ~o ... aparimnam atimahantam vipkadukkham sarissasi patipajjissasi ti pi -o); see also adhisara. atisarati,/?/*. 3 sg. [ati + sarati2; i/S atisarati], goes past, beyond; overlooks; goes too far, oversteps, transgresses', Ja IV 6,12' (-issati ti pi atisaro); aor. 3 sg. (a) atisari, Ja IV 6, \r (~i ti pi atisaro; ?); (b) accasari, Sn 8 (yo nccasari na paccasri, so read? eds nccasari; c/Udna-v 32:55: ntyasaram; PDhp411: nccasari); (c) accasar2, SI 239,15 (eko bhikkhu accasar); 2 sg. (a) atisaro, Ja IV 6,10* (atisaro accasaro Mittavinda sunohi me; or atisara, mfn. ? cf6,ir: atisari ti pi atisaro atisarissati ti pi atisaro); (b) accasaro, Ja IV 6,10* (atisaro accasaro Mittavinda, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be paccasaro); (c)accasar3, MI 304,20 (accasarvuso Viskha panharn nsakkhi pafihassa pariyantam gahetum; Ps II 370,15: accasar ti ettha panharn atikkamitv gato si) * S III 189,27 (Ce, Seso; Ee wr assa; Be accaysi) * V 218,19 (Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajjhaparam; Be accaysi); 1 sg. accasarim, Ja V 70,i* (mlho accasarim vane; 72,14': manussapatham atikkamitv himavantam pvisim); absol. atisitv, going beyond; passing over, overlooking; D I 222,9 (tvam tarn bhagavantam atisitv bahiddh pariyetthim pajjasi imassa pafihassa veyykaranya); Mill 195,4 (tarn bhagavantam atisitv amhe etam attham patipucchitabbam mannetha); A I 145,29 (attnam yeva atisitv); Sn 908 (atisitv annena vadanti suddhim); Mp III 165,12 (te atisitv thit); see also adhisaritv. atisallekhati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + sallekhati], practises austerity too much; Ps III 165,22 (~ati ativymam karoti). atisra, atisra, m.n. [from atisarati], 1. [S. atisra], dysentery; Dhp-al 182,25 (-amjanesi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atisram) = Patis-a684,29; Nidd-al 61,2 (lohitapakkhandik ~o); 2. a going beyond, deviation; transgression; Mill 234,33 (samannya ca ~o); SI 74,ir (-am na bujjhanti); Ja V 379,11* (atthi me tarn -am vegena; 379,15': -an ti pakkhalitam); atisraditthi, see svatisaramditthi; anatisra, mfn. and m. I. (mfn.) not transgressing; Vin I 55,9 (apanmento upajjhyo stisaro hoti panmento ~o ti); 326,31; 2. (m.) nondeviation; Mill 235,8; stisra, mfn. [BHS id.], associated with an offence; transgressing; Vin I 326,n (sarigho ~o hoti); VI17,20 (-am vatthum ajjhcaritum); As 28,26. atisri(n), mfn. [from atisarati; BHS -atisrin], going beyond; transgressing; ifc see lakkhan' -. atisigana, m., see sv isi. atisitv, absol. of atisarati qv. atiseti, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [ati + sen1; S. atmete], goes beyond; surpasses; excels; Ap461,2o (sabbagandho 'tiseti me; Ce so; Ee ti seti; Be, Se sabbagandho va hoti); MpIII 243,22 (adhibhavitv ganhti ajjhottharati ~eti); Cp-a 294,21 (kulasampattim ~eti silasampad); (a ) atisenta, mfn., Ap 461,22 (mukhagandho ... -ento sad vti, so read with CPD1 Ee atisanto; Ce disanto; Be parisanto; Se atikanto); (b)atisayanta,m^z., Cp-a 319,7 (pete tiracchnagate ca -ante... manusse);

(c) atisemna, mfn., Pj II 140,25 (sahassacandasuriybh atisemna(m) sarirbham munci, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se -sriyobhstibhsayamnam); absol. atisayitv, Mil 336,27 (atikkamitv ~ayitv aijhottharitv, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se abhibhavitv). *atisevati,/?r. 3 sg. [ati + sevati], resorts to too much; atisevanta, mfn., Ja III 526,18' (blam accpasevato ti blam apannam ~antassa); pass, atiseviyamna, mfn., Mp II 198,14 (kodhano ~iyamno ati-upasankamiyamno pi kujjhati). atisevi(n), mfn. [from *atisevati], resorting to too much; Cp-a 313, is (na ... asevin bhavitabbam na ~in bhavitabbam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ansevin). atissara, mfn. see sv issara1. atihatthayati,pr. 3 sg. [S. atihastayati], overtakes on an elephant; Sadd 587,20 (hatthin atikkamati ati). atiharana, n. [from atiharati], shifting forward; carrying over; Vism 621,34 (~am nma purato haranam); PSI 260,36. atiharati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. atiVhr], brings over, brings, brings to; carries over; Vin II 120,30 (ptiy pi pattena pi udakam -anti); IV 264,16 (bhikkhuniyo sassakle makadhaniiam vinnpetv nagaram ~anti); Ps I 268,2 (vyodhtu~ati ca vitiharati); atiharanta, mfn., Vin IV 39,33 (-ante); Spk III 207,17; aor. 3 sg. (a)atihari, Ja I 292,16 (mnavikya santikam ~i); (b) accahsi, Ja III 484,16* (ajakaram medam accahsi; 485, ir: ativiya hari); absol. atiharitv, Vin II 209,13; SI 89,33 (aputtakam spateyyam rjantepuram -itv gacchmi); Ja III 423,15; pass. pr. 3 sg. atihariyati, Vin II212,1 (kinti nu kho sensanam gmarn -iyetha); pp atihita, mfn., brought in, harvested; Th381 (atihit vihi); fpp atiharitabba, mfn., Vin II 211,37 (sensanam gmam -itabbam); atiharitabbam in Ee at Spk III 19,25 is prob, wr; Be, Se abhirhitabb; Ce abhiruhitabbam; caus. pr. 3 sg. atiharpeti, causes to bring in; collects, harvests; confiscates; A I 242,7 (sighasigham opunpetv sighasigham ~eyya); Mil 66,13 (dhannam -eyysi); Sp 212,25 (attano rjantepuram -eyyun ti, Be so; Ee, Ce -essan ti, prob, wr; Se ~esun ti, prob, wr); aor. 3 pi atiharpesum, Vin III 18,7 (m no aputtakam spateyyam Licchaviyo ~esun ti; Sp 212,25: m ~ent ti); absol atiharpetv, Vin II 181,2 (opunpetv -etabbam-etv ...); Dhp-a IV 77,4 (tassa gehato dhanam rjakulam -etv); fpp atiharpetabba, mfn., Vin II 181,2; atiharpeyyun ti in Ee at Sp 212,21 is wr for atiharpesun ti (Be, Ce, Se, Vin III 18,7 so). atihita, mfn., pp of atiharati qv. atihilayna, mfn. [ of *ati + hileti], despising; Ja IV 331,7* (sakam niketam -o, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atihelayno; 331,19': - 0 ti atimaniianto garahanto) quoted Vibh-a 472,10* (Be so; Ee atihilamno; Ce, Se atihelayno). atihoti, see sv atibhoti. atita, mfn., pp 0/acceti 2 qv. atiraka, mfn. [a3 + tlra+ ka2], unlimited; D III 134,3 (-am nnadassanam; Sv913,is: -an ti atiram aparicchedam mahantam). atiraneyya, mfn. [neg.fpp o/tireti qv jvtarati], not to be


accomplished; not to be crossed; Ja VI 57,n* (mssu tinno amannittho ... -am idam kammam bah hi paripanthayo; 57,14': -an ti idam kilesajtam nma na ettakena tiretabbam). ativa, see sv ati. atisaramdifthi,/ [possibly mcfor atisra- or atisram-; see K.R. Norman, 1992b, p. 332], excessive view(s); deviant view(s); Sn 889 (~iy so samatto mnena matto paripunnamni, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se atisraditthiy va; Niddl 297,2i: -iy so samatto ti atisraditthiyo vuccanti dvsatthi ditthigatni... sabb t ditthiyo krantikkant lakkhantikkant, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atisraditthiy ti; Pj II 556,5: tya lakkhantisriniy atisraditthiy samatto). atisra, see sv atisra. atucca, see sv ucca. atuj in Ee at D III 162,2* is prob, wr for atraj (Be, Ce, Se so). aturibhta in Ee at Sv 789,26 is wrfor turibhta qv. ateva, see sv ati. ato, ind. [S. atas], from there; from this; than this; therefore; M I 498,I; II 52,10 (-o kumbhiy odanarn gahetv); III 169,20 (-o dullabhatarham ... manussattam vadmi); SI 15,n* (kuto sar nivattanti... - o sar nivattanti); Ja V 398,21* (399,9': - o ti tato); Pj II 457,20; Mil 87,15 (~o dukkarataram ... bhagavat katarn, Ee so; Be ito; Ce, Se tato); Sadd 680,26 (yato tato kuto ~o ito). aton, [?], a class of people; Mil 191,4 (mahiy gan vattanti seyyathidam mall ~ pabbat dhammagiriy brahmagiriy natak naccak...). atta1, mfn. [S. asta], thrown; Abh 744. atta2, pp /diyati qv. atta3, m. see sv atta(n). atta4, mfn. [S. pta; or possibly cf S. (an)tmya], full, complete; (or personal;) DIU 203,20 (~hi pi paripunnhi paribhshi paribhseyyum; cf Sv 968,32: kalrakkhikajradant ti evam tesam attabhvam upanetv vutthi paripunnavyanjanhi); -rpa1, mfn., very complete; (or quite personal;) DIU 81,6 (paribhsanti ~ya paribhsya paripunnya no aparipunny ti; Sv 861, u: -y ti attano anurpya). atta5, mfn. [S. rta], distressed, pained, weary; Ja VI 502,i5*(tesu-m-attkilant ca, so read with L. Alsdorf, 1957, p. 32 ? eds te su matt); see also atta3. atta(n), atta3, m. [S. atman], (now. att; acc. attnam, attnam, attam; instr. attan, attena; gen./dat./abl. attano; abl. also attan; loc. attani; c/Sadd 158,25 foil.; iic and ifc atta); 1. the self, the soul, as a permanent, unchangeable, autonomous entity (always rejected by the Pali Buddhist texts as not corresponding to any reality); Abh 92 (jivo tu puriso 'tt); 861; VinI 13,19 (rpam ca h' idam ... - abhavissa na-y-idam rpam bdhya samvatteyya); D I 3\,\foll. (eke samanabrhman... uddham ghtan sannim -nam pannpenti...); 185,33/0//. (kim pana tvam Potthapda -nam paccesi ti...); M I 297,37 (siinfiam idam -ena v attaniyen v); 300,8 (rpam ~ato samanupassati rpavantam v -nam -ani v rpam rpasmim v ~nam); III 264,33/b//.; SI 188,19* (sankhre parato passa dukkhato m ca -ato); III98,30/0//. (api ca kho evam

ditthi hoti so ~ so loko so pecca bhavissmi nicco dhuvo sassato aviparinmadhammo ti); Sn508 (ken* ~an gacchati brahmalokam); Vibh 336,9 (atthnam etam anavakso yam ditthisampanno puggalo kanci dhammam ~ato upagaccheyya); Ud-a 339,32 (sariraparimno angutthaparimno yavaparimno paramnuparimno - ti evamdivd); Vibh-a 354,28 (~ abhikkamati ~an abhikkamo nibbattito ti... sammuyhanti); 2. the self, one's own self (the abstract individual); the image in a looking-glass; Vin I 23,23 (katamam nu kho tumhkam varam yam v tumhe itthim gaveseyytha yarn v ~nam gaveseyytha ti); SI 71,2s foil, (kesam nu kho piyo ~ kesam appiyo ~ ti); III 120,is (kacci pana tarn Vakkali ~ sflato na upavadati ti); A I 57,27 (~ pi ~anam upavadati); 149,28* (~ te purisa jnti saccam v yadi v mus); IV97,i3* (attupam hi te satt ~ hi paramam piyo); Ja III 169,16* (yass* - nlam eko va sabbakmarasharo); Mil 54,11 (dso na siy abh na siy mukham siy jyeyya ~ ti); ifc see kat' - (^v karoti), khem'-; especially 3. oneself, himself, yourself, (used [in the sg.J as reflexive pronoun for all three persons and genders); instr. attan, by oneself; in oneself, as for oneself, often used in the sense of a nom. (cf^Sadd719,2foil.); SI 44,5* (~nam na dade poso); IV 307,16 (~an matto pamatto pare madetv); A I 53,35 (na sdhukam ~an va ~nam paccavekkhanti); 297,21 (~an ca pntipti hoti param ca pntipte samdapeti); III 81,4 (bhikkhu -ana ca silasampanno hoti silasampadkathya ca gatam panham vykatt hoti); 211,26 (-ana va ~nam vykareyya khinanirayo 'mhi); Dhp 165 (-ana va katarn ppam -ana sankilissati); 379 (-an coday' -nam patimse -am ~an); Sn 275 (rajam vaddheti -ano); 784 (yad -ani passati nisamsam); Ja I 333,9 (-nam rakkhanto param rakkhati); 111211,8 (pornakapandit -ano mtpitaro ghtetv); 442,6* (sace pi kujjhmi thapemi -anam [mc]); IV192,15* (-am mahante thpetum); Dhp-a I 358,2 (-an marant pi paresam jivitam na voropenti); Pv-a 20,32 (deyyadhammam -an khdimsu); Mhv4:38 (supinena so apassi sakam -nam pakkhittam Lohakumbhiyam); acc. attnam is used with fpp as if nom. n.\ Vin I 94,18 (-ana va -nam sammannitabbam parena v paro sammannitabbo); III 82,24 (na ca ... -nam ptetabbam); MI 97,18 (-ana va -nam evam anuminitabbam; Ps II 67,2foil.: evam -ana va - anumetabbo tuletabbo tiretabbo); Ja IV 406,17* (-nam me na dessiyam) ^ Cp 1:8:16 (- na me na dessiyo; Cp-a72,n: pathamo nakro niptamatto); '-ajjhsayika, mfn., arising from one's own wish or disposition; Mp III 44,9 (~o nikkhepo); ' -atthapaflila, see sv attatthapanna below; '-atthama, mfn., with oneself as the eighth, with seven others; Vv-al49,n (yasmantam Revatattheram -amnimantesi); Ap-a357,i9 (so - 0 satthu santikam upagato); '-atthamaka, mfn., with seven others; Mil 291,13 (therassa Mahkaccyanassa -assa pindaptam datv); 0, -attha, m., one's own profit or interest; one's own goal; Sil 29,16 (-am v... sampassamnena); A19,13; Ja IV 380,25* (-ya saddahato mama idam; 381, r: attano vaddhi-atthya); Patis II 194,31;


panfia, -atthapanna, mfn., looking (only) after one's own profit; (who is) wise as to his own advantage] Sn 75 (--panii asuci manuss, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee attatthapanna) = Ap 13,3 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee attatthapanna; Ap-a202,30 foil.: attatthapanna ti attani thit etesam panfia attnam eva oloketi na afinan ti attho, panfi ti pi ptho tassa attano attham eva oloketi na paratthan ti attho); Ja III 495, H* (--panii dummedh, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee attatthapanna; 496, w foil.: attano atthya panfia param anoloketv attani yeva v thit etesam panii); IV 56,24* (nsmas' --paniiamhi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee attatthapannamhi; 57,13': attano atthya eva yassa panfia); -d-attha, m. one's own profit or interest; one's own goal; Sn 284 (panca kmagune hitv -am acrisum); Dhp 166 (-am paratthena bahun pi na hpaye); Jail 100,25* (evam vilamhi citte na passati -am parattham); '-atthiya, mfn., concerned with one's own goal; Th 1097 (mam... -am, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atthatthiyam; Th-alll 152,14: sadatthasankhtena atthena atthikam); dhipaka, mjh. [atta(n) + adhipa + ka2], with the self, with oneself as master; controlled by the self; A I 150,3* (~o sato care; MpII 244,21: - o ti attdhipati attajetthako); dhipati, mfn., with the self as master; controlled by the self; As 125,2 (-i hiri nma lokdhipati ottappam nma); 125,38 foil, (katham ~i hiri nma); see also attadhipateyya below; idhina, mfn., dependent upon oneself (only); independent; D I 72,25 (tamh dsavy mucceyya - 0 apardhino bhujisso yenakmahgamo) = M I 275,34; Pj II 309,17 (anugmikam -am rajdinam asdhranan ti); Cp-a 297,33 (sambodhi -ena viriyena sakk samadhigantum); neg. anattdhina, mfn., dependent, not independent; D I 72,23 (puriso dso assa anattdhino) = MI 275,33; anukkamsana, n., not praising or exalting oneself; Th-all 278,2 (lbhdin -am viya albhdin paresam avambhanam); nuditthi,/, dogma about the self; belief in an (enduring) self or soul; SHI 185,32; A III 447,28 (~iy pahnya anattasaiin bhvetabb); Sn 1119 (-im hacca); Patisl 139,2; Mil 146,14; nupekkhi(n), mfn., watching oneself; A III 133,7 (-1 ca hoti no parnupekkhi); nuyogi(n), mfn., intent upon oneself or one's own interest; Dhp 209 (pihef -inarn); nurakkh,/, self-protection; JaV 486, is* (-ya bhavanti h'ete hatthroh); nurakkhi(n), mfn., preserving, taking care of oneself; Ja IV 292,20* (-1 bhava); nuvdabhaya, n.,fear of self reproach; A l l 121,19 (-am parnuvdabhayam); Vibh 376,34; As 127,9; '-krnuvattpana, n., making conform to its own form or mode; Vism493,io; '-dna, n., taking upon oneself; a legal process (of the sangha,) initiated by oneself; Vin II 247,7foil, (-am dtukmena bhante bhikkhun katangasamanngatam -am dtabban ti; Sp 1288,is: ettha ssanam sodhetukmo bhikkhu yam adhikaranam attan diyati tarn -am vuccati; Sp-t[2te]III 435,2: param codetum attano dtabbam gahetabbam adhikaranam -am); ' -dhipateyya, n. and mfn., 1. (n.) control by oneself; D III 220,7 (tin* dhipateyyni -am lokdhipateyyam dhamm-

dhipateyyam) ^ A1147,21; Vism 14,i; 2. (mfn.) with oneself as controlling influence; Ja I 129,26' (- hiri lokdhipateyyam ottappam); 130,20'foil, (katham hiri ~ nma); see also attdhipati above; '-ukkamsaka, mfn., praising or exalting oneself; MI 19,3 (- paravambhl); Jail 152,H' (attnam pasamsanasilo - 0 poso); neg. anattukkamsaka, mfn., MI 19,7; 19,9 (anattukkamsakatam... attani sampassamno); Q)-a 296,10; '-ukkamsana, n., ~ a , / , self-praise; M I 402,36 (- paravambhan); Pj II 288,16 (--t); l h - a l 179,is (-ena); Nidd-al 464,19 (-am na karoti); neg. anattukkamsana, n., and anattukkamsan,/, M I 404,6 (anattukkamsana aparavambhan); Sp 171,5 (anattukkamsanato aparavambhanato); '-uddesa, mfn., intended for oneself; Vin III 149,n (bhikkhun kutim krayamnena assmikam -am; 149,27: -n ti attano atthya); Vin-vn381; 0, -uddesika, mfn., intended for oneself; Vin III 144,27 (kutiyo krpenti assmikyo -yo); 0, -panyika, mfn. [atta(n) + upanyika], concerning oneself, applied to oneself, referring to oneself; Vin III 90,33 (uttarimanussadhammam -am... samudcareyya); S V 353,21 (-am vo gahapatayo dhammapariyyam desissmi); Th/?. 1,4* (gth -); Vism 27,4 (- lapan lapana); -kma, mfn. and m., \.(mfn.) (sometimes confused with atthakma qv) wishing one's own (spiritual) benefit; SI 75,28* (tasm na himse param -o); A l l 21,23* (-ena... saddhammo garuktabbo, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce attha-) = IV 91,i* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee attha-) = Vv 5:12 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce attha-; Vv-a39,i9: -ena ti attano hitakmena); Cp 3:4:6 (Cp-a202,s: -oti attano atthakmo, ppabhir ti attho, atthakmo ti pi pli); 2. (m.) one's own desire, lust; the sanghdisesa offence of (praising the ministering to one's) lust; Vin III 133,21; Sp 551,16^0//. (--pricariyy ti methunadhammasankhtena kmena pricariy kmaparicariy attano atthya kmaparicariy pricariy, attan v kmit icchit ti -, sayam methunargavasena patthit ti attho ~ ca s pricariy ca attakmaparicariy); 754,19 (-am panno); Utt-vn359 (--t); -kra, m.n. [atta(n) + kra1], action by oneself; a personal service; D I 53,28 (n* atthi -e n' atthi parakre, sg. nom.) * A III 337,27 (-0); JaV 401,12* (atiY -ni karonti bhattusu; 401,29: yuddhabhmisu purisakre); -gatika, mfn., having oneself as refuge; SpklH 204,21; -garahi(n), mfn., blaming oneself, reproaching oneself; Vin III 23,10 (-ino mayam ... anannagarahino); Sn 778 (yad - i tad akubbamno; Nidd I 54,12: ~i ti dvihi kranehi attnam garahati katatt ca akatatt ca; Pj II 517,31: yarn attan garahati tarn akurumno); neg. anattagarahi(n), mfn., Sn 913; -(g)gaha, m. and mfn. [atta(n) + gha2; cf BHS tmagrha], 1. (m.) belief in an (enduring) self or soul; Nidd I 107,27 (attarn pahy ti-am pahya, Ce so; Ee -gaham; Be, Se gham; or rather to atta1 ?); Spk II 318,24 (-am pariydtum); Vism 477,11 (-ato mocetukmo bhagav); 2. (mfn.) believing in an (enduring) self or soul; Pet 131,4 (so imesu paficasu khandhesu - o v attaniyaggho v); -ghaftfta, n. or


~ , / , self-destruction; Dhp 164 (phalni katthakasseva ~ya phallati); -catuttha, mfn., with oneself as the fourth; with three others; M I 393,21 (adhivsetu me bhante bhagav svtanya ~o bhattan ti) * A III 36,29; Vism307,7 (puggale piyamajjhattaverihi saddhim ~ e . . . nisinne); -ja, mfn. andm.f [atta(n) + ja 2 ], born from oneself proceeding from oneself; one's offspring; Dhp 161 (~am attasambhavam); Niddl 247,31 (cattro putt ~o putto khettajo ... dinnako ... antevsiko putto); Mil 98,19 (~ena vymena); 166,27 (assatari ~ena hannati); Mhv 54:69 (mahesim ~am katv pletum vamsam attano); see also atraja; -ftflu, mfn., knowing oneself; D III 252,14; Nett 29,14 (mattannut taya padatthnam); -tthapafifia, mfn., wise only for oneself; concerned with oneself only (so sometimes cts); Sn 75 (~ asuci manuss, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se attatthapann; Pj II 130,26: attani thita etesam pann, attnam yeva olokenti na anfian ti~) = Ap 13,3 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se attatthapann; Ap-a202,30foil.: ~ ti attani thita etesam pann attnam eva oloketi na annan ti attho, attatthapann ti pi ptho tassa attano attham eva oloketi na paratthan ti attho); Ja III 495,14* (~, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se attatthapann; 496,iv foil.: attano atthya pann pararn anoloketv attani yeva v thit etesam pann); see also attatthapann above; -n-tapa, mfn., self-mortifying; hurting oneself; D III 232,25 = A l l 205,26; neg. anattantapa, mfn., D i l i 232,30 = AII 206,2; -dipa, mfn. [atta(n) + dipa2; BHS (MPS 14:26) tmadvipa], with oneself as an island, a refuge; relying on oneself; D i l 100,20 (~ viharatha attasaran anaMasaran; Sv548,3o: ~ ti mahsamuddagatam dipam viya attnam patittham katv viharatha) * S III 42,8; Sn 501 (ye ~ vicaranti loke akiiican sabbadhi vippamutt); Ap 543,19 (~ tato hotha satipatthnagocar); -dutiya, mfn., with oneself as the second; with a companion; D i l 147,2i; Mill 271,4; S V 6 1 9 , B (ayam punnacando pubbe eko uggacchati ajj' eva pana ~o uggato); -dvdasama, mfn., with oneself as the twelfth, with eleven companions; Sv 535,34; Ps II 399,25; -niyytana, n., giving oneself; dedicating oneself; Vism 116,15 (ayam nisamso ~e); Sp 173,23 (saranagamanam vadanto ~am pakseti ti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se attasanniyytanam); Sv 234, is (~' -dihi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se attasanniyytandihi); -paccakkha, mfn. and n., 1. (mfn.) seen by oneself, with one's own eyes; -ena, ~ato, adv., personally, directly; JaV 119,8' (~ena tassa corabhvam natv); V 124,27' (~ato va jnitv); VI 355,4' (~am katv addasa); Niddl 400,15 (sayam abhinntam -am dhammam addasi); Dhp-a III 404,4 (vin amissa vdihi ~ato natv va); Nidd-al 341,26 (~-tya); 2. (n.) seeing with one's own eyes; Spklll 178,3 (amatassa sacchikiriyya, ~y ti vuttam hoti); -paccakkhiknam in Ee at Ja V 119,8' is wrfor atthapaccatthiknam (Ce so), orfor attapaccatthiknam (Be, Se so); -paccatthika, m., a personal enemy; Sp 874,4 (~ ca ssanapaccatthik ca); attapaccatthika in Ce, Ee at Vinll 94,5 and V 191,29 is prob, wr for atthapaccatthika (Be, Se so); -pacchakkham in Ee at Nidd I 235,13 is wr for attapaccakkham; -patilbha, m., the acquisition of a self; type of personal

existence; D1195,21 foil (tayo ime ~, olriko ~o manomayo ~o arpo ~o); Dth 5:64; -pariccgi(n), mfn., sacrificing oneself; Jail 398,16* (sro ~I; 398,21': kye ca jivite ca nirapekkho hutv ... attnam pariccajanto); -ppasamsaka, mfn.,praising oneself, boasting; Jail 152,i3*(~oposo); -bhara, mfn., supporting (only) oneself; Ud30,i5* (~assa anannaposino) quoted Vism 67,19*; -bhva, m. [BHS tmabhva], bodily form, body; existence as an individual; living being; Abh 151 (sariram vapu gattam cttabhvo); Vin II 238,17 (santi mahsamudde yojanasatik pi ~); Mil 32,8 (yvatakam pi me imin -ena paccanubhtam); A III 411,23 (yam... kmayamno tajjam taijam ~am abhinibbatteti); JaIV 461,25 (ngarj... tarn -am vijahitv mnavakavannena alankatasariro hutv); Ap215,ii (tena kammena... mayham ~o sunimmito); Mil 171,13 (imasmim ~e); Vism 310,27 (~o vuccati sariram khandhapaiicakam eva v); Mhv 32:21 (dutiye ~e); attabhvo in Ee at Vibh 70,29: read attabhvapariypanno with Be, Ce, Se; patilbha, m., the becoming reborn as an individual; reincarnation; type of body or existence; Vin III 105,20 (evarpo pi nma yakkho bhavissati evarpo pi nma ~-patilbho bhavissati ti); D i l i 231,16 (cattro patilbha); SHI 144,12; -bhvi(n), mfn., having a body; A l l 17,14 (etadaggam... ~Inam yadidam Rhu asurindo); -mraniya, mfn., causing death to oneself; AIV 98,i* (bhnahaccni kammni ~ni ca); -rpa2, mfn. or n.., fitting for oneself; just oneself; ~ena, ~ehi, by oneself, for one's own sake; S IV 97,24 (tatra me -na appamdo sati cetaso rakkho karanlyo; Spkll 390,23: tatra may attano hitakmajtikena) ^ IV 98,2 (vo ~ehi... karamyo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ~ena) ^ A II 120,7 (catusu ... thnesu~ena appamdo ... karaniyo; Mp III 122,n: -na ti attano anurpena anucchavikena hitakmen ti attho); -lbha, m., coming into existence; Abh 1168; -vda, m., the theory of an (enduring) self or soul; Patis-a440,29 (attano vadanam kathanam ~o); ~ -updna, n., grasping the theory of an (enduring) self or soul; Dili 230,22; MI 66,2; Dhs 1217; Vibh 136,32; -vetanabhata, mfn., supported by one's own earnings; Sn24; -vybdha, m., one's own distress; M I 369,30* S IV 339,20* A l l 179,7; -sanniyyatana, n., giving oneself, dedicating oneself; Sp 173,23 (saranagamanam vadanto ~am pakseti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee attaniyytanam); Sv 234, is (-' -dihi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee attaniyytandlhi) = Ps I 135, is (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee attaniyytandlhi); It-all 45,31 (~am nma... buddhdinam attapariccajanam, Be, Se so; Ce attasanniytanam; Ee wr artasanniytanam); -hetu, ind., for one's own sake; A I 128,9 (~u v parahetu v, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr attha-); Dhp 84 (na -una parassa hetu); Sn 122; JaV 146,15* (na ~u alikam bhanti); anatta(n), m., not the self, not a soul; Vin I 13,19/0//. (rpam bhikkhave ~); SHI 45,1 (yarn aniccam tarn dukkham yam dukkham tad ~); IV49,14 (yo kho ... - tatra te chando pahtabbo); A III 442,14 (sabbadhammarn -ato samanupassanto); Dhp 279 (sabbe dhamm ~ ti); Sn 756 (~ani attamnam passa lokam sadevakam); Patis II


232.12 (pathavikyam... ~ato anupassati no attato); Ap 577,23 (khandhe aniccato disv dukkhato ca -ato); -nupassan, / and -nupassan, n., the looking upon as not the self, as not a soul; Patis I 10,n (-nupassan abhinneyy); Vism 629, I (-nupassanam bhvento); Pj I 87,19 (-nupassanena samm pariyantadassvi); -nupassi(n), mfn., looking upon as not the self; not considering there is a self; SHI 41,n (rpe -nupassi vihareyya); A IV 14,15 (sabbesu dhammesu -anupassl viharati); see also tuma(n), ulrattat, tuma. attaniya, attaniya (and attaneyya?), mfn. and n. [S. tmanya; BHS tmaniya], belonging to one 's self one's own; belonging to an (enduring) self or soul; what belongs to one's self; what belongs to an (enduring) self or soul; Abh 736 (nijo sako -0); M I 138,3 (attani v... sati -am me ti ass ti); SHI 127,28 (pancasu updnakkhandhesu kifici attnam v -am v samanupassasi ti); IV 54,5 (yasm ... Surinam attena v -ena v tasm sunno loko ti vuccati; Spk II 371,6: ~en ti attano santakena parikkhrena); Vism 183,32 (sabhvabhvo anannasdhrano ~o); 655,13 (rpam na satto na jivo na naro ... na att na -am nham na mama...); Cp-a 96,n (sabbassa -assa maman ti pariggahitavatthuno anavasesapariccgo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee attaniyassa); attaniyam in Ee at S V 6,15* (-am bhtam) is wr; read attani sambhtam with Be, Ce, Se; anattaniya, anattaneyya, mfn., not belonging to a self; not concerned with oneself; S III 78,2i (yam kho bhikkhave -am tatra te chando pahtabbo); Th 1073 (kammam bahukam na kraye parivajjeyya anattaneyyam etam, Be, Ce so; Ee anatthaneyyam; Se anattham etam; Th-all 140,32/o//.: etam navakammdhitthndikam attano atthvaham na hoti ti attho); Nett 18,1. attanopada, n. [gen. of atta(n) + pada; S. tmanepada], (gr.t.t.) the middle voice; a termination of the middle voice; Sadd 16,11 (attano atthabhtni padni -ni); 811,22 (parni -ni te ante se vhe e mhe); 825,21 (bhvakammesv -am: vuccate). attanobhsa, mfn. [from gen. of atta(n) + bhs; S. tmanebhsa], (gr.t.t.) taking the terminations of the middle voice; Sadd 326,7 (et idhtu-dik sekapariyant dhtuyo -ti saddasatthavid vadanti); 334,15 (-ttam). attamajjh, (m)f(n). [from atta(n) + majjha?], (according to et) slim-waisted; JaV 170,28* (bhariy... sabb' ~, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee atihamajjh, prob, wr; 170,31" sabb ~ pnin gahitappamnamajjh ti attho, atthakathyam pana sumajjh ti ptho). attamana, mfn. [atta(n) + mana(s) or *atta <pta + mana(s); ? cfBHS ttamanas, ptamanas; and c/manpa], delighted, pleased; content; willing; Abh 87 ( -t piti); Vin I 219,6 (na nesam ~o ass ti); D II 352,11 (-0 abhiraddho; Sv813,3: - o ti sakamano tutthacitto); M I 114.13 (labheth' eva -tam); A I 276,22 (alam -tya); III 337,13* (datv -o hoti); Dhp 328 (careyya ten' ~o satim); Sn 995 (~o udaggo); Vv 1:4 (s devat -); Ja II 180,3* (sabbo loko ~o ahosi); VI 322,9* (ubho pi te ~e viditv); Dhs 9 (piti pmujjam modan ... -t cittassa); Mil 116,23 (ycak yathkmam labhitv ~ bhaveyyun ti); Sp993,n (-ttam); Ps I 151,34 (~o ti sakamano tuttha-

mano, pitisomanassehi v gahitamano); 1167,26 (supabbajito 'smi ti ~ena bhavitabbam); III 66,20/0//. (ngar pakatiy pi~ ... -tarahesum, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee wr appamanatar); anattamana, mfn., dissatisfied, displeased, disgruntled; troubled, worried; Vin I 247,2i; III 163,6 (kupitehi ~ehi cvandhippyehi ti); D I 3,5 (tumhe assatha kupit v ~ v); III 60,17 (~o ahosi tarn ca pativedesi); SI 86,11 (bhagav rjnam Pasenadikosalam ~am viditv, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee tarn, prob, wr); Dhs 1060 (doso dussan... asuropo ~-t cittassa); Sp 993,16 (ttam). attarpal, see sv atta4. attarpa2, see sv atta(n). attna, mfn., see sv tna. attha1, ind. [S. atra], here; Abh 1161 (ihedhtra tu etthttha); Sadd 676,18 (sabbassa etasaddassa attam hoti v tothesu paccayesu: ato ~a etto ettha); see also atra, ettha. attha2, m., rarely n. [Martha], Abh785 (~o payojane saddbhidheyye vuddhiyam dhane vatthumhi krane); 1. aim, purpose, goal; advantage, profit, benefit; Mil 144,5foil, (kin nu kho aham samanam Gotamam puccheyyam aUtthadhammikam v ~am samparyikam v ti); SI 126,14* (~assa pattim hadayassa santim; Spk I 187,5/0//.: dvihi pi padehi arahattam eva katheti); A III 46,20* (yadattham bhogam iccheyya... so me ~o anuppatto); Sn 58 (annya ~ni); 460 (~ena atthiko); Th 443 (ubhinnam -am carati attano ca parassa ca); 587 (vijneyya sakam -am); Ja III 141,3* (-am bhanjati attano); 262,17* (na hpeti -am); attharn anubhoti, serves the interest, the purpose (of, gen.); benefits; Vin III 222,7 (na tarn tassa bhikkhuno kinci -am anubhoti); Mill 243,22 (yass yass ca pilandhanavikatiykankhati... tarn c' assa -am anubhoti); A I 61,7 (samatho ca... bhvito kam -am anubhoti, cittam bhviyati); ace. attham, (only ifc) for the sake of; for the purpose of; see kirn- (svka3) and passim; dat. atthya1, for the benefit of; for the sake of (gen.); Vin I 9,17 (yassa -ya kulaputt samma-d-eva agrasm anagriyam pabbajanti); Th 1256 (bahnam vata -ya uppajjanti tathagata); dat. (or abl.) atth, for the benefit, for the sake of (gen.); Ja III 518,6* (pitu - Candavati vcapeyyam ayjayi); ifc see atit'(.yvacceti), atita-m- (^vacceti), att'- (^vatta[n]), angat'(sv gacchati), alam-, uttam,-, kim- (.yvka3); 2. use, need, want (+ instr.); Vin HI 132,8 (vadeyytha bhante yena -o); A V 159,19 (-0 me samma dhanena dehi me dhananti); Sn21 (-obhisiy na vijjati); Vv 50:10 (kv -0 jivitena me); Ja VI 371,7 (khirena v -e sati visnam duhitum na vattatiti); Mil 78,9 (-0 ca cariyehi); 3. (i) affair, concern, business; problem; thing, matter; (with verbs of saying, asking, etc often simply) this, that; Vin I 358,34* (sanghassa kiccesu ca mantansu ca -esu jtesu vinicchayesu ca); D II 89,24 (bhagav etam -am viditv); 209,4 (yen* -na dev... sabhyam sannisinn honti); III 158,21* (sukhumni -ni avecca dakkhati); SI 230,30 (Sakko ... devnam indo sahassam pi -nam muhuttena cinteti); Dhp 331 (-arnhi jtamhi sukh sahy); Th 338 (etam -am abhsayi); Ja III 540,21*


(kirn kiccam -am idha-m-atthi tuyham; 540,25'; kirn karaniyam atthasamhitam); V81,i4* (na guyham -am vivareyya); 368,9* (thinam -esu); VI352,io* (paviveke sammasitvna dhir atha vakkhanti janinda -am etam); (ii) practical affairs, policy (cf S. arthaSstra,); D II 231,13 (pit-e anussi); Ja V 63,3* (jann -am dhammam ca); (iii) a legal case; D II 20,20 (rj atthakarane nisinno ... -e anussati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atte); Ja III 334,18* (dhammattho 'harn pure sim bahu -am me tiritam); Mil 48,8 (te vivadamn tava santike gaccheyyum, kassa tvam mahrja -am dhreyyasi); Dhp-a III380, H (-am vinicchinanto dhammatth); see also atta2; 4. (usually only iic) wealth, prosperity; Sadd71,i3* (dhanam sam vibhavo ... -o icc ete dhanavcak); 5. meaning, sense; very often in cts at end of explained (esp. paraphrased) passages as ti attho: this is the meaning; VinI 287,22 (may sankhittena bhsitassa vitthrena -am jnissati); D III 86,26 (na tv ev' assa -am jnanti); MII 159,3 (imassa kv -o ti); S IV 93,13 (sankhittena uddesam uddisitv vitthrena -am avibhajitv); Th374 (-am ca yo jnti bhsitassa); Sadd 3\5,i foil, (yesam dhtnam gati -o buddhi pi tesam -o); ifc see ek'-, karan'- (sv karana1); loc. atthe, (only ifc) in the sense of; ifc see akkhar'(svakkhara1), aV- (svacceti2), adhikaf- (sv adhikaroti); in association with dhamma, attha expresses the goal as opposed to the doctrine; practical affairs as opposed to spiritual matters; the pratical application and result as opposed to the theory; the interpretation as opposed to the text; A I 69,23 (-am ca dhammam ca patibhanti; Mp II143, H: atthakatham ca plim ca patibhanti); V 223,n foil.; (adhammo ca... veditabbo dhammo ca anattho ca veditabbo -o ca); Dhp 363 (-am dhammam ca dipeti; Dhp-a IV 93,9foil.: bhsitattham c' eva desandhammam ca katheti); Ja II 351,6' (plim ca -am ca dipeti); Ap 479,n (-e dhamme ca nerutte patibhne ca kovidam); 0, -akkhayi(n), mfn., declaring the goal or what is beneficial; Dili 187,3 (-1 mitto suhado veditabbo); Ap 589,12 (-1 ca y nari); Pj II 73,13 (anagriy visesena -ino eva); '-accaya, m., the passing away of wealth or prosperity; Ja III 158,25* (~e m ahu sampamlho); ' -ajjhoghana, n., entering into the meaning; Pjl 157,19 (suttassa -am dassetum); '-attha, m., what accomplishes the aim; what is good or useful; Ja VI 290,i* (-am evnuvicintayanto; 290,4': -am ev ti atthabhtam eva attham); ya, to accomplish the aim; for the purpose of benefit; Mil 264,4; Mp IV 127, is; lnusitthi,/, administration of practical affairs or policy; D i l i 158,24* (-isu pariggahesu ca); '-antara, mfn. and n., \.{mfn.) taking the goal or meaning to heart; intent on the goal or meaning; Dill 158,17* (-o atthakatham nismayi; Sv933,n: -o ti yath eke randhagavesino ... dosam abbhantaram katv nismayanti evam anismetv attham abbhantaram katv ... nismayi); Th 374 (attham ca natvna tath karoti -o nma sa hoti pandito); 2. (n.) difference of meaning; a different circumstance or meaning; Mill58,3o; Vv-a 17,24; apagama, m., loss of

wealth; Abh 764; vagamaka, mfn., expressing the meaning or goal; Nidd-al 5,30 (buddhnam bhagavantnam dhammam desentnam yo -0 savinnattikasaddo); ' -patti, / [cf S. arthpatti], inference; evidence; Sadd 920,18 (yad akittitam atthato pajjatis -i); *-uddhra, m., an extraction of the meaning; a synopsis or abstract of the meaning or matter; a synopsis of the meanings of a word; a clarification of the meanings of a word, or of homonymous words by means of extracted passages; Dip 5:37; Vism496,3i (katham -ato; Vism-mht[&?] II 194,24: saccasaddassa sambhavantnam atthnam uddharanam sambhavante v atthe vatv adhippetassa atthassa uddharanam niddhranam -0); Sp 243,25 (itare pana bhikkhako ti dayovasena vutt); 1377,7 (na atthakathkusalo, - cheko na hoti); Sv 922,37 (et pana gtha... ther ekapadiko -o ti hamsu; Sv-pt [Be] III 106,4: -0 ti tadatthassa sukhaggahanattham gthbandhavasena uddharanato bhto, ta-y-idam pliyam gatapadni gahetv gthbandhavasena tadatthavicranabhvadassanam); Ud-a 12,4 (sutasaddassa ~e); As 6,37 (tepitakassa buddhavacanassa bhtarn ... atthakathkandam nma); Sadd 31,6 foil.; 562, u (samnasaddavacaniynam atthnam uddharanam -o); '-uddhrana, n., id.; Ps I 244,6 (--nayena, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atthuddhra-; = Sv759,i, eds atthuddhra-); Sadd 31,6 (samnasutikapadnam -am karissma); 0, -paparikkhi(n), m/h., investigating the meaning, inquiring into the significance; A II 97,16 (dhatnam ca dhammnam -1 hoti) ^ IV 221,10; ' -pasamhita, 6pasamhita, mfn., connected with the goal, or with what is beneficial; D i l i 154,11 (-am dhammpasamhitam vacam bhsit ahosi); Th 968 (gth... atthopasamhit; Th-alll 88,12/0//.: atthasannissit hit hitayuttti attho); Cp-a311,34 (-su); 0, -peta, mfn., 1. expert in the meaning; DIU 129,28 (evam -am vyanjanpetam; Sv 912,9: --an tiatthena upetam atthassa vinntram); 2. meaningful; connected with the goal or the meaning; Vin I 358,19 (sahghasmaggi - ca vyanjanupet ca); Pj II 500,13 (bahum bhsati... -am dhammpetam ca); -kathana, n., (gr.t.t.) a gloss; Sadd 753,6; Ps II 258,5 (plim vatv ekekapadassa -am) = M p V 8 7 , i o ; ~ -kith*, f, profitable talk, talk of the goal; D i l i 158,17* (atthantaro -am nismayi; Sv933,i9: atthayuttam katham); neg. anatthakath,/, Sp 1363,27; c/atthakath; -karana, n. [attha + karana1 ] 1. (the place for) dealing with lawsuits; seat of judgement, courtroom; DII20,19 (rja -e nisinno, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atta-); MII 122,2 (-e nisinnassa, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se atta-); SI 74,16 (-e nisinno kho rj, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be atta-); 2. bringing benefit; service; Ja VI 288,6' (yam cJ etam smikassa -am nma); -karanika, mfn., serving; Mil 264,1 (eko puriso -0); -kavi, m. [attha + kavi2], a didactic poet; AII 230,12 (cintkavi sutakavi ~i patibhnakavi; MpIII 211,11: yo ekam attham nissya [kavyam] karoti ayam -i nma); -kma, mfn., 1. wishing the benefit, profit (of, gen.); wishing (one) well; D III 164,7 (bahuno janassa -o ahosi hitakmo); SI 197,8 (devat tassa bhikkhuno anukampik -); A III


143,24 (~assa gilnupatthkassa); Ja I 241,7* (~assa hitnukampino); Vibh 247, is; Ps II 96,20 (tassa ~-tya); neg. anatthakma,m/w., MI 117,25; JaII 205,n*; IV 14,7' (anatthakmatya); Vibh 247,7; 2. desiring the goal; Th 1066 (alam me -assa pahitattassa bhikkhuno); see also attakma; -kmi(n), mfn., wishing one well; Sn 986 (devat ~ini); Cp 3:6:6; -cara, mfn., who is helpful, who does good, brings benefit; who serves; Vin 1359,35* (mahjanass, ~o 'dha pandito); SI 23,14* (~am narnam); JaIV 196,24 (~am amaccam rabbha, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atthacarakam); neg. anatthacara, mfn., JaV 433,7 (cha imni... ~ni bhavanti); Mil 126, is (anatthacaro tvam manne); -caraka, mj(-ik)n., id.; D I 107,2o(evarpena... ~ena); Ja IV 153,4 (ntaknam ~o satth ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atthacaro); 197,8 (ekam ~am amaccam); VI 385,15 (atthacarikya itthiy); -cariy,/, conduct bringing benefit, helpful conduct; esp. benevolent behaviour, helpful advice (one of the four sangahavatthuy qv); Dili 152,18 (~ya; Sv928,4: atthasamvaddhanakathya); 153,15* (dnam pica ~-tam ca ... kariya); 192,20* (dnam ca peyyavajjam ca -a ca); AIV 364,15 (etad aggam ... ~nam yad idam assaddham saddhsampadya samdapeti); Ja I 251,1* (na ve anatthakusalena ~ sukhvah); IV 293,29* (putto pitu carati ~am); neg. anatthacariy,/, Mil 161,21; -crik,(m)/()., helpful; serving; Ja IV 37,20 (attano ~am dhtim); -cintaka, m(fn)., one who thinks out, considers, the goal, or what is beneficial; JaV 374,5* (pandit... nipun ~); Vibh426,n*; -jta, mfn. andn., l.(mfn.) having some need or task; SI 37,5* (kim mittam ~assa); 226,3* (sabbe satt ~); 2. (n.) purpose; matter; Ja VI 464,10* (kena v pana hetun kena v ~ena; 464, w : ~en ti atthena jtena, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se omit jtena); Patis-a649,7 (glhni ca paticchannni ca ~ni ti pthaseso); -jpika, mfn. [from caus. of jayati], mastering the goal or the task; Vibh 324,25 (~ pann; but cf Vibh-a 409,15: vipkasankhtam attham jpeti janeti pavatteti ti ~); -fift, mfn., knowing the means; knowing the goal; knowing the meaning; D III 252,14 (bhikkhu dhammann ca hoti ~ ca attann ca mattann ca ...); AIV 113,21 (~ ca katham hoti); Th 1028 (pubbparann ~ niruttipadakovido); neg. anatthann, mfn., Th-alll 141,8 (anatthannutya); -dassa, mfn., seeing the goal, or what is beneficial; Ja VI 260,4* (ye pandit ~ bhavanti); -dassi(n), mfn., seeing the goal or what is beneficial; Sn 385 (sevetha nam ~i mutim, Ce, Ee, Se so; ite atthadaso; Pj II 373,25: atthadasoti hitnupassi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atthadasso ti; cf A.K. Warder, 1967, 201); Th4 (panditehi -ibhi); Ja III 323,25* (yo ve hitnam vacanam na karoti ~inam; 324, r: -inan ti angatam atiam passantnam); VI470,21* (janetti... pandit ~ini); Ap99,n (~issa munino; Ap-a373,3i: attham payojanam vuddhim virlhim nibbnam dakkhati... atha v attham nibbnam dassanasilo jnanasflo ti~I); 153,7 (~imhi sugate nibbute); neg. anatthadassi(n), mfn., Sn 57 (sahyam parivajjayetha anatthadassim; cf Pj II 109,16: paresam pi anattham dasseti ti

anatthadassi); -dassima(t), mfn., id.; Ja VI 286,26* (mutim -dassim; 287, ir: sanhasukhumatthadassin iinena -dassim, so read with Be, Ce, Se); Sadd 148,9/o//.; -patisambhid,/, ~a, n., analysis of the meaning; A l l 160,22 (~); Patis I 88,2 (~e nanam); Vibh 331,30 (~); -pada, n., I.profitable saying; word of good sense; AII189,14 (na c* eva gambhlram ~am udharati); Dhp 100 (ekam ~am seyyo); JaV 146,19* (~am na rincati); 2. word and meaning; ? anatthapadakovida, mfn., not skilled in meanings and words; ? or not skilled in words of good sense; ? Ja V 103,27*; see also kovidatthapada; -pucchana, ., questioning about the aim; Th 36 (~am padakkhinakammam) quoted Niddl 494,27*; -purekkhara, mfn., aiming at the meaning, or at benefit; Vin III 130,13 (anpatti ~assa dhammapurekkhrassa; Sp 549,15: ~ass ti... padnam attham kathentassa atthakatham va sajjhyam karontassa); Vv 34:14 (so me ~o anukampya; Vv-a 152, is: ~o hitesi); Dhp-alV 181,5 (~-tya); -prana, n., (gr.t.t.) a word or particle added to clarify the meaning; ? Sadd 890,8 (~an ti padantarena paksitass' ev* atthassa jotanavasena adhikabhvakaranam); 893, \ofolL; -baddha, mfn., bound to (one) for the meaning; Sn 382 (sabbe tayi ~ bhavanti); -bodhaka, mfn., denoting, indicating, the meaning; Sadd 37,22* (visayattam anpann sadd n' ev' ~); -bhafijaka, mfn., destroying the welfare (of); hurting; Sv 290,16 (-am musvdam kareyya); Nidd-a I 325,10 (mus ti visamvdanapurekkhrassa ~o vacipayogo kyapayogo v); -majjh in Ee at JaV 170,28* is prob, wrfor attamajjh qv; -lbha, m, acquisition of wealth, of gain; Ja III 466,14* (ahso -esu; 466,19: mahante issariye uppanne); -vannan,/, a commentary, explanation; Ja I 1,21*; V 418,4 (tatryam ~); Vism 157,i2(ayam~ yathna virujjhati); Vv-a 45,17 (~su); As2,10*; -va(t), mfn., I.profitable, significant; SI 30,27* (gth c* im -vati abhsi); Ja V 374,6* (bhsem* -vatim vcam); Mil 172,9 (tathgatassa vc -vati hoti); 2. possessing the goal; or possessing worldly knowledge; Th740 (so -v so dhammattho; Th-alll 24,is: imasmim loke -v buddhim); see also anatthava(t); -vatthuka in Ee at Dhp-a III 351,1 is wrfor attha- (Be, Ce, Se so); -vasa, m., reason, motive; Vin III 21,17 (dasa ~e paticca); D i l 285,20 (kim... -am sampassamno); Dhp 289 (etam-amnatv)^ Sn297; -vasi(n), mfn., pursuing an aim; Th539 (eko ~i khippam pavisissmi knanam; Th-a II 229,2 foil.: idha attho ti samanadhammo adhippeto); Mil 352,15 (akuho ~i alolo); -vasika, mfn., pursuing an aim; pursuing the goal; VinV 163,20 (~ena bhavitabbam no parisakappiyena); It89,13; Mil 406,25; -vakya, n., (gr.t.t.) a gloss; Sadd 675,27 (~-vasena); -vadi(n), mfn., speaking about the goal, or what is beneficial; D I 4,30 (bhtavdi -I dhammavdi vinayavdi); A I 204,4 (bhtavdi ti pi M ti pi dhammavdi ti pi vinayavdi ti pi); neg. anatthavdi(n),m/h., MI 287,2; A l l 22,2i (Mp III 27,n: anattham vadati no atthan ti anatthavdi);


-vicintik,(m)/(.), discerning what is good or useful; Ja III 438,10* (itthi pi pandit hoti lahum -, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se attham vicintik); see also alamatthavicintaka; -veda, m, knowledge or joy in the goal, or the practice; Mil 206,3 (labhati -am labhati dhammavedam); A III 285,12 ( c / M p III 337,11: -an ti atthakatham nissya uppannapitipmojjam, dhammavedan ti plim nissya uppannapitipmojjam) -vypattiavyatha, m, lack of anguish at the loss of wealth; Ja III 466,14*; -samvannana, n., ~ a , / , a commentary; an explanation of the meaning; Vism 522,26 (paticcasamuppdassa ~); Sp 993,2 (paripucchy ti ~e, Ee, Seso; Be, Ce atthasavane); Spklll 308,3* (samyuttavaranikyassa -am ktum); Pv-al,24*; Pj I 1,15*; -samvannanaka, mfn., explaining the meaning; It-al 82,i5 (desabhskusalo tinnam vedanam -0 cariyo); -samhita, mfn., connected with the goal; useful, profitable; having meaning; D I 189,12 (etam... -am etam dhammasamhitam etam dibrahmacariyakam); S II 223,10; A III 196,15 (-ena vakkhmi no anatthasamhitena); Sn722 (yam samano bahu bhsati upetam -am); neg. anatthasamhita1, mfn., not connected with the goal, not profitable; Vin I 10,13 (anariyo anatthasamhito) = SV 421,5 (Spklll 297,13: ~o ti na atthasamhito hitasukhvahakranam anissito ti); -sattha, n. [attha + sattha3], political science; Abh 113 (dandanity -asmim); -sandassana, n., the showing of the goal or meaning; PatisI 104,26; -sandassani,(m)/00., showing the meaning; JaV 255,25* (es te upam rja ~i kat); -samasana, n., (gr.t.t.) compound of juxtaposition, where the first member is inflected; Sadd 741,3 (-am aluttasamse: drenidnam gavampati); -sallpik,(m)/(). [cfS. samlpaka], in the form of a dialogue; Ps II 13,8 (tatthyam ~ upam); -siddhi,/, attainment of one's goal; establishing of the meaning; Ja I 402,6 (nmena kci -i nma n' atthi); Mil 126,31 (-i upagat); Vism 479,24; Sp 821,22 (bhuttvivacanena visum kafici -im na passma); anattha, m., not the goal; disadvantage, harm; what is unprofitable, useless; Vin I 84,n (bhikkhnam -ya parisakkati); 1189,16 (bahuno janassa -ya ahitya dukkhya); DIU 184,19* (--t; Sv948,3: anatthakrit); Sil 196,10 (akusal dhamm uppajjamn -ya samvatteyyun ti); AIV 96,15* (atho attham gahetvna -am adhipajjati); Dhp 72 (yva-d-eva -ya nattam blassa jyati); Sn 126 (yo attham pucchito santo -am anussati); Th214 (mnatthe mam niyojayi); Ja III 262,27* (attham carantam atha v ~am); Vibh 389,25 (~am me acari ti ghto jyati); - ' -atthbhisangi(n), mfn., clinging to what is not useful; Saddh566; karana, ., bringing harm; Pv-a 264,27 (paresam karanamukhena); ~-janana, m/w., producing harm; AIV 96,20*; It 84,9* (--janano doso); It-all 98,27 (~-jananat); ~-va(t), w/h., of no use, worthless; harmful; JaV 77,19* (78,23 :~-vcaro); vasa, m., the control of what is harmful; Ja VI 473,14* (~-vasam gatam; 473,\rfoil.: kraknam kilesnam vasam gatam mam viditv); ~-samhita2, mfn., connected with harm, harmful;

Vin IV 305,22 (tiracchnavijj nma yam kinci bhirakam samhitam; Sp937,i: samhitan ti... parpaghtakaram); nirattha, mfn., unprofitable, useless; Dhp 41 (~am va kalingaram); Sn 585 (~ paridevan); Ja VI 228,17* (-am mann, idam silam); am, adv., uselessly; Sn 582 (ubho ante asampassam ~am paridevasi); Ap 559,22 (kirn ~am vihannasi); sttha, mfn., having a purpose; useful; having a meaning, significant; with its meaning or purpose; Vin III 1,19 (so dhammam deseti dikalynam majjhekalynam pariyosnakalynam ~am savyanjanam kevalaparipunnam parisuddham brahmacariyam pakseti; Sp 127,10/0//.: imam dhammam desento ssanabrahmacariyam maggabrahmacariyam ca pakseti... tarn ca yathnurpam atthasampattiy ~am) ^ D I 62,31 (Sv 176,20foil.: yassa hi ygubhatta-itthipurisdivannannissit desana hoti na so ~am deseti, bhagav pana ... catusatipatthndinissitam desanam deseti tasm ~am deseti ti vuccati); Vin IV 51,25 (ye te dhamm dikalyn ... ~am savyanjanam ... brahmacariyam abhivadanti) ^ MI 213,3 (~ savyanjan); Vism 572,30 (stthakam ev' idam punavacanan ti evam ettha -ato pi vinntabbo vinicchayo); Ps I 253,33 (cetiyadassanam tva ~am); Spkl 334,23 (ayam hi atthasaddo ~am savyanjanan ti evam disu hi pthatthe vattati); see also atdia1, atthiya, anatthaka, apattha1, kimatthika (5vka3), niratthaka, sabbatthaka, stthaka. attha3, m.n. [S. asta, n.], 1. (m.) the western mountain (behind which the sun sets); Abh 606 (aparaselo 'ttho); 785 (~o ... pacchimepabbate); 2 . (m. andn.) setting; destruction, ending, extinction; Abh 785; 1154 (~am adassane); Sadd 255,3 (atthasaddo nibbnavacano napumsakalingo); ~am eti, ~am paleti, ~am gacchati, (i)sets (of the sun or moon); A l l 51,3* (pabhankaro yattha ca ~am eti); Ja III 154,7* (~am tapetvna paleti suriyo); 433,4 (suriyam ~am entam na sallakkhesum); PsII 48,2i (suriye -am gacchante); Dhp-a IV 143,5 (suriyo ~am eti); (ii) goes out, disappears, is extinguished; A l l 18,9* (sanna yato ca samudeti -am gacchati yattha ca); Dhp 226 (-am gacchanti sav); 384 (sabbe samyog -am gacchanti); Ud93,n* (vinnnam -am agam); Sn 1074 (-am paleti na upeti sankham); Ap 472,13 (-am entamhi ssane); Mil 52,2 (tarn ... chinnam -am gacchati ti); ifc see abbhattham; cala, m, the western mountain (behind which the sun sets); Mhv72:113 (ranadassanabhito va lino ~e ravi); see also atthanga, attharigata, atthangama, atthangamana, atthami, atthamita, udayatthagmi(n) (^v udaya). attha4, n. [S. astra], a missile; ifc see issattha2. attha5, 2pi o/atthi2 qv. atthagata, mfn., see sv atthangata. atthagama, atthagamana, see sw atthangama, atthangamana. atthanga, mfn. or n. (?) [attha3 + ga2], disappearing; disappearance; ifc see ssan' -. atthangata, atthagata, mfn. [attha3 + pp of gacchati] 1. set (of the sun); Vin IV 17,3 (-e suriye); Ja I 175,10 (~e suriye); Ap92,n; Ps III 76,12 (tesam patijaggantnam yeva suriyo ~o, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atthangami);


2. disappeared, destroyed', SHI 112,21 (yam dukkham tarn niruddham tarn -am, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atthagatam); AIV 157,12* (vidhpit atthagat na santi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -) * Sn472 (eds atthagat; Pj II 409,2* foil.: atthagat ti - na santi ti vidhpitatt tt ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atthagatatt); Sn 1075 (~o so uda v so n' atthi); It 58,3* (-o so na samnam eti); Dhs 1038 (dhamm atit... ~ abbhatthangat); Kv 116,25 (nanu atftam niruddham... -am abbhatthangatan ti); Mil 73,I5 (y acci ~ sakk s acci dassetum idha v idha v ti); 73,19 (parinibbuto - o bhagav na sakk nidassetum idha v idh v ti); anatthagata, mfn., not (yet) set; Kkh98,s; Thi-a2,27 (suriye ~e yeva). atthangama, atthagama, m. [attha3 + gama] annihilation, disappearance; Vin III 4,16 (pubbe va somanassadomanassnam ~); D II 290,10 (dukkhadomanassnam -ya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atthagamya); MIII 285,12 (tass vedanya samudayam ca -am ca ... na ppajnti) * S IV 208,25 {Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atthagamam). atthangamana, atthagamana, n. [attha3 + gamana] 1. setting (of the sun or moon); Ja I 101,15 (yva suriyass' -, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atthagamana); Sv 95,B (ogamanan ti -am); 868,6 (imasmim dipe suriyuggamanaklo... Uttarakursu -klo); 2. destruction, ending; Abh 896; Mp III 355,19 (-atthya). atthahgameti, pr. 3 sg. [attha3 + caus. of gacchati], Lends, destroys; Niddl 346,17 (nirodheyya vpasameyya-eyya); Patis II 217,25 (niruddham nirodheti vigatam vigameti atthangatam -eti); Nidd-a I 428,10 (-ti vinseti); 2 . sets (of the sun and moon); Sv402,i2 (yasmim kale -enti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce attham enti); Ps IV 76.5 (suriyo -eti cando uggacchati); Patis-a 610,26 (pacchimadisya suriyo -eti); pp atthangamita, mfn., gone down, set (of the sun); JaV 476,2 (suriyo -0 cando uggato); Nidd I 355,14 (suriyo ca -o hoti); Sp 99,20 (-e pana suriye, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se atthamite). atthata, atthata, mfn.,pp o/attharati qv. atthaddha, mfn., see sv thaddha. atthan, / [S. arthan], request, begging; Abh 759 (ycantthan). atthannam in Ee at Pet238,n is wr for atthannam (Be, Ce so). atthami, m(fn). [attha3 + i2] setting (of the sun and moon); Bv5:31 (parinibbyi sambuddho ulurj va -i; Bv-a 160,7: ~i ti attharigato). atthami ta, mfn. [attha3+ /?/? of eti1] gone down, set; JaV 92,17 (atthamite suriye, Ee so; Be, Ce atthangate; Se atthangamite); VI557,10* (-arnhi suriye, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se atthafigatamhi). atthayitabba, mfn.,fpp o/attheti qv. atthara, n. [S. stara], covering, carpet, rug; ifc see ass'- (svassa3), katth'- (svkattha2), camm'-, citt'(svcitta2), phalak'-, rath'-, hatth'-(svhatthi[n]), hatthi-. attharaka, m. [atthara + ka2], a covering, carpet; Jail 290,u (hetth -am santharitv upari celavitnam bandhitv); VI 343,4' (ekam gadrabham... ekasmim ~e vattetv); Sp 1086,18 (hatthi-assapitthisu - eva); Spklll 45.6 (nnvannehi -ehi); ifc see ass'- (sv assa3), katth'(sv kattha2), cand' -, citt' - (sv citta2).

attharana, n. [S. starana], a covering, carpet; laying out; Abh 312; Vin I 196,4 (Avantidakkhinapathe bhante cammni -ni); DIU 159,10 (data ahosi sukhumnam muduknam -nam); Ja VI 381,27 (-am attharpetv, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee attharakam); Niddl 1,M (- ppuran); Ap 303,n; Mil 192,7 (vattham v -am v); ifc see katth'- (svkattha2), kathin'- (.svkathina2), gaj'-, camm'-, bhumm'-. attharanaka, n. [attharana + ka2], a covering; Sp666,24 (uttarattharanan ti mancakassa upari -am [Ce, Ee add paccattharanam] vuccati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se attharanam); ifc see camm'-. attharati, pr. 3 sg. [S. starati], spreads out, spreads; spreads over, covers; lays out; esp. kathinam attharati, covers the kathina, participates in the kathina robemaking and ritual; see svkathina2; Vin V 172,15 (imin dussena kathinam -issmi ti); 177,16 (puggalo kathinam -ati); Ja HI 185,19* (-assu palsni); IV 396,5 (bhtikassa me pallankam -ath ti); VI 353,28* (-anti); Kkh 53,29 (civaram deti imin kathinam -ath ti); Spk III 129,32 (nadividuggdisu setum -anti); attharanta,mfh., JaV 47,2 (purato -anto); Sp 1108,5 (kathinam -antena); absol. (a) attharitv; Vin IV 289,21 (tarn yeva -itv tarn yeva prupanti); JaV 110,8 (cahgotake kappsapicum -itv); Sp 1088,31 (elakacammam ca ajacammam ca -itv); Mhvl:28; neg. anattharitv, Sp 1249,7; (b) perhaps atriccha2 qv; aor. 3 sg. atthari, Ja I 305,25 (sayanam -i); pass, pr. 3 sg. atthariyati, Sp 722,4 (sace pana kattikamse kathinam -lyati); 1206,12 (civaram-iyamnam na ppahoti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce patthariyamnam); Sv 649,27 (sanam -iyati); Pj II 369,9 (-iyati); pp atthata, atthata, mfn. [S. strta], 1. (i) spread; spread over with; covered; Ap98,28 (sayanaggam ... dussabhandehi -am); Sp465,7 (yam [sanam] ... pvrakojavakdihi -am hoti); Vv-a 245,23 (suvannaphalakehi -); (ii) covered; (of the kathina,) properly covered; (of the kathina robemaking and ritual) properly carried out, properly performed; see sv kathina2; Vin 1254,25 foil, (evam kho bhikkhave -am hoti kathinam evam anatthatam ... na ullikhitamattena -am hoti kathinam...); V 172,2 (kassa kathinam anatthatam kassa kathinam -am); 176,36 (-am bhante sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathinatthro); kathinam atthatam also implies that the special concessions associated with the kathina ritual are in force; Vin III 204,4 (aklacivaram nma... -e kathine satta mse uppannam); IV 245,24 (Thullnand bhikkhuni amhkam kathinam -am, klacivaran ti adhitthahitv bhjpesi); 287,20 (tena kho pana samayena ubhatosanghassa kathinam -am hoti); Sp 1144,9 (kathinam -am v hotu anatthatam v); 2. spread over, laid out; JaV 407,28' (upari ~ena ajinena); Sp 845,12 (bhmiyam -esu sukhumesu tintinikdipannesu pi); kathina, mfn., who has participated in the kathina robe-making (and is therefore eligible for the five concessions), see sv kathina2; Vin I 254,8 foil. (--kathinnam vo bhikkhave panca kappissanti); 255,23 foil, (bhikkhu kathino katacivaram dya pakkamati); Kkh 53,19 (kathinassa hi bhikkhuno yva


imeh' krehi civarapalibodho na chijjati tva kathinnisamsam labhati); anatthata, anatthata, mjh.9 not spread, not covered; not properly performed', kathinam anatthatam alsa implies that the special concessions are not in force; VinI 254,26; 111204,3 (aklacivaram nma anatthate kathine ekdasa mase uppannam); V 172,10 (catuvisatiy krehi anatthatam hoti kathinam); Sp205,io (kenaci attharanena anatthataya); 1108,n; anatthatakathina, m(fh)., where the kathina concessions are not in force; Sp 1130,17 (sahghassa ... anatthatakathinassa); fpp attharitabba, m/w., VinI 254, i2 (evam ca pana bhikkhave kathinam ~am); V 176,24 (tena kathinatthrakena bhikkhun tadaheva dhovitv ... kappam katv kathinam -am); Kkh 53,27 (pacchimavasspagate ganaprake katv -am); Sp 1108,n; 1281,4 (vissajjetabban ti -am, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce pattharitabbam); attharitabbam in Ee at Sp 417,3 is prob, wr for atthayitabbam (Be, Ce, Se, Vism 98,io so); see also attharitabbaka; caus. aor. 3 sg. (a) attharpesi, Mhv3:20 (attharpesi tattha so... anagghattharanni); (b) attharpayi, Mhv 34:69 (Mahthpamhi kincikkhapsne attharpayi); absol attharpetv, Ja III 506,15 (nissenim attharpetv); Sp 1107,28 (kammavcam svetv kathinam attharpetv). attharik, / [from attharati], a covering; ifc see katth'-(yvkattha2). attharitabbaka, mfn. \fpp of attharati + ka2], to be spread; Sp 776,3 (mancapithnam upari -am paccattharanam). atthya1, sg. dat. o/attha 2 qv. atthya2, ind. [absol. of *a2 + titthati; S. sthya], standing by; taking care of? Ja IV 293,3* (atthya kuraro putte; but cf 293,4': putte rakkhanto tesam atthya ... vymam karonto). atthra, m. [S. stra], spreading, covering (the kathina,); performing the kathina robe-making and ritual; displaying the kathina robe; VinI 255,4 (na annatra puggalassa ~ atthatam hoti kathinam); V 172,26 (saha kathinassa ~ kati dhamm jyanti); 175,5 (kathinassa pubbakaranam di kiriy majjhe -0 pariyosnam); Sp 1371,i (~e hi sati uddhro nma hoti); ifc see kathin' - (sv kathina2). atthraka, m(fn). [atthra + ka2], (one) who covers (the kathina,); who supervises the communal robe-making and ritual; Vin V 172,8 (dvinnam puggalnam atthatam hoti kathinam -assa ca anumodakassa ca); Sp 1109,8 (~ena bhikkhun ... imya sanghtiy kathinam attharmi ti vc bhinditabb); ifc see kathin'- (^v kathina2); anatthraka,m., one who does not cover (the kathina,); VinV 172,5. atthi1, pr. 3 sg. [Vas4, S. asti] (initial a- usually coalesces with (or elides) a preceding -; after other vowels it is itself usually elided; 3 sg. atthi [before vowels usually atth']; 2 sg. asi1, si1; J sg. asmi, smi, amhi, mhi; 3 pi. santi1; 2 pi. attha5; 1 pi. asma1, asm1, amh, smase, amhase, amhse); Dhtup 373 (asa bhuvi); Dhtum600; Sadd450,io (asa bhuvi: atthi asa); 1. is; exists, is found; Vin III 18,is(utuni mhi ayye); Sil 27,6 (aham nu kho smi na nu kho smi); It 8,7* (n'attiY anno

ekadhammo pi); Sn302 (pahtadhanadhaiino si); 595 (tevijjnam yad akkhtam tatra kevalino smase padak' asm veyykaran jape cariyasdis); 672 (gantum na hi Gram ap' atthi); 1077 (santi loke munayo); 1120 (j" 'ham asmi); Ja I 158,20* (na kir' atthi rasehi ppiyo); 2. is of, belongs to (gen.); SI 4,19* (na monam atthi asamhitassa); Sn 783 (yass' ussad n' atthi kuhinci loke); Ja III 53,17* (idam brhmana me atthi); 3. as auxiliary verb with (i)pp: Vin I 21,16* (mahbandhanamutto mhi); D I 8,12 (micchpatipanno tvam asi); 18,i8 (mayam pana amh pacch upapann ti); II 275,n* (tassa dhammassa pattiy gat' amhse mrisa, Ee so; Be, Ce amhsi; Se amh pi); MI 429,6 (yva na tarn purisam jnmi yen' amhi viddho); Sn570 (danf amha tava ssane); Thi 185 (atthi Sakyakule jto buddho); 419 (jitmhase rpinim Lacchim); Ja II 128,8 (kena kammena idhgat' atth ti); 384,5* (jnma tarn na mayam asma mlh); IV 293,9 (kirn samma gato si ti); ()fpp'. Pv-a 27,17 (na c' ettha amhehi vattabbam atthi); 4. atthi is frequently used (usually at the beginning of a clause), with sg. or pi. subject (even with 1 sg. or 2sg.), to mean: there is, there are; there exists; D I 12,19 (atthi bhikkhave amY eva dhamm gambhir duddas...); 200,14foil, (atthi tvam etarahi na tvam n' atthi ti... atthham etarahi nham n* atthi ti); MI 430,13 (atth* eva jti atthi jar atthi maranam); Ud80,23 (atthi bhikkhave ajtam abhtam akatam asankhatam); Sn 26 (atthi vas atthi dhenup); Ja III 349,6* (imni me sattasatni atthi); V 204,26* (na pi 'ssa hatthesu khilni atthi); Ap2,22 (ye ca etarahi atthi buddha loke anuttar); Mil 85,15 (mahsamudde paiicayojanasatik pi macch atthi ti); or with a following verb [so also santiy to mean: there is [exists]... who...; it is the case that...; VinI 123,5 (dve 'me... ummattak, atthi bhikkhu ummattako sarati pi uposatham na pi sarati); D I 128, is (atthi kho bho samano Gotamo Sakyaputto Sakyakul pabbajito); II38,15 (santi satt... assavanat dhammassa parihyanti); SII 35,26 (sanf vuso Gotama eke samanabrhman... sayamkatam dukkham paniipenti); A III 194,22 (atthi nma nanda theram bhikkhum vihesiyamnam ajjhupekkhissatha); Ja I 157,26 (atthi pana samma uyynapla uyyne kinci acchariyam passasi ti); atthi... atthi..., (it is) either... or...; Dhs 586 (yam tarn rpam bhiram tarn atthi upd atthi nopd); Mil 135,29 foil, (opakkamik mahrja vedan atthi kiriy atthi kammavipk); imperat. (c/Sadd450,19) 3sg. atthu, D i l 22,20 (dhi-r-atthu kira bho jti nma); 231,21 (bhavam atthu bhavantam Jotiplam mnavam); Sn 340 (sati kyagat ty atthu); Ja III 26,19* (migarja namo ty atthu); VI 193,7* (bhaddam atthu te); let it be, be it so; Abh 1151 (usyopagame 'tthu ca); opt. (c/Sadd450,2i/o//.) (a)3 5g. siy, VinI 103,2 (yassa siy patti so vikareyya); Sn 325 (vaddhpacyi anusuyyako siy); Th321 (kaliva siy); followed by another opt. (especially assa); perhaps; it might be (that)...; MI 23,29 (siy kho pana te brhmana evam assa...); AIV 394,8 (siy kho pana te gahapati evam assa ...); siy ... siy ..., (it might be) either ... or ... (with sg. or pi. subject); MI 185,14/0//. (pathavidhtu


siy ajjhattik siy bhir); Vibh90,2iyb//.(dve dhtuyo siy kusal siy akusal siy avykat); 2 sg. siy, Ja IV 108,28* (brahmacariyam careyysi bhiyyo vannavati siy); Pv20:7 (yena tuvam cirataram pinito siy); 1 sg. (a) siyam, SHI 11,23 (evamrpo siyam angatam addhnam); ThI375 (aham tava vasnugo siyam); (b) siy, Ja VI 462,4* (yva jiveyya Vedeho nniiassa puriso siy); Pv 20:8 (evam aham cirataram pinito siy); 3 pl. (a) siyum, Ud 79,5* (p ce sabbad siyum); ()siyamsu, Mil 239,4 (siyamsu dve bhikkh abhidhamme nnvd, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se siyum); opt. (b) 3 sg. (a) assa7, D I 134,28 (yam mama assa digharattam hitya sukhy ti); A V 194,25 (tatr' assa dovriko pandito); Sn49 (evam dutiyena sah mam, assa); assa + gen. (esp. preceded by siy,), (perhaps) it might occur to ..., one might think...; D1196,2 (siy kho pana te Potthapda evam assa ...); (b) assu1, Ja IV lll,2o*(anussamam rjaputta yathssu puna sangamo); 2 sg. (a) assa8, Vin I 32,30 (s pi patipad n' atthi yya tvam arah v assa); Ja V 296,16* (n' eva me tvam pati assa); (b) assasi, MI 437,29 (tvam... yattha nimantito assasi tattha... bhunjeyysi); Sil 281,is (yam tvam arannako ca assasi); (c) assu2, Ja V 117,12* (dakkh' assu dni pufinakaro; \\9,ir foil: idni dakkho... bhaveyysi); 117,13* (silav' assu mahrja; 119,30". silav ... bhava); 1 sg. assam, D II 172,is (assam nu kho aham rj cakkavatti ti); Ja VI 573,2* (anibbatti tato assam); 3 pl. (a) assu3, Vin II 197,5 (sdhu... bhikkh yvajivam rannak assu); Sn 532 (yass' assu lutni bandhanni); Dhp 74 (mam' evtivas assu); (b) assum', Ja I 56,30 (sace tumhkam pitaro arog assum ajja nikkhamitv pabbajeyyum); 2pl. assatha, D I 3,5 (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupit); SIII 6,22 (vuttavdino c' eva bhagavato assatha); 1 pl. assma, Vin II 299,14 (yena mayam imasmim adhikarane balavantatar assma); SII 35,36 (katham vykaramn mayam vuttavdino c' eva yasmato Gotamassa assma); (a) sa(t), mfn., (b) santa2, mfn., (c) samna, mfn., qqv; aor. (cf Sadd451,10) 3sg. si3, D I 143,17 (evam tad si); Sn994 (sok' assa tanuko si); Th408 (parinito khuro si dhamanim chettum attano); JaV 117,8* (m te si dukhudrayo); Mil 90,4* (so pi si tipetako); 2 sg. si4, Pv 15:6 (sisam naht tvam si sucivatth); 1 sg. sim, Vin III 4,26 (amutr' sim evamnmo evamgotto); Th221 (brahmabandhu pure sim); Ap 377,21 (candlo s' aham tattha); 3 pl. (a) sum2, D II 236,6* (tadsum satta Bhrat); Sn284 (isayo pubbak sum sannatatt tapassino); Th924 (na bjham ussuk sum); (b)su2, Ja IV 116,29* (surmerayamadhuk ye jan patham' su no; 117,17': ye no gme jan pathamam evarp sum ahesum); (c)simsu, Ap 263,24 (atthatth' simsu khattiy, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sisu); (d) sisum, Ap 132,n (atthatlisa-m-sisum, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se simsu); 1 pl simh, Ap 595,3; perf. 3 sg. sa1, Sv 247,28 (iti ha sa iti ha s ti ldisavacanapatisamyutto purnakathsankhto itihso) = Mp II 261,24 = Pj II 447,19. atthi2, / , existence; Abhll54; ifc see sotthi; -kkhana, m., the moment of existence; Vism447,i8

(jivitindriyam ... ~e yeva ... sahajarupni anupleti) = Nidd-a 1147,29. atthi(n), mfn. andm. [S. arthin], 1. (mfn., sg. nom. m. ~i) desirous; wanting something; having an aim; Sn 957 (~i panhena gamam, Be, Se so; Ce, Se ~i; ? Pj II 572,6foil: atthiko panhena gato mhi atthiknam v panhena gamanam panhena atthi gamanam v ti, so read with Be, Se) * 1043 {Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ~I); 2. (w., sg. nom. ~i), a beggar; Abh 740 (ycanako ~I); see also atthi(n), idamatthit {sv idam). atthi-atthava(t), m/h., {gr.t.t.) possessive; Sadd687,2o (samsaddassa niggahitam Ikre atthi-atthavati paccaye pare makrattam pajjati ... sam assa atthi ti smi). atthika1, mfn. [S. arthika], desiring, wanting (instr.); aiming at, having as purpose (instr.); in need (of, instr.); Vin I 40,6 (~ehi upanntam maggan ti); AIV 171,4 (puriso udapnapanliy ~o); Sn333 (yya dev manuss ca sit titthanti ~); Th 995 (sotam odhesim ~o); Ja 1417,6 (yena yena ~ hoti tarn tarn harpeti); III 20,3 (mnav tya itthiy ~); V 151,20' (atthikatv ti attano atthikabhvam katv ~o hutv sakkaccam suneyya); VI 542,2* (~o viya yti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be addhiko); Mil 31,25 (atthena mayam mahrja ~); Sp 159,6 (tasm tarn na vadma, ~ehi pana Visuddhimagge vuttanayena gahetabbam); Mp III 304,15 (punnena -assa punnam gavesantassa); ifc see anna-d-, idam-, kusal'-; -va(t), mfn., wanting something; having a purpose; D I 90,18 (-vato kho pana te... idh' gamanam ahosi; Sv255,7: katabbakiccasankhto attho etassa atthi ti atthikam tassa mnavassa cittam, atthikam assa atthi ti ~); anatthika, mfn., not wanting, not caring for (+ instr.); unconcerned; M i l 139,12 (na ca ~o pattena hoti); Th 956 (dubbal te bhavissanti hiriman ~); Ja V 460,1 (rj nagarena ~o); Mil 76,26 (eko ... atthiko eko ~o); Vism 68,21 (abhihrena ~-t); anatthika in Ee at Sp 398,7 and Spk III 267,26 is prob, wrfor anatthaka qv; see also atthika1. atthika2, mfn. [from atthi1; S. stika], who believes in the existence (of merit, another world, etc); -vada, m. and mfn., 1. {m.) the doctrine that (merit, another world, etc) exists; D 155,29 (tesam tuccham mus vilpo ye keci -am vadanti) = MI 515,17 (Ps III 227,24: atthi dinndinam phalan ti imam -am yeva vadanti); 2. {mfn.) following, professing that doctrine; MI 404,14 (silav purisapuggalo sammditthi -0 ti); see also natthikavda. atthikhir, {m)f{n). [S. astikslr], having milk; Sadd 299,4 (~ brhmani); 450,11. atthit, / [from atthi1; S. astit], existence, being; reality; SII 17,9 (dvayanissito khvyam ... loko yebhuyyena -am c'eva natthitam ca); JaV 110,5 (etasmim kulvake kassaci -am v natthitam v jnhi ti); VI 240,15' (paralokassa ca kalynappaknam ca -am jnhi); As 394,33 (tasmim yeva samaye vutthnakapanfiya -); see also natthit. atthibhva, m. [atthi1 + bhva], existence; the being present; Ja I 222,6 (sace pana sarassa -am mayham na saddahatha); II415,19 (na no koci -am na jnti); Dhp-a IV 217,i (amhehi samnabhogassa setthikulassa


~am v natthibhvam v natv); see also natthibhva. atthiya, mfn. [S. arthya], having a purpose or goal; useful, proper, fit; Th 12 (yad ~am bhojanam bhunjamno); 1274 (yad ^am brahmacariyam acri) = Sn354; ifc see etad-, kim- (svka 3 ), mah'(sv maha[t]); niratthiya, mfn., to no purpose; useless; Ja VI 234,4* (~ pabbajj Gunassa); Kv 217,36 (~am dukkhadassanan ti); see also attatthiya (sv atta[n]). atthiy, ind., for the sake of on behalf of,? Ja VI 234,24* (upamam te karissmi mahrja tav' ~). atthiritv in Ee at Ps III 76,9 is wr for attharitv (Be, Ce, Se so). atthisis in Ee at Ps III 386, l is wr for atthisis (Be, Ce, Se so). atthisukha, n. [atthi1 + sukha], delight in possessing something, in the existence of something; AII 69,n (kulaputtassa bhog honti... dhammaladdh, so bhog me atthi... dhammaladdh ti adhigacchati sukham ... idam vuccati... ~am; Mp III 101,4: atthi ti uppajjanakasukham ~am). attheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. arthayate], strives to obtain; asks for; Dhtup 583 (attha ycane); Dhtum815; Sadd541,30 (attha... ycanyam: ~eti ~ayati); fpp atthayitabba, mfn., Vism98,io (-am icchitabban ti) = Sp 417,3 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr attharitabbam). atyappa, mfn., seesvappa. atra, ind. [ts], here; in this; in this respect, in this case; Abh 1161; VinII211,2(atrapattam nikkhiphi); V 163,is (atr' assapemam v doso v; Sp 1364,13: atra puggale ... pemam v bhaveyya doso v); Ja III 207,9* (ito bahutar bhog atra manne bhavissare); V 169,26* (idam sanam atra bhavam nisidatu); As 203,9 (atrpi hi imam jhanam upasampajja, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se tatrpi); atra atra, here and there; Ja I 414, w (atra atra icchanto); atrhe, ind. [atra. + loc. of aha(n)], today; Abh 1155 (ajja ~e); see also attha l , ettha. atraja, mfn. and m.f [wrongly back-formed from attaja^v; S. tmaja], (mfn.) born from oneself, one's own; (m.)ason; (f.) a daughter; Abh 240 (putto 'trajo suto); Vin I 310,7* (Abhayassa hi ~o, in uddna); D III 162,2* (parosahassam ca bhavanti ~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atuj, prob, wr); Thi 151 (dhit Majjhassa ~); Ja III 103,13* (evam so nihato seti kokilyeva ~o); 181,4* (m ghatayi ~am puttam); IV 94,H* (94,i5'i ~o ti attato jto); VI 230,24* (Vedehass' ~ piy rjakann); Ap61,i6 (Gotamassa bhagavato ~o so bhavissati); Mhv 13:4 (dya ... Sanghamittya ~am); Sadd 622,8. atriccha1, mfn. [see atricchati and atricch], excessively greedy; Ja III 206,16 (samudde khitto ~o hutv); IV 4,23* (-o cakkamsado; Eeso; Be, Ce, Se aticcham; 5,\v foil.: asantuttho atra uttaritaram labhissmi ti evam laddham laddham atikkamanalobhasankhtya atricchya samanngatatt ~ o . . . atricchan ti pi ptho ... atricch ti pi ptho, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se aticchya ... aticcho ...; = Ja I 414,6*: ecfc atriccham; = III 207,is*: eds atriccham); Vibh-a472,6 (annataro pi ~o sakavisayam atikkamitv paravisayam pvisi); - t a , / , abstr., excessive greed; Ja III 222,6 (s bl ~ya evariqjam vyasanam patt); Vism 70,25 (~ya pahnam); Ps II 141,3 (~am ppicchatam

mahicchatam ca pahya); see also aticcha sv icch. atriccha2, ind. [possibly absol. of attharati^v; cfS. -strtya], spreading out; ? Ja V 407,5* (-koccham; Ce, Ee, Se so; Be atricca; 407,29'foil: evaripam kocchsanam pannasladvre attharitv; parallel passage at Mvu II 61,3 is very corrupt). atricchati, pr. 3 sg. [prob, wrongly for ati + icchati, c/atraja/attaja; or <S. *ati + rcchati or ipsati?], is excessively greedy; (a) atriccha(t), mfn., Ja I 414,6* (~am cakkam sado; 414, ir: sakalbhena asantuttho ~am atra atra icchanto) = III 207, I 5* = Ja IV 4,23* (Be, Ce, Se aticcham; Ee atriccho); (b) atricchamna, mfn., Ja II 231,6' (atricchvasena ~amno puggalo); see also atriccha1, atricch. atricch, / [prob, wrongly for ati + icch, cf *atricchati; cfalso S. yadrcch ?], excessive greed or desire; Ja II 231,i* (~ atilobhena (or cpd); 231,3': ~ vuccati atra atra icch sankht apariyantatanh); IV 5,21' (atriccho cakkam sado ti... ~ ti pi ptho ~y ti attho); see also atriccha1. atha, ind. [ts], Abh 1190 (atho athnantarrambhapanhesu padaprane); Sadd 891,23/0//.; I, and, and further; Dili 152,3* (khajjabhojjam atha leyyasyiyam); Sn 1006 (Punnako atha Mettag); 2. and (before that); and then; Vin I 168,31 (apavrito va sahgho bhavissati athyam ratti vibhyissati); MI 429,1 (avykatam eva tarn ... tathgatena assa atha so puggalo klam kareyya); 3. then, just then; next; D12,31 (ayam kho no bhante antarkath vippakat atha bhagav anuppatto ti); MII 30,3i (yadham... imam parisam anupasahkanto homi athyam paris ... nisinn hoti); Dhp 69 (yad ca paccati pparn atha blo dukkham nigacchati); Sn 1017 (atiY assa gatte disvna); Jail 158,27 (ath' assa bhariy bodhisattassa sariram disv); with interrogatives: Sn 990 (atha ko carahi jnti); 1047 (atha ko carahi devamanussaloke atari jtim); 4. but; Dhp 387 (div tapati dicco rattim bhti candim ... atha sabbam ahorattim buddho tapati tejas); Ja I 494,5 (sace si agram ajjhvasitukmo... atha brahmalokam gantukmo...); Pv-a8,14 (yadi dyako pete uddissa dnam deti... atha na pete uddissa dnam deti...); 5. or; Ja I 26,21* (kim bhavissati lokassa kalynam atha ppakam); Ap58,18 (yam yam yonim samsarati devattam atha mnusam); with other particles: athaparam, and further; D II 90,29 (idam vatv sugato athparam etad avoca satth) ^ Sn/?. 126,27; athparato, and yet, but; Mil 105,9; atha ca pana, and yet; on the other hand; D I 139,15 (no ca khv assa mantit khattiy anuyutt ... atha ca pana bhavam rj evarpam mahyannam yajati ti); Ja I 279,9 (ajja imiss nadiy udakam n' eva hyati na vaddhati atha ca panyam psno mah hutv pannyati); atha kho, 1. and moreover; A V 195,5 (atha khvssa evam ettha hoti); 2. then; just then; Vin I 1,7 (tena kho pana samayena buddho bhagav Uruvelyam viharati... atha kho bhagav bodhirukkhamle sattham ekapallankena nisidi); D III 99,4; 3. but rather, but moreover, but also; D I 167,18 (tassa cyam silasampad ... abhvit hoti asacchikat atha kho so rak va smann); 174,17 (nham tattha attano samasamam samanupassmi kuto


bhiyyo, atha kho aham eva tattha bhiyyo); Pv-a 28,34 (na kevalam kasi yeva n' atthi atha kho gorakkh pi na vijjati); atha v, or; or rather, or perhaps (in cts, introducing an alternative [preferred ?] explanation); Dhp271 (na silabbatamattena... atha v samdhilbhena); Sn 134 (yo buddham paribhsati atha v tassa svakam); Pv4:l (pubbapete ca rabbha atha v vatthudevat); Pj II 13,4; Mp 1105,16 (tath gato ti tathagato, atha v...); atha v pi, or also; and also; Sn917 (ajjhattam atha v pi bahiddh); Pv 13:4 (pit ca mt atha v pi ntak); see also atho. athabbana, athabbana, see sv athabbana. atho, ind. [atha + u2; ts], 1. and also; likewise; and yet, even then; SI 106,32* (bherav bah atho dams sirimsap bah); Dhp 423 (pubbenivsam yo vedi... atho jtikkhayam patto); Sn 43 (pabbajit pi eke atho gahatth); 537 (myam mnam atho pi lobhakodham); Pv 15:20 (vmato mam tvam paccesi atho pi mam usuyyasi); 38:15 (svgatam te mahrja atho te adurgatam); T h l l 0 9 (sabbam pahya idam ajjhupgato atho pi tvam citta na mayha tussasi); Ja I 83,15* (rpe ca sadde ca atho rase ca); Patis I 133,15*; 2. certainly; Ja V 348,19* (kacci bhoto amaccesu doso koci na vijjati... atho pi me amaccesu doso koci na vijjati); VI 578,13* (kacci ubho rog te Jli mtpit tava ... atho ubho rog). ada, mfn. [ts], eating; who eats; ifc see kitth-, kunap-, gth-, puris-, poris-, rasa-, vanta-, vighs-. adamsu, aor. 3 pl. o/dadti qv. adaka, mfn. [ts], eating; who eats; ifc see puris-, poris-, balisa-, bhatta-. adatthahi, see sv dahati. adatth, neg. absol o/dissati 1 qv. adati, pr. 3 sg., see sv adeti. adana, n. [ts], eating; food; Dhtup 292 foil, (asa gasa ghasa ~e); Dhtum 385 foil, (gala gildane); JaV 371,26* (ajja me sattam ratti ~ni upsato; Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dnni); 374,22* (pahtam cdanam tattha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se khdanam); Cp-a249,2 (manussnam ~ato khdanato porisdo ti laddhanmena); '-esan,/, search for food; JaV 371,28* (carato ~am; Be, Ce so; Ee, Se danesanam). adandhanat, / [a3 + *dandhana from dandhati qv], absence of sluggishness; quickness, lightness; Dhs42 (lahut lahuparinmat ~ avitthanat; As 150,30: ~ ti garubhvapatikkhepavacanam etam, abhriyat ti attho). adasaka, mfn. [a3 + das + ka2], without a fringe; Vin II 301,14 (kappati bhante -am nisidanan ti nvuso kappati tij. adsakuntbhirud in Ee at Ja IV 466,2* is prob, wr for tsakuntbhirud (Be, Ce so). adifth, negt absol. o/dissati 1 qv. adimha in Ee at Ap482,i8 is prob, wr for yajimha (Be, Ce, Se so). adinava, mfn. [= adina ?], not depressed, undaunted; ? Ja V 340,19* (sajja baddham sinam pekkhamnam -am; 342,17': ~an ti dinavam eva hutv mahsattam olokentam disv). adu is vi for du qv. adum, ad, n., see sv asu2.

adhala, aduhala, m. or n., a trap (dropping stones on to the quarry); Sp 383,29/0//. (skaro -psnehi akkanto hoti, tarn palpetukmassa -am krunnena ukkhipato bhandadeyyam ... -am pteti, Be, Ce so; Ee aduhalapsnehi... aduhalam ... adhalam; Se adduhala... adduhalam ... adduhalam); 457,28 (~am sajjento catsu padesu -mancam thapetv psne ropeti); Mp I 35,19 (-satam santhapetv psasatam yojetv, Be, Ce, Eeso; Se aduhala-); Vin-vn 303 (sajjentassa ~am). adejjha1, mfn. [cf S. advaidha], not divided into two parts; united; Ja III 7,21* (damo samdhi manaso adejjho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se abhejjo; 8,2': samaggabhvena manaso adejjho abhejjasamdhi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se abhejjo); see also dvejjha. adejjha2, mfn. [S. adhijya; Pali form perhaps by influence of ct explanation], strung (of a bow); Ja III 274,12* (dhanum ~am katvna, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se rajjam; 274, is': jiyya saddhim ekato katv ropetv ti attho) = IV 258,24* (Ce, Ee so; Be advejjham; Se adajjham) = Ap 206,4 (Ee so; Be, Ce advejjham; Se abejjham). adeti, adati,pr. 3sg. [S. atti], eats; Jail 183,6* (phlam ce --eyyum msik, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be khdeyyum; 183,17': yadi msik phlam khdeyyum); III 296,n* (na vyasam... kakkatako -eyya; cf 296,16': ~eyy ti diyeyya ... na ganhi ti attho); V 31,25* (yam tvam ~esi mamsam); 197,5* (etu bhavamassam' imam ~etu; 197,9' : ~et ti yathsannihitam hram bhunjatu); 493,6* (visam pajnam puriso ~eyya); 496,28* (na tdise bhmipati -emi); VI 106,22* (kkolasangh ca -enti); 365,23* (yendmi tena vadmi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dadmi; 366,4: yendmi ti yena hatthena dmiti); Patis-a 621,31 (vantam puna na -anti ti attho); Ap-a279,3 (halhalavisam -ati gilati ti); Sadd 436,30 (-anti ajjhoharanti); ada, adi, ? Bv 2:63 (Neranjarya tiramhi pysam ad so jino, Ce, Ee so; Be ada so; Se adi so) = Ja I 16,5* (Be ada. so; Ce, Ee dya; Se adi so) * Bv 20:16 (Be ada. so; Ce, Ee asati; Se adi so); absol. or fut. required, c/"Bv25:19: pyasam paribhunjiya. ado, aor. 2 sg. o/dadti qv. adda1, addam, aor. o/dissati 1 qv. adda2, mfn. [S. rdra], wet, moist; fresh; Abh 753; Ja IV 353,r (udakabharito viya ~o hutv pannyati); VI 309,31* (~am ca pnim parivajjayassu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se allam; 310,3': allam tintam pnim m dahi m jhpayi); ritthaka, m., the fresh seed or fruit of the soapberry tree; Niddl 355,8 (sukanham alkham siniddham ... ~-samnam, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se alritthakasamnam; Nidd-al 377,12: ~-samnan ti apanitatacaaddritthakaphalasadisam, addritthasamnan ti pi pli, tass tintakkasadisan ti attho, Ee so; Be, Ce bhaddritthakasamnan ti apanitatacabhaddritthakaphalasadisam, samnan ti pi pli; Se alritthakasamnan ti apanitataca-alritthakasamnam, samnan ti pi pli); Vism 249,11 (kes tva pakativannena klak vann, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se alritthakavann); Sp 1083,26 (kanh ~-vann, Be so; Ee alritthakavann; Se alritthikavann; Sp-t[Be] III 294,1 foil.: abhinavritthaphalavann, udakena tintakkapattavann ti pi vadanti); Ps III 384,12 (~-sadisena klavannena); Vibh-a 232,2 (klak vann);


valepana, mfn., newly plastered; MI 86,36 (~ upakriyo pakkhandanti); SIV 187,1 (kutgrasl v bahalamattik ~); -sigivera, n., green (undried) ginger; Ja 1244, I (-am, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se alia-); see also addaka, alia1. addaka, n. [S. rdraka], green (undried) ginger; Abh 459 (singiveram tu -am); see also addasingivera, allasirigivera. addakkhi, aor. 3 sg. o/dissati 1 qv. addati,/?r. 3 sg. [S. ardati], moves; begs for; Dhtup 157 (adda gatiycanesu); Dhtum 227 (adda ycanaytrdisv); Sadd 377,3 (adda gatiyam ycane ca: -ati); caus. pr. 3 sg. addeti, [S. ardayati], torments, distresses; Sadd 544,7 (adda himsyam: -eti -ayati); pp addita, mfn. [S. ardita], distressed, pained, tormented; Th406 (kmargena ~o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be attito) * Thi 77 (~, Ee so; Be, Ce attit; Se addhit) * 89 (-, Ee so; Be, Ce attit; Se addhit); Ja III 261,8 (Klakanni- hutv); Saddh281 (bandhusokena -o); ifc see tutt'-; see also attit. addana, n. [S. ardana], distressing, tormenting; destroying; Sadd 547,25 (gandha scane ~e ca); 554,18 (-am hims); 565,22 (divu -e, -am gandhapimsanan ti vadanti). addava, m. or n. [for ajjava qv, influenced by maddava ?], honesty; Mhv 84:23 (digunpet). addasa, addas, aor. o/dissati 1 qv. a d d 1 , / [S. rdr], the name of a nakkhatta, the sixth lunar mansion; Abh 58; Sadd359,n (migasiro -a punabbasu). add2, aor. 3 sg. o/dissati l qv. ad day ati, pr. 3 sg. [denom.from adda2; cfS. rdrayati], is (or seems to be) wet, moist; Ja IV 351,26* (-ate ayam rukkho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se allyate; 353, r: -ate ti udakabharito viya addo hutv pannyati, Ce, Ee so). addi, m. [S. adri], a stone; a mountain; Abh 605 (pabbato giri selo 'ddi); Sadd429,i6* (-i siluccayo ca ti giripannattiyo im); Mhv 88:116 (in cpd); see also indaniladdikta sv inda. addika, m. [addi + ka2], a stone pillar; ifc see cakkavr -; see also pcinaddikamla. addiftha = adittha qv sv dissati l . addita, mfn., caus. pp o/addati qv. addiyati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. ardayati, ardyamna; BHS ardiyamna; but prob, wr for attiyati qv], is afflicted, distressed; Thi 140 (-mi harymi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se, Thi-a 132,5* attiymi). addubandhana, see sv andu. adduva, m. (?), the knee; M i l 137,16 (na ca -ena -am sahghattento gacchati; Ps III 387,15: -na -an ti jannukena jannukam); II 138,5 (na ca -na -am ropetv nisidati). addha1, mfn. see sv addha1. addha2, mfn., see sv addha2. addha3, m., see sv addha(n). addha(n), addha3, m. (sg. nom. addha1, addho; ace. addhnam, addham; instr. addhun, gen. addhuno, loc. addhani, pi. nom. addh; ace. addhe; loc. addhesu, addhsu; iic addha-), an extent of space or time; 1. [S. adhvan], a path, road; a journey; Abh 190 (-);

995 (-0 bhge pathe kle); Vin I 59,n (kacci ttha appakilamathena -nam gat ti); 292,31 (kilanto -nam gamissati); Ja VI 523,27* (digho c'addh suduggamo); Ap 85,20 (-nam patipannassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr addhnam); ifc see kantr' - patiY-, vatt* -; 2. [BHS adhvan] time; Abh 66 (klo 'ddh); 995 (-0 ... kle); D I 17,19 (dighassa -uno accayena); III 216,16 (tayo -, atito - angato - paecuppanno -); Mill 16,24 (evamrpo siyam angatam -nam); SI 140,2 (ye pi te bhante ahesum atitam -nam arahanto sammsambuddh); A II 118,7 (y s dis agatapubb imin dighena -un); Dhp207 (digham -na socati); Sn740 (tanhdutiyo puriso digham -na samsaram) Th215 (samsaram digham -nam); Ja VI 288,12* (tiham ca tarn vsayemu agre yenJ -un anussemu putte); Patisl 52,33 (tayo ~e ... jnti); Mil 49,i\ foil, (kirn pana bhante - atthi ti, koci mahrja - atthi koci n'atthi ti); Spkl 163,26 (addhagatti -am ciraklam atikkant); II249,16 (tesu tisu -esu pacchimavayam anuppatto); Mp III 208,17 (atite -ani); It-al 41,20 (tisu hi -su kinci sankhatam addhvimuttam v asankhatam); Nidd-a I 249,14 (addhagato ti tayo-e atikkanto); 0, -yu, n., duration of life; A II 66,8 (ciram jivmi digham -um plemi ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se digham yum); -ga, mfn. [addha(n) + ga2], old; Mhv 47:44; -gata, mfn. [BHS adhvagata], old; Vin II 188,29 (mahallako -o vayo anuppatto); D I 47,19 (cirapabbajito ~o vayo anuppatto); S I 97,4 (mahallik - vayo anuppatt); Vin-vn 168 (rukkham -am); -g, mfn. and m., going on the road, walking, travelling; a traveller, a wayfarer; Abh 347 (pathiko Mdhag); S I 212,31* (valhakam iv' -, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se valhakam iva panthag) = Thi 55 = Ap 607,23; Dhp 302 (tasm na c' addhag siy); Ja III 95,17* (na h' eva thitam nsinam na saynam na p* -um); anaddhag, mfn., not going on the road, walking through the air; JaV 14,27* (anaddhagnm api devatnam); see also addhna, gataddh (sv gacchati), gataddhi(n) (sv gacchati), ti-y-addha. addhanakha in Ce, Ee, Se at Ja VI 548,26* is prob, wr for andhanakha qv sv andha.. addhaniya, addhaniya, mfn. [from addha(n)], 1. [BHS adhvniya], fit for travelling; Th 529 (sukh ut - bhadante; Th-all 224,9: addhnagamanayogg); 2. lasting a long time; enduring; Vin III 9,25 (uddiseyya ptimokham yatha-y-idam brahmacariyam -am assa ciratthitikam) * Dili 211,5 JaVI 171,31 (uposathakammam -am kareyyan ti); Vism 37,14 (ptimokkhasamvarasilam pi -am hoti ciratthitikam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se addhaniyam); Pp-a215,13 (kodho ... -0 pana hoti); anaddhaniya, anaddhaniya, mfn., not lasting; Ja I 393,3 (anicc khanik... -); Niddl 44,6 (anaddhaniyam jivitam); Vism 37,2; Mp II 69,16 (anaddhaniyam idam tvaklikan ti); see also anaddhaneyya. addhabhavati (and addhbhavati), pr. 3 sg. [adhi + bhavati (or adhi + 2 + bhavati), prob, formed from aor. where there is assimilation of adhi + a5 rather than palatalisation; cf Sadd 627,1 %foll], is master of; governs, controls; Sadd627,i9 (-ati);


addhbhavanta, mfn., Sn968 (addhbhavanto abhisambhaveyya, -- perhaps mc; Pj II 573, i6: evam piyppiyam abhibhavanto; c / N i d d l 490,30: addh ti ekamsavacanam nissamsayavacanam nikkankhavacanam ...); aor. 3 sg. addhabhavi, SI 39,3* fall. (kirn su sabbam ~ i . . . nmam sabbam -i, Be, Ee so; Ce anvabhavi; Se andhabhavi; Spkl 95,6: 4 ti nmam sabbam abhibhavati anupatati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anvabhavi ti); pp addhabhta, m/h., governed, mastered; dependent; SHI 1,20 (turo te gahapati kayo ~o pariyonaddho, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se andabhto); IV 20,33 (sabbam bhikkhave -am, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se andhabhtam; Spkll 363,27: -an ti adhibhtam ajijhotthatam upaddutan ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee abhibhtam); Sadd79,9foil.; anaddhabhta,mfn., free, ungoverned; M II 223,8; see also andabhta, andhabhta; cans. pr. 3 sg. addhabhveti, makes govern, lets control; Mil 223,9 (na h'eva anaddhabhtam attnam dukkhena -eti dhammikam ca sukham na paricajjati) quoted Sadd 79, w; see also adhibhavati. addhamsiyam in Ee at Ja I 391,22 is prob, wr for amvsiyam qv sv amvsi. addhariya, m. [S. dhvarika, c/adhvaryu], a sacrificing priest; name of a class of brahmans; D I 237, \ofoll. (- brhman tittiriy brhman .. .) addh1, sg. nom. o/addha(n) qv. addh2 (and addham ?), ind. [S. addh], certainly, for sure; truly; surely; Abhll40; VinlV 159, is (ranno evam hoti - imesam katam v karissanti v ti); D I 143, I9 (~ samano Gotamo tena samayena rj v ahosi Mahvijito ... purohito v brhmano); A I 38,12 (-am idam bhikkhave lbhnam yadidam rannakattam...; Mp II 39,23/o//.: -an ti ekamsdhivacanam etam, - idam lbhnam ekamso esa lbhnan ti vuttam hoti... rannakabhvo nma lbhnam ekamso avassabhvit na sakk raiinakena lbham na labhitun ti); Sn47 (~ pasamsma sahyasampadam); Jal 19,17 (~ aham buddho bhavissmi ti); VI 324,24 (~ mayam ajjapanditam passissm ti); Niddl 490,30 (~ ti ekamsavacanam nissamsayavacanam...); with other particles: D I 61,7 (- kho bhante evam sante hoti sanditthikam smannaphalan ti); 120,3 (- vat' assham cittam rdheyyam); S IV 295,27 (~ kho tvam gahapati yam pathamam pucchitabbam tarn pacch pucchasi); Sn 375 (~ hi bhagav tath' eva etam); Ja IV 385,23* (~ have bhikkhu... sammuyhat* eva); 399,2* (~ hi saccam vacanam tav' etam); addh in Ee, Se at Ja V 410,2* is wrfor andh (Be, Ce so). addhna, n. [stem abstracted from ace. of addha(n)], path, road; journey; time; Abh 192 (~am digham anjasam); 1100 (kale dlghanjase -am); D i l 90,10 (idam digham -am sandhvitam samsaritam mamam c* eva tumhkam ca; orpp as action nouns, addhnam as ace. of addha[n]; cf Sv543,3fall.: atha v sandhvitam samsaritan ti sandhvanam samsaranam); Ja III 410,1 (evam -e gate); Mil 49,26 (evam etam digham -am sambhvitan ti); 50,iofoil, (atitassa -assa kirn mlam ... atitassa ca mahrja -assa ... avijj mlam); Vism94,i4 (-n ti maggagamanam); Sp 1101,24 (ekadivasena

gamaniye magge ... dighe - e ...); ifc see atlta-m-addhne (^vacceti2), kantr'-; -kovida, mfn., knowing the way; JaV 194,24* (nham -); -kkhama, mfn., 1. enduring a long journey; A III 30,i (~o hoti padhnakkhamo hoti; Mp III 236, n: dram addhnamaggam gacchanto khamati adhivsetum sakkoti); 2. long-lasting; JaV 508,ir (anaddhaneyyantina -am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr addhnakkamam); Sp 191,17 (tattha addhaniyan ti -am (Hghaklikan ti vuttam hoti); neg. anaddhnakkhama, mfn., Nidd-al 155,2 (klavasena anaddhnakkhamam); -magga, m., a road for journeying, a high road; Vin II 119,5 (na ca... aparissvanakena -o pati-pajjitabbo); IV 63,1 (Sket Svatthim -am patipann); Mil 98,6 (-am patipajji); Sp 665,9 (-an ti addhnasankhtam dighamaggam na nagaravithimaggan ti attho, .so read with Be, Ce, Se); -hina, mfn., being under-age, too young; Vin V 129,12 (panca puggal na upasampdetabb -0 angahino ...; Sp 1323,8: - o nma navisativasso). addhbhavati, see sv addhabhavati addhika, m(fn). [addha(n) + ika], a wanderer; a traveller; Vin IV 17,33 (anne pi ~); Ja IV 97,io* (na brhmane ~e titthamne gantabbam; 97,13': -eti addhnam gate); Ap 358,13 (- pathik sabbe, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atthik); Sv270,8 (~ kilant pniyam pivitv paritutth bhattaputam v tanduldini v denti); Dhp-all 166,3 (kantrapatipanno yva icchitatthnam na ppunti tva -0 eva tasmim pana patte gataddhi nma hoti); It-a II 58,24 (- nma pathvino paribbayavihin); ifc see kapan'-, kapaniddhika. addhuva, see sv dhuva. adrbhaka, see sv dbhaka. advraka, mfn. [a3 + dvra + ka2], without a door, without a gate; Ja IV 247,7 (nagare -e); V 81,29* (yath pi assa nagaram mahantam -am yasam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee lrakam; 82,9'fall: yath -assa ayomayanagarassa manussnam upabhogo paribhogo anto va hoti, na abbhantarim bahi nikkhamanti na bhir anto pavisanti aparparam saiicro chijjati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ldvrakassa). advrika, mfn. [a3 + dvra + ika], 1. without a door; Ud-a 333,8 (-am gharam pavittho viya carati); 2. not produced by one of the senses; Ps I 221,10 (~nam ca patisandhibhavangacutivedannam). adhamsiya, mfn. [neg. fpp of dhamsati], not to be violated or overthrown; Saddh 308 (dutthehi ca -0). adhakkhaka, n., ^ee^vadho. adhakkhandha in Ee at JaV 269,19* is prob, wr for adhokkhandha qv sv adho. adhagga, mfn., see sv adho. adhama, mfn. [ts], lowest, worst; most vile; Abh 700; 1070 (-0 kucchite One); A II 72,2* (mohena ~ satt; Ce so; Ee, Se adhamasatt; Be vut satt); Ja II 67,18* (-0 migajatnam siglo); IV 397,1* (ju" narnam - narinda candlayoni dipadkanitth); V431,r (uttamnam ca -nam ca patitth hoti); ifc see vasal-; ' -anna, m [S. adhamarna], a debtor; Abh 470 (~o tu inyiko); 0, -ina, m., a debtor, one under an obligation; Sadd 862,14; -jana, m., low, inferior people; Ja HI


324,8' (-'-pasevi ti -am upasevati); - ' -pasevi(n), mfit., consorting with low people; Ja III 323,27* (yo uttamo --pasevi); -'pasevita, mfti. [adhamajana + upasevita1 ],, associated with, attended by, low people; Ja III 324,1* (pass* uttamam - ' -pasevitam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se - ' -pasevim); see also adhara, adho. adhammaka in Ee at JaV 242,24* is prob, wr for adhammika qv sv dhammika. adhara, mfn. and m. [ts], 1. (mfn.) lower, inferior; Abh 930 (~o tisv adho hine); Sadd 267,i foil. (~o patto ~& arani -am bhajanam iti); 2. (m.) the lower lip; the lip; Abh 262; 930 (~o... pume dantacchade); 0 arani,/, the lower of the two pieces of wood used for kindling fire; Vism489,2o; Ps II 91,9 (ayam uttarrani ayam -i ti); o, -0ttha, m. [adhara + otiha2], the lower lip; Ja III 26,10 (~e ca uttarotthe ca); Pj I 45,28 (tato hetthimahanukattaco atha ttaco, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); -kaya, m., the lower part of the body; M II 137,20 (gacchato ... bhoto Gotamassa -o va injati; Ps III 388,3: hetthimakyo va injati uparikyo ... niccalo hoti); see also adhama, adho. adhi, ind. [ts], prefix to nouns, adjectives, adverbs; preverb to verbs; preposition; before vowels (except i-) taking the form ajjh-; Abh 1177; Sadd 882,25* foil.; I. as prefix to nouns (adjectives, adverbs) expresses: superiority, abundance; 2. as preverb to verbs and their derivatives expresses: up to, towards, into; over, above; in addition to; 3. as separate preposition with loc, and in prepositional cpds expresses: in, in regard to; adhi sometimes alternates with ati or abhi qqv. adhi-apekkhimsu, aor. 3 pi. [of *adhi + ape(k)khati], they regarded, considered; Ap-a452,28 (ajjhpekkimsu tvade ti tasmim desankale -imsu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adhipekkhimsu, prob, wr); see also ajjhpekkhimsu. adhi-olambati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + o2 + lambati], hangs down (over); Spkll 319,I6 (ajjholambeyyun ti... -eyyum, upari lambeyyun ti attho). adhika, mfn. [ts], exceeding, surpassing; superior, predominant; more; too much, in excess; Abh 712; A I 125,22 (ekacco puggalo -ohoti silena samdhin pannya) = Pp 35,34; Ja II 386,16 (sacham imin jtigottabaldihi ~o samno, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee avikkosamno, perhaps wr); Patis II 202,14 (so tena atireko hoti -0 hoti viseso hoti); Ap 459,2 (annesam - o hutv); Mil 240,10 (-0 v visittho v); Vism682,io (lokiynam ca atthannam sampattinam bhvankle samathabalam -am hoti); Ud-a254,30 (sabbacittnam -tt); Pj II 383,26 (-am aganhanto); Mhv 12:36 (purisnam sahass ca itthiyo ca tato 'dhik); commonly ifc with numerals: having in addition, plus, eg JaV 319,31 (sattamsdhikni sattavassni, seven years and seven months); adhikam, adv., exceedingly; more (than); Jail 425,8* (agghanti maccha -am sahassam); Ap 306,6 (pacchimam sanam mayham -am satam agghati); ifc see una-, java-, thera-, sam-; 0,-akkhara, mfn. [adhika + akkhara1], with (metrically) too many syllables; Sadd 915,22 (-0 pi pdo); -tara, mfn., compar., more

numerous; greater; more eminent; Ja II 89,14 (pathamam khittakandato ~am vegam janetv); Mil 200,25 (samasamo hoti kadci -0 v); Dhp-aIII 176,9 (assu catunnam samuddnam udakato ~wi ti); am, adv., exceedingly, especially; much more; JaV 233,4' (idni ~am tava pasidmi); VI 186,26 (mahsattam eva rabbha -am cintesi); Pv-a 86,10 (adhimattan ti ~am); -satasahassa, n., more than 100,000; A III 50,12 (idam me bhante candanaphalakam agghati ~am); anadhika, mfn., not exceeding; not more; not in excess; Vinll 292,31 (panca bhikkhusatni annni ~ni ahesum); D III 126,i4(sabbkraparipram annam~am); As 127,30 (alobhena ~am ganhti luddhassa adhikagahanato); sdhika, mfn., having something beyond or in addition; and more; exceeding; D II 93,4 (~ navuti... upsak klakat); A I 230,18 (~am idam bhante diyaddhasikkhpadasatam anvaddhamsam uddesam gacchati); Spkll 328,18 (kanhapakkha-upam atthassa asdhik itar - ti); porisa, mfn., more, deeper, than a man's height; MI 74,12 (ahgraksu ~-poris); A III 403,21 (gthakpo ~-poriso); neg. asdhik, mfn., having nothing in addition; Spk II 328, is; see also anvdhika. adhikarana, n. [S., BHS id.], {.supervision, management of affairs; Ap 43,26 (tassdhikaranam deti mittassa patipajjitum); Pv-a 209,19 (eko ~e niyuttakapuriso); ifc ^emudda-; 2. subject of discussion or attention; case, legal question; dispute (in the sangha, to be formally dealt with; see E. Nolot, 1996, pp. 92-115); Abh 868 (vivddo -am); Sadd920,io (yam adhikicca vuccati tarn-am); Vinll %%,\%foll. (cattrimni... ~ni vivddhikaranam anuvddhikaranam pattdhikaranam kiccdhikaranam); 261,2 (na sakkonti tarn -am vpasametum); 305,5 (tasmim... -e vinicchiyamne); DIII 254,n (-nam samathya); A I 53,34 (yasmim ... -e panno ca bhikkhu codako ca bhikkhu); Ja I 148,3 (imam -am vinicchitum); VI 235,15' (saggdhimno ti... saggam -am katv thitacitto, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adhikram); Mhv 4:25; ifc see anuvd-, patt' -- (^v patti), kicc(^vkaroti), vivd-; 3. cause; Abh 868; A l l 159,2 (-am tarn na hoti yampaccay 'ssa tarn uppajjati ajjhattam sukhadukkham); ifc see kma-; am, ind., on account of, in consequence of; ifc see kimdhikaranam(^vka3), rakkh-, kma-, yatvdhikaranam (sv yato); 4. receptacle, support; location (the sense of the locative case); Abh 868; 1011; Ps I 9,15 (-am hi klattho ca samhattho ca samayo) * As 61,27 (-am hi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr adhikranam); Ud-a 254,13 (ptimokkhe ti ~ bhummam, ptimokkhe nissayabhte samvaro); -kraka, m., -krik,/, one who causes disputes or lawsuits; Vin IV 230,30 (bhikkhuni... vivdakrik bhassakrik sanghe adhikaranakrik); A III 252,14 (vivdakrako bhassakrako sanghe -0); -jta, mfn., engaged in disputes; VinV 191,16; -vpasama, m., the settling of a case or dispute; Dhp-alV 33,19 (-'-dike); -vpasamana, n., id.; Vinll 98,3; MpII 166,4 (-'-attham yebhuyyasik pafinatt); -samatha, m., (a method of) settling a case or dispute; VinIV 207,1 (ime ... satta ~); DIU


254,10 (satta - uppannuppannnam adhikarannam samathya vpasamya); A V 164,23 (-assa na vannavdi); Ap-a294,n (cheko ~e); anadhikarana, mfn., free from disputes; not giving rise to legal cases; Mil383,21 (yogin... ~ena bhavitabbam anavaksa-krin). adhikaranika, mfn. [adhikarana + ika], disputatious; A V 164,23 (bhikkhu -o hoti adhikaranasamathassa na vannavdi; Mp V 55,22: ~o hoti ti adhikaranakrako hoti). adhikarani, / [Pkt ahigarani], a smith's anvil; Abh 527; Ja III 285,5 (ekam -im ca udakapunnam ca kamsathlam harpeth ti); Mp II 362,8 (-iyarn thapetv, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -iyam); As 263,9 (catunnam -inam upari cattro kappsapicupinde thapetv); Dth3:16 (patitthapetv 'dhikaranyam etam ktena ghtpayi dantadhtum); Vin-vn2869. adhikaroti, pr. 3 sg. [S. adhWkr], aims at; refers or alludes to; is concerned with; puts in charge; Sv 500,5 (~oti ti adhikaranam kranass' etam nmam); absol. (a)adhikicca [S. adhikrtya], Vism450,25 (attabhvam adhikicca pavattatt aijhattikam); Sp 593,31 (yam adhikicca rabbha paticca sandhya); Spkl 255,21 (tarn adhikicca vhiyati abhimukham v vhiyati ti adhivacanam; = Pj II 150,3: adhikatv); Sadd 920,9 (yam adhikicca vuccati tarn adhikaranam); (b) adhikacca, Sadd 517,6 (adhikacca ti adhikam katv, akkharacintak pana saddasatthanayam nissya adhikicca iti rparn icchanti); (c) adhikatv, Pj II 150,3 (tarn adhikatv vhiyyati); pp adhikata, mfn. and m. [S. adhikrta], 1. (mfn. and m.) placed at the head; appointed, put in charge; a superintendent, overseer; Abh 343 (ajjhakkho 'dhikato); Pv 21:28 (tassham dnavissagge dne ~o ahum); 2. (mfn.) (i) subject; irresolute, unsure; Mil 144,2 (jano sammlho vimatijto ~o samsayapakkhanno); 224,26 (lokam sammohenti -am karonti); instr.~ensLt adv., by the influence of; ifc see kamma-; (ii) concerned with; referring to; Sadd 749,9 (-'-atthe: itthisu ekam adhikicca kath pavattati s kath adhitthi); fpp (a) adhiktabba, mfn., Ps IV 42,8 (samathehi -ni ti adhikaranni); (b) adhikaraniya, mfn., Sp593,30 (ko pana so adhikaranattho yen' etam ekam hoti ti, samathehi t); 1196,4(~-tya). adhikra, m. 1. [ts] office, employment; supervision; Abh 1004 (yoge 'dhikre ... dhuro); ifc see dn-; 2. [BHS id.] service, help; act of merit; Vin I 55,32 (ko nu kho ... tassa brhmanassa -am sarati ti); Bv 2:58 (pabbajj gunasampatti -o ca chandat); Ap 270,28 (buddho loke samuppanno ~o ca n' atthi me); Mil 49,3/o//. (koci-d-eva puriso raiino -am kareyya rj tuttho -am dadeyya); ifc see kata- (^vkaroti); 3. [ts] introductory word, heading; subject; section; (gr.t.t.) governing word (to be understood in phrases or rules following), rubric; Pj II 248,1 (pro ti ~o); Nidd-al 302,28 (tatth ti tasmim thne tasmim ~Q v); Cp-a 145,7 (ath ti-e nipto); Sadd 648,9 (abhidhtabbe nipphajjate ice etam '-attham veditabbam); 0> -antara, n., 1. a new subject, a change of subject; Pj II 137,4 (kho pana iti idam pan' ettha niptadvayam

padapranamattam ~-dassanattham v ti datthabbam); Cp-a 145,8 (idam ~am uppannan ti dipeti); 2. a new rubric; Sadd 891,28 (~e atha pubbassaralopo tato paran ti attho pi atha dakkhasi bhaddante nigrodham madhurapphalam); -kata, mfn., who has performed a service; who has fulfilled his duties; Ja VI 251,26* (~o ball); anadhikra, m., not a duty; not a service; Sp 1372,23 (~e kathethoti). adhikarana in Ee at As 61,27 is wrfor adhikarana qv. adhikri(n), m(fn). [S. adhikrin], superintendent; commander, governor; Mhv 74:129; 75:185. adhikrika, mfn. [adhikra + ika], referring to; aiming at; ifc see acirakl- (sv cira). adhikicca, absol. of adhikaroti qv. adhikuttana, n. [from *adhi + kutteti], cutting; chopping; Niddl 6,26 (asisnpam km '-atthen ti passanto; Nidd-al 32,12: '-atthen ti chindanatthena); Ps II 103,31 (asisnpam ' -atthena) ^ Thi-a 262,1. adhikuttana,/ [from *adhi + kutteti], a chopping-block; SI 128,26* (sattislpam km khandhsam -) = Thi 58 (khandh 'sam ~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr khandhnam -; Thi-a 63,23: ~ ti chindandhitthn) = Ap 556,25 (Be, Ce so; Ee khandh pi; Se adhikundar); see also adhikottana. adhikumri, ind. [from adhi + kumri], with reference to a young girl; Sadd 749,n. adhikusala, mfn. [adhi + kusala], of high merit; D III 145,28 (~esu dhammesu); Vibh 352,5 (pantesu v sensanesu annatarannataresu v ~esu dhammesu v arati; Vibh-a 478,23: -es ti samathavipassandhammesu); Ps I 160,13 (~esu dhammesu pantasensanesu ca ukkanth). adhikottana, n. [from *adhi + kotteti], a choppingblock; Abh 521 (sn tu -am; Abh-sci: adhikottanti yasmim tarn -am); see also adhikuttan. adhikodhita, n. or mfn. [adhi + caus. pp o/kujjhati qv], great anger; (or enraged, very much angered;) Ja V 117,5* (m te avisare munca sublham -am, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se adhisare... adhikopitam; cf 119,3': tava hadayam... paresam akusaladhammesu sublham -am kujjhpitam hutv m munca m patitthayat ti attho, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se sutthu blham adhikopitam). adhikopita, n. or mfn. [adhi + caus. pp of kuppati #v], great anger; (or enraged, very much disturbed;) Ja V 117,5*(m te adhisare munca sublham -am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adhikodhitam; cf 119,3': tava hadayam kusalam adhisaritv atikkamitv pavatte paresam akusalakamme sutthu b|ham -am kujjhpitam hutv m munca m patitthayat ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee akusaladhammesu; Ee adhikodhitam). adhigam, aor. 1 sg. o/adhiVg qv. adhigacchati, pr. 3 sg. [S. adhigacchati], gets to; attains, acquires; finds; understands; Vin I 228,2 (mahantam bhogakkhandham -ati); D1224,11 (samano v brhmano v kusalam dhammam -eyya); MI 275,15 (~e somanassam); SI 154,18 (sa ce ratim ndhigaccheyya tattha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ndhigacchaye) = Th 142; A I 162,29* (anupubbena nibbnam -anti pandit); Dhp 187 (api dibbesu kmesu ratim so ndhigacchati); It 82,8*


(santim evdhigacchati); Thi 51 (attnam ~a Ubbiri); Ja V 266,28* (niray ndhigacchanti dvram nikkhamanesino); Pv7:4 (nibbutim ndhigacchmi); Ap 25,25 (tuvam pi ~ehi gacchma buddhasantikam, Ee, Se so; Be tvam pi tarn adhigacchesi; Ce tvam pi tarn ~hi); adhigacchati in Ee at Sv 921,15 is wr for adhibhavati (Be, Ce, Se so); fut. 3sg. adhigamissati, MI 247,12 (yam no samano Gotamo dhammam adhigamissati tarn no rocessati" ti); 1 sg. (a)adhigamissmi, Niddll (Be) 228,7 (cf Ee 131,16); (b) adhigacchissmi, Niddl 67,2i (~issmi phusayissmi); 3 pl. (a) adhigamissanti, PatisII 55,23 (nekkhammam ... adhigat v -anti v adhigamissanti v); (b) adhigacchissanti, Ps II 117,24 (anvesant pi kirn -issanti); adhigacchanta, m/(~antl)w., It-al 92,23 (-antassa); Thi-a 249,15 (may ... ~antiy); neg. anadhigacchanta, mfn., Jal 113,27'; Niddl 440,9; aor 3 sg. (a) ajjhagam, DIU 170,2*; Sn5 (yo njjhagam bhavesu sram); Ja III 450,22* (Udayo ajjhagam mahattapattam); for ajjhagam in eds at VinHI 147,22* = Ja II 285,23* and at Sn379 read jagma qv sv gacchati; (b) ajjhagacchi, ajjhaganchi, Ja V 255,19* (dipam so na ajjhagacchi agati yattha pakkhinam, Eeso; Ce, Se ajjhaganchi; Be najjhagganchi; 256,23' foil. attano patthnam na ajjhagacchi ti adhiganchi ti attho, Ee so; Ce na ajjhaganchi ndhiganchi ti; Se ndhigacchi ti; Be na ajjhag nganchi ti); VI 202,23* (Ce, Ee ajjhaganchi; Be, Se ajjhagacchi); (c)adhigacchi, adhiganchi, DU 352,1 (adhigacchi); JaV 256,24' (adhiganchi ti, Ee so; Ce ndhiganchi ti; Se ndhigacchi ti; Be nganchi ti); Ap-a 133,3; 2sg. (a)ajjhagam, MI 172,9 (tvam ... njjhagam); (b)ajjhagamsi, JaV 171,8* (pucchmi te ngarja tarn attham kaY ajjhagamsi vimnasettham); 1 sg. (a) ajjhagamam, A I 259,14 (yo loke assdo tad ajjhagamam); Ap 49,9 (bodhim ajjhagamam aham, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjhagamam); (b) ajjhagamim, T h l l 7 (tisso vijj ajjhagamim); (c) adhigamim, Pj II 393,9; (d)adhigacchim, D U 341,19; Thi221 (amatam ~im); (e) adhigacchissam, Sn446 (satta vassni bhagavantam anubandhim ... otram ndhigacchissam sambuddhassa satimato; Pj II 393,9: ndhigacchissan ti ndhigamim); 3pl. (a)ajjhagamamsu, MI 173,11; (b) ajjhagamum, SI 12,13* (pariyesamn njjhagamum, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee njjhgamum; perhaps read na ca jagmum^v sv gacchati); 22,7* (nibbnam ev' ajjhagamum sapann) = Ja III 473,2* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjhagam); (c) ajjhagamsu, Ja II296,11* (Ce, Ee so; Se ajjhaggamsu; Be ajjhagamum); (d) adhigamimsu, Pj I 194,11; (e)adhigacchimsu, J a l 256,12'; Ipl. ajjhagammase, Ja VI 442,12*; part.perfact. adhigatava(t), mfn., who has attained; Vv-a296,i3 (nibbnam eva v upagate, ~ante ti attho); absol. (a)adhigamma, AIV 447,30 (sannvedayitanirodhe nisamsam adhigamma); Th 1106; Ja III 523,15* (yo shasena adhigamma bhoge); neg. anadhigamma, Pj II 67,23; (b) adhigantv, D I 224,12 (kusalam dhammam adhigantv); Jal 45,n; Ap 342,n; Mil 380,16; neg. anadhigantv, It-aII 99,32; Thi-a 43,i; pass. pr. 3 sg. (a) adhigamiyati, Vism440,32 (~iyati samppuniyati) * Nidd-al 340,19 = Patis-a3,23 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se adhigammati);

(b) adhigammati, Patis-a3,23 (~ati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be adhigamiyati); pp adhigat, mfn. and n. [ts], 1. (m/h.) (i) (pass.) attained; found; understood; VinI 4,33 (~o kho myyam dhammo gambhiro); D i l 34,34 (~o ... vipassanmaggo); Thi 513 (~am idam bahhi amatam); Ja III 329,20* (dhanam ca me ~am); neg. anadhigata, mfh.t I. not attained, what has not been attained; Vin III 91,6 (anadhigate adhigatasanfiino); Vibh 385,24 (anadhigatassa adhigamya); (ii) (act.) having reached; who has attained or understood; Patis II 55,23 (ye hi keci nekkhammam... ~ v adhigacchanti v); JaV 326,27* (adhigat* amh tarne nnam, Ce, Se so; Ee amha; Be adhigam; 327,2': mayam ... iinam adhigat); Kv 302,2 (arahattam pattassa patiladdhassa ~assa); Dhp-aIII 129,5 (arahattam ~o 'smi ti); neg. anadhigata, mfn., who has not attained; Kv 257,n (atthi koci adibbacakkhuko dibbacakkhum appatiladdho anadhigato asacchikato); Vism 699,25 (anadhigatatt); 2. (n.) attaining; understanding; SHI 46,2i (asmi ti c'assa ~am hoti); Ja III 473,7 (utthnaviriyena tassa dhammassa tta utthnaviriydhigato nma); adhigatnam in Ee at Ja IV 435,18' is prob, wrfor abbhgatnam (Be, Ce, Se so); fpp(*) adhigantabba, mfn., MI 93,36 (na... sukhena sukham ~am); It 104,17* (nibbnam -am); Mil 243,17; Vism 219,6 (~assa adhigatatt);Th-aI 234,25 (tya); (b) adhigamaniya, mfn., A l l 69,8 (cattr' imni... sukhni ~ni gihin); Ud-a393,i9 (nibbnassa kicchena tarn dasseti); neg. anadhigamaniya, mfn., Ps II 117,11; caus. pr. 3 sg (a) adhigameti, makes attain, makes reach; Ja III 354, r (param ca punnam -eti); adhigamenta, mfn., Pv-a30,n (pete dibbasampattim -entena); ^?/? adhigametabba, mfn., Sp 973,9 (na annena kenaci ~etabban ti anannaneyyam); (b) adhigacchpeti, Ja IV 60,27' (panjarnurpam cakkayugam tam~emi); (c) adhigampeti, Patis-a 623,4 (visesam ~eti); see also adhiVg. adhiganhti, adhigganhti, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + ganhti], 1. surpasses, excels; masters; DIU 146,4 (anne deve dasahi thnehi -ti); SI 87,6* (appamatto ubho atthe ~ti pandito); JaV 120,30* (yni c' etni sabbni ~ti pandito; 122,3': ~ti abhibhavati); Kv 563,3 (buddhassa bhagavato uccrapassvo ativiya anne gandhajte ~fi ti); adhiganhanta, mfn., Spkl 338,12 (~antam); aor. 3 sg. adhiganhi, Mp III 242,5; 2. receives; aor. 1 sg. adhiganhim, Th-alll 117,8 (buddhato ganhin ti... satthu santik ~in ti attho); absol. (a) adhigayha, adhiggayha, Vv 17:3 (sasi adhiggayha yath virocati nakkhattarj-r-iva trakganam); Pv 21:63 (sabbe deve adhigayha sambuddho va virocati); Ap 537,29 (evdhipateyyena adhigayha viroc' aham); Kv 528,22 (adhigayha manasikaroti ti); (b) adhiggahetv, It 19,26 (mett yeva tni cetovimutti adhiggahetv bhsate); (c) adhiganhitv, Ja VI 261,19", pp adhiggahita, adhiggahita,mfn. and n., \.(mfn.) excelled; overpowered, possessed; It 103,15* (ye c' assa dhamm akkht smaniiassnulomik ~ tutthassa appamattassa bhikkhuno); Ja III 427,28* (devnam indena ~); Sp 109,6 (Naleruyakkhena ~assa pucimandassa samipe); ifc see


kamma-; 2. (n.) overpowering, predominance; possessing; taking; ? Vism 689,9 (rammanassa adhiggahitatt) = Pj II 6,27 (--tt); ifc see kamma-. adhigata, m/h.,/?/?o/'adhigacchati qv. adhigama, m. [ts], acquisition, attainment, esp. attainment of a religious goal; understanding; realisation; VinI 104,4 (pathamassa jhnassa -ya antaryiko); D III 255,12 (appattassa pattiy anadhigatassa -ya); Mill 138,15 (abhabbo phalassa -ya); Sil 139,13 (ariyasvakassa ditthisampannassa puggalassa -am upanidhya aMatitthiyasamanabrlimanaparibbjaknam -0 n' eva satimam kalam upeti); A V 194,7 (dhammam desemi... nyassa -ya); Ja I 406,16 (kataro vo guno laddho ti -am pucchimsu); Nett 91,25 (pancavidham -am adhigacchati); Mil 215,29 (-nam pariyatGnam); Vism 442,16 (tattha -o nma arahattapatti); Spkll 204, is (patipattiy hyamnya -o hyati); Dhp-aIV 90,20 (attano-ena tutthamnaso); ifc see vises-, veda-; -vyatti,/, manifestation or knowledge of the attainment; Pj I 103,13; Vism 214,28 (~ito); anadhigama, m., lack of attainment; MI 81,33 (imiss yeva ariyya pannya ~); Ps II 287,30 (lokuttaramaggassa ~o). adhigamana, n. [ts], acquisition; attainment; Pj I 39,13 (sayasuddhiy '-attham); Dhp-aIII 192,1 (saggassa -ena); Sadd334,2o (-am); anadhigamana, ., lack of attainment; Pj I 70,18 (adhigantabbassa assdassa ~ato). adhigampana, n. [from adhigampeti], causing to attain or understand; Nidd-al 296,1 (amatappaksakya v dhammadesanya amatassa -ato amatassa data); Patis-a 622,27 (kathitassa atthassa -am nijjhattibalam). adhigampeti, 3 sg. qfadhigacchati qv. adhigameti, 3 sg. of adhigacchati qv. adhigamma, absol. o/adhigacchati qv. adhigayha, absol. o/adhiganhti qv. adhWg, [S. adhiVg], attains, finds; understands; aor. 3 sg. ajjhag, S I 228,15 (Sakko sakkattam ajjhag); Dhp 154 (cittam tanhnam khayam ajjhag); Sn225 (yad ajjhag Sakyamuni samhito); for ajjhag in Be, Ce, Ee at SI 12,io* and 23,5* read g qv sv Vg; 2sg. ajjhag, VinI 9,23 (tvam... n' ev' ajjhag uttarimanussadhammam); D I 223,2 (tvam bhikkhu ... imassa panhassa veyykaranam njjhag); Vv 34:7 (visesam vipulam ajjhag, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ajjhat); 1 sg. (a)adhigam, Thi 122 (bhattacolassa ndhigam); (b) ajjhagam, ajjhag, Vv 32:7 (visesam ajjhag); Thi 67 (cittass' upasam' ajjhagam); Ja VI 180,3* (ajjhagham manim imam); Ap 380,23 (njjhagam katthaci kkhayam); neg. anajjhagam, Th 405 (accharsanghtamattam pi cetosantim anajjhagam; Th-all \139ifolL: cetaso samdhnam na labhim); 3 pi. (a)ajjhagu, ajjhagum, Sn330 (sutassa pannaya ca sram ajjhag); Pv 36:86 (smannaphalni ajjhagum); Ja I 256,7* (sabbe te vyasanam ajjhag,^, Ce, Ee so; Se ajjhagum); III 38,7* (na te samatham ajjhag); ajjhag in Ee at Th 663 is wr for accag qv sv atiVg; (b) ajjhagamsu, D II 275,9* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ajjhagamamsu); Jail 296,11*

(Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ajjhagamum); see also adhigacchati. adhiggahita, adhiggahita, mfh., pp o/adhiganhti qv. adhicinna, mfn. [pp of *adhi + carati], thought out, pondered; D18,14 (~am te viparvattam, ropito te vdo, Be, Seso; Cecinnam; Ee avicinnam; Sv91,i4/o//.: yam tuyham dlgharattcinnavasena suppagunam tarn mayham ekavacanen' eva viparvattam) = M i l 244,1 (Be, Se so; Cecinnam; Ee avicinnam) = S III 12,io; (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce cinnam) = V 419,10 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se cinnam) = Niddl 173,io (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce cinnam); see also cinna. adhicitta, n. [BHSid; see BHSD sv Siks], a higher form of thought; meditation; Patis I 46,18 (avikkhepaprisuddhi -am); Niddl 143,3 (bhgi v bhagav... adhisilassa ~assa adhipanny ti); Mp II 346,4 foil. (kmvacaracittam pana cittam nma, tarn updya rpvacaram -am nma, tarn pi updya arpvacaram -am nma); see also abhicitta. adhicittam, ind. [adhi + ace. of citta1; taken by cts as ace. of adhicitta; cf Sadd 748,2 foil.], as regards thought; as to meditation; Vin III 235,3 (bhikkhuniyo ... rincanti uddesam paripuccham adhisilam -am adhipannam); A I 236,8* (adhisilam -am ca adhipannam ca viriyav); 240,17 (bhikkhuno adhisilam pi sikkhato -am pi sikkhato adhipannam pi sikkhato); 254,11 (santi -am anuyuttassa bhikkhuno olrik upakkiles; cfMp II 362,12: -an ti samathavipassancittam); Nidd I 149,5 (adhisilam pi sikkheyya -am pi sikkheyya adhipannam pi sikkheyya); Patis I 167,17 (samathanimittupatnekattam ca -am anuyuttnam; cf Patis-a 543, nfoll.: vipassanya pdakabhvena adhicittasankhtam samdhim anuyuttnam, Be, Se so). adhicittasikkh, / [adhicittam (or adhicitta) + sikkh], training in (higher) thought, in meditation; Vin III 24,13 (tisso sikkh adhisllasikkh - adhipannsikkh; Sp 244,28: vipassanpdakam atthasampatticittam pana adhicittan ti vuecati) * DIU 219,13; MI 324,28 (tibbpekh hoti adhisilasikkhya -ya adhipanfisikkhya); Niddl 39,2o/o//. (katam ~); Spkl 104,is (purimapadena hi adhisllasikkh kathit dutiyapadena adhipannsikkh cittavpasamena - ti evam imya gthya sakalam pi ssanam paksitam eva hoti). adhicitte, ind. [adhi + loc. of citta1; taken by cts as loc. of adhicitta], in regard to thought, to meditation; VinI 70,17 (na tibbacchando hoti uddese paripucchya adhisile-e adhipanny; Sp 993,2: -e ti lokiyasamdhibhvanya); A III 106,7 (te pi na sakkhissanti vinetum adhisile -e adhipanny); Dhp 185 (-e ca yogo etam buddhna ssanam; cf Dhp-aIII 238,5: -e ti atthasampattisankhte adhikacitte); Th591 (-e ca yogo; Th-all 252,36: -e ca yogo ti samathavipassansu anuyogo bhvan); Vibh 325,29 (rupvacara-arpvacarasampattim sampajjantassa y pann ... ayam vuecati -e panii). adhicuppatti in Ee at As 23 8,30 is wr for adhiecuppatti qv sv adhicca2. adhiceta(s), mfn. [adhi + ceta(s)], attentive; Vin IV 54,16* (-aso appamajjato munino; c^Sp801,i6 -aso ti adhicittavato sabbacittnam adhikena arahattaphalacittena


samanngatass ti attho) = Ud43,20* = Th68; c/Udna-v4:7: adhicetasi m pramadyate); see also abhiceta(s). adhicca1, ind., absol o/adhiyati qv. adhicca2, mfn. and ind. [perhaps = adhicca1], 1. (mfn.) fortuitous, occurring by mere chance; rare; S V 457,3 (-am idam bhante yam so kno kacchapo ... amusmim ekacchiggale yuge givam paveseyy ti evam -am idam bhikkhave yam manussattam labhati; Spklll 302,10: idam adhiccuppattikam); adhiccena, adv., without causerarely; Ap-a488,9 (-ena akranena); 2. (ind.) fortuitously, without cause or reason; rarely; only He; '-pattika, mfn., rarely or occasionally offending; VinV 115,19 (~o puggalo); MI 443,22 (ekacco bhikkhu ~o hoti anpattibahulo; Ps III 154,16: ~o ti kadaci kadci pattim pajjati); ' -uppatti, / , occasional appearance; As 238,30 (~iy); '-uppattika, mfn., appearing without a cause; rarely appearing; Ap 302,8 (ayam ca buddho uppanno -o muni); 419,22 (- buddha; Ap-a 488,9: adhiccena akranena uppattik sayambht); -laddha, mfn., obtained by chance, without a cause; Vv 84:22 (-am parinmajam te sayamkatam udhu devehi dinnam; Vv-a341,i6: -an ti adhiccasamuppattikam yadicchakam laddhan ti attho) * JaV 171,9* (171, is': -an ti ahetun laddham); -samuppattika, mfn., appearing without a cause, fortuitously; Vv-a341,i6; -samuppanna, mfn., arisen fortuitously, without cause or reason; connected with fortuitous or causeless origination; D I 28,2i (-am attnam ca lokam ca pannpenti; Sv 118,7: -an ti akranasamuppannam); III 33,15 (-am cariyakam aggannam pannpenti); S II 22,25 (kirn... -am sukhadukkhan ti) * Vibh377,3; Vism 209,28foil, (catubbidham v nmam vatthikam ... -an ti, -am nma lokiyavohrena yadicchakan ti vuttam hoti... vacanattham anapekkhitv pavattam -am); Sv 118,5/o//. (-0 att ca loko ca ti dassanam -am); -samuppannika, mfn., (one) who believes in fortuitous or causeless origination; D I 28,20 (eke samanabrhman -); Ps I 70,29 (-ass' eva sassataditthi) * Patis-a 419,13. adhiceak, / [S. adhityak], tableland, plateau; Abh610. adhijayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. adhWji], wins especially; wins in addition; Patis-a 265,15 (loke visesena jayanto -afi ti). adhijeguccha, n. [adhi + jeguccha], higher or superior scrupulousness; Sv 359,20 (-an ti idha jigucchya bhvo jeguccham, uttamam jeguccham). adhijeguccham, ind. [adhi + ace. of jeguccha], as regards what is detestable, as regards scrupulousness; D I 174,24 (yvat... ariy param tapojigucch nham tattha attano samasamam samanupassmi kuto bhiyyo, atha kho aham eva tattha bhiyyo yadidam -am; cfSv 359,2i: idha jigucchya bhvo jeguccham, uttamam jeguccham -am). adhijegucche, ind. [adhi+ loc. of jeguccha], as regards what is detestable, as regards scrupulousness; D I 176,2 (tassham ~e panham puttho vyksim); III 40,13 (tvam mam Nigrodha sake cariyake -e panham puccha);

Sv 362,3 (paribbjako -e viriyena ppajigucchandhikre panham pucchi). adhitthahati, seesv adhititthati. adhitthtabba, mfn.,fpp o/adhititthati qv. adhitthtabbaka, mfn. [adhitthtabba + ka2], which are to be formally taken possession of, formally designated; Sp 646,17 (esa nayo sabbesu -esu civaresu, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee -civaresu); 647,2. adhitthti, see sv adhititthati. adhitthna, n. (and mfn. ?) [S., BHS adhisthna], 1. (n.) support, basis; standpoint; abode; determination, resolution; fixing the mind on; determining, controlling, producing (by supernatural power); taking (formal) possession of designating; Abh 1032; 1177; Vin I 34,7 (bhagavat -na panca katthasatni na phliyimsu); V 117,37 (dve pattassa - kyena v adhittheti vcya v adhittheti); DIU 229,18 (cattri -ni: panndhitthnam, saccdhitthnam, cgdhitthnam, upasamdhitthnam; Sv 1022,29fall: -ni ti ettha adhi ti upasaggamattam, atthato pana tena v titthanti tattha v titthanti thnam eva v tarn tarn gundhiknam purisnam -am); Sil 17,i6 (cetaso -am abhinivesnusayam na upeti; SpkII 33,19: cittassa patitthnabhtam); A III 363,29 (khattiynam pi bhavam Gotamo jnti adhippyam ca upavicram ca -am ca abhinivesam ca); Jal 23,27 (tasmim ~e niccalo bhaveyysi); IV 376,21 (bodhisattnam -am nma samijjhati); Patis II 82,8 (cittassa -ya maggo c' eva hetu ca); Ap 6,3 (-am pretv); Nett 119,23 (cattri -ni); Mil 309,8 (annatarassa - parinibbutassa cetiye ptihiram hoti); Ps V 51,14 (ettha -am vuecati patitth); It-aII 10,35 (phassapaccay vedan ti hi vacanato phasso vedanya -am); Vism 331,21 (0,-atthena yatanam); ifa see upasam-, catu-r--(5vcatu[r]), cga-, dhamm-, pann-, puggal-, sacca-; 2. (mfn.) consisting in determining, controlling; concerned with the standpoint or basis; ? Patis II 174,21 (dasa iddhibalni, ~ iddhi vikubban iddhi manomay iddhi..., or ab I ?); 207,i (katam - iddhi); Pet 104,4 (yam ekattatya ca vemattatya ca finam vimamsan tulan ayam -o hro); Nett 72,s/o//, (katamo -o hro); ' -iddhi, -iddhi,/, the magic power of determining, producing by resolve; Patis-a 666,3 (pakativannam avijahitv adhitthnavasena annassa dassanam -i nma); As 15,5 (ayam ca n' eva buddhnam adhitthna-iddhi, bhvanmay iddhi); '-gago in Ee at Sp 704,26 is wr for 0, -upago (Be, Ce, Seso); -prami,/, the perfection of resolution (the eighth of the ten perfections); Jal 23,3o; Bv 2:151 (tad 'dakkhim atthamam -im); Ap-a 51,9 (jivitam pi cajitv vatarn adhitthahantassa -pramit paramatthaprami nmajt); anadhifthna, n., not a support; not determining; not fixing one's mind on; lack of resolve; not taking formal possession; Vin V 128,35 (-am avikappan; Sp 1334,12: ganabhojane anfiatra samay ti vuttam samayam adhitthahitv bhojanam adhitthnam nma, tath akaranam -am); Mil 235,10 (sabbaso kmasamyojannam ~); Vibh 350,27 (-am ananuyogo pamdo; Vibh-a469,1: -an ti kusalakarane patitthbhvo); Sp658,i (pathamakathinasikkhpade -am


avikappanam ca). adhitthyaka, adhitthyika, mfn. [S. adhisthyaka], controlling, supervising; ifc see kamm-, kammanta-, vaj-. adhitthyti ti in Ee at Sp 448,14 is wr for adhitthy ti (Be, Ce, Se so). adhitthita, mfn., pp o/adhititthati qv. adhittheti, see sv adhititthati. adhititthati, adhitthahati, adhitthti, adhittheti, pr. 3 sg. [S. adhitisthati; BHS also adhisthahati, adhisthihati], stands upon, depends upon; mounts; stands over, supervises; controls; designates, takes (formal) possession of (robe, bowl etc); resolves on, fixes the mind on, undertakes; resolves, determines, produces (by supernatural power); adhititthati: A III 354,20* (nirmisam sukham laddh upekham ~ati); Ja IV 134,5* (kena Samvara vattena sanjte ~asi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se abhititthasi; 134,16': abhibhavitv titthasi); 433,12* (yutto ratho mahrja yutto ca balavhano ~a mahrja; 433,15': ~ ti abhirha); Vism 582,13 (jarmaranam pi khandhnam pkabhedabhvam ca adhititthati); adhititthamna, mfn., Cp-a280,6; adhitthahati: VinI 125,2i (no ce -eyya patti dukkatassa); A III 375,21 (viriyasamatam ~a); V 335,2 (vassvsam upagaccheyyum tattha kammantam c' eva ~issmi); Vv 84:38 (dhammnuyogam ca ~tha; Vv-a346,n: ~tha anusikkhatha); Jail 386,6* (padas ca ~a); Ps III 368,7 (buddha utthysan titthanti v cankamam v ~anti); Th-a III 140,28 (bahum nma kammam na karaye na ~e, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr adhititthahe); (a) adhitthaha(t), mfn., A IV 92,18* (sippam vanijjam ca kasim ~am); PatisI 187, H (cittam ~ato); neg. anadhitthaha(t), mfn., Vism 706,11 (anadhitthahato pana aggi-dii vinassati); (b) adhitthahanta, mfn., VinV 16,n (~antassa); A V 333,31 (buddhnussatim ... kammantam ~anto pi bhveyysi); (c) adhitthahna, mfn., Ud61,22* (etam satim bhikkhu ~no); adhitthti: Vin I 308,32 (tassa matakacivaram ~ti); D III 258,27 (so tarn cittam dahati tarn cittam ~ti tarn cittam bhveti); A I 115,19 (ppaniko pubbanhasamayam na sakkaccam kammantam -ti); PatisII 207,21 (finena ~ti bahulo homi ti bahulo hoti); Mil 3 09,11 (arah... ~ti evamnmacetiye ptihiram hot ti); Sp643,i4 (navarn sahghtim hatthena gahetv imam sanghtim ~mi ti cittam bhogam katv); Mp III 390,18 (saddhdinam indriynam samatam samabhvam ~hi); inf. adhitthtum, [S. -sthtum], VinI 115,11 (ekena -tum na me tarn khamatiti); 299,21 (anujnmi bhikkhave tena bhikkhun tni civarni -tum mayh' imni civarni ti); Ja III 512,26 (jaram patv kammantam -tum nsakkhi); adhittheti: Vin II 159,27 (ye pi bhikkh navakammam ~enti); III 197,28 (anpatti anto dasham -eti vikappeti ...); Sn 151 (etam satim ~eyya); Th560 (etam suddham -ehi ekamantam svadhitthitam); absol. (a) adhitthy, [S. -sthya], D II 99,11 (jivitasankhram adhitthy vihareyyan ti; Sv 547,8: adhitthahitv pavattetv, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee adhititthitv, prob, wr); MII 262,10 (abhibhuyya lokam adhitthy manas); Ja IV 91,30 (na kujjhissmi ti adhitthy);

Cp 2:2:3 (caturo ange adhitthy semi vammikamuddhani); Vism 688,19 (mahrukkhe pathavitalarn adhitthy ... thite); neg. anadhitthya, Th 766 (anadhitthya attnam); (b) adhitthahitv, Vin III 74,36 (adhitthy ti adhitthahitv npeti evam vijjha evarn pahara evam ghtehi ti; cf Sp 445,24: adhitthahitv ti samipethatv); PatisI 111,1g; JaV 163,26; Mil309,22; neg. anadhitthahitv, Vism 406,16 (hatthi homi ti anadhitthahitv); Sp916,n; (c) adhitthitv, Sadd354,s; aor. 3 sg. (a) adhitthahi, D III 159,28 (akkodham ca adhitthahi); Th 1131 (satth ca me lokam imam adhitthahi aniccato addhuvato asrato); Ja III 445,11 (uposatham adhitthahi); Vism 430,17 (dip m nibbyims ti adhitthahi); (b)adhitthsi, JaV 291,7 (tni pana rpni Pabhvati yeva passatti adhitthsi); Ap 155,8 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adhitthahi); Vism 391,33 (yath nam manuss passanti evam adhitthsi); Mhv 17:53; pp adhitthita, mfn. and n. [S. adhisthita], \.(mfn.) (i) (pass.) stood upon; determined, managed, supervised; resolved on, undertaken; brought under control; possessed, designated, formally taken possession of; used; Vin I 57,27 (panitnam bhattnam bhattapatipti ~ hoti); SI 36,25*foil, (kimsu sdhu ~am ... saddh sdhu ~); Ja I 273,11 (Silesalomayakkhena nma ~am ekam atavim ppuni); VI 184,17 (uposatho ~o); Vism 36,23 (satiy ~nam indriynam); Pv-a 141,4 (tena ... kammant ~ ahesum); (ii) (act.) standing upon, mounted upon; resolving on; fixing one's mind on; Sn 820 (ekacariyam ~o); Jail 192,14* (akkodhanam ~o); VI 125,4* (dibbam ynam ~o; 125,7: ~o ti dibbayne thito hutv); Vv 63:30 (so titthasi hemarathe ~o); 2. (n.) supervising; Vin III 87,17 (alam vuso kirn gihinam kammantam ~ena); neg. anadhitthita, mfn. and n., 1. (mfn.) not determined or fixed; not taken possession of; not resolved on, not undertaken; Vin III 196,19 (atirekaclvaram nma anadhitthitam avikappitam); Ja III 445,21 (pto va anadhitthitatt sakalam uposathakammam na hoti); 2. (n.) the not determining, lack of resolve; the not formally taking possession; VinI 258,3 (bhikkhu atthatakathino clvaram dya pakkamati anadhitthitena n' ev' assa hoti paccessan ti na pan* assa hoti paccessan ti); 299,22 (tassa ce ... bhikkhuno tarn clvaram anadhitthite anno bhikkhu gacchati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ~ena, prob, wr); dvdhitthita, mfn., improperly taken possession of; VinI 308,36; svadhitthita, svdhitthita, mfn., well fixed upon, well resolved on; properly taken possession of; VinI 308,32 (tassa matakacivaram adhitthti svadhitthitam); S V 278,31 (lokasann suggahit hoti divsann svdhitthita); A IV 418,25 (na bhveti na bahulikaroti na svadhitthitam adhitthti); Th560 (etam suddham adhitthehi ekamantam svadhitthitam); PatisI 172,26 (yasmim vatthusmim cittam svadhitthitam hoti); fpp adhitthtabba, mfn., VinI 125,20 (ajja me uposatho ti ~am); V140,i8 (ekdasa civarni ~ni); A III 186,5 (kammassakat tasmim puggale ~); Vism 394,22 (kso hot ti ~o kso yeva hoti); Sp 643,4 (ticivaram adhitthahantena rajitv kappabindum datv pamnayuttam eva ~am).


adhitthi, ind. [adhi + itthi], concerning a woman; Vism 349,22 (loke itthisu kath ~i ti vuccati); Sadd 749,n. adhideva, m. [ts]9 a superior or supreme god; one above the gods (see K.R. Norman, 1977, pp. 329 fall.; 1981a, pp. 145 foil.); MII 130, B (kirn pana bhante atthi ~ ti, so read with K.R. Norman, 1981a, p. 1501 eds atthi dev ti); 132,26foil. (- mayam... bhagavantam apucchimh, ~e bhagav vyksi); 212,27 (kinnu kho bho Gotama atthi dev ti, thnaso m' etam Bhradvja viditam yadidam atthi ~ ti, so read with K.R. Norman, 1977, pp. 331-35 ? Be yadidam ~ ti; Ce, Ee, Se yadidam atthi dev ti); Sn 1148 (~e abhinfiya sabbam vedi parovaram; Niddll 173,27foil: bhagav sammutideve ~ti abhinfiya upapattideve ~ ti abhinfiya visuddhideve ~ ti abhinnya, Be, Ce, Seso; Nidd-a II 94,3I foil.: ~e abhinfiya ti -kare dhamme fiatv ... attano ca parassa ca 0-ttakaram sabbam dhammajtam vedi ti vuttam hoti); Ps III 454, n (susudrak pi hi dev nma honti deviyo nma honti, dev pana ~ nma, loke dev devi ti laddhanmehi manussehi adhik ti attho, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se atidev); Sadd 752,28 (atireko devo atidevo evam ~o); see also atideva. adhiddhamsiyati in Ee at Pet 203,15 is wr, prob, for ativassiyati qv sv ativassati. adhinam in Ee at Pet 182,8 is wrfor adhinam (Be, Ce so). adhipa, m. adhip, / [ts], ruler, chief; lord, master; female ruler; Abh 725 (~o); Vv-a 314,26 (traknam ~o hutv dissati); Ap-a 310,28 (baldhipo caturanginisenya ~o padhno); ifc see Jana-, traka-, dhamm-, pamada-, bal-, manuj-, loka-; see also attdhipaka sv atta(n). adhipaggharanta, mfn. [ of *adhi + pa(g)gharati], flowing very much, flowing over; Thi-a258,33 (sabbaklam ~antam). adhipacca, see sv dhipacca. adhipajjati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + pajjati], falls into; attains; AIV 96,15* (anattham ~ati; Mp IV 48,7: anattho me gahito ti sallakkheti); pp adhipanna, mfn. and n.t 1. (mfn.) (i) fallen into; having done wrong; Thi 345 (kmesu ~nam dissate vyasanam bahum); Ja III 38,n* (yo paresdhipannnam sayam sandhtum arahati; 38,24': paresam ~nam dosendhibhtnam apardhakraknam); V 379,14* (asmkam ~nam khamassu; 379, \r: dosena apardhena ajjhotthatnam); (ii)fallen into the power of; assailed by (instr. or ifc); SI 72,14* (antakendhipannassa); Dhp 288 (antakendhipannassa n' atthi fitisu tnat); Ja V 91,5* (~ piscena; 91,25': ~ ti ajjhotthat); Sp 229,9 (phutth ti ~ abhibht); ifc see tanha-; 2. (n.)what is done wrongly, a fault; Ja III 38,9* (yo cdhipannam jnti; 38,22': attan ~am atikkantam asmim katam dosam); see also ajjhpajjati. adhipaflflam, ind. [adhi+ ace. o/pann; taken by cts as ace. of adhipanna], as regards wisdom; VinUI 235,3 (bhikkhuniyo ... rincanti uddesam paripuccham adhisilam adhicittam ~am); D I 174,29 (yvat... ariy param pafin nham tattha attano samasamam samanupassmi kuto bhiyyo, atha kho aham eva tattha bhiyyo yadidam ~am, Be, Seso; Ce, eadhipanna; c/Sv 359,26: y ayarn ~ nma aham eva ettha bhiyyo ti); A I 236,8* (adhisilam adhicittam ca -am ca viriyav); Nidd I 149,6 (adhisilam pi

sikkheyya adhicittam pi sikkheyya -am pi sikkheyya). adhipanfiatti1, ind. [adhi + pannatti], with regard to exposition; D i l i 138,2i/o//. (aham eva tattha bhiyyo yadidam ~i; but cf Sv 916,35foil.: pannatti nma ditthipanfiatti, ~i nma khandhapannatti dhtupannatti... puggalapannatti ti ca vutt cha pafifiattiyo). adhipaiiflatti2, / [adhi + pannatti], higher or superior exposition; Sv916,35foil.: pannatti nma ditthipannatti, ~i nma khandhapannatti dhatupanfiatti yatanapanfiatti indriyapahnatti saccapannatti puggalapannatti ti ca vutt cha pafifiattiyo ... etthpi bhagav pannattiy pi anuttaro ~iy pi anuttaro). adhipafifi, / [BHS adhiprajn; see BHSD sv Siks], higher, superior wisdom or knowledge; Patis I 46,20 (dassanaprisuddhi ~); Nidd I 143,4 (bhgi v bhagav... adhisilassa adhicittassa ~y ti); Sv 1003,io (kammassakatannam panfi vipassan ~); Nidd-a I 121,4 (maggaphalapafifi va ~). adhipafifiya, ind. [adhi+ loc. o/pann; taken by cts as loc. of adhipanna], in regard to wisdom; Vin I 70, I i (na tibbacchando hoti uddese paripucchya adhisile adhicitte ~ya; Sp993,3: ~y ti lokuttaramaggabhvanya); Mil 10,3 (mama svak ~ya sambhventi); A III 106,7 (te pi na sakkhissanti vinetum adhisile adhicitte ~ya); Vibh 325,31 (catsu maggesu catsu phalesu panfi ayam vuccati ~ya panfi). adhipaflflsikkh, / [adhipannam (or adhipanna) + sikkh], training in (higher) wisdom; Vin III 24,13 (tisso sikkh adhisilasikkh adhicittasikkh -; cf Sp 245,10: tilakkhanaparicchedakam pana vipassanfinam ~ti vuccati s h i . . . sabbalokiyapannnam adhik c* eva uttam ca) * D III 219,n; MI 324,28 (tibbpekh hoti adhisilasikkhya adhicittasikkhya ~ya); Niddl 40,i/o//, (katam ~); Spkl 104,Ii (purimapadena hi adhisilasikkh kathit dutiyapadena ~ cittavpasamena adhicittasikkh ti evam imya gthya sakalam pi ssanam paksitam eva hoti). adhipatati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + patati], 1. flies past; Ja IV 111,22* (~ati vayo khano tath' eva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be atipatati; 112,9': ativiya patati sigham atikkamati); 2. falls on; rushes against, attacks; aor. 3 sg ajjhapatt qv; absol. adhipatitv, Ud8,n (Bhiyam Druciriyam gvi tarunavacch ~itv jivit voropesi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se adhiptetv; Ud-a95,3o: ~itv ti abhibhavitv madditv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adhibdhetv ti) ^ 49,35 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se adhiptetv); Pj II 572,32 (sesamakkhik hi tato tato ~itv khdanti); caus. pr. 3 sg. adhipteti1, makes fall; lays low; Pj II 585,16 (avijj muddh ti... arahattamaggavijj... tarn muddhnam ~eti; or from adhipteti2); absol. adhiptetv, Ud 8,17 (Bhiyam Druciriyam gvi tarunavacch ~etv jivit voropesi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be adhipatitv); see also ajjhapatv, atipatati. adhipatatta, w., abstr. [prob, adhipati + tta], mastery, predominance; Patis I 2,22 (~ pann sannvivatte finam; Patis-a48,i2: - pann ti nekkhammdinam adhipatibhvena nekkhammdini adhikni katv tadadhikabhvena pavatt panfi ti attho); 107,28fall. (katharn - panfi sannvivatte finam ...).


adhipatv, ind. [absol o/*adhi + ppunti ?], reaching', Bv-a 184,24 (tarn ajjhappatv ti tarn sonarukkham patv adhipatv, upagamm ti attho). adhipatana, n. [from adhipatati], falling on; flying against; Ud-a355,2i (te hi dlpasikham ~ato adhiptak ti adhippet); Thi-a248,36 ([skatikakulamhi] inyiknam purisnam -bahule bahhi inyikehi abhibhavitabbe). adhipati, m. [ts], ruler, master, owner; controller, dominant influence; Abh725; A I 148,7 (so attnam yeva ~im karitv, Be, Ce, Mp II 243,33 so; Ee adhipateyyam; Se dhipateyyam); Pv 38:1 (raja Pingalako nma Suratthnam ~i ahu); Ja IV 223, I* (issarnam ~inam na tesam pdato care); Nidd I 489,6 (yo so Mro kanho ~i antag Namuci); Dhs 1034 (ariyamaggam -im karitv ye uppajjanti cittacetasik dhamm); Mil 278,16 (rj atipunnatya ~i); Vism385,n (chandasamdhi, kattukamyatchandam ~im karitv patiladdasamdhiss' etam adhivacanam); Nidd-a II 37,io (chasu devalokesu -tt ~i); ifc see att- (sv atta[n]), citta- (sv citta1), tidas-; see also adhipatatta, dhipati. adhipateyya, see sv dhipateyya. adhipatthita, mfit. [pp of *adhi + pattheti], desired, wished; longed for; D I 120,2 (yam kankhitam yam adhippetam yam ~am, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se abhipatthitam) * 11236,4 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se abhipatthitam). adhipanna, mfn.,pp o/adhipajjati qv. adhip,/, see sv adhipa. adhiptikankha, mfn. [adhi + ptikankha], (especially) to be desired or expected; ? Pet 210,18 (so te dhamme ~ ti evam lakkhanam nnam vijj lokam vaddheti, Be, Ee so; Ce adhiptikankhati; passage corrupt; see Nnamoli, 1979, p. 284). adhipta1, m. [from adhipteti1 (or adhipteti2], making fall; injuring; (or splitting); ifc see muddh-. adhipta2, m. [from adhipatati], flying insect; moth; Ud 72, is* (patanti pajjotam iv' ~, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce adhiptak); Pj II 572,33 (tato tato adhipatitv khdanti tasm ~ti vuccanti); ifc see dams-. adhiptak, adhiptika, m. [adhipta2 + to?], flying insect; moth; Ud72,9 (sambahul ~ tesu telappadipesu ptapariptam anayarn pajjanti; Ud-a355,2o: ~ ti patangapnak, ye salabh ti pi vuccanti); Niddl 484,22 (~ vuccanti sabb pi makkhikyo, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se adhiptika). adhipti(n), mfn. [from adhipteti1 (or adhipteti2)], making fall, injuring; (or splitting); ifc see muddh-; see also adhipta1. adhiptimokkha, n. [adhi + ptimokkha], the extension to the rule of discipline; the further code of discipline; VinV 1,18 (kim tattha ptimokkham kim tattha ~am); 2,20 (pannatti ptimokkham vibhatti ~am; Sp 1303,29foil.', yo pana bhikkh ti din nayena vuttamtik pannatti vinayo ti attho, vibhatti ti pdabhjanam vuccati); Ps IV 38,io (bhikkhu uttarimanussadhammam ullapati patti prjikass ti din nayena parivre cha sikkhpadni tni thapetv sesni sabbasikkhpadni ~am nma; cf Vin V 99,5 foil); 38,12 (ajjhjivam ~am ca rabbha uppannavivdo nma).

adhiptimokkhe, ind. [adhi + loc. of ptimokkha], concerning the code of discipline; M i l 245,17 (sanghe vivdam janeyyum ajjhjive v -e v; cf Ps IV 38,io: bhikkhu uttarimanussadhammam ullapati patti prjikass ti din nayena parivre cha sikkhpadni tni thapetv sesni sabbasikkhpadni ~am nma). adhipteti1, caus. pr. 3 sg. of adhipatati qv. adhipteti2, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [for *adhipteti ?], splits, cuts; Ja IV 337,14* (psam ca tyham ~ayissam; 337,16': ~ayissan ti chindayissam; or from adhipteti1); Pj II 585,16 (avijj muddh ti... arahattamaggaviij ... tarn muddhnam ~eti; or from adhipteti1); see also adhipta1. adhipekkhimsu in Ee at Ap-a452,28 is prob, wr for adhi-apekkhimsu qv. adhippamodana, n. [from *adhi + pa2 + modati], pleasing; making glad; Th-all 260,3 (abhihsanan ti tosanam appatisrahetutya cittassdhippamodanato, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se cittassbhippamodanato). adhippaysa, m. [cfS. praysa], particular effort; MI 64,24 (ko viseso ko ~o kim nnkaranam, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se adhippyo; Ps II 9,22: ko adhikapayogo) * A I 267,17 (Be so; Ce adhippyo; Ee adhippyoso; Se adhippyaso); see also adhippya1. adhippasanna, mfn. [pp of *adhi + pasidati], very gracious, very well-disposed towards; Ud-a 357,27 (mahmukham ' -kram katv, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se abhippasannataram). adhippg, aor. 3 sg. [o/*adhi + pa2 + Vg], went to; JaV 59,13* (svdhippg Bhradvjo Vidhurassa upantikam; 59,15': so Bhradvjagotto Sucirato adhippg, gato ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adhippgato ti attho) * 61,23** 65,4*. adhippya1, m., 1. [cfS. abhiprya], meaning, intention; wish, desire; Abh766 (ajjhsayo ~o); Vin III 133,21 (attakman ti attano kmam ... attano -am); D II 160,14 (annath kho Vsetth tumhkam ~o annath devatnam ~o); SI 124,31 (uccvac kho purisnam ~); Th542 (evam me kattukmassa ~o samijjhatu); Ja I 83,14 (thero pi bhagavato ~am viditv); III 311,5' (sagge uppajjanti ti ~ena vadati); Niddl 64,8 (sakam ajjhsayam sakam ~am atikkamitum); Pet 92,12 (ettha bhagavato ko ~o); Mil 148,io (~o ti attano mati); Vism 147,15 (yena hi ~ena bhagavat uddeso kato); ifc see anuvijjan-, apaharana-, ek-, k3a-, khumsan-; 2. [cf BHS abhiprya], particular meaning, distinction, difference; MI 64,24 (ko viseso ko ~o kim nnkaranam, Ce, Ee, Seso; Be adhippayso; Ps II 9,22: ko adhikapayogo) * Sil 24,ii (Ce, Ee so; Be adhippayso; Se adhippyaso; Spk II 278,1: ko ~o ti ko adhikapayogo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adhippayso ti) * 11166,4 (Ce so; Be adhippayso; Ee adhippyoso; Se adhippyaso) * A I 267,17 (Ce so; Be adhippayso; Ee adhippyoso; Se adhippyaso); nusandhi,/, meaning and application; Pj II 65,16 (ayam tV ettha padato atthavannan ~ito pana evam veditabb);-ttayika, mfn., having three meanings or interpretations; Sadd 918,2 (atthi padam -am); see also ekdhippyika (sv eka), dvdhippyika (sv dvi), caturdhippyika (sv catufr]).


adhippya2, ind. [absol of *adhi + pa2 + eti1; cfS. abhipraiti], wishing for; aiming at; Ja VI 36,15* (adhippya phalam eke ... payojayanti kammni; cf 36,26': adhippyaphalan ti attano adhippyassa phalam sampassamn); see also adhippeta. adhippyasa, adhippyosa in Ee, Se are prob, wrrfor adhippya1 qv. adhippeta, mfn. [pp o/*adhi + pa2 + eti1; cf S. abhipreta], meant, intended; referred to; aimed at, desired; Vin III 24,12 (ayam imasmim atthe -o bhikkh ti); D I 120,2 (yam vata no ahosi icchitam yam kankhitam yam -am); Vv 81:11 (dibb sadd atho rasa gandh ca te -; Vv-a315,i8: tuyham - yathdhippet manoram, so read with Be, Ce, Se); Ja III 263, ir (sabb makkhikajti -); Mil 148,8 (haccapadan ti suttam -am); Sp 3,15 (idha sakalam vinayapitakam -am); Pv-a52,i6 (c'ettha avicimahnirayassa -tt); anadhippeta, mfn., not meant, not intended; not referred to; Sp 244,22 (tarn pana idha -am); It-aII51,8 (tt); Sadd758,n (tt); see also adhippya2. adhibdhetv in Ee at Ud-a 95,27,30 is prob, wr for adhiptetv (Ce, Se, Ud 8,17 so). adhibrahma(n), m. [adhi + brahma(n)], a superior Brahma; one higher than Brahma; M II 132,2 (kim pana bhante atthi ~ ti, so read with K.R. Norman, 1981a, p. 1501 eds atthi brahm ti); 132,29foil (-narn mayam... bhagavantam apucchimh, -nam bhagav vyksi); see also atibrahma(n), adhideva. adhibhamsu, aor. 3 pl. 0/adhibhavati qv. adhibhavati, adhibhoti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. abhibhavati], overcomes, overpowers; surpasses; A V 248,24 (mnam adhibhoti); Ja II 387,17 (sutthutaram vo ete -issanti); SpkII 403,5 (etam -anti ajjhottharanti); aor. 3 sg. (a) adhibhavi, Ja II 80,23' (ajjhobhavi ti ~i vinsam ppesi, Ee so; Be, Ce ajjhabhavl ti adhi-abhavi; Se abhibhavi); (b) ajjhabhavi, SI 240,12* (m vo kodho ajjhabhavi); Ja II 80,16* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjhobhavi); (c) adhibhosi, S IV 185,32 (evamvihrim ... bhikkhum rp adhibhamsu na bhikkhu rpe adhibhosi); 2 sg. ajjhabh, It 76,6* (yo tvam dujjayam ajjhabh, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce aijhag; It-a II 75,6: abhibhavi ajjhotthari); 3/?/. adhibhamsu, adhibhosum, S IV 185,31 (bhikkhum rp adhibhamsu) quoted Sadd29,32 (adhibhosum); absol. (a) adhibhuyya, Pj I 124,10 (sabbe devamrabrahmno siriy ca tejas ca adhibhuyya, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se adhiggayha); (b) adhibhavitv, JaV 30,r (mam -itv atikkamitv annam manena na patthesi, Ee so; Be abhibhavitv; Ce, Se mam anabhibhavitv... patthesi); Ps IV 16,14 (bhtam attham -itv); (c) adhibhotv, Ap 324,14 (anne deve adhibhotv, Ee so; Ce abhibhotv; Be, Se 'bhibhavitv); Sadd 310,24; (d) adhibhotvna, Ap 504,23 (Eeso; Be, Ce, Se abhibhotvna); Sadd 310,24; pass. pr. 3 sg. adhibhaviyate, Sadd 79,9 (-lyate so ti adhibhto); pp adhibhta, mfn., overpowered; S IV 186,8 (bhikkhu ... ~o anadhibh); Thi 419 (dukkhena ~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr avibht); Sadd 79,9; neg. anadhibhta, mfn., S IV 187,22 (bhikkhu ... adhibh anadhibhto); see also ajjhobhavi, addhabhavati, abhibhavati.

adhibhavana, n. [from adhibhavati; cfS. abhibhavana], subjection; overpowering; Abhll77; Sadd 86,14 (~an ti ajjhottharanam). adhibh, m. [S. lex. id.], one who overpowers; lord, master; conqueror; Abh 725; S IV 187,22 (bhikkhu ... - anadhibhto); ifc see Jana-, mig-; anadhibh, m., not a conqueror; one who does not overcome; SIV 186,8 (adhibhto ~); see also abhibh. adhibhta, mfn.,pp o/adhibhavati qv. adhibhoti, see sv adhibhavati. adhimatta, mfn. [S. adhimtra], above measure, excessive; very great; greater; Vin I 54,34 (upajjhyamhi -am pemam hoti); 82,38 (bhagavati me bhante pabbajite anappakam dukkham ahosi tath Nande -am Rhule); MI 243,22 (~ vt muddhnam hananti); S IV 160,5 (paritt ... rp ...pariydiyant' evssa cittam ko pana vdo -nam); AII 150,2 (indriynam -tt); Ja VI 115,29* (~ dukkh... katuk vedan); PatisII 52,1 (aniccato manasikaroto saddhindriyam -am hoti); Ap 77,19 (sabbesam -am va porisam); Kv 74,23 (kassa - maggabhvan arahato v sotpannassa v ti); Mp III 116,13 (ussho ti tato -taram viriyam); Patis-a 562,37 (-t); am, adv., excessively; very much; Mil274,8 (mahvtoca -amvyati); -kasimna, n., excessive leanness; serious emaciation; MI 80,io (mayham... ekam yeva kolam hram hrayato -am patto kyo hoti; PsII 49,3i: ativiya kisabhavam); 152,8; see also atimatta2. adhimattaka, mfn. [adhimatta + ka2], very great; Sv403,26 (~ya tanhya abhibht, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee adhimattatanhya). adhimana, mfn. [cf S. abhimanas], "having the mind directed towards", intent on, desiring; pleased; not anxious; Vin I 25,25* (sumanamanaso -o manussango, Be, Ce so; Ee avimano; Se na vimano) = Ap-a 549,23* (Be, Se so; Ee avimano; Ce omits); Ja IV 443,22* (vividham - sunom' aham vacanapatham; 443,27': ~ pasannacitt hutv); Pj II 187,27 (manuss ujjhyanti... s - eva hutv, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adhimn); ifc see sagg-; anadhimana, mfn. [cf S. abhimanyate, "intends to injure", abhimna, "intention to injure; pride", and BHS adhimanyati, "despises" 1], not intent on; not hostile; ? not contemptuous; ? Ja V 29,io* (yasm ca me -0 si smi; 30,r: yasm tvam -0 si mam abhibhavitv atikkamitv annam manena na patthesi, Be so; ifetvam adhimano mam adhibhavitv; Ce, Setvam -0 si mam anabhibhavitv anatikkamitv annam manena patthesi); see also abhimana. adhimanasa, mfn. [cf S. abhimanas], pleased; not anxious; Sn 692 (~ bhavtha). adhimana, m. [BHS id.; cf S. abhimna], an undue estimate of oneself, undue confidence in oneself; illusion; conceit; Vin III 91,7 (bhikkh ... ~ena annam vykarimsu) ^ MII 252,17; A III 430,4 (mnam omnam atimnam ~am); Vibh 355,35 foil, (katamo -o); Ps I 183,26 (appatte pattasaiinya ~o uppajjati); Ud-a 83,13 (kilesnam vihatatt -o uppanno, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se arahattdhimno); ifc see sagg-; see also atimna,


abhimna. adhimnasa, mfn. [cfadhimana], intent on; ifc see cga-. adhimnika, mfn. [adhimna + ika], having undue confidence in oneself an undue estimate of oneself; conceited; A V 162,21 (~o kho ayam yasm adhimnasacco; Mp V 55,19: -0 ti anadhigate adhigatamnena samanngato); 169,17 (saddhammesu v ~o hoti); Dhp-aIII 111,12 (sambahule ~e bhikkh rabbha); Patis-a 593,15 (-tt); anadhimnika, mfn., not unduly confident; not conceited; Ps I 182,14. adhimuccati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS adhimucyate], 1. inclines to; believes, is sure of; is convinced; D I 106,2 (Ambattho mnavo ... dvisu mahpurisalakkhanesu kankhati vicikicchati ndhimuccati); SII 84,20 (~atha nikkankh ettha hotha); III 225,9 (ime dhamme evam saddahati ~ati); IV 119,28 (piyarpe rpe ~ati appiyarpe vypajjati; SpkII 399,23: ~ati ti kilesavasena adhimutto hoti); Sn 559 (vinayassu mayi kankham ~assu brhmana) = Th829 (Th-aIII 49,3o: adhimokkham kara, sammsambuddho ti saddaha); Ap 161,21 (sabbarn dhammam abhinnya nnena ~ati); Pet 41,4; Mil 234,18 (loko onamissati okappessati ~issati); 2. concentrates on; pervades (in thought or meditation); wills (magically), changes (by magic); SI 116,32 (kankhamno ... bhagav himavantam pabbatarjam suvannan tv eva ~eyya, suvannam ca pabbat' ass ti); A III 340,30 (bhikkhu iddhim ... drukkhandham pathavi tv eva~eyya); 3. enters another's body; (a) adhimucca(t), mfn., PatisI 183,33 (saddhya ~ato te ky patividit honti); (b) adhimuccanta, mfn., Niddl 40,14 (saddhya ~anto sikkheyya) * PatisI 46,25; (c) adhimuccamna, mfn., AIV 13,16 (cetas ~amno); aor. 3 sg. adhimucci, Vin I 209,8 (Pilindavaccho ... psdam suvannan ti ~i so ahosi sabbo sovannamayo; Sp 709,31 foil.: sovannamayo hot ti adhitthsi); JaV 429,27' (rakkhadevat tass' eva kumrassa mtu sarire ~i); absol adhimuccitv, Mill 101,5 (sahasso ... brahm sahassilokadhtum pharitv ~itv viharati); Ja IV 272,21 (Sakko purohitassa sarire ~itv); Vibh273,3o (pharitv ~itv); Dhp-al 196,19 ([Mro] sakalanagaravsinam sarire ~itv, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr adhimuncitv); neg. anadhimuccitv, Ps II 418,24 (Mro manussnam ... sarire pana anadhimuccitv); pp adhimutta1, mfn. 1. (act.) [BHS adhimukta], who is inclined to; applying oneself (to, ace. or loc); believing in; set on; Vin I 183,26 (so cha tthnni ~o hoti); III 78,12 (saggakatham katheti imam sutv ~o marissati ti); D II 71,i (subhan t' eva ~o hoti); Dhp 226 (nibbnam ~nam attham gacchanti sav); PatisI 91,26 (animittett); ifc see panit-; citta, mfn., whose mind is so inclined, or has such a conviction; Sn 1149 (evam mam dhrehi ~-cittam); neg. anadhimutta, mfn., not inclined (to); not applying oneself to; Niddl 133,23 (ditthasutamutavinntabbe dhammeanissito ... anajjhosito anadhimutto); Ud-a363,8; see also tadadhimuttat; 2. (pass.) inclined to, believed in; Nidd I 64,17 (tassa s ditthi tath samatt ... ajjhosit ~ ti); caus. pr. 3 sg. adhimoceti, makes

incline to; sets on; makes enter (another's body); S V 409,25 (catummahrjikesu devesu cittam ~ehi ti; Spk III 291,29: ~ehi tithapehi); PatisI 167,1 (cittam ... tatth' eva ~eti); absol. adhimocetv, Sv 822,14 (bhagav kira Korakkhattiyam asurayonito netv sarire -etv kathpesi); pp adhimocita, mfn., set on; SV 409,27. adhimuccana, n., ~a, / [from adhimuccati; cf BHS adhimueyan, adhimueyanat], inclining towards; being set on; conviction; willing, changing (by magic); Vibh 165,17 (yo cittassa adhimokkho ~ tadadhimuttat); Vism 176,9 (suvannan ti~); 466,22 (~am adhimokkho); Ps IV 60,6 (vipassan hi pannya -assa kranam); ifc see kiles-; anadhimuccana, n., lack of conviction; Ps III 368,20 (~ -tya). adhimuccita(r), m. [from adhimuccati], one who believes, who is convinced; A III 165,6 (ekacco puggalo parassa vanne v avanne v bhsiyamne tarn khippam yeva ~ hoti) = Pp 65,12 (Pp-a 248,13: ~ hoti ti saddht hon). adhimucchita (sometimes written in mss as adhimuccita), mfn. [pp of *adhi + mucchati; BHS adhimrchita], infatuated; clinging to (loc); SI 113,25* (ettha loko 'dhimucchito); Th732 (na so muccati dukkhamh gandhesu~o; c/*Th-a III 22,4: ~oti adhimuttatanhya muccham panno); Ja III 242,7* (ratto ca ~o ca kmesvham; 242,12': ~o ti ativiya mucchito); anadhimucchita, mfn., not infatuated; not clinging to; Mil 223,10(tasmim ca sukhe ~o hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~e). adhimufleitv in Ce, Ee at Dhp-al 196,19 is wr for adhimuccitv qv sv adhimuccati. adhimutta1, mfn., pp of adhimuccati qv. adhimutta2, mfn. [adhi + mutta1], absolutely free;? Ap 108,28 (anto suddham bahi suddham ~am ansavam sammukh viya sambuddham avandim bodhim uttamam; Ap-a 382,29 foil.: adhi visesena muttam kilesato vimuttam); Pj II 261,6 (nibbne visesena muttatt tanhakkhaye vimuttam, ~an ti vuttam hoti). adhimuttakaml in Be, Ee, Se at A IV 278,7 is prob wr for atimuttaka- qv. adhimutti, / [BHS adhimukti], conviction, intent, inclination; will; freedom;! Abh 766; PatisI 123,5 (tathagato sattnam... caritam jnti ~im jnti) ^ Vibh 340,8 (~im pajnti); Dhs 1367 (vimutti ti dve vimuttiyo, cittassa ca ~i nibbnam ca; As 409,1 foil.: ettha rammane adhimuccanatthena paccanikadhammehi sutthu muttatthena attha sampattiyo cittassa ~i nma); Mil 161,17 (n* es buddhnam ~i); adhimutti in Ce, Ee at D I 174,34 is prob, wr for adhivimutti qv; adhimuttipada, see sv adhivutti; see also kalyndhimuttika, kidisdhimuttika, nndhimuttika, hindhimutta. adhimokkha, m. [from adhimuccati; BHS adhimoksa], faith, conviction; firm resolve, decision; Abh 159 (~o tu nicchayo); MIII 25,18 (chando ~o viriyam); Vibh 165,7foil, (tanhpaccay ~o -paccay bhavo ... yo cittassa ~o adhimuccan tadadhimuttat ayam vuecati tanhpaccay ~o); Vism 471,16 (vicikicchya abhvena pan' ettha ~o uppajjati); 636,16 (~o ti saddh); As 264,3; ifc see laddh- sv labhati.


adhimoceti, caus. pr. 3 sg. o/adhimuccati qv. adhiyitum, adhiyitv, see sv adhiyati. adhirja(n), adhirja, m. [S. adhirjan, adhirja], supreme king; emperor; Ps III 403,6 (rjbhirj ti rjnam pjaniyo ~ hutv, cakkavatti ti adhippyo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atirj); Dhp-alV 235,5* (vihre -ena kritamhi katannun); see also abhirja(n). adhiroha, m. [ts], ascent, ascending; Abhll09; duradhiroha, mfn., hard to ascend; Mil 322,24 (girisikharam -am). adhirohati, pr. 3 sg. [S. adhWruh], rises above, ascends; Sadd 882,29 (~ati). adhirohini, / [ts]9 a ladder; Abh216 (nisseni sdhirohini). adhivacana, n. [S., BHS id.], name, designation; metaphorical expression; near-synonym; Abhll4; D III 84,23 (tathgatassa h' etam ... -am); MI 144,9 foil; S III 109, IO (samo bhmibhgo ramaniyo t i . . . nibbnass' etam -am); A II 125,27 (vattabhayan ti... pancann' etam kmagunnam -am); IV 340,2foil (samano ti... tathgatass' etam -am); Snp. 218,18 (imassa dhammapariyyassa pryanan t' eva -am); Ja I 117,31* (rgass' etam -am rajo ti); Dhs 1306 (...nirutti vyanjanam abhilpo ime dhamm -); Mil 173,15 (tasmim rukkhe adhivatthya devaty' etam -am rukkho ti); Ud-a 304,27 (sammappadhnam viriyass' etam -am); ifc see khandh-; -patha, m., mode of expression; D i l 68,19; S III 71,15; see also adhivuttipada. adhivatta in Ee at Sp374,20 is wr for adhivattha #v sv adhivasati. adhivattati, pr. 3 sg. [S. adhWvrt], comes on; moves over; overwhelms; SI 101,21 (-ati kho tarn mahrja jarmaranam, -amne ca te mahrja jarmarane kirn assa karaniyan ti; Spkl 167,33: -*afi ti ajjhottharati); 102,21* (evam jar ca maccu ca -anti pnino); AII 32,14* (yaso kitti sukham c' etam -ati; Mp III 64,9: -ati avattharati ti attho); see also ativattati. adhivattha1, mfn., pp /adhivasati qv. adhivattha2, mfn., pp 0/adhivseti qv. adhivara, mfn. [adhi+ vara2], most excellent; absolutely superior; Bv-a 12,n (-0 n' assa atthi ti anadhivaro); anadhivara, mfn. and m., unsurpassed; having no superior; the unsurpassed one (the Buddha); Abh 2 (lokantho 'nadhivaro mahesi ca vinyako); Vv 16:4 (iddhi ca te -; Vv-a 80,26 foil: - ti adhik visitth, anna etiss n' atthi ti -a ati-uttam ti attho); Ja IV 233,15* (- buddha; 234,3': -ti atul appameyy); Bv 1:1 (brahm ... katanjali -amaycatha; Bv-a \2,\i foil: ~an ti accantavaro adhivaro n' assa atthi ti -o, na tato adhiko varo atthi ti v -o, anuttaro ti attho); 1:9 (sattuttamo -0 vinyako). adhivasati, pr. 3 .sg.[adhi + vasati2; S. adhWvas], lives in, inhabits (acc); Vv-a 164,27 (imam vimnam -mi); Th-al 234,17 (-iturn); Sadd 717,11 (vihram -ati); adhivasanta, mfn., Th-al 234,12 (geham -antena ranno rjakiccam... ktabbam hoti); aor. 3 sg. ajjhvasi (written separately in tmesis, see .yvajjha); Bv 2:207 (agram ajjha so vasi, Be, Ce, Eeso; Se agram ajjhvasi jino) ^ 3:26 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se agramajjhe) * 4:19 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se agram ajjhvasi so);

absol adhivasitv, Vv-a 136,25 (vasitv ti -itv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr adhivasitv); pp (a) adhivattha1, mfn., 1. (act.) living in, inhabiting (loc); Vin I 28,36 (kakudhe - devat); III 58,13 (tasmim ca sarire peto -0 hoti; Sp 374,2o: -o ti stakatanhya tasmim yeva sarire nibbatto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr adhivatto ti); SI 197,7 (tasmim vanasande - devat); Ja I 223,23 (varanarukkhe ~ devat); Ap 327,n; 2. (pass.) lived in, inhabited; (or n., living in; ?) Spk II 249,10 (yakkhiniytt evam laddhanme vane, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se adhivutthatt); (b) adhivuttha1, mfn., 1. (act.) living in; Ja VI 370, M (chatte devat, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se adhivattha devat); Ap 530,21 (upassaye y 'dhivutth devat, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se 'dhivatth); 2 . (pass.) lived in, inhabited; JaV 418,14' (kanerusanghena ca ~e, ad long cpd at 416,22); 422,32' (etesam vijjdhardinam ganehi ~e, ad long cpd at 420,9); see also adhivseti. adhivaseti inEe at Ps IV 85,12 is wr for adhivseti (Be, Ce, Se so). adhivassanat, anadhivassanat, in Be, Ce, Ee at Pet 203,24-5 are prob, wrrfor ativassanat etc qqv. adhivaha, mfn. {from adhivahati], bringing; Spk II 381,20 (sukhdhivh ti... - ti pi ptho, es' ev' attho). adhivahana, n. [from adhivahati], bringing; Mp I 53,19 (jti-dinam -ato dukkhdhivaham, Be, Se so; Ce vahanato dukkhvaham; Ee vahanato dukkhv ham). adhivahati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + vahati; cf S. adhiVvah], carries to; brings; Mp I 53,13 (dukkham -ati harati ti dukkhdhivaham, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee vahati harati ti dukkhvaham); caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. adhivhiyati, Mp I 53,15 (lokuttarapdakajjhndi ariyadhammbhimukham dukkhena -ati pesiyati ti dukkhdhivaham). adhivsa 1 , m. [ts], dwelling; acquiescence; enduring, tolerating; Abh 958 (vse dhpdisankhre 'dhivso sampaticchane); ifc see khuda-; duradhivsa, mfn., I. hard to live in; T h i l l (- geh, eds so, perhaps better duradhivas, see K.R. Norman, 1969, p. 147; Th-al 234,17: geh nam' ete adhivasitum vasitum dukkh dukkar ti katv -); 2. hard to endure; Mp IV 24,17 (dukkhamam khamati ti... -am adhivseti); It-all 117,30 (samparyiko [anudahanabhvo] ... ghorataro -0 ca); Th-al 234,29 (gharvsnam tya); su-adhivsa, mfn. or n., easy to endure; or: endurance (is) easy; Ja III 524,24' ([arannamhi] sutitikkhan ti -am, Ee so; Ce sutthu adhivsam; Be, Se sutthu adhivsanam). adhivsa 2 , m. [ts], perfuming; perfume; Abh 958 (vse dhpdisankhre 'dhivso). adhivsaka, adhivsika, mfn. [from adhivseti], enduring, bearing patiently; tolerating; Ja IV 77,4' (dutthavacannam -0 hoti); Mp III 335,20 (khamo ti -0); -jtika, mfn., enduring or patient by nature; VinIV 130,n (sririknam vedannam dukkhnam... pnaharnam -o hoti) = MI 10,30 ^ Niddl 487,6 (adhivsikajtiko); anadhivsaka, anadhivsika, mfn., not patient; not enduring; Mp III 273,20; --jtika, mfn., not enduring by nature; naturally impatient; Ja III 369,16 (--jtikatya, Ce, Ee so; Be anadhivsana-; Se jtitya); IV 11,22' (--jtikassa, Be,


Se so; Ce, Ee anadhivsika-). adhivsana, n., ~, / [BHS id.], 1. forbearance; endurance; MI 10,24 (katame... sav ~ pahtabb); A III 387,22/0//. (ye asav ~ pahtabb te ~ya pahin honti); Ja IV 76,7* (~am sotthnam tad hu; 77,6': idam ~am ... sotthnam ... pandit vadanti); V 379, r (avihims ~ khanti); 2. assent; acceptance (esp. of an invitation); Vin II 102,6 (ajjhupagamanam ~ apatikkosan); D I 109,26 (bhagavato -am viditv) * MI 236,15; Ja VI 588,3 (mahasatto sdh ti sampaticchi, ath' assa -am viditv ...); Ap 39,15 (~am aniiya sabbannussa mahesino bhojanam patiydetv klam rocayim aham); Mhv 30:2; ifcsee isam-; adhivsanat, / , abstr., forbearance; Dhs 1341 (khanti khamanat ~ acandikkam); anadhivsana, n., ~ , / , lack of forbearance; lack of tolerance; Vibh 360,2 (y akkhanti akkhamanat anadhivsanat candikkam ...); It-all 174,26 (kmavitakkkdmam ~ena); Vibh-a505,3i (akkhantiy ti ~ya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ~). adhivsita, mfn., pp 0/adhivseti qv. adhivsiyati in Be, Ee at Pet 204,4 is prob, wr for ativassiyati qv sv ativassati. adhivseti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS adhivsayati, adhivseti], is patient, waits; bears patiently, endures; assents, gives in to; accepts (an invitation); Vin I 17,28 (~etu me bhante ajjatanya bhattam); II284,is (te sat sampajn ~enti); D I 109,23 (~etu... bhattam); MI 453,9 (so te ~eti na ppajahati na vinodeti); II 104,13 (~ehi tvam brhmana); Ja 1254,20 (yadi vo dhanena attho, ~ethatad dhanavassam vasspessmi ti); IV 279,4 (yva etesam gocaragahanam ~essmi ti); Dhp-a I 441,5 (yuttam ce ~etha no ce m ~ayitth ti); opt. 3 sg. (a) adhivsaye, Ud45,30* (sutvna vkyam pharusam udiritam ~aye bhikkhu adutthacitto); (b) adhivsayeyya, Sn966 (sitam accunham ~ayeyya); (c)adhivseyya, DU 115,33 (dve va te vc tathagato patikkhipeyya atha tatiyakam ~eyya); (a) adhivsenta, m/(~enti)w., Ud 21,7 (vedanam ~ento); Dhp-a IV 193,5 (tarn dukkham -enti); neg. anadhivsenta, mfn., Vin II 16,33; Ja IV 235,19* (tarn vacanam anadhivsento); (b) adhivsaya(t), mfn., MI 10,3i (~ayato); Spkll 177,4 (nimantanam -ayato); neg. anadhivsaya(t), mfn., MI 10,3i (anadhivsayato); (c) adhivsayanta, mfn., Ja IV 330,5* (khudam pipsam ~ayanto); neg. anadhivsayanta, mfn., Vv 84:8 (div pipsam 'nadhivsayant; Vv-a 337,7: anadhivsayanta ti adhivsetum asakkont); (d) adhivsayamna, mfn., Ps II 227,n; aor. 3 sg. (a) adhivsesi, Vin I 212,37 (~esi bhagav tunhibhvena); Ap39,n; Mil 15,2i; (b) ajjhavsayi, Th906 (asallinena cittena vedanam ajjhavsayi); 3 pi. (a) adhivsesum, Vin II 16,H; (b) adhivsayimsu, Ja IV 368,9 (nimantanam ~ayimsu); absol. (a)adhivsetv, Jail 352,is (dve svan -etv); Ap 185,s; Vism 398,29; Mil 9,25; neg. anadhivsetv, Ps II 402,20 (ekam pi divasam v rattim v anadhivsetv); (b) adhivsayitv, Ps III 66,10 (tpas -ayitv, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ~etv); Mhv 1:67 (~ayitv bhagav); pp (a) adhivattha2, mfn., accepted, consented to; D I 226,4 (~am ca pana tena

bhagavat; Ee so; Be, Ce adhivuttham; Se adhivuttham); (b) adhivuttha2, mfn., \.{act.) having accepted (an invitation); Vin I 232,25 (~o 'mhi... Ambapliy ganikya bhattan ti); 2. (pass.) accepted, consented to; D II 97,14 (~am kho me... Ambapliganikya bhattan ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adhivsitam); MII 50,26 (adhivuttho me vassvso ti); (c) adhivsita, mfn. [BHS id.], accepted; Dhp-a III 470,13 (nimantanam ~an ti iiatv); anadhivsitatta, n., abstr., the not accepting; the fact of lack of acceptance; Sp 814,10; fpp adhivsetabba, mfn., Vin I 103,29; Ja III 465,13 (dukkham nma uppannam ~am ev ti); Mil 94,12 (chiddamdisv~am); Vism 343,5 (gandho pi ... ~o hoti); neg. anadhivsetabba, mfn., Ps II 102,12; caus. pr. 3 sg. adhivspeti, Ja I 254,22 (amhe afinam samvaccharam ~esi ti); V200, is (yva pitu gaman ~etum); VI 351,19 (ekadivasamattam ~et ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ~etum vattati ti). adhivha, mfn. [from adhivahati], carrying; bringing; ifc see dukkh-, sukh-. adhivhana, mfn. [from adhivahati], bringing; being brought; Spkl 255,22 (yogakkheman ti nibbnam vuccati, tarn adhikicca vhiyati abhimukham v vhiyati ~am, yogakkhemassa -am) ^ Pj II 150,5; ifc see yogakkhem-. adhivhanaka, mfn. [adhivhana + ka2], bringing, who brings (abundantly); Spkll 381,20 (sukhdhivh honti ti... adhikasukham vahan honti ~ honti, adhivah ti pi ptho, Ee so; Ce, Se vahanak honti ~ honti; Be adhikasukham vahanak honti adhivah ti pi...). adhivhi(n), mfn. [from adhivahati], bringing; ifc see dukkh-. adhivimutti, / and ind. [adhi + vimutti], higher, superior release; as to release; D I 174,34 (yvat ariy param vimutti nham tattha attano samasamam samanupassmi kuto bhiyyo, atha kho aham eva tattha bhiyyo yadidam ~i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee adhimutti, prob, wr; Sv 360,3: tadangavikkhambhanavimuttiyo vimutti nma, samucchedapatipassaddhinissaranavimuttiyo pana paramavimutti veditabb). adhivutti,/ [from *adhi + Vvac; cf S. ukti], expression, saying; theory; Sv 104,2 = Ps IV 16,15 ^ MpV 18,8foil. (~iyo tihi adhivacanam vuccanti... atha v... ~iyo ti ditthiyo vuccanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adhimuttiyo); -pada, n. expression, saying; opinion, theory; D I 13,i (anekavihitni ~ni abhivadanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adhimutti-)* Mil 228,14; (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adhimutti-); A V 36,25 (ye te ... dhammtesam tesam ~nam abhinn sacchikiriyya samvattanti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se adhimutti-; MpV 18,7foil.: ~nan ti adhivacanapadnam, khandhyatanadhtudhammnan ti attho... atha v bhtam attham abhibhavitv yathsabhvato agahetv vattanato adhivuttiyo ti ditthiyo vuccanti adhivuttinam padni ~ni ditthidipakni vacanni ti attho); see also adhivacana. adhivuttha1, mfn., pp o/adhivasati qv. adhivuttha2, mfn., pp o/adhivseti qv. adhisayana, mfn. [S. adhiSayana], lying or sleeping on; sitting on; Pv-a 80,25 (tarn yeva mancam viya~ti attho); Q)-a 233,15 (parisedanattham c' eva paribhvanattham ca


samma-d-eva klena klam mamam -vasena phusantiy ... mtuy). adhisayita, mfn., pp o/adhiseti qv. adhisara, m. [c/atisara ?], an offence, a transgression', {or: an offender; ?); JaV 117,5* (m te -e munca sublham adhikopitam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee avisare... adhikodhitam, prob, wr; \\9,\'foil.: tava hadayam kusalam adhisaritv atikkamitv pavatte paresam akusalakamme sutthu blham adhikopitam kujjhpitam hutv m munca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee avisaritv). adhisaritv, ind. [absol. o/*adhi + sarati; cf atisarati ?], overstepping; transgressing;! JaV 119,2' (kusalam adhisaritv atikkamitv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee avisaritv, prob. wr). adhisallikhati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + sallikhati], is overscrupulous; MI 449,12 (-atevyam samano ti; Ps III 165,22: atisallekhati ativymam karoti) * A I 236,30 (Mp II 353,6: -ateti ativiya sallikhati). adhisila, n. [BHSadhisila; see BHSD sv giks], a higher or superior form of moral behaviour; PatisI 46,16 (samvaraprisuddhi -am); Niddl 143,3 (bhgi v bhagav... ~assa adhicittassa adhipanny ti); Mp II 345,29foil, (pancasilam silam nma, tarn updya dasasilam -am nma, tarn pi updya catuprisuddhisilam -am nma... sabbam pi lokiyam silam silam eva, lokuttaram -am). adhisilam, ind. [prob. adhi + ace. of sila; taken by cts as ace. of adhisila], as regards moral behaviour; Vin III 235,3 (bhikkhuniyo... rincanti uddesam paripuccham -am adhicittam adhipannam); D I 174,I8 (yvat... ariyam paramam silam nham tattha attano samasamam samanupassmi kuto bhiyyo, atha kho aham eva tattha bhiyyo yadidam -am; Sv 359,12: yadidam -an ti yam etam uttamasilan ti attho); A I 236,8* (-am adhicittam ca adhipannam ca viriyav); Nidd I 149,5 (-am pi sikkheyya adhicittam pi sikkheyya adhipannam pi sikkheyya). adhisilasikkh, / [adhisilam (or adhisila) + sikkh], training in (higher) moral behaviour; Vin III 24,13 (tisso sikkh - adhicittasikkh adhipaMsikkh; Sp244,iyb//.: ~ ti adhikam uttamam silan ti -am... pumokkhasamvarasilam pana -an ti vuecati) * D III 219,13; MI 324,28(tibbpekh hoti -ya adhicittasikkhya adhipannsikkhya); Spkl 104,18 (purimapadena hi adhisilasikkh kathit dutiyapadena adhipannsikkh cittavpasamena ~ ti evam imya gthya sakalam pi ssanam paksitam eva hoti). adhisile, ind. [prob, adhi + loc. of sila; taken by cts as loc. of adhisila], in regard to morality; Vin I 63,33 (- silavipanno hoti; c/Sp989,2o: prjikam ca sanghdisesam ca panno ~e silavipanno nma); 70,16 (na tibbacchando hoti... - e adhicitte adhipanny; cfSp 993,2: ~e ti ptimokkhasile); M i l 9,15 (mama svak ~e sambhventi); A III 133,1 (attan ca silasampanno hoti no param ~e sampavatt hoti; Mp III 279, is: param silabhvena garahatina upavadati); V 73,15 (patibalo hoti -e samdapetum; Mp V 34,22: -e ti uttamasile); Vibh 325,25 (ptimokkhasamvarasamvutassa y uppajjati panfi ... ayam vuecati -e pann). adhiseti 1 , adhisayati, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + seti1; S. adhiVsl],

lies down on; MI 173,31 (rannako mago baddho psarasim adhisayayeyya); Dhp41 (aciram vat' ayam kyo pathavim adhisessati); Sadd 882,29 (adhisayati); pp adhisayita, mfn. and n.. [S. adhisayita], \.(mfn.) lain on, sat on (usually of eggs); Vin HI 3,32 (andni... kukkutiy samm -ni) ^ S III 153,15; Ps II 128,19 (ngena -am dhanam); 2. (n.) lying on, sitting on; PsII 193,28 (migassa pana abaddhassa psarasim klo viya). adhiseti 2 , adhisseti, pr. 3 sg. [adhi + sen2], 1. has recourse to, resorts to; Sn671 (yam yam disatam ~eti; Pj II 481,5: -ti ti gacchati, abhisetiti pi ptho, tattha yam yam disam alliyati apassayati ti attho); 2. [S. adhiVsri], puts on the fire; absol. adhissayitv, Ja III 425,18* (kumbhim adhissayitv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee apassayitv, prob, wr; 425,21': pacanathlikam manussasisuddhanam ropetv). adhisevana, ., or - , / [from *adhi + sevati; cfS. abhisevana], practising, cultivating; Nidd-a I 121,33 (anne pana '-atthena eratthena... sivatthena silan ti vannayanti) = Patis-a 15,30. adhissara, m. [S. adhi^vara], supreme lord; Mhv 80:59 (catuvisatiy yodhasahassnam -o). adhihnpago in Ee at Sp 704,26 is wr for adhitthnpago (Be, Ce, Se so). adhita, mfn., pp o/adhiyati qv. adhina, mfn. [ts], depending on; subject to; Abh728; Ja V 350,16* (yam khaldha[m] mamdhinam vase vattati kincanam, so read with CPD ? Ce khalu dhammam -am vaso; Be, Ee, Se khalu dhammam dhinam vaso); Sv 212,26 (anattdhino tina attani -o, attano ruciy kinci kturn na labhati); ifc see att- (^v atta[n]), para-. adhiyati, adhiyyati (sometimes written adhiyati), adhite, ajjheti1, pr. 3 sg. [S. adhyeti, adhite, adhiyate; Ved. adhiyati], studies; reads; learns by heart; Vin IV 204,9 (yo cyam mantam vceti yo cdhammen' -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adhiyyati); SI 202,29* (kasm tuvam dhammapadani bhikkhu ndhiyasi bhikkhhi samvasanto); Ja III 28,22* (yo ca mantam -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhammam); 218,26* (sabbam sutam -etna); VI458,19* (dibbam -ase myam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adhiyase); 458,24* (-anti mahrja dibbamy' idha pmityBe, Ce, Ee so; Se adhiyanti) quoted Sadd 322,30 (adhiyanti); Ap 343,i (mante -ami); 369,14 (mante ajjhetukmo); Mil 164,2 (rjakumro purohitassa santike vijjam -ati); Sv 247,31 (padam tadavasesam ca vyakaranam -ati vedeti ca t i ) ^ Pj II 447,22 (ajjheti); Ps IV 69,io (tayo pi ved na sakk ekadivasen' eva -itum, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se adhiyitum); Dhp-aIII446,i (tassa santikam gantv -ass ti); Ap-a 430,14/0//. (ajjheti cinteti ti ajjhyi... sissnam savanadhrandivasena hitam ajjheti cinteti ajjhyam karoti ti ajjhyako); As 111,34 (tasmim hi -itum raddhe te pi -anti); Sadd 815,10 (kim nu khalu bho dhammam -eyyam udhu vinayan ti); 883,2 (vyakaranam adhite); adhiyati in Ee at Asl22,i6 is wr for adhiyati qv jvdahati); (a)adhiyanta, mfn., Vin I 270,9 (satta ca me vassni -antassa na-y-imassa sippassa anto pannyati ti); (b) adhiyamna, mfn., A III 224,21 (brhmano... komrabrahmacariyam carati mante


~amno); Ja IV 496,10* (vijjdhar ghoram ~amn; 498,33': ghoram nma vijjam ~ant); As 111,32; adhiyamn in Ee at As 273,21 is prob, wr for attiyamn (Se so) or attiyamn (Be, Ce so); absol (a)adhicca 1 , [S. adhitya], Ja IV 301,4* (kittim hi pappoti adhicca vede); VI 213,19* (candlaputto pi adhicca vede bhseyya mante kusalo); (b) adhiyitv, D I 96,6 (mante ~itv, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se adhiyitv); A III 224,23; JaIV 185,ir (svittim ca ~itv); (c)adhiyna(m), JaV 450,14* (brhmano ca ~na vedam akkhnapancamam bhiyyo pi sutam iccheyya, Be, Ce so; Ee adhiynam; Se adhiyno; 451,9': ~n ti sajjhyitv; cfW.B. Bollee, 1970, p. 113); pp adhita, mfn. [ts], having studied; learned; Ap 411,13 (~ vedag, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adhit); caus. opt. 3 sg. (a) ajjhpaye, would teach, instruct; Abh411 (vedam ajjhpaye dvijo); (b) ajjhpeyya, Sadd 815,9 (ajjhitthe [sattami]: ajjhpeyya mnavakam kc di); fpp (a) adhiyitabba, mfn., Ja III 219,8' (sabbam adhiyitabbam); (b) ajjhetabba, mfn., Pj II 456,21 (vede sajjhyantehi pathamam ajjhetabbato svitti chandaso mukhan ti vutt, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sajjhyitabbato); see also Sadd S62,\2foll. (ajjhayitabbam ajjheyyam bhavat ajjhayaniyam); see also ajjhpana, ajjhyati, ajjheti2, adhiyna. adhiyna, mfn. and m. [ts], reading, studying; a student; Ja V 450,14* (brhmano ca ~o vedam akkhnapancamam, reading suggested by W.B. Bollee, 1970, p. 113; Se adhiyno; Ee adhiynam; Be, Ce adhiyna); see also adhiyati. adhlrita, mfn. \pp o/*adhi + irati], uttered, pronounced; Sadd 619,io. adhisa, m. [S. adhi&a], lord; ruler; ifc see sura-. adhun, ind. [ts], just now, lately, quite recently; (perhaps with pp always to be taken as cpd); Abh 1140; Vin II 185,23 (upatthko ~ klankato); Ja III 181.8 (ye ~ imam rjnam gantv); Vism 37,28 (~ pabbajitena); Mp I 429,19 (~ pi kusalam karissm ti); II 343,2 (~ va suriyo pannyittha, so idn* eva atthamito); Ud-a379,i8(idniti ~); Dth2:94; bhisitta, mfn., recently inaugurated; DII 227,2 (rj khattiyo muddhvasitto ~o rajjena); '-gata, mfn., newly arrived (at); being a newcomer (to); Vin I 40,20 (aham kho vuso navo acirapabbajito ~o imam dhammavinayam); MI 457,32 (bhikkh nav acirapabbajit ~ imam dhammavinayam); Ja II105,12 (~o uyynaplo); '-utthita, mfn., just arisen; Mil 155,10 (~ena Mrena ppimat); 0, -papanna, mfn., recently reborn; D II 221.9 (dev ... ~ tvatimsaky, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr adhunuppann). adho, ind. [S. adhas], below, down; downwards (one of the ten dis); downstream; Abh 1156; Vin III 49,19 (uddham v ~o v tiriyam v... sankmeti); D I 96,15 (yadi -0 khurappam muncissati); MII 76,9 (uddham ~o tiriyam); Sn 1122 (dis catasso vidis catasso uddham ~o dasa disat imyo); Thi 33 (uddham pdatal amma ~o ce kesamatthak); Ja VI 224,24* (katham c' eke adhammatth patanti nirayam ~o); Nidd I 366,13 (uddham olokento ~o olokento disvidisam pekkhamno); Vibh 272,5 (mettsahagatena cetas ... uddham -0 tiriyam ... pharitv

viharati); Vism 394,23 (~o otaritukmassa); 0, -akkha, mfn. andn. [adho+ akkha1], (what is) below the collar-bone; VinV 87,2* (in uddna: ~-gmavassut, Be, Se, Sp 1306,24 so; Ce adhakkhaka-; Ee adhakkhakam); Kkh 37,27 (~am ubbhajnumandalam dissa, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be adhakkhakam); 0, -akkhaka, mfn. and n., (what is) below the collarbone; Vin III 129,36 (~am ubbhajnumandalam dissa vannam pi bhanati); Sp902,i6 (~e ubbhajnumandale kyappadese); Vin-vn 357; 1969 (~am sarirakam yad ubbhajnumandalam); Utt-vn 18; am, adv., below the collar-bone; Vin IV 213,35 (~am ubbhajnumandalam masanam); '-agga,m/h. [adho + agga1], with the point downwards; JaV 156,1* (uddhagg ca ~ ca... dant); -kata, mfn. \pp of *adho + karoti], turned down, upside down; Ja I 20,16* (kumbho ... ~o) = Bv2:119; -katv, -karitv, ind. [absol. of *adho + karoti], turning, bending downwards; putting down; Ja VI 298,5' (siram -katv hetthmukho va dhoveyya); Nidd-a II 99,23 (oropayitv ti -karitv); -kotika, mfn. [adho+ koti + ka2], with the point downwards; Pj I 44,15 (dant... ~); -kkhandha, mfn., with shoulders downwards, headfirst; Ja V 269,19* (te patanti ~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adhakkhandh; 275,14': adhosisak patanti); -gangam, ind., down the Ganges; Jail 329,19 (~am gantv); -gangya, ind., down-stream on the Ganges; Ja II283,13; -gata, mfn., gone down; gone by; passed; Ja VI 187,30* (supinam tta addakkhim ito msam ~am); Nidd-aII 99,24; -gama, mfn., going downwards; Abh 38 (vyubhed ime choddhangamo cdhogamo ...); MI 188,29 (uddhangam vt ~ vt); Sil 87,27 (mlni ~ni); T h l l 7 4 (~am jimhapatham kumaggam anudhvati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr acankamam); -gamaniya, mfn. [adho+ gamaniya2], tending to go downwards; JaV 273,12' (tena ~ena kammena adho nirayam eva gacchati); -galam, ind., down the throat; Pv-a 104,21 (udakam tassa petassa ppabalena ~am na otinnam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr udho-); -gmi(n), mfn., going downwards, going downstream; Vin IV 64,32 (ekam nvam abhirheyya uddharngminimv ~inim v); S IV 313,29(y sakkhar ... s ~i assa); -cri(n), m. [cf S. adha^cara], a thief; Sadd 423,20 (ocarako ti ~I); -jnumandala, n., what is below the knee-cap; Vin III 130,5 (ubbhakkhakam ~am dissa); Sp 902,12; Vin-vn 360 (~e pi ayam nayo); ~am, adv., below the knee-cap; Vin IV 215,4; -nbhi, -nbhim, ind. andn., below the navel; what is below the navel; Vin IV 172,15 (yassa ~i ubbhajnumandalam kandu v pilak v); V216, is* (~im vivajjiya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ~i) ^ Utt-vn 679 (~im); 0 -patana, n., falling down; Dhtup455 (bhasa -); -pata, m., falling down; Dhtum 695 (bhasa ~e); -bhaga, m., the lower part; the lower part of the body, the anus; MI 423,9 (yena ca asitapitakhyitasyitam ~ nikkhamati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ~am; ~am perhaps adv., downwards;! Ps III 139, I: yena hetth nikkhamati) * Vibh 84,34 (eds -am); AIV 132,12 (lohagulam ... antam pi antagunam pi dya ~ nikkhameyy ti,


Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -am); JaVI 110,13' (tarn... -ena nikkhamati); Sv 274,23 (nagarapkrassa -e); Ps IV 235,26 (~ena ekam lohaslam pavisitv); -bhgiya, mfn., connected with below; lower; Vism 683,3 (sakkyaditthi... patigho ti ime pafica adhonibbattanakakhandhdisamyojakatt samyojanni nma); -bhvangamaniya, mfn., tending to go downwards (to lower existences); M I 44,33 (ye keci akusal dhamma sabbe te -); -bhuvana, n., the lower world, the Nga world; Abh 649; -mukha, m/(~i)n., with the face downward; with head bent; facing downward; -am, adv., downwards; Vin II 78,24 (mankubht pattakkhandh - pajjhyant); Vv 16:1 (hay - aghasigam); Vism 254,24 (-am katv); Spkl 48,6 (upari thatv -am dinnapahro); Ps III 422, I (na may ... -ena pramiyo prit); Thi-a 97,35 (s ... no ce marissmi ti sayane -4 nipajji); anadhomukhat,/, abstr., not having the head bent; Pj I 34,8; -mukhikarana, n., making face downwards; Sadd 349,23 (kujja ~e); -vtam, -vate, ind., downwind; Vin II 218,36 (-e senasanam pappothetabbam); Ja III 85,2 (~e thatv); 233,3 (-am yhi ti); V 138,22 (isinam ~e nisinnam); -virecana, n., purging; a purgative; D I 12,7 (uddhavirecanam -am); -sira, mfn., with the head downward; headfirst; M III 166,29 (tarnenam ... nirayapl uddhampdam -am thapetv); Ja IV 194,2 (tarn uddhapdam -am katv); V 271,30' (uddhampd ~ patanti); am, adv., with bowed head; with head bent; Ja VI 298, i* (dhove pade -am); -sisa, -sisaka, mfn. [adho + sisa1 (+ ka2)], with the head downward; headfirst; Ja I 233,6 (-o patamno); JaV 275, w (-sisak patanti); Ap 41,23 (pannagam so gahetvna -am vihethayam); -sote, ind., down-stream; Sp 1047,25. an-, the negative prefix a3 before vowels. ana1- [cfAiGrll.l, 32b; AMg ana-, R. Pischel, 1900, 77], a doubled negative prefix; see anappameyya, anabhva, anamatagga, anavosita. ana2, n. [S. anas], a cart; Abh 373 (sakato py-am). anakkhika, mfh. [a3 + akkhi1 + ka2, S. anaksika], eyeless; blind; Dhp-al 11,3 (anamataggasmim hi samsravatte tava -klassa ganan n' atthi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se akkhiknassa). anagamanena in Ee at It-a II 87,8 is wr for anugamanena {Be, Ce, Se so). anagriya1, mfn., see sv agrika. anagriya2 {and anagriya), n. [from anagra; cf BHS anagriya, angrik], the homeless state, homelessness; the life of a wandering ascetic; Vin I 9,18 (yass* atthya kulaputt samma-d-evaagrasm-am pabbajanti); D I 18,26 (agrasm -am pabbajati); MI 16,22 (saddh agrasm -am pabbajit; Ps I lll,i4/o//.: -an ti pabbajjam bhikkhubhvam ca, pabbajj pi hi n' atth' ettha agriyan ti anagriya, agrassa hitam kasigorakkhdikammam ettha n' atthi ti attho, bhikkhu pi n' atth' assa agran ti anagro, anagrassa bhvo -am); SI 196,15* (tassham dhammam sutvna pabbajim ~am); A I 49, n (agrasm -am pabbajitnam); Sn274 (pabbajito pi ce hoti agrasm -am); Pv 25:17 (s ca pabbajit sant agrasm -am); Ap 355,19 (nikkhamim -am); Mil 420, is.

anagriyatam inEe, Se at DIII 160,12* is prob, wr for anagratam qv sv agra. anaggapakkhika, m(fn). [a3 + agga1 + pakkhika], (one) who does not accept first portions or first fruits (a class of ascetics); Sv270,2i (atthavidh hi tpas saputtabhariy unchcariy - . . . , Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anaggipakkik; Sv-pt 1400, A foil: aggapakkhena jivanti ti aggapakkhM, na aggapakkhik -, unchcariy... khalaggam nma manussehi diyyamnam dhannam ganhanti, tarn ime na ganhanti ti - nma jt) ^ Pj II 295,9 {eds anaggipakkik); Sv270,30 (ye khalena khalam vicaritv vihim haritv kottetv paribhunjanam nma ayuttan ti gmanigamesu tandulabhikkham gahetv pacitv paribhunjanti te - nma, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anaggipakkik). anaggipakka, n. [a3 + aggi + pakka], food not cooked on afire; raw food; Ja IV 8,13 (dantamusaliko hutv -am eva khdanti). anaggipakkik, mifn). {from anaggipakka], {one) who eats food not cooked on afire, who eats raw food (or food not cooked by others 1) (a class of ascetics); Sv 270,21 (atthavidh hi tpas saputtabhariy unchcariy - ..., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anaggapakkhika; see Ee fn 4: mss anaggi-; cf Sv-pt 1400,4 foil: aggapakkhena jivanti ti aggapakkhik, na aggapakkhik anaggapakkhika, unchcariy ... khalaggam nma manussehi diyyamnam dhannam ganhanti, tarn ime na ganhanti ti anaggapakkhika nma jt) * Pj II 295,9 (295, is: - ti aggin apakkam pattaphaldim khditv ypent); Sv270,30 (ye khalena khalam vicaritv vihim haritv kottetv paribhunjanam nma ayuttan ti gmanigamesu tandulabhikkham gahetv pacitv paribhunjanti te - nma, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anaggapakkhika). anagghaniya, mfn., neg.fpp o/agghati qv. anagghta, see sv ghta. anagghika, mfn. [a3 + aggha1 + ika {or for anagghiya^v svagghati); cf S. anarghya], priceless; Mhv 27:38 (psdachattapallankamandapsum -). anacchariya1, mfn., see sv acchariya. anacchariya2, mfn. [possibly old error for *ancariya, "not coming from a teacher", cf BHS anScarya, n. and CPDI p. 144; or anacchariya < *an-aksar-ik, "unarticulated", see O. von Hinber, 1970, pp. 5foil; cts explain as anu-acchariya); spontaneous, original; unarticulated (before); Vin I 5,6 (api ssu bhagavantam im ~ gthyo patibhamsu pubbe assutapubb; Sp 961,30: - ti anu-acchariya); MI 79,28 (mam ... ayam - gth patibhsi pubbe assutapubb); III 144,20 (rjakumrassa im catasso upam patibhsissanti ~ pubbe assutapubb); SI 136,19 (im - gthyo patibhamsu pubbe assutapubb, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr im acchariy). anacchdi(n), mfn. [from acchdeti], without a covering; ? Pj I 49,22 (anacchdikatakhajjrikakalirasanthnam, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce apanitatacakhajjri-; Se acchditatacakhajjri-; * Vism 254,13: eds apanitatacasindikalirasanthnam). anajjhbhva, m, anajjhbhvan, / [from ajjhbhavati?], weakness; ineffectiveness;! Pet35,10 (nndhimutt keci kmesu keci dukkarakriyam ... keci


samsrena suddhim paccenti keci anajjhbhvan ti, Ee so; Be anajjbhvan; Ce anavajjabhvany ti); 40,19 (anajjhbhvo ca kammnam, eds so). anajjhvutthaka, mfn. [anajyhvuttha (neg. pp of ajjhvasati) + ka2], not used; not owned; Sp 349,18 (-am dni idan ti pamsuklasafinya ganhato; Sp-t[ite]II 148,19: apariggahitakam, assmikan ti attho); 562,33 (arannato harpentena ca sabbam -am harpetabbam); Vin-vn 387. anajjhottharaniya, mfn., neg.fpp o/ajjhottharati qv. anafifiatha, m/h., see sv annath. anatthika, mfn. [a3 + atthi + ka2; anasthika], boneless; without a stone or kernel; It-al 84,19 (~e ca khuddakattabhve); Sp 1102,io (-ehi kadaliphalehi katapnam) = Nidd-a I 396, is; see also atthika3. anana, (in Be, Se often written anana), mfn. [a3 + ina; S. anrna], free from debt; free from sin; independent; Vin I 6,3* (satthavha -a vicara loke) * SI 233,33* (pannabhra -a); 93,30 (pucchitabbo ... manusso si puriso si bhujisso si -0 si na si rjabhato anuiinto si mtpithi...); Mil 105,16* (-0 bhunjmi bhojanam; Ps III 343,i4/o//.: kilesa-inanam abhavam sandhya -o ti vuttam, anino ti pi ptho); Thi 364 (syam bhujiss ~ bhikkhuni; Thi-a228,32: kmacchanddi-inpagamena -); Ja VI 18,18* (~assa hi pabbajj); 36,1* (~o ntinam hoti devnam pituno ca); Spklll 43,\ foil, (pabbajj ca nam' es -ass' eva rhati, - pabbajj ca buddhdihi samvannit ti, Ee so; Be, Se ... sa-inassa na ruhati anan pabbajj ...; Ce sa-inassa na rhati -ass' eva rhati...); Mp III 378,28 (sabbesam -nam khinsavo uttamaanano); see also anina (sv ina), nanya. anata, n. [S. anrta]; a falsehood; -bhsana, n., speaking a falsehood; lying; Sadd542,i2 (kudi ~e: kundeti). anati, pr. 3 sg. [S. aniti, anati], breathes; lives; Dhtup 176 (ana pnane); Dhtum256; Sadd399,2i (ana pnane:... ~ati nam pnam); Pj I 124,23 (balanti -anti ti bl assasitapassasitamattena jivanti; Ee so; Be, Ce assasantT ti; Se na jnanti ti). anaticariy, / [cf aticarati], non-transgression; faithfulness; D i l i 190,6 (smikena... bhariy paccupatthtabb ... avimnanya ~ya ...); Vv-a 130,2 (upatthnena-ya ca,ite, Ce, Seso; Ee~). anattikat in Ee at Pet 171,20 is wrfor anatthikat (Be, Ce so). anatthaka, mfn. [a3 + attha2 + ka2; S. anarthaka], of no meaning or use; hurtful; Vin I 345,28 (aho me ~o, na hi nma me koci rocessati ti, Ce, Ee, Se so, prob, wr; Be anatthato; Sp 1150,2i/o//.: anatthato ti anattho ato, etasm me puris anattho ti vuttam hoti, atha v anatthato ti anatthado; ^ Sadd 639,i4/o//.); Sp 398,7 (kim me -ena anayavyasanena sutena, Be, Se so; Ee anatthikena, prob. wr) = Spk III 267,26 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anatthikena, prob, wr); Dhp-a II 209,2 (~ehi padehi samhit). anatthakaranya in Ee at Ja II101,16 is prob, wr; Be, Ce -karatya; Se -karanatya. anatthaneyya in Ee at Th 1073 is perhaps wr for anattaneyya qv sv attaniya. anadd,/, anaddyan, / , anaddyitatta, n., lack of

regard, lack of respect; Vibh 371,9 (andariyam andarat agravat appatissavat anadd anaddyan anaddyitattam asilyam acittikro, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se and andyan andyitattam; Vibh-a 499, nfoll.\ anadd ti andiyan anaddyan ti andiyankro anaddya ayitassa bhvo anaddyitattam, eds so). anaddhanikan ti in Ce, Ee at Nidd-a I 155,2 is wr for anaddhaniyan ti (Be, Se, Niddl 44,6 [anaddhaniyam jivitam] so). anaddhaneyya, mfn. [from addha(n)], not lasting; Ja V 507,28* (thale yath vri janinda vuttham -am aciratthitikam,5e, Se so; Ce, Ee vattam; 508,11': na addhnakkhamam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr addhnakkamam); see also addhaniya. anadhivasiyanta in Be, Ee at Pet 204,7 is prob, wrfor anativassiyanta qv sv ativassati. ananutpiya, mfn., neg.fppofzn\\ta$2X\ qv. ananuppavesana, n. [from caus. of anupavisati], not supplying; Pj II257,2 (aropane ~e ca samatthatya). ananubodhan, / ? [from anubuijhati], lack of understanding; Pet 21,22* (s pih ca abhinandan ca catunnam ~); see also anubujjhana, anubodhana. ananulometi, pr. 3 sg. [a3 + anulometi], does not conform, is not in accordance (with, gen.); Sp 219,28 (ananulomikam tesam [dhammnam] ~eti, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se na anulometi). ananuvejja, mfn. [neg. fpp of *anu + vindati; cfS. anuVvid], not to be found; MI 140,6 (ditthe vham ... dhamme tathgatam ~o ti vadmi, Ce, Ee so; Be ananuvijjo; Se ananuvajjo; PsII 117,14: -o ti asamvijjamno v avindeyyo v); see also anuvijjati. ananusandhika, mfn. [a3 + anusandhi + ka2], without a (logical) connection; not applicable; Sv 721,26; Pj II 142,30^0//. (~ va ayam kath hoti ti vuccate, na buddhnam - nma kath atthi... evam c' ettha anusandhi veditabb); As 135,15 (~ kath); see also snusandhika. anantaka1, mfn. [a3 + anta1 + ka2; ts], endless; Th493 (dukkham samsrasmim -am); Ap 46,24 (-0 ca kso); Bv 9:2 (samdhi pi -0, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee samdhi pi -; Bv-a 178,n: samdhi pi appameyyo); Vism 123,7 (pathaviyam... santake no -e); PsII 413,14* (asambhtam -am); see also santaka. anantaka2, n. [= nantaka^v; BHSid.], a piece of cloth; a rag; Vv80:7 (khipim -am; Vv-a311,6foil: akro c' ettha niptamattam, see a6); Sv 204,20 (sankraktdito v pana -ni uccinitv tehi sanghtim katv, Se so; Ee pan' -ni; Be v nantakni; Ce v pana nantakni); Spk III 276,n: nantakni ti -ni, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee na antakni); Sadd 890,5 (-an ti nantakam pilotikam). anantarakni in Ee at Dhs 1028 and As 358,18 is wrfor nantarikni (Be, Ce, Se so). anantarika, mfn., see sv antarik. anantaryikini, (m)f(n). [from (an)antaryika or antarya1], not hindered; not prevented; Vin IV 280,18 (s pacch -I n* eva sibbeyya na sibbpanya ussukkam kareyya; 280,26: -i ti asati antarye); 332,19. ananvhataceta(s), mfn., whose mind is not injured or frustrated; Dhp 39 (anavassutacittassa -aso; Dhp-a I


309,14: dosena appatihatacittass ti attho) quoted Ja I


anapyi(n) (so Be, Ce, Ee; Se usually anupyi[n]), mfn. [S. anapyin], not going away; SI 72, i6* (kincassa anugam hoti chy va ~im); Dhp2 (tato nam sukham anveti chy va ~ini) quoted Pet 24,9*; Th 1041 (bhagavantam upatthahim ... chy va ~inl); Ja VI 473,4* (anuggat silavati chy va ~ini). anapekkhi(n), mfn. [S. anapeksin], free from longing (for); indifferent; SI 77,19* = Dhp 346 (paribbajanti ~ino kmasukham pahya); Sn 166 (siham v' ekacaram ngam kmesu -inam upasankamma); Niddl 246,21 (kmesu ~i vitakmo cattakmo). anappameyya, mfn. [ana1 + fpp of paminti], immeasurable; boundless; Th 1089 (Gotamo ~o; Th-alll 143, M: pamnakarakilesbhvato aparimnagunatya ca ~o); see also appameyya. anabihrakkhamam in Ee at Pet 150,15 is wr, prob, for anabhihrakkhamam (Be so) or anabhinihrakkhamam (Ce so); see Nnamoli, 1979, p. 204. anabbhakkhtukma, mfn. [a3 + inf. of abbhakkhti + kma], not wishing to slander; Vin I 234,20 (~ hi mayam bhante bhagavantam) * DI161,18 (Sv 350,1: ~ ti na abhtena vattukm). anabhva, m. [ana1 + bhva], non-existence, annihilation; D i l i 226,14 (kamavitakkam ... pajahati vinodeti vyantikaroti ~am gameti) = M I 11,12 (Ps I 81,28: ~am gameti ti anu anu abhavam gameti) ^ A I 254,14; anabhvankata, anabhvangata, anabhvakata, mfn. (-kata for -gata under the influence of preceding tlvatthukata ?), eradicated, annihilated; Vin I 235,35 (ppak akusal dhamm pahin ucchinnaml tlvatthukata anabhvankata yatim anuppdadhamm, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce anabhvakata) * III 2,i8 (Be, Se anabhvankata; Ee anabhvangata; Ce anabhvakata; Sp 133,10: anu-abhavam kat anabhvakata, anabhvangata ti pi ptho); DIII 270,30 (rgo me pahino ... anabhvankato, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anabhvangato) ^ A V 32,2 (Be, Ee anabhvankato; Se anabhvangato; Ce anabhvakato); M I 487,33 (rpam tathgatassa pahmam... anabhvankatam, Be so; Se anabhvangatam; Ce, Ee anabhvakatam); SII 63,12 (sabbnissa tni... anabhvankatam, Be so; Se anabhvarigatni; Ce, Ee anabhvakatni); A I 135,22 (tarn kammam pahmam ... anabhvankatam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anabhvakatam; Mp II 223,14: anu-abhavam katam, yathnuppajjati evam katan ti attho); Niddl 56,29 (s sann pahin... anabhvankata, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anabhvangata). anabhsitam in Be, Ee at Pet 102,3 is prob, wr; Ce abhsitam; and cf Nnamoli, 1979, p. 138. anabhineyya, ind., neg. absol. o/abhineti qv. anabhibhavaniya, mfn., neg. fpp o/abhibhavati qv. anabhiraddhi,/ [from abhirdheti], discontent; anger; lack of conciliation; Abh 164 (vypdo 'nabhiraddhi); Vin III 163,32 (tena ca dosena tya ca anattamanatya tya ca ~iy appatito hoti); D13,2 (na ghto na appaccayo na cetaso ~i karanly; Sv 52,4: n' eva attano na paresam hitam abhirdhayati ti ~i, kopass' etam adhivacanam); A I 79,3i (adhikarane ubhato ... cetaso ghto appaccayo ~i).

anabhiraman, anabhiraman, / [from abhiramati], discontent; disaffection; Niddl 412,19(y anabhirati y ~ y ukkanthit) ^ Vibh 3 52,5; see also abhiramana. anabhirdhana, n. [from abhirdheti; cf BHS abhirdhan], dissatisfaction; disaffection; lack of conciliation; Mp II152,14 (anabhiraddhl ti kopo yeva so hi -vasena anabhiraddhl ti vuccati). anabhilpana, n. [cf abhilpa], non-expression; ? Nnamoli: "direct-addressing"; Pet68,2 (yo amoho hetu yam dve dhamme upatthapeti aviparitadassanam pi ca -am, ayam nissando; cf Nnamoli, 1979, p. 86, who suggests reading apilpanam). anabhisankharaniya, mfn., neg. fpp of abhisankharoti qv. anabhissara, mfn. [prob, wr for *anabhisara; cf BHS anabhisarana], without a companion; without a helper; MII 68,22 (attno loko ~o ti kho; Ps III 306, is: ~o ti asarano abhisaritv abhigantv asssetum samatthena virahito) ^ Patis I 126,31 (Patis-a 408,12: asahyo ti v attho). anabhihimsamana, mfn. [neg. of *abhi + himsati1], not hurting; not disturbing; A IV 419,29 (so dutiyam jhnam ~o; Mp IV 194,23: ~o ti apothento avihethento); see also abhihimsan. anamatagga, mfn. [ana1 + mala1 + agga? cf AMg anavadagga, anavayagga; BHS anavargra; for other explanations see R. Pischel, 1900, 251 n.l, Sadd 396 fn. 10], 1. without beginning (or end, generally of samsra,); SII 178,8 (-0 'yam ... samsro, pubb koti na pannyati; SpkII 156,5foil: ~o ti anu amataggo vassasatam vassasahassam nnena anugantv pi amataggo aviditaggo, nssa sakk ito v etto v aggam jnitum, aparicchinnapubbparakotiko ti attho); Thi495 (digho blnam samsro punappunam ca rodatam ~e pitu marane bhtu vadhe attano ca vadhe); 496 (samsram ~ato saratha); Ja III 243,7' (~e samsre); Vism 198,28 (samsracakkan ti -am samsravattam vuccati); Ps I 224,15 (samsrassa -t siddh hoti ti); 2. about beginninglessness (and endlessness); Mhv 12:31 (Rakkhitatthero ... nabhe thito samyuttam ~am kathesi); see also anamataggiya. anamataggiya, (mf)n. [from anamatagga], teaching or a sutta about beginninglessness (and endlessness); Sp 67,4* (Rakkhitatthero ... anamataggapariyyakathya Vanavsike pasdesi... antalikkhe thito tattha desesi ~am); 81,26 (thero ... ~ni kathesi); Ps III 221,6 (vihradassanattham hi ~am paccavekkhitv samuddapabbatadassanattham v pi gantum vattati); Vism 305,8 (athnena ~ni paccavekkhitabbni); Dip 8:6 (vehsam abbhuggantvna desesi ~am); Mhv 15:186 (thero... Nandanavane deses' -am). anamha, anamhi, m. or n. [? according to Sadd 460, fn c: < *anamma < S. *a + narman, "sport, amusement, pleasure", cf MhbhIII App. 125:102: na narmaklo 'yam], distress; absence of pleasure; -kla, m., not a time for amusement; a time of distress; Ja III 223,5* (~e sussoni kin nu jagghasi sobhane, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anamhikle; 223,IT: ~e ti rodanakle; Ee so; Be, Ce, Se rodanakle).


an ay a1, see sv aya1. anaya 2 , see sv naya. anala1, m. [ts], fire; Abh33; Sadd 334,7*; JaV 63,is* (jalamno caram kacche ~o kanhavattani; or anala2 qv; c/64,io': -otiatitto); -jlakkhandha, m., a mass of flaming fire; JaV 213,28' (acci ti~o, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anilajla-). anala2, mfn. [from a3 + alam?], insatiable; Jail 326,13* (~ mudusambhs duppr tnadisama; 326,18': purisehi v etsam na alan ti ~) = V451,i* (451,25': ~ ti tihi dhammehi alan ti vacanarahit). analliyati, pr. 3 sg. [a3 + alliyati], does not come close; is detached; Th-alll 78,37 (visum yeva nisidati ~afi ti vuttam hoti, eds so). anavakra, see sv avakrikaritv. anavakkanta, mfn., neg. pp o/avakkamati qv. anavaftatti, / [from avajnti], the not being despised or disregarded; Vibh350,n (pindaptikattam paticca ~ampaticcairiypatham paticca ... mado); It-all 69,15 (~i ti anavann); -kma, mfn., wishing not to be despised, not to be disregarded; AIV 1,15 (bhikkhu labhakmo ca hoti sakkrakmo ca ~o ca; Mp IV 1,6: ~o ti abhinntabhvakmo) = 156,12 (Mp IV 72,9 (~o ti... anavaj nanakmo). anavatthacrik, / , see sv avatth. anavatthdi in Ee at Saddh 217 is wrfor annavatthdi. anavadna in Ee at Ud-a 223,30 is wrfor anavatthna qv sv avatthna. anavamagga, m. [? c/ummagga 1 , ummagga3 ?], according to ftnamoli, 1964, p. 254: "does not come to lapse"; or wrfor anavamaga; Pet 187,7 (pitibhgiynam ca visesabhgiynam ca apilpanat sahagat hoti ~o ayam satisambojjhango). anavamata, mfn., neg. pp o/avamannati qv. anavaya, mfn. [perhaps < *anavaka, "not a novice"!], expert, experienced (in); without deficiency; Vinlll 41,27 (aham kho pana susikkhito ~o sake cariyake kumbhakrakamme pariyodtasippo; Sp 287, nfoll.: ~o ti anu-avayo sandhivasena ukralopo, anu anu avayo yam yam kumbhakrehi kattabbam nma atthi sabbattha anno paripunnasippo ti attho); D I 88,7 (lokyatamahpurisalakkhanesu ~o; Sv 248,9: ~o ti... anno pariprakari, avayo na hoti ti vuttam hoti); A III 152,31 (tattha sikkhito hoti ~o; Mp III 286,5: ~o ti samattho paripunno, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be samatto); Ja VI 64,2* (sabbo so bhakkho ~o ti vutto, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anavajjo ti; 64,6': ~o ti anu avayo anu punappunam olokiyamno pi avayo paripunnaguno anavajjo, Be so; Ce anavajjo ti anu avajjo punappuna olokiyamno pi avajjo paripunnaguno ...; Ee anavajjo ti anu avayo punappuna olokiyamno pi ~o paripunnaguno ...; Se ~o ti anavajjo punappunam olokiyamno pi ~o ...); Sp 287,24 (-tte sati); Ap-a 508,26 (vedangesu ~o); see also avaya1, avaya2. anavaratam, ind. [ts], uninterruptedly, incessantly; Abh41 (santatam ~am); It-all 142,11 (anavaratappavattasaddhammamahdno ti). anavasificanaka, mfn. [from avasincati], not spilling, not overflowing; Ja I 400,6' (anavasekan ti ~am aparissvanakam katv) ^ Nidd-a 1444,17.

anavasumbhitv, ind. [neg. absol. o/*ava + sumbhati], not throwing down, not overturning, not upsetting; Ja VI 76,27 (viddho pi pniyaghatam yath v tath v ~itv, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anusumbhitv, prob, wr, perhaps for *anosumbhitv) ^ Cp-a261,2o (Be so; Se anavasumbhetv; Ce, Ee amuncitv). anavasesaka in Be, Ce, Ee at Jal 400,1* is prob, wr (unmetrical) for anavaseka qv sv avaseka. anavasesetv, ind., neg. absol. ofcaus. o/avasissati qv. anavosita, mfn. [ana1 + vosita, or a blend of V + avasita and anosita], not settled; not determined; not finished; 0,-atta, mfn., whose mind has no firm convictions; Th 101 (~o mukhanarigali odariko kusito; Th-aI218,i2yb//.: ~o ti anurpam na vositatto... akatakaraniyo ti attho, atha v -o ti anu-avositasabhvo ... dasasu ariyavsesu avasitav ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se avusitav ti); see also anosita sv osita. anavhta, mfn., neg. pp q/*avhayati qv. anassaka, mfn. [a3 + assa3 + ka2], without horses; Ja VI 515,9* (~o arathako digham addhnam gato; 515, w: -o ti assavirahito, Be so; Ce, Se - 0 ti ~o yeva; Ee ~o ti na assako ti yeva, prob. wr). anasssaka, mfn. [a3 + asssa + ka2], not getting one's breath; unable to breathe; Vin III 84,22 (bhikkh ... bhikkhum afigulipatodakena hsesum, so bhikkhu uttanto ~o klam aksi) = IV 110,33; D i l 334,20 (imam purisam... jiyya ~am mretv; Sv811,7: dhanujiyya givam vethetv ti attho). anasssim at S IV 43,nfoll. is prob. aor. 1 sg. of nassati qv. anassum, aor. 3 pi. of nassati qv. ankulaniya, mfn. [neg. fpp of *kulayati, denom. from kula^v], not to be confounded, disturbed; Pv-a 118,1 (rpasampadam nissya visabhgavatthun pi ~o hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ankaddhaniyo v ti). angacchana, n. [from gacchati], not returning; Mp III 78,18 (ngan ti chanddihi agacchanato pahinakilese puna angacchanato gum akaranato). angantna, neg. absol. of gacchati qv. angamitv in Ee at Ap-a 325,12 is prob, wr for ankaddhitv (Be, Ce, Se so). angava(t), mfn. [cf gu2 and S. anga, angas], free from fault, blameless; Mhv37:115 (evam ha mahngo mahngam ~). angmika, m. [angmi(n) + ka2], one who does not return, an angmi; It-al 39,32 (bhvakarassa pahnassa). angra, see sv agra. angriya, see sv anagriya. angri in Ee at Ap 424,31 is prob, wrfor anagri; see sv agri(n). ancara, m. [mc for ancra qv sv cra], misconduct, esp. sexual misconduct; Ap 552,23 (abhabbatthne vajjetv vrayanti ~am, Be so; Ce parivajjenti; Ee paripcento anvaram; Se paripcento ancram) ^ 586,15 (vrayitv ~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee pcayanti anvaram) * 593,25 (vrayimha ~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee pcayimha anvaram); Bv 25:32 (parivajjento -am; Bv-a 267,29: -an ti ancram akattabbam, akaraniyan ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce,


Ee wr ancran ti). ancariyaka, mfn. [a3 + cariya + ka2], 1. not having a teacher; not dependent on an instructor, VinI 60,23 (bhikkh upajjjhyesu pakkantesu... - anovadiyamn ananussiyamn); Ja IV 180,4 (pornakapandita ~); Mil 105,2 (paccekabuddh sayambhuno ~); Niddl 457,18 (bhagav sayambh ~o); Pj 1193,28 (anuttaro tattha tattha asadisatya attan v ~o hutv paresam cariyabhvena); 2. free from bad influences', SIV 136,6 foil. (anantevsikam idam ... brahmacariyam vussati ~am... anantevsiko ... bhikkhu ~o sukham phsum viharati; SpkII 403,3: -an ti caranakakilesavirahitam); 137, I3 (na samudcaranti nam ppak akusal dhamm ti tasm ~o ti vuccati). ancmiyamna, mfn., neg. pass, o/camati qv. ancraka, m(fn). [ancra + ka2], (one) who is immoral, of ill-behaviour; Ap-a 120, B (ayam isi evarpo ~oti). ancri in Ee at A I 211,33 and Pp 57,28 is prob, wr for rcri qv sv r2; at Ja I 495,28 is wr for ancr qv sv cra. annam in Ee at Ps V 55,22 and 56,io is wr for atnam (Be, Ce,Seso). antidesa, see sv atidesa. anthamna, mfn. [neg. of *nthati, cfS. Vnth "to beg; to be master"; or from antha qv sv ntha, and see K.R. Norman, 1966, pp. 118-19], not begging; not soliciting; or not being in control; or helpless, without a protector; or acting like an antha (a Jain or jivikal); JaV 16,i* (ya pitv cittasmi anesamno hindati go-r-iva bhakkhasdi ~oupagti naccati; cf 18,23". ~o ti niravassayo antho viya); see also ndhati. andayi in Ee at Pv-a208,i is prob, wrfor andiyi qv. andayitv in Ee at Pv-a 13,27 is wr for andiyitv #v sv diyati2. andari, n. [for andariya], disrespect, disregard; VinV 87,12* (in uddna: ehi ~i bhims; Sp 1307,\ifoil.: eh' vuso gmam v ti sikkhpadam ca andariyam ca bhikkhubhimspanakam ca). andariya, n. [from andara], disrespect; disregard; carelessness; Vin IV 113,9 (vuso Channa evarpam m aksi n' etam kappati ti, so ~am paticca karoti yeva); V 118,13 (dve ~ni puggalndariyam ca dhammndariyam ca); A V 146, n (~am appahya); Vibh 371,7 (~am andarat agravat ...; Vibh-a499,26: ovdassa andiyanavasena andrabhvo ~am); Mil 266,n (pattim pajjanti... ~ena v ajnanena v ti); Pp 20,14 (~am-t). andariyaka, mfn. [andariya + ka2], disrespectful; Pv-a5,29 (duccaritanirato ~o hutv, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se andariko). andariyana, n. [from *dariyati < S. driyate ?], disrespect; Vibh-a499,26 ('-kro andarat, eds so, perhaps wrl * As 393,22: andiyankro). andniyankro in Ee at As 393,22 is wr for andiyankro (Be, Ce, Se so). andi-anidhanappavatta, mfn., proceeding or existing without beginning or end; Nett 112,13 (dvsatthi ditthigatni mohajlam ~am). andiyana1, see sv diyana1.

andiyana2, n., ~ , / [from diyati2, or from diyati1], lack of respect; not regarding with attention; or not accepting; Th-aIII 6,n (so therassa vacanam ndiyi, thero tassa ~ena...); As 393,21 (ovdam -vasena andarassa bhvo andariyam) * Vibh-a 499,25; As 393,22 ('-kro v andarat, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr andniykro); Vibh-a 499,28 fall, (anadd ti ~ anaddyan ti 0,-kro); Pj II 516,29 (buddhdinam vacanam andiyanatya). andiyana, mfn., neg. of diyati1 qv. andiyi, neg. aor. 3. sg. [of diyati2], took no notice (of); did not show respect (to); Pv-a208,i (eko upsako ... ovdamadsi, so tarn andiyi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee andayi, prob. wr). andiyitv, neg. absol. of diyati1 qv. annu- is the rhythmically (or metrically) lengthened form of an-(a3) + anu1- in annugiddha (see sv anugijjhati), annujna(t) (see sv anujnti), annutappa(t) (see sv anutapati), annupassi(n) (see sv anupassi[n]), annuputtha (see sv anupucchati), annuyyi(n) (see sv anuyyi[n]), annuruddha (see sv anurujjhati), annuloma (see sv anuloma), annuvaija (see sv anuvadati). anpajja, neg. absol. o/pajjati qv. anpattika, mfn. [a3 + patti + ka2], who has committed no offence; VinI 114,30 (bhikkhnam ~nam); V218,4 (krako ca sangho ~o siy); Sp 374,5 (sace bhagav ... cittuppdamattena pattim pannpeyya ko sakkuneyya ~am attnam ktum); see also spattika. anpara, mfn. [a3 + apara, with rhythmical or metrical lengthening], without another, matchless; Sn 1094 (akincanam andnam etam dipam -am nibbnam iti nam brumi; Pj II 597,23: ~an ti aparapatibhgadipavirahitam, setthan ti vuttam hoti). anpardhakammanta, mfn., see sv apardha. anpucch, neg. absol. o/pucchati qv. anmata, mfn. [cfS. anmrta], where no-one has died; unaffected by death; Ja II 56,2* (n' atthi loke -am; c/*Ja II 56,s'fall.', matatthnam hi upacravasenaamatan ti vuccati, tarn patisedhento -an ti aha, anamatan ti pi ptho, lokasmim hi anamatatthnam asusnatthnam nma n* atthi ti attho) quoted Dhp-all 99,4* and Sadd 809,24 (ettha na amatam -an ti amatasaddena matatthnabhtassa susnassa vacanatt). anmanta, anmant, neg. absol. o/manteti qv. anmik,/ [ts], the ring-finger; Abh266. anyasa, mfn., [a3 + yasa, or from a3 + ya], not made of iron; or without profit, without benefit;'? Vv 84 5 (ujjangalam tattam ivam kaplam -am paralokena tulyam; Vv-a 335,20 fall.: n' atthi ettha yo sukhan ti ~am ... atha v na yasan ti ~am. paralokena ti narakena tulyam, narakam ... samantato ayomayatt yasam ca, idam pana tadabhvato ~am ... anassayan ti ca keci pathanti). anrambha1, see sv rambha1. anrambha2, mfn. [a3 + rambha2; cfAs RE 111 G prnnam anrambho; K pnnam anlambh(e)], not involving killing or destruction; Vin III 149,14 (vatthum desetabbam ~am saparikkamanam; 151,23: -am nma na kipilliknam v sayo hoti na upaciknam v sayo


hoti...); Sp 569,8 (srambham -an ti sa-upaddavam anupaddavam); Utt-vn 714. anrdhika, see sv rdhaka. anriya, see sv ariya. anrocan, / , see sv rocana. anlapanat,/, abstr., see sv lapana. anlika in Ee at A III 352, l and 384,11 is wr for anlhiya {or anlhika) qv. anjhiya, anlhika, mfn. [S. andhya], not rich; poor, destitute; Vin V 149, I (kulam gantv appabhogam ~am); MI 450,34 (puriso daliddo assako ~o, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anliyo; Ps III 167,2i: ~o ti na addho); A III 352, I (daliddo assako ~o inam diyati, Ce so; Be anlhiko; Ee anliko; Se anaddhiko); 384, n (puriso daliddo assako ~o, Ce so; Be anlhiko; Ee anliko; Se anaddhiyo); JaV 96,23* (api ca dalidd kapan~; 97,15': ~ tina lhik; Ee so; Be, Ce ti anlh; Se anliy ti anal); VI 360,28* (~o appadhano daliddo, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anlayo); see also addha2, lhika. anvakula, mfn. [apparently a3 + ava + kula (= kla ?) with rhythmical or metrical lengthening], not sloping; level; JaV 168,24* (apparaj ca bhmi... ~ veluriypanil catuddisam ambavanam surammam, so all eds, perhaps wr [metrically irregular] for ankul or *anokul? 169, r: ~ ti na avakul akhanim ukkulavikulabhvarahit v samasanthit... veluriyamay pasannasalil nilobhs ... pokkharani ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ukkulabhvarahit va). anvaftan, / , see sv anvvattan. anvatti(n), mfn. [see vattati], not turning to; not seduced, unaffected; MI 91,29 (so n' eva tva ~i kmesu hoti; Ps II 63,7: ~i hoti anvattano anbhogo na hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ~i hoti ~ino anbhogo). anvatti, / [see vattati and cf S. anvrtti], not returning, not coming back; -dhamma, mfn. [cf BHS anvartikadhanna, anvrttikadharmin, anvrttidharman], not subject to return (to this world, see angmi[n],); not liable to turn back or change; D I 156,2i (opaptiko hoti tatthaparinibbyi ~o tasm lok) = AI 232,20 (MpII 349,21: yonigativasena angamanadhammo) = Pp 16,22; A IV 402,13 (~am me cittam kmabhavy ti); Ja IV 245,5 (angml ~o tasm lok); Ud-a317,9 (tesam cittam upatthambhetv ~e katv; * PsIV 109,12: anivattidhamme); Cp-a299,32 (bodhisatto bodhiy niyato ~o hoti ti); Pp-a 245,17 (tya). anvattika in eds at Pet 193,20 is prob, wr for anvatthika qv sv vatthika. anvayha, mfn., neg.fppofvahatiqv. anvara1, {mf)n. [a3 + avara with rhythmical or metrical lengthening, cf anpara; but perhaps wr], (what is) not inferior, excellent; the matchless; Ap 552,23 (abhabbatthne vajjetv paripcento -am, Ee so; Se ancram; Be vrayanti ancaram; Ce parivajjentl ancaram) ^ 586,15 (pcayanti ~am, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se vrayitv ancaram) * 593,25 (pcayimha ~am, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se vrayimha ancaram). anvara2, mfn. [a3 + vara], irresistible; without obstruction; It 76,8* (jetvna maccuno senam vimokkhena ~am; It-all 75,io: ahnehi varitum patisedhetum

asakkuneyyatt ca ~am... vimokkhena ariyamaggena jitv; or perhaps to anvara1). anvasra, mfn. [a3 + avasra with rhythmical or metrical lengthening], on which the sun has not set; recent; JaV 56,3* (~am cirarattasamsitam uccvacam caritam idam purnam; 56,2r: ~an ti na avasram anatthahgatasuriyan ti attho ... pubbanhe katam tarn divasam eva syanhe saranto viya). anivaha, mfn. [a3 + vaha], not bringing, not producing; Patis-a217,7 (avippatisrajya dubbalapitiy na vatthubhtni tass -tt). anvikatv, mfn., neg. absol. o/vikaroti qv. anviddha in Ee at Pv-a 135,15 is prob, wr for anapaviddha qv sv apaviddha. anvesaka, mfn. [a 2 + vesa + ka2], not taking possession; Ap-a279,34 (so bhtavejjo tassa yakkhagahitassa purisassa vesabhtam vihanne ... samlam ca mlena saha yatim ~am katv vinsaye, Ce so; Be, Se ansevakam; Ee ansavakam). ansaka1, mfn., see sv saka. ansaka2, mfn. [a3 + nsa + ka2], not destroying; JaV 118,2' (avinsake ti tava santaknam dhanadhanndinam ~e, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se avinsake). ansaka, / [cf S. anSaka, n.], fasting (as an ascetic practice); S IV 118,1* (~ thandilasyik ca pto sinnam ca tayo ca ved); Dhp 141 (na naggacariy na jat na pank nnsak thandilasyik v; Dhp-a III 77,2o: bhattapatikkhepo ti attho); JaV 241,28* (chadanam katv vancayanti manusse ~ thandilaseyyak ca rajojallam ukkutikappadhnam ...); see also ansaka'. ansavaka in Ee at Ap-a279,34 is prob, wr for anvesaka qv. ansdaniya, mfn., neg.fppofcaus. o/sidati qv. anharaniya, mfn., neg.fppofhzrati qv. anhraka, mfn. [a3 + hra + ka2], not taking food; Spk II 398,30 (ansaka ti ekhadvflidivasena ~). anhta, mfn., neg. pp o/avhayati qv. anikilitvi(n), anikkilitvi(n), mfn. [cfS. nikridayati], not having finished playing; taking enjoyment; SI 9,6 (daharo tvam bhikkhu pabbajito ... bhadrena yobbanena samanngato pathamena vayas ~i kmesu; Spk I 42,12: ~i kmes ti kmesu akatakilo abhuttvi akatakmakilo ti attho) * 117,25 (dahar ... ~ino). anigha, anigha, mfn. [BHS anigha; etymology uncertain; explained by cts as niddukkha, c/nigha 1 and nigha; or as?L3+ Igha, hence frequent spelling anigha which is, however, usually unmetrical; other possible connections are with agha1, or with (ni)hanti, cf nigha2], free from affliction, from misery; free from evil; MI 288,27 (im satt aver avypajjh ~ sukhi attnam pariharant ti); SI 12,12* (tarn chinnagantham ~am nirsam; Spk I 46^6: -an ti niddukkham); 54,27* (aghajtassa ve nandi nandijtassa ve agham anandi ~o bhikkhu); Dhp 294 (rattham snucaram hantv anigho yti brhmano); Sn 17 (~o tinnakathankatho visallo); 460 (santam vidhmam ~am nirsam); Th745 (panca pancahi hantvna anigho yti brhmano); 1234 (anigh khinapunabbhav isi, eds so; read ~ mc ?); Ja III 443,17* (~o tuvam vassasatni playa, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee anigho; 443,27*. niddukkho


hutv); V 343,8* (jiva tvam - o ciram); see also anigh. aniccantikatya in Ce, Ee at Vism611,26 is wr for anaccantikatya {Be, Se so). anicchaka, mfn. [ts], not. wishing, not intending; Sp 205,2 (tena te maranena pi mayam akmak -) = Ps III 292,5 (Be, Se so; Ce anicchamnak; Ee wr anicchamtak). anicchamnak, mfn. [neg. of icchati qv + ka2], not wishing; unwilling; Ja IV 44,i (ath' assa pit ~assa ekam kumrikam nesi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anicchamnass, eva); V 210,13 (kirn bhikkhave -am bhikkhum nayitth

anidja, mfn. and n. [BHS id.], 1. (mfn.) immobile; immovable; imperturbable; Vibh-al44,n (rpvacar kusal cetan - samn); 2. (n.) immovability, imperturbability; -ppatta, mfn., having attained immovability; imperturbable; Ud-a 185,30 (rpvacaracatutthajjhnam ... -am sayam aninjanatthena nenjan ti vuccati, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se nenjappattam); see also aneja (sv ej), nefija. anifthangata, mfn., see jvnitth. anina, see sv anana. aniddhrita, mfn. [neg. pp of *ni(s) + dhreti], not determined, not settled; -smatthiya, mfn., the fitness of which is not settled; Ud-a 93,19 (kim ~ena antarbhavena parikappitena payojanan ti, Be, Ce, Se so; ewanudhrita-). aniddhi(n), mfn. [from iddhi], without prosperity; poor; Ja VI 584, is* (unchcariyya jivitam -inam maharja damet, assam va srathi tyamh aniddhik dant asamiddhi dameti no; or aniddhi nam? 584,24/0//.: -inan ti maharja aniddhim asamiddhim daliddapurisam nma s va aniddhi cheko srathi assam viya dameti). aniddhika, mfn. [a3 + iddhi + ka2], poor; powerless; Ja VI 584,19* (ty amh ~ dant asamiddhi dameti no). anindilocana, anindalocana, mfn. [< S. anindya + locana ?], with faultless, beautiful eyes; Ja VI 265,23* (bhatt te hessmi ~e, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anindalocane; 265,26': -e ti aninditabbalocane). anindha, mfn. [a3 + *indha], without fuel; Ja IV 26,22* (-0 dhmaket va kodho yass' upasammati, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee anedho; 21,w: anindhano aggi viya) quoted Cp-a 138,28* (eds so). anipphda, m. [from nipphajjati; cf S. anispatti], nonaccomplishment; incompletion; Ja VI 381,7* (-ya saheyya dhiro nippannattho yathsukham bhaneyya, so read? Ce, Ee anippdya; Be anipphannat; Se anipphannya; Ce, Ee, Se unmetrical; CPD sv anipphda suggests nipphd; 381,9': maharja yva attano icchitam na nipphajjissati tva pandito adhivseyya) = 388,19* (Ce, Ee -ya; Be anipphannat; Se anipphannya); see also nipphada. anibbacaniya, mfn. [neg. fpp of *ni(s) + vacati; S. anirvacaniya], not to be explained or analysed; Sadd 285,n (-tt vicchsaddanam). anibbatti(n), mfn. [from nibbattati ornibbatti], not being born again; Ja VI 573,2* (~I tato assam, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anivatti; 573,10': tato Tusitabhavanato cavitv manussattam gato va punabbhave ~i assam, sabbanntam

ppuneyyan ti). anibbisa(t), mfn. and/or anibbisam, ind. [ and/or namul absol (for *anibbesam mc) of *ni(s) + visati (or of nivisati); cf K.R. Norman, 1969, pp. 141-42; 1971, pp. 92-3; 1997, p. 100], not settling, not resting; or not paying; without expiation; Dhp 153 (anekajtisamsram sandhvissam ~am gahakrakam gavesanto; cf Dhp -a III 128,11: tarn nnam avindanto alabhanto yeva sandhvissam) ^ Th78 (c/Th-al 182,19: -an ti tassa nivattakannam avindanto alabhanto); Thi 159(yathbhuccam ajnanti samsari 'ham ~am; c/Thi-a 137,nfoil.: samsrasamudde patittham avindanti alabhanti). animisa, mfn. and m. [S. animisa], 1. (mfn.) unwinking; open (of the eyes); Ja I 77,30 (satth... ~ehi akkhihi olokayamno sattham vitinmesi); V 34,13 (yakkhnam akkhini rattni honti ~ni); VI 336,39' (akkhinam -tya c' eva rattatya ca yakkhinim yakkhini ti natv pi); Dth 5:26; Thp 233,17 (~ena cakkhun); 2. (m.) a god; a fish; Abh 12 (nijjarnimis dibb); 1044 (devamacchesv ~o); Sadd 477,25* (sudhsi tidaso saggavsi ~o pi ca); see also nimisa. anila, m. (and n.) [S. anila, m.], air; wind; Abh 37; Th 1013 (pabbato ~o pi ca); Ja II 219,21* (giri-m-iva -ena duppasaho); Ap-a 427,11/0//. (n' atthi niliyanam gopanam etth ti ~am... -am ca tarn yanam c' eti anilyanam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee etth ti alinam, prob, wr); '-afijasa, m.n., the wind's path, air, space; Ap 253,24 (padam n' atthi ambare -e); 381,7 (sambuddho gacchi -); Bvl:31 (sangitiyo pavattenti ambare ~e); Sadd442,14* (kso ambaram ... vyupatho apatho -am); 6ddhuta, mfn., shaken, agitated by the wind; Abh 600; -patha, m., the wind's path, air, space; Abh 46; Ja IV 119,4 (-en' eva uttarahimavantam gantv). anivatti(n), mfn. [S. anivartin], not turning back; not to be turned back; A I 147, is* (-1 bhavissmi brahmacariyaparyano; Mp II 243,3 foil: pabbajjato c'eva sabbannutannato ca na nivattissmi anivattako bhavissmi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anibbattako va); Ja III 5,23 (amhkam ranfio suhad -ino hutv yuijhath ti); Ps III 122,8 (buddhnam pi atekicch -ino). anivattika, mfn. [anivatti(n) + ka2], not turning back, persevering; continuing; Mp III 260,27 (pabbajjato -0 bhavissmi brahmacariyavsato -o); Pj I 153,10 (lokadhamm ti yva lokappavatti tva ~ dhamm ti). anisedhanat, / , abstr., see sv nisedhana. anissuka, mfn. [BHS anirsuka], not jealous, not envious; A IV 98,7* (vitalobh -, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se anussuk; Mp IV 49,25: katthaci ussukkam anpann); see also issuki(n). anika, (m.)n. (occasionally written anika) [S. anika, m.n.], an army; troops; Abh 381 (-0); Vin I 185,16 (hirannam ohya... sattahatthikam ca -am; Sp 1083,20: ettha cha hatthiniyo eko ca hatthi ti idam ekam -am); IV 107,34 (-am nma hatthnikam assnlkam rathnikam pattnikam); Ja VI 499,26* (yassa pubbe -ni... yyantam anuyyanti); Kkh 118,19 foil.; Vin -vn 1580 (dassanatthy -am v, Be so; Ee anikam); ifc see pace -, bal-, vipacc-; 0, -agga, n., the front, van of an army;


Sn421 (jtim viya khattiyo sobhayanto ~am ngasanghapurakkhato); -ttha, m., a soldier, esp. a royal guard, bodyguard; Abh 342; D III 64,32 (ganakamahmatt ~ dovrik); JaV 100,9* (hatthroh ~ rathik); Ap360,i (dovrik ~); -dassana, n.t a troop inspection, review of soldiers; VinlV 107,8 (senavyham pi ~am pi gacchanti); D I 6, n; Nidd I 367, I (~am, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anikadassanam). anigha, see sv anigha. anigh, / [cfS. anih], inactivity; indifference; Ja IV 424,2i* (m ~ya hpesi; cf 424,27': ito gantv pattabbya niddukkhabhvya viriyam m hpesi; cf anigha) = V 359,29*. anitika, mfn. [a3 + Iti + ka2], free from calamity or distress; Abh 7; Sadd70,26* (nibbnam... saranam ca paryanam ~am); VinH 79,2 (dis abhay ~ anupaddav); S n l l 3 7 (yo me dhammam adesesi... tanhakkhayam ~am; Pj II 605,26: ~an ti kilesa-itivirahitam); Ap 387,19 (vannav yasav homi mahbhogo ~o); Mil 304,9 (so aggi vuccati ~o anupaddavo samaye nibbuto nm ti); see also sa-itika. anitiha, mfn. [from a3 + iti ha or itih with rhythmical or metrical lengthening], not received through tradition; not based on hearsay; AII 26,io* (samvarattham pahnattham brahmacariyam -am adesayi so bhagav; Mp III 42,9: -an ti itihaparivajjitam, aparapattiyan ti attho) = It28,14* (cf It-al lll,3oyb//.: itiyo vuccanti upaddav ... itiyo hanati vinseti pajahati ti itiham, anuitihan ti ~am... atha v Mhi anatthehi saddhim hananti gacchanti pavattanti ti itih tanhdikiles, n' atthi ettha itih ti ~am, itih ti v yathvutten' atthena titthiyasamay, tappatipakkhato idam ~am; anitihan tipi ptho); Sn 1053 (kittayissmi te dhammam... ditthe dhamme ~am); Th331 (anuppatto sacchikato sayam dhammo ~o); Ja I 450,28* (vymassa phalam passa bhutt amb ~am; 451,6': idam vymassa phalam, tarn ca kho pana ~am, iti ha sa iti ha s ti evam itihitihena gahetabbam na hoti, paccakkham eva tarn phalam pass ti). anilaka, anilaka, see sv anoiaka. anu1, ind. [ts], prefix to nouns, adjectives, adverbs; prefix to verbs; preposition; adverb; frequently inserted in iterative cpds; before vowels usually taking the form anv- (occasionally aim-,); sometimes, esp. in cpds, lengthened to nu-; sometimes repeated as preverb, prefix or preposition; Abh 1174; Sadd 883,H*yb//. 1. as prefix and preverb expresses: with, along; after, behind; subordinate to, inferior to; according to, in conformity with; severally, one after the other; repeatedly; 2. as separate preposition: (i) with ace, and in prepositional cpds, expresses: according to, in conformity with; severally, each by each; (ii) with loc. expresses: along, alongside; 3. as adverb: anu -d -eva (or = anvadeva^v): after, afterwards; next; Sp 158,32 (anussarml ti... jtipatiptim anugantv anugantv sarmi anudeva v sarmi; Sp-t[ite] I 389,23: anudev ti anu eva, dakaro padasandhivasena gato) ^ It-aII 135,8; Mp I 73,20 (anvadev ti anudeva sah'eva ekato yev ti attho); anu- may sometimes represent

ano- (< -anava-), see anusumbhitv, anussuta2. anu2 is a frequent spelling for anu qv. anu-anu-vatteti, pr. 3 sg.9 turns, directs repeatedly; Vibh-a 500,26 (~eti ti anvvattan). anu-anu-haritv, ind. [absol. of *anu-anu + harati], bringing repeatedly; Ud-a389,8 (samannharitv ti... samm ~itv). anu-anugijjhati, pr. 3 sg., eagerly desires again and again; Nidd-al 55,17 (anugijjhati ti ~ati punappunam pattheti). anu-anunayana, n., repeated conciliation; Nidd-al 38,4 (visaye sattnam ~ato anunayo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anu nayanato). anu-anupassati, pr. 3 sg., contemplates repeatedly; Vism642,i3 (anupassati ti ~ati, anekehi karehi punappunam passati" ti attho). anu-anupassana, ., contemplating repeatedly; Sp 435,7 (ubhayam pi pana purimapurimannnam ~ato anupassan ti vuccati) = Patis-a 504,25. anu-anuseti, pr. 3 sg., clings repeatedly; recurs again and again; Nidd-al 41,23 (thmagatthena ~etl ti anusayo). anu-andati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + andati], adheres to, follows; Sadd 377,24 (ettha ~ati anubandhati ti anvadi, anvadi eva anvadev ti). anu-aya, see sv anvaya. anu-avassa, seesv anvvassa. anu-gata, see sv anvgata. anu-gantv, see sv anvgantvna. anu-nayati, see sv anvnayati. anu-yoga, m., repeated exercise, persistent application; Nidd-al 354,1 (anuyogan ti... ~am punappunam karanam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit). anu-vattati, see sv anvvattati. anu-vittha, see sv anvvisati. anu-iti, anu-eti, see sv anveti. anu-esati, see sv anvesati. anu-esi(n), mfn. [S. anvesin], searching for, seeking; ifc see kimkusal- (^v ka3), kusal-. anu-otthata, mfn. [pp o/*anu 1 + ottharati], covered all over; VinI 32,8 (yasmim padese bhagav viharati so padeso udakena ~o hoti, Ee so; Ce otthato; Se otthato; Be na otthato). anuka, see sv anuka. anukankhi(n), mfn. [S. anuknksin], longing for; ifc see piy-. anukaddhana, n. [cf S. anukarsana], (gr.t.t.) referring back (to a former rule); including (in a preceding rule); Sadd330,n (jakkha bhakkhane ca, hasannukaddhanattham cakro). anuka44hita. mfit. [pp of *anu' + kaddhati; cfS. anuVkrs], dragged along; Vism 104,30 (dosacarito pdaggehi khananto viya gacchati sahas pdam nikkhipati sahas uddharati ~am c' assa padam hoti); 105,4* (dutthassa hoti ~am padam mlhassa padam sahasnupilitam) = Pj II 544,2* (^ Mp I 436,17*: avakaddhitam; * Dhp-al 201,7*: dutthassa hoti sahasnupilitam mjhassa hoti avakaddhitam padam). anukantati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + kantati1], cuts; SI 49,14*


(kuso yath duggahito hattham evnukantati) = Dhp 311. anukantana, n. [from anukantati], cutting; MpIV 195,20 (anupavitthatthena ' -atthena ca sallato). anukampaka, m/(~ and-ik$)n. [ts], kind, caring, compassionate; DII 143,23 (nando ... rodamno atthsi... satthu ca me parinibbnam bhavissati yo mamam ~o ti; Sv584,2i: yo mam anukampati anussati); 111187,22 (cathi... thnehi ~o mitto suhado veditabbo); SI 197,8 (devat tassa bhikkhuno anukampik); Pv5:3 (evam dadanti ntinam ye honti ~; Pv-a25,2s: ~ ti atthakm hitesino); Thi210 (me mt... anukampik); JaIV 4,20* (~nam ntinam vacanam samma nkari); V 329, n* (~ patitth ca pubbe rasadadi ca no ... mt; 329,21" ~ ti muduhaday); Ap 148,20 (~o lokavid); 538,29 (aho 'nukampik amham sabbsam vira Gotami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee aho 'nukampit, prob, wr); Mill08,is (buddho kruniko ~o hitesi). anukampati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVkamp], takes pity on; cares for; commiserates, sympathises with (ace. or gen.); Vin II 128,30 (pacchimam janatam tathagato ~ati); D III 189,n (mtpitaro ... puttam -anti); S V 189,3 (ye bhikkhave ~eyytha); A III 263,27 (gihinam ~ati); IV 79,20 (tarn arahanto pathamam ~ant ~issanti); Pv 13:6 (-a mam dhira mahnubhva); 27:8 (~assu); Th 238 (yo ca mettena cittena sabbapnnukampati); Ja III 309,21* (atho mam ~asi); VI 281,28* (in fn: ~hi me amma, Be, Se so; Ee anukampaka patith, prob, wr; Ce omits); Ap 360,21 (~atu me buddho); (a) anukampa(t), mfn., It 21,10* (sabbe ca pane manasnukampam; = AIV 151,3*: manasnukampi); (b) anukampanta, m/(~anti)w., A III 42,2i (te saddham yeva pathamam ~ant ~anti); Pv 32:4 (mam ~anto); Ap 325,15 (amhkam ~anto upagacchi vinyako); Ja III 243,23' (-antassa); Th-al 123,i (~antiy may); (c) anukampamna, mfn. Sn 37 (mitte suhajje ~amno hpeti attham patibaddhacitto); Ja V 83,2i* (mt va puttam ~amno); aor. 3 sg. (a) anukampi, S I 82,20 (ubhayena vata mam so bhagav atthena ~i); Th 334 (anussi mam ariyavat ~I anuggahi, or to anukampi[n] qv); Ja V 73,28'; (b) anukampittha, Mhv 37:109; absol. (a) anukampa, Ja III 442,8* (panemi dandam ~a yoniso); (b) anukampiya, Ap 504,28 (lokanyako ~iya Sakynam upesi Kapilavhayam); pp anukampita, mfn. [ts], favoured; pitied; treated with compassion; M I 23,37 (~-rp 'yam bhot Gotamena pacchim janat); Pv 27:30 (anukampit' amha bhadante bhatten' acchdanena); Ap421,i5 (~-tt tena devadevena tdin, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anukampitako); anukampita in Ee at Ap 538,29 (aho 'nukampit amham) is prob, wr for anukampik (Be, Ce, Se so); fpp (a) anukampiya, mfn., Vv 40:6 (yassa me anukampiyo, eds so, read yo me assa ~o koci with L. Alsdorf 1967, p. 3291 Vv-a 180,2i: yass tiyo assa ~o ti anukampitabbo); (b) anukampitabba, mfn., Sp 780,23 (na piletabbo anukampitabbo ti); Vv-a 180,21; Sadd 556,2; caus. anukampenta, mfn., taking pity on, sympathising with; Thi-a247,32 (puttak ti smannavohrena dhltaram anukampento lapati). anukampana, n. [ts], compassion, taking pity; Abh 1193; Ps II 236,2 (pacchimam janatam ~ato); Mp II

160,15; anukampana in Ee at Pv-a88,6 is wr for anukampamna (Be, Ce, Se so). anukamp, / [ts], compassion, pity, mercy; kindness (to, gen. or he); Abh 160; Vin III 42,15 (na hi nma ... tassa moghapurisassa pnesu anudday ~ avihes bhavissati; Sp 288, is: ~ ti paradukkhena cittakampan); D1204,16(~am updy ti); MI 12,16 (atthi me tumhesu ~); SI 206,27* (na tena hon* samyutto snukamp anudday); Th 176 (yya no ~ya amhe pabbjayi muni); Ja III280,18 (tava -ya tarn maran mocetum gato 'mhi ti); Niddl 225,23 (na mayham imin attho api ca tumhkam yeva ~ya patigganhmi ti); Mil 129,18 (tassa kulassa ~ya); Vism 39,i (thero draknam ~ya mahgmam agamsi); (a)-t,/, abstr., compassion; kindness; Vin II 250,37 (krunnat hitesit~, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anukampita); ifc see lok-. anukampi(n), mfn. [S. anukampin], compassionate; sympathising with; AIV 151,3* (sabbe va pane manasnukampi; * It 21,io*: manasnukampam; c/PDhp246: manasnukampi; Udna-v 31:43: anukampam); Th334 (anussi mam ariyavat ~i anuggahi, or aor. 3 sg.of anukampati qv); anukampi in Ee at Ap 35,13 is wr for anukampa (Be, Ce, Se so); ifc see hit-. anukampik, / 0/anukampaka qv. anukampita, m^i.,/?po/anukampati qv. anukampitaka, mfn. [anukampita + ka2], favoured, treated with compassion; Ap421,i5 (~o tena devadevena tdin, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anukampitatt); anukarana, n. [ts], imitation; following an example; Ud-a 29,20 (-vasena); Th-all 60,2 (gajjantassa hi ~am etam); Sadd484,30 (anuvidh ~e); -nma, n., an imitative word or compound (constructed from a phrase); Sadd 880,6 foil. (~am nma yevpano... natumhkavaggo ti); -sadda, m., an imitative word; onomatopoeic word; Ud-a 66,23 (akkulapakkulikam aksi ti tayo vre akkulo pakkulo ti... evarupam saddam aksi, ~o hi ayam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anukarana-); Sadd 642,15. anukaroti, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWkr] (3 pi. anukaronti, anukubbanti), does after; imitates, emulates; equals (gen. of person); follows; A I 211,23 (imin pi angena arahatam ~omi uposatho ca me upavuttho bhavissati); S I 19,4*(asanto nnukubbanti) = Ja IV 65,8*; Sn221 (evam gihi nnukaroti bhikkhuno); JaV 434,2 (katam ~oti); Ps III 341,6 (tarn ca dhammam ~ontu prentu); (a)anukara(t), mfn., Jail 150,14* (tassnukaram; 150,17': tassa ~onto); (b) anukaronta, mfn., Ja 1491,15 (na kho ... Devadatto idn* eva mama ~onto vinsam patto); (c) anukubba(t), mfn., Vin II 201,27* (mamnukubbam kapano marissati); (d)anukubbanta, mfn., Jail 205,19' (anukubbantass' eva); see also anukubba. anukassami, fut. 1 sg. [of *anu1 + kasati3 ? cfS. anukarsa ? or for *anugassmi, fut. of anugyati qv, cfS. gsyati ?], / will recite, I will quote; D i l 255,23* (silokam ~ami; Sv684,n: akkharapadaniyamitam vacanasanghtam pavattayissmi). anukma, mfn. [anu1 + kma], responding to love; loving in return; Jail 157,22* (ayam Assakarjena deso vicarito may anukmaynukmena piyena patin saha,


Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anukmaya kmena; read anukmynukmena ? 157,27': anti niptamattam, may tarn kmayamnya tena mam kmayamnen ti attho). anukra, m. [ts], imitation; resemblance; Dip 5:39 (pubbangam bhinnavd Mahsangitikrak tesam ca ~ena bhinnavd bah ah). anukranam, ind. (or -a, n.) [anu1 + krana1], in accordance with the argument or basis of opinion; (or: a basis of opinion in accordance with...); Sp 1097,9 (dhammassa ca anudhammam vykaronti ti bhagavato vuttakranassa -am kathenti) * Sv 349, is * Ps III 46,16 foil, (kranam nma tikotiparisuddhamacchamamsaparibhogo, -am nma mahjanassa tath vykaranam); anukrana- in Ee at Ud-a 66,23 is wr for anukrana- qv. anukri(n), mfn. [S. anukrin], imitating; resembling; Dth 5:32 (in long cpd). anukinna, mfn. \pp o/*anu1 + kirati; S. anukirna], strewn with; crowded with; Ud-a 350,24 (rgarajdlhi -am); ifc see bhamaragan-, raja-; see also anvakri. anukiriy, / [S. anukriy], imitation; Ja II 39,3 (na kho... Devadatta idn' eva -am karonto vinsam ppuni); Dhp-al 144,3 (Devadatta... buddhalilhya dhammam desessmi ti tumhkam -am kari ti). anukujjati, see sv anukjati. anukubba, mfn. [cf anukubbanti, anukubba(t) sv anukaroti], doing (in return); ifc see kicc(sv karoti). anukubba(t), anukubbanta, anukubbanti, see sv anukaroti. anukulam, anukulesu, ind. [anu1 + ace, loc. o/kula], in each family; according to family custom; SI 76,24* (ye ca yafin nirrambh yajanti -am sad, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuklam; Spkl \469\3 foil.: -esu yajanti, yam niccabhattdim pubbapurisehi patthapitam tarn aparparam anupacchindant manuss dadanti ti attho) = AII 43,4* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuklam); anukula-yailfia, mfn. or n. [cfBHS anuklayajiia] (being) an offering according to family custom; D I 144,9 (niccadnni -ni, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anukla-, prob, wr); AII 42,25 (evarpam kho aham... nirrambham yannam vannemi yadidam niccadnam -am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anukla-, prob, wr; Mp III 82,12: -an ti amhkam pithi pitmahehi dinnatt evam kulnukulavasena yajitabbam dtabban ti attho). anukjati, anukujjati,/?/-. 3 sg. [anu1 + kjati], calls in answer; Ja VI 519,8' (kjantam -anti, Be so; Ce, Ee anukujjanti; Se upakjanti). anukla, mfn. [ts], 1. following the bank; Ap 347,7 (jtassarassnukl, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se -am); 368,25 (~ ca ketak, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce anukle; Se anukule); 2. faithful, devoted; Saddh312 (sahyo ... gunaddho -o ca, so read ? Ee wr anukulo); 3. favourable, suitable; in conformity; (gr.t.t.) agreeing with; Ja IV 77,5' (appatikklavdl ti... -ameva vadati); Vism 114,21 (rgacaritassa tva ettha dasa asubh kyagat sati ti ekdasa kammatthnni -ni, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anukulni); Ps I 168,25 (attano 0-kammatthnam gahetv); As 168,11 (sac* assa idam pathavikasinam -am

hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anukulam); Mhv 11:5 (duve dhit cnukl); Sadd266,i2*; ifc see cariy-; 0 -bhva, m., conformity; compliance; Dhp-aIII 162,21 (satth daharassa attano -am natv); Vv-a71,i8 (smikassa -en' eva vase vattanasil); Patis-a 526,29 (nibbidiinnam-ena anulomato); -yafifta in Ee at D1144,9 and AII 42,25 is wr for anukulayanna qv; ananukla, mfn., not suitable; not in conformity; Sadd 470,14 (virodhotit); 527,28. anuklam, ind. [anu1 + acc. o/kla], along the bank; Ap 347,7 (jtassarassnuklam ketak, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -nukl); anuklam in Ee at SI 76,24* and A II 43,4* is wrfor anukulam qv. anukle, anuklamhi, ind. [anu1 + loc. of kla; BHS anukle], on the bank; along the bank; Ap257,n (suvannavannam sambuddham ~e samhitam); Cp 2:7:3 (vicaranto -amhi). anuklaka, mfn. [anukla + ka2], conforming to; ifc see icch-. anukkama, m. [S. anukrama], I. order; succession; Abh429; Sp 1312,14 (yath pana attham vannayissma evam ettha - 0 veditabbo); Sv 461,34 (sabbam -am katv); Pj I 88,30 (idam hi suttam iminnukkamena bhagavat avuttam pi);frequently instr. -ena, gradually, in due course; JaI262,2o(rjnamupatthahanto-ena ranno abbhantare visssiko jto); Vism 125,30 (tass' evam karontassa -ena nivaranni vikkhambhanti); Ps I 90,2 (sampattim nibbattento -ena amatam nibbnam patilabhati ti); Pv-a5,30 (-ena sabbasampattiyo parihyitv); 2. an element in the training of horses; MI 446,17 (tarn enam assadamako uttarim kranamkreti -e mandale khurakye ...; Ps III 158,10: -e ti cattro pde ekappahren' eva ukkhipane ca nikkhipane ca); 3. an appurtenance; a toggle; Ps III 437,14 (-0 vuecati pse pavesanaganthi, ditthnusayass, etam nmam); ifc see sah'-. anukkamati (and anukkameti ?), pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVkram], goes after, follows; treads upon; It 80,8* (ye satthavhena anuttarena sudesitam maggam -anti); Th 194 (hatthikkhandhvapatitam kunjaro ce ~e; l h - a l l 62,28: kufijaro -eyya ca); (a) anukkama(t), mfn., A III 41,8* (satam dhammam -am; Mp III 249,25: mahpurisnam dhammam -anto); Vv 64:1 (uyynabhmim abhito -am); (b) anukkamanta, mfn., Patis-a 2,12* (suttam ca yuttim ca -anto) = Nidd-al 2,10* (eds -ento); (c) anukkamamna, mfn., A V 195,2 (anupariyyapatham -amno); inf. anukkamitave, SI 24,8* (na-y-idam bhsitamattena ekantasavanena v -itave sakk, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -itum ve); absol. anukkamma, JaV 269,11* (khuradhram anukkamma). anukkamitv, neg. absol. o/ukkamati qv. anukkhipati, anukhipati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + khipati], throws along; throws back, gives in return; (a) anukkhipa(t), mfn., Cp 3:11:6 (drako vattam -am slvisam akopayi; Cp-a246,s: gendukam -anto); (b) anukkhipantax, mfn., Cp -a 246,5; aor. 3 sg. anukhipi, Th-alll 58,32 (anvaksi ti... attano vudham anukhipi chaddesi); fpp anukkhipitabba, mfn., Sp 1125,17 (anukkhepo nma yam kinci -itabbam).


anukkhipanta1, m/h., o/anukkhipati qv. anukkhipanta2, mfn., neg. o/ukkhipati qv. anukkhipitv, neg. absol. o/ukkhipati qv. anukkhepa, m. {from anukkhipati], throwing back, compensation; Vin I 285,30 (anujnmi bhikkhave ~e dinne atirekabhgam dtun ti; Sp \\25,\ifoll.: -o nma yam kind anukkhipitabbam anuppadtabbam kappiyabhandam yattakam tassa pativimse adhikam tattake agghanake yasmim kisminci kappiyabhande dinne ti attho). anukhanati, pr. 3 sg. [ami1 + khanati2; cf BHS anukhaneti], digs after or further, JaV 233,13* (vitasaddham na seveyya udapnam v' anodakam sace pi nam~e vri kaddamagandhikam; 234,4': sace pi... puriso udakam apassanto kalalam viyhitv -eyya). anukhuddaka, mfn. [prob. extracted from khuddnukhuddaka qv sv khudda1 ], minor, less important', Mil 144,3 (katamani tni khuddakni sikkhpadni katamni -ni sikkhpadni ti); Sp 876,17 (khuddnukhuddakehi ti khuddakehi ca -ehi ca); Mp II 348,i5/o//. (tatrpi sanghdisesam khuddakam thullaccayam -am nma). anukhepana in Ee at Ap 405,7 (sarirassnukhepan) is wrfor asukhepana qv sv asu1. anuga, mfn. [ts], going after, following, accompanying (+ gen.); SI 72,16* (kirn c' assa -am hoti chy va anapyini); A V 300,12 (sabbam tarn idha vedaniyam na tarn -am bhavissati ti); Ja IV 426,24* (hotu rj tavnugo); Ap 483,20 (siss sabbe mamnug); ifc see ej-, magg-, vasa-; see also anvaga. anugacchati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anugacchati], goes along; goes after, follows; goes or falls into (ace); M I 178,19 (so tarn ~ati); S II 105,36 (so tarn -eyya); ThI361 (tarn maggam -ami yena tinn mahesino); Ja VI 52,12' (nnugamissanti); 496,3*; (evam tarn -ami putte dya pacchato); Ps II 407,23 (mam gacchantam -issasi); anugacchati in Ee at Sv 395,26 is wrfor anugajjati qv; (a)anugaccha(t), mfn., Paris I 164,4 (-ato); (b) anugacchanta, m/(~anti)., MI 178,20; Ap 525,H (addasam samanam aham vithiy -antam); Dhp-aIII 197,i (t -antiyo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anapagacchantiyo); Thi-a 78,18 (kmargasampayuttacittassa vasam -anti); (c)anugacchamna, mfn., Patis-a472,2 (asssam v passsam v -amnam cittam); aor. 3 sg. (a) anugacchi, anuganchi, Mp I 182,12 (eds anuganchi) * Dhp-a II 137,15 (Be, Se ~i; Ce, Ee anuganchi) # Th-alll 134,30 (Be, Ce, Se ~i; Ee anuganchi); (b) anvagacchi, Pv 40:6 (puriso ca te pitthito anvagacchi); (c) anugamsi, VinI 16,15; 3 pl. (a) anvagamum, Ja VI 512,12*; (b) anugamamsu, JaV 508,21 (Ee so; Ce anugamimsu; Be, Se anugacchimsu); (c) anugacchimsu, Dhp-aII 178,7 (anne pi bah bhikkh theram ~imsu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee pucchimsu); inf. (a) anugantum, Ja I 396,17 (na sakk tumhehi anugantum, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gantum); (b) anugacchitum, Ps IV 164,8; absol. anugantv, Ja IV 419,17 (thokam anugantv); Vism 401,33 (tass' attho plim anugantv veditabbo); Mil 398,20; Ud-a275,i4; pass, anugammamna, mfn., JaV 370,10 (panjalin mahjanena anugammamno); Ap-a58,s;

pp anugata, mfn. [ts], following; accompanied by; fallen or gone into; affected by; relating to; Abh 1174; D i l i 173,10* (paris 'ssa hoti 'nugat aeal); Ud 37,23* (~ manaso ubbilp; Be, Ee, Se so, but unmetrical; Ce anuggat; Ud-a237,2/o//.: ~ ti cittena anuvattit ... anuggat ti pi pli, anutthit ti attho); Ja IV 426,27' (esa hamsarj tava vasam -0 hotu tay saddhim ekatthne vasatu); Patis I 128,4 (jtiy ~o lokasannivso); Kv 338,3 (yath tilamhi telam -am anupavittham); Mil 204,27 (samsrasotam - samsrasotena vuyhant); Ps V 55,8 (tarn tt ... anudhammo ti vuttam); ifc see canda-; neg. ananugata, mfn., not following; not led (by others); Pj II 297,29; ananugatantara, mfn., with independent mind; MI 386,24* (jhyissa ananugatantarassa suddhassa; c/PsIII 98,16: kilese ananugatacittassa); fpp anugantabba, mfn. and n. impers., Ud-a 249,28 (na imesu divasesu bhagav ~o ti); Thi-a 171,19 (kalynamitte -an ti); see also anuVg, anvagata. anugacchanaka, mfn. [*anugacchana (anugacchan) + ka2], following, accompanying; Ps III 207,22 (kyam -kileso). anugacchan, / [from anugacchati], following; Paris I 164,13*. anugajjati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. amWgarj], shouts again, states again strongly; Sv 395,26 (pathamavacanena bhagav gajjati dutiyena ~ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr gacchati... anugacchati). anugajj in Ee at Ap 410,27 is wr; read vinadanti gaj matt with Be, Ce, Se. anuganhanta in Ee at D I 53,13 is wrfor anugganhanta, neg. o/ugganhti qv. anuganhti, see sv anugganhti. anugata, w/h.,/?/?o/anugacchati qv. anugati,/ [ts], following; imitation; Sv 1020,7 (tassa nnassa ~iyam nnam; = Spk II 67,27: anugamane); Mp II 145,4 (cariyupajjhyehi katam anukaronto ditthassa tesam erassa -im pajjati nma); ifc see ditth-. anugatika, mfn. [anugati + ka2], following, imitating; adapted to; ifc see ky-, kusal-, citta-. anugantabba, anugantum, anugantv, see sv anugacchati. anugama, m. [ts], following, going after; duranugama, mfn., difficult to follow, difficult to be followed; Ja IV 65,15 (sappurisnam bodhisattnam dhammo anne hi -0); Cp-a 98,26. anugamana, n., - , / (sometimes spelt anuggamana1, under the influence of paccuggamana) [S. anugamana], following, accompanying; the following day; inference; Ps II 395,10 (gmam pindya pavitthe bhikkh disv paccuggamanam pattapatiggahanam sanapannpanam -an ti evamdikam mettam kyakammam nma); Spk I 307,10 (manuss atthami-uposathassa paccuggamanam ca anuggamanam ca karissmi ti sattamiy pi navamiy pi uposathangni samdiyanti); 1167,27 (tassa nnassa ~e nnam; = Sv 1020,7: anugatiyam); Vism 280,6 (satiy nirantaram asssapasssnam -am); 643,22 (rammanassa anvayena -ena); Patis-a495,i (anubandhan ti -); anugamandivasena in Ee at Spk III 42,24 is wr; Ce


anupagacchanatdi-; Be, Se anupagacchantdi-; duranugamana, mfn., hard to follow, Spkl 59,6 (durannayo ti ~o); ifc see paccuggaman-. anugammamna, mfn., pass, o/anugacchati qv. anuVg, [S. amWg], to go after, follow; to act in conformity to; aor. 3 sg. (a) anvag, Mhv 7:10 (eko tarn vriyanto pi rjaputtena anvag); (b) anvagam', Ja V 172,18* (tejo nu te nnvagam dantamlam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anvagatam; or from anvaga^v; 174,20': udhu visam dantamlam na anvagatam, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anvagatam; Se omits na); (c)anvag 1 , Sn586 (anutthunanto klakatam sokassa vasam anvag; or 3 pi. ? see K.R. Norman, 1992b, p. 260; or from anvag4 qv; Pj II 461,2: anvag ti vasam gato); 1 sg. (a) anvagam2, Ja V 258,7* (mham kko va dummedho kmnam vasam anvagam, Be, Ce so; Ee annag; Se anvag) quoted Sadd 464,24 (anvagam); (b) annag, JaV 258,7* (mham... kmnam vasam annag, Ee so; Be, Ce anvagam; Se anvag); (c) anvag2, Ja IV 121,20* (mham kmehi sammatto jarya vasam anvag; or from anvag4 ? \2\,22'foil.: mham ... jarya vasagmi nma homi); 3pl. anvag3, SI 39,4* (nmassa ekadhammassa sabbe va vasam anvag); Th469 (ye ca ghosena anvag); see also anugacchati. anugmi(n), mfn. [S. anugmin], following; Pet 166,12 (yam manas padutthena bhsati v karoti v dukkham assnugmini, eds so); Pj II 453,23 (anuyutt ti ~ino sevak); Patis-a 562,17 (tadanvay honti ti tarn ~ini tarn anuvattini honti, Ee so; Ce ~ini; Be, Se ~im; ad Patis II 49,12 foil: bhvanya kat' indriyni tadanvayni honti). anugmika, anugmiya, mfn. [from anugmi(n)], following, accompanying; not leaving; Khp 8:8 (eso nidhi sunihito ajeyyo ~o; Pj I 223,11 foil.: anugacchati ti ~o, paralokam gacchantam pi... na vijahati ti attho ... eso hi -tt tarn na ppajahati ti); Ja IV 280,23' (tarn punnakammam pandit ~am nidhim nma kathenti); Mil \ 59,3\ foil, (na mahrja tathagato parisya ~o paris pana tathgatassa ~); Pj II 309,16 (-am attdhlnam rjdhinam asdhranan ti); Saddh 311 (mahnidhnam nihitam akkhayam anugmiyam). anugyati,/?r. 3 sg. [S. anuVgai], sings after; repeats in verse; recites (a text or hymn); praises; Vin I 245,19 (brhman pornam mantapadam gitam pavuttam samihitam tad ~anti) = D I 104,11; Sn 1131 (pryanam ~issam; Pj II 605,8: bhagavat gitam ~issam); Mil 120,13 (ye keci siddh saccam -anti mahmegho pavassat ti); Pet 87, is (bhagav yattakni padni nikkhipati tattakehi ~ati); pass. pr. 3 sg. anugiyati, Sn 940 (tattha sikkhnugiyanti; c/Sadd 923,22: tattha sikkh na griyanti ti; and O. von Hinber, 1983, p. 72; K.R. Norman, 1987, pp. 34-5); pp anuglta, mfn. and n., 1. {mfn.) recited; celebrated in song; Ja IV 234,3' (~o ti sabbabuddhehi vannito, Ee so, perhaps wr; Ce, Se samanugito ti;2tesamanuggatoti; ad 233,14*: Ce, Ee, Se samanugito; Be samanuggato); 2. (n.) reciting, intoning; Mil 120,14 (tesam saha saccam ~ena mahmegho pavassati); see also anukassmi. anugyana, n. [from anugyati (or anuginti)], singing after; repeating; Sadd696,2i (tassa bhikkhuno jano

anuginti... patiginti... bhikkhu... -parigyanakiriyvasena sampadnam hoti ti). anughati,pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVgh], plunges into, enters; Saddh 611 (appamatto tu dhammnam sabhvam ~ati sabhvam ~anto mannniyam na passati). anugijjhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVgrdh], is greedy after, covets; Sn 769 (kme yo naro ~ati); 854 (rase ca nnugijjhati); Ja III 207,18* (ye ca tarn -anti te honti cakkadhrino); neg. ananugijjhanta, mfn., Pj II 163,8 (annugiddho ti kanci dhammam tanhgedhena ananugijjhanto); pp anugiddha, mfn., greedy after, coveting; Th580 (rasesu ~assa jhne na ramati mano) quoted Mil 395,23*; neg. ananugiddha, annugiddha (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., free from greed; Sn 86 (nibbnbhirato annugiddho); 144 (kulesu annugiddho); 778 (phassam parinnya annugiddho); 952 (anitthuri annugiddho anejo). anuginti, pr. 3 sg. [S. anugrnti], answers; encourages by repeating or praising; Sadd 696,17 (bhikkhu janam dhammam sveti tassa bhikkhuno jano ~ti tassa bhikkhuno jano patiginti sdhukradndin tarn usshayati ti attho); see also anugyati, anugyana. anugita, mfn., pp of anugyati qv. anugiti, / [from anugyati; cf BHS anugita-], a summary or recapitulation in verse; Pet 87,17 (~iyam); Nett2,i (tassnugiti); 3,10* (yam pucchitam ca vissajjitam ca suttassa y ca ~i); Ps I 39,n (ayampan' ettha -i); Th-a III 37,9 (tass desanya -im kathento). anuguna, mfn. [ts], having similar qualities; suitable to; ifc see tad-. anugutta, mfn. [S. anugupta], protected; Vv 84:36 (maynugutt); JaV 399,23* (taynugutto Siri). anugganha, anuganha, m. [from anugganhti], favour; help; -sila, mfn., helpful, compassionate; Pv-a42,i (ye anukampak - honti; * Ud-a82,2i: anuggahasil); see also anuggaha'. anugganhaka, mfn. [anugganha + ka2], compassionate, helpful; Pv-a 69,14 (anukampak ti samparyikena atthena -, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anugganhatak). anugganhataka in Ee at Pv-a 69,14 is wr for anugganhaka qv. anugganhana, anugganhana, n. [from anugganhti], favour; help; It-al 71,13; Th-a II 50,14 (anukampy ti -ena); As 403,27 (' -atthya); see also anuggahana1. anugganhanaka, anuganhanaka, mfn. [anugganhana + ka2], compassionate; helpful; Th-a II 274,2 (sabbasattnam ~o); Cp-a 161,25 (mahkarunya sabbalokam ~o). anugganhanta1, mf(~mtl)n., of anugganhti qv. anugganhanta2, m/(~anti)., neg. of ugganhti qv. anugganhti, anuganhti (and anuggaheti), pr. 3 sg. [S. anwJgrah], favours, treats with kindness; protects, helps; acknowledges, admits; Vin IV 324,29 foil. (Thullnand bhikkhuni sahajivinim vutthpetv dve vassni n' eva ~ti na ~peti... katham hi nma ... n' eva ~issati na -pessati ti... y ... n' eva -eyya na -peyya pcittiyan ti; 325,14: n' eva -eyy ti na sayam ~eyya uddesenaparipucchya ovdena anussaniy); MI 457,31


(evam bhagav etarahi ~tu bhikkhusahgham); S III 91,28 (yannnham ... -eyyam bhikkhusanghan ti); A I 125,26 (paripram v silakkhandham tattha tattha pannya anuggahessmi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anuggahissmi) = Pp 36,i {Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anuggahissmi); Vv-a242,i6 (anukampass ti ~hi); Pv-a 181,22 ('-a anuddayam karohi); (a)anugganhanta1, /w/(~anti)w., Vin V 78,15 (dve vassni n' eva ~anti" nnuggahpenti); Ja V 245,19' (~anto); Thi-a 155, n (satth disv tarn ~anto); (b) anuggahenta, mfn., Pj II 440,10 (pindaptacariydihi lokam anuggahentassa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ~antassa); aor. 3 sg. (a)anuggahi, Th330 (upajjhyo anuggahi; Th-all 140,26: mam ovdadnavasena anugganhi); (b) anugganhi, Th-all 140,26; (c) anuggahesi, VinV 67,20 (n'eva anuggahesi na anuggahpesi); Sv3,22; inf. anugganhitum, Ih-a 1225,23; Cp-a293,i6 (sabbasatte -itum samattho hoti); absol anuggahetv1, Sv46,i6 (mahjanam anuggahetv); pp anuggahita 1 , 1 anuggahita , mfn., made happy; satisfied; helped, furthered; M I 457,30 (bhagavat pubbe bhikkhusahgho ~o); S II 274, l (satthr ~o svako mahbhinnatam patto ti); Ja III 428, r (devindena Sakkena ~ hutv); neg. ananuggahita, mfn., not helped; Spkll 299,22; fpp (a) anuggahetabba, mfn., Vin I 50,28 (upajjhyena bhikkhave saddhivihriko sangahetabbo anuggahetabbo uddesena paripucchya); Mil 391,14 (sangahetabbam anuggahetabbam); (b) anugganhitabba, mfn., Ps III 154,24 (sangahitabb anuganhitabb, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be omits); (c)anuggahitabba, m/h., Pj II 271,7 (ajja koci satto anuggahitabbo atthi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anuggahetabbo); (d) anuggayha, anugayha, V ism 444,34 (tejdinam gunehi rpdihi anuggayhabhvato ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee anugayhabhvato ti); cans. (a)/?r. 3 sg. anugganhpeti, anuggahpeti, causes (someone) to help, to favour; Vin IV 324,30 foil. (~eti ... ~essati ti... ~eyya); anuggahpenta,mfi-ent\)n., VinV 67,18 (n' eva anuganhantiy na anuggahpentiy pcittiyam); aor. 3sg. anuggahpesi, VinV 67,2I; caus. (b)pass. anugghiyamna, mfn., being made to help; being made to admit;! Mp II 273, n (samanughiyamnni tikimkranet ditthiyo uppann ti evam samm anugghiyamnni). anugganhitv, ind., neg. absol. o/ugganhti qv. anuggata1, mfn. [ami1 + uggata, pp o/uggacchati qv, or for anugatamc], arisen along with; Ud 37,23* (~ manaso ubbilp, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se anugat, unmetrical; Ud-a 237,4: anugat ti... ~ ti pi pli anutthit ti attho). anuggata 2 , mfn., neg. pp o/uggacchati qv. anuggamana1, see sv anugamana. anuggamana2, see sv uggamana. anuggaha1, m. [S. anugraha], 1. favour, kindness; help, assistance; Abh 925; S i l 11,23 (cattro... hr bhtnam v sattnam thitiy sambhavesmam v ~ya); A I 92,25 (dve 'me bhikkhave ~... misnuggaho ca dhammnuggaho ca); It 12,9* (samaggnam c' ~o); Jal 151,8 (~am alabhamn); IV 396,15* (karohi oksam ~ya); Vism 45,9* (klena laddh parato ~); ifc see brahmacariy-, vinay-; 2. (gr.t.t.) admission; concession; Sadd896,24 (kincpi iti 0,-atthe); Jal 135,23'

(kific ti garahatthe ca 0,-atthe ca nipto); II29,18' (api ce pi ti eko pisaddo ' -attho eko sambhvanattho). anuggaha 2 , mfh., see sv uggaha. anuggahaka in Ee at Ja II 123,22' is prob, wr for anugghaka qv. anuggahana1, anuggahana, n. [S. anugrahana], showing favour, kindness; Spklll 224,15 (dhammena -am); It-aII 91,12 (paresam '-attham); -paccupatthna, mfn., manifested by or as kindness, showing favour; As 117,18 (sukham ... -am). anuggahana2, see sv ugganhana. anuggahya, neg. absol. o/ugganhti qv. anuggahita1, mfn., pp o/anugganhti qv. anuggahita2, mfn., neg.pp q/'ugganhti qv. anuggahetv 1 , ind., absol. o/anugganhti qv. anuggahetv 2 , ind., neg. absol. o/ugganhti qv. anugghaka, m/(-ik). [S. anugrhaka], helping, furthering; Mill 248,23 (pandit bhikkh - brahmacrinam); SHI 5,32 (Sriputto... bhikkhnam ~o sabrahmacrinan ti; Spkll 256,21: misnuggahena ca dhammnuggahena ca ti dvihi pi anuggahehi ~o); Ja II 123,22' (samanabrhman pi silavantnam ~ na hi nna santi, Be, Ce so; Ee anugghaka, prob, wr; Se anuggahanak); It-aII 160,34 (attano puttnam anukampak ~); Thi-a 168,21 (yath pi anukampik ti yath ann pi anugghika). anugharam, ind. [anu1 + ace. o/ghara], in or to each house; house after house; Mil 43,1 (manuss ~am panca panca udakaghatakni thapenti limpanam vijjhpetum); Sv 191,15 (~am pavittho ca dtukmam v adtukmam v sallakhetum); Pj II 175,5 (sapadnan ti ~am). anugharakam, ind. [anugharam + ka2], to each house; from house to house; Vin 1249,23 (~am ~am hindatha). anughyitv, ind. [absol. of *anuJ + ghyati1, S. anuVghr], smelling; sniffing at; Mil 343,22 (bhamar va gandham ~itv). anucankama, n. [anu1 + cankama], a side path; ? {along the walkway;!); Ap-a9,2 (puthulato pana diyaddharatanam dvisu passesu ratanamattam ~am dighato satthihattham mudutalam samavippakinnavlukam cankamam vattati, eds so; read ratanamatta-m-anucankamam?) = Jal 7,27' {Be, Se ratanamatta-anucankamam; Ce, Ee anucankamanam). anucankamati, pr. 3 sg. [5//5anucankramati], walks up and down along; walks up and down with or after; Mil 121,7 (uyynena uyynam ~mi anuvicarmi); S IV 117,4 (parito parito kutikyam ~anti anuvicaranti); (a)anucahkamanta, mfn., D I 235,15 (jarighvihram -antnam anuvicarantnam); Ja IV 7,2 (janghvihram ~anto); (b) anucahkamamna,mfn., MI 227,30 (janghvihram ~amno anuvicaramno); aor. 3 sg. anucankami, Sv400,3 (ekam cankamantam itaro ~i); 1 sg. (a) anucankamim, Th 1044 (buddhassa cankamantassa pitthito ~im); (b) anucankamissam, Th481 (~issam virajam sabbasattnam uttamam; Th-all 203,4: cankamantassa satthuno anu pacchato anugamanavasena aham cankamim); 3 pl. anucankamimsu, DIII 80,20 (bhagavantam cankamantam -imsu);

110 3 sg. anucankampeti, MI 253,25 (Sakko ca... Vessavano ca... yasmantam Mahmoggallnam Vejayante psde -penti anuvicarpenti). anucankamana, n., a side path; (along the walkway; ?); Ja 17,27' (puthulato pana diyaddharatanam dvisu passesu ratanamattam -am dighato satthihattham mudutalam samavippakinnavlukam cankamam vattati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ratanamatta-anucankamam) = Ap-a9,2 (eds ratanamattam anucankamam). anucara, m. [ts], companion; follower; Abh380; Ap 458,20 (dsi ds - honti cittnuvattak); Dhp-alll 454,io (nandirgo -o nma); snucara, mfn., together with follower(s); Dhp294 (rattham -amhantv); Ja VI 172,18*. anucarati, pr. 3 sg. [S. aniWcar], walks after or along; walks with; follows; pursues; prosecutes; S IV 190,29 (kim mundo kaplam -asi); A III 352,10 (yam... daliddo... codiyamno na deti -anti pi nam); anucaranta, mfn., Ap 257,9 (Sindhum -anto 'ham Siddhattham jinam addasam); aor. 3 sg. (a)nucri, Ja I 188,10* (Mahilmukho pothayam nucri); (b)anvacri, Ja I 188, \r (pothayam nucri ti pothayanto mrento anvacri, ayam eva v ptho); pass, anucariyamna, mfn., A III 352,12 (anucariyamno na deti bandhanti pi nam); pp (a) anucinna, mfn. and n. [BHS anucirna], 1. (mfn.) (i) (pass.) followed, practised; pervaded; filled with; ThI206(teh' -am isibhi maggam... anubrhaya); JaIV 286,22* (pabbat ... vlamigehi -); VI 289,7' (kunjarehi ca jannahayehi ca -am paripunnam); Bv 2:116 (mahesii -am mahpatham); (ii) (act.) pursuing, practising; Vin II 203,io* (so pamdam ~o); 2. (n.) practising, seeking; Mil 243,16 (kam tattha dukkham -ena); ifc see brahmacariy-; (b) anucarita, mfn. and n., 1. (mfn.) gone through; pursued; crowded with; Ps II 22,23 (ito c' ito ca anucarpetv vimamsya -am dhammam deseti); 2. (n.) going through; Mil 226,6 (brhmano nma sabbabhavbhavagatisu abhijtivattitam -am jnti); caus. absol anucarpetv, Ps II 22,23. anucariy,/ [from anucarati], I.following; attendance; D i l 264,8 (Sakkassa... -am upgami; Sv699,27: -am sahacariyam ekato gamanam upgami); 2. pursuit, prosecution; A III 352,10 (anucaranti pi nam, -a p i . . . dukkh lokasmim); snucariya in Ce, Ee at D III \\,6 foil, is prob, wr for snucrika qv sv anucrik. anucrik,/ [ts], a female attendant, serving-woman; wife; Sv 823,25 (~ vuccati bhariy, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~o); snucrika, mfn., with a female companion; Dili ll,6/o//. (so na cirass' eva parihito ~o vicaranto odanakiimmsam bhunjamno, Be so; Se snucariko; Ce, Ee snucariya; Sv 823,26: sahnucrikya ~o, tambrahmacrivatam pahya sahabhariyo ti attho). anucinna, mfh.,pp of anucarati qv. anucintana, n. [ts], thinking of, considering; ifc see hita-. anucintit in Ee at Ja IV 227,15' is prob, wr; read manasnuvicintit with Be, Ce, Se and 221,9*. anucinteti, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVcint], thinks upon, considers; Ja VI 240,36* (inghnucintesi sayarn pi deva;

241,6': ~esl ti punappunam ~eyysi); anucintayamna, mfh.y Ja IV 441,25' (tarn ekarattim -ayamn); aor. 3 sg. anucintesi; Th-aIII 18,27 (tarn suttam uggahetv tadattham ~esi); 3 pi. anucintayum, Ap 534,12 (dhir dhammatam -ayum). anuccangi, see sv uju. anucchava, anucchavi, mfn. [anu1 + chavi], suitable, proper; fit for; corresponding to; D i l i 157,13* (~i tassa yad nulomikam tarn vindati, so readl eds anucchavikassa); Vv 84:36 (~im ovadiyam ca me tarn); Cp2:l:2 (tavnucchavo mahrja gajo); Ap69,11 (idarn me sanam vira pannattam tav' anuc chavam). anucchavika, anucchaviya, mfn. [anucchavi + ka2], suitable (for); fit; proper; Abh715; Dili 157,13* (-assa yad nulomikam tarn vindati, eds so, but perhaps wrfor anucchavi tassa); Ja I 58,13 (tinnam utnam ~e tayo pasde kresi); IV 137,25 (nyam mangalahatthi bhavitum -0); Niddl 132,20 (etarn patirpam etam -am etam anulomam); Mil 252,9 (te arahattassa - honti); Vism 219,2 (-tt); Sp 859,25 (majjapanam nma na anucchaviyan ti); Dhp-a I 203,1 (mama dhit omakasattassa na -); Ud-a 309,4 (brahmacariyam carantnam -ni vatthni); Vv-a 68,12 (na tvam amhkam ayyya upari pakkasappim sincitum ~ ti); Pv-a286,9 (tay katassa ppakammassa -am ev' etam phalam); Nidd-a I 257,20 (-tya); ifc see chupan' -; ananucchavika, ananucchaviya, mfn., unsuitable; unbecoming; Vin HI 120,25 (vigarahi buddho bhagav -am moghapurisa ananulomikam appatirpam assmanakam akappiyam akaraniyam, Be, Seso; Ce, Ee ananucchaviyam); IV 110,7 (-am... Sgatassa ananulomikam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ananucchaviyam); Ja VI 264, is (dhitu -am pi katham kathesi); Mil 13,22 (-am kho Ngasena parivitakkam vitakkesi, Be so; Ce, Ee ananucchaviyam; Se ananucchaviyam ... parivitakkni); 266,22 (yam loke atthi samannam -am ananulomikam); Ps III 160,17 (--tt); Ud-a 384,26 (-am vata ariyasviknam evarpam maranan ti, Be, Se so; Ce acchariyam; Ee wr anucchaviyam); As 35,19 (-ena samudcrena); Vibh-a 492,14 (evam nma mam esa vattum -o ti). anuchamsam, ind. [anu1 + ace. o/chamsa], every six months; Dhp-a III 52,13 (anusamvaccharam v -am v bhikkh uposathatthya sannipatanti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anucchamsam). anuja, mfn., m. and - , / [ts], \.(mfn.) like, equal; taking after (one's parents); Jail 99,1* (sace va f -o poso; 99,4': tassa -o anurpajto ti -o); VI 307,9* (tassnujam dhitaram kmaymi; 307,15': tassa anujtam dhitaram); 2. ( a younger brother or sister; Abh254; Mhv 48:20 (tassnujo rj Kassapo 'hosi khattiyo); Vin-vn 487 (anntak sace honti bhtuno -ya v); ifc see buddha-. anujagghati (and *anojagghati), pr. 3 sg. [anu1 (+ o2) + jagghati], laughs at; mocks; anujagghanta, mfn., D I 91,18 (annadatthu mamam yeva manne -ant, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anojagghant, perhaps wr); aor. 3 pi. anujagghimsu, Sv258,1 (tarn disv Saky -ims ti). anujavati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anujavati], runs after;


pursues', Ja VI 452,14' (sace pana tvam tarn ~issasi); (a)anujava(t), mfn., Ja VI 452,6* (hamsarjam yath dhanko -am patissasi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anuijavam; 452,i4'/o//.: sace pana tvam tarn ~issasi anubandhissasi atha yath suvannahamsarjam ~anto dhanko antar papatati evam papatissasi); (b) anujavanta, mfn., Ja VI 452,15'. anujta, mfn. [ts], like, resembling; taking after, following the example of (one's parents or teacher); It63,ifoil, (atijto ~o avajto ti... katham ca putto ~o hoti; It-a II43,I: ~o ti gunehi mtpitnam anurpo hutv jto, tehi samnaguno ti attho); Sn 557 (may pavattitam cakkam ... Sriputto 'nuvatteti ~o tathgatam) = Th 827; Ja VI 380,19* (~o pitaram anomapanno; 380,25': kulatantikulapavenirakkhako pana ~o nma); Ap 25, l (kidisam te mahvlra ~a mahyasa buddhassa ssanam dhammam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anujtamahyaso); -putta, m., a son (or pupil) resembling his father (or teacher); a worthy son; Ps III 404, I6 (tathgatassa pana eko ~o va hoti); Dhp-a 1129,15 (te pi sabbe va ~ nma ahesum); see also atijta, avajta. anujnana, n. [from anujnti; cf S. anujfina], permission, leave; approval; Sv 297,19 (yam tumhkam ~am); Ps I 96,6 (kincpi ti -pasamsanatthe nipto). anujnti, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVjn], gives permission; grants, allows; grants leave; excuses; advises, prescribes; Vin I 102,31 (~mi bhikkhave ptimokkham uddisitun ti); III 13,i (~tha mam agrasm anagriyam pabbajjy ti); 171,25 (imni samano Gotamo nnujnissati); 248,34 (~mi bhikkhave rmikan ti); D II 46,22 (~tu bhante bhagav bhikkh caratha bhikkhave crikam); Mil 61,14 (iccham' aham bhante mtpitaro uddassetum sace mam bhagav ~fi ti); AIV 274,22 (na bhagav ~ti mtugmassa... agrasm anagriyam pabbajjan ti); Sn 982 (~hi me brahme n' atthi panca satni me); Thi458 (~tha pabbajissmi); Ja IV 482,30* (~a mam pabbajissmi deva); VI 505,30* (~hi mam amma pabbajj mama ruccati); Sv 583,35 (bhagav... klankatassa ranno thpakaranam ~ti); opt. 3 sg. (a) anujann, Sn 394 (na cnujann hanatam paresam); (b) anujneyya, Ud58,n (sace mam upajjhyo ~eyya); (a) neg. annujna(t) (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., Sn 880 (parassa ce dhammam annujnam); (b) anujnanta, mfn., Ja VI 72,22 (tumhesu ~antesu); Vism594,n; neg. ananujnanta, mfn., Ja IV 116,4; annujnanta (with rhythmical lengthening), mfn., Niddl 287,20 (annujnan ti parassa... maggam annujnanto annupassanto); (c) anujnamna, mfn., Ps III 294,13 (mayham mtpitaro pabbajjam ~amn); aor. 3 sg. (a)anujni, Ja I 317,12 (satth sdh ti ~i); Ap 534,25; Vism 399,3i; (b) anunfisi, Vin I 310,18* (civaram ca gihidnam anunfisi tathagato); JaV 380,24* (Ksirj anunfisi hamsnam pavaruttamam; 380,27': gacchath ti anunfisi); Mhv 30:10; inf. (a)anujnitum, Niddl 192,6 (na sakkosi ekamsena ~itum na sakkosi ekamsena patikkhipitun ti); (b) anunntum, Sp 983,25 (natticatutthakammena garukam katv upasampadam anunntukmo); absol. anujnitv, Sp 82,20; Dhp-a I 55,9 (tesam tatth*

eva ekasimya uposathdini ~itv); neg. ananujnitv, As 423,16; pass, (a) anujniyamna, mfn., Sp 603,9; (b) anunfiyamna, mfn., Sv 584,1 (puthujjanabhikkhnam hi thpe anunnyamne Tambapannidipe tva thpnam okso va na bhaveyya); pp anufifita1, mfn. [S. anujiita], permitted, allowed; prescribed; granted leave; Vin 1238,13 (yni tni may bhikkhnam ~ni); DIU 130,9 (yo vo may pindapto ~o); A I 121,i7/o//. (gilnabhattam -am gilnabhesajjam ~am gilnpatthko ~o); Ja II 353,2* (sace ntflii ~o); Vism 44,16 (bhagavat tt); Ap 530,2 (nibbutim gaccheyyam lokanthena ~); Nett 161,30 (~am patikkhittam); patinfita, mfn., acknowledged and selfprofessed; D I 88,7 (~-patifinto sake cariyake tevijjake pvacane); Sn594 (--patiiinttevijjmayam asm' ubho; Pj II 463,9 foll.\ tevijj tumhe ti evam mayam cariyehi ca ~ attan ca patijnimh ti attho); neg. ananunfita, mfn., not allowed, not given permission; Vin II 169,27 (kinnu kho bhagavat psdaparibhogo anunnto kirn ananunnto ti); III 12,29 (na... tathagata ananunfitam mtpithi puttam pabbjenti ti); Thi 129 (aycito tato gacchi ananunnto ito gato); Jal 156,13 (mtpithi ananunntatt); Kkh 114,28 (ananunntat);fpp (a) anufifleyya, mfn., worthy of approval; allowable; D III 47,25 (santam yeva pariyyam ~am anujnti); A l l 197,19 (~am c'eva anujneyysi); (b) anujnitabba, mfn., id.; Vin I 119,16; Sv 838,28; caus. pr. 3 sg (a) anujaneti, asks for or obtains permission or approval; asks leave; Vin II 301,3 (kappati bhante vaggena sanghena kammam ktum gate bhikkh ~essma); absol. anujnetv, Ap 569,7 (tad 'harn ~etv pabbajim anagriyam); caus. pr. 3 sg.(b) anujnpeti, id.; Ja V 441,10 (gaccha mtpitaro ~ehl ti); VI 270,31 (so Vessavanena ananunnto gantum avisahitv tarn ~etum et ettak glh kathesi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jnpetum); Sv 388,12 (~eyyan ti); Ps III 293,13 (mtpitaro ~em ti, Ee so; Be, Se -essmti); anujnpenta, mfn., Ja VI 505,29 (mtu santikam gantv pabbajjam ~ento ha); aor. 3 sg. anujnpesi, Spkl 282,36 (parinibbnaklam ~esi); absol. anujnpetv, Ja II 65,18 (bodhisatto ... rjnam pabbajjam ~etv); Mil 11,31 (mtpitaro ~etv); Vv-a 158,7 (parinibbnam ~etv); neg. absol. ananujnpetv, Sp 943,26. anujlna, anujina, mfn. [anu1 + jina or jina2], deprived (or beaten) because of, It-a II \0\,ifoll. (pamdam ~o tipi pathanti... pamdam nissya ... jhnbhifinhi ~o parihinoti, Be, Seso; iseanujino; Ceanuhino; ad It 86,5*, pamdam anucinno). anujivati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVjiv], lives upon; lives by, because of; Ja IV 271,4* (alinacittassa tuvam vikkantam ~asi; 271,io': ~asi ti upajivasi); anujivanta, m/(~anti)n., Sp 793,29 (bhikkh... thi [bhikkhunihi] tena hi ayy mayam pi tumhkam ovdam ~antiyo vasissm ti vutt). anujivi(n), mfn. and m. [S. anujivin], (mfn.) living upon; dependent; (m.) a follower, a dependent; Abh 342 (~I tu sevako); S I 93,5* (ds kammakar pess ye c' assa ~ino); A1152,31* (amacc ntisahgh ca ye c' assa ~ino);


Ja III 256,14* (tassa putt ca dr ca ye c' anfie ~ino); Ap 315,io (dsids ca bhariy ye c' anne ~ino). anujivita, n. [anu1 + jivita], living after, living according to; ifc see silavata-. anujettham, ind. [S. anujyestham], according to seniority; Sadd 747,29 (jetthnam anupubbo ~am). anujotana, n. [anu1 + jotana], further illuminating; PatisI 18,25 (ekatte '-attho abhinneyyo); II 122,27 (ekatte ' -attham bujjhati ti bojjhang). anujjangi,/, anujjugmi(n), m(fn)., seesvuju. *anujjalayati,/?r. 3 sg. [caus. of *anu + jalati2], lights (in succession); aor. 1 sg. anujjalayim, Ap 579,15 (gandhatelena pretv dip 'nujjalayim tahim, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be dipnujjalayi; Ce dipnujlayi; Se dipni ujjalayim; quoted Thi-a68,5*: Ee dipn' ujjalayim; Be, Ce, Se dipnujjalayi). anufiattiy in Ee, Se at Sp 1291,28 is prob, wr for anupannattiy (Be, Ce so). anuflfl, / [S. anujn], permission; Abhll33; Ps III 195,18 (ananunnya thatv -am pi patikkhipati); V 19,io; Vv-a 182,4 (yasm Vangiso bhagavato ~ya imhi gthhi pucchi); Mhv 9:8 (raMniinfiya); ananufi,/, lack of permission; Jail 363, iv (kulassa ~ya kulaghara ... pavitthatt); Ps III 195,18. anufifita1, mfn., pp o/anujnti qv. anufita2, mfn., see sv unnta. anuflfitaka, mfn. [anunnta1 + ka2], allowed; prescribed; Sp 1325,32 (sesam ~am kle c' evakappati junhe ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anunntam); 1333,2 (~am, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anunntam); Pet79,2o(-khamasuttam gahetabbam ananunntakakhamam na gahetabbam, Ee so; Be, Ce anunntakhamasuttam ... ananunfitakhamam). anuflfltum, inf. o/anujnti qv. anuflfisi, aor. 3 sg. o/anujnti qv. anuflfieyya, mfn.,fpp o/anujnti qv. anutfhaha, m. [from anutthahati], practice; performance; ? Th 1033 (kyamaccheragaruno hiyyamne -e sarirasukhagiddhassa kuto samanaphsut; cf lh-aIII 119,23/o//.: hiyyamne ti attano kye jivite ca khane khane parihiyyamne, ~e ti sildinam paripranavasena utthnaviriyam na kareyya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee hiyyamno ti ... parihiyyamno; but cf K.R.Norman, 1969, pp. 266-67, for explanation as neg. of anutitthati qv). anutthahati, see sv anutitthati. anutthaha(t), anutthahanta, anutthahna, neg. o/utthahati qv sv uttitthati. anutthahitv, neg. absol. o/uttitthati qv. anutthna1, n. [S. anusthna], carrying out, undertaking, performance; Ja II 209,15' (tassa v vidhino vidhnam samvidahanam -am jnti); Cp -a 51,23 (pabbajjya ~am); ifc see yoga-; ananutthna, w., failure to carry out or undertake; Th-aHI 90,9 (kusalnam dhammnam -am); As 60,24 (tassa kusalassa -ena, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anutthnena); see also anutitthana. anufthana2, n., seesv utthna. anutthya 1 ,^^/. o/anutitthati qv. anutthya2, neg. absol. o/uttitthati qv.

anutthita1, mfn. [anu1 + utthita], risen along with or after; Ud-a237,4 (anuggat tipi pli, ~ ti attho; Ee, Ce, Se so; Be anu-utthit). anutthita2, mfn., pp o/anutitthati qv. anutthita3, mfn., neg. pp o/uttitthati qv. anutthubha in Ee at Nidd-all 152,16* and Patis-a 704,9* is wrfor anutthubha qv. anutthubha,/ [S. anustubh], a class of metres (four x eight syllables; an archaic form o/vatta qv); Abh945; Th-al 8,6 (giyati ti gth, '-divasena isihi pavattitam catuppadam chappadam v vacanam); see also anutthubha. anutthubhitv, neg. absol. of nutthubhati qv sv nitthubhati. anu4asi, aor. 3 sg. [of *anu1 + dasati], (s)he bit; Ja VI 192,2* (kacci t' nudasi tta; Ee so, prob, wr; Be kacci tarn nu damsi; Ce nu dasi; Se kacci nu damsito). anu4ahati,/?r. 3 sg., see sv anudahati. anudahana, n., see sv anudahana. anutapati, see sv anutappati. anutappa, mfn.,fpp 0/anutappati qv. anutappati, anutapati,pr. 3 sg. 1. [cf S. anutapati], vexes; causes remorse (afterwards); SI 111,3* (rattindiv nnutapanti mmam); Ja V 24,24* (kirn kammajtam -a tarn); VI 266,28* (anmanta katam kammam tarn pacch-m -anutappati; 267,2': tarn kammam pacch anutpam vahati); 2. [cf S. anutapyate], suffers remorse; regrets, repents (afterwards); sorrows over; Dhp 67 (na tarn kammam katam sdhu yam katv ~ati); Vv 52:17 (yam katv sukhit honti na ca pacchnutappare); Th 225 (pacch ca-m-anutappati); Ja III 340,15* (yo ca datv nnutappe, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nnutape); IV 241,19* (datv nnutapeyy' aham); fut. 3 sg. (a) anutapessati, AIV 228,4* (vanijo va atitattho cirattam anutapessati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anutapissati); (b) anutapissati, Ja III 340,26* (ko datv anutapissati, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se ~ati; quoting VI 552,31*: eds ~ati);MpIV 117,11 (ciram anutapissati socissati, Be, Ce, Eeso; Se ~issati); 2 sg. anutapessasi, Ja I 113,16* (ciram tvam ~essasi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anutappesi; 113,2r: socanto paridevanto anutapessasi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ~essasi; 113,22': atha v niraydisu uppanno ... dukkhni anubhavanto anutapessasi kilamissasi, Ee so; Be, Ce ~issasi; Se ~essasi; 113,28' : digharattam -issasi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ~essasi); (a) neg. annutappa(t) (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., Ja V 492,i* (annutappam paralokam gamissam; 492,26: annutappan ti ananutappamno); (b) anutappamna, mfn., Ja IV 439,26* (tarn ekarattim ~amn); As 383,14 (~amnassa); neg. ananutappamna, mfn., JaV 492,26'; aor. 3 .sg anutappi, Ja I 113,26' (tato parihino anutappi); fpp (a) anutappa, mfn., to be regretted; to be sorrowed over; D i l i 122,3 (evarpo... satth svaknam klakato -o hoti); A I 22,19 (ekapuggalassa ... klakiriy bahuno janassa - hoti); neg. ananutappa, mfn., DIU 122,21; annutappa (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., Ja IV 451,14* (sammpanidhi ca narassa atth annutappa te bhavanti pacch); (b) anutappitabba, anutapitabba, (mf)n.


impers., there should be regret; Ja III 341, ir (dnam nma datv n' eva anutappitabban ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anutapitabban ti); (c) anutappiya, mfn., A III 308,26* {in uddna: ~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ananutappiyam); (d) neg. ananutpiya, mfn., A III 46,20* (katam ananutpiyam). anutappana, n. [c/'f/Sanutapyan], repenting; regret; Ja VI 552,25 (dnam datv ~am nma satam dhammo na hou" ti); Sv 910,12 (' -kradassanattham). anutpa, m. [ts], remorse, regret; Abh 169; Vv 40:5 (hoti ca me -o aparaddham dukkatam ca me); MpII 150,18 (cakkavattino klakiriy ekacakkavle devamanussnam ~am karoti); As 384,17 (na hi arahato dutthu may idam katan ti evam ~o atthi); ifc see paccha-. anutpi(n), mfit. [S. anutpin], repenting; regretting; ifc see pacch-. anutlana, n. [from anutleti], beating repeatedly; Ja II 280,9'. anutleti, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + tleti], beats repeatedly; anutlenta, m/w., Jail 280,8'; aor. 2sg. anutlayi, Ja II 280,4* (tvam ...mam gahetvna latthiy ~ayi). anutifthati, anutthahati, pr. 3 sg. [S. aniWsth], carries out, attends to; performs, practises; JaV 113,10* (utthahato appamajjato -anti devat; 115,14': ~anti anugacchanti dhammikarakkham samvidahanti); 121,12* (yo ... anutthahati klena kammaphalam tassa ijjhati; 122,26': anutthahati ti tasmim tasmim kle tarn tarn kiccam karoti); Ap 531,28 (tath tarn ~atha); Pv-a78,2i (yathpannattam imam dnavidhim aparihpenti sakkaccam ~hi ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anupatitthhi ti); Thi-a 78,30 (care careyyam ~eyyam); Cp-a 191,4 (pannikavuttim ~asi ti); anutitthanta, mfn., Ud-a310,6 (~anto); absol. anutthya1, 1h-aII 84,16 (aggiparicarandi anutthya); pp anufthita2, mfn. [S. anusthita], 1. (pass.) practised, effected, done; VinV 140,26 (mettya cetovimuttiy ... vatthukatya ~ya paricitya ... ekdasnisams ptikahkh; Sp 1345,31: ~y ti anuanupavattitya niccdhitthity ti attho) quoted Mil 198,3; DU 103,2 (iddhipd... vatthukat ~ paricit); S IV 200,30 (kyagat no sati... vatthukat - paricit); 2. {act.) following, caring for; Ja VI 563,2* (aham patim ca putte ca ceram iva mnavo ~ divrattim); fpp (a) anutthtabba, mfn., Cp-a 315,8 (pabbajj tva ~); (b) anufthitabba, m/w., Petl52,i9 (yni kalankajhyino padni tni ~ni patipakkhe, so read with Nnamoli, 1979, p. 208 ? Be, Ee anudhitni; Ce anumitni). anutitthana, n. [from anutitthati], carrying out; performance; Ud-a 351,12 (etesam ~am upatthnam); see also anutthna'. anutiram, ind. [anu1 + ace. of tira], along the bank, along the shore; Ja III 333,18 (siglo ... ~am eva agamsi); Sp 1072,i (sace pi nv ~am eva annattha gacchati). anutire, ind. [anu1 + loc. o/tira], alongside or near the bank (of a river); Sn 18 (~e Mahiy samnavso); 19 (~e Mahiy ekarattivso); Spklll 29,17 (anunaditire ti nadiy ~e); Dhp-a III 141,13 (yena pana vo ~e caritam);

see also anunaditire. anuttariya1, n., see sv nuttariya. anuttariya2, mfn. [from a 3 + uttara1 or uttari], incomparable, excellent; Mil 229,32 (y v pan' esam sannanam parisuddh param agg - akkhyati; PsIV 18,20: - akkhyati ti asadis kathiyyati); Sv 1003,30 (~an ti uttamam jetthakam). anutthunti1, anutthunti1, pr. 3 sg. [cf BHS anustanayati], wails; deplores; laments (for); Sn 827 (upaccag man ti ~ti); Ja V 479,10* (na vham attnam -mi); Sp 400,9 (dni mama hitasukhalbh nma n' atthi ti ~ti); (a) anutthuna(t), mfn., Dhp 156 (senti cptikhln va purnni -am; sg. for pi, or possibly namul absol.; Dhp-a III 133,6: ~ant socant anusocant senti); Ja III 114,6* (asiho sihamnena ... seti bhumy ~am); (b) anutthunanta, anutthunanta1, mfn., Sn586 (~anto klakatam); Ja III 114,17'; aor. 3 pl. anutthunimsu, D III 86,22 (~imsu aho rasam aho rasan ti) = 88,6 {Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anutthunimsu). anutthunti2, anutthunti2 {and anutthavati), pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + thunti2], praises; speaks of repeatedly; Sn 901 (uddhamsar suddhim -anti; Niddl 315,15: ~anti vadanti kathenti bhananti); anutthunanta2, mfn., JaV 346, is* (~anto sino bhattu ycittha jivitam; 347,26': -anto ti bhattu gune vannento tassa jivitam mam yci); Pj II 559,2 (tesam... suddhim ~antnam); aor. 3 sg. anutthuni, Ap 22,5 (yo mam pupphena pjesi nnam cpi -1, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anutthavi). anutthunana, n. [from anutthunti1], lamenting, mourning; -dukkha, n., misery (that consists) of mourning; Vism 506,2 (sokdivuddhiy janitavisdnam -amupyso) = Patis-a 150,21. anutthun, / [from anutthunti1], wailing, lamenting; Nidd I 167,12 (~ vuccati vcpalpo vippalpo llappo). anutthunimsu in Ee at D III 88,6 is wr for anutthunimsu {Be, Ce,Seso). anuthera, m., the second thera (after the sanghathera,); Sp 1224,4 (~am dim katv); Ps II 121, H (sarighatthero tatiyadivase arahattam patto ~o catutthadivase angmi ahosi); Dhp-a II211,17 (mahtherena bhatam pindaptam abhunjitv -ena bhatam bhunjissm ti); see also thernuthera. anudayat, anuddayat, / , abstr. [from anuday, anudday], compassion, kindness, favour; Vinlll 247,13 (tassa -ya); SV 169,19 (khantiy ahimsya mettatya -ya); AIII 184,20 (~am paticca katham kathessmi ti). anudayati, anuddayati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + dayati; -ddperhaps rhythmical lengthening], is compassionate; cares for; Nidd-a 1457,6 (~atl ti anudd, rakkhati ti attho, anuddaykro anuddayan) = As 362,7; anudayamna, anuddayamna, mfn., Nidd II 120,15; (~amno); Ap-a 159,21 (anukampamno ti -amno); pp anudayita, anuddayita, mfn., compassionate; Nidd-a I 457,8 (~assa bhvo ttam); see also anudayita. anudayan, anuddayan, / [from anudayati, anuddayati], practising compassion; Nidd-a I 457,7 (anuddaykro ~); see also anudayan.


anuday, anudday, / [ami1 + day; -dd- perhaps rhythmical or metrical lengthening], compassion, pity; care; Abh 160 (karun ca -a); Vin III 42,15 (na hi nma bhikkhave tassa moghapurisassa pnesu ~ anukamp avihes bhavissati; Sp288,n: - ti anurakkhan); SI 206,27* (snukamp -); 11199,24 (krunnam paticca -am paticca anukampam updya paresam dhammam deseti); A l l 176,33 (pnnam yeva ~ya anukampya patipanno hoti); Ja VI 242,5 (bodhisatt ca nma attano mettbhvanya -ya ... klnuklam lokam olokenti); Pv-a 70,1 (anukamp man ti anugganha mam uddissa -am karohi ti). anudasham, ind. [anu1 + dasa1 + aha(n)], every ten days; Jail 371,19 (anvaddhamsam -am devo vassati); Pv-a 139,28 (anvaddhamsam -am anupancham). anudassati, fut. 3 sg. [o/*anu ! + dadti; S. anuVd], will give; will grant; will confer on; Mil 276,8 (dasa gune -ati); 375,22 (bijam appakam p i . . . subahni phalni -ati). anudassana, n. [S. anudarsana], consideration, regard; ifc see nibbid-. anudasseti, pr. 3 sg. [S. anudarsayati], shows; instructs; Vin II 73,27 (dasseti ~eti ayam dhammo ayam vinayo); pp anudassita, mfn., shown, demonstrated; Mil 119,5 (tathgatassa sadevake loke setthabhvo -o). anudahati, anugahati, pr. 3 sg. [S. aniWdah], burns; consumes; S IV 190,28 (kirn te ime ksv -anti; Spk III 55,2: sarire palivethitatt unhaparilham jnetv -anti, sanjtasede v sarire lagganti anusenti ti pi attho); Thi 488 (ukkopam -anti); Ja II 330,13* (jtavedo va santhnam khippam-anti nam); Sp 1225,19 (sitam ~afi ti); Sv994,2i (rgo uppajjamno satte -ati jhpeti tasm aggi ti vuccati); Dhp-aIII 28,7 (tarn visam -itum na sakkoti); p a s s , anudayhamna, anugayhamna, mfn., being burnt; Ja VI 423,4 (kmaratiy -); Vibh-a450,i4 (jighacchya -o). anudahana, anuclahana, n. [from anudahati], burning up; consumption; Niddl 6, is (tinukkpam km '-atthen ti passanto); Sv 995,3 (-assa pana paccay honti); Ps II 287,22 (-vasena parilho); It-aII 117,24 (ayam tva rgassa -t). anudahahatya inEe at Sv994,29 is wr for anudahanatya (Be, Ce, Se so). anud, anudd, / [= anuday; influenced by preceding mett ?], compassion; care; Nidd I 488,10 (mett ti y sattesu metti mettyan mettyitattam - anudyan anudyitattam) * Dhs 1056. anudyan, anuddyan,/ [from anud; cf mettyan], practising compassion; Niddl 488,10 (mett ti y sattesu metti mettyan mettyitattam anud ~ anudyitattam) * Dhs 1056; see also anudyan. anudyita, anuddyita, mfn. [from (*anudyati from) anud; cf mettyita], compassionate; Niddl 488,10 (mett tiy sattesu metti mettyan mettyitattam anud anudyan -ttam) * Dhs 1056; As 362,8 (~assa bhvo -ttam); see also anudyita. anudiftha, see anuddittha' sv anuddisati. anuditthi, / [anu1 + ditthi], (dogmatical) view; speculation, (false) theory; Th754 (~inam appahnam); ifc see atta- (^vatta[n]), aparanta-

(sv apara1), pubbanta- (^vpubba2). anudisam, ind. [anu1 + ace. o/dis; S. anudisam], in all directions; D I 222,29 (gacchati -am); AIV 167,10 (Nando -am anuviloketi). anudis, / [abstracted from anudisam], an intermediate point of the compass; Abh 29 (vidis ~); AIV 167,9 (- anuviloketabb hoti); Patisl 112,20 (puratthimya pi -ya saddnam); Ja I 53,H (catasso dis ca catasso - ca hetth upari ti dasa pi dis anuviloketv); Vism 308,23 (tiriyan ti -su). anudipayitv, ind. [absol. of *anu1 + dipeti], making known, explaining; Mil 227,19 (dhammdhammam -itv). anudta, m. [anu1 + dta], a messenger sent with another; a companion; Vin II 19,29 (sangho Sudhammassa bhikkhuno -am detu); 295,13 (yasm Yaso Kkandakaputto -ena bhikkhun saddhim Veslim pavisitv); Dhp-all 76,6 (-am datv); Mhv4:15 (ycitv -am), anu-d-eva, see sv anu1. anudesi in Ee at Pv-a99,i2 (anvesi anudesi) is prob, wr; Be, Se anuesi; Ce anunesi. anuddayat, anuddayati, anuddyan, anudday, anudd, anuddyan, anuddyita, see anudayat, anudayati etc. anuddittha1, mfn., pp o/anuddisati qv. anuddittha2 mfn., neg. pp o/uddisati qv. anuddisati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + uddisati], points out; declares; assigns, dedicates (a gift); D H 354,19 (so dnam datv evam -ati imin dnena Pysirjannam eva imasmim loke samganchim na parasmin ti); pp anuddittha1, anudittha, mfn., assigned, dedicated; Pv 10:7 (samanantarnudditthe vipko upapajjatha); 20:11 (taynudittham atulam datv sanghe, Be, Se so, mc; Ce, Ee taynuddittham). anuddissa, anuddisitv, neg. absol. o/uddisati qv. anuddhamsati,/?r 3 sg. [neg. of uddhamsati qv], does not fly up; Bv-a 101,35 (-ati tina uggacchati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -a ti anuddham gacchati na bhavati na hoti, adBv 2:101: rajo n' uddhamsati). anuddhamsana, n., ~, / [from anuddhamseti; BHS anudhvamsana], (falsely) accusing; (false) accusation; defamation; VinV 144,28* (dve-); 224,35 (bhikkhum amlakena prjikena dhammena ~m ti); Sp 587,2 (tarn pana -am); 601,19 (tarn updya ~ hoti); Ud-a 113,15 (yath parassa roso hoti evam -vasena rosam uppdenti); Utt-vn 787 (dve -ni). anuddhamseti, pr. 3 sg. [caus. of * aim1 + dhamsati2], 1. disturbs, contaminates, taints; Vin III 110,i7(yad te anabhirati uppajjati rgo cittam -eti); MI 26,11 (rgo cittarn -essati; Ps I 142,30: -essati ti himsissati adhibhavissati); Sil 231,20 (tassa mtugmam disv dunnivattham v dupprutam v rgo cittam -eti); 2. [BHS anudhvamsayati], accuses (falsely); defames; Vin III 163,36 (-eyy ti codeti v codpeti v); It 42,15 (yo ca paripunnam parisuddham brahmacariyam carantam amlakena abrahmacariyena -eti); anuddhamsenta,mfn., VinV 6,14 (bhikkhum amlakena prjikena dhammena -entassa sarighdiseso);


aor. 3sg. anuddhamsesi, M i l 257,n (m te... rajosukam vanamukham -esi); Spkl 271,22; 3 pi. anuddhamsesum, VinV 6,n; inf. (a) anuddhamsitum, Th-aIII 188,33 (na-y-imam -itum yuttan ti); (b) anuddhamsetum, Sp 599,25; pp (a) anuddhamsita, mfn., 1. disturbed, contaminated; ifc see rg-; 2. (falsely) accused; defamed; Vin I 173, n (codako bhikkhu amlakena sanghdisesena -itam patijnati); III 164,3 (yasmim khane -ito hoti); pp (b) anuddhasta, mfn., disturbed, contaminated; ifc see rg-; fpp anuddhamsetabba, mfn., Vin II 22,24 (na pakatatto bhikkhu sllavipattiy -etabbo). anuddharate in Ee at Ap-a 289, I is wr for nuddharate (Be, Ce, Se and Ap 45,22 so). anuddhari(n), mfn. [from uddharati?], not proud; Pj II 569,2 (-1 ti anissuki, anitthuri ti pi keci pathanti, Ce, Ee so; Be anitthuri ti anissuki, aniddhuri ti pi keci pathanti; Se anutthuri ti anussuki, ~i ti pi keci pathanti; ad Sn 952, anitthuri). anudhamma, m. [Ztf/Sanudharma], 1. natural state or essential property; right method; method according to the dhamma, to the doctrine; MI 480,32 (saddhassa ... svakassa ... ayam -o hoti satth bhagav svako 'ham asmi, jnti bhagav nham jnmi ti; Ps III 194,n: ayam - o ti ayam sabhvo); 11130,8 (khinsavassa ... ayam ~o hoti veyykaranya); It 81,13 (dhammnudhammapatipannassa bhikkhuno ayam -o hoti veyykaranya); Niddl 481,31 (katame bodhiy ~); 2. a secondary part of the dhamma, of the doctrine; Ps III 39$, 11 foil, (imasmim sutte dhammo nma arahattamaggo, -o nma hetthim tayo magg tini ca smannaphalni); V 55,8 (ettha arupvacarajjhnam dhammo nma, tarn anugatatt rpvacarajjhnam -0 ti vuttam) see also akatnudhamma .sv kata3. anudhammam, ind. [anu1 + ace. of dhamma], 1. in accordance with the dhamma, with the doctrine; Sn 510 (panne me puttho anupubbam -am vykarohi me; Pj II424,20: -an ti atthnurpam plim ropento); 2. in accordance with; Vin I 234,19 (na ca bhagavantam abhtena abbhcikkhanti dhammassa ca -am vykaronti); MII 146,15 (paccapdi dhammassnudhammam); SII 33,18 (dhammassa -am vykareyyma); ifc see dhamma-, yatha-; (a)-cari(n), mfn., following the (right) doctrine; living in accordance with the doctrine; Sil 81,23 (tath patipanno ca hoti -i); Sn69 (dhammesu niccam -1); Th373 (dhammassa hoti -I); Vv 31:6 (-ini); (a)-ta,/, abstr., conformity to the doctrine; right method; Vin III 223, is (ayam tattha smici ti ayam tattha ~); A II 46,13* (yo ca tesam tattha tattha jnti-am). anudhammacakkappavattaka, m. [anu1 + dhammacakka + pavattaka], the next to turn the wheel of the dhamma; JaI218,8'(Sriputto mayham aggasvako -0, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anudhammacakkam pavattako). anudhritasmatthiya in Ee at Ud-a 93,19 is wr for aniddhrita- qv. anudhrayum, aor. 3 pi. [of caus. of *anu1 + dharati], they held up (behind); Sv 61,26* (setam ca chattam anudhrayum mar) = Mp I 105,11*; see also

anudhriyamna. anudhriyamna, mfn. [pass, of caus. of *anu' + dharati], being held up (behind); Kv 285,7 (setamhi chatte ~e); see also anudhrayum, anuhlramna. anudhvati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWdhv], runs after, follows; chases; runs along; MI 474,6 (te mayam kim sanditthikam hitv klikam -issma); Dhp 85 (athyam itarpaj ram evnudhvati); Th 1174 (kumaggam ~ati); Ja III 333,25* (sahya-m-anudhvamam); Mil 253,10 (das' ime... kynugat dhamm bhave bhave kyam -anti anuparivattanti); anudhvanta, mfn., Th-aII 272,17 (manuss -ant); aor. 3 sg. anudhvi, Mhv 14:5 (rjnudhvi); 2 sg. anudhvi, SI 9,8 (m sanditthikam hitv klikam M ti); pp anudhvita, mfn., 1. [ts] pursued; Patis-a 412,22 (anusato ti -0); 2. pursuing; Th941 (lesakappe pariyye parikappe 'nudhvit; cf Th-aIII 79,29: mahicchatdihi ppadhammehi - vosit). anudhvanaka, mfn. [*anudhvana + ka2; cf anudhvati and S. anudhvana], pursuing, following; ifc see upadhi- sv upadhi1. anudhitni in Be, Ee at Pet 152,19 IJ prob, wr; read anutthitabbni with Nnamoli, 1979, p. 208 ? anunaditire, ind. [anu1 + loc. of nadltlra], along the bank of the river; SIV 177,28 (kummo kacchapo syanhasamayam ~e gocarapasuto ahosi); see also anutire. anunamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVnam], inclines; bends; Mil 372,17 (cpo ... samakam eva -ati na patitthambhati); 372,23*(cpovnuname dhiro quoting Ja VI 295,9*: Be, Ee cpo v' nudaro; Ce v' ndaro; Se va onato); fpp anunamitabba, (mf)n. impers., Mil 372,19 (yogin ... -am na patippharitabbam). anunaya, m. [S., BHS id.], affection, inclination towards; winning over, conciliation; MI 191,4(imesu pancas' updnakkhandhesu chando layo -0 ajjhosnam); Ja VI 141,10 (ath' assa '-attham kumro ha, Eeso; Be, Ce, Se anunayanattham); Dhs 1059 (rgo srgo -o anurodho) * Vibh 145,2; Nett 69,7 (y pitimanat ayam -0); Mil 44,33 (n' atthi... arahato -0 v patigho v). anunayana, n. [from anuneti], leading; conciliation; winning over; Ja VI 141,10 (ath' assa '-attham kumro ha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anunayattham); As 362,28 (visayesu sattnam -ato anunayo). anunda, m. [ts], an echo; SpkII 285,2 (ndassa -am sunti). anunsika, m., - , / (and mfn. ?) [cf S. anunsika, mfn.], (m.f) the nasal sound m; (mfn.) nasalized; Ja III 15,5 (nakrassa ~ kat ti paccetabb, Ee so; Ce -t; Se takrassa -; Be ntakrassa snunsikat; see below); Sp 730,14 (upavassan ti upavassa upavasitv ti vuttam hoti... ettha -0 datthabbo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr upavassan ti upavassam vasitv ti vuttam hoti); 1400,9 (es natu ti vattabbe esam natu" ti v avivatena mukhena -am katv vacanam vimuttassa niggahitavacanam nma); Pj 1192,24 (gthbandhasukhattham ~o); Nidd-a II 134,22 (-assa lopo kato); -lopa, m, the dropping of the nasal m; Vv-a 114,12 (-am akatv);


snunsika, mfn., nasalized (of a vowel); Ja III 15,5' (nan ti pan' ettha nipto, vyanjanasilitthatvasena ntakrassa ~-t kat ti paccetabb, Be so; Ce nakrassa anunsikatti; enakrassa anunsik katti; Setakrassa anunsik paccetabb; explaining 14,17*, yasassinam pannavantam as voc); Sp 1399,31 (niggahitan ti yam ... avivatena mukhena -am katv vattabbam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anunsikam); Vv-a335,i; Sadd 606,23 (avivatena mukhena ~am katv iritan ti niggahitam). anunita, mfn., pp o/anuneti qv. anuneta(r), m. [front anuneti], one who leads or persuades or conciliates; Dili 192,17* (net vinet ~; Sv 958,23: punappuna neu" ti ~) * Patis II 194, is. anuneti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWnl], leads; conciliates; supplicates, persuades; Mp III 165,6 (imin kranena ~eti jnpeti); (a) anunenta, /w/~enti)rt., Thi 514; (~enti Anikarattam kese va chamam chupi Sumedh); (b) anunayanta, mfn., Sp 1277,7 (~anto sveti); (c)anunayamna, mfn., SI 232,22 (Sakko devnam indo deve Tvatimse ~ayamno); Pj II 262,32 (rjnam ~ayamno); absol anunayitv, Pj II 76,31; pass, anuniyamna, mfn.9 Thi-a210,27 (taya tarn tarn vatv anuniyamno pi); pp anunita, mfit. [ts], led, induced; attracted; Pj II 520,28 (tena ditthicchandena ~o); ifc see chanda- svchanda1; neg. ananunita, mfn., Pj II 497,19 (ananunito appatihato maijhatto hutv); fpp anunetabba, mfn., Niddll 188,37 (katham so netabbo vinetabbo ~o, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se abhinetabbo; Nidd-a II 58,27: ~o ti punappunam cittena katham gamayitabbo). anupa, see sv anpa. anupakampati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anupraVkamp], shakes; quivers; Ud41,i* (cittam thitam nnupakampati) = Thl91. anupakkuftha, mfn., neg. pp o/upakkosati qv. anupakkhanda, m. or mfn. [from anupakkhandati], encroaching on, going over to; ifc see km-. anupakkhandati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anupraskandati], pushes oneself forward, encroaches on; intrudes, works one's way in; goes over to; D I 122,7 (ekamsena bhavam Sonadando samanass' eva Gotamassa vdam -afi ti); anupakkhandanta, mfn., It-all 166,13 (visamesu bhmippadesu savegam ~antena imiss tva nadiy mahoghena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anupakkhannena); absol. anupakhajja, anupakhajja [BHS anupraskandya, anupraskadya], Vin II 88,10 (Channo pi bhikkhu bhikkuninam anupakhajja bhikkhhi saddhim vivadati bhikkhuninam pakkham gheti; Sp 1194,is: bhikkhuninam anto pavisitv); IV42,30 (chabbaggiy bhikkh there bhikkh anupakhajja seyyam kappenti); MI \5\y\6foil, (migajt anupakhajjamucchit bhojanni bhunjissanti); SHI 113,3 (yannnham anupakhajja jivit voropeyyan ti); Ps III 183,17 (yo dvisu mahtheresu ubhato nisinnesu te anpucchitv va civarena v jnun v ghattento nisidati ayam anupakhajja nisidati nma); Vin-vn 1079; pp anupakkhanna, mfn., pushing forwards; working one's way in; ? Ps III 186,12 (imni hi dve bhojanni... nadim otinna-udakam viya ~ni); see also anupakhajjanta.

anupakkhipitv, ind. [absol. of *anu' + pakkhipati], placing in; AH 245,3 (antar satthinam nahguttham ~itv). anupakhajja, ind., absol. of anupakkhandati qv. anupakhajjana, n. [formed from anupakhajja], encroaching upon; Vin II 232,16 (in uddna: there ca ~<s; see 213,2 foil.). anupakhajjanta, mfn. [apparently neg. of *upakhajjati, or perhaps haplography for ananupakhajjanta, neg. formed from anupakhajja], not encroaching upon; VinV 163,5 (there bhikkh ~ena ... sane nisiditabbam). anupakhetta in eds at Ap 190,3 is prob, wr for anpakhetta qv sv anpa. anupagacchati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + pa2 + gacchati], goes over to, passes (into); D I 55,22 (pathavi pathavikyam anupeti ~ati) = M I 515,11 = SHI 207,1; JaV 239,n* (yato ca rparn sambhoti tattiY eva ~ati); absol. anupagamma1, Ud-a301,i4 ([nadi] itar tisso nadiyo anupagamma). anupagacchana, n. [a3 + upagacchana], not approaching, not reaching; SpklH 42,24 (orimatirdinam -tdivasena, Ce so; Be, Se anupagacchant-; Ee wr anugamandi-). anupagacchanaka, mfn. [a3 + upagacchana + ka2], not approaching; not entering; 1h-al 116,4(psam -migo viya; = Ap-a 302,26: Be, Ce, Se anupagacchamnamigo; Ee anpagacchamna-). anupagata, mfn., neg. pp ofupagacchati qv. anupagantv, ind., neg. absol. o/upagacchati qv. anupagamaniya, mfn., neg. fpp o/upagacchati qv. anupagamma1, ind., absol. of anupagacchati qv. anupagamma2, ind., neg. absol. o/upagacchati qv. anupage, ind., see sv anuppage. anupacita, mfn., neg. pp o/upacinti qv. anupacinanta in Be, Ce, Ee at JaV 339,6* is prob, wr for anapavinanta qv sv apavinti. anupajagghati,^r. 3 sg. [anu1 + pa2 + jagghati], laughs at, derides; A I 198,20 (puggalo panham puttho samno ... ~ati khalitam ganhti; MpII 311,30: pnim paharitv mahhasitam hasati). *anupajjati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVpad], follows, accompanies; enters with; aor. 3 sg. anupajjatha, Ja IV 304,6* (nnrattehi vatthehi vimnam bhavati chditam na tesam chy vatthnam so rgo ~atha; 304,10' : so nnvidho rgo na hoti sabbachy ekavann va hoti); V407,2* (vijjumahmegha-r-ivnupaijatha; 407,25': mahmeghavijju viya tassa tarn assamam pvisi); absol. anupajjitv, Sp201,io (Ee so; Be anubandhitv; Ce, Se anuvajitv); pp anupanna, mfn., having entered; following; Ja VI 216,24' (kavypathnupann ti kavyakrabrhmannam vacanapatham ~ anugat). anupajjhyaka, mfn. [a3 + upajjhya + ka2], without a teacher, without a preceptor; Vin I 44,6 (bhikkh ~ anovadiyamn ananussiyamn); 89,24 (na bhikkhave ~o upasampdetabbo). anupancham, ind. [anu1 + panca + aha(n)], every five days; Sv 813,27 (anvaddhamsam anudasham -am) ^ Pv-a 139,28.


anupaftflatta, anuppaflfiatta, mfn. [anu + pp of panfipeti], additionally ordered or ruled; VinV 223,35 (Sp 1413,23: makkativatthu-divinitakath sikkhpadapannatte ~am); A199,2o. anupaftatti, anuppafifiatti, / [BHS anuprajnpti], an additional or supplementary rule; Vinll 286,28 (pannattim pi pucchi -im pi pucchi); V2,3 (ek pafinatti dve ~iyo; Sp 1302,16 (antamaso tiracchnagatya ri ti ca sikkham apaccakkhy ti ca makkatiVajjiputtakavatthnam vasena vutt im dve ~iyo); Ja I 162,12 (imam -im katv puna sikkhpadam pannpesi); Ps III 323,8 (~im thapesi). anupatipajjanaka, mfn. [anu1 + patipajjana + ka2], following the practice of siding with; S p o i l , 13 (anuvattak ti tassa ditthikhantirucigahanena -a). anupatipatti,/ [anu1 + patipatti], following the practice (of); Spk I 64,9 (ye tarn bhagavantam kyena v vcya v ~iy v namassanti). anupatipti,/ [anu1 + patipti], succession, order; ins tr. -iy, adv., in order, successively; gradually; Ja III 43,25' (cattro pi mahantena saddena -iy viravimsu); Vism244,i (-iy manasiktabbam, na ekantarikya); Sv 685,32 (anupubbaso ti-iy); Dhp-alll 340,12 (anupubben ti -iy); -kath,/, an exposition in order; a progressive instruction; Sv 277,25 (nupubbikathan ti -am). anupaftnita, mfn., neg. pp q/*upatitthati qv. anupatati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWpat], follows, pursues; falls in; falls upon, attacks; D I 56,34 (sattannam yeva kynam antarena sattham vivaram -afi ti); AI 280,7 (tarn... makkhik nnupatissanti nnvassavissanti ti); Dhp221 (akincanam nnupatanti dukkh); Th41 (vivaram -anti vijjut); JaV 449,5* (sadhanam -anti nriyo); Vism81,i4 (sallekhat ca pavivekat ca dvisu dhammesu -anti); opt. 2 sg. anupatiysi, Ja VI 555,6* (sace anupatitukm si khippam -iysi no, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anuppatteyya); (a) anupatanta, mfn., Ja II 228,23' (tarn lokmisam -anto, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anuvattanto); (b) anupatamna, mfn., Ja VI 555,25'; absol. anupatitv, Vin III 105,16 (tarn enam gijjh pi kk pikulal pi -itv -itv... vitudenti); M II99,12 (aham hi pubbe hatthim pi dhvantam -itv ganhmi); pp anupatita, mfn. [ts], following, accompanying, involved; followed by, affected with (often ifc); SII 40,29 (imesu... dhammesu avijj -) = A l l 158,30 ^ Patis I 124,2; Dhp-a III 463,10 (dukkhena ~o); see also anupta, anupti(n). anupatana, n. [ts], following; pursuing; falling upon; Ja III 523,24' (khannupti ti pamdakkhane -silo); Mp II 257,33 (vdassa anupto -am pavatti ti attho). anupatpi(n), mfn. [from upatpa], not causing pain; Cp-a 331,22 (parato upatpasaho hoti paresam ~i). anupatita, mfn., pp o/anupatati qv. anupatiftna, mfn. [cf S. pratistha], standing firmly; Spk HI 258,2 (gambhlranemo ti... gambhirabhmibhgam ~o ti attho, Se so; Be, Ce anupavittho; Ee wr gambhirabhmiyam anupatitthite ti); Th-alll 198,31 (ovdnusitthiyam ~o). anupatifthita, mfn. [pp of *anu1 + patitthati], firmly

fixed; founded; Spk III 258,2 (gambhiranemo ti... gambhirabhmiyam ~o ti attho, so read for Ee mu~ patitthite ti ? Be, Ce gambhirabhmibhgam anupavittho ti; Se anupatittho ti). anupatta, mfn., see anuppatta ^v anuppunti. anupatti, anuppatti 1 ,/ [from anuppunti], attainment; accomplishment; SI 46,24* (kankhe ce hadayassnupattim, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -nuppattim) = 52,26*; Bv7:15 (tarn evJ attham ~iy); Mil 112,9 (vydhitassa sotthibhvam ~iy). anupatthata, mfn. [pp o/*anu' + pattharati], overspread; Nidd-a 1427,26 (jarya anusat ti paripakkatya -). anupatham, ind. [S. anupatham], along the road, along the track; Vism 381,2 (idni amhkam ~am gacchant n' atthi ti); Ps I 277,27 (paltassa migassa -am gacchanto migaluddako, Be, Se so; Ce Ee anupadam); see also anupathe. anupathe, ind. [anu1 + loc. o/patha], along the road; by the roadside; JaV 302,24* (atthini amma ycitv -e dahtha nam; Be, Ee so; Ce, Se anupanthe); Cp-a 86,30 (anumagge patipathe ti ~e v patipathe v ti, vsaddassa lopo datthabbo, Ce, Ee so, perhaps, wr; Be, Se anumagge v); see also anupatham. anupada, n. [prob, extracted from anupadam qv], a following word; the following quarter-stanza; Vin IV 15,i (padam ~am anvakkharam anuvyanjanam; Sp 141,nfoil: padan tieko gthpdo adhippeto, -an ti dutiyapdo); Ap43,i3 (padam ~am cpi akkharam cpi vyanjanam); Mil 340,6 foil, (padena padam kathayissmi -ena ~am kathayissmi). anupadam, ind. [S. anupadam], 1. word by word; step by step; Vv 53:9 (tad ~am avacsi ingha puttho); As 15,36 (therassa hi -am uddesam dadamno anno datum na sakkoti); 2. close behind; in one's footsteps; in pursuit; Jail 230,4 (tass -am agamsi); Ap 140,6 (padennupadam yanto); Vism 664,26 (-am gantv); Ps I 277,27 (paltassa migassa -am gacchanto migaluddako, Ce, Eeso; Be, Se anupatham); Mhv 16:5 (ratham ruyha bhpati... therassnupadam ag); ifc see pada-; (a)-vannan,/, a word by word explanation; Sp202,5 (ito param... yebhuyyena uttnattham, tasm -am pahya yattha yattha vattabbam atthi tarn tad eva vannayissma); Pj I 124,4 (ayam gthya - ayam pana pindattho); As 168,24 (-am eva karissma); see also anupadato, anupadaso, anuvyanjanam, anvakkharam. anupadajjeyya, opt. 3 sg. o/anuppadeti qv. anupadati, pr. 3 sg. [from anupadam? cf S. amWpad], follows; repeats; Sv 868,33 (-antiti anugacchanti, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se anusaranti ti; Sv-ptIII 57,12: anupatanti ti pi ptho, so eva attho; ad D III 86,26, tad eva pornam aggannam akkharam anupatanti, Ee so; Be, Ce anusaranti; Se anussaranti). anupadato, ind., word by word; Pj I 249,6 (ayam -ato atthavannan); see also anupadam, anupadaso. anupadaso, ind., word by word; Ps I 87,26 (sabbam vuttnusrena -0 paccavekkhitabbam); see also anupadam, anupadato. anupadassati, fut. 3 sg. o/anuppadeti qv. anupadahan, / [from *anu1 -1- pa2 + dahati2 ?], con-


tinuous exertion; Sp 418,26 (anubandhan ti-, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se anuvahan; * Vism278,n: eds anuvahan * Patis-a 495,1: eds anugaman). anupadeti, see sv anuppadeti. anupadesa, see sv anpa. anupaddava, mfn., see sv upaddava. anupadduta, mfn., see sv upadduta. anupadduttat in Ee at It-a I 70,8 is wr for anupaddutatt (Be, Ce, Se so). anupadhretv, neg. absol. o/upadhareti qv. anupadhika, anpadhika, mfn. [a3 + upadhi1 + ka2], free from attachment; free from acquisitions (which lead to rebirth); Vin I 36,26* (disv padam santam anpadhikam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anpadhikam); D III 112, IO (atthi bhante iddhi y ansav ~ ariy ti vuccati); Snl057 (sukittitam Gotam, anpadhikam; Pj II 591,22: ~an ti nibbnam); see also nirupadhika, sa-upadhika, sopadhika. anupanata in Ee at Vism386,i4 and Ud-a 186,4 (anupanatam cittam) is wrfor anapanata qv sv apanamati. anupanyhanasllo in Ee at Th-a II 211,34 is wr for anupanayhana- (Be, Ce, Se so). anupage, see sv page. anupanna, mfn., pp o/anupajjati qv. anupapila, mfn. [from a3 + *upapil; cf upapileti], free from oppression; free from distress; D I 135,26 (janapad akantak ~, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anuppfl); Pv-a 161,15 (rajjam akantakam -am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anupilam); see also anuppila. anupabandhan, see sv anuppabandhan. anupabbajati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + pabbajati; cfS. anupraVvraj], adopts the wanderer's life after or in imitation (of another); Vin II 180,6 (Sakyakumr bhagavantam pabbajitam -anti); Ja I 56,32 (tarn purisam -issmi ti); anupabbajanta, mfn., Mil 108,2 (cha-y -ime ... khattiyakumr ... bhagavantam -ant nikkhamimsu); aor. 3 sg. anupabbaji, Bv-a 82,32 (Dlpankarakumram pana pabbajantam ek purisakoti -i); 1 sg. anupabbajim, Ap 49,23 (nikkhantenanupabbajim padhnam sukatam may, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nikkhantennupabbajjam); 430,6; 3 pi. (a) anupabbajimsu, D i l 249,29 (satta ca rjno khattiy... Mahgovindam brhmanam agrasm anagriyam pabbajitam anupabbajimsu); (b) anupabbajum, Bv20:5 (sambuddham -um); absol. anupabbajitv, 1h-al 111,19; pp anupabbajita, mfn., who has adopted the wanderer's life after (another); Sp 55,22 (kumrassa pana -nam gananaparicchedo nJ atthi); It-a II 154, is; Mhv 5:168. anupabbajj, / [from anupabbajati], adopting the wanderer's life after or in imitation (of another); S V 67,2i (-am pham bhikkhave tesam bhikkhnam bahukram vadmi); Sv 457,23 (~ya); Dhp-al 105,17 (~am pabbajitv); It-a II 153,33/0//. (~an tiariyesu cittam pasdetv ghar nikkhamma tesam santike pabbajjam). anupabhmi in Ee at Ja IV 359, w is wr for anpabhmi qv sv anpa. anupama, mfh., seesv upam. anupamodamana, mfn. [ of *anu1 + pamodati],

rejoicing with, continually rejoicing; Pj II 378,22 (anumodamno ti ~o, nirantaram modamno ti attho). anuparikkamanta, mfn. [ of *anu1 + pari + kamati; cf S. anupariVkram], going round and round; Vv-a 323,3i (lhanam ~o rodati). anuparigacchati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + pari + gacchati], goes round; goes round about (+ ace); Spklll 104,13 (anuparisakkeyy ti ~eyya); anuparigacchanta, mX^anti)., Dhp -a I 416,14 (s ... psdam ~antl, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anupariyyantl); inf. anuparigantum, Vin III 151,21 (aparikkamanam nma na sakk hoti yathyuttena sakatena anuparigantum); absol. (a)anuparigamma, Ud47,2i* (sabb dis anuparigamma cetas); (b) anuparigantv, Vin III 119,28 (gabbham anuparigantv); Ja IV 267,26 (tikkhattum gumbam anuparigantv); see also anupariyag. anuparicita, mfn. [anu1 + paricita2], practised after; practised in order; PatisI \73,\& foil, (digham asssavasena purim purim paricit pacchim pacchim ~). anuparidhvati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + paridhvati], runs round and round; surrounds; Mil 232,24 (te sakkyabhay sakkyaparijegucch sakkyam yeva -anti anuparivattanti); 11172,27 (ime tayo dhamm sammditthim ~anti anuparivattanti); S III 150,9 (tarn eva khilam v thambham v ~ati anuparivattati); (a)anudhva(t), mfn., SHI 150,17 (rpam ~am anuparivattam); (b) anuparidhvanta, mfh., Thi-al65,i9 (sakkyaram eva ~ant). anuparidhvana, n. [from anuparidhvati], running round and round; PsIV 22,19 (thambhe v khile v upanibaddhasunakhassa ... ~am). anuparipphufa, mfn. [anu1 + paripphuta], pervaded throughout; Vism 144,25 (pharanapitiy pana uppannya sakalasariram ... -amhoti) = As 117,3. anupariyag, aor. 3 sg. and 3 pi [of anu' + pari + >/g; S. anuparWg], went around; went round about; 3 sg., Sn447 (medavannam va psnam vyaso anupariyag); 3pl, AIV 151,6* (rjisayo yajamnnupariyag, Be, Ce so; Ee wr -pariyay; Se -cariyag) = It 21,13* (It-al 93,16: anupariyag ti vicarimsu); see also anuparigacchati. anupariyti, anupariyyati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. anuparWy], goes round about; goes round after; travels about; DIU 200,16* (sabb dis -anti); SI 109,2* (yu ~ti macenam, Ce, Ee so; Be anupariyyati; Se anucariyati); AIV 254,26* (cando ca suriyo ca... -anti); Vv 18:1 (samant ~si); Ja VI 121,6* (najjo ca ~ti); Ps III 161,18 (etam rukkham -hi ti); Spkl 175,29 (cakkanemi kubbaram anupariyyati); Mil 38,30 (tarn yeva anupariyyeyyum); Mhv 17:40 (rattim ngo 'nupariyti tarn thnam); (a) anupariyanta, mfn., Ja VI 278,18* (passa candam ca suriyam ca... Sinerum -ante, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anupariyyante); Sv 613,7 (~antam yantam yojetv, Ce, Ee so; Be anupariyyantam; Se anupariyyanti); (b) anupariyyanta, mfn., Ja VI 279,5: Sinerum anupariyyante); Sp 1042,16 (anupariyyantehi); (c) anupariyyamna, Bv-a210,36 (kkakulalagijjhdihi anupariyyamno); aor. 1 sg. (a) anupariysi, Vin II 111,19 (nkldiattum Rjagaham -si, Ee so, perhaps wr;


Be, Ce, Se anupariyyi); Ap-a 268,22 (sabbarattim cetiyam -si, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se anupariyyi); (b) anupariyyi, Ps III 161,28; Dhp-alH 202, n (Rjagahanagarassa upari sattakkhattum anupariyyi); absol anupariyyitv, Pv-a 92,25 (lhanam anupariyyitv); Cp-a 81,19; see also anupariyeti. anupariyya, m. [from anupariyeti (or anupariyti)], going around; -patha, m., a path leading round, an encircling path; a path on a rampart; D II 83,12 (tassa nagarassa samant -am anukkamamno; Sv 880,34: -an ti anupariyyanmakam pkramaggam); AIV 107,2 (paccantime nagare ~o hoti; Mp IV 53,22: ~o ti antopkrassa pkrena saddhim gato mahpatho yattha thit bahipkre thitehi saddhim yujjhanti). anupariyyati, see sv anupariyti. anupariyeti, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuparyeti], goes round and round; goes round in order; S I 102,20* (samantnupariyeyyum; or poss. to anupariyti); 192,2* (cakkavatti yath rj ...samant ~eti sgarantam mahim imam); Th 125 (makkato... dvrena -eti ghattayanto muhum muhum); 1250 (cetas -eti; Th-aIII 197,15: anukkamena paricchindati); see also anupariyti. an upari vatta, m. [from anuparivattati], the moving round after; changing in conformity to; Spkll 262,18 (viparinmnuparivattaj ti viparinmassa -ato viparinmrammanacittato jt, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anuparivattito; * Ps V 29,21: eds anuparivattanato); ifc see rpaviparinm-. anuparivattati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anuparivartati, -ate], turns or moves round after or along with; keeps on moving; D I 240,8 (panjalik namassamn -anti ti); MII 232,24 (te sakkyabhay sakkyaparijegucch sakkyam yeva anuparidhvanti -anti); A l l 188,32 (attha lokadhamm lokam -anti loko c' attha lokadhamme -ati); Patis I 172,31 (yena yena cittam abhiniharati tena tena sati -ati); Mil 204,8 (Devadatto ca bodhisatto ca ekato -anti ti); Ud-a 75,23 (keci tasmim udake thatv candimasuriye -anti; Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -enti, prob, wr); anuparivatta(t), mfn., SHI 150,17 (rpam anuparidhvam -am); pass. pr. 3 sg. anuparivattlyati, A II 140,15 (cattro 'me... kl samm bhviyamn samm -iyamn); Mp III 133,25 (te bhviyanti c' eva -lyanti ca); caus. pr. 3 sg. anuparivatteti, makes turn; makes move; repeats; Nidd-a I 298,7 (sattasantnam anusenti -enti ti anusay, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -anti ti; = II 55,32: eds anupavattanti ti); anuparivattenta, mfn., Pv-a 97,26 (vedam -ent homam karont japanti). anuparivattana, n. [cf BHS anuparivartana, mfii.], the moving round after or along with, changing in conformity to; Ps V 29,2i (viparinmnuparivattaj ti viparinmassa -ato viparinmrammanacittato jt; * Spkll 262,18: viparinmnuparivattij ti viparinmassa anuparivattito, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anuparivattato). anuparivatti, / [from anuparivattati], the moving round after or along with; changing in conformity to; Spkll 262,18 (viparinmnuparivattij ti viparinmassa -ito viparinmrammanacittato jt, Be, Se so; Ee anuparivattato; * Ps V 29,2i: anuparivattanato). anuparivatti(n), mfn. [BHS -anuparivartin], moving

round after or along with; changing in conformity to; Dhtuk50,8 (in uddna: visamsatthasamutthnasahabhhi -i); Pet 82,24 (imni cattri padni -ini); As 49,35 (anuparivattanti ti -ino); ifc see citta-, nn-, rpaviparinm-. anuparivreti, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anuparivrayati, -eti], surrounds; stands by, takes the side of; VinI 338, %foll. (ma kho tumhe yasmanto etam ukkhittakam bhikkhum anuvattittha -eth ti... te ... tarn ukkhittakam bhikkhum anuvattimsu -esum); MI 153,19/0//. (yam nna mayam imam nivpam nivuttam mahatihi dandavkarhi samant sappadesam -eyyma... te amum nivpam ... -esum); absol. anuparivretv, Ja III 487,6. anuparivenam, ind. [anu1 + ace. o/parivena], to every cell; cell by cell; Mp 167,12 (thero -am gantv). anupariveniyam, ind. [from anu1 + parivena], to every cell; cell by cell; Vin I 80,1 (gacch* nanda appuranam dya -am bhikkhnam rocehi); 106,36 (bhikkh -am ptimokkham uddisanti asanketena). anuparisamyyanta, mfn. [ of *anu' + pari + sarn + yti], going round about (after); Sv481,i3 (rann Mandhtucakkavattin cakkaratanam purakkhatv cattro dipe -ena, Ee, Se so; Be anusamyyantena; Ce anusamsarantena). anuparisakkati,/?r. 3 sg. [anu1 + pari + sakkati], moves round after; escorts; S IV 312, is (tarn enam mahjanakyo ... thomeyya panjaliko -eyya; Spk III 104,12: -eyy ti anuparigaccheyya). anuparisakkana, n. [from anuparisakkati], following, escorting; S IV 312,22 (-hetu). anupariharati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + pariharati; cfS. anuparihram], surrounds, encircles; embraces; MI 306,28 (s tarn slam -eyya); 306,29 (s tarn slarn -itv). anupavattaka, anuppavattaka, mfn. [from caus. of anupavattati; cf BHS anupravartaka], following (another) in keeping moving; who maintains in succession; Mil 362,16 (thero Sriputto... Gotamassa bhagavato ssanavare dhammaeakkam -o jto); Pj II 454,18. anupavattati, anuppavattati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anupraVvrt], proceeds along (after); advances continually; Nidd-a II 55,32 (sattasantnam anusenti -anti ti anusay; = 1298,7: Be, Ce, Se anuparivattenti ti; Ee anuparivattanti ti); anupavattanta, mfn., Ud-a 361,23 (nnassa paripkam gatatt desannusrena nane -ante); pp anupavatta, anuppavatta, mfn. [S. anupravrtta], following (after); Patis-a 139,25 (tadanudhammat ti -0 dhammo anudhammo); caus. pr. 3 sg. anupavatteti, anuppavatteti, -ayati, [BHS anupravartayati], keeps moving on after (another) or in succession; continues, maintains; MII 75,27 (yena me idarn kalynam vattam nihitam -eyysi, m kho me tvam antimapuriso ahosi); SI 191,13 (ranno cakkavattissa jetthaputto pitar pavattitam cakkam samma-d-eva -eti); Mil 362,23 (Sriputto ... tathgatena anuttaram dhammaeakkam pavattitam samma-d-eva -eti ti); Ps V 3,i6/o//. (nandim samanvneti ti tesu rpdisu tanham samanvneti


~eti... tanham ... nnuppavattayati); anupavattenta, mfn., Dhp-al 110,10 (may pavattitam dhammacakkam -ento ... mama ssane aggasvako nma eso ti); aor. 3 sg. anuppavattesi, MII 82,24 (pacchim janata -esi); /?/? anuppavattita, mfn., maintained, continued', Ps IV 146,8 (anutthity ti-itya). anupavattana, anuppavattana, n. [from anupavattati; BHS anupravartana], proceeding along (with) or in conformity; Vism613,i8 (bojjhahgnam ca -tya); Ud-a 361, li (bqijhahgnam -ena). anupavattanaka, mfn. [from cans, of anupavattati], keeping moving on after (another); maintaining; Th-aIII 48,26 (dhammena pavattitassa cakkassa ~o senpati); 76,33 (atthacintvasnug ti... attano paresam ca hitacintanam eva -, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anuparivattanak). anupavatteta(r), m. [from caus. of anupavattati], one who keeps (something) moving on, who maintains; Mp 1153,9 (may pavattitam dhammacakkam -). anupavadana, anpavadana, and anupavdana, n. [from upavadati], lack of abusing; not blaming or criticising; Sv479, ii (anpavdo ti vcya kassaci -am, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se anpavadanam) = Ud-a 253,26 {Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anpavadanam) * Dhp-aIII 238, I (anpavadanam c' eva anupavdpanam ca, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anpavadanam ca anupavdpanam ca); Ud-a 254,33 (etarn parassa anpavadanam anupaghtanam, Ce, Ee so; Be anpavadanam; Se anpavadanam); see also upavadan. anupavdpana, n. [from *upavdpeti, caus. of upavadati ^v], not inciting others to abuse; Dhp-aIII 238,1 (anpavdo ti anpavadanam c' eva -am ca, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anpavadanam ca anupavdpanam ca). anupaviftha1, mfn., pp 0/anupavisati qv. anupavittha2, mfn., neg. pp /upavisati qv. anupavisati, anuppavisati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anupraVviS], enters (after); goes into; resorts to; is present (in); Vin IV 220, is foil. (chabbaggiy bhikkhuniyo avassut ... channam pi ~anti... -issanti... y pana bhikkhuni... channam v -eyya); Ja I 474,13' (idam kasinadvayam pannya gdhati rammanam katv -ati); Sp 1070,n (visanti ti sariram -anti); As 145,4 (buddhdinam gune oghati bhinditv viya -ati" ti okappan); 147,14 (lbukathdini udake pilavanti na -anti); Vv-a 42,28 (dibbasaram jalavihrbhiratiy -asi); (a) anupavisanta, mfn., It-aH 16,3 (yath sallam sariram -antam); (b) anupavisamna, mfn., Mp IV 6,13; absol. (a) anuppavissa, [S. anupraviSya], Ja IV 447,i* (ahimsako Renu-m -anuppavissa puttena te hethayito 'smi deva; 447,21'foil.: aham tava puttena mahparivrena anupavisitv ... vihethito smi ti; or for *anpavissa, absol. of *anu1 + upavisati, "approaching, coming near"; cf anupvisim); (b) anupavisitv, anuppavisitv, Vin IV 43,15 (anupakhajj ti-itv); JaIV 447,21'; Sp780,i2; Dhp-al 375,H (vanasandam -itv); pp anupavittha1, anuppavittha, mfn. 1. having entered, gone into; resorted to; present (in); MI 332,6 (Mro ppim yasmato Mahmoggallnassa kucchigato hoti kottham -0); Ja V 497,26* (puth nar lenam -); Kv 338,3 (tilamhi

telam anugatam -am); Mil 257,23 (sanghasamayam tya); 270,31 (jnm, aham ... vto atthi ti me hadaye -am na cham sakkomi vtam upadassayitun ti); 318,6 (padumassa ... eko guno nibbnam ~o); Mp II 139,8 (--tt); IV 195,20 (-' -atthena anukantanatthena ca sallato); 2. entered into, reached; Mil 317,31 (atthi... nibbnassa gunam annehi -am); SpkII 67,19 (dhammena ... pariyoghitena paniiya -ena); caus. pr. 3 sg. anupaveseti, anuppaveseti, makes enter; supplies; Mp II 210,19 (anuppaveccheyy ti ~eyya); V 75,7 (yam tassa mittdayo ito dadant -enti); Pj II 256,19 (tarn nnupaveseyya na samodhaneyya); Th-aIII 158,28 (mam jinassa bhagavato ssane pakkhandehi -ehi); pass. pr. 3 sg. anuppavesiyati, Pj II 256,23 (angat pi [kiles] cittasantatim nnuppavesiyanti uppattismatthiyavightena); see also anupvisim. anupavisana, n. [from anupavisati], entering; Jal 155,15 (kandam ' -atthena sallan ti vuccati); As 147,11 (-sankhtena oghanatthena apilpanabhvo). anupavecchati, anuppavecchati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + pavecchati], gives, presents; supplies, confers upon; Vin 1221,29* (das' assa thnni ~ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuppavacchati); D I 74,25 (devo ca na klena klarn samm dhrarn -eyya; Sv218,17: na ~eyy ti na paveseyya); MIII 133,3 (tarn enam hatthidamako uttarim tinaghsodakam -ati); Sn208 (yo jtam ucchiija na ropayeyya jyantam assa nnuppavecche; Pj II 256,i%foll.\ assa nnuppavecche ... nnupaveseyya, na samodhaneyya); Ja V 394,9* (yass' icchasi tassam -asu); Th-al 27,27 (pavassa samm dhrarn ~a); anupavecchanta, anuppavecchanta, mfn., A II 75,ii (deve na samm dharam -ante); JaV 107,27; (-antesu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuppavacchantesu); aor. 3 sg. anupavecchi, Sp 87,7 (devo samm dhrarn -i). anupavesa, m. [S. anupraveSa], entrance into; Mp III 349,26 (ogdham -am patt). anupaveseti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of anupavisati qv. anupasankamanta, anupasankamitv, see sv upasankamati. anupasanthapan, / [from *anu' + pa2 + santhapeti], setting up after; continuance; Pp 18,21 (thapan thapan santhapan - anupabandhan, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se anusamsandan; = Vibh 357,n: eds anusamsandan). anupassaka, mfn. [from anupassati], looking at, regarding as; showing; Th 420 (vedannam vinnpano updnappamocano bhavam angralsum va nnena - 0 . . . ariyo attharigiko maggo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anupassano; Th-aII 178,25: - o t i . . . anu-anupaccakkhato dasset); It-all 87,25 (kyasmim asubham asubhkram - hutv viharatha). anupassati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anupaSyati], looks at, contemplates; Vin I 184,22 (vayam c' assnupassati); Sn 477 (yo attan attnam nnupassati); Patis I 57,32 foil. (~ati ti katham -ati, aniccato -ati no niccato); Ps I 39,28 (sakkyam -atha astato asubhato bhedato 'tha anattato); (a) anupassa(t) mfn., Ps I 39,16* (subhato sukhato c'eva sakkyam -ato); (b) anupassanta, mfn., Patis I 58,3 (aniccato -anto niccasannam pajahati) ^


Vism 607,12; neg. annupassanta (with rhythmical lengthening), mfn., Niddl 287,20 (annujnan ti parassa... maggam annujnanto annupassanto); (c) anupassamna, mfn., Sv 461,22 (udayam ca vayam ca -amno); fpp anupassitabba, mfn., Sv 760,32 (katham ca vedan ~itabb ti) * Nidd-a I 50,4. anupassana, n., ~a, / [from anupassati; cf BHS anupaSyan], looking at, viewing; contemplation; realisation-, Patis I 58,28* (kusalo tisu ~su catsu ca vipassansu); 186,8 (sati ~ nnam); 186,25 (attha ~e nnni); Vibh 194,25 (katama -a); Vism 658,8 (katame pana te vimokkh yesam imani ~ni mukhni ti); Ps I 157,9 (sattavidhya ~ya yutto); Th-alll 206,39 (vimokkh ... tihi ~hi adhigantabb); As 221,26 (aniccam dukkham anatt ti tividham -am ropetv); ifc see anatt- (sv atta[n]), anicc- (^vnicca), ky-, citt(svcitta1), vedan-, sunnata-; ananupassana, n., not viewing', Sv 757,26 (kye ahan tiv maman ti v evam gahetabbassa yassa kassaci ~ato). anupassayamna, mfn. [neg. of *upa (+ 2) + sayati2; cf S. upaSrayate, upsYayate], not having recourse to; not keeping close to, not associating with', Sv 30,6 (na ca sappurise ~assa savanam atthi ti) = Ps I 6,17 = Ud-a 16,13 (Ee so; Be, Se anupanissayamnassa; Ce sappurisam anupanissya) = It-al 27,2; see also upassaya, upassita. anupassi(n), mfn. [BHS anupaSyin], looking for; observing, considering-, Sn255 (bhedsanki randham evnupassi); Vibh 194,25 (~i ti tattha katam anupassan); ifc see anatta- (.sv atta[n]), anicca- (sv nicca), dinav-, ky-, khay- (svkhaya2), citt- (svcitta1), dhamm-, patinissagg-, vedan-; annupassi(n) (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., not looking upon, not considering', Ud 74,17* (ayam aham asm! ti ~I). anupahacca, neg. absol. o/upahanati qv. anupkram, anupkre, ind. [ami1 + ace, loc. of pkra], along the wall or rampart; on the rampart; Ja VI 390,2 (~am dvrattlake antarattlake ... tisso parikh kresi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anupkradvrattlake); 400,19 (yodh ... pivanti khdanti ~Q cankamanti); 406,10 (~e thatv); (a)-matthake, ind., along the top of the rampart; Ja VI 401,28 (~e kalalam datv vihim tattha roppesi). anupta, m. [ts], following, proceeding as a consequence; Spk II 258,7 (vdnupto ti... satthu vdassa ~o anupatanam anugamanan ti attho) ^ Mp II 257,33 (~o anupatanam pavatti ti attho); ifc see vd-. anuptivattana, n. [a3 + uptivattana], not going beyond; Ps IV 25,16 (tassa dassanassa ~ato). anupti(n), mfn. [from anupta], following; attacking; ifc see khan- (sv khana1), vidur-. anupdam, ind. [anu1 + ace. of pda], at the foot; Vism 182,32/0//. (nnupdam nnusisam thtabbam... -amv anusisamv thitassa sabbam asubham samam na pannyati); see also anusisam. anupd, ind., neg. absol. o/updiyati qv. anupdiyana, n. [a3 + updiyana], not grasping; Ps IV 27,3 (sabbattha -vasena aganhanavasena upakrapatipad

nma). anuppunti, pr. 3 sg. [S. anupraVp; BHS anuprpunati], reaches, attains; falls to one 's lot; Vin I 22,28 (tumhe pi bhikkhave ... anuttaram vimuttim -tha); DI 73,6 (sotthin gmantam ~eyya); S II 229,25 (sekham appattamnasam lbhasakkrasiloko ~tu, Be, Ce, Seso; e~ti); Ja II 65,2* (loke samannam ~ti); Ap 7,15 (paccekabodhim ~anti); Cp-a312,i4 (tarn padam ~issmi ti); aor. 3 sg. anuppuni, As 33,18 (bhadrayobbanam ~i); 3pl. anuppunimsu, Ap 7,27; absol. (a) anuppunitv, D I 231,18 (tarn smannattham ~itv); (b)anuppatv, Ud-a 87,i6 (samatham ca anuppatv); (c) anuppatvna, Pv 21:25 (anuppatvna Dvrakam); p p anuppatta, anupatta, mfn. [S. anuprpta], l.(pass.) attained, reached; Vin I 22,26 (anuttar vimutti ~); D I 231,17 (smannattho -o); MII 105,24* (tisso vi]j~); Th 136 (so me attho ~o sabbasamyojanakkhayo); Vism 517,8 (tesam vannankkamo -0); neg. ananuppatta, mfn., D I 230,io; MI 104,29; 2. (act.) having attained, reached; arrived (at); Vin I 351,1 (satth no bhagav ~o); A I 180,20 (samano... Gotamo... Vengapuram ~o); Dhp386 (uttamattham -am tarn aham brmi brhmanam); Sn 635 (amatogadham ~am tarn aham brmi brhmanam); Ja IV 97,9* (amhi idhnupatto); Mil 334,8 (~e pana kayike); Sp 57,26 (ayam dni me so klo ~o ti); vayo anuppatta, having reached (old) age, old; Vin II 188,29 (vuddho mahallako addhagato vayo ~o) * MI 82,27; Thi-a60,2 (addhagat vayo ~); caus. pr. 3 sg. anuppeti, makes reach; takes to; Ja VI 88,26* (yva Smnuppaya; 88,29': yva Smo yattha tattha amhe ~aya); Mil276,21 (tarn enam... ynam ropetv patthitam desam ~eyya); aor. 1 sg. anuppayim, Cp 3:11:4 (tarn aham upatthahitvna rogyam ~ayim); pp anuppita, mfn., made to be reached; made to be understood; Mil 252,28 (~itam jinassanam). anupya, m. and mfn., see sv upya. anupysa, m. and mfn., see sv upysa. anupysi, aor. 3 sg. [o/anu 1 + payti; S. anupraVy], he followed; Mp I 330,14 (hatthipotako pitu pacchato pacchato ~i, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anupatipajjati). anupyi(n), mfn. [from anupeti ? cf S. anupraVi], following; Pet 165,24* (tato nam sukham anveti chy va ~ini) = Nett 133,19* (quoting Dhp 2: anapyini). anuplaka, mfn. [from anupleti], preserving, sustaining; Vism 589,i7(~amjivitindriyam); Ps I 210,19 (hro ... kammajnam ~o hutv paccayo hoti); Mp II 122,5 (pdak ti vaddhak ~). anuplana, n., ~&,f [S. anuplana], preserving, sustaining; maintenance; As310,3o(/ long cpd); Dip 3:2 (jtim ca nmagottam ca yum ca ~am); Ps II 350,14 (jivitindriyena usmya ~am); Spk II 266,12 (thiti ti jivitindriyasankhtya ~ya nmam). anupleti, ~ayati, anuplati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuplayati], preserves; sustains; maintains; Jail 432,14* (sabbakmadadam kumbham ... laddhna ... yva so ~eti tva so sukham edhati); VI 317,25* (asampadosam ~aya vacas kamman ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ~ay, mcl); Pet 142,16 (vicro ~eti, Ce so; Be, Ee anuplati); Mil 160,11 (vuddhim deti santatim ~eti); Sp 225,22 (ye yvajivam


ekabhattam brahmacariyam vinayasamvaram ~enti ti); Nidd-all 124,30 (samanadhammam ~essmi ti); (a)anuplaya(t), mfn., Mhv 21:21 (rj crittam ~ayam); (b) anuplayanta, mfn., Pet 155,7; aor. 1 sg. (a) anuplesim, Ap 218,13; (b) anuplayim, Ap 218,14; pass. pr. 3 sg. anupliyati, Cp-a 331,9 (devathi ~iyati); As 310,25 (yun -iyamnam); pp anuplita, mfn., preserved, sustained; maintained', Vism 365,8 (tejodhatuy ~); Mp II 122,6 (putt hi mtpithi vaddhit c' eva ~ ca). anupvisim, aor. 1 sg. [o/*anu ! + upavisati, or poss. of anupavisati qv], I approached (for instruction)', or I resorted to; JaVI 60,14* (na... kanci kudcanam samanam brhmanam vpi sakkatv ~im); see also anuppavissa sv anupavisati. anuphana, mfn., see .yv uphan. anuphra, m. [a3 + uphra], not bringing; non-supply; M HI 245,7 (telappadipo... telassa ca vattiy ca pariydn annassa ca ~ anhro nibbyati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anupahr) * SII 85,24 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anupahr). anupila in Ee at Pv-a 161,15 is wrfor anupapila qv. anupilita, mfn. [pp o/*anu' + pileti], strongly pressed; Vism 105,5* (dutthassa hoti anukaddhitam padam mlhassa padam sahasnupilitam) = Pj II 544,3* * Dhp-al 201,6* (dutthassa hoti sahasnupilitam mlhassa hoti avakaddhitam padam). anupucchati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWprach], asks, questions; inquires after; Sn432 (kim jivam ~asi); Vv 17:5 (yam etam Sakka ~ase mamam); Ja IV 249,24* (kim ev' aham Tundilam nupuccheyyam, Ee so, for nupucche, numcl Be, Ce anupucchim; Se Tundilam apucchim); VI 78,16* (turo ty nupucchmi kim mam viddh niliyasi; 78,25". aham tarn-ami); anupucchamna mfn., Sn 841 (ditthimca nissya ~amno ... pamoham g); aor. 3 sg. anupucchi, Ja VI 221,17* (tarn ~i Vedeho) ^ 227,30* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee annupucchi, prob, wr); pp anupuftna, mfn., asked; neg. annuputtha (with metrical lengthening), mfn., not questioned, not asked; Sn 782 (annuputtho ca paresa pv; Nidd I 68,8: annuputtho ti aputtho apucchito anycito anajjhesito); Ja IV 226,3* (yo attano dukkham annuputtho; c/226,i8': punappuna puttho). anupubba, mfn. and n. [S., BHS anuprva], 1. (mfn.) regular, gradual; tapering; JaV 155,22* (~ va ter); 2. (n.) regular order; As 135,13 (ettha ~am nma n' a.Uhi,Eeso; Be, Ce, Se apubbam); Th-alll 20,17 (~am anukkamo); ace. ~am, adv., in regular order, by turn; gradually; MI 338,12* (Brahma viyksi -am yathtatham); Sn510 (paiihe me puttho ~am anudhammam vyakarohi me); Th548 (ripnasati... ~am paricit); Ja III 282,22* (~am suvattitam); Mhv 5:73; ~aso, adv., in regular order; Sn 1000 (mahpurisalakkhan dvattims ca vykhyt samatt ~aso); Ap 541,22 (niyyanti ~aso); instr. ~ena, adv., gradually, successively; in due course; Vin I 83,16 (~ena carikam caramno yena Svatthi tad avasari); AII 140,15 (~ena savnam khayam ppenti); Dhp239 (~ena medhvi thokathokam khane khane ... niddhame malam attano);

Jail 2,5 (~ena vayappatto); IV 74,7 (~en' assa parivro mah ahosi); Mil 22,4 (crikam caramno ~ena Sgalanagaram anuppatto hoti); -katha,/, an exposition in a regular order; an account of previous events; Ja I 50,3 (ayam ~, Ee so; Ce nupubbi-; Be, Se anupubbi-); Vism 249,10 (tatryam sabbakotthsesu ~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anupubbi-); Sv 258,10 (~a, Ce, Ee so; Se anupubbi-; Be anupubbi kath); Ps II 19,6 (tatryam ~, Be, Ce, Eeso; Se anupubbi-); see also nupubbikath .yv nupubbi; -krana, n. [anupubba + krana1], gradual training; MI 446,8 (abhinhakran ~); -kiriy,/, regular or gradual working; Vin II 238,29 (imasmim dhammavinaye anupubbasikkh ~ anupubbapatipad) ^ AIV 201,2; MI 479,36 (anupubbasikkh ~ anupubbapatipad annrdhan hoti); -nirodha, m., successive cessation; DIU 266,6 (nava -; Sv 1046,22: anupatiptiy nirodh); As 186,35; -patipad, / , regular or gradual progress; Vin II 238,30 (imasmim dhammavinaye anupubbasikkh anupubbakiriy ~) * AIV 201,2; MI 479,36 (anupubbasikkh anupubbakiriy ~ annrdhan hoti); -vihra, m., gradual or successive stage (in meditation); D III 265,19 (nava ~; Sv 1046,20: anupatiptiy sampajjitabbavihr); AIV 410,2 (nava-y-ime bhikkhave -); Vibh-a 423, is (~-t); -vihri(n), mfn., moving through successive stages; Ud78,3* (~I tattha so); -sikkh,/, regular or gradual training; Vin II 238,29 (imasmim dhammavinaye ~ anupubbakiriy anupubbapatipad) * AIV 201,2; M I 479,36 (~ anupubbakiriy anupubbapatipad annrdhan hoti; Ps III 193,4: ~ ti karanatthe paccattavacanam); see also nupubba, nupubbi, nupubbikathnupubbaka, padnupubbat, pubbnupubbaka. anupubbat in Ee at Vv-a 280,22 is prob, wr for anubbat (Be, Ce, Se, Vv 64:14 so). nupubbikath, see sv nupubbi. anupubbi, see sv nupubbi. anupurohita, m. [anu1 + purohita], a junior purohita; a deputy under the chief purohita; Sv663,i (satta ~e patthapesi); Pj II 280,28 (-brhmanassa). anupullana in Ee and anupullan in Be at Pet 109,3 are perhaps wrr; Ce anupubbena; and cf Nnamoli, 1979, p. 150. anupekkhana1, anupekkhana1, n. [from anupekkhati], concentrating; considering carefully; -t,/, abstr., concentration (of thought); close or continuous consideration; Dhs 8 (vicro anuvicro upavicro cittassa anusandhanat ~) * Vibh257,n; As 143,io/o//. (rammanam anupekkhamno viya titthati ti ~ [Ee wr anupekkhat], vicaranavasena v upekkhanat ti-). anupekkhana2, see sv upekkhan. anupekkhat in Ee at As 143,11 is wr for anupekkhanat qv. anupekkhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. anupraViks], regards, considers carefully or continually; DIU 242,8 (dhammam cetas anuvitakketi anuvicreti manasnupekkhati); AIV 86,5 (manasnupekkheyysi); (a) anupekkha(t), mfn., A III 382,7 (tassa ... manasnupekkhato); (b) anupekkhamna, mfn., Nidd II


87,23 (sahye ca anukampamno ~amno anuggayhamno); Asl43,io; absol anupekkhitv, Sp 1104,28 (plim ca atthakatham ca ~itv); pp anupekkhita, mfii., carefully or continually considered; Vin II 95,36 (manasnupekkhit) * M III 115,20; Th-a III 118,27 (tesu manas ~itesu dhammesu); caus. pr. 3 sg. anupekkheti, Vin II 73,27 (puggalam sannpeti nijjhpeti pekkheti ~eti dasseti). anupekkhana2, see sv upekkhan. anupekkh, / , see sv upekkh. anupekkhi(n), mfn. [from anupekkhati], watching, regarding carefully or continuously; ifc see atta(,yv atta[n]), para-. anupekkhita(r), m. [from anupekkhati], one who regards, considers carefully; Mp III 279,21 (attnam ~). anupeta, mfn., neg. pp ojupeti qv. anupeti, pr. 3 sg. [S. anupraVi or *anu1 + apyeti], follows; goes over to; passes into; D I 55,22 (catummahbhtiko ayam puriso yad klam karoti pathavi pathavikyam ~eti anupagacchati; Sv 165,28: -eti" ti anuyti) = MI 515,10 = SHI 207,1; see also anupyi(n). anupeseti, pr. 3 sg. [S. anupresayati], sends out after; Mil 36,28 (tato rj aMamannam [senarn] anusreyya -eyya). anuposathika, mfn., see sv uposathika. anuposathikam, ind. [from anu1 + (u)posatha], every uposatha day; Vin IV 145,2 (anvaddhamsan ti ~am) = 315,27; Mp IV 135,7. anuposiya, mfn. [fpp o/*anu' + poseti], to be nourished or fostered; Saddh 318 (sabbasampattibijam me ropitam nnuposiyam). anuppage, see sv page. anuppajjati in Ce, Ee at Dhp-a III 376,15 is prob, wr for n' uppajjati (Be, Se so). anuppafiftatta, mfn., see sv anupannatta. anuppafiatti, / , see sv anupannatti. anuppatta, mfn., pp o/anuppunti qv. anuppatti 1 ,/, see sv anupatti. anuppatti 2 ,/, see sv uppatti. anuppattika, mfn. [a3 + uppatti + ka2], not connected with birth, not leading to coming into being; Ps V 82,n (anupavajjan ti -am appatisandhikam) = Spkll 371,24 (Eeso; Be, Ce, Se appavattikam). anuppatv, anuppatvna, absol. o/anuppunti qv. anuppadajjum, anuppadajjeyyum, opt. 3 pi. of anuppadeti qv. anuppadajjeyya, opt. 3 sg. of anuppadeti qv. anuppadassati, fut. 3 sg. of anuppadeti qv. anuppadta(r) (in Ee sometimes anuppdtajr]), m [from anuppadeti qv], one who gives in addition; one who encourages, supports, confirms; D I 4,20 (bhinnnam va sandhta sahitnam va ~; Sv 74,25foil.: dalhikammam kattti attho); MI 286,34 (samaggnam v bhett bhinnnam v ~; Ps II 331,3: bhinnnam puna asandhnya ~, upatthambhet kranam dasset ti attho). anuppadtum, inf. of anuppadeti qv. anuppadna (in Ee sometimes anuppdna), n. [from

anuppadeti qv; BHS anupradna], giving, providing, administering; D 112,io(mlabhesajjnam~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anuppdnam, prob, wr); Ja III 205,6* (~ena paveniy v; 205,18': ~en ti lancadnena); V 433,12 (sabbadhana-m-anuppadnena, Ce so; Be sabbadhanaanuppadnena; Ee, Se wr anuppdanena); As 243,27 (tesam khrnam --am viya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuppdnam). anuppadeti, anupadeti (in Ee sometimes anuppadeti2), pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + pa2 + (2 +) deti; BHS anupradadti], gives (in addition), hands over, provides; encourages, supports; D I 135,21 (tesam bhavam rj bijabhattam ~etu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anuppdetu, prob, wr); III 66,30 (tesam rj dhanam ~eti ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -esiti); 187,8 (taddigunam bhogam ~eti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anuppadeti, prob, wr); SI 162,8 (api nu tesam ~esi khdaniyam bhojaniyarn syaniyan ti); A I 117,7 (amhkam ca klena klam -ehi ti); Ja V 436,5' (yo pana sabbadhanam -eti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anuppadeti); Kv 527,17 (paro parassa sukham~eti ti); Mil 210,21 (tassa ca rj ... yathicchitam ~eti); fut. 3sg. anuppadassati, anupadassati, A III 43,25* (petnam dakkhinam ~assati); Sn 983 (sace me ycamnassa bhavam nnupadassati); 1 sg. anuppadassmi, D III 67,10 (tassa tassa dhanam ~assmi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~mi); anuppadeti ti in Ee at Nidd-a II113,19 is wr for anuppadeti ti (Be, Ce, Se so); see sv anuppadeti1; opt. 3 sg. anupadajjeyya, Vin HI 259,13 (evam ca so bhikkhu vatv kincimattam anupadajjeyya antamaso pindaptamattam pi); 2 sg. (a)anuppadajjeyysi, anupadajjeyysi, DIU 61,10 (tesam ca dhanam anuppadajjeyysi); MI 416,23 (anupadajjeyysi tvam Rhula evarpam kyakammam; Ps III 128,26: anupadajjeyysi ti ~eyysi upatthambheyysi punappunam kareyysi); (b) anuppadeyysi, Ps III 128,26; 3 pi. (a) anuppadajjum, S III 131,9 (vattham sankilittham... smik rajakassa ~ajjum) quoted As 244,14 (anuppadajjeyyum); (b) anuppadajjeyyum, As 244,14; (a) anuppadenta, mfn., Ja V 124,3' (alankram ~ento, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anuppdento, prob, wr); (b) anuppadadamna, mfn., Mp II 194,28 (bhesajjam anuppadadamno, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anuppadajjamno); aor. 3sg. anuppadsi, D I 136,2(bijabhattam ~si; Be, Se so; Ce anuppadsi; Ee wr anuppdesi); Ja III 342,1 (mahantam c' assa yasam ~si); 3 pi. anuppadamsu, D III 93,io (te pan' assa slinam bhgam -amsu); inf. anuppadtum, A I 117,5 (patibalo puttadram ca posetum amhkam ca klena klam anuppadtun ti); absol. anuppadatv, Pj II 35,24 (digunam dhanam anuppadatv); pass, anuppadiyamna, mfn., being given; D III 65,16 (adhannam dhane nnuppadiyamne, Se so; Be ananuppadiyamne; Ce ananuppadiyamne; Ee ananuppadiyamne, prob, wr; Sv 852,12: nnuppadiyamne ti ananuppadiyamne, ayam eva v ptho, Be so; Ce, Ee wr nnuppdeyyamne ti ananuppdeyyamne; Se ananuppadiyamne ti na anuppadiyamne) quoted It-al 69,20 (Be, Ce, Se ananuppadiyamne; Ee wr anuppadiyamne); pp anuppadinna, mfn., given; provided; Pv5:12 (balam ca bhikkhnam ~am); Ap 153,14 (~ buddhena


sabbesam bijasampad); fpp anuppadtabba, mfn., M II 178,20 (mlam ca -an ti); Sp 1125,is; see also anuppadata(r), anuppadna. anuppadinna, mfn., pp of anuppadeti qv. anuppanna, mfn., neg. pp o/uppajjati qv.. anuppabandha, m. [BHS anuprabandha], continuity, continuance; continuous flow; It-all 167,6 (tanhya sotasadisat veditabb anukkamaparivutthito ~ato osidpanato duruttaranato ca); As 115,2 (ghantnuravo viya ~o vicro); instr. ~ena, adv., continuously, uninterruptedly; Mp II 203,24 (jivitam pditam plitam ~ena pavattitam); It-all 167,I5 (nadisoto ... ~ena pavattati). anuppabandhati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anuprabadhnti], follows continually; flows continuously; keeps on, continues; As400,i8 (ete abhijjhdayo dhamm anvssaveyyum -eyyum ajjhotthareyyum); (a) anuppabandhanta, mfn., Mil 132,16 (mahmegho aparparam ~anto abhivasseyya); (b) anuppabandhamna, mfn., As 233,I8 (maggo ... avicisantativasena tarn nnam ~amno); caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) anuppabandheti, causes to flow continuously; makes continue; Cp-a 57,26 (pubbe attan pavattitam kalynavattam ~essmi ti); (b) anuppabandhpeti, ~payati, id., Mil 132,24 (-meghavassam aparparam ~peyyum abhivasspeyyum); Vism 625,24 (asokankuram ... sabhgarpasantatim ~payamnam). anuppabandhan, anupabandhan, / (and ~a, n. ?) [from anuppabandhati], continuance; continuity, continuous flow; Pp 18,2i = Vibh357,i3 (thapan santhapan anusamsandan ~; Vibh-a 492,8: ~ ti purimena saddhim pacchimassa ghatan); (a)-kara, mfn., producing continuity; Vism 449, n (rpassa santati... rpapadatthn, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anuppabandhakarpa-; * As 327,34: Be, Ce, Se anuppabandharpa-; Ee omits); (a)-t,/, abstr., continuance; Mil 132,19 (meghassa bhante ~ay ti); (a)-rasa, mfn., whose essential property or function is continuity; Vism 449,10 (pavattilakkhan rpassa santati ~) = As 327,33. anuppayoga, m. [S. anuprayoga], additional use; an additional word (of similar meaning); Sp728,2i (pathamapadassa -tt); Sv245,n (-tt); -vacana, n., a word (of similar meaning) used additionally; Sp728,i9. anupparikkhitv in Ee at Spk III 285,19 is wr, prob, for anupaparikkhitv qv sv upaparikkhati; Be, Ce, Se however anupadhretv. anuppavacchati in Ee at VinI 221,29* is wr for anuppavecchati qv sv anupavecchati; anuppavacchantesu in Ee at Ja V 107,27' is wr for anuppavecchantesu (Be, Ce, Se so). anuppavattaka, mfn.9 see sv anupavattaka. anuppavattati, see sv anupavattati. anuppavattana, see sv anupavattana. anuppavaddhati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + pavaddhati], continually grows, increases; Spk II 64,28 (sav nnussavanti nnuppavaddhanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nnuppabandhanti).

anuppavisati, see sv anupavisati. anuppavittha, mfn.,pp of anupavisati qv. anuppavissa, see sv anupavisati. anuppavecchati, see sv anupavecchati. anuppavesana, n. [from caus. of anupavisati], supplying; ifc see an-. anuppda, m., see sv wppMa2. anuppdana, n., see .yvuppdana; anuppdana in Ee, Se at Ja V 433,12 and in Ee at A I 123,32 and As 243,27 is prob, wrfor anuppadna qv. anuppdaniya, mfn., neg. fpp of caus. o/uppajjati qv. anuppdta(r), see sv anuppadta(r). anuppadna, see sv anuppadna. anuppdiyamne in Ee at It-a I 69,20 is wr; Be, Ce, Se ananuppadiyamne. anuppdeti 1 ,/^. 3 sg. [for *anpdeti, teanu1 + *updeti (= updiyati) ?], becomes attached to; Nidd II 93,35 (abhipattheti ~eti anubandhati; Nidd-all 113,19: ~etl ti rpasmim anuvyanjanam disv alliyati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuppadeti ti). anuppdeti2, see sv anuppadeti. anuppdetv, neg. absol of caus. o/uppajjati qv. anuppdeyyamna in Ee at Sv 852,12 (nnuppdeyyamne ti ananuppdeyyamne) is wr for anuppadiyamna qv sv anuppadeti. anuppiya, (mf)n. or -am, ind. [anu1 + piya], (what is) pleasant, flattering; or pleasantly, flatteringly; D III 186,28* (~am ca yo aha); Ja V 107,15* (~am bhsasi khattiyassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr bhsati); (a)-bhni(n), mfii., flattering; saying (only) pleasant things; D i l i 185,22 (~i amitto mittapatirpako veditabbo); Ja V 360,7 (~i mitto ti mam sallakkheti, Be, Ce so; Ee ~i-mitto; Se anuppiyabhvamitto); Vibh 352,31 (~-ta). anuppilava, m. [from uppilavati; cfS. lex., BHS utplava], lack of exhilaration or excitement; Nidd-a I 172,7 (sukhe 0,-atthena pandito, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anuppilavanatthena); see also uppilva. anuppilavana, n. [from uppilavati; cfS. utplavana], the not being exhilarated or excited; Nidd-a I 172,7 (sukhe ' -atthena pandito, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anuppilavatthena). anuppila, mfn. [from uppileti; cf S. utpida], free from oppression; free from distress; D I 135,26 (janapad akantak -, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anupapil); Ja III 443,20* (sukhi ~a passa medinim;443,30': ~ampassa medinin ti, ayam eva v ptho); V 378,1* (kacci rattham ~am; 378,24': ~an ti kacci ratthavsino yante ucchum viya na piles! ti pucchati); Vv-a 351,23 (anbdham ~am); see also anupapila. anuppharana, anupharana, n. and mfn. [from anuppharati], 1. (n.) pervading; diffusion; Mp II 344,25 (~ena); III 362,21 (' -atthena mah nubhvo ass ti mahnubhvo); 2. (mfn.) diffusing through; pervading; Mil 148,23 (satayojannupharanacciveg ... mahniray). anuppharati, anupharati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + pharati], pervades, diffuses through; Ps III 381,4 (sabbam kyam ~ati); Mp IV 59,17 (ayam ~itum nubhvo); aor. 3 sg. anuphari, Dhp-al 134,20 (pvakhandam


mukhe thapitamattam sattarasaharanisahassni -i); absol anupharitv, JaV 272,20' (ettakam thnam -itv titthanti). anuphusiyati, pr. 3 sg. [pass, of *anuI + phusati2], is sprinkled; is poured down; JaV 242,18* (yasm ca vassati devo himam cnuphusfyati, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be cnuphusyati; Ce, Se cpi phusiyati). anubajjhanti in Ee at Pv-a56,3 is wr for anubandhanti (Be, Ce,Seso). anubaddha, mfn.,pp 0/anubandhati qv. anubandha, m. and mfn. [S. anubandha, m.], l.(m.) (i) binding, bondage; encumbrance; Mill 170,9 (uttarim pi -am nigaccheyya, Ce, Ee so; Be adhibandham; Se addhubandham; Ps IV 214,5: attan pi bandham nigaccheyya); Nett 38,7 (papanco nma vuccati -o); (ii) (gr.t.t) indicatory letter; Abh 980; Sadd 873,22 (ettha ca -na kiccam n' atthi); 2. (mfn.) who follows; who keeps close to; (but perhaps wr for anubaddha qv sv anubandhati); Vin II 111,36 (te ca bhante manuss ... yasmantam Pindolabhradvjam pitthito pitthito -, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anubaddha); D I 1,17 (bhagavantam pitthito pitthito - honti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anubaddha); M III 278,5 (devatsahassni bhagavantam -ni honti); SI 122,29 (Mro ppim sattavassni bhagavantam -0 hoti otrpekkho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anubaddho); II227,19 (atthi ca me idam suttakam pitthito pitthito ~an ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce anubaddhan ti); IV 173,11 (pafica vadhak paccatthik pitthito pitthito -, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anubaddha); Thi 493 (-e jarmarane); It 91,15* (~o pi ce assa mahiccho va vightav, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce anubaddho); Ap 308,25 (devaloke manusse v - ime gun, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anubaddha); Vism 306,26 (atitajtito patthya ~o pi kodho tarn khanam yeva vpasammati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce anubaddho); ananubandha, m., freedom from bondage; lack of binding; Th-al 98,16 (cathi yogehi tt yogakkhemam). anubandhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWbandh], follows; keeps close to, attends closely; pursues; Vin IV 325,25 foil. (bhikkhuniyo vutthpitam pavattinim dve vassni nnubandhanti... nnubandhissanti... y pana bhikkhuni... nnubandheyya; 326,7: nnubandheyy tina sayam upatthaheyya); V 87,3* (nnubandhe pavattinim); Mil 135,22 (yannnham samanam Gotamam -eyyam); Ja II 362,5 (kinnu kho mam -asi ti); Nidd I 312,24 (satth ohino tarn v sattham -ati sakam v gharam paccgacchati); Mil 72,21 (-eyyum kho mahrja tni kammni); fut. 1 sg. (a) anubandhissmi; Vin IV 326,8; (b) anubandhissam, Ja VI 508,23* (smikam -issam); cond. 3 sg. anubandhiss, Ud-a 126,27 (sace tath satth ncikkhiss ... tass tarn dukkham -iss, Be, Ee so; Se -issa; Ce anubandhati); (a) anubandhanta, m/(~anti)., VinI 220,29 (atitni kho me dve msni buddhapamukham bhikkhusangham -antassa, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anubaddhassa); V 78,17 (nnubandhanti); Ja IV 208,6 (~anto); Mhv 25:68 (~anto); (b) anubandhamna, mfn., Ja II 228,9* (lolo ca macche -amno); Vism 187,1 (matasariram ... ~amnam viya ca hutv upatthti); aor. 3 sg. (a) anubandhi, DU 102,10

(bhagavantam pitthito pitthito ~i); Mil 135,24 (bhagavantam ~i chy va anapyini); Ja II 362,3; (b) anubandhittho, Ja VI 475,7* (tarn ~ittho ekadukkhasukho tava; 475,13': tarn ~i chy va na vijahi); 2 sg. anubandhi, Ja IV 337, is* (yam sattavassni mam anubandhi, nu- mc; 337,26': mam ettakam klam tvam ~i); 3pl. (a) anubandhimsu, Vin III 60,29 (smik te corake -imsu); SV 348,30; Ja IV 264,12; (b) anubandhisum, Sn412 (rjadt pitthito ~isum); absol. (a) anubandhitv, Vin IV 132,24; Jal 254,24 (vegena -itv); (b) anubandhiya, Mhv 36:50 (tarn kanittho 'nubandhiya); pass, anubandhiyamna, mfn., Vibh-a259,28; p p anubaddha, mfn. [ts], \.(act.) following, keeping close to; VinI 193,15 (kissa tyyam vuso gvi pitthito pitthito ~ ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anubandhi ti); D I l,n (ubho cariyantevsi... bhagavantam pitthito pitthito ~ honti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anubandha); SIV 173,11 (panca vadhak paccatthik pitthito pitthito ~, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anubandha); A I 229,12 (gadrabho goganam pitthito pitthito ~o hoti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anubandho); Spk I 48,26 (yva ca kmargo maggena na samugghtiyati tva ~o va hoti ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anubandho); 2. (pass.) followed, pursued; Ja IV 454,16 (yodhehi ~o); Vism 180,22 (te manussehi ~... bhandakam chaddetv pi palyanti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anubandha, prob, wr); 326, is (puriso aranne sappena -o, Be, Ceso; Ee, Se anubandho, prob, wr); Ud-a 179,20 (janapadamanussehi ~ palyant); It-all 8,4 (anekehi dukkhadhammehitt, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anubandhatt); Patis-a 698,3i (anekehi anatthehi ~-tya); fpp anubandhitabba, mfn.y MI 107,27 (so puggalo ~o); S III 95,14 (na bhagav tasmim samaye kenaci ~o hoti); caus. pr. 3 sg. anubandhpeti, makes pursue; Jail 142,24 (~eti); Sp 688,19; Spk II 395,8 (dlgharattam -enti). anubandhana, n. [ts], close attendance; following; pursuit; JaV 446,20' (yasmim patibaddhacitt honti tarn yeva ~ato); Sp 975,4 (idam pitthito pitthito -am); Ps II 186,28 (~ena mukhodakadantakatthadndin ca upatthahimsu); ifcsee kumm-; -dukkha, n., the misery of being pursued; Ja VI 526, r (mahajanena -am); anubandhana in Ee at Kv 137,4 is prob, wr for andubandhana qv sv andu; see also anubandhana. anubandhanaka, mfn. [anubandhana+ ka2], who follows closely; who pursues; Vism 187,9 (matasariram utthahitv -am nma n'atthi); Sp 485,3 (aho amhkam ayyo ti evam lapanake ~e sasnehe karoti). anubandhana, / [cf S. anubandhana], connection; unbroken succession; Vism 278,16 (- ti anuvahan) * Sp 418,26 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ~ ti anupadahan) * Patis-a 495,1 (- ti anugaman); Vism 280,4 (-ya manasiktabbam)= Sp 421,6. anubala, n. [ts], rear-guard; auxiliary army; reinforcements; support; Mil 125,12 (mamnubalam bhavissasi); Sp 1071,8 (et pana nissya et -am katv); -patta, mfn., with a reinforced army; Mhv 48:98; -ppadna, n., the giving of support; support; Vin II 88,34; It-al 101,31 (tassa uppdanena c'eva -ena ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anupalabbhamnena, prob, wr); -ppadyik,(w)/(A2)., giving support, giving


strength; Vv-a 53,7 (osadhlnam v ~ ti katv osadhi ti laddhanm traka) ^ Pv-a71,n (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -ppadn) * It-al 90,n (-ppadayikatt, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -ppadyitatt); -ppadyitatta, n., abstr., the giving of support; It-a 190,13 (osadhlnam v ~ osadhi ti laddhanm trak, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce 0 -ppadayikatt). anubujjhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVbudh], understands; is conscious of; recollects; Mil 171,29 (kittvat saccam ~ati); Ja III 133,28* (yo ca uppatitam attham na khippam ~ati); 387,19* (yo pubbe katakalyno katattho-m-~ati); Patis II 115, li (-anti ti bojjhang); aor. 3 sg anubujjhi, Niddl 457,3 (bujjhi ~i patibuijhi); 1 sg. (a) anubodhim, SI 126,16* (eko 'hamjhyam sukham anubodhim, Be so; Ce anvabodhim; Ee wr anubodham; Se nubodhyam; Spk I 187,8: sukham anubodhin ti arahattasukham ~im) = A V 46,25* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anubodhim, mc); (b) anubujjhim, Spk I 187,8; Mp V 21,7 (sukham ~im sacchiksim); inf. anubujjhitum, Vibh-a 140,13; pp anubuddha, mfn. and m., 1. (mfn.) (i) (pass.) realised, understood; Vin I 231,1 (ariyasaccam ~am patividdham); D i l 123,8* (~ ime dhamm Gotamena); SI 137,24* (sunantu dhammam vimalennubuddham) = Sn 384; (ii) (act.) understanding; enlightened; M I 330,25 (sace kho tvam mrisa evamjnsi sacetvam evam ~o); Vism 202,22 (sabbadhamme samm smam ca buddho ~o patibuddho); 2. (m.) one who has understood in succession; a disciple or successor of the Buddha; Ja I 408,17 (~ena dhammasenpatin); Sp 187,24 (ye tesam buddhnam ~ sammukhasvak); Dhp-aIII 237,22 (buddha ca paccekabuddh ~ c ti ime hi tayo buddha); ifc see buddha-; neg. ananubuddha, mfn., without followers who understand in succession; Th -a I 8,28 (paccekasambodhi, ananubuddho sayambhnnena saccbhisamayo); snubuddha, m/h., with followers who understand in succession; Th-al 8,31 (sammsambuddhnam hi... sayam eva pavattamno pi saccbhisamayo snubuddho appamnnam sattnam saccbhisamayassa hetubhvato); caus., awakening; enlightening; (a) anubodhenta, m/(-enti)w., Patis II 115,15 (anubodhenti ti bojjhang); (b) anubodhayamna, mfn., Ja VI 139,18 (pitaram anubodhayamno). anubujjhana, n. [BHS anubudhyana], awakening; recognition; understanding; Patis I 18,n (ekatte 0,-attho abhinneyyo); Patis-a 100,15 (sakadgmimaggabojjhangnam -attho); ananubujjhana, n., lack of understanding; Sv 495,13 (ananubodh ti... ~) * SpkIII299,3(~ena). anubuddha, mfn. andm., pp of anubujjhati qv. anubuddhi, / [cf BHS anubuddhi], reasoning; inference; Sp231,12 (attanomati nma... anumnena attano ~iy nayagghena upatthitkrakathanam); Ps II 386,17 (anvay ti ~iyo); III352,17 (anumnam -i ti attho). anubodha, m. [from anubujjhati], understanding; Nidd-al 428,20 (anurpato dhamme bujjhati ti ~o); Vibh-a 140,11 (~o sambodho pativedho ti pi pann, s tarn kram anubujjhati sambujjhati pativijjhati); ananubodh, m. and mfn., 1. (m.) lack of understanding; Vin I 230,27 (catunnam ... ariyasaccnam -); D II

55,14 (etassa... dhammassa -); Pp21,i9 (annnam adassanam anabhisamayo ~o asambodho); 2. (mfn.) lacking understanding; Vv 82:5 (puthujjano ~o 'ham asmi, Be so; Ce, Ee anavabodho; Se anubodho; Vv-a 321,12: saccnam anubodhamattasspi abhvena -0, eds so); duranubodha, mfn. [BHS id.], hard to understand; Vin I 4,34 (adhigato kho myyam dhammo gambhlro duddaso ~o); D112,20 (atthi bhikkhave anne va dhamm gambhlr duddas ~); Mil 276,10 (~-t); anubodham in Ee at SI 126,16* is wr for anubodhim qv sv anubuijhati. anubodhana, n. [BHS id.], awakening; making understood; reminding; Patis I 18,19 (ekatte ' -attho abhinneyyo); II115,n ('-atthenabojjhang); see also ananubodhan. anubodhi, / [from anubujjhati], understanding; -pakkhiya, mfn., associated with understanding; Patis I 18,22 (ekatte 0>-attho abhinneyyo); II 115,19 (' -atthena bojjhang). anubbajati, see sv anuvajati. anubbata, mfn. [S. anuvrata], obedient, faithful, devoted; Vv 32:11 (patim ~); 64:14 (~ t tava mnase rata); Ja III 521,io* (~e cakkavke; 521, i4': ~e ti annamannam anugate sammodamne piyasamvse); VI 557,30* (Rmam Sita v' ~). anubrhana, n., ~, / [from anubrheti; cf BHS anubrmhanat, anubnnhan], increase; strengthening; Vism 64,18 (sammpatipattiy ~am); Ps II 175,25 (api ss ti0,-atthe nipto); It-a II 91,7 (upakradhamme -vasena); ifc see upekkh- sv upekkh. anubrheti, ~ayati, anubrhati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anubrmhayati], makes increase, fosters; devotes oneself to; practises; Mill 187,26* (tarn vidv^naye); 239,14 (cgam ~eyya); SI 178,5* (yena atthena gacchi tarn evam ~aye); Dhp 75 (vivekam ~aye); Thi 163 (tarn eva ~ehi ma cittassa vasam garni); 206 (maggam dassanapattiy ... ~aya); Cp-a296,25 (pannvirahitassa ca parehi upanit apakr khantiy patipakkham eva ~enti); fut. 1 sg. (a) anubrhissmi, Ja VI 256,30 (vivekam ~issml ti); (b) anubrhessmi, Ja III 31,14 (vivekam ~essmi ti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se ~issml ti); (a) anubrhanta, mfn., JaV 456,23 (vivekam -anto, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce ~ento); Ap 174,17 (vivekam -anto; Ap-a445,10: janavivekam cittavivekam ~anto vaddhento bahulikaronto); Bv4:15 (pitim ~anto); Ps V 2,10; (b)neg. ananubrhamna, mfn., Sv 1034,35 (appamdalakkhanam ananubrhamno appamde agravo nma, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se appamdalakkhanam ananubrhayamno); (c) anubrhenta, mfn., Bv -a 151,13 (~ento ti vaddhento, Ee so; Be, Se -anto ti); (d) anubrhaya(t), mfn., Th23 (vivekam -ayam); Jal 288,14* (t hitv pabbajissmi vivekam ~ayam); Mhv 5:233; (e) anubrhayanta, mfn., Th-al 90,26 (-ayanto); (f)anubrhayamna, mfn., Mill 116,11; Bv-a 232,15 (ekacariyam -ayamno, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr anubruh-); neg. ananubrhayamna, mfn., Sv 1034,35 (appamdalakkhanam ananubrhayamno appamde agravo nma, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ananubrhamno); aor. 3 sg. anubrhesi, Cp -a 257,18 (mahsatto ...


pramiyo ~esi); 1 sg. anubrhayim, Bv6:15 (buddhadhammam saritv -ayim); absol anubrhetv, Pj II 496,21 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anubrhitv); /?/? anubrhita, mfn., increased; strengthened; ifc see upasam'-, upekkh- (^v upekkh); fpp anubrhetabba, mfn., Cp-a 297,14 (paMprami-etabb). anubhanan, / [from *anu1 + bhanati], assenting, approval, supporting; Vin II 88,33 (anuvadan anullapan ~; Sp 1194,23: anullapan ~ ti ubhayam anuvadanya vevacanamattam eva). anubhava, m. [ts], experience; Sadd69,2i (anubhavanam -o, kirn tarn, paribhunjanam). anubhavati, anubhoti, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. amWbh], experiences, enjoys, suffers; partakes of, has a share in; attains, is equal to; is able; suffices (for, dat.); Vin II 184,28* (tarn vigatabhayam sukhim asokam dev nnubhavanti dassanya) = Ud20,5*; D II 12,13 (candimasuriy ... bhya nnubhonti); A IV 151,9* (kalam pi te nnubhavanti solasim; Mp IV 7'1,5foil: solasim kalam ngghanti, solasamam bhgam na ppunanti ti attho); Th 1145 (nar ca nri ca anubhonti yam sukham); Ja VI 97,io (dibbasampattim anubhoma); Pv 10:11 (tassa kammassa kusalassa vipkam ... anubhomi); Ja VI 556, i (Maddi... mahantam dukkham -eyy ti); Ap410,23 (punnam anubhonti); 413,15 (imya manipjya anubhohi mahyasam); Mil 277,2 (evarpam sukham -ati); attham anubhavati, anubhoti, serves the interest (of); fulfils the purpose (of), benefits; Vin III 222,7 (na tarn tassa bhikkhuno kind attham anubhoti); Mill 243,22 (yass yass ca pilandhanavikatiy kankhati... tarn c' assaattham anubhoti); AI 61,7 (samatho ca ... bhvito kam attham anubhoti); Ja I 345,23 (tassa tarn vibhavajtam n' eva puttadrdlnam na samanabrhmannam attham anubhoti); fut. 3 sg. (a) anubhavissati, MI 197,3; (b) anubhossati, Ja I 500,19* (kattikam nnubhossati; 500,26': nnubhavissati); Ap53,6 (anubhossati sampattim); 2 sg. (a) anubhavissasi, Ja VI 335,32'; (b) anubhohisi, Thi510 (bahni ca cittadomanassni anubhohisi kmesu yutto); 1 sg. (a) anubhavissmi, Ja VI 230,6; (b) anubhavissam, Pv-a 255,29 (vedissan ti -issam); 3pl. anubhavissma, D I 129,18 (Ktadantassa brhmanassa mahyannam -issm ti); (a) anubhava(t), m/h., Cp-a 125,24 (mahdukkham -ato pi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -anto, prob. wr); (b) anubhavanta, m/(~anti)., Ja VI 122,24; Pv-a 43,18 (s mahdukkham -anti); neg. ananubhavanta, mfn., Ap-a 278,25; (c) anubhavamna, mfn., Ja V 9,23; Vism 424,26; Spk I 31,17; (d) anubhonta, m/(-onti) n., Pv 35:8 (mlvipkam anubhontiyo); JaV 9,21 (tarn petam dukkham anubhontam disv); aor. 3sg. (a)nubhi, DIU 147,10* (sukham ca khiddratiyo ca nubhi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Sadd30,6 anvabhi; Se annubhi); (b) anubhavi, Ja V 263,23 (mahantam yasam ~i); DIU 174,12* (vc sucinnaphalam anubhavi, mc); (c)anubhosi, Ja III 415,6' (attan va dukkham anubhosi ti); 3pl anubhavimsu, Jal 303,20; Mil 291,24; Mhv 10:104; absol. (a)anubhavitv, Ja IV 3,10 (dibbasampattim ~itv); neg. ananubhavitv, Ja III 299,19; (b) anubhaviyna, Pv20:5 (-iyna tarn pi);

(c)anubhutv, Pv42:2; JaV 171,5* (dibbarasnubhutva; 171,14". dibbakmagunarase ~itv); (d) anubhotv, Ap 458,29; (e) anubhotvna, Ap 580,7; pass, pr. 3 sg. (a) anubhaviyate, -iyyate, Sadd 6,34 (sampatti puggalena ~iyate paribhunjiyate); 21,30 (-iyyate); Pv-a 33,24 (attan ~iyamnam dukkham therassa pavedeti); (b) anubhyati, anubhuyyati, Sadd 21,30/0//. (anubhyate ... anubhuyyate); Vv-a74,is (punnaphalam anubhyati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anubhuyyati); Pv-a 103,7 (imam attham pet eva kira jnanti paccakkhato anubhyamnatt); 159,16 (anubhtan ti anubhyamnam may ti attho); pp (a) anubhta, mfn. [ts], experienced, suffered, enjoyed; Pv 24:17 (vipkam ... satt* eva vassasatni ~am); Thi 220 (~am te dukham aparimnam); Jal 254,1 (kirn me dukkhena ~ena); IV 327,17 (lobham nissya may idam dukkham ~am); Mil 329,26 (pubbaknam khattiynam ~ni paribhogabhandni); neg. ananubhta, mfn., not experienced; not attained; MI 329,13 (ananubhtam; Ps II 412,23: pathaviy pathavisabhvena na anubhtam appattam, kirn pana tan ti, nibbnam); Ps II 318,36 (nakkhattassa ananubhtatt); Mp II 49,17; (b) anubhavita, mfn. and n., 1. (mfn.) (i) experienced; suffered; Thi-a 173,1 (anappakam dukkham tay ~am); (ii) who has experienced, suffered; ? Mp I 36,22 (ettakam dukkharsim ~am sattam puna mahniraye pakkhipanti, Se so; Be, Ce, e~-sattam) ^ Ps IV 238,13 (Be, Ce, Se sattam; Ee anubhavitabbam); 2. (n.) experiencing; As 272,1 (paribhuttaklo viya javanassa rammanarasam klo); fpp anubhavitabba, mfn., JaV 272,33 (mahdukkhassa tt); Mil 374,2 (tatth'eva satipatthnam -am); Vism 57,4 (yena ciram ~o niraye jalita-ayopattasamphasso); caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) anubhveti, Sadd 12,7*; (b) anubhvpeti, Sadd 6,2. anubhavana, n. [from anubhavati], experiencing, enjoying, suffering; Sadd 69,21 (~am anubhavo, kim tarn, paribhunjanam); Ja VI 562,24' (imassa me dukkhassa 0, -atthya); Spk II 134,13 (-am vedan); ifc see dukkh-. anubhavita(r), m. [from anubhavati], one who experiences; Mil 290,29 (yasam v sukham v ~). anubhga, m, an additional share; Vin II 167,21 (anujnmi bhikkhave ~am pi datum; Sp 1223,s: -an ti puna aparam pi bhgam datum); Spk III 26,2i (~o atthi). anubhyissam in Ee, Se at Ja VI 302,12* (so 'ham kissnubhyissam) is prob, wr; read kissa nu bhyissam with Be, Ce. anubhava, see sv nubhva. anubhvi(n), mfn. [S. anubhvin], perceiving, knowing; ifc see sabb-. anubhsati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + bhsati1; cf S. anuVbhs], speaks after, repeats; continually speaks; Vin I 245,19 (pornam mantapadam... tad anugyanti tad -anti bhasitam -anti vcitam anuvcenti) ^ D I 104,12; Mil 345,ii (bhikkh navangam buddhavacanam ... vcenti anuvcenti bhsanti -anti); aor. 3 pl anubhsimsu, Sv 868,30 (anutthunimsu ti -imsu); pass, anubhsiyamna, mfn., Mp II 273,13 (samanubhsiyamnni ti patinissajjath' etni ditthigatni ti


evam samm ~iyamnni). anubhinna, mfn. [pp of* anu1 + bhindati; cf S. amWbhid], broken; burst through, 1 Pet 220,12 (ye ca tanujt andaj pi andak ~). anubhiramna in Ee at Mill 123,20 is wr, prob, for anuhiramna qv. anubhuyyati, pass. pr. 3 sg. o/anubhavati qv. anubhta, mfn., pp o/anubhavati qv. anubhyati,/?aw. pr. 3 sg. o/anubhavati qv. anubhoti, see sv anubhavati. anumaggam, ind. [anu1 + ace. of magga], along the road; Ja 1454,8 (~am gantv); Vism 21,6. anumagge, ind. [anu' + loc. o/magga], along the road; on the way; Ja V 201,2* (rjisayo ~e vasanti; 201,6': ~e mama assamamaggapasse vasanti); VI 513,13* (ye keci manuj enti~e patipathe) ^ Cp 1:9:32. anumaggena, ind. [anu1 + ins tr. o/magga], gradually; by and by; Ap 587,11 (~ena sambuddho yam dhammam abhinihari). anumajjati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. anuVmrj, BHS anumrjati], rubs, wipes; beats; applies (continuous) pressureconsiders thoroughly; AIV 86,14 (pnin gattni -eyysi); As 115,15 (so hi rammanam ~afi ti); (a)anumajjanta, m/(~anti)/i., SI 82,18 (rj... sallikhitagatto pnin gattni ~anto); Pj II 79,14 (rjadhitya ... -antiy); anumajjanta in Ee at Vism 143,4 is wr for anumajjana qv; (b) anumajjamna, mfn., Vism 147,7; aor. 3 sg. (a) anumajji, Sv276,n; (b) anumajjatha, Ja VI 548,8* (latya hatthe bandhitv latya ~atha); absol. anumajjitv, AIV 86,17 (udakena akkhini ~itv); pass, anumajjiyanta, mfn., being beaten; Mil 275,9 (putte ... tena brhmanena latya ~ante disv); fpp anumajjitabba, mfn., Ps IV 48,4; see also anomajjati. anumajjana, n. and mfn.. [from anumajjati], 1. (n.) continuous pressure; sustained thought; Sv 122,1 (-vasena pavatto vicro); Patis-a20,i (samm masane ~e pekkhane nnam); 2. (mfn.) continuously pressing; Vism 143,4 (mandalam karontassa majjhe sannirumbhitv thitakantako viya abhiniropano vitakko bahi paribbhamanakantako viya ~o vicro, Be, Se so; Ee wr anumajjanto; Ce anumajjamno) = As 115,26. anumajjha, mfn. [BHS anumadhya], being a medium amount; Ja V 387,19* (appamh ... ~ato ... bahumh ...). anumajjham, ind. [anu' + ace. o/majjha], in the middle; taking a middle course; Ja IV 192,17* (etam ca ubhayam natv ~am samcare). anumaflflati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWman], assents to; approves; gives leave; Th 72 (~a mam pabbajito 'mhi dni); JaV 324,23* (~antu me vaco); 343,2* (api no ~asi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ~si; 343,4': api no anujneyysi); Ap 534,io (tena nibbtum icchmi ~atha puttak); Pj II 582,11 (anujnhi ti ~hi saddahhi); anumanneyyam in Ee, Se at Mil 158,25,30 is wr for anuniieyyam^v sv anujnti; pp anumata, mfn. and n. [ts], 1. (mfn.) (i) approved, consented to; permitted; VinV 163,9 (sanghena ~ena puggalena anuvijjakena anuvijjitukmena na upajjhyo pucchitabbo); D I 99,12 (gth ... ~ may pi); Ja V 340,7* (gacch' evnumato may); Mil 185,20

(sabbesam mahrja tathagatanam ~am etam); neg. ananumata, mfn., Pv-a64,8 (nnunnto ti ananumato); (ii) approving; consenting to; Mil275,2 (bhariy ... ~ hoti); 2. (n.) consent, permission; Mil 275,1 (api nu kho bhante te tesam ~ena denti ti); caus. absol. anumnetv, having obtained permission (from); Ap612,n (setthim tato 'numnetv pabbajim anagriyam). anumata, mfn., pp o/anumannati qv. anumati, / [ts], approval; consent; permission; Mil 186,14 (na so tathagatanam ~iy ghtiyati); Sp 1195,5 (samaggassa sanghassa ~iy ... kattabbakammam); Ps II 335.4 (tarn kim mannatha bhikkhave rpam niccam v aniccam v ti, aniccam bhante ti evarp pana ~im gahetva... pucch -pucch nma); Pj I 92,18 (bhikkhnam ~iy uccinitena tena yasmat); Sadd815,i (~iyam parikappe... etesv atthesu sattami vibhatti hoti); 0 -kappa, m., the practice of carrying out a formal act without a quorum, intending to ratify it later; Vin II 294,6(kappati -0); 301,1; Dip 4:52; -pakkha, m., a consenting party; D 1137,12 (cattro ~; Sv 297,30: ~ ti anumatiy pakkh anumatidyak ti attho). anumatta, see anumatta .yv anu. anumarati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWmr], follows in death; SpkII 266,3 (tarn anumiyati ti tarn anusayitam rpam marantena anusayena ~ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anusarati); 266.5 (yam anumiyati ti yam rpam yena anusayena ~ati). anumasati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVmrg], touches; takes hold of (to examine); considers, examines; aor. 3 sg. anumasi, D I 106,12 (bhagav jivham ninnmetv ubho pi kannasotni ~i patimasi) = MII 135,17; absol. anumassa, anumssa, examining each point; point by point; MI 146,10(anumassa anumassa vannam bhsanti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anumssa; Ps II 148,3 foil.: dasa kathvatthni anupavisitv anupavisitv); 150,14 (gambhir gambhir panh anumassa anumassa vykat, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anumssa). anumna, n. [ts], inference; drawing a conclusion; logical consideration; A b h l l 9 1 ; Mil 330,14 (imin -na ntabbam); Sp 637, is (yasm nando ~ena pi jnti); Ps III 352,17 (anvayo ~am anubuddhi ti attho); Saddh 74 (~ena vediyam); see also anuminti. anumnika, mfn. [from anumna], arising from inference or conjecture; It-al 141,20 (tarn ca nnam na ~am samsaybhvato). anumnetv, caus. absol. o/anumannati qv. anumssa, absol. of anumasati qv. anumitta, m. [anu1 + mitta], a (mere) acquaintance; JaV 77,18* (nnumitto garurn attharn guyham vedetum arahati; 78,20': anuvattanamattena yo mitto na hadayena). anuminti, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. amWm], measures after or in accordance with; draws an inference, concludes; anuminanta, mfn., Pv-a227,21 (dhammam sutv tadanusrena nayam nento ~anto); pp anumita, mfn., inferred; Pet 152,19 (yni kalankajhyino padni tni ~ni patipakkhe, Ce so; Be, Ee anudhitni; Nnamoli, 1979, p. 208: anutthitabbni); fpp (a) anuminitabba, mfn., MI 97,18 (bhikkhun attan va attnam evam ~am; Ps II 67,2: evam ~an ti evam


attan va att anumetabbo tuletabbo tiretabbo); Pet 10,3 (gthhi gth ~); 61,3 (evam gthsu -am); (b) anumetabba, mfn.9 Ps II 67,3; (c) anumeyya, mfn.9 Sadd 709,16; pass. pr. 3 sg. anumiyati, S III 36,\9 foil, (yam kho bhikkhu anuseti tarn ~ati yarn -ati tena sankham gacchati); Pet 86,13 (-ati); see also anumna. anumetabba, mfn., fpp o/anuminati qv. anumeyya, mfn., fpp ofanuminti qv. anumodaka, mfn. [cfS. anumodaka], who gives thanks; who gives approval; VinV 172,8 (atthatam hoti kathinam atthrakassa ca -assa ca); Sp 1283,9; Mp I 222,i2(~assa bhikkhuno); ananumodaka, mfn., who does not give thanks; who does not give approval; Vin V 172,5 (anatthrakassa ca -assa ca). anumodati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWmud], rejoices in, approves; thanks; gives thanks (esp. with a benediction or discourse, see anumodana); Vin II 212,9 (bhikkh bhattagge na -anti); Mil 139,14 (so bhuttvi -ati); A I 186,12 (aham -issmi ti); Sn543 (mahvirassa bhsato sabbe dev -anti); Pv 5:4 (iitipet samgat pahte annapnamhi sakkaccam -are); Ja VI 567,13* (-hi me Maddi puttake dnam uttamam); 572,21* (pita mam -eyya ito pattam sakam gharam); Ap 94,4 (-issare dev sampatte kusale bhave); (a) anumoda(t), mfn., Ap 194,18 (devnam -atam); Sp 1283,17 (tassa -ato); (b) ammiodanta, m/(~anti)n., MII 140,17 (addasma [Gotamam] bhuttvim -antam); Ja IV 420,5 (mtapitaro -ant); VI 568,1 (Maddi... dnam -anti); (c) anumodamna, mfn., Dhp 177 (dhlro ca dnam -amno); Sn 403 (pasannacitto -amno); JaV 151,8*; aor. 3 sg (a) anumodi, S II 54,16 (bhagav pathamam panham ~i); Th483; JaIV 21,10 (brhmano... tassa partim adsi so -i); (b) anumodittha, Ja VI 484,2* (Phusatiy varam datv -ittha Vsavo); Ap59,2o; 1 sg. anumodim, Vv 44:8 (tattha ppasann aham anumodim, mc); Ap 580,19; 3 pl. (a) anumodimsu, SI 223,6 (bhsitaya ... Vepacittin asurindena gthya asur -imsu dev tunhi ahesum); Ap 299,26; (b) anumodisum, Cp 3:6:12; absol (a) anumoditv, Vin I 222,1 (bhagav tarn brhmanam imhi gthhi -itv); D II 76,9 (bhagavato bhsitam abhinanditv-itv); Ap 160,15; JaV 412,6'; (b) anumodiyna, JaV 143,9* (subhsitam te ~iyna, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -iynam; 143,16': tava subhsitam -itv); pp anumodita, mfn. [ts], 1. approved; appreciated; received gratefully; Spk II 62,35 (tena tarn vykaranam -an ti); Pv-a77,n (pniyam dinnam -am); 2 . pleased, grateful; Ap-a322,35 (-0 nisamsam kathesi ti); fpp anumoditabba, mfn. and n. impers., to be approved; thanks are to be given; approval is to be given; Vin II 212,17 (kena nu kho bhattagge -itabban ti); D III 129,25 (sdh ti bhsitam abhinanditabbam -am); A l l 35,30 (sace me... -am anumodatu me bhavam Gotamo); Sp 1109,21 (itarehi ca -itabbam); caus. pr. 3 sg(3.) anumodeti, approves, gives thanks; Kv 347,21 (peto attano atthya dnam dentam -enti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -anti); anumodenta, mfn., Vism 93,14 (so tesam -ento dhammam desento); (b) anumodpeti, makes approve; seeks

approval; Vv-a 121,5 (-essmi ti visssena gahetv); aor. 3 sg. anumodpesi; Cp-a94,n (attano puttadnarn tarn -esi); absol. anumodpetv, Th-al 138,28 (kutiparibhogam -etv); fpp anumodpetabba, mfn., Sp 1109,2i; see also anumodaniya. anumodana, n., - i , / [S. anumodana; BHS anumodana], approval, assent; thanks, expression of appreciation (esp. in the form of a discourse by bhikkhuy after receiving a meal or gifts); VinV 177,30 (sahghassa -ya ganassa -ya... atthatam hoti kathinam); MII 139,13 (na ca -assa klam atinmeti); Ja I 316, is (tisso - ugganhitv); IV 401,13 (sabbaparikkhre datv -am yci); VI 127,6* (pavis' etenarjisi devnam -am; 127,12': yattha dev annamannam anumodant acchanti tarn thnam devnam -am pavisa); Ap 272,17 (satth ak me -am); Mil 16,6 (yasm Ngaseno tass mah-upsikya gambhirya abhidhammakathya ... -am aksi); Dhp-a III 188,2 (na me tumhehi dnnucchavik -a kat ti); Vv-a 40,20 (tass itthiy pniyadne -am vatv); Pv-a 27,8 (attano -ena); Sadd 898,7 (evam etam iti ' -atthe); see also anumodaniya. anumodaniya, anumodaniya, n. [fpp of anumodati, or from anumodana qv], thanks; expression of appreciation; A III 50,16 (bhagav... imin -ena anumodi); Ap 394,18 (pahinadaratho buddho -am ak). anumodita(r), m. [from anumodati], one who rejoices in, one who approves; D i l i 161,21*; Cp-a311,3o (upakre anussarit punnni -). anuygi(n), mfn. [from *anu' + yajati], offering after the example of another; D I 142,15 (rj... mahyannam yajati hand' assa mayam -ino hom ti). *anuyacati, pr. 3 sg. [ami1 + ycati], requests; aor. 1 sg. anuyc[im], Cp 3:1:2 (mtpitu ca vanditv pabbajjam anuyc' aham). anuyti, anuyyati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWy], goes after, follows; goes along through; D III 200,4* (~anti disodisam); Ja VI 22,27* (sabb va -tha mam); 49,16* (kad ssu... yantam mam nnuyissanti; 52,12': ekakam eva gacchantam mam kad nu te nnugamissanti); 144, n* (maggam-anti); 397,4* (Panclam anuyyanti); Bv2:47 (ubho pi te panjalik -anti tathgatam); Mil 391,26 (cakkavatti divase divase ... mahpathavim anuyyati); anuyanta, mfn. and m., following; a follower, a vassal; S III 156,18 (ye keci kuddarjno sabbe teranno cakkavattissa -ant bhavanti) = A V 22,9; A HI 149,29 (khattiyesu -antesu); Sn 553 (khattiy bhojarjno -ant bhavanti te, Be Se so; Ce, Ee anuyutt) = Th823; Sv 864,5 (-ant ti vasavattino, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee anuyutt ti; Sv-ptIII 50,n: anuyanti ti -ant anuvattak ten* ha vasavattino, Ee so; Be anuyanti ti anuyant, anuyant eva nuyant anuvattak); aor. 3 pl. annuyyum [< *anvayyum ?], Ja VI 223, is* (tarn annuyyum bahavo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anuyyimsu); absol. anuyyitv, DII 174,22 (rj... samuddapariyantam pathavim anuyyitv, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anusamsyitv); 175,6 {Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anusyitv); pp anuyta, mfn. [ts], followed; Sil 105,37 (passeyya purnam maggam purnaiijasam pubbakehi manussehi -am); It 29 1 * (esa maggo mahattehi -o mahesino); Mil217,12 (maggam...


pubbakehi sammsambuddhehi -am). anuyyana, n. [from anuyyati qv sv anuyti], going along through', Spklll 154,6 (purebhattam eva sgarapariyantam pathavim -samatthassa vehsahgamassa hatthiratanassa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anupariyyana-; * Sv444,i7: Be, Ee anusamyyana-; Ce anusamsarana-; Se anupariyyana-). anuyyi(n), mfn. and m. [S. anuyyin], going after, following; subject (to); a follower; Ja VI 310,6* (kathan nu ytam ~i hoti); Mil 284, M (brhmanass' eva -ino hoth ti); ifc see yta-; annuyyi(n) (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., not following, remaining firm; not subject (to); Sn 1071 (titthe nu so tattha -I). anuyufljati, anuyunjiyati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. anuVyuj], I.practises, gives oneself up to; Vin I 194,33 (ingha tvam Sona tatth' eva agrikabhto buddhnam ssanam -a); V 158,15* (-assu); MII 105, n* (pamdam-anti bl); 111230,9 (na kmasukham -eyya); SI 232,28* (dhammadassanam ~etha medhvi); AII 40,28* (jgariyam ~ati); Dhp 247 (siirmerayapnam ca yo naro -ati); Th 884 (m pamdam-etna); Jail 96,7 (patisallnam -anti); Pet36,24 (visesabhgiyam patipadam anuyunjiyati); Mil25,2i (ko bhvanam -ati); Sp 467,27 (kammatthanam eva -issmi ti); Vibh-a 199,22* (~e sad sato); 2. questions, examines; calls to account; Vin I 86,28 (inghvuso Upli imam pabbajitam ~hi ti); III 163,i (tena hi bhikkhave Mettiyam bhikkhunim nasetha ime ca bhikkh -ath ti); Vv 48:5 (sassu ca pacch -ate mamam); (a)anuyunja(t), m/n., SI 122,20* (ahorattam -am); Vism 285,5 (~ato); (b) anuyunjanta, m/(-anti)H., Vism 248,25 (kammatthanam -antena); Thi-al55,n (-antiy); neg. ananuyunjanta, mfn., Th-al 218,21; aor. 3 sg. anuyunji, Ja HI 513,14 (raja punappuna mnavam ~i); / sg. (a) anuyunjim, Th-aII 33,5; (b) anuyunjisam, Th 157 (mandanam -isam; Ih-aII 33,4: -isan ti ~im); 3 pi. anuyunjimsu, Vin HI 167,23 (te bhikkh Mettiyabhummajake bhikkh ~imsu); absol. anuyunjitv, Dhp-a III 472,17 (kammatthanam ~itv); Ap-a 506,2 (Mettiyabhmajake bhikkh ~itv); Mhv23:63; neg. ananuyunjitv, Jail 151,4 (asubhabhvanam ananuyunjitv rpapasamsak hutv, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ~itv, prob, wr); Ps III 312,1; p a s s , anuyunjiyamna, mfn., being questioned; Vin I 86,29 (so ... yasmat Uplin~iyamno); 171,12 (avyatto na patibalo ~iyamno anuyogam dtun ti); Thi 404 (evam -iyamn, Be, Ce, Se so, but unmetrical; Ee wr anuyunjamn; read anuyujjamn with CPD1 Thi-a245,22: -iyamn ti pucchiyamn); Pv-a 192,2; pp anuyutta, mfn. and m. [BHS anuyukta], 1. (mfn.) applying oneself to, practising; intent upon; Vin III 23,is (bodhipakkhiknam dhammnam bhvannuyogam ~ vihareyyma); D I 167,5 (kesamassulocannuyogam -o); A l l 205,27 attaparitpannuyogam -o); Sn8!4 (methunam ~assa); Thi 403 (nekkhammam ~); Ja III 450,6 (kmesu ~assa mahjanassa dhammam desento); Ap80,i (vivekam ~o 'ham); Dhp-a III 324,9 (jgariyam tya); ifc see jnana-; neg. ananuyutta, mfn., MI 471,12 (jgariyam ananuyutto); S III 153,3; Ja 1428,15;

2. (mfn.) [S. anuyukta], questioned; JaV 462,3' (senpatin ~o mus vattum asakkonto, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anuyunjito); 3. (mfn. and m.) following, attending on; subject to; a vassal or subordinate king; D II 173,i3(patirjno teranno Mahsudassanassa ~ ahesum, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anuyant); S I 58,20 (khattiy ~, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anuyant); A I 109,33 (rj cakkavatti... dharnmikam rakkhvaranguttim samvidahati khattiyesu ~esu balakyasmim, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anuyantesu); Sn 553 (khattiy bhojarjno ~ bhavanti te, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anuyant); JaV 317,19* (tato ekasatam khatte -e bhavam ak, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anuyante); Mil 202,17 (yvat Jambudipe padesarjno te sabbe -e aksi); fpp anuyunjitabba, mfn., Vism 285,4 (kammatthanam anuyunjitabbam); Sv 888,2 (anuyunjitabbato anuyogo). anuyujjana in Ee at Vv-a 346,17 is wrfor anuyunjana qv. anuyufijana, n. (and -, f.) [from anuyunjati], application; devotion (to); Vv-a 346,17 (dhammnuyogan ti dndikusaladhammassa ~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuyujjanam); Nidd-al 188,28 (anuyogo ti -am); ananuyuftjana, n., lack of application; MpIV 31,8 (ananuyoge ti yogassa ~e); Th-al 231,2 (satthu ssanassa ~ato eva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuyunjanato); Vibh-a 469,2 (-am); ifc see sadattha-m-. anuyoga, m. [BHS id.], 1. application; devotion (to); Abh 797; D I 13,12 (tappam anvya padhnam anvya -amanvya);MI 101,13(cittamna namati tappya -ya; PsII 68,19: ~y ti punappuna yogya); A V 136,25 (-0 paccavekkhan dhammnam hro); ifc see kmasukhallika-, jgariy-, bhvan-, mandan-, sukhallika-; 2. question, enquiry; examination; Abh 115; anuyogam dadti, answers the question (satisfactorily), passes an examination; Vin I 171,13 (avyatto na patibalo anuyunjiyamno -am dtun ti); V 127,38 (cath' arigehi samanngatassa bhikkhuno -o na dtabbo); Jail 260,11 (te... nitthitasipp sippe -am datv); III415,n (so cariyassa -am datv); Mil 348,21 (katamena te pariyyena -am dammi ti); -kkhama, mfn., which can stand scrutiny; who is fit to be questioned; MI 385,19 (niganthnam vdo ... no ~o no vimajjanakkhamo; Ps III 95,17: anuyogam vimamsam v na khamati); Spklll 209,9 (-0 'yan ti fiatv); neg. ananuyogakkhama, mfn., Vin I 176,19 (gilno ca ananuyogakkhamo vutto bhagavat); Th-a III 46,4 (ananuyogakkhamatt); -bhaya, n., fear of interrogation; D I 26,30 (- anuyogaparijegucch n' ev* idam kusalan ti vykaroti); Ja III 359,16 (bhagavato bhito); -va(t), mfn., applying oneself to; devoted to; Pv-a207,13 (satatam sabbaklam -vanto); -vatta, ., procedure in examination; VinV 158,12* (-am nismaya kusalena buddhimat katam); Mp II228,12 (samanuyurljati ti -am ropento pucchati); ananuyoga, m., lack of application; the not devoting oneself (to); Mill 231,1; A I 14,11 (-0 kusalnam dhammnam); Vibh 350,27 (-0 pamdo). anuyogi(n), mfn. [BHS anuyogin], applying oneself to; devoted to; ifc see atta- (sv atta[n]), satata-. anuyojana, n., combining with; ifc .see sahajta-. anuyojetv in eds at Spkl 306,25 and in Ce, Ee at


Dhp-a IV 20,6 is wrfor anuyyojetv qv sv uyyunjati. anuyyutam, ind. [a3 + uyyuta or a3 + u(d) + yuta (or mc for anuyyutta)], idly, without diligence or perseverance; or not irrelevantly; to the point; VinI 359,8 (na cchambhati parisagato na vedhati attharn na hpeti -am bhanam; Sp 1153,8^0//.: -am bhanan ti anuyyuttam anupagatam bhananto, yasm hi so anuyyuttam bhanati usuyyya v agatigamanavasena v kran apagatam na bhanati, tasm attham na hpeti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anunnatam anapagatam bhananto). anurakkhaka, mfn. [from anurakkhati], guarding, preserving; ifc see vams-. anurakkhana, anurakkhana, n., - , / [S. anuraksana; BHS anuraksana], guarding, preservation, taking care of; AII 17,8* (samvaro ca pahnam ca bhvan -); Ja V 116,20* (aladdhassa ca yo lbho laddhassa -); 117,17' (uppannassa [lbhassa] pana -am eva bhro); Sp288,i7 (anudday ti-a); Mp III 104,23 (tesarn yeva '-atthya padhnam anurakkhanapadhnam); ifc see indriy-, sacca-, saddhamm-. anurakkhati,pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVraks], protects, guards; preserves; takes care of; D III 35,7 (yo ca te ayam mayi pasdo tarn eva tvam sdhukam - ti); 226,29 (uppannam bhaddakam samdhinimittam ~ati); Mil 171,9 (kittvat saccam ~ati); III 239,H (~eyya); AIV 93,2* (mt va puttam -ate patim); Dhp 327 (sacittam -atha); Sn 149 (mt yath... ekaputtam ~Q); JaV 117,so' (tava uppannam yasam ~hi ti); fut 3 sg. anurakkhissate, Ap 588,20 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anurakkhiyate); 1 sg- ( a ) anurakkhissam, Cp 2:4:11 (silnurakkhissam); (b) anurakkhissmi, D III 35,12; Mil 93,29 (yvham jivissmi tva guyham -issmi); (a) anurakkha(t), mfn., MII 171,5 (saccam -at... vinnun purisena); (b) anurakkhanta, m/(~anti)n., VinV 3,24* (ssanam -anto); Ja I 46,22* (saccavcam -anto); VI 33,27 (-anti); Cp 2:6:11; (c) anurakkhamna, mfn., Vv 11:5 (mt va puttam -amn); Ja IV 251,4* (-amn); aor. 1 sg. (a) anurakkhim, Ja III 116,23; Cp 2:6:12 (-im mama silam nrakkhim mama jlvitam); (b) anurakkhisam, Cp/?. 23,5* (silni -isam, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -issam, unmetrical; Q)-a 181,21: silni -im); absol. anurakkhitv, Cp-a275,io (saccavcam -itv); pp anurakkhita, mfn., guarded, protected; JaV 400,2' (taynugutto ti tay -o); Ps III 400,12 (evam assa saddh - bhavissati ti); fpp (a) anurakkhitabba, mfn., A III 6,19; Mil 91,i (kyikam vcasikam anurakkhitabbam); (b) anurakkhiya, mfn.; ifc see dur-. anurakkhamnaka, mfn. [ of anurakkhati + ka2], guarding; preserving; Vism 36,3* (tath' eva silam -) = Saddh621. anurakkh,/ [BHS anuraksa], guarding; preservation; S IV 323,22 (anudayam vanneti -am vanneti anukampam vanneti); ifc see atta- (sv atta[n]), kula-. anurakkhi(n), mfn. [from anurakkhati], guarding; preserving; Mil 93,28 (guyham -1 cham); ifc see atta- (JV atta[n]), citta-, vca-, sacca-. *anurafljati1,/?r. 3 sg. [ami + ranjati1; cfS. anuVranj], is attached or devoted to; glows, shines; anuranjanta, mfn., Ap 495,27 (pabhhi -anto, Be,

Ee, Se so; Ce -ento; Ap-a530,is: so Padumuttaro bhagav nilapitdichabbannappabhahi ramsihi -anto jalanto sobhamno ti attho); part.perf act. anurattava(t), mfn., who has become devoted to; Thi-a 246,14 (anurattan ti -antim); ? pp anuratta, mfn. [S. anurakta], attached or devoted to; fond of; ThI 446 (bhariy silavati... - bhattram); Ja VI 297,29* (silav ca alolo ca -0 ca rjino, Ce, Ee so; Be anurakkho; Se anuvatto); Mil 146,23 (mahmatt ... - laddhayas visssik, Ce, Ee so; Be anurakkh; Se anuraddh); caus. pp anurafijita, mfn., brightened, beautified; Ja I 12,25 (dasabalassa... asitiy anuvyanjanehi -am... attabhvam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anuvyanjitam) = Ap-a 14,29 * Bv-a 87,15 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anuvyanjitam); Bv-a 45,30 (vymappabhnuranjitan ti vymappabhya -am, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee parirafijitam); ifc see kiles-, vymapabh-, sanjhtap -, sanjhapabh -. anurafijati2, pr. 3 sg. [?], asks for; aor. 3 sg. anuranjatha, Ap 505,n (candano devaputto mam upagantv 'nuranjatha, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be upagantv 'nupucchatha; Ce upagantvna 'pucchatha; Se upagantv apucchatha). anuratta, mfn., pp 0/anuranjati' qv. anuratham, ind. [ts], behind the carriage; Sadd747,2i (rathassa pacch-am); 883,18 (anusaddo... pacchtthe -am). anurava, m. [from anuravati, or anu1 + rava], resounding; reverberation; Sp 144,22 (-0 viya anuppabandho vicro, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anurvo, perhaps wr); Cp-a 233,29 (dhama dhamti evam saddam karonto, -dassanam h* etam dvaggino). anuravati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + ravati; cf BHS anuravita], sounds after; resounds; Mil 63,1 (kamsathlam kotitam pacch -ati anusandahati); As 114,23 (bheri kotit atha pacch -ati anusaddyati). anuravan, / [from anuravati; cf BHS -anuravana], resounding; Mil 63,2 (yath - evam vicro datthabbo); As 114,24 (yath pacch - anusaddyan evam vicro datthabbo). anuraho, ind. [cf S. anurahasam], in secret, in private; MI 27,19 (-0 mam bhikkh codeyyum no sanghamajjhe). anurga, m. [ts], affection; Bv-a229,20 (anurga-mupagatahadayam ca parijanam tinanalam iva pariccajitv); -va(t), mfn. [S. anurgavat], affectionate towards, in love with; Thi-a 249,7 (anuratta bhattaran ti bhattram -vati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se anuvattik). anurja(n), m. [anu1 + rja(n)], a viceroy; Sadd 347,25* (muddhbhisitto - uparj ti bhsito). anurdh, / [ts], the name of a nakkhatta, the seventeenth lunar mansion; Abh 59; Sadd359,i9. anurva, m. [from anuravati], resounding; reverberation; Sp 144,22 (-0 viya anuppabandho vicro, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se anuravo). anurujjhati,/?r. 3 sg. [S. anurudhyate], approves (of); is pleased or content (with, ace); Sadd 485,7 (~ati panltam panltam vatthum kmen" ti Anuruddho); A IV 158,23 (uppannam labham -ati albhe pativirujjhati); Dhp-a II 181,17 (sakkram ca asakkram ca karontesu n' eva-ati no virujjhati); As 362,28 (~ati ti anurodho);


pp anuruddha, mfn. [ts], compliant; pleased with, approving', pativiruddha, mfn., approving and rejecting', MI 65,7 (nitth patiruddhassa udhu ananuruddha-appatiruddhass ti; Ps II 10,13: rgena anuruddhassa kodhena pativiruddhassa); neg. ananuruddha, annuruddha (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., not pleased with; not complying with; MI 65,8 (ananuruddha-appatiruddhass ti); S IV 71,16* (annuruddho aviruddha kenaci; Spkll 382, I: kenaci saddhim n'eva anuruddho na viruddho bhaveyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kenaci saddhim aruddho, prob. wr). anuruddha, m/h.,p/7o/anurujjhati qv. anurpa, mfn. [ts], conforming, corresponding, suitable, fitting; adapted to, like; Ja I 91,26 (attano -am vadanto); Vism 76,5 (pasamsya -t); 89,29 (ananurpam vihram pahya -e vihre viharantena); Sp 162,13 (etassa me padhnnuyogassa -am eva phalam laddhan ti); Sv 918, n (atthuppattiy -tt); Dhp-a III 67,19 (Mahmoggallnena ... ~am eva maranam pattan ti); Nidd-a 1407,21 (na idam tuyham jtiy srabhvassa -an ti); Mhv 23:72 (ayam rohako mama-oti); -am, adv., conformably, according to; Sadd 747,22 (rpassa yoggam -am, rpayoggan ti attho); ifc see ajjhsay-, tad-, yatha-, vibhav-; ananurpa, mfn., unsuitable, not fitting; Ja VI 553,6' (dnam datv pacch anutpo nma tava -0 ti); Vism 89,29; Ps I 204,28 (imassa pana panhassa tt). anurpik, (m)f[n)., or anurpika, mfn. [anurpa + ka2, or + ika], conforming; suitable; ifc see tad-. anurodati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWrud], cries for; Pv 12:7 (yath pi drako candam gacchantam -ati) = Ja III 166,17* (166,27': candam me dehi ti punappuna rodati). anurodha, m. [ts], compliance, consideration, liking; Abh 345; S IV 210,17* (tassnurodh atha v virodh); Dhs 1059 (srgo anunayo -o nandi); As 362,29 (anuruijhati ti ~o); Sadd 485,8 (-0 ti anuklat); -virodha, m., compliance and opposition; liking and dislike; MI 266,27 (evam -am sampanno; Ps II 311,io: -an tirgam c'eva dosam ca); SI 111,21* (-ehi vippamutto tathagato); Nidd I 168,2; ananurodha in Ee at Ud-a 30,25,27 is prob, wr for anavarodho (Be, Ce, Se so). anulagga, mfn. [S. anulagna], attached to, followed; Ud-a 219,27 (anvsatt ti - vokinn). anulpa, m. [ts], repetition, tautology; Abh 123. anulrik, (m)f(n). [a3 + ulra + ka2 or ika], minor; lesser; Mhv 34:59 (pj ca -a). anulimpati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVlip], anoints, besmears; anoints oneself; anoints with; plasters', Mil 112,5 (bhesajjena -an); aor. I sg. anulimpim, Ap 323,10 (klnusrikam gayha -im tathgatam); 349,1 (phalam buddhassa datvna agalum anulimp' aham); absol. anulimpitv, Ap 424,17 (candanam -itv); Cp 3:6:14 (nhpetv -itv vethetv rjavethanam); Sv 376,9 (gandhehi -itv); Vism 354,26 (mamsam atthisanghtam -itv thitam); pp anulitta, mfn. [S. anulipta], anointed; smeared; plastered; smeared on to; JaV 323,9* (- candanena); Mil 333,9 (sila-

gandhena -); Pj I 41,1 foil, (na pi bhitti jnti aham thlamattikya - ti... na pi atthisatattayam jnti aham navapesisatappabhedena mamsena -an ti); 47,14* (navapesisat mams - kalebaram; * Pj II 247,12*: avalitt); fpp (a) anulimpitabba, mfn., Mil 394,25 (mettbhesajjena mnasam-am); (b) anulepaniya, mfn., Mil 169,12 (-am anulimpeti); caus. pr. 3 sg. anulimpeti, -ayati, anoints; causes to be anointed; Mil 169,12 (anulepaniyam -eti); 252,26 (bhikkh te sadevakam lokam silavaracandanagandhena -ayanti ti). anulimpana, n. [from anulimpati], smearing, anointing; ifc see bhesajj-. anulepa, m. [ts], anointing; plastering; Ap 251,20 (nitthite navakamme ca -am ads' aham; Ap-a 476,12 foil.: anu pacch sudhlepam adsim, sudhya leppesin ti attho); ifc see bhesajjapn-. anulepana, n. [ts], anointing; plastering; anulepana in Ce, Ee at Th-all 21S,32foll. is wr for anupalepa qv ^vupalepa; -gandha, m., a fragrant substance for anoin ting; Thp 184,28 (-am ... ngabhavanato ngarjno haranti; = Sp 42,19: anuvilepanagandham); -mattik,/, clay for plastering; plaster; Ps II 229,8 (mattikan ti -am). anulepaniya, mfn., fpp of anulimpati qv. anuloki(n), mfn. [from anu1 + Vlok], looking at; ifc see sisa-. anulokika, mfn. [from anu1 + Vlok], looking at; ifc seesisz-. anulokenti, (m)f(n). [ 0/anu 1 + Vlok], looking at; Sp 937,14 (pavisantinam bhikkhuninam sisam -enti pavisati). anuloma, w/(-i?)., n. and m., 1. (i) (mfn.) [ts], "with the hair", in a natural direction or order; suitable, fit; in accordance with; S IV 401,5 (ahamc* nanda ... atth' att ti vykareyyam api nu me tarn -am abhavissa nnassa uppdya sabbe dhamm anatt ti); Nidd I 132,20 (etam patirpam etam anucchavikam etam -am); Patis II 37,13 (katame ajjhattavutthnnam - cattro vimokkh); Sp 1104,ii (bhagavat cha civarni anunntni dhammasahghakattherehi tesam -ni... aparni cha anunntni); Pj II123,14 (tesam dhammnam -0 dhammo ti anudhammo); Cp-a299,27 (-iyarn khantiyam thito; ^ Ud-a 141,12: anulomikyakhantiyam); am, adv., in a natural order; forwards; D II 71,19 (ime attha vimokhe -am pi sampajjati patilomam pi sampajjati); Th 1172 (yo so attha vimokkhni... aphassayi -am patilomam); ()(., seil. [javana]citta), conformity consciousness or thought-moment (the stage before gotrabh^); Vism 138,3 (ito pubbe parikammnam upari appanya ca anulomanato -ni ti pi vuccanti); 670,2 (uppajjati tetiyam javanacittam yam -an ti vuccati); Sp 429,26/0//. (cattri panca v javanni javanti yesam pathamam parikammam dutiyam upaeram tatiyam -am catuttham gotrabh pancamam appancittam, pathamam v parikammam c'eva upaeram ca dutiyam -am...); Ud-a 33,25 (yad dve v -ni tad tatiyam gotrabh catuttham maggacittam); Pj II 9,9; As 233,9 (-am sankhrrammanam hoti gotrabh nibbnrammanam); 2. (n.m.) direct order, natural order; conformity, affirmation; VinV 158,11*


(sutte vinaye v ~e; Sp 1360,9: ~o nma parivro); Sp 953,13 (avijjpaccay sankhr ti din nayena vutto avijjdiko paccaykaro attano kattabbakiccakaranato ~o ti vuccati) = Ud-a38,i; Yam 365,5 (~am nitthitam); ifc .yeesacc-; -patiloma, mfn., in direct and reversed order, forwards and backwards', Sp 953,20 (~-t); ace. ~am, ins tr. ~ena, adv., Vin I 1,10 (paticcasamuppdam ~am manasksi); AIV 448,9 (im nava anupubbavihrasampattiyo na evam -am sampajjim); Ja IV 318,25 (chasu kmasaggesu ~ena mahantam devissariyam anubhavant); 475,6 (~amchasu devalokesu sampattim anubhavant); Mil 176,25 (~am); annuloma (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., unsuitable; Dil273,11*. anulomana, n. [ts], being in accordance with; conformity; Vism 138,3 (~ato anulomni ti pi vuccanti); Ud-a 38,2 (pavattiy v ~ato). anulomika, mfn. and n. [BHS id.], I. (mfn.) suitableagreeable; in accordance (with, gen.); AII 27,13* (dhamma akkht smanriassnulomik); III 441,23 (~ya khantiy samanngato); MI 477,15 (ime yasmanto ~ni sensanni patisevamn); Patisl 123,17 (~ khanti patiladdh hoti; Patis-a 397,17: lokuttaradhammnam anulomato ~ khanu" tinnam); Ud-a 141,12 (ayam ~ya khantiyam thito; * Cp-a299,27: anulomiyam); ifc see tad-; 2. (n.) conformity; that which accords; Vin V 158,n* (sutte vinaye anulome panfiatte ~e; Sp 1360,10: -am nma cattro mahpades); ananulomika, ananulomiya, mfn., improper; unsuitable; not in accordance (with); Vin I 322,1 (bhikkhu... gihisamsattho viharati ~ehi gihisamsaggehi); III 20,19 (~am appatirOpam assmanakam akappiyam akaraniyam); A I 106,6 (~e kyakamme samdapeti); 111258,6 (~ena gihisamsaggena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anulomikena; Mp III 330,15: -na ti ssanassa ananucchavikena); Mil 266,22 (yam loke atthi samannam ananucchavikam -am); Sp 219,29 (~-tt); Pj I 243,io (~-gihisamsaggavasena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ananulomiya-); see also anulomika. anulometi, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. anulomayati], bends with; conforms to, is in accordance (with, ace. or gen.); sets right, puts in proper order; Vin I 221,25 (ygu pit... vtam ~eti); 250,35 (tarn ee akappiyam ~eti kappiyam patibhati); A I 69,29 (suggahitehi suttantehi vyanjanapatirpakehi attham ca dhammam ca -enti); Mil 372,6 (vamso yattha vto tattha ~eti); Sp 219,28 (ananulomikam tesam [dhammnam] na -eti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ananulometi, prob, wr); Sv 67,2 (bhagavato hi vcya kyo ~eti kyassa pi vc); Mp II 172,8 (ssanassa na ~etl ti ananulomikam); Patis-a 697,23 (vipassanannam eva lokuttaramaggam ~eti ti anulomikam); (a) anulomenta, mfn., Vism 522,22 (suttam appatibhantena vinayam ~entena mahpadese olokentena dhammam dipentena); Nidd-all 152,8* (saddhammam -ent); (b) anulomaya(t), mfn., Mil 372,23* (vamso va ~am patilomam na vatteyya); absol. (a) anulometv, Mil 413,10 (tacchako klasuttam ~etv rukkham tacchati); MpIII 326,11; (b) anulometvna, Mil 372,12* (navangam buddhavacanam -etvna); (c) anulomayitv, Mil 372,8. anullapana, n., see sv ullapana.

anullapan, / [anu1 + ullapan, or for *anulapan], approbation, complimentary speech; Vin II 88,33 (anuvdo anuvadan ~ anubhanan anusampavankat; Sp 1194,23: ~ anubhanan ti ubhayam anuvadanya vevacanamattam eva). anuvamsa, m. [cf S. anuvamSa], a descendant; Pj II 582,28(apaccoti~o). anuvagga, mfii. [anu1 + vagga1; but cfBHSD sv anuvarga: "some part or accessory of a city gate ", and Mvu I 195,12], similar, symmetrical; Bvl:14 (tulsahghtnuvagg; Bv-a 36,5: tulsanght ti tulyugal ... ~tianurp). anuvankat, / , abstr. [cf S. anuvakra], inclination, partiality; Sp 1194,26 (anusampavankat tipunappunam kyacittavchi tatth' eva sampavankat, anuvankatabhvo ti attho, Ee, Se so; Be anuvadanabhvo ti; Ce avanatabhvo ti). anuvajati, anubbajati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuVvraj], goes along; follows; follows as a mark of respect; Ja IV 399,9* (na bhikkhuno maggam anubbajmi); 484,15* (sham katham nnuvaje pajnam); VI145,i* (pattik ~anti); Sv 668,10 (anupabbajissm ti -issm ti pi ptho, tassa anugacchissm ti attho). anuvajja, (/w/).,^?/7o/anuvadati^v. anuvajjanto in Ee at Mp I 423,3 is wr, prob, for anuvijjanto qv sv anuvijjati. anuvafta, mfn. [S. anuvrtta ?], rounded; -ghanajaghana, mfn., having round and thick buttocks; ? Bv -a 210,25 (~am ... arivranavranam). anuva44 ne sim, aor. 1 sg. [ofcaus. o/*anu l + vaddhati; cfS. anuVvrdh], / caused to increase further; Cp -a 183,25 (ekavram uppannam samvegam uppdanena -esim). anuvannan,/ [anu1 + vannan], a further explanation or exposition; Patis-a471,1 (vuttass* eva atthassa * -attham vuttesu gthbandhesu). anuvannayanta, mfn., [ of *anu1 + vanneti], explaining, expounding (further); Nidd-a I 2,9* (attham apubbam ~o) = Patis-a 2,11*. anuvattaka, m/(-ik)w. and anuvattaka, m., anuvattik,/ 1. [BHS anuvartaka], following, attending, faithful (to); agreeing with; a follower, partisan, adherent; Vin III 175,5 (katham hi nma bhikkh Devadattassa ... ~ bhavissanti; 175,31: ~ti yamditthiko hoti yamkhantiko yamruciko te pi tamditthik honti tamkhank tamrueik); Ja IV 77,25' (anubbat ti anuvattik); Ap503,i4 (loko tassnuvattako); Sp400,22 (ek bhummadevat ... mrapakkhik mrassa anuvattik); 2. who makes turn (after); keeping turning; Th-alll 105,9 (cakknuvattako ti satthr vattitassa dhammacakkassa -o); ifc see cakka-. anuvattati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amWvrt], 1. follows, attends, sides with; conforms with, practises; imitates; Vin IV 218,5 foil. (Thullanand bhikkhuni... ukkhittam Arittham bhikkhum ... ~ati... ~issati... y pana bhikkhuni... ~eyya); SIV 199,12 (tassa te ~eyyum anuvidhiyeyyum vasam gaccheyyum); Ja I 300,15 (itthiyo nma aneram cinnadivase smikam ~anti dsi viya); V 322,20* (kass' es mahati sen pitthito ~ati); 378,6*


(adhammam -asi); VI 222,6* (nikkhittasatth paccatt nivtam -are); Ap 59,23 (mameva -anti sabbakmehi t sad); 2. (gr.t.t.) is supplied from a previous sentence', Ja IV 164,14'(idhpi na ve suganhan ti-ateva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anuvattane va, prob. wr); Sadd 839,7 (lakkhane cnukaddhitavidhnam uttaratra nnuvattati); anuvattati in Ee at Spk HI 55,5 (evarpam ca cittam -ati) is prob, wr; Be, Se anvattanti; Ce na vattati); (a)anuvattanta, w/(~anti)., JaV 436,4' (sabbakiccesu -antam); Ud-a316,i8 (mam -antehi bhikkhhi saddhim); Vv-a220,23 (s... bhattram -anti); neg. ananuvattanta, mfn., Ih-aIII 154,32 (tasm cittam ananuvattanto); (b) anuvattamna, mfn., Ja IV 34,16* (tarn kullavattam ~amno); Patis-a278,20 (tarn ditthim ~amnehi); aor. 3 sg. anuvatti, VinV 55,B; J sg anuvattisam, Pv34:6 (adhammam -isam); 3 pi. anuvattimsu, Ap317,29; absol (a)anuvattiya, SI 57,23* (evam dhammam apakkamma adhammam anuvattiya); (b) anuvattitv, Mp II 116,15 (sakavdam pahya samanam Gotamam -itv); Ih-aIII 154,24; neg. ananuvattitv, Spk II 69,24; caus. pr. 3 sg. anuvatteti, ~ayati, 1. causes to go on after, keeps in motion; maintains, continues; Sn 556 (ko te imam -eti dhammacakkam pavattitam) = Th826; Ap23,i6 (pavattitam dhammacakkam Sakyaputtena tdin -essati); Cp -a 190,28 (pavattehi-ehiti); 2 . follows; practises; Pv 42:12 (nivtam -aye); anuvattenta, mfn., Cp 2:3:3 (tassa cittnuvattento homi cintitasannibho); Sv 588,33 (theram -ento dutiyam pi tatiyam pi ha, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce anuvattanto); Th-al 108,3 (ime bhikkh... janapadavitakkam -ent cittasamdhim virdhenti ti); aor. 3 pi. anuvattayimsu, Sv288,i8 (handa nam anuvattm ti ~ayimsu, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se anuvattimsu); pp anuvattita, mfn.y followed; Ud-a 237,2 (anugat ti cittena -it); Cp-a 299,16; fpp anuvattitabba, mfh. and n. impers., to be followed; to be conformed to; Vin I 132,20 (gantukehi vsiknam -itabbam); Ps II 309,16 (gar ti bhriko akm -itabbo). anuvattana, n. and mf(~i)n. 1. (n.) [S. anuvartana], following; compliance; conformity with; Abh 345 (anurodho 'nuvattanam); Ja I 367,10' (tividhassa sucaritadhammassa -am); III 320,8' (imesam dasannam rjadhammnam -ena); V 433,12 (sabbakiccesu -t); Ap-a237,i9 (idam -am desitassa anugantv pacch desanam); anuvattane va in Ee, Se at Ja IV 164, w is prob, wr for anuvattateva; 2. (mfh.) following; ifc see bahuvidh-; ananuvattana, n., not conforming to; non-compliance; Jail 449,22 (adhammikya katikya ~e); Sv 588,13 (jettho kanitthassa bhvam natv). anuvattpaka, mfn. [from *anuvattpeti, caus. of anuvattati], making conform to; requiring agreement; Sadd 115,15 (vccalingnam ~assa abhidheyyalihgabhtassa pasaddassa); see also anuvattpana. anuvattpana, n. [from *anuvattpeti, caus. of anuvattati], making conform to; ifc see attkr(.sv atta[n]); see also anuvattpaka. anuvatti, / [S. anuvrtti], acting in conformity with,

complying with; Abh 1174; ifc see dhamma-. anuvatti(n), mfn. [S. anuvartin], following; acting in conformity with; obedient (to); Patis-a562,i7 (tadanvay honti ti tarn anugmini tarn ~Ini honti, Ee so; Be, Se~ini; Ce-ini; ad?2X\s II 49,12foil: bhvanya kat' indriyni tadanvayni honti); ifc see karun(^vkarun), dhamm-, vasa-. anuvadati,/?r. 3 sg., 1. [S. anuVvad], repeats the words of; approves; agrees with; Vin II 88,31 (bhikkh bhikkhum -anti silavipattiy v cravipattiy v); 2. criticises, censures; Vin II 80,28 (suddho hoti bhikkh anpattiko -anti ca nam; Sp 1192,7: -anti ti codenti); Sp484,io (tasmim puggale aviijamnena antimavatthun ~ati codeti); anuvadmi in Ee at Ja III 483,15 is prob, wr for vadmi (Be, Ce, Se so); (a) anuvadanta, mfn., Nidd-al 395,26 (ppakammino attnam -antassa); Sv 1041,1 (~antnam); (b)anuvadamna, mfn., VinV 111,22; pass, anuvadiyamna, mfn., being criticised; Ps II 400,6 (cittena -iyamno); p p anuvadita, mfn., criticised, censured; Sp 1192,2 (ekam -assa dnam); fpp anuvajja, mfn. and n., to be censured; a fault; neg. ananuvajja, annuvajja (with rhythmical or metrical lengthening), mfn., not to be censured; blameless; Vin I 359,1*; (annuvajjo pathamena silato); A I 294,9 (anavajjo ca hoti ananuvajjo ca vinnnam); Sn/?. 78,io (anavajj ca ananuvajja ca vinnunam; Pj II 396,8: ananuvajja ca ti anuvdavimutt); snuvajja, mfn., to be censured; at fault; VinV 168,6 (svajjo ca hoti snuvajjo vinnnam) * AII 3,10. anuvadan, / [from anuvadati], approval, support; Vin II 88,33 (anuvdo ~ anullapan anubhanan; but c/Sp 1194,22: - t i kranidassanam etam, upavadan ti attho). anuvasati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + vasati2; S. amWvas5], inhabits; dwells, stays; Vin I 176,7 (tarn klam ~eyyum); absol. anuvasitva, Vin IV 69,34 (tattiY eva -itv -itv vasathapindam bhunjanti); pp anuvuttha, mfn., living with; staying; who has lived with; Ja II 42,22' (anariyo cira ekato -o pi tarn ekatonivsam aganetv karoti ppam); ifc see cira-. anuvassa 1 , mfn. [anu1 + vassa], who has kept one vassaresidence; Th-al 85,11 (anuvassiko ti anugato upagato vassam -o). anuvassa 2 , n. [anu1 + vassa], a following vassaresidence; lh-a I 85,14 (atha v anugatam pacchgatam apagatam vassam -am, tarn assa atthi ti anuvassiko). anuvassaip, ind. [anu1 + ace. of vassa], every rainy season; annually; Vin III 227,21 (bhikkh -am santhatam krpenti); IV 336,22 (-an ti anusamvaccharam); Sv622,i6; Mhv7:73; 36:110 (-am ca sanghassa chacivaram adpayi). anuvassaka, mfn. [anuvassa(m) + ka2], yearly, annual; Mhv 10:86 (balim tesam annesam cnuvassakam dpesi). anuvassika, mfn. [from anu1 + vassa], who has kept one vassa-residence; who has passed one rainy season; Th24 (-0 pabbajito; Th-al 85,10/0//.: -0 ti anugato upagato vassam anuvasso, anuvasso va ~o ... atha v anugatam pacchgatam apagatam vassam anuvassam, tarn


assa atthi ti -o); see also anuvassa1, anuvassa2. anuvahan, / [from *anu' + vahati], carrying along; sequence; Vism278,i6 (anubandhan ti-a) * Sp 418,26 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anupadahan; * Patis-a495,i: eds anugaman). anuvceti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. aniWvac], recites after or again; teaches what has been taught; Vin I 245,20 (bhsitam anubhsanti vcitam -enti) = D I 104,12; Mil 345,11 (vcenti -enti bhsanti anubhsanti). anuvta, m. [?], a facing or border (on a bhikkhu 's robe); Vin I 297,21 (anujnmi bhikkhave -am paribhandam ropetun ti; cfSp 1110,32: -karanamatten ti pitthi-anuvtropanamattena); II 177,8 (-0 databbo); Pv-a73,i6(-e appahonte). anuvtam, ind. [anu1 + ace. of vta], with the wind; downwind; SI 226,23 (Sakko ... te isayo silavante kalynadhamme -am panjaliko namassamno atthsi); A I 225,28 (yesam -am yeva gandho gacchati no pativtam); Ap 356,34 (-am pavyati); Mil 333,11 (-am pi pativtam pi vyanti); Vism 182,17 (pativtam vajjetv -am gantabbam); see also anuvte. anuvte, ind. [ts], with the wind; downwind; Ja II 382,28 (~e thatv); Vism 10,13* (yo samam -e ca pativte ca vyati); ati-anuvte, ind., too much downwind; Vism 182,31 (nti -anuvte thtabbam); see also anuvtam. anuvda, m. [from anuvadati], 1. [cfS. anuvda], repetition, further explanation; approval, support; factionforming; Vin II 88,33 (~o anuvadan anullapan anubhanan anusampavankat abbhussahanat anubalappadnam; butcfSp 1194,2i: -o tiyo tesu anuvadantesu upavdo); Niddl 169,21 (attano vdam akkhya cikkhitv -am akkhya cikkhitv); SpkII 258,6 (vdnuvdo ti bhagavat vuttavdassa -o); Vin-vn 2762; 2. criticism, blame, censure; Abh 120; Vin II 5,13 (na -0 patthapetabbo); ifc see atta- (.yv attafn]), par-; dhikarana, n., a legal question or case concerning support, or concerning a faction, or a legal question or case arising from censure or criticism; Vin II 88,30 (katamam -am); III 164,9; MII 247,4 (PsIV 43,4: silavipattiy v craditthijivavipattiy v anuvadantnam yo anuvdo upavadan c'eva codan ca idam -am nma); Vin-vn 2760; ananuvda, mfn., free from criticism; blameless; Vin 1173,9 (so ce bhikkhave codako bhikkhu anuyogena vinnnam sabrahmaerinam cittam na rdheti -o cudito bhikkh ti alam vacanya); Dhp-aIII 376,13; snuvda, mfn., open to criticism; at fault; Vin I 173,11; II 86,2 (asuci ca hoti alajji ca -o ca). anu-v-sati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anWs], sits after; is seated near; serves, attends; Ja VI 296,19* (samane brhmane cpi... sakkaccam -eyya; cf 296,25': ~eyya ti uposathavsam vasanto anuvatteyya). anuvsana, n. [ts], treating with an oily enema; Mil 353,13 (in long cpd.: -vamanavirecannuvsanakiriyam anusikkhitv). anuvsaram, ind. [anu1 + ace. of vsara], daily; Mhv 62:32. anuvseti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. amWvs], treats with an oily

enema; Mil 169,12 (anuvsaniyam ~eti); pp anuvsita, mfn., treated with an enema; Mil 214,30 (vantassa virittassa -assa turassa sappyakiriy icchitabb hoti); fpp anuvsaniya, mfn.y Mil 169,12. anuvikkhitta, mfn. [anu1 + vikkhitta], (further) dispersed, distracted; S V 277,27 (yo ... chando bahiddh paneakmagune rabbha -0 anuvisato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anuvikhito); 279,14 (viriyam... -am anuvisatam); 280,3 (cittam ... -am anuvisatam). anuviganeti, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + vi + ganeti; cfS. viganayati], considers, regards; takes notice of, takes account of; Th 109 (na nnyam paramahitnukampino rahogato -eti ssanam). anuvicarati, pr. 3 sg. [S., BHS anuviVcar], 1. wanders about or through; explores; Mil 121,7 (uyynena uyynam anucankammi -mi); S IV 117,4 (parito parito kutikyam anucankamanti -anti); A I 142,24 (catunnam mahrjnam amacc prisajj imam lokam -anti); Vv 22:9 (sayampabh -mi Nandanam); Ja IV 438,29* (sitodiy -ma najjo); (a) anuvicaranta, mfii., D1235,15 (jahghvihram anucankamantnam -antnam); MI 279,15 (passeyya manusse ... anusancarante pi ~ante pi); Jal 320,30 (so puriso Brnasim gantv -anto dantakravithim patva); (b) anuvicaramna, mfn., MI 108,21 (Sakko jahghvihram anucankamamno -amno); Sp 55,4 (aranne -amno); aor. 3 sg. anuvicari, Ja V 188,7* (ayam assa psdo ... yamhi -m -anuvicari rj); Pj I 164,22; absol. anuvicaritv, Ja III 188,11 (sabbam thalajalapatham -itv); Mil 141,20 (mahim -itv); Mp II 232,26(manussalokam -itv); 2 . thinks of, ponders; MI 144,5 (bhikkhu div kammante rabbha rattim anuvitakketi -ati, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se anuvicreti); AIII 23,3 (dhammam cetas anuvitakketi -ati manasnupekkhati, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se anuvicreti); pp anuvicarita, mfn., gone through, explored; scrutinised; DIU 135,10 (yam... dittham sutam... pariyesitam -am manas) ^ SHI 203,13 ^ PatisI 133,12; Sv 106,25 (vimamsya -am); caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) anuvicreti, -ayati [BHS anuvicrayati], thinks of, ponders; scrutinises; MI 115,22 (yam yad eva ... bhikkhu bahulam anuvitakketi -eti tath tath nati hoti cetaso); 116,9 (anuvitakkeyyam -eyyam); A III 178,16 (dhammam cetas anuvitakkenti -enti); anuvicraya(t) mfn., A III 382,6 (dhammam cetas anuvitakkayato -ayato); Vism 212,24 (buddhagune anuvitakkayato -ayato); absol. anuvicretv, MI 144,6 (anuvitakketv -etv); caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) anuvicarpeti, guides (someone) round; MI 253,25 (Sakko... Vessavano ca... yasmantam Mahmoggallnam Vejayante psde anucankampenti -enti). anuvicra, m. [anu1 + viera], (continued) pondering, consideration; Dhs 8 (cro vicro - 0 upavicro) = 85 * Vibh 257,io. anuvicinaka, m. [from *anuvicinti], one who examines; Mil 365,15 (-assa ekam angam gahetabbam). *anuvicinti, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + vicinti], investigates; examines; anuvicinanta, /w/(-antI)n, Thi 472 (khandhadhtu-yatanam ... yoniso -anti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se yoniso arucim bhananti; Thi-a 259,25: upyena -anti


cintayanti); Th-alll 28,4 (vimuttidhammam ~anto gavesanto); inf. anuvicinitum, Ja III 506,3 (rjanivesanato bahum ratanabhandam hatam, ~itum vattati ti, Be so; Ce, Ee anuvijjitum; Se anuvijjhitum); absol anuvicinitv, Mp 1278,10 (tassa gatatthnam ~itv, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anuvijjitv); see also anuvicca. anuvicinteti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anuvicintayati], thinks or ponders over; meditates upon; SI 203,15* (ayonim patinissajja yoniso ~aya); (a) anuvicintenta, mfn., Th-a III 22,7 (anussaran ti assdavasena tarn tarn rasarn ~ento); (b) anuvicintaya(t), mfn., Dhp364 (dhammam -ayam); (c) anuvicintayanta, mfn., Ja III 396,i* (so 'ham tarn evnuvicintayanto); absol. anuvicintetv, DII 203,4 (eko raho ~etv); pp anuvicintita, mfn. considered; Ja IV 227,9* (puris te mahrja manasnuvicintit). anuvicca, ind. (sometimes in Ee written anuvijja) [absol. prob, of anveti (or of *anuvicinti with haplology; or of *anu1 + Vvic, cf vivicca), see K.R. Norman, 1987, pp. 35-7; AMg anuvii, anuviya], testing, examining; discerning, finding out; Vin V 132,7 (anuvicca pi vinnu garahanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anuvijja); MII 114,13 (anuvicca pariyoghetv); Dhp 229 (yam ce vinn pasamsanti anuvicca suve suve); Sn 530 (anuvicca papanca nmarpam; Pj II431,13: anuvicca anuviditv); Ja I 459,11* (anuvicca kho tarn ganheyyum); 111426,5* (anuvicca Kaccani karohi kiccam; 426,9': anuvicca ti upaparikkhitv jnitv); -kra, m., considered action; action undertaken after scrutiny; Vin I 236,17 (~am kho Siha karohi, ~o tumhdisnam ntamanussnam sdhu hoti ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anuvijjakaram)= AIV 185,9* MI 379,3 (~am... karohi; Ps III 88,16: ~an ti anuviditv cintetv tulayitv ktabbam); ananuvicca, ind., without testing, without examining; MII 114,10 (bl avyatt ananuvicca apariyoghetv paresam vannam v avannam v bhsanti); A I 89,8 (ananuvicca apariyoghetv avannrahassa avannam bhasati). anuvijja, v/ or wr in Eefor anuvicca qv. anuvijjaka, m. [from anuvijjati], an examiner; an adjudicator; VinV 160,2 (~ena codako pucchitabbo); 163,9; Sp593,n (so codako ~ena kim te dittham kin ti ditthan ti din nayena anuvijjiyamno vimamsiyamno upaparikkhiyamno). anuvijjati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. anuvindati ? or wr for anuvijjhati ?], searches out, investigates; examines, judges; Ja III 506,3 (~itum, Ce, Ee so; Se anuvijjhitum; Be anuvicinitum); Ps II 93,1 (yannnham ml mlam gantv -eyyan ti); (a) anuvijjanta, mfn., Ja III 359,13 (mam esa ~anto anubandhati ti, Ce, Ee so; Be anuyunjanto; Se anuvattanto); Mpl 423,3 (tassa matabhvam -anto, Be, Ce so; Ee wr anuvajjanto; Se vajjento); (b) anuvijjamna, mfn., VinV 164, H (anuvijjako -amno); absol. anuvijjitv, Mp I 278,10 (tassa gatatthnam ~itv, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anuvicinitv); pass, anuvijjiyamna, mfn., Sp593,i4; fpp anuvijjitabba, mfn., Vin V 163,21 (klena -itabbam no aklena bhtena -itabbam no abhtena); caus. absol. anuvijjpetv, JaV 162,14 (putto pitaram datthukmo gatatthnam ajnanto -petv, Ee so; Be

anuvicrpetv; Ce, Se anuvicarpetv); see also anuvijjhati. anuvijjana, n. [from anuvijjati], examining, adjudicating; dhippya, m., an intention to examine or adjudicate; Sp597,io; 597,28 (anuvijjakasspi ... -na vadantassa). anuvijja,/ [from anuvijjati], examining; VinV 162,22* (in uddna: codan ~ ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -am). anuvijjhati1, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuvidhyati], strikes afterwards; pierces through; investigates, examines; Ja VI 439,9* (atitena nnuvijjhanti pandit; 439,13': atitadosam gahetv mukhasattihi na vijjhanti); absol. anuvijjhitv, Dhp-a III 380,15 (apardham pana ~itv, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anuvijjitv); pp anuviddha, mfn. [ts], pierced; penetrated (by); set with; Pet 151,5 (olrikasukhumhi ca rpasannhi ~ni etni jhnni, Ce so; Be, Ee wr anuvidhni); Vv-a277,2o (manin ~am); see also anuvijjati. anuvijjhati2, pr. 3 sg. [?], goes round; Spkl 283,35 (tiyojanasahassam himavantam punappunam -imsu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se vijjhimsu). anuvitakkana, n. [from anuvitakketi], pondering over; Patis-a 69,6 (yathsutassa dhammassa cetas -am). anuvitakketi, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anuvitarkayati], reflects upon, ponders over; MI 115,21 (yam yad eva... bhikkhu bahularn ~eti anuvicreti tath tatha nati hoti cetaso); 116,9 (-eyyam anuvicreyyam); A III 213,25 (anussareyya sambuddham dhammam cnuvitakkaye); S V 67,28 (tarn dhammam anussarati ~eti); (a) anuvitakkenta, mfn., D I 119,2 (brhmano bahularn ~ento nisinno hoti); (b) anuvitakkaya(t), mfn., A III 382,6 (dhammam cetas ~ayato anuvicrayato); Vism 212,24 (buddhagune -ayato anuvicrayato); absol. anuvitakketv, MI 144,6 (~etv anuvicretv). anuvidita, mfn. [pp o/anu 1 + Vvid1; or possibly o/anu 1 + vi + Vi, cf K.R. Norman, 1987, p. 37; BHS id.}, thoroughly understanding; well-informed; Sn 528 (kimpattinam hu vedagum... ~am kena katham ca viriyav ti); 530 (~o tdi pavuccate tathatt; Pj II 431,10: ~o ti anubuddho); see also anuvijjati, anuviditv. anuviditv, ind. [absol. of anu1 + Vvid1], knowing thoroughly; finding out; Ps III 88,16: anuviccakran ti ~itv cintetv tulayitv ktabbam); Pj II 431,13 (anuvicca ~itv); see also anuvijjati, anuvidita. anuvideyyum in Ee at Spk III 69,15 is prob, wr; see sv anuvidhiyati. anuviddha, mfn., pp /anuvijjhati qv. anuvidhna, n. [ts], acting in conformity; obedience; Spk III 69,16 (~am pajjeyyun ti attho). anuvidhni in Be, Ee at Pet 151,5 is wr for anuviddhni (Ce so). anuvidhyaka, mfn. [from anuvidhiyati; cf S. vidhyaka], acting in conformity with; ifc see cariy- (sv cariy). anuvidhyi(n), mfn. [S. anuvidhyin], conforming to; Ud-a68,3 (vutta-adhippynudhyi ca saddappayogo ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee vutta-adhippyam anuvidhya, perhaps wr). anuvidhiyati, anuvidhiyyati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anuvidhiyate], 1. acts in conformity with; follows the rules of,


follows (ace. rei, gen. pers.); Mil 105,2 (sunantu dhammam klena tarn ca ~iyantu) = Th 875; SIV 199,12 (tassa te anuvatteyyum ~eyyum vasam gaccheyyum, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anuvidhyeyyum; Spk III 69,15: ~eyyun ti anugaccheyyum, anuvideyyun ti pi ptho, Ee so; Be, Se anuvidhyeyyun ti... anuvidhiyeyyun ti pi ptho; Ce anuvidhyeyyun ti... anuvidhayesun ti pi ptho); Ja II 98,2i* (pornam pakatim hitv tass' eva ~iyati); Sadd 485,i (anuvidh anukarane... puriso afinassa purisassa kiriyam ~iyyate); (a) anuvidhiya(t), mfn., Ja HI 357,8* (diso ve lahucitf assa posassa ~ato, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anuvidhiyyato; 357,2r: yo poso lahucittassa mittassa v fitino v ~ati anuvattati... so lahucitto diso hoti); (b) anuvidhiyanta, mfn.9 VinV 163,29 (attham ~antena); absol. anuvidhya, Ud-a 68,3 (vutta-adhippyam anuvidhya, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se vuttaadhippynuvidhyi); 2. is conformed with; is followed; ? Vism485,8(ethi ca [dhthi] kranabhthi samsradukkham sattehi ~ati); Sadd 591,9 (kamme kammam sattehi anuvidhiyyati). anuvidhiyan, / [from anuvidhiyati], acting in accordance with; acting conformably; MI 43,27 (cittuppdam ... kusalesu dhammesu bahukram vadmi, ko pana vdo kyena vcya ~su); Ps I 191,12 (ekantabahukr yeva hi t ~ ti dasseti). anuvibhavitv in Ee at Sv 594,28 is wr for anubhavitv {Be, Ce, Se so). anuvirodha, m. [anu1 + virodha], continuous hostility; Nidd I 239,23 (cittassa ghto patighto ~o kopo pakopo). anuvilitta, mfn. \pp of *anu1 + vilimpati], anointed; ifc see rnhzts.-. anuvilepana, n. [anu1 + vilepana], anointing; -gandha, m., a fragrant substance for anointing; Sp42,i9 (~am... ngabhavanato ngarjno haranti; = Thp 184,28: anulepana-). anuvilokana, n. and m or mfn. [BHS anuvilokana, n.], looking round, surveying; Niddl 216,8 (atthi kanci klam kodho pharusavcanicchrano hoti na ca tva disvidisam ~o hoti); Sv 439,6 (sabbadisnuvilokanam). anuviloketi, ~ayati, pr. 3sg. [BHS anuvilokayati], looks round at, surveys; SHI 84,24 (siho ... vijambhitv samant catuddis ~eti); AIV 86,is (dis ~eyysi); (a ) anuvilokenta, mfn., Ap 191,18 (disam -entam); Sp 50,2 (rj Asokrme thito va catuddis -ento); (b) anuvilokaya(t), mfn., A IV 167,11 (evam me anudisam -ayato); (c) anuvilokayamna, mfh., Mil7,i6 (sadevakam lokam ~ayamn); aor. 3 sg. anuvilokesi, Vinll 158,26 (Anthapindiko gahapati... samant Svatthim ~esi); SI 167,24; absol anuviloketv, MI 339,10 (bhikkhusarigham -etv); Ja I 53,15 (dasa pi dis -etv); Mil 330,2o; fpp anuviloketabba, mfn., AIV 167,9 (anudis -etabb hoti). anuvivafta, n., a side-piece, part of a bhikkhu'5 robe; VinI 287,24 (Sp \\27,\sfoil.: -an ti tassa [vivattassa] ubhosu passesu dve khandni... atha v -an ti vivattassa ekapassato dvinnam ekapassato dvinnan ti catunnam pi khandnam etam nmam); Vin-vn 563. anuvisata, mfn. [anu1 + visata], dispersed, spread;

distracted; SV 277,27 (yo... chando bahiddh pancakmagune rabbha anuvikkhitto ~o); Ja IV 102,3* (sabb dis ~o 'ham asmi; 102,24': attano gunena patthato pannto); Vism 268,33 (imassa hi bhikkhuno digharattam rpdisu rammanesu -am cittam). anuvutti, / [cf S. anuvrtti], (gr.t.t.) an additional explanation; Sadd 655,io (ayam pandhippyavinnpik -i); 685,9. anuvuttha, mfn.,ppofanuv2Lsatiqv. anuvejja, see ananuvejja. anuvedha, m. [anu1 + vedha], a further or second stab; SIV 208,n (purisam sallena vijjheyyum tarn enam dutiyena sallena -am vijjheyyum, Ce, Se so; Ee omits anuvedham; Be vijjheyya; Spk III 16,nfoll: tass' eva vanamukhassa ... sannapadese anugatavedham, evam viddhassa hi s - vedan pathamavedanya balavatar hoti, so read with Be, Ce, Se). anuvyaftjana1, n. [BHS id.], a minor or secondary characteristic or mark; a detail; As 400,12 (-gghi ti ... -an ti laddhavohram hatthapdasitahasitakathitavilokitdibhedam kram ganhti); esp. the 80 minor marks of a mahpurisa or of a Buddha; Mil 75,2 (buddho... asitiy ca ~ehi pariranjito); Sv918,i6 (bhagavato asiti ~ni); Vv-a315,3i (tena jlihatthatam mahpurisalakkhanam tambanakhatam -am ca dasseti); anuvyanjanaso, ind. 1. as to detail; in detail; M III 126,17(mtugmassa ~aso nimittam gahet); SIV 168,16 (na tv eva cakkhuvinneyesu rpesu -aso nimittaggho); 2. as to the letter, the accurate text; ? Vin I 65,9 (na suvinicchitni suttato ~aso); IV 51,30 (ubhayni kho pan' assa ptimokkhni... suvinicchitni suttato ~aso; Sp 790, is: ~aso ti akkharapadapripriy ca suvinicchitni akhandni aviparitakkharni, etena atthakath dipit, atthakathto hi esa vinicchayo hoti) * A IV 140,25 (c/Mp IV 66,17: suttaso ti vibhangato, ~aso ti khandhakaparivrato); -ggha, m, the apprehension of details or parts; Spk III 4,16/0//. (~o ti vibhattigahanam ... ~o vibhajitv hatthapddisu tarn tarn kotthsam [ganhti]); -gghi(n), mfn., occupying oneself with details or minor characteristics; D I 70,9 (so cakkhun rupam disv na nimittagghi hoti nnuvyanjanagghi) = MI 180,28* A I 113,2i; Dhs 1345. anuvyaftjana2, n. [probably extracted from anuvyanjanam qv], (taken by cts to mean) a following expression (similar to the preceding expression); a further exposition; ? Mil 340,9 (vyanjanena vyanjanam kathayissmi -na ~am kathayissmi); Sp 741,14/0//. (~an ti purimavyanjanena sadisam pacch vyanjanam ... akkharasamuho ~am); Mp IV 66,17 (suttaso ti vibhangato, ~aso ti khandhakaparivrato). anuvyanjanam, ind. [anu1 + ace. of vyanjana], letter by letter; Vin IV 15,i (padam anupadam anvakkharam -am; but cf 15,A foil.: ~am nma rpam aniccan ti vuecamno vedan anicc ti Saddam nicchreti; Sp 742,3 foil.: therena rparn aniccan ti vuecamno smanero sighapannatya vedan anicc ti imam aniccapadam therassa rpam aniccan ti etena aniccapadena saddhim ekato bhananto vcam nicchreti); see also anupadam, anvakkharam. anuvykarana, n. [anu1 + vykarana], a further explan-


ation; Spk II 258,4 (bhagavat vuttavykaranassa -am). anusamyyati (also written anusaMyati), pr. 3 sg. [S. anusanWy], goes through, travels about; inspects, supervises; goes along with, escorts; anusamyyamna, mfn., Vin III 43,13 (brhmano Magadhamahmatto Rjagahe kammante -amno); aor. 3 sg. anusamyyi, Ap 539,n (~i so dhiro mtuccham yva kotthakam, Ee so; Be, Ce viro; Se anusamsvayi dhiro); inf. anusanntum, A I 68,24 (paccantime v janapade anusafintum); absol anusamyyitv, M I 209,36 (bhagavantam -itv, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce and Ps II 243,27 Ce, Ee anusamsvetv); III 174,n (samuddapariyantarn pathavim -itv, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anupariyyitv; * D II 174,22: Be, Ce, Se anuyyitv; Ee wr anusamsyitv); Ja IV 214,14 (sakalajambudipam antantena -itv). anusamyyana, n. [from anusamyyati], going through, travelling about; Sv444,n (purebhattam eva sgarapariyantam pathavim -samattham vehsangamam hatthiratanam,ite, Ee so; Ce samsarana-; Se anupariyayana-; * Spk III 154,6: Ce, Ee anuyyana-; Be, Se anupariyayana-). anusamvaccharam, ind. [anu1 + ace. of samvacchara], yearly; every year; Vin IV 336,22 (anuvassan ti-am); Ja V 99,4 (devat... -am ranfio santike sahassagghanakam balikammam labhati); Vism 38,24 (-am bhmiyam kesaraniptam disv v' assa [mahngarukkhassa] pupphitabhvam jnti); Dhp-al 388,16 (tasmim pana nagare -am vivatanakkhattam nma hoti). anusamsandan, / [anu1 + samsandan], making run along with or after; Vibh 357,13 (- anuppabandhan; Vibh-a492,6: - ti pathamuppannena kodhena saddhim antaram adassetv ekibhvakaranam) = Pp 18,2i (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anupasanthapan). anusamsyitv in Ee at D II 174,22 is wr, prob, for anusamyyitv qv sv anusamyyati. anusamsvan, / [from anusamsveti], attending; escorting; Ap 247,20 (duggatim nbhijnmi -phalam). * anusamsveti, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [caus. o/anu 1 + sam + sunti ?], attends; escorts; aor. 1 sg. anusamsvayim, Ap212,i6 (vanditv satthuno pde -ayim pure); 247, is (~ayim buddham); absol. anusamsvetv, MI 209,36 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se anusamyyitv; Ps II 243,27: ~etv ti anugantv, te kira bhagavato pattacivaram gahetv thokam agamamsu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anusamyyitv ti). anusankita, (mf)n. [pp of *anu' + sankati] (or anusankita,/, abstr. [anu + sanki(n) + t]?) anxiety, fear; Th-aII257,i (tassa bhvato aranfiam pi gmantasadisam evti attho). anusangita, mfn. [pp o/*anu' + sahgyati], 1. rehearsed or chanted again; Sv 1,16* (atthakath ... sahgit - ca) ^ As 1,28*; 2. (one) who sings in chorus;! -nivsi(n), mfn., living with its fellow-singers; ? (so W. Pruitt, 1998, p. 265); Thi-a 201,22 (knane~ini kokil viya madhurlpam nikji 'ham). anusajjhyati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + sajjhyati], recites again; repeats; A III 224,4 (bhsitam anubhsanti sajjhyitam -anti vcitam anuvcenti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se omit sajjhyitam -anti; Mp III 308,12: sajjhyitam -anti ti

tehi sajjhyitam -anti, eds so); Sv 273,23 (pubbe gitam anugyanti -anti). anusaflearana, n. [from anusancarati], going around; considering; Vism 245,32 (yogino cittassa dvattimsakotthsake kye rammanavasena -am); As 114,29 (vicaranamv vicro -an tivuttam); Vibh-a410,29 (yne asati -am nma dukkhan ti); -jana, m., people walking about; Sp 974,7 (vijanavtan ti -assa sariravtena virahitam; Sp-t[J?e] III 223,24: -ass ti antosancrinojanassa) = Vibh-a 368,4. anusadearati, pr. 3 sg. [S. anusanWcar], goes around, walks about (with); walks along, traverses; considers; S V 53,22 (kirn mundo kaplam -asi); Ja II 39,27 (nagaram -ati); Vism 144,9 (ye vihram gantv evarpe cetiyangane -itum... labhanti ti); (a) anusancaranta, w/(~anti)., MI 279,14 (passeyya manusse... -ante pi anuvicarante pi); Ja III 502,22 (pubbantato aparantagamanamaggam -ante); IV 400,24 (ito c'ito ca -antiy); (b) anusancaramna, mfn., Ja I 202,21 (te... Sinerum -amn utthahimsu); pp anusaficarita, mfn., gone around; traversed; considered; Ja IV 465,9' (dibbagandhehi -am); Mil 387,24 (kso isitpasabhtadijagannusancarito); Sv 914,30 (cittena -am). anusaficeteti, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + sanceteti; cfS. anusamVcint], fixes the mind upon; is intent upon; Pp 12,19 (sace -eti na parihyati thi sampattihi). anusaflfiyati, see sv anusamyyati. anu sat a, m/w.,/?/?o/*anusarati qv. anusafthi, / , see sv anusatthi. anusattarpa, mfn. [cf S. anusakta ?], absolutely attached; dependent; ? Pv 36:66 (slvuto puriso luddakammo panitadando -o; Pv-a242,n: -0 ti rajini -sabhvo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anupattarpo ti rjnam anupattapakatiko); 36:71. anusattha(r), m. [from anussati], teacher, instructor; JaIV 178,9* (cariyam -ram ... accamannissam); see also anussita(r). anusatthaip in Ee at Sv 830,24 is wr, prob, for anusatthim (Ce so) or anusitthim (Be, Se so). anusatthi, anusatthi, / [BHS anuSsti, nuSsti; AMg anusatthi], admonition, rule; instruction; Ja I 241,12 (-im na karoti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anusitthim); VI 298,18 (rjasevaknam -i, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anussani); Mil 98,22 (dhammam ca vinayam ca -im ca satthram thapayitv, Ce, Ee so; Be anusitthim; Se anusandhavam); Mp IV 156,n (ssanan ti -i, Ce, Ee so; Se anusatthi; Be anusitthi); see also anusitthi. anusaddyati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + saddyati], resounds after; reverberates; As 114,23(bherikotit atha pacch anuravati -yati, quoting Mil 63,1: anuravati anusandahati). anusaddyan, / [from anusaddyati], resounding; reverberation; As 114,25 (yath pacch anuravan - evam vicro datthabbo). anusantata, mfn. [pp of*anul + sam + tanoti], extended; continued; -vutti, mfn., continually practising; ifc see sallekh-, sikkh-. anusandati, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + sandati], flows, flows


along; moves along, moves to; moves after; AIV 47,10 (sace... bhikkhuno asubhasannparicitena cetas bahulam viharato methunadhammasampattiy cittam ~ati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anusandahati; Mp IV 31,i: ~afi ti pavattati); Ap 343,28 (Garig... Hamsavatiy dvrena ~ati). anusandahati, anusandhati, anusandheti, pr. 3 sg. [S. anusamVdh], applies to, connects with, fixes on; aims at; conforms to; AIV 47,io (methunadhammasampattiy cittam ~ati, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se anusandati); Pet 126,8 (aniccasannya bhvitya... atthasu lokadhammesu cittam nnusandhati); Mil 63,l (kamsathlam kotitam pacch anuravati ~ati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anusandhahati; quoted As 114,23: anusaddyati); anusandhenta, mfn., Pj I 200,10 (tarn jtakam paccuppannena ~ento); absol. (a)anusandahitv, As 143,9 (saram viya jiyya ~itv); (b) anusandhetv, Nett-a218,i3 (tarn hi bhagavato vacanam anusandhetv pavattanato anusandhivacanan ti vuttan ti); pass, pr. 3 sg. anusandhiyati, is connected with, is in conformity to; Pj I 154,5 (tarn purimapdena nnusandhiyati); pp anusandhita, mfn. and n., connected with, conforming to; conformity; connexion; Sp 1360,3I (patinnnusandhitena kraye ti ettha ~an ti kathnusandhi vuccati, tasm patifinnusandhin kraye); ifc see patinn-, vutta-. anusandhanat, / , abstr. [from anusandahati; cfS. anusandhna], application; close inquiry; Dhs 8 (cro vicro cittassa ~ anupekkhanat, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anusandhanat) * Vibh257,io (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce anusandhanat); As 143,10 (cittassa -a, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anusandhanat). anusandhi, / (and m.) [from anusandahati; BHS id.], sequence (of meaning), (logical) connection; application; Nett 14,20 (ayarn panho ~im pucchati); Sv 122,22 foil, (tayo hi ~I); Ps II 253,21 (pliy -im ca pubbparam ca amakkhento); Ud-a 4,27 foil. (~ito bodhisutte pucchnusandhivasena ek ~I); Bv-a58,io (tisso ~iyo); esp. anusandhim ghateti, gives the connection (eg between the atitavatthu and paccuppannavatthu of a Jtaka story); shows the application; Ja I 106,7' (~im ghatetv) = 308,20' et passim; Dhp-all 40,i (~im ghatetv); ifc see ajjhsay-, adhippy-, pucch-, pubbpara-, yatha-; see also ananusandhika, eknusandhika (sv eka), nnnusandhika, snusandhika. anusandheti, see sv anusandahati. anusampayta, mfn, [pp of anu1 + sampayti; S. anusampraVy], who has set forth after; Ps III 131,4 (bhagav cakkaratannubhvena gaganatalam sampaytacakkavattirj viya, Rhulabhaddo rjnam -parinyakaratanam viya). anusampavankat, / [anu1 + sampavankat], being inclined towards; intimacy; VinH 88,34 (anuvdo anuvadan anullapan anubhanan ~). anusaya, m. [BHS anuaya], (latent) disposition, tendency, propensity, inherence; Abh853; DIU 254,3 (satta~; Sv 1040,24: appahlnatthena anusenti ti~); S III 130,3i (asm! ti ~o); A144,16 (~ samugghtam gacchanti); Sn 14 (yassnusay na santi keci); 545 (tuvam ~e chetv

tinno); PatisI 130,5 (sattahi ~ehi anusato lokasannivso); Nett 18,30 (~ akusalamlni); Yam 268,3/0//. (satta ~); Dip 1:42 (caritam adhimuttim ca sayarn ca ansayam, mc); Vism205,i5 (sabbesam pi sattnam sayarn jnti -am jnti caritam jnti adhimuttim jnti); anusaya in Ee (and anusaya in Ce) at It-all 192,9 is prob, wr for anpaya (Be, Se so); ifc see avijj-, ditth- (sv ditthi), patigh-, bhavarg-, mna-, rg-, vicikiccha-; -pajahana, n., the letting go of the latent tendency; As 234,2 (maggassa hi ekam eva kiccam -am); ananusaya, m., lack of inherence, lack of propensity; A III 246,20 (kmanandiy pi ~... antam aksi dukkhassa). anusayaka, mfn. [anusaya + ka2], latent, inhering; Nidd-al 101,24 (appahlnatthena santne ~ ditthnusay); see also anusyika. anusayana, n. [from anuseti], inhering; persistence; Nidd-al 236,24 (ken* atthena anusayo, *-atthena, ko esa '-attho nm ti, appahinattho); Pet 90,5 (dhammdhitthnena v -ena v, eds so, perhaps wr; cfftnamoli, 1979, p. 119). anusayi(n), mfn. [from anusaya; cfS. anuSayin], latent; persistent; ifc see digharatta-. anusayita, mfn., pp of anuseti qv. anusarati, anussarati1, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + sarati2; S. amWsr], follows, pursues; conforms oneself to; D III 86,26 (tad eva pornam aggaftnam akkharam -anti, Be, Ce so; Se anussaranti; Ee anupatanti; Sv 868,33: anugacchanti); S IV 303,2i (dhammiko dhammikam phalam -issati, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be anupassati; Ce balim anuppadassati; Se balam anuppadassati); Sn 885 (udhu te takkam anussaranti); Mp IV 4,20 (dhammam anussarati ti dhammnusri); (a) anussara(t), mfn., Ja IV 172,20* (yva anussaram kme manasa t njjhag); (b) anussaranta, mfn., Ja IV 283, is (ekam khuddakanadim anussaranto); aor. 3 sg. anusari, Ja IV 271,3* (sarabham ... yam tvam ~i pure; 271,9': ~i ti anubandhi); pp anusata, mfn. [S. anusrta], 1. (pass.) followed by; beset with; covered with; PatisI 127,27 (tanhnusayena ~o lokasannivso, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anusahagato, perhaps wr; Patis-a412, M: ~O anugato thmagato); 130,6 (sattahi anusayehi ~o lokasannivso); Niddl 410,19 (jtiy anugat jarya ~); Vv-a36,5 (maggam... padumehi ~am vippakinnam); 2. (act.) following; pervading; Ps II 228,26 (angamangni ~... vt); caus. pr. 3 sg. anusreti, causes to go out after; sends after; Mil 36,28 (rj annamannam -eyya anupeseyya). anusarita(r), see sv anussarita(r). anusavati, anussavati,/?r. 3 sg. [anu1 + savati], flows in; flows upon; S i l 54,3 (yathsatam viharantam sav nnussavanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nnusavanti; Spk II 64,28: sav nnussavanti nnuppavaddhanti); IV 188,10 (yath carantam ... akusal dhammnnussavanti, Ce, Se so; Ee nnusavanti; Be nnusenti). anusahagata, mfh. [anu1 + sahagata], constantly followed by, accompanied with; Patis I 127,27 (tanhnusayena ~o lokasannivso, Ee so, prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se anusato; Patis-a412,14: tanhnusayena ~o anugato thmagato)


quoted Ud-a 143,1 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anusato) and It-a I 143,34 (eds anusato); PatisI 128,5 (jarya ~o, Ee so, prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se anusato) quoted Ud-a 143,6 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anusato) and It-a I 144,6 (eds anusato); anusahagata is a frequent wr for anusahagata qv sv arm). anusyika, mfn. [from anuseti], inherent, persistent, chronic; Mil 70,4 (atthi te koci ~o bdho); Dhp-al 431,7 (ekassa ~assa rogassa); see also anusayaka. anusyitv in Ee at DII 175,6 is wr, prob, for anuyyitv qv sv anuyti. anusra1, m. [ts], following; consequence; conformity; instr. anusrena, adv., following, along, by way of; in conformity to, in consequence of, Pj I 131, l (etennusrena); Dhp-all 121,9 (rasminam -na satthram upasankamitv, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee rasmi-anusrena); Patis-a 377,18 (imiss yeva pliy ~ena); usually ifc, see pjinay-; anusrato, adv., id.; ifc see pli-. anusra2, see sv anussra. anusri, n. [cfS. anusryaka], a fragrant substance; ifc see kl-. anusri(n), mfn. and m. [S. anusrin], 1. (mfn.) following, striving after; acting in accordance with; ifc see krna-, dhamm-, nimitta-, saddh-; 2. (m.) a follower, attendant; Ja VI 444,9* (panditassnusrino; 444, ir: ~ino ti veyyvaccakar). anusreti, caus. pr. 3 sg. o/anusarati qv. anusvana, see sv anussvana. anusveti, see sv anussveti. anussa, m. [from anussati], instruction, admonition; SI 46,ii (bhikkhum bhagav paksesi no ca bhikkhuno ~anti; Spkl 103,10: ~an ti anusitthim, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anussanin ti anusatthim, against mss). anussaka, m., anussik, / [S. anuSsaka, mfn.], who advises; an instructor, adviser; a preceptor; Vin I 94,36 (~ena pathamataram gantv sangho iipetabbo); A III 298,12 (Nakulamt gahapatani anukampik atthakm ovdik anussik); Ja III 203,22' (ppnussako ti ppakam ~o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ppakam anussanam ~o); Mil 186,21 (kirn pan' ettha ~o kanci dosarn pajjau" ti); Sp972,i9 (tpasnam ovdako ~o samno ti); Sv 666,26 (annam ~amjnhi, nham porohicce rame ti). anussati, pr. 3 sg. [S. amW&is], teaches, instructs; advises, exhorts; guides, leads (a group); governs, administers; Vin IV 226,32 (yattha rj ~ati rj apaloketabbo); D III 55,i7 (aham ~mi aham dhammam desemi); MI 319,13 (ye ca tattha ganam ~anti); A III 200,1 (ovada Sriputta sabrahmacri ~a Sriputta sabrahmacri); Dhp 159 (attnam ce tath kayir yauY annam ~ati); Sn 126 (yo attham pucchito santo anattham ~ati); Th 994 (ovadeyynusseyya); Ja IV 399,11* (mt ca pit ca puttam ~are kinti sukhi bhaveyya; 399,20': ~are ti -anti); 487,7* (~a rajjan ti; 487,8". dhammena rajjam karehi); VI288,12* (~emu putte); 288,24* (~atam puttadre bhav' ajja; 288,27". bhavam ajja patthya nliam ~atu); Mil 285,32 (catudiparn ~issasi ti); (a) anussa(t), mfn., D III 178,16* (ranno ... mahatimahim -ato); JaIV 232,24* (dhammena pathavim ~am); (b) anussanta, mfh., Ja VI 229,12* (vohram -anto); Mil 382,24 (ovadantena pi

~antena pi); Sv246,5 (rjabhoggan ti sabbarn chejjabhejjam ~antena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ~ayantena, prob, wr); (c) anussamna, mfn., Ja VI 62,15'; Mil 237,5 (tathagata ... ~amn ca appamdapatipattiy ~anti); aor. 3 sg. (a) anussi, Vin I 12,28 (bhagav ... bhikkh dhammiykathya ovadi ~i); DU 231,14 (ye pi 'ssa pit atthe ~i); Ja VI 368,14 (ranno attham ca dhammam ca ~i); (b) anusse, Ja VI 291,13* (kim vo pit ~e puratth; 291,27" -e ti ~i); 3 pl. (a) anussimsu, Ja VI 518,7*; Sp 104,4*; (b) anussisum, Mhv2:ll (rajjarn kamato ~isum); absol. (a) anussitv, Vin I 179,23; JaV 383,io (putte ~itv); (b)anussitvna, JaV 321,12*; (c)anussiya1, Ap469,n; pass. pr. 3 sg. (a) anussiyati [cfS. ^syate], Mil 186,15 (sayamkatena so ghtiyati api ca dhammnusatthim ~iyati); Sv395,i2 (-iyati); anussiyamna, mfn., Vin II 200,23 (tesam ... ovadiyamnnam ~iyamnnam); MIII 4,23; neg. ananussiyamna, mfn., Vin I 44,7; pass, pr. 3 sg. (b) anusissati [cf S. gisyate], Ja V 348,i4*yb//.(kacci nu bhoto kusalam... kacci rattham idam phitam dhammena-m-anusissati, kusalam c' eva me hamsa... atho rattham... dhammena-m-anusissati, Ce, Ee so; Be ~asi... anuss' aharn; Se ~asi... ~i 'harn; = IV 427,29*foil.: Be, Ce, Se~asi; Ee wr~ati) ^ 378,2* (Ce, Ee so; ite~asi... anuss' aham; Se ~asi... ~i 'harn; 378,27" kacci tay rattham dhammena samena -lyati, Ce, Ee so; Be kacci tava rattham ... ~asi; Se kacci tvam idam rattham... ~eyysi); anusissmi ti in Ee, Se at Sp 1274,14 is prob, wr for anussissmi ti (Be, Vin II 180.23 so; Ce omits); pp (a) anusiftha, mfn. [S. anugista], instructed, taught, advised; Vin I 95,1 (~o so may); Mil 96,19 (syam ~o pto visesam adhigamissati); Sn697 (tennusittho); Th335 (~o janettiy); Ja VI 212,7* (aksiy rjuhi vnusitth); Ap 470,20 (~o jinenham arahattam appunim); Mil 284,7 (~o mahrja Jlikumro pitar Vessantarena rann); neg. ananusittha, mfn., Vin I 93,33 (bhikkh ananusitthe upasampadpekkhe ... pucchanti); Pj II 382,5; Mhv 12:23; (b) anussita, mfn. [S. anu^sita], id.; Vin I 179.24 (tumhe khv attha bhane may ditthadhammike atthe ~); Vv 34:6 (kena v ~); Ja III 4,2'; Ap 583,2o; fpp (a) anussiya 2 , mfn., Vin I 59,26 (tvam ... annehi ovadiyo -0); (b) anussamya, mfn., D II 231,14 (ye pi 'ssa pit atthe anussi te pi Jotiplass' eva mnavassa - ti); Mil 186,12 (coro ~o); neg. ananussaniya, mfn., Vism54,5 (dussilo puggalo... ananussaniyo sabrahmacrinam); (c) anussitabba, mfn. and n. impers., D i l 154,22 (so bhikkhhi n' eva vattabbo na ovaditabbo na ~o); MI 460,15 (ime ... amhe ovaditabbam ~am mannanti ti); caus. pr. 3 sg. anusseti, -ayati, instructs, advises; governs; (a) anussenta, mfn., Ja IV 477,17 (yathjjhsayam ~ento, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce anussanto); (b) anussayanta, mfn., Sv246,5 (sabbam chejjabhejjam ~ayantena, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se anussantena); aor. 1 sg. anussayim, Th 914 (dhammena ~ayim); absol. anussetv, Ja V 487, \i* (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anussitv); VI 102, is* (Eeso; Be, Ce, Se anussitv); see also anusikkhati2.


anussana, n. [S. anuSsana], instruction, admonition', Abh354; 992; Vin I 100,8* (in uddna: tatth'eva ~); DU 244,ii* (mani yath veluriyo... evam suddh carissma Gotamassnussane); Niddl 140,15 (desanam -am anusitthim sutv); Mil 356,6 (cariyo -ya); Nidd-a I 203,25 (etassa satthuno -ena); ifc see ovad-. anussani,/ [/?// anuSsani], instruction, admonition, advice', Vin I 50,29 (paripucchya ovadena ~iy); D II 94,30 (sato bhikkhave bhikkhu vihareyya sampajno ayam vo amhkam -I); MI 228,7 (samanassa Gotamassa svakesu ~i); SV 108,23 (kirn nnkaranam samanassa v Gotamassa amhkam v yadidam dhammadesanya va dhammadesanam -iy v -in ti); Th658 (sampdetiY appamdena es me ~I); Ja III 323,21*; Mp I Unfall. (punappunavacanam -1); -ptihriya, n., the miracle of teaching (one of the three marvels of the Buddha); D I 212,18 (iddhiptihriyam desanptihriyam -am); A1170,16. anussita(r), m. [S. anuSsitr], a teacher, instructor; Ja III 382,13* (~a me na bhaveyya paccha; 382,17': anussako ovdako na bhaveyya); see also anusattha(r). anusikkhati1, pr. 3 sg. [BHS anu&iksati], learns, practises, studies; esp. practises (something, ace.) in imitation of (somebody, gen.), follows someone's example in; follows, imitates (someone, usually gen., occasionally ace); MI 14,3 (kittavat nu kho ... satthu pavivittassa viharato svak vivekam nnusikkhanti kittavat... vivekam-anti); SI 52,13* (yunjam Gotamassane appamattnusikkhare; Spkl 110,3: -are ti sikkhanti); AIV 282,13 (saddhsampannnam saddhsampadam -ati); Sn 934 (tassa bhagavato ... ~e); Ja III 315,14* (tesham -ami); Ap 211,20 (mantam ca -ami); Mil 61,27 (ye pi tassa -anti te pi... nirayam uppajjanti); (a)anusikkha(t),mfh., Mil 262,5(idha-mato); (b) anusikkhanta, mfn., Sn294 (tassa vattam -anta); Th 963 (~ant); Ja I 89,12 (me savak pi mamam yeva -ant pindacriyavattam pressanti ti); II98,13 (tassa -anto); Cp 3:5:5 (so pi mam -anto pabbajjam samarocayi); (c)anusikkhamna, mfn., Vin II 201,19 (mahngnam -amn tarunak bhinkacchp); Vism 19,2i (yassa v pana -amno saddhya vaddhati); Sp 603,23; absol. anusikkhitv, Mil 353,14 (-kiriyam -itv); fpp anusikkhitabba, mfn., Sp 3,12* (vannan pi sakkacca tasm -itabb); caus. absol. anusikkhpetv, teaching, having taught; Mil 352,28. anusikkhati2, 3 sg. [probably of fut. of anussati; cfmvtiksyti9BHSG 31:25], will teach; JaV 345,7* (ehi tarn -ami; 345,15': -ami ti anussmi) * 346,25* * VI 62,9* * 84,13* (84,19': -miti sikkhpemi anussmi). anusikkhi(n), mfh. [from anusikkhati1], studying, learning; following, imitating; Ud 71,29 (turassnusikkhino, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se, Ud-a 350,29 anusikkhato; quoted'Nett 173,28: aturassnusikkhato); i/eseeahoratta-. anusittha, mfn., pp of anussati qv. anusifthi, / [S. anu&sti], instruction, admonition; ordering; Abh 354; Dhtup 300 (ssa ~iyam); Dhtum456; Thi211 (tassham vacanam sutv -im

janettiy; * Th335: anusittho janettiy); Niddl 37,i (desanam-im n* diyanti ti); Mil 186,23 (tathagatanam ~i sammnusitthi hoti ti, Be, Se so; Ce anusatthi sammnusatthi; Ee anusatthi sam anusatthi); Sv 830,24 (ye ca -im karonti, Be, Se so; Ce anusatthim; Ee wr anusattham); It-aII 133,34 (sammsambuddhassa ssane ovde -iyam appamatt); ifc see atth- (,yv attha2). anusibbanta, mfn. [ of *anu' + sibbati], interweaving; intertwining; Sp 94,21 (itare [ml] pi gavakkhajlasadisam - nikkhant; cf Mhv 18:44: jlibhtni otrum). anusissa, m. [anu1 + sissa], a pupil's pupil; ifc see siss-. anusissati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of anussati qv. anusisam, ind. [anu1 + ace. of sisa1], at the head; Vism 182,34 (anupadam v -am v thitassa sabbam asubham samam na panfiyati). anusumbhitv in Ee, Se at Ja VI 76,27 is prob, wr; see sv anavasumbhitv. anusuyya(t), mfn., neg. o/usuyyati qv. anusuyyati, see sv anusyati. anusuyyyamna, mfn., neg. o/usuyyyati qv. anusyati, anusuyyati, pr. 3 sg. [pass, of *anu' + sunti; S. anuSryate], is heard; is handed down by tradition; JaV 416,18 (evam akkhyati evam anusyati; cf beginning of Harsacarita: evam anusryate); Mil 1,13 (tamyathnusyate; cf beginning of Tantrkhyyik: tathnu^ryate); Ap 152,2o(vippanatth brahranne andh va anusuyyare, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce anusyare); pp anussuta 1 , mfn. [S. anu&ruta], heard; handed down by tradition; Sv460,24 (ananussutes ti na -esu assutapubbesu); Patis-a611,32 (na -esu param anugantv assutesti); neg. ananussuta, mfn. 1. not heard; not handed down by tradition; Vin I 11,5 (me... pubbe ananussutes dhammesu cakkhum udapdi) ^ D II 33,6 (bodhisattassa ... pubbe ananussutes dhammesu); M11 211,17 (pubbe ananussutes dhammesu smam yeva dhammam abhinnaya) * Pp 14,12; A III 9,14 (pubbham ... ananussutes dhammesu abhinnvosnapramippatto); PatisI 174,4 (bhagav sayambh ancariyako pubbe ananussutes dhammesu smam saccni abhisambujjhati); Ap614,i4 (ananussutes dhammesu pubbe dukkhdikesu ca, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se ananussutadhammesu); 2. not having heard; ? Nidd-a I 441,8 fall, (ananussutes ti cariyam ananussutes, Ceso; Be, Ee, e cariyato) = Patis-a 484,26 (eds cariyam); see also anussveti. anusetthi(n), m. [anu1 + setthi(n)], a lesser setthi, a vicepresident of a guild; JaV 384,2 (-im dya gamissmi ti); 384,9(-inomamageham gatakle, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee setthino, prob, wr); 384,12 (-imhi bhunjante); ifc see settha-. anuseti, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + seti1; S. anuSete], 1. clings to, is occupied with; Sil 65,16 (yam ca... ceteti yam ca pakappeti yam ca -eti rammanam etam hoti vinnnassa thitiy); 11135,9 (yam kho bhikkhu -eti tena sankham gacchati); 2. lies latent; inheres; recurs persistently; D II 64,17 (-eti ti); MI 433,1 (~eti tv ev' assa sakkyaditthnusayo); A I 283,18 (kodho digharattam


-eti); Sv 1040,24 (appahinatthena -enti ti anusay); Patis I 123,35 (yam loke piyarpam starpam ettha sattnam kmargnusayo ~eti); Yam 268,9 foil. (kattha kmargnusayo -eti); pp anusayita, mfn., inherent, peristent, latent; Sn649 (digharattam -am ditthigatam ajnatam); Vism688,i7 (--tt); Pj II 350,29 (tanh digharattam appahinatthena -); ifc see digharatta-. anusoka. m. [S. lex. anuSoka], sorrow, regret; Thl-a52,i2 (tvam anusocasi -am pajjasi ti). anusocaka, mfn. [S. anuSocaka], mourning, regretting; Ja III 96,5' (tassa -assa sattassa, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se anusocanakassa). anusocati,/?r. 3 sg. [S. anuVSuc], mourns over, regrets, bewails; Dili 183,n (jino vittam ~ati); Sn851 (atitam nnusocati); Pv 12:7 (yo petam -ati); Thi 51 (tsam kam -asi); Ja III 95,i5* (tarn tarn ce ~eyya); (a)anusoca(t), mfn., Sv 726,24 (~ato uppannam domanassam); (b) anusocanta, m/(-anti)/j., Ja I 108,15 (manuss ... -ant nipajjimsu); V 94,8 (tarn yeva -anti); Cp-a 251,3 (maranam -anto); neg. ananusocanta, mfn., Thi-a208,26; (c)anusocamna,mfn., Jail 47,3 (-amn parodi); aor. 2 sg. anusoci, Ja IV 62,7 (m mam ~i); 3 pi. anusocimsu, Ja IV 79,7 (pornakapandit... mataputtam nnusocims ti); absol. anusocitv, Cp-a 262,10; fpp (a)anusocitabba, mfn., Ja III 97,2'; MpIII 349,i; (b)neg. ananusociya, mfn., Ja III 95,20* (vitam ananusociyam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ananusocitam; 97,i-. ananusociyam na anusocitabbam). anusocana, n. (and -, / ) [S. anuSocana], mourning; sorrow; SI 5,8* (angatappajappya atitassnusocan etenabl sussanti); JaV 367, ir (idam -am); Pv-a65,i9 (tassa tarn -am); Nidd-a 1379,19 (vatati * -atthe nipto). anusocanaka, mfn. [anusocana + ka2], mourning, regretting; Ja III 96,5' (tassa -assa sattassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anusocakassa). anusotam, ind. [anu1 + ace. o/sota 2 ], with the stream or current, downstream; Mill 185,29(-ampivuyhati patisotam pi vuyhati); Ja I 70,15 (-am gacchat ti); Ap 126,13 (Candabhgnaditife -am vajm' aham); Pet 229,21 (yo -am gacchati tanhvasena); (a)-gmi(n), mfn., following the stream; going with the current; AII 5,12 (-1 puggalo patisotagmi puggalo); Sn319 (so vuyhamno -1 kim so pare sakkhati trayetum); Pet228,i/o//.; Mil 113,2 (-im... Devadattam tathagato patisotam ppesi); 0(a)-patisotai|i, ind., up- and down-stream; M III 185,30 (~am pi vuyhati); see also anusotena. anusotena, ind. [anu1 + ins tr. 0/sota 2 ], with the stream or current, downstream; Jail 18,io (~ena nagaram gantv); see also anusotam. anus vir a, see sv anussra. anussati, anusati, / [S., BHS anusmrti], remembrance, recollection, calling to mind; Abh 158; SV 67,20 (~im ... tesam bhikkhnam bahukram vadmi) ^ It 107,9 (Se so; Be, Ce, Ee anussaranam); A III 329,12* (bhvayanti ~im); Dhs 93 (sati ~i patissati sati saranat dhranat) ^ Vibh 107,n; Vism 197,4/o//. (dasasu ~isu punappunam upajjanato sati yeva ~i); anussati in Ee at Dhs 1349 is wrfor asati (Be, Ce, Se so); anussati in

Ee at Ud-a 25,25 is prob, wr; Be anussutikam; Ce anussuti; Se anussaritam; ifc see upasama-, cg-, devata-, dhamm-, pubbenivs-, buddha-, maran-, sangha-, sil-; '-nuttariya, n., the supremacy of recollection; D i l i 250,10 (~am, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anussutnuttariyam) * A III 284, w; -ttlina, n., a subject of recollection; Dili 250,11 (cha ~ni; Sv 1037,2o: anussatiyo va ~ni nma, so read with Be, Ce, Se); A III 323,9 (panca bhante ~ni; MpIII 355,5: ~m ti anussatikranni); -visesa, m., special, excellent recollection; Saddh231; ananussati, / , absence of recollection, failure to remember; Dhs 1349 (asati ~i appatissati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anussati ~i) * Vibh 360,39. anussara, see sv anussra. anussarana, n. [S. anusmarana], remembrance, repeated recollection; It 107,9 (~am... tesam bhikkhnam bahpakram vadmi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anussatim; ^ SV 67,2o: anussatim); Vism 422,32; Ps I 159,32 (pasannena cittena ~am). anussaranaka, mfn. [anussarana + ka2], who remembers; ifc see kappa-. anussarati \ see sv anusarati. anussarati2, pr. 3 sg. [anu1 + sarati3; iS". anuVsmr], remembers, recollects, calls to mind; reflects upon; Vin III 4,2i (anekavihitam pubbenivsam ~mi); D I 18,30/0//. (tarn pubbenivsam ~ati tato pararn nanussarati); II 8,6 (yatra hi nma tathagato atite buddhe... jtito -issati nmato -issati); Sil 183,12 (te divase divase kappasatasahassam ~eyyum); A III 213,25* (~eyya sambuddham); Sn326 (attham dhammam samyamam brahmacariyam ~e c' eva samcare ca); Th382 (buddham appameyyam -a); Ja II 148,8 (namakkram karont pi satta buddhe -ath ti); III 360,30* (tarn te purnam vatasilavantam suttappabuddho va -ami); Mil 80,3 (anekavihitam pubbenivsam ~ati); (a)anussara(t), mfn., Mil 181,9 (mtpettikam kulavamsam ~ato); SI 219,34 (mamam hi vo bhikkhave -atam); Dhp364 (dhammam-am bhikkhu); JaV 320,24* (vane... posemi mtpitaro pubbekatam -am); (b) anussaranta, w/(~anti)/i., Sn691 (attano gamanam -anto); Ja V 44,8* (uddham ca sussmi -anti; 44,i2': tena vranena mayi katam veram-amn); Mil 139,12 (sukatagunam -ant); neg. ananussaranta, mfn. Sv 862,18 (lokuppattim ananussaranta ajnant, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -ant); (c)anussaramna,mfn., SI 51,4 (bhagavantam -amno); Ud 18,29; aor. 3sg. anussari, JaV 231,3: Ap 352,9; 3pi. anussarum, Ap430,i9; 2pi anussarittha, JaV 191,i6*(m ssu pubbe ratikilitni hasitni -ittha m vo km hanimsu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ittho); absol. (a)anussaritv, Ja III 330,20 (vuddhe pana mtpitaro -itv); Ap 152,2i; Mil 90,15 (sammsambuddhe -itv); Vism 297,23; neg. ananussaritv, Dhp-aIII 120,n; (b) anussaram (namul; or, nom. sg. for pi), DII 274,i* (duve viriyam rabhimsu -am Gotamassanni, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anussar; Sv 709,6: -am-itv ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ims ti attho); A III 43,28* (santo sappuris ... pubbe katam -am; Mp III 251,18: mtpithi pathamataram katagunam -ant);


pass, anussariyamna, mfn., Vism299,i8; Ps III 429,4 (porne mtpettike kulavamse -iyamne); pp anussarita, mfn. and n.., recalled; recollection, reflection-, Spkll 158,11 (ekena kappasatasahasse -); Pv-a 165,29 (sayam -am anntam idam may); Ap-a 447,13 (bodhipjya ~-tt ten' eva pitisomanassena); neg. ananussarita, mfn., Sil 183,12 (te divase divase kappasatasahassam anussareyyum ananussarita va bhikkhave tehi kapp assu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anussarita); fpp (a) anussaritabba, mfn., A V 247,2 (~am ca vo bhikkhave dhammam desissmi); Vism 230,27 (imehi atthah' krehi maranam ~am); Pj I 142,5 (evamdini c'ettha suttni ~ni); (b) anussaraniya, mfn., Sv 942,26 (kath nma ~ hon); Saddh 587 (tasmnussaraniyesu buddhdisu); caus. inf. anussarpetum, to cause someone to recall, Ja II 147,2. anussarita(r), m. [from anussarati], one who recollects or remembers; MI 356,19 (satim hoti... cirakatam pi cirabhsitam pi sarit ~) = SV 197,12 ^ A II 35,25 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anusarit). anussava, m. [BHS anurava], what has been heard or repeated; hearsay; tradition; Abhll99; Mil 170,24 (~ p' ettha brhman payirpsanti ti); A I 189,8 (m ~ena ma paramparya m itikirya); Ja IV 441,17* (~ vaddhato gam v); Sp 111,21 (khal ti 0,-atthe nipto, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anussavanatthe); Ud-a72,i9 (kir ti '-atthe nipto); 'palabbha, mfii., to be learnt or ascertained by report; Ud-a356,n (~-mattena); -ppasanna, mfn., who believes from hearsay or report; A I 26,26; -sacca, mfn., depending on tradition for one's truths; accepting tradition as true; M I 520,4 (ekacco satth anussaviko hoti ~o; Ps HI 233,24: ~o ti savanam saccato gahetv thito). anussavati, see sv anusavati. anussavana, n. [from *anu1 + sunti], hearsay; report; Spkll 403,19 (~am anussavo); Pv-a 103,5 (kirasaddo -e, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se aruciscane). anussavan in Ee at It-a I 68,29 is wrfor anussvan qv. anussavika, anussaviya, mfn. [anussava + ika], following the tradition, learning from hearsay; MI 520,3 (ekacco satth ~o hoti anussavasacco); II211,11 (eke samanabrhman ~ te anussavena ... dibrahmacariyam patijnanti); Kv 286,29 (anussaviyo ti); -pasda, m., belief inspired by hearsay or report; Mp I 458,8 (~am uppdetv). anussra, anusvra, anusra2, anussara, m. [S. anusvra], the nasal sound (m), niggahita; Sadd 162,26 (chandnurakkhanattham gamavasen' evnusro hoti); 606,27 (niggahitan ti ssane vohro saddasatthe pana tarn anusvro ti vadanti); Bv-a71,24 (amatantale ti... ~am pakkhipitv vuttam, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anussaram); 71,27 (gamanampathe ti gamanapathe, chandvinsattham '-gamam katv vuttam, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anussargamam); 164,5 (anussarena). anussvaka, m. [from anussveti], one who proclaims (the kammavc); one who presents for upasampad; Vin I 74,9 (~assa jivh uddharitabb). anussavana, anusvana, n., ~, / [BHS anuSrvana, anuSrvan], 1. causing to be heard, sounding;

proclamation (esp. of a kammavc,); Vin I 340,23 (~ ca pannatt); V 186,22 (nattiy -am na jnti); 220,5 (~ato); Sp 1195,13 (natticatutthhi tihi ~hi kattabbakammam); Sv 441,4 (mahatiy dhammabheriy -assa pubbanimittam); Vin-vn 2545; 2. canvassing, speaking repeatedly (in order to win support); Vin V 201,i3(~ena salkaghena); It-a I 68,29 (kammam uddeso vohro ~ salkaggho ti imesu pancasu sanghassa bhedakranesu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anussavana). anussvanaka, m(fn). [anussavana + ka2], (one) who proclaims (the kammavc^; Sp 1088,26 (vinayadharapancamen ti 0-cariyapancamena, Ee, Se so; Ce anusvana-; iteanussvancariya-). anussveti, anusveti, ~ayati,pr. 3 sg. [caus. o/*anu' + sunti; BHS anugrvayati], causes to be heard; speaks out; proclaims (esp. a kammavc); presents (someone) for upasampad; speaks repeatedly (in order to win support); Vin I 92,36 (yasmato Mahkassapassa upasampadpekkho hoti... gacchatu nando imam -essati ti); 317,30 (kammavcam -eti); 11203,27 (catuttho ~eti salkam gheti ayam dhammo ayam vinayo; Sp 1277,7: -eti ti anunayanto sveti); A I 228,16 (saddam ~eyya); Mil 248,32 (parisya evam -eyya); anussventa, mfn., Sp 1033,7 (kammavcam ~entehi); aor. 3sg. anussvesi, DU 205,22 (yakkho saddam ~esi); Sp 252,28 (yo mam pabbjesi yo mam --esi); 3pl. (a) anussvesum, MI 210,21 (bhumm dev saddam ~esum); (b) anusvayimsu, Spk III 298,17; absol. anussvetv, anusvetv, Ap 534,s; Sp 1277,13 (salkam gheti ti evam ~etv); 1378,7; It-al 68,24; pass, anussviyamna, mfn., being proclaimed, being announced; Vin I 103,7 (yvatatiyam ~iyamne); /?/? anussvita, mfn., proclaimed, announced; Vin I 103,6 (yvatatiyam ~itam hoti); fpp anussvetabba, mfn., Sp 1033,12 (ekena cariyenadve v tayo v ~etabb); see also anusyati. anussuki(n), [from ussuka ? or perhaps for anissuki(n) qv sv issuki(n)], not eager or desirous; not repining (for); Vv-a74,2 (anussukitdin attano sabhvasilena); 74,9 (Uttar upsik silcrasampann ~I amacchari akodhan ti). anussuta 1 , mfn., pp of anusyati qv. anussuta 2 , mfn. [neg. pp o/*ut + savati; or perhaps for *anossuta = anavassuta qv], free from lust or defilement; Dhp400 (silavantam -am, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anussadam; Dhp-alV 166,1: tanh-ussvbhvena ~am, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tanh-ussadbhvena anussadam) * Sn 624 (eds anussadam) = M sutta 98 (not in Ee; Be, Ce anussadam; Se anussudam; Ps III 437,24: rgdi-ussadavirahitam anussadam. anussutan ti pi ptho, anavassutan ti attho, Be, Se, Ce so; Ee anussadan ti pi ptho anuvassutan ti attho). anussutnuttariya in Ee at D III 250,10 is wr for anussatnuttariya qv sv anussati. anussutika, m(fn). [anussuta1 + ika or ami1 + suti + ka2], (one) who bases his beliefs on tradition or a story or hearsay; Sv 106,28/o/Z. (catubbidho takki ~o jtissaro lbhi suddhatakkiko ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anussatiko). anussusuko in Ee at Ja IV 344,21' is wr for anussuko


(Be, Ce so; Se appossuko). anussyik in Ce, Ee at Vv 33:71 is wr for anusyik qv sv usyaka. anuham, ind. [ami1 + aha(n); cfS. anvaham], day by day, every day; Jinak 86,24*. anuhasati,/?r. 3 sg. [anu1 + hasati], laughs at, ridicules; Sv 256,3i (mam yeva -anti na annanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ant). anuhlramna, mfn. [pass, partpr. of *anu1 + harati], being held over; D i l 15,9 (setamhi chatte ~e [a tutthubha pda], Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anudhriyamne) = Mill 123,20 (Ce, Se so; Be anudhriyamne; Ee anubhlramne); see also anudhriyamna. andaka, see sv udaka. anna,see.yvna. annaka, see sv naka. anpa, anupa (and anopa), mfn. andm. [S. anpa, npa], (mfn.) near the water, watery, moist; (m.) watery land, lowland; Abh 187; JaIV 381,12' (sassam... mandavutthikle ... ~e sampaijat' eva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anpakhette); ifc see harita-; -khetta, n., a watery field; water-meadow; Ja IV 381,6* (thale ca ninne vapanti bijam ~e phalam sasn); 381,10' (ativutthikale ... sassam ... ~e nadim ca talakam ca nissya katam oghena vuyhati, Be, Se so; Ce npe; Ee wr tape); Ap 190,3 (nadik sampavattatha tass cnpakhettamhi, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee anupa-); Mil 129,31 (~e bijam ropeyya); -tittha, n.9 the watery bank (of a river); Ap 345,26 (~e jyanti padumuppalak bah); -desa, m., marshy country; Spklll 81,25 (jangaladesavsmam hi ~e vasantnam visabhgo utu uppajjati, so readl Be, Ee anupadese; Ce nuppadese; Se anuppadese); -bhmi,/, watery ground; Ja IV 359, ir (haritatinasanchann ~iyo, Be, Ce so; Ee anupa-; Se anup bhmiyo). anpakhajja, ind., absol o/anupakkhandati qv. anpaghta, see sv upaghta'. anpaddtan ti in Ee at It-al 61,26 is wr for anupaddutan ti (Be, Ce, Se so). anpadhika, see sv anupadhika. anpanhi(n), see sv upanhi(n). anpanita, see sv upaneti. anpaneyya, neg. absol. of upaneti qv. anpama, see sv upam. anpaya, see sv upaya. anpalitta, see sv upalimpati. anpavda, see sv upavda. anprambha, m. [anu1 + uprambha], criticism, faultfinding; Vibh373,2 (yo uprambho ~ o . . . randhagavesit). anprambhan, / [anu1 + uprambhan], criticism, fault-finding; Vibh 373,2 (yo uprambho anprambho uprambhan ~... randhagavesit). anprambhita, mfn. \pp of anu1 + uprambhati ?], criticising, finding fault; Vibh 373,3 (uprambhan anprambhan -ttam... randhagavesit). anposathikan ti in Ee at Sp 876,33 is wr for anuposathikan ti (Be, Ce, Se so). ansaya, see sv anusaya.

aneka, see sv eka. anekamsa, m., see sv ekamsa'. anekamsikata, mfn. [neg. pp o/*ekamsa 1 + karoti], not decided; not determined; not absolute; VinV 148,21* (aniyato na niyato ~am padam; Sp 1352,\foll: yasm idam sikkhpadam anekamsena katan ti attho). aneja, mfn.and n.y see sv ej. anejjankrita in Ee at Ap 25,22 is wr for nenjakrita qv sv nenja. anefija, see sv nenja. anedha, mfn. [cfS. edha], without fuel; Ja IV 26,22* (~o dhmaketu va; 27,io': anindhano aggi viya). anela1, seesveW. anela2, mfn. [abstracted from anelamga qv sv elamga], not foolish; wise; Pp 13,i6(puggal ... saddh chandik panfiavanto ~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); Pj II 124,10 (anelamgo t i . . . ~o ca amgo ca, pandito vyatto ti vuttam hoti). anelaka (and anilaka, anilaka, anelaka), mfn. [BHS anedaka, anelaka], (of honey) pure; Vin III 7,9 (seyyath pi khuddamadhum anilakam evamassdam; Sp 182,18: -an ti nimmakkhikam nimmakkhikandakam parisuddham); D III 85,17 (khuddamadhu ~am, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee anelakam); MII 5,8 (puriso ... khuddam madhum anelakam pileyya; Ps III 237,21: niddosam apagatamacchikandakam); A III 369,9 (sdni phalni ahesum seyyath pi nma khuddam madhum ~am, Se so; Be, Ce anelakam; Ee anilakam); Ja VI 529,25* (madhum anelakam tattha sakam dya bhufijare); Ap87,20 (pitharam prayitvna madhukhuddam -am, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anelakam); 193, is (madhukhudde anilake, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anilake). anejakasappa, m. [?], a kind of venomous snake; Spk III 7,22 (yassa pana visam sigham abhirhati na sigham otarati 0,-dinam visam viya; Spk-t[5e]II 325,12: ~o nma mah -siviso). anelagala, anelagala, anelagala, mfn. [derivation uncertain; cts explain with ela1 or el3 qqv; perhaps cfalso S. id, il], (prob.) faultless (of speech, of voice); Vin I 197,2 (kalyniy pi si vcya samanngato vissatthya -ya atthassa vinnpaniy) * D I 114,9 (Sv 282,27 fall: ~y ti elagalena virahitya, yassa kassaci hi kathentassa el galati ll paggharati khelaphusitni v nikkhamanti tassa vc elagal nma hoti) * SI 189,31 (Spkl 275,29: ~y ti anejya agalya niddosya c'eva agalitapadavyanjanya ca, therassa hi kathayato padam v vyanjanam v na parihyati) = II 280,7 (Spk II 239,1: ~y ti yath manuss mukhena khelam galantena vcam bhsanti na evarpya, atha kho niddosya visadavcya) = AII 51,16. anesamna, mfn. [neg. of esati1 qv or of isati1 qv], not searching (for anything); or not being in control; JaV 15,26* (yam pitv cittasmi ~o hindati" go-r-iva bhakkhasri; 18,2r: ~o tianissaro); see also anthamna. ano- represents l.S. anava- (and occasionally anapa-); 2. S. an- (and occasionally anu-); 3. S. anvava-. anoka, mfn.and m. or n.9 see sv oka. anoksa, m. and mfn., see sv oksa.


anoja, m., or ~a, / [?], name of a flowering tree or shrub\ Ja VI 536,34* (korandak ~ ca); Ap 118,6 (carigotake thapetvna -am puppham uttamam). anojaka, m. or ~a, / [anoja + ka2], the anoja tree; Vv-a 161,27 (yodhik bandhujivak ~ rukkh ca santi ti attho). anojagghati, see sv anujagghati. anonami(n), anonami(n), mfn. [from onamati], not bowing, not bending; inflexible; (i)-dan4ajta, mfn., like an inflexible or stiff stick; Mil 238,3 (so dhto pinito paripunno nirantaro tandikato ~o, Ee so, perhaps wr; Ce anonami-; Be anonamita-; Se anonamito dandajto) quoted Sv 901,32 (Ee anonami-; Be, Ce, Se anonamita-), Mp II 12,17 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anonamita-) and Vibh-a 435, n (eds anonamita-). anotaraniya, mfn., neg.fpp o/otarati qv. anottappsika, mfn. [from anottappa qv sv ottappa], connected with shamelessness, of the nature of shamelessness; Kv 339,4 (anottappena sahajt ti katv ~ ti). anottpi(n), mfn., see sv ottpi(n). anottharaniya, mfn., neg.fpp ofottharati qv. anodaka, mfn., see sv udaka. anodiso in Ee at Pet 38,20 is wrfor anodhiso (Be, Ce so). anonata, anonamanta, see sv onamati. anonamaka, mfn. [from onamati], not bending down, not stooping; who does not stoop; Dhp-all 136,16 (vasanageham c' assa nicam hoti ~ena pavisitum na sakk, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anonatena). anopa, see sv anpa. anopama, see sv upam. anoma, see sv oma. anomajjati,pr. 3 sg. [ami1 + o2 + majjati; cfS. avaVmrj], rubs down along; strokes (one's limbs) again and again; MI 80,31 (aham... tarn eva kyam asssento pnin gattni -ami); 509,11 (~ati); (a)anomajja(t), mfn., MI 80,32 (tassa mayham... ~ato); (b)anomajjanta, mfn., SV 216,18 (~anto; Spklll 244,6: ~anto ti pitthiparikammakaranavasena anumajjanto); absol. anomajjitv, Th-all 112,23 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anumajjitv); see also anumajjati. anomasanta, mfn. [ of *anu1 + omasati; c/anumasati], continually considering, reflecting (on); Ap 421,28 (~o cariyam vasmi ekako aham, Ee so, perhaps wr; Se ~o acari; Be, Ce anvesanto acariyam). anorapra, mfn., seesvoxz. anoramanta, anoramitv, see sv oramaXl anoropaka, mfn. [from oropeti, caus. of orohati], who does not lower or remove; Nidd-a I 406,16 (anikkhittadhuro ti viriyadhurassa ~o). anovatta, anovattha, mfn., neg. pp o/ovassate qv. anovassa, mfn.and n. [a3 + o2 + vassa], 1. (mfn.) not rained upon, sheltered from the rain; kept dry; Ja III 73,n (attano manpam ~am kulvakam katv, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee anovassakam); Mil 223,22 (Ghatikrassa kumbhakrassa vesanam ~am ksacchadanam ahosi); 2. (n.) a place sheltered from the rain; Vin II 232,10* (in uddna: ~; cf 211,32); JaV 317,15* (devamhi vassamnamhi -am bhavam aka; Be, Ce, Se so; Ee

anvvassam; 317,28': -an tiavassam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anvvassan ti anu-avassam); Vin-vn 1066 (~e ca no sati); see also ovassaka. anovassika, see sv ovassaka. anovadanam in Ee at Ps II 415,25 is wrfor anovadanam (Be, Ce,Seso). anosakkatya in Ee at Mp II 94,7 is wr for anosakkanaya (Be, Ce, Se so). anosita, mfn., see sv osita. anta1, m. [ts], 1. end, limit, conclusion; death, destruction; edge, boundary; extreme, opposing principle; (gr.t.t.) final letter or syllable (ifc); Abh404 (~o cavanam); Vin II 136,14 (kyabandhanassa ~o jirati); III 226,10 (thokam yeva odatam -e diyitv); DI 54,13 (dukkhass' ~am karissanti); Mill 230,12 (ete te ubho - anipagamma majjhim patipad tathgatena abhisambuddh); S I 62,27* (lokassa ~am samitvi natv); IV330,28 (dve 'me... ~ pabbajitena na sevitabb); Sn 582 (ubho ~e asampassam); Thi 447 (tassa pi ~o kato me, so Th App. II, p. 244); Ja III 47,9* (niraye paccamnnam kad -0 bhavissati); VI 23,15* (kacci - ca te phit; 23,3r: ~ ti paccantajanapada); instr. antena, adv.y at last, in the end; SI 32,3* (atha -na jahati sariram sapariggaham); loc. ante', I. at the end; Mhv 26:22 (ahu satasahassaggho parikkhro sa dito -e sahassagghanako); 37:248 (maccum accetum ~e no sakkhimsu); 2. near, within; Sv 36,3 (~e vasati ti antevsi); see also antevsi(n), antevsika, antevsik; ifc (sometimes pleonastic, or meaning "completion, summation of") see apar'-, kr'- (sv a1), ks'- (svksa2), ikr'- (sv'\), flcr'- (sv\), ukara'(sv u), ubh' - (sv ubho), kr' - (sv 1 ), ekar'- (sv e), ek'-, okar'- (svo 1 ), kammanta, khem'-, gm'- (svgma1), catu-r-anta (sv catu[r]), paccanta, panta, pariyanta, pavananta, pubb'- (sv pubba2), bhasm'-, (sv bhasmafn]) yug'-, van'- (sv vana1), ved'-, samanta, sim'-, sutf(svsutta2), suddh'-, supin'-, sopp'-; 2. inner part, inside; Ja 1146,29* (sace imassa kyassa ~o bhirato siy; or anto?); '-akkharnam in Ce, Ee at Dhp-alV 71,4 is perhaps wr; Be, Se akkharnam; nanta, m., finiteness or limitlessness; D I 22,14 (eke samanabrhman antnantika ~am lokassa pannpenti); 22,16 (kirn rabbha antnantika -am lokassa pannapenti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr lokam); nantika, mfn., believing in the finiteness or limitlessness (of the world); D I 22,13 (eke samanabrhman ~ antnantam lokassa pannpenti); PatisI 155,17 (... cattro ekaccasassatik cattro ~); '-antena, -m-antena, adv., from end to end; Ja I 64,15 (~ena caritv); Bv3:9 (samuddam antamantena isseram vattaym' aham); Ud-a65,i6 (~en'eva); antantena in Ee at Dhp-a III 202,16 is prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se pdantena; -kara, mfn. [anta+ kara1], putting an end (to, gen.); DII123,11* (dukkhass' - 0 satth); Sn 337 (dukkhass' -o bhava); SI 188,4* (vijjy' ~o; Spkl 271,14: viijya kilesnam -0, Be, Ce, Seso; Ee wr antarako) = Th 1222; Mil278,7 (agado... rognam ~o); -kamma, n., making an end; Sadd489,i3 (s ~ani: siyati); -kiriya,/ > putting an end to; destruction; Vin I 13,i (caratha brahmacariyam samm dukkhassa ~y ti); S IV


93,8 (dukkhassa -am vadmi ti); Sn454 (dukkhass' -ya); -ga, mfn. [anta + ga2], having reached the end, thoroughly conversant with, reaching perfection (in); extreme', VinV 140,1* (in uddna: micch samm ca -; c/138,12/0//.: dasavatthuk sammditthi dasa antagghik ditthi); Ap-a495,io (caranadhammnam -o pariyosnam patto); ifc see caran' -, bhav'-, maran'-; -gata in Ee at Ja V 208,25' is wr for antogata qv; -gamaka, mfn., bringing to an end; Pj II 566,29; -(g)ghik,(m)/(). [cf BHS antagrhadrsti], involving extreme standpoints; VinI 172,ii (micchditthi ~ ditthi ayam ditthivipatti ti); D III 45,17 (micchditthiko hoti -ya ditthiy samanngato); Patisl \ 5], 9 foil. (~ya ditthiy); neg. anantagghik, (m)f(n)., D III 48,2 (na micchditthiko anantagghikya ditthiy samanngato, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se na -ya); -gu, mfn., going to the end, having reached the end; Sn 458 (ya-d vedag); 539 (~ si prag dukkhassa); ifc see ved'-; -m-antena, adv., see above sv 0,-antena; -mukha in Ee at Ja IV 402,18 is wr for yantamukha qv; -lutti,/, (gr.t.t.) the dropping, elision of a final element; Sadd 857,9; -va(t), mfn., having an end, limited, finite; D I 22,2i (-v ayam loko parivatumo); Mil 233,19 (-v att ca loko ca); Patisl 77,34 (rope -vantato vavattheti; Patis-a 289,19/0//.: -vato ti anto assa atthiti -v, -v yeva -vanto); Dhs 1099 (-v loko ti v anantavloko ti v); Mil 145,i2(-v ca anantav ca loko ti); PsII 413,H* (-vantni bhtni); neg. anantav, mfn., D I 189,28 (anantav loko); Ud67,9; ananta, mfn. and n., I. (mfn.) endless, infinite, boundless; D I 223,12* (vinfinam anidassanam -am); 1164,7 (rpi me -o att ti); A IV 428,24 (-ena fianena antavantam lokam jnarn); Vibh 262,5 (-0 kso ti); Mil 278,14; 2. (n.) the infinite, the unlimited; Abh 7 (nibbnam... -am akkharam); dassi(n),mfn., of unlimited sight, seeing everything; SI 143,16* (--dassi bhagav 'ham asmi); paiina, mfn., of infinite understanding, of endless wisdom; Sn468 (tathagato hoti ~-panno); ati-anta, mfn., very great; absolute; Nidd-a 1203,30 (accantasanri ti nissaranasanti, Be, Se so; Ce -; Ee -am); see also accanta, ekantilca, eka-m-antam, eka-m-antikam, eka-m-ante, etadantika, odakantika, nsanantika, nitthnantika, pakkamanantika, sannitthnantika, savanantika. anta2, mfn, [S. antya], last, ultimate; worst, mean, contemptible; Abh 714 (-0 pariyanto); 791; SHI 93,4 (-am idam... jiviknam yad idam pindolyam); Ja II 440,25* (mignam kotthuko -o; 440,27". -oti hino lmako); 'anta, -m-anta, mfn., the most remote; D III 38,13 (so antamantn' eva sevati); Ps IV 103,23 (pabbatagahandini nissya -e game paharanto) = Mp II 168,17 (antamante); -vanna, m., a man of the lowest class, a Sudra; Abh 503; ifc see puris'-. anta3, n. (sg. and pi.) [S. antra, antra], the bowels, intestines; VinI 276,16 (antaganthim vinivethetv -ni patipavesetv udaracchavim sibbetv); D II 293,15; S II 270,28 (-am pi khdi antagunam pi khdi); Ja I 367,32 (kimpakkaphalam... khditam pana -ni khandetv

jivitakkhayarn ppeti); Vism258,4/o//.; -ganthi, m., twisting of the gut, a twisted gut; Vin I 276,10; -'-bdha,/., the illness of twisting of the gut; VinI 275,23;-guna, n., the intestinal tract; D i l 293,15; Sil 270,28; Mil370,13*; Vism258,13/0//.; -vatti,/, the bowels, intestines; Ja III 160,2 (-Uli rukkham parikkhipitv); Vism 258,5 (ekavisatiy thnesu obhagg -i). antaka1, m(fn). [ts], "making an end", a designation of the god of death, identified with Mra; Abh 43 (-0 vasavatti... Mro); VinI 21,i6* (nihato rvam asi - ti; c/Sp 966,27: - ti lmaka hinasatta); SI 72,14* (antakendhipannassa jahato mnusam bhavam; Spkl 139,8: maranena ajjhotthatassa); Dhp48 (naram... -o kurute vasarn); Th 1207 (karato te ciyate pparn cirarattya -a); Ja IV 396,30* (antakendhipannassa k rati); Vism 233,14* (~assa vasam gat). antaka2, n. and mfn. [anta1 + ka2], 1. (n.) end, boundary; border; Ap 5,19 (dis dasavidh loke yyato n* atthi -am); 2. (mfn.) having an edge or border; Ps III 239,n (nantakni tina -ni antavirahitni vatthakhandni, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se omit na -ni); Spk III 276,17 (nantakni tina -ni, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se anantakni); see also anantaka2. antaka3, n. [anta3 + ka2], entrails; ifc see sukar'-. antaggata, mfn. [S. antargata], included; Abh 742 (~e tu pariypannam); see also antogata sv anto. antajana, m. [= antojana], the inner household; servants; ifc see susangahit' - sv sanganhti. antataritv in Ee at Ja I 218,28 is prob, wr; Be avattharitv; Ce antaritv; Se uttaritv. antati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup antati, Wg 3:24], binds; Sadd 360,22 (ati bandhane: -an); 468,5; pass, pr. 3 sg. antiyati, Sadd 360,22 (-iyati bandhiyati antagunen ti antam); see also andati, Val2. antamaso, ind. [BHS antamaSas], even; even so much as; Vin III 259,36 (kincimattam anupadajjeyya ~o pindaptamattam pi ti); D I 168,25 (gahapatin v gahapatiputtena v -o kumbhadsiy pi); M III 126,18 (nbhijnmi mtugmassa dhammam desit - o catuppadam pi gtharn); A I 34,29 (appamattakam pi bhavam na vannemi -o accharsanghtamattam piti); Ja II 129,18 (bodhisatto -0 anjalim paggahetv thite sabbe pi ... janapadam netv); VI 593,6 (-0 bille updya Vessantaramahrj sabbasatte vissajjpesi); Mil 110,11 (na kinci bhante apunnam pajjeyya -0 gaddhanamattam pl ti); Vism 71,33 (gmo nma ... -0 atirekactumsanivittho yo koci sattho pi). antara, mfn. and n. [ts; iic represents also S. antar], 1. (mfn.) interior; inner, inward; MI 39,i (sinto ~ena sinnen ti); III 274,33 (anupahacca -am mamsakyam); ifc see abbhantara, nirantara; 2. (n.) (i) interior part, inside; heart, mind; place between; interval (of time or space); moment between (two events); distance; difference, disagreement; Abh 771 (abbhantaram -am); 802; Vin II 286,13 (etasmim ~e anupdya savehi cittam vimucci); S V 147,13 (tass' eva leddussa -am paccupdi); A1215,11* (etasmim yam vijjati ~e dhanarn); It 121,22 (yam ca... rattim tathagato anuttaram sammsambodhim abhisambujjhati yam ca


rattim anupdisesya nibbnadhtuy parinibbyati yarn etasmim -e bhsati... sabbam tarn tatheva hon' no annath); Pv 21:66 (mahdnam tay dinnarn Ankura digham -am); Ja III 34,24* (na tvarn assattha jnasi mama corassa c' -am); V 197, n* (kim te idam runam -asmim); Mil 292,26 (kim ... -am ko viseso); acc. -am, adv., between, among; in the midst; JaV 351,8* (ngarj-r-iv' -am pativattum na sakkomi; 351,14': selyabbhantaram pavittho ngarj viya... tumhkam dvinnam ~e na sakkomi); antaram karoti, 1. crosses over, steps over; JaV 298,6 (gabbhadvre ummram -am katv); VI 56,3 (rann katam lekham koci -am ktum nsakkhi); 2. is at a distance; Pv-a 139,3 (dasa dve yojanni -am katv); 3. concentrates on, keeps in mind; M III 14,4 (so kmargam yeva -am karitv); 38,2 (patipadam yeva -am karitv); ins tr. antarena, through, between (acc. or gen.); DU 134,11 (~ena yamakaslnam); MI 517,31 (sattannam tv eva kynam -ena sattharn vivaram anupatati); S V 170,9 foil, (telapatto -ena ca mahsamajjam -ena ca janapadakalynim parihtabbo); abl. antar, see sv; antarato, ind., from within, inwardly; AIV 96,2i* (bhayam -ato jtarn); Sn 6 (yass' -ato na santi kop); he. antare, between, amidst, among; within, inside; with regard to; (+ gen.); Ja I 52,15 (dvinnam pana nagarnam -e); III 67,16 (ayarn mam' ~e dusseyya, Ee so; Ce, Se mama ~e dubbheyya; Be mama antepure dubbheyya); 82,20 (imesam ettaknam manussnam -e); 423,27' (mtu ~e bhinditum); VI 143,27' (rajanivesanassa -e); Dhp-aIII 416,6 (tay kira mama ~e evam vuttan ti) Mhv 10:105 (Pandakbhayaranno ca Abhayassa ca -e); ifc (sometimes: a different..., another...) see atth'(sv attha2), adhikr'-, ananugat' - (.sv anugacchati), amis' -, ittrT- (.svitthi), ubhaya-m-antare, ubhaya-m-antarena, elaka-m-antaram (svelaka2), kacch'(^vkacch), klantare, klantarena (sv kla'), kop' -, citt' - (sv citta'), danda-m-antaram, digh'-, dos'- (^vdosa2), nagantare, parisantare (^v paris), puris,-, buddh'-, bhav'-, bhumm'-, musala^n-antaram, mon'-, vtapnantarena, vici-, hatth'-; 2. (ii) inner meaning, real state of the case; SI 201,24* (kim ~an ti; Spkl 295,9: kimkran); Jail 119,19 (manuss tarn ~am ajnant); IV81,4 (tarn ~am koci na jnti); (iii) weakness, weak point; Abh 802 (~am ... chidde); Ja VI 5,20 (vimamsanta ~am na passimsu); 467,9; (iv) the inner robe (of the three robes of the bhikkhu); Abh 802; Sp 651,2 (-an ti antaravsako vuccati); 0, -amsa, n. [antara + arnsa2; S. antarmsa], the area between the shoulders; Sv449,6; ifc see cit'- (sveinti), vihat'- (^vvihata2); ' -attlaka, m., intermediate watch-tower; Ja VI 390,2; '-atthaka (or anta-r-atthaka/rom anto), mfn., occurring between the atthak (qv) days; VinI 31,35 (sitsu hemantiksu rattisu -su himaptasamaye); M I 79,24 (y t rattiyo Sita hemantik ~e himaptasamaye) = Mil 396,4; AI 136,31 (sit ... hemantikratti ~ohimaptasamayo; Mp II 225,6: -o ti mghaphaggunnam antare atthadivasaparimno klo); Jal 390,21 (himaptasamaye ~e); '-antare, ind., X.from time to time; at intervals; Ja 1259,29 (-e tattha gantv); Dhp-aIV 59,19;

2. inside, in the middle (of); in between; Sp545,n (manussehi chadditam disv pi acletv va ~e sammaijitabbam); Mp II268,13 (aiiniss kathya -e katar kath uppajjl ti); Dhp-al 59,12 (vanasandassa -e vicarati); 01 -antarena, ind., from time to time; through, through the middle of; Ja II 5,16 (~ena satthu dhammam sunanto klam vitinmeti); Sv694,3 (~ena Mrasenarn pesetv); Dhp-al 63,6 (ngo bhikkhnam -ena gantv); tita in Ee at Ja II 243,17 is wr for anantartita qv; ' -vsa, m., an interregnum; Dip 5:80 (Tambapanni-antarvse); -kappa, m. (and n.) [BHS antarakalpa], 1. a subdivision or intermediate cycle of a mahkappa; D I 54,4 (Svl62,io: ekasmim kappe catusatthi - nma honti) = MI 517,35 = SHI 211,23; Ap-a 228,19 (~ni); 2. a short intermediate period (of destruction); Sv854,i2 (~o ca nam' esa dubbhikkhantarakappo rogantarakappo satthantarakappo ti tividho); Mp II 220,26; -karana, n. [antara + karana1], stepping over; Ps II 44,12; -kja, m., a load on a carrying pole suspended between two persons; Patis-a 667,13 (macchabandh tarn sakalam eva ~ena dya); see also antarkja sv antara1; -kjaka, m, id., Vin-vn2818; -khajjaka, n., a between-meaU a snack; Ja I 395,19 (~am khditv, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se antare khajjakam); Ps III 390,7 (manpam -an ti); -gabbha in Ce, Ee at Dhp-a 1397,15 is prob, wrfor anantaragabbha qv; -gmam in Ee at Vin IV 101,5 is prob, wr for antarrmam (Be, Ce, Se, Sp 857, is so); -ghara, m., the inside of a house; ? Sp 633,15 (-ass* ev' eso vuso doso); -gharam, ind., between the houses, among the houses (ie in the village); within a house; Vin I 40,5 (~am pavittho pindya carati); IV 176,8 (bhikkhuniy -am pavitthya; 176, is: -am nma rathiy vyharn singhtakam ghararn); Mil 7,31 (te -am pavitth; Ps III 240,10: idha indakhilato patthya adhippetarn); 137,25 (so -am pavisanto na kyam unnmeti; Ps III 388,23 foil.: idha gharummrato patthya veditabbam); Niddl 228,9; Mil 11,24; Vin-vn 1830; -ghare, ind., within a house; VinI 341,1 (bhikkh bhattagge -e); SHI 121,13 (katham hi nma mdiso ~e klam kattabbam manneyy ti); Sp 978,28; -cakka, n., a branch of astrology or augury; Mil 178,22 (seakkam migacakkam -am); -dipa, m. [BHS antaradvlpa], an island in the middle (of a body of water); a small island; Sp 1137,5 (mahdip ca - ca); Pj II 27,4 (Mahmahi bhijjitv ... samgantv pavatt yam oksam -am aksi) -dipaka, m., id.; Ja 1240,11; III 133,n; MpII253,3i; -dvre, ind., within the gate; Ja I 308,27 (-e dasabalam disv); V 231,28; Ps II 15,24; -dhna, -dhpan, -dhyana, seesvv; -pura, n., the royal palace; Ja VI 143,25* (vilapanto -asmim, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se antepurasmim; 143,27': rajanivesanassa antare); -bhira, mfn., (which is) inside and outside; Jal 125,26 (-am... rattham); Dhp-aIII 468,1*; -bhatta, n., a between-meal, a snack; snack-time (mid-morning); Jal 119,17 (ekasmim yev' assa ~e... arahattam adsi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se antarbhatte); Spk II 226,4 (dutiyo yva - javitv... sayarn pana yva


majjhantik javitv, Be, Se so; Ce Ee antarbhatt); Pj II 107,5 (sdo -ampacitv); 117,27; antarabhatte in Ee at Ja III 183,7 and Ps I 256,28 is prob, wr for antarabhatte qv sv antar1; -bhogika, w., a border chieftain (between two kingdoms); Vin III 47,l (rjno nma pathavy rj padesarj mandalik ~; Sp309,s: - nma dvinnam rjnam antar katipayagmasmik); Ps V 41,13 (-, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee antarabhogiy); -muttaka, mfn. [mcfor antarmuttaka qv!], released or vacant in the meantime; Vin -vn 2842 (purimiko pacchimiko tath' eva ~o tayo sensanaggh); -rattha in Ee at JaV 135,20 (antararatthdhipatino) is wr for anantara- (Be, Ce, Se so); -vatthu, n. [antara + vatthu2], a courtyard; Ja I 232,15 (~umhi); Mp I 451,10; -vassa, n. [BHS antarvars], the rainy season; Vin II 183,20 (ten' eva -ena tisso vijj sacchksi); Th 128 (tatiye -amhi); see also antovassa; -vsaka, m. [antara + vsaka2; cf S. antarvsas], an inner garment, esp. the innermost of the three robes of a bhikkhu; Abh 292; Vin I 94,8 (ayam sarighti ayam uttarsaiigo ayam ~o); Ap 303,23; Mil 124,23 (-am dhovissmi ti); Vin-vn 558; -vithim, ind., along the street; JaV 187,25 (-im patipajji); Nidd-al 390,5; -vithiyam, -vithisu, ind., in the street(s); JaV 65,26 (-iyam thatv); Vism 665,15 (-iyam drakasaddam sutv); Sv 587,10 (-vithisu vicaranti); -vithiya, ind., along the street; Ja 1466,23 (tava may saddhim -iy gamanam nma na yuttam); -satthimhi, -satthiyam, -satthisu, ind., between the thighs; Ja I 218,28 (imam nigrodhagaccham -satthisu katv gacchmi; cf Vin II 161,28: imam nigrodham antar satthinam karitv atikkammi); V 243,23' ([nanguttham] -satthimhi pakkhipitv; c / A I I 245,2: antar satthinam nanguttham anupakkhipitv); Ps II 272,14 (ngo ... sondya udakam gahetv... sakim -satthiyam khipanto kilittha); -s{aka, m., the middle robe (of the three robes of a bhikkhu); Vv-a 166,26 (antarasaddo ... ~ ti disu viya uttariye datthabbo); see also antar2; -hita, mfn., pp o/antaradhyati qv; anantara, mfn. [ts], 1. (what is) immediately following or preceding; next, adjoining; Ja III 464,27* (sukhassnantaram dukkham; 465, r: kmasukhassa -am nirayadukkham); IV 252,25 (-am gtham ha); Vism 110,13 (-assa mtikpadassa); 536,32 (--t); Sv 1056,30 (vipassanya v tt); Ps III 149,4 (atite -ya jtiy); SpkII 275,27 (dve -ni); ifc see atita- .yvacceti2; 2. not esoteric, not kept to oneself; not restricted; DU 100,2 (desito... may dhammo -am abhiram katv) = SV 153,17; Sv 547,35/o//.; am, adv., immediately after; Th 553 (-am hi jtassa jivit maranam dhuvarn); Ja V 265, w (tato tassa vacanato -am eva); Mil 79,28 (imassa akkharassa -am imam akkharam ktabban ti); ifc see samanantara; , adv., see sv antar1; tita, mfn., immediately preceding; Jail 243,17 (~u"te attabhve, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr antartite); Nidd-a I 150,28 (ye khandh -tit); gabbha, m., the adjoining room; Dhp-al 397,15 (Migrasetthi gabbhe nisinno, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee antaragabbhe, prob, wr); dvre in Ee at JaV 231,23 is prob, wr; Be, Ce, Se dvrantare; rattha, n., the

neighbouring kingdom; JaV 135,20 (--ratthdhipatino, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr antararatth-); see also antarpana, anto, klantarena, clantaraduka. antaraka in Ee at Spkl 271,14 is wr for antakara qv sv anta l . antaradhna, n. [S. antardhna], disappearance, vanishing, passing away; Vin III 8,10 (tesam buddhnam bhagavantnam -ena); DIU 122,2 (nesam satthuno -am hoti); SII 224,10 (saddhammassa -am); Dhs 645 (yo rpassa khayo... -am); Mil 126,4 (angatamaddhne dvinnam pi tesam cakkhnam -am disv); 134,5 (tini -ni); Mp I 87,3 (panca -ni); ifc see ssan'-; anantaradhna, n., non-disappearance; non-decline; A I 17,37 (saddhammassa thitiy asammosya -ya); see also antaradhna sv antar1. antaradhpana, / [fromcaus. o/antaradhyati], causing to disappear; As 163,30; Cp-a 169,7 (attnam-'-attham); Sadd81,i2. antaradhpeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. o/antaradhyati qv. antaradhayati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS antaradhyati, antarahyate; S. antardhatte, antardhiyate], disappears, vanishes; Sadd 481,23 (antaradh adassane: ... -ati); Vin IV 113,24 (nasseyya v vinasseyy v -eyya v); DII 140,3 (atikhippam cakkhum loke -issati ti); M I 330,3 (tvam brahme -assu sace visahasi ti); III 157,26 (obhso na cirass' eva-ati); Ja VI 574,1 (-anti); Mil 134,3 (patipattiy antarahitya sikkhpadapannatti -ati); (a) antaradhyanta, mfn., As 322,27 (itthilihgam pana -antam dubbala-akusalena -ati); Sadd 481,23; (b) antaradhyamna, mfn., MI 445,5 (evam h' etam ... hoti sattesu hyamnesu saddhamme -amne); Nidd I 428,H; neg. anantaradhyamna mfn., Nidd II 86,25; aor. 3 sg. (a) antaradhyi, Vin I 7,10 (brahm... padakkhinam katv tatth' eva ~i); SI 103,24 (Mro... tatth, ev' M ti); Ja IV 11-4, is (gihilingam -i); Mil 217,29; (b) antaradhyatha, Sn449 (tato so dummano yakkho tatth' ev' -atha) * Th 1208 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -ati); Ap 246,15 (buddho -atha); (c) antaradhyittha, Ud-a 433,6 (sabbam khanen' eva -itth ti); 3pi. (a) antaradhyimsu, SI 148,10; Ja III 457,2i; (b) antaradhyisum, Mhv 18:34 (skh -isum); inf. (a)antaradhyitum, MI 330,6; (b) antaradhtum, Nidd-a II 45,16; absol. (a) antaradhya, Ja VI 32,19 (Sakko antaradhya sakatthnam eva gato, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -itv); (b) antaradhyitv, JaV 21,26; pp antarahita, mfn. [BHS id.; S. antarhita], covered; disappeared, vanished; invisible; Vin I 230,19 (nadiy orimaure ~o primatire paccutthsi); D I 222,16 (brahmaloke ~o mama purato pturahosi); MI 330,12(na ca mam dakkhinti ti-o imam gtham abhsim); Ja III 466,22' (jhnam me -an ti); VI 84,9* (s devat ~ pabbbate Gandhamdane); Nidd I 267,10/0//. (cakkhusmim -e jnti att me ~o vigato me att ti); Mil 18,27 (Asokrme -0 ... arahantnam purato pturahosi); Sv 900,10 (dhtsu -su ssanam -am nma hoti); Ap-a 85,15 (pattassa tt); neg. anantarahita, mfn., uncovered, bare; not having disappeared; Vin I 47,2 (na ca anantarahitya bhmiy patto nikkhipitabbo; Sp 205,9/0//.: kenaci attharanena anatthatya); MII 57,25 (anantarahitya bhmiy nipajji);


Mil 133,26 (satthussanam ... patipattiy anantarahitaya titthati ti); Mp I 90,5 (ettvat pi lingam anantarahitam eva hoti); As 214,27 (anantarahitaya bhmiy, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr antarahitya); caus. pr. 3 sg. antaradhpeti, ~ayati [cf BHS antarahpyati], makes disappear; destroys; Vin III 70,22 (uppannuppanne ca ppake akusale dhamme thnaso ~eti vpasameti); A I 18,25 (apufinam pasavanti te c' imam saddhammam ~enu* ti); III 394,16 (devo vassanto rajam ~eyya); Ja 1147,28' (y ca pana me dukkhena laddh m nam ~eth ti); II 394,24 (aham ambani ~essmi); Mhv 23:10 (~enti); aor. 3 sg. antaradhpesi, JaV 272,5' (tarn pi ~esi ti); 3 pl. antaradhpesum, Vin III 8,13 (te tarn brahmacariyam khippam yeva ~esum); 2pl antaradhpayittha, Ja I 453,19 (ma me yasam ~ayitth ti); absol antaradhpetv, Ja VI 170,22 (ahisariram -etv); Ap536,is; pp antaradhpita, mfn., made to disappear; destroyed; Vism 672, 1 7 (tamamhi ~tte); fpp antaradhpetabba, mfn., Ja II 64,28. antaradhyana, n. [from antaradhyati], disappearance; ifc see candbh- sv canda. antarahita, mfn., pp o/antaradhayati qv. antar1, adv. and prep, [ts; BHS also antart], I. (adv.) inside; on the way, in the meantime; beforehand, before (reaching something); Abhll50; Vin I 106,24 (~ pi parivasanti); II43,18 (so parivasanto ~ ekam pattim pajji); Mill 274,34; SV 50,23 (uppannam mahmegham tarn enam mahvto ~ yeva antaradhpeti); Sn694 (atiY ~ me bhavissati klakiriy); 1120 (mham nassam momuho ~ va, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se antarya, prob. wr; Nidd II 88,34: ~ yeva klarn kareyyan ti; Pj II 603,3: ~a eva avidv hutv); Dhp 237 (vso pi ca te n' atthi ~); Ja IV 429,4* (~ yeva sidati); Mil 251,21 (tni ankurm sankutitni ~ yeva paripatanti); 2. (prep.) between (gen. or acc); Vin II 161,28 (imam nigrodham ~ satthinam karitv); D I 1,4 (bhagav ~ ca Rajagaham ~ ca Nlandam addhnamaggapatipanno hoti); MI 149,22 (~ ca Svatthim ~ ca Saketam); Ja VI 295,8* (na tesam ~ gacche; 295,13': tesam lbhassa ~ na gacche antaryam na kareyya); '-antar, ind., 1. at intervals, from time to time; now ... now ...; Ja I 161,19; Ps II 324,13 (~ thitsu pi nisinnsu pi nipajjamnsu pi); Dhp-a II 86,6; Mhv 35:54; 2. in the middle; as an interruption; Vin I 46,2i (na upajjhyassa bhanamnassa ~ kath optetabb); Mil 10,9 (~ katharn opteyyun ti); 0> -patti,/, I. an offence treated in the sections supplementary to the sikkhpada rule; Sp 29,n; 236,16; 2. [BHS antarpatti], an offence committed in the meantime (ie before the expiration of a parivsa or mnattapenW); VinV 115,11; Spll83,i; Mp II 165,10; '-ubbhara, m., the removal (of the kathina,), ending (of the kathina period and its special allowances) before the usual time; VinV 178,33 (eko kathinuddhro sanghdhino ~o); Sp 638,19; Vin-vn 2724; -katha,/ [antar + kath1; BHS id.], mutual talk, conversation (between); Vin II 296,29 (ayam ~ udapdi); IV 66,25 (ayam carahi Thullanandya bhikkhuniy -a vippakat atha te ther bhikkh pavisimsu; cf Sp 808,29: ~ ti avasnam appatv rambhassa ca avasnassa ca vemajjha-

tthnampattakath); D12,25 (k ca pana vo ~ vippakat ti); Ud-a 103,8 foil; -kaja, m, a load on a carrying pole suspended between two persons; Vin II 137,24 (anujnmi bhikkhave ekatokjam ~am); see also antarakja, antarakjaka ^vantara; -dhna, n., covering; disappearance; Abh51; see also antaradhna; -parinibbyi(n), m. [BHS antarparinirvyin], one who realises nibbna beforehand (before passing the midpoint of his term of life in a heaven); Dili 237,21 (panca angmino, ~iupahaccaparinibbyi...; Sv 1029,35: yuno majjham anatikkamirv antar va kilesaparinibbnam arahattam patto M nma); S V 69,24; Pp 16,24foil, (katamo ca puggalo ~I, idh' ekacco puggalo ... opaptiko hoti, tattha parinibbyi anvattidhammotasm lok); Kv 366,13; Vism 710,8 (-1 ti yattha katthaci suddhvsabhave uppajjitv yuvemaijham appatv va parinibbyati); SpklH 236,7 (~issa); It-al 52,ii (tayo ~ino); -bhatte, ind., before finishing the meal; during the time of the meal; Jail 391,1; III 183,7 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee antarabhatte, prob, wr); Sv 188,5 (~e kammatthnam manasikatv) = Ps I 256,28 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee antarabhatte, prob, wr); Dhp-a II 174,14; -bhava, m. [BHSid.], an intermediate state of existence (between births); Kv 36\,ifoll. (atthi ~o ti); Ud-a 92,27 (~assa hi bhvo abhidhamme patikkhitto yeva); -maggato, ind., from on the road; A V 82,34 (rj kle senam uyyojetv ~o nivattpeti); -magge, ind., on the way; Vin III 39,13 (gacchanto - yasmantam Uplim passitv); A III 96,5 (appatv va rmarn ~e); Mil 16,26 (~e bhikkh dullabh); -marana, n., premature death; Ap 310,7 (~am n' atthi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -mranam); Ud-a 289,27; Pv-a 136,30; -muttaka, mfn., released or vacant in the meantime; Vin II 167,34/0//. (tayo 'me bhikkhave sensanagh purimako pacchimako ~o) * Vin-vn 2842 (antaramuttako, mc ?); Sp 1223,20/0//.; -vosna, n., giving up half-way; Vin II 203,3 (oramattakena visesdhigamena -am pdi) * D II 78,22 * It 85,13; -satthinam in Ee at A II 245,2 is wr, prob, for antar satthvnam (Ce so; Be, Se antarasatthimhi); anantar, ind., immediately after; next, then; next to (gen. or abl); D i l 206,3 (~... saddaptubhv); SHI 96,3 (katharn passato ~ savnam khayo hoti ti); Ja V 377,5* (Sumukho ajja pvekkhi Dhataratthass' ~); VI224,17* (rj tato pucchi ~); Ap61,2 (sahassakkhattum cakkavatti bhavissati ~); Vism 387,24 (pubbabhgacittnam -); payutta, m(fn)., one who abets a cardinal crime; Kv 478,is/o//. (~-payutto puggalo sammattaniymam okkameyy ti). antar2, / , ("a between [garment]" or "inner [cloak]"), the middle robe (of the three robes of the bhikkhu); Vv-a 166,28 (~ uttariyam uttarsango upasamvynan ti pariyyasadd ete); see also antarastaka. antar-ahosi, aor. 3 sg. [of *antar + bhavati], was interrupted; was drowned; Vin II 140,4 (tena saddena dhammakath ~i; Sp 1214,22: -4 ti antarit ahosi paticchann, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ~i ti antarik). antarpana, m. [ts], a market, bazaar; M I 30,27 (~am


patipajjeyyum; PsI 150,1: ~an ti pannam antare mahjanasankinnaracchmukham); Ja VI 52,2i (~ato ksyavatthni c' eva mattikpattam ca har ti); Ap 78,2 (gacchantam ~e; Ap-a 347,3: ~e ti vessnam panapantinam antaravithiyam gacchamnam); 374,28 (ucchangam prayitvna gamam -am); Vism 622,25 (~e jalamnam padipam disv). antarya1, m. [ts], an obstacle, hindrance; danger, accident; (euphemism for) ruin, death; Abh765; VinI 150,13 (brahmacariyassa -0); D I 3,6 (tumharn yev' assa tena ~o); MI 130,8 (ye 'me antaryik dhamm vutt bhagavat te patisevato nlam ~y ti); Sn691 (no ce kumre bhavissati ~o); Ja IV 218,15* (~o na hessati; 218,19': jivitantaryo na bhavissati); VI 10,3 (imasmim kumre imasmim gehe vasante tayo ~ pannyanti jivitassa v chattassa v mahesiy v); Mil 156,17/0//. (cattro kho mahrja ~); Vism 712,5* (Visuddhimaggo eso va ~am vin idha nitthito); am karoti, hinders, prevents (+ gen. rei and personae or + acc. personae, loc. rei); Vin 115,18 (m Yasassa kulaputtassa koci -am aksi... pabbajjy ti); MII 39,28 (paris Sakuludyim paribbjakam -am aksi bhagavati brahmacariye); Ja VI 171,29 (uposathakammassa me -am pi kareyya); Mil 156,io (so bhagavato bhojanassa -am aksi); ifc see agyantarya, aditth' - (sv disati), brahmacariy, -, hat' (.svhanati); -kara, mf(~i)n. [antarya + kara1], causing obstacles; preventing; D I 227,24; A I 161,17 (tinnam -0 hoti tinnam paripanthiko); Ja IV 13,20* (bdh... ~; 13,2r: imassa tapokammassa antaryakrak); Nidd-a I 233,28 (sen... samanabrhmannam ghtini nippothini -I); anantarya, mfn. and m., \.(mfn.) without impediment; not being prevented; without the possibility of prevention; Vism 712,8* (- ijjhantu sigham sigham manorath); Sp929,i8 (dasasu antaryesu ekena pi antaryena -); Ps V 83,26 (etena pana vykaranena -am assa parinibbnam ahosi); Spk II 346,2i (uppanne magge phalassa tarn dipeti); 2. (m.) freedom from impediment; lack of obstacles; Mp I 222,25 (satth -am disv vykaritv pakkmi); instr. -ena, adv., without obstacle; without danger; without the possibility of prevention, inevitably; Ja I 27,8 (s [patthan] -ena samijjhatu); Spk I 117,19 (tarn vassasatam -na jivanto); Vv-a 351,24 (akkhatan ti anupaddutam, Ptaliputtam akkhatan ti v anbdham anuppilam, -na ti attho); As 358, is (nantarikam ti ~ena phaladyakni, mtughtakammdinam etarn adhivacanam); see also anantaryikini.. antarya2 in Ee, Se at Sn 1120 is prob, wr for antar va {Be, Ceso). antaryik, mfn. [from antarya; BHS id.], causing obstacles, forming an impediment; Vin I 93,27 (anujnmi bhikkhave upasampdentena tassa ~e dhamme pucchitum); V 115,7(- patti jnitabb; Sp 1319,2i: satta pi pattiyo saftcicca vitikkant saggantaryam c' eva mokkhantaryam ca karonti ti~); MI 130,7 (ye 'me ~a dhamm vutt bhagavat te patisevato nlam antarya ti); Sil 226,3 (lbhasakkrasiloko ... -0 anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamya); Thi492 (km akkht -); Vism 215,4 (ime dhamm ~ ime dhamm niyynik);

Mhv 35:39; anantaryika, mfn., not forming an impediment; not subject to hindrance or danger; VinV 115,7 (~ patti); Sp304,is (paro -0 hutv tarn avaharati) = Kkh27,40 (Be so; Ee wr antaryiko); Bv -a 299,7 (sabbabuddhnam ... buddharamsinam na sakk kenaci antaryam ktun ti ime cattro ~ dhamm nm ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee na antaryik). antarla, antarla, n. [S. antarla], space between; interval; Dth 1:52 (~e manicankame jino thitappadesassa ca sanassa ca ... aksi cankamam); antarlapathe, ind., on the way; Mhv 61:12; 66:114. antarika, mfn. [from antara?], separated; kept apart; having something interposed; ? Sp 731,8 (pabbatanadidihi pana -tt na sakk ujum gantum, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se antaritatt; = Vism 72,28: antaritatt); Mp II 326, M (tassa musvdena -tt saccam saccenana ghatiyati, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee antaritatt) = Nidd-a 1447,10 (Be so, Se -tya; Ce Ee antaritatya) = Sv73,i3 (antaritatt) = Ps II 206,25 (antaritatt); Sv 374,15 (anupubbbhisannnirodhasampajnasampattl ti ettha abhi ti upasaggamattam, sampajnapadam nirodhapadena -am katv vuttam, anupatiptiy sampajnasaniinirodhasampatti ti); Mp V 77,26 (cittantaro ti... citten' eva -0, ekass' eva hi cuticittassa anantar dutiye patisandhicitte devo nama hoti...). antarika, / [BHS id.], space between, interstice, interval; cleft, chink; Vin III 108,23 (Tapod dvinnam mahniraynam ~ya gacchati); Niddl 353,15 (sattannam pabbatnam ~su); Kv226,n (atthi dvinnam nibbnnam ... sim va bhedo v rji v ~ v ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee antarika); Vism 604,8* (purimam bhijjati cittam pacchimam jya" tato tesam - n' atthi); ifc see san' (.yvsana2), ur'- (jvura[s]), ek'-, pakhum'-, phsul'-, bhjan'- (sv bhjana1), lok'-, vijjantarik, sim'-, sutt'(svsutta2); anantarika, mfn. [or rather prob, wr for nantarika ^v], with no space intervening; immediately preceding or following; next; VinI 321,26 (antamaso ~asspi bhikkhuno, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nantarikasspi; Sp 1147,6: ~ass ti attano anantaram nisinnassa, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nantarikass ti); II 165,5 foil. (~am bhikkhum vutthpesi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce nantarikam); 212,35 (~am bhikkhum pucchitv, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nantarikam); IV 234,10 (~ bhikkhuni, eds so). antarita, mfn. [ts], concealed, screened; separated; Mil 291,6 (anekehi... bhavasahassehi -am); Sp 731,8 (pabbatanadi-dihi pana -tt na sakk ujum gantum, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee antarikatt) = Vism 72,28 (eds so); Sv 73,13 (tassa musvdena -tt saccam saccena na ghatiyati) = Ps II 206,25 = Mp II 326, u (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se antarikatt) = Nidd-a I 447,10 (Ce, Ee -tya; Be antarikatt; Se antarikatya); Ps III 334,26 (attha-usabhamattena thnena -a); Mp III 294,21 (so puggalo na upatthti kudddihi ~o viya hoti). antaripa, n. [ts], an island; Abh 664 (-arnca dipo); 999. antariya, n. [S. lex. id.], an inner or lower garment; Abh 292. antaruddhi, / [cf antavatti and S. antravrddhi, "inguinal hernia, rupture"], (probably) the intestines; ? Ja VI 8,9 (duggandhagandhen' assa ~inam nikkhamanaklo viya


hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be antarudhlnam; Se antarudarinam). antalikkha1, n. (and m.l) [S. antariksa, antariksa,.], intermediate space, the atmosphere, the air; the sky; Abh 45; Vin 12,26* (suriyo va obhsayam -am); DII 15,4 (dve udakassa dhr ~ ptubhavanti); A III 239,26* (diccam iv' ~e); Dhp 127 (na ~e na samuddamajjhe) quoted Mil 150,23*; Sn222 (bhtni... bhummni v yni va ~e); Ja III 292,13 (sdhukrasaddapunnam -am ahosi, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ~o); V 321,12* (vehse -asmim anussitvna khattiye); Patis II 208,32 (so iddhim cetovasippatto kase ~e cankamati pi titthati pi...); Bv23:4 (-amhi kse yamakam katv vikubbanam); Mil 343,4* (-arnhi caran dhammanagare vasanti te); 1h-all 1,10 (so -ena gacchanto); -ga, mfn. [antalikkha + ga2], going through the air; A1215,9*; -cara, mfn., travelling through the air; Vin I 21,17* (~o pso); D I 17,22 (sayampabh - subhatthyino; * A V 60,8: antalikkhecar); Ap 18,8 (~ dhir parivrenti mam sad) * 332,6 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee antalikkhecar); see also antalikkhecara; -tthaka, mfn., existing, being in intermediate space, in the atmosphere; Ps V 99,2 (kci bhmatthaka devat kci - kci ctumahrjik ... kci brahmaloke nibbatt, Ce so; Be, Se antalikkhak; Ee ~ rjik) * SpkII 392,22 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ~su); -bhavana, ., a palace in the air; Ja III 218,24*. antalikkha2, mfn. [S. antariksa, antariksa], belonging to intermediate space, produced in the atmosphere; Vibh83,i6 (bhummni v udakni -ni v; Vibh-a69,7: -ni ti pathavim appattni vassodakni); ifc see bhumm'-. antalikkhak, mfn. [antalikkha + ka2], belonging to intermediate space, to the atmosphere; Ps V 99,2 (kci bhmatthaka devat kci - kci ctumahrjik ... kci brahmaloke nibbatt, Be, Se so; Ce antalikkhatthak; Ee antalikkhatthak rjik; * SpkII 392,22: Be, Ce, Se antalikkhatthak; Ee antalikkhatthaksu). antalikkhecara, mfn. [loc. of antalikkha + cara; sometimes written as separate words], travelling through the air; A V 60,8 (sayampabh ~); Ja III 460,1* (so rj isin satto -o pure, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se antalikkhacaro); IV 425,21* (apadena padam yti ~o dijo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be antalikkhacaro); see also antalikkhacara sv antalikkha1. antavaddhimamsalohitdihi in Ee at Ja I 260,17 is prob, wrfor antavatti- (Be, Ce, Se so), but c/antaruddhi. anti, ind. [ts], before, in the presence of; near (+ gen.); JaV 399,3* (tav' anti-m-gat; 399,13': tava santikam gat); VI 565,32* (samikass' anti rodati); see also upanti. antika1, mfn. and n. [ts], (mfn.) near, proximate; (n.) nearness, proximity; Pj I 217,32 (udakassa -bhavena odakantikam); ace. -am, adv., near, near to; in the presence of(+ gen.or ifc); Abh 706; Ja I 28,4* (tav* -am Ee so; Be, Ce, Se tav' ~e); IV 107,1* (tav' -am, Ce so; Be, Se tav' antike; Ee tamantikam); loc. -e, adv., near, close by; in the presence of (+ gen.); Th331 (vykaromi tav' -e); JaV 173,25* (samvaccharo me vusito tav' -e); VI266,1* (ehi gacchma pitu mam' -e; 266,8': mama pitu santikam gacchma); Ap 25,28 (ubho pi

pabbajissma Sakyaputta tav* ~e); ifc see upantika, santika1. antika2, (mf)n. [from anta1 ], final; (what is) the end;? Sp 221,n (udakakiccam -am avasnam ass ti odakantiko). antika3, mfn. [ts], reaching to; reaching to the end of; ifc see ussvan' -, odakantika. antima1, mfn. [ts], last, final; lowest, meanest; Abh 714; Vin I 11,30 (akupp me cetovimutti ayam - jti n' atthi dani punabbhavo ti); D i l 286,24* (~e vattamnamhi so nivso bhavissati; Sv 739,33: -e bhave vattamne); It 50,4* (dhreti -am deham); Sn 478 (sariram ca -am dhreti); 502 (ayam - n' atthi punabbhavo ti); Th 339 (-0 'yam samussayo); Ja III 359,20* (ayam- vedag brahmapatti); Mhv 20:44 (sakkram -am ak); 23:78 (Abhayass' -0 putto); ifc see paccantima; -gandhina, mj(~\)n., who is the last and who injures; Ja IV 34,17* (mharn kule ~o ahum, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be antimagandhano; 34,24 : aham attano kule sabbapacchimako c' eva kulapalpo ca ma assan ti); 35,19* (-1); -jivika, mfn., having the lowest, meanest livelihood; Mil 122,3 (ganik rppajivini -); -dehadhara, mfn., who has his last body; It 101,15 (-0, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -dhro); Vv 35:12 (-am isim); Niddl 22,2 (-0 arah); Mil 215,11; -dehadhri(n), mfn., id.; SI 14,ii*(khinsavo-i)* Sn471; It 32, is* (tarn ve munim -im); -purisa, m., the last man, the meanest man; last of the line; M II 75,28 (ma kho me tvam -0 ahosi); Pj II 479,4 (purisanta -a); -bhava,m., the last birth; Niddl 22,1 (~e thito); Mil 287,4 (so 'yam -0 anuppatto); -bhavika, mfn., being in one's last birth; Ud-a90,4 (--tt, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -bhvikatt); It-all 73,i (-am svakabodhisattam sandhya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -bhvi, prob, wr); Thi-a 77,28 (~-tya); -vatthu, n. [antima + vatthu1], an extreme offence; Vin I 121,1 (-urn ajjhpannako patijnti); 135,28; Vism425,i2; Vin-vn 416; -samussaya, m, the last accumulation, the last body; Niddl 22,i (-e thito); -srira, mfn., having his last body; SI 210,23* (buddho-0, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nr-sariro); AII 37,20* (buddho -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr antimsariro); Dhp 352 (sa ve -o); Sn 624; - s e y y l , / , death-bed; Saddh278. antima2, mfn., closest, innermost; -man4ala, n., inner circle, innermost range (of the Buddha's journeying); Sp 196,35 (janapadaerikam carant ca mahmandalam majjhimamandalam -am); 197,2 (-am tiyojanasatikam); see also antomandala. antimaka, mfn. [antima1 + ka2], last, final; Mhv 8:1 (Vijayo so mahrj vasse ~e thito). ante1, ind. [ts], see sv anta1. ante2 = anto [S. antar] in antepura, antepurik qqv. antepura, n. [BHS id.; S. antahpura; AMg anteura], I. the royal palace, esp. the inner apartments, the harem; Abh 215; Vin I 75,19 (so ca ranno ~e likhito hoti yattha passitabbo tattha hantabbo ti); II 190,24 (~e upacrak mahmatt); DII 26,22 (ito va -am paccaniyyhi ti); Sn695 (-amh niragama brahmaeri); Ja IV 447,5* (ksviy yantu -am tarn); Ud-a 162,25 (-e ti itthgrassa sancaranatthnabhte rjagehassa abbhantare yattha rj


nhanabhojanasayandim kappeti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee samvaranatthnabhte); Mil29,20 (yannnham sve ~e sallapeyyan ti); 2. the women of the harem; Ja VI 104,ii (~am ca mahjanam ca mantetv); Pj II 71,3 (rj pi agamsi saddhim ~ena); see also antopura sv anto. antepuriki, / [S. antahpurik; AMg anteuriy], a woman of the harem; Ja IV 191,25 (so jasasahass ~); VI 465,27' (orodh ti Udumbardevim dim katv ~); As 403,7 (rppajiviniyo mtugm '-dayo ca sappiphnitam nma pivanti). antevsi(n), m, antevsini, / [S. antevsin], "dwelling near or in the house (of his master)", (who is) a (resident) pupil; an apprentice; Abh 408; Vin I 217,4 (gharam gantv ~im npesi); II261,19 (Uppalavannya bhikkhuniy ~ini bhikkhuni, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee antevsibhikkhuni); IV 291,31 (~inim v anupasampannam v n' eva upattheti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ~im); 293,23 (~inim v saddhivihrinim v); D I 1,9 (Suppiyo pi kho paribbjako ... saddhim ~in Brahmadattena mnavena; Sv 36,3/o//.: ante vasati ti ~i samipacro santikvacaro sisso ti attho); M III 1, is (mayam h i . . . ~i labhitv pathamam evarn ganpema); Th 334 (~i 'mhi sikkhito); Ja V 84,i* (tayo hi putt ... ~i dinnako atrajo ca; 84,4': ~i ti sippam v ugganhanto panham v sunanto santike vuttho); 293,7 (tava ~in... bhattam pacpetv); Mil 94,4 (cariyena ~imhi... rakkh upatthapetabb); (i)-kamyat,/, a desire to get pupils; D i l i 56,9; Mil 184,18. antevsika, mfn. [antevsi(n) + ka2; BHS id.], (being) a (resident) pupil; Vin I 60,27 (cariyo bhikkhave ~amhi puttacittam upatthpessati); IV 227,22 (Bhaddiy Kpilniy-bhikkhuni); SI 180,17 (bhradvjagottassa brhmanassa sambahul ~); Jal 166,19; Mil 269,8; Sp 976,29 ([addhateyyni paribbjakasatni] Sanjayni ti Sanjayassa ~ni); SpkII 397,7 (ye ca tattha mahallak te pi -tya mnavak tveva vutt); anantevsika, mfn., without resident pupils, ie without internal impurities; S IV 136,5 (~am idarn bhikkhave brahmacariyam vussati ancariyakam; SpkII 403,2: ~an ti antovasanakakilesavirahitam); 137,6 foil. (bhikkhu ~o ancariyako); santevsika, sntevsika, mfn., with resident pupils, ie with internal impurities; SIV 136,ifoll (-0... bhikkhu scariyako) quoted Niddl

anto, adv. and prep, (and m. ?) [S. antar], \.(adv.) within, inside; Abhll50; Vin I 210,30 (~o vsetv -0 smam pacitv); SI 79,23* (~o asuddh bahi sobhamn); Ja VI 437,io* (kammrnam yath ukk -0 jhyati no bahim); Mil 56,6 (~o pavisitv); Mhv 9:4 (~o thapesum ekam ca dsim); anto katv, karitv, confining; including; reaching to; Ja II 96,3 (satthram nimantent pi te upsake -0 karitv va nimantenti); Ud-a 176,4 (ete dhamme etam ca oksam ~o karitv pavattanfi ti) ^ As 48,12; Nidd-a350,i9 (visitthesu attanam ~o katv); Mhv 15:183 (katv puram ~o simam bandhatha); 2. (prep.) (i) + loc. (sometimes written as cpd): within, inside, in the middle (of); Vin III 202,1 (~o vihre civaram nikkhipitv); Ud 19,23/0//. (~o pi antepure ... ~o pi nagare); Thi 297 (~o dipe); Ja I 385,8

(~o uyyne); II 323,24 (dve pi ~o nivesane posento); VI 161,28 (~okathe yeva nam pacitum vattati ti); Pv 10:1 (k nu ~o vimnasmim titthanti); Ap 87,11 (ye keci udake pn ~o jle bhavanti te); (ii) + ace. (sometimes written as cpd): within, inside; Vin I 155,1 (so tarn sattham ~o sannivattam karoti); Ja I 317,2 (~o temsam); VI 305, is (-0 pabbatam pavisitv); (iii) + instr. in adverbial cpd: through the inside of; Ja VI 305,26 (-pabbatena uggantv); Sp 747,4 (-psden' eva rohitv); (iv) + gen.: within, inside; Dhp-aIII 171,15 (satth ... tarn kumrikam attano nnajlassa ~o pavittham disv); Mhv 10:86 (~o narindavatthussa); 14:47 (~o va rajavatthussa); 3. (m.) inner part, inside; Jal 146,29* (sace imassa kyassa ~o bhirato siy; or anta1 ?); -aruna, n., the time before sunrise; Vin IV 245,8 (~am adhittheti); JaV 226,10' (~e yeva); Ps II 208,30 ([syamsabhattarn] majjhantikato uddham -ena [paricchinnam]); -rma, m., the inner part of an rma; Vin IV 163,26 (ajjhrmo nma parikkhittassa rmassa -o); -vasatha, m., the inner part of a dwelling; Vin IV 163,27 (ajjhvasatho nma parikkhittassa vasathassa ~o); -utthitasasana, n., breath arisen from within; Sadd 399,31 (~am assso); -karana, n. [anto + karana1], inclusion; As 48,13 (~'-attho hi ayam kro); -kasambu, mfn., rotten inside; SI 166,8* (~u sankilittho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anto kasambhu; Spkl 231,10: ~Q ti anto kilesaptisabhvenaptiko) ^ 166,33*; -kucchi,/, (the inside of) the belly; the womb; Abh 862; Jal 503,1 (~i andhakro ahosi); Dhp-al 192,19 ([yantajhatthino -iyam satthi puris aparparam cankamanti; or anto + loc, "inside the belly"); -kotthgrika, mfn., who has storerooms within, hoarding within; Vin III 251,2 (~ ime saman Sakyaputtiy seyyath pi rj Mgadho Seniyo Bimbisro ti; Sp 710,6: abbhantare samvihitakotthgr); Ja III 364,2; -gata, mfn., being within, turned inward; being contained within; AIV 87,3 (~ehi indriyehi); Sv 366,1 (nnajlassa ~am paribbjakam disv); Nidd-al 243,11 (~-tt); am, ind., inwardly; aside (of speech); JaV 208,25'(imam gtharn Mahsatto ~am evabhsati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anta-); see also antaggata; -gadha, mfn., contained in, included; Abh 742; M III 94,23; A I 43,M; Mil 125,29; Vism 183,25; PsII 218,32 (sacenam tt); ~-hetu-attha, mfn., having a causative sense included or implied; Pv-a 10,16 (obhsate ti v ~-hetu-attham idam padanti); see also ogadha2; -ghara, n., the interior of a house; Abh 862 (~e ... kottho); -jata, mfn., and/or -jat, / [from anto + jat], entangled within; inner entanglement; SI 13,18* (~ bahijat jatya jatit paj) quoted Vism l,n*; Pet ^6, n foil, (ye dhamm samathena ca vipassanaya ca pahiyanti te ime - bahijat ... ajjhattavatthuko rgo ~... sankhittena y kci ajjhattavatthuk tanhca ditthi ca ayam ~); -jana, m. [anto + Jana1], the inner household; the family; DIU 61,6 (dhammikarn rakkhvaranaguttim samvidahassu ~asmim); A I 152,23 (saddham kulapatim nissya ~o tii vaddhlhi vaddhati); Ja IV 183,2; see also antajana; -jta, mfn., (a slave) born in the house (of his


master); Abh 515; Vin IV 224,33 (dso nma - o dhanakkito karamarnito); Vv-a212,7 (aham - dsi ahosim); Vin-vn 216; -jtaka, mfti. [anto + jtaka2], id.; Niddl 11,8 (~o dso); Ps III 8,20; -jalagata, mfn., being in or caught in a net; Ap21,6; -jlikata, mfn., caught in a net; comprehended; D I 45,26 (sabbe te imeh' eva dvsatthiy vatthhi ~); -dha, m., an internal fire; J a l 138,11; Niddl 128,11; -tudaka, -todaka, mfn., pricking inside; Pj II 100,28 (-'-atthena ... sallam, Be, Seso; Ce, Ee -todakatthena; * Ap-a 179,i: antotudanatthena); -tudana, n., pricking inside; Vism 61 l,3i (tya ... sallato) = Nidd-a 1169,12; Ap-a 179,i (-'-atthena ... sallam); -dhaka, mfn., burning within; Q)-a 314,30 (kotaraggi viya ~); -devata,/, the deity of the house; Mp I 415,16; Dhp-al 404,14 (~ namassitabb); -nagara, n., the inner town; the inside of the town; Dhp-al 387,1 (-am sambdham); Cp-a47,7; -nijjhna, -nijjhyana, n., inner suffering, burning; Pv-a 18,i2(cittasantpo -an ti attho); lakkhana, mfn., characterised by inner suffering; J a l 168,19' (-nijjhyanalakkhanena sokena socati); Mp II 95,33 (-nijjhyanalakkhanehi sokehi); Nidd-a I 74,6 (soko ... lakkhano cittasantpo); -nimuggaposi(n), mfn., nourished while immersed within; D I 75,17 (uppalni... ~Ini) = MI 169,13; -paridha, m., inner burning; Niddl 128,11; -parisoka, m., inner grief; D II 306,2; Patis I 38,n; -ptarse, ind., before the morning meal; Ps IV 225,20; -pura, w., the inner apartments; Ja III 409,32 (~e jano, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se antepurajano); 505,24 (~e, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se antepure); VI 289,5* (pvekkhi -am ariyasettho, Ce, Ee so; [or: into the house; ?] Be, Se antepuram); see also antepura; -puti, mfn., rotten inside; SIV 179,17 (na ~i bhavissati); AIV 128,26 (~issa avassutassa) quoted Vism 55,6; Ud 52,16; Pet 56,12 (--bhvo, Be, Ce so; Ee wr antopri-); -ptika, mfn., rotten inside; Mil 301,20 (phalni... -nihutv patanti); -bhattika, mfn., who takes his meals indoors; Ja VI 344,22 (tta - 0 bhavissasi udhu bahibhattiko ti); -bhavika, mfn., being within, included; Mil 95,11 (samyutto lokena ~o lokasmim lokasdhrano, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se antogadhiko); -bhga, m., the interior; Abh 1166; -bhava, m., the being within; the internal; Abh 1163; 1182; -majjhantika, m., the fore-noon, the time before midday; Ps II 208,29 (ptarsabhattam -na paricchinnam); Ud-a 202,22; -man dal a, n., inner circle, innermost range (of the Buddha's journeying); Sv241,n (mahmandalam majjhimamandalam -am); 241,19 (-am tiyojanasatikam); Ps II 151,3; see also antimamandala; -mana(s), mfn., sad, melancholy; Vin III 19,19 (-0 linamano dukkhi); -vanka, mfn., curving inwards, concave; Pj II 437,23 (Sudassanaktam... -am kkamiikhasanthnam); -vankagata, mfn., hooked inside; Th749 (-0 sim maccho va; see K.R. Norman, 1969, p. 232); -vanna, mfn., with colour/class within; Th 140 (na brhmano bahivanno ~o hi brhmano); -vana, n., the interior of a forest; M I 124,33 (-am suvisodhitam

visodheyya); -valanja, m., the inner apartments; Jal 385,5 (idam pilandhanam -e nattham); -vaJafijaka, -valafljaka,m/(n)., (one) belonging to the inner apartments; Jail 2,20 (-nam antare, Be, Ce, Eeso; tS,e0-valanjanaknam); 3,4; -valajana, mfn., being indoors, belonging to the interior; manuss,, indoor people; J a l 383,4' (sabbe manuss, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0-valanjanakamanuss); -vaJafijanaka, mfin)., (one) belonging to the inner apartments; J a l 382,2r; 385,6; -vasanaka, mfn., living within; Spkll 403,2 (anantevsikan ti kilesavirahitam, Be so; Ce antovsaka-; Ee antovsana-, Se antovasanaka-, prob, wrr); -vassa, n., the rainy season; Ja IV 242,28 (ekasmim hi ~e); Vv-a 66,31 (idni kittakam -am avasitthan ti); am, adv., in the rainy season; Vin IV 296,29 (y pana bhikkhuni -am crikam careyya); see also antaravassa; -vihra, m., the interior of the vihra; Vibh-a474,24 (-0 kinno); -abhimukha,m/(-i)/i., turning towards the interior of the vihra; Dhp-al 50,i (-abhimukhi pakkhandi); -sankhepa, m, inner contracting, hanging back; SpklH 180,12 (antpino -o antaryakaro hoti); -samorodha, m., blocking up within; Dhsll57 (kyassa... pariyonho - o middham; As 378,5: abbhantare samorundhati ti ~o); -snito, ind., from within the curtain; Jal 58,2 (-0 bahi nikkhant); -8ra, mfn., with excellence within; with pith within; Ja IV 9,19* (-0 hi brhmano); Ps III 433,18 (- pana bahiphegg sabbe rukkh nma); -simam, -simya, ind., within the boundary; Vin I 132,8 (-am okkamanti); 340,12 (-ya uposatham karonti); -soka,m., inner grief, D i l 306,2; Patis I 38,n; ati-anto, ind., very far inside; Sp922,i (~o pavesetv). andati,/?r. 3 sg. [S. Dhtup andati, Wg 3:25], binds; Dhtup 141 (anda bandhane); Dhtum 202-3 (adi adi ca bandhane); Sadd377,io (adi bandhane: -ati and); 468,5; see also anu-andati, antati, Val2. andu, and (and addu ?), / [ts], a fetter; a shackle (of wood 1); D I 245,10 (dalhya -uy pacchbham glhabandhanam baddho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se rajjuy); SI 76,33 (appekacce rajjhi appekacce -uhi appekacce sankhalikhi; Be, Ce, Eeso; Se addhi); Sadd 377,10 (adi bandhane: andati -); (u)-kahpana, m., a fee received at the freeing of one who has been fettered; PsH 349,18 (yottakahpano -0); (u)-ghara, n., a prison; J a l 21,18* (yath -e puriso ciravuttho) = Ap-a23,33*; (u)-bandhana, n., confining with an andu, shackling; Vin III 47,8 (rajjubandhanena v ~ena v sankhalikabandhanena v) * Nidd I 402,23 = II 168,29 (Be, Ce, Seso; Ee wr andhu-); Kv 137,4 (-ena bandhitum, Ce so; Be, Se addu-; Ee anu-); 272,10 (-ena, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se addu-); Dhp-alV 56,3 (--sankhtam drujam [bandhanam]). anduka, m. [andu+ ka2; ts], an elephant's foot-shackle; Abh 364 (nigalo 'nduko). andukvidhna, n., a way of dressing the hair; Ud-a 171,4 (ullikhitan ti phanakdihi kesasanthpanam, -an ti pi vadanti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se addhakra-; perhaps read anduka-?).


andoli, / [cfS. andolayati], a swinging seat; Mhv 88:88 ( -dhavalacchattacmardini). andha, mfn. [ts], 1. blind, blinded; mentally blind, foolish, unenlightened; Abh321; VinI 91,15 (~am pabbjentimgam pabbjenti); D I 191,11 (sabbe va kho ete... paribbjak ~ acakkhuk); MIII 298,17 (~o bhvitindriyo bhavissati); S III 140,2 (blam puthujjanam ~am acakkhukam ajnantam apassantam); Pv 36:48 (~assa dandam sayam diysi); Th 95 (-0 'harn hatanetto smi); 321 (~o va siy samavisamassa adassanato); Ja IV 192,ir (~o va visamam maggam na jnti); Ap 152,20 (vippanatth brahranne ~ va anusuyyare); 255,10 (aranfie ... ~' ^iindm' ahamtad; Ap-a476,25 foil.: vane maggamlhabhvena ~ona cakkhun ~o); 465,23 (~nam nayanpamo); Cp 1:8:9 (ubhopi nett nayan ~ upahat mama); Mil 367,11 (kukkuto sacakkhuko pi rattim ~o hoti); ifc see kam'-, jaccandha; 2. dark; blinding; Sn669 (~am va timisam yanti); JaV 339,24* (~ena tamas); see andhatama below; '-andham, ind., dimly; Mill 151,12 (so [telappadipo] ... ~am viya jhyati); '-kula, mfn., confused, bewildered; Vv 84:9 (aparaddhamagg ~ vippanatth aranfie; Vv-a337,n: ~ ti andh viya kul maggajnanasamatthassa panncakkhuno abhvena andh tato eva kul); -kapan,, the blind and poor; Dhp-al 187,5 (~'-dInam danam patthapesi, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se addhikakapandinam); -karana, mfn. [andha + karana1], making blind; confusing; It 82,10 (akusalavitakk ~ acakkhukaran); Ja III 500,22* (~Q kme, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -krake; 500,24': paraicakkhuvinsanato andhakare, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se andhabhvakare); Mil 113,29 (panho... ~o ca gambhiro ca); -kra, -kraka, see svv; -tama, -ntama {sometimes written as separate words, c / J a V 339,24* above), n. [cfS. andhatamasa], pitch darkness; Abh72 (andhantamam ghanatame); S V 442,25 (~am tad hoti andhakratimis, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee andhantamam); AIV 96,23* (~am tad hoti yam kodho sahate nararn, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce andhantamam; Mp IV 48,n: ~an ti andhabhvakaram tamam bahalatamam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee andhabhvakaraghanamahtamam) ^ It 84,3* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee andham tamam); Ja VI 247,4* (~am tattha na candasuriy, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee andham tamam); Vism 413,6 (tarn thnam hundarikam ~am iva hoti); -nakha (or addhanakha?), mfn., with dull, dirty nails; Ja VI 548,26* (balankapdo ~o, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se addha-) quoted Sadd 558,13 (~o); Sp 1030,18 (-0 v klavannehi ptinakhehi samanngato); -bla, mfn., mentally blind, stupid, foolish; Th575 (~ puthujjan); Ja VI 63,io (~-tya); 337,13' (~e pubbe pi ppakam katv yakkhini jt si);-bhta, mfn., blinded; mentally blind; VinI 8,26* (~asmi lokasmim hancham amatadundubhim); S IV 20,33 (sabbam bhikkhave -am, Ce, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, SpkII 363,27 addhabhtam qv sv addhabhavati); A II 72,6 (avijjnivut pos ~ acakkhuk); Dhp 59 (~e puthujjane); 174; Th215 (~o puthujjano); -makkhik,/, a gadfly; Vism 31,13 (dams ti damsanamakkhik, ~ti pi vuccanti) = Nidd-a 1461,34; see also andhaka; -veni,/, a line or series of

blind men; D I 239,25 (~i paramparsamsatt) = Mil 170,16; -vesa, m, the appearance, guise of a blind man; Ja III 418,2 (~amgahetv); anandha, mfn., not blind, seeing; MI 512,5; Ja VI 86,7*; Mil 367,13; Vin-vn 547; ~-karana, mfn., giving sight, enlightening; It82,22 (tayo... kusalavitakk karan cakkhukaran nnakaran); see also andhikata, andhikarana. andhaka, mfn. andm., 1. (mfn.) [ts], blind; Ja II 327,13* (cakkhum~ honti mtugmavasam gat, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee andhit); Mp II 330,20 (~am karoti ti andhakarano, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se andham); 2. (m.) a gadfly; Sn 20 (-makas na vijjare; Pj II 33,26: ~ ti knamakkhiknam adhivacanam, pihgalamakkhiknan ti pi eke, makas makas yeva); -kapan,, the blind and poor; Dhp-al lSS^^-dinam ... dnam deti, Ee so, perhaps wr; Ce andha-; Be, Se addhikakapandinam); -makkhik,/, a gadfly; Th-a 197,io (dams ti laddhanmehi ~hi); see also andhamakkhik sv andha. andhakra, m.n. and mfn. [S. andhakra, m.n.], 1. (m.n.) darkness; blackness; Abh 70 (~o); VinI 16,33 (~e v telapajjotam dhreyya cakkhumanto rpni dakkhinti ti); D II 269,29 (~o guhyam antaradhyi loko udapdi, so read with Be, Ce, Se); A l l 54,n* (~ena onaddh tanhds); SI 94,9foil, (puriso ~ v -am gaccheyya); Sn763 (~o apassatam); Vv 9:7 (~amhi timisikyam); Th 1034 (gate kalynamittamhi ~am va khyati); Jal 296,6 (suriyo pi atthangato -am jtam); Cp 2:6:7 (-amhi rattiy); Mil39,i4 (padipo -am vidhameti); Vism 417,28 (nesam sayampabh antaradhyati ~o hoti); As 388,22 (-tya maggo na pannyi); ifc see tarn'-, ratt'(.svratti), samandhakara; 2 . (mfn.) dark, obscuring; obscured; Vin I 79,31 (hundarik samannam Sakyaputtiynamdis ~); DU 12,11 (lokantarik ... ~ andhakratimis; or ~ is subst.; Sv 433,16: ~ ti tamabht; cfBHSD sv lokantarik) = MIII 120,10 = A II 130,26; S I 51,n*(yo~e tamasi pabhamkaro; or ~Q is subst.; Spkl 108,16: ~ e t i . . . andhabhvakarane); Jal 323,11 (mahmegho utthahi dis <- jt); Ps II 370,6 (upekkh pana - avibht); -guhyam in Ee at D II 269,29 is wr for andhakro guhyam (Be, Ce, Seso); - t i m i s , / (and ~a, mfn. ?) [cfBHS andhakratamisr], pitch darkness; (pitch-dark;) DU 12,n (lokantarik... andhakra -; Sv433,n: ~ t i . . . andhabhvakaranatimisena samanngat); III 85,5 (ekodakibhtam ... hoti andhakro~); S I 154,26* (~ya rattiy nisidi tattha bhikkhu vigatalomahamso); V 442,25 (andhantamam tad hoti ~); Ja V 11,20 (~ ahosi); -timiss, / , pitch darkness; Ja III 433,10* (~ya, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce 0-timisyam; 433,12': ~y ti andhabhvakrake tarne). andhakraka, mfn. or m. [andhakra + ka2], dark; or darkness; SV 454,n (lokantarik... ~ andhakratimis, Ce, Eeso; Be, Se andhakra; * D II 12,11 = M III 120,io= All 130,26: andhakra). andhakiya, mfn. [?], ? Sadd 789,14 (jtiyam niyutto jtikiyo, evam~ojaccandhakiyo). andhitv in Ee at Ja III 505,21 is wr for viijhitv qv sv vijjhati. andhita, mfn., pp o/andheti qv.


andhikata, andhikata, mfn. [pp of *andha + karoti; S. andhikrta], made blind, blinded; Ud 75,26 (mucchita ajjhopann -); Ja I 168,21' (mohena pana mlh avijjya -); Niddl 26,18 (avijjya -); Vism 544,24; Saddh 576 (yya -ojano); see also andhikarana. andhikarana, n. [from *andha + karoti], making blind, blinding; Cp-a 303,7 (lobhdinam -ato nnassa ca anandhikaranato lobhdipatipakkh panii); see also andhikata. andheti, ~ayati, pr. 3 sg. [perhaps denom. from andha; cfS. andhayati, "makes blind"], makes blind; becomes blind; is blind; Sadd 548,16 foil. (andha ditthpasamhre: ... ~eti -ayati, cakkhni 'ndhayimsu andho... -eti" ti andho); p p andhita, mfn., blind; become blind, made blind; Ja II 327,13* (cakkhum - honti mtugmavasam gat, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se andhak; quoted Sadd 145,30: andhik). anna (ifc sometimes -anna), n. [ts], food (esp. boiled rice); Abh 465; 1103; Vin II148,1* (tesam -amca pnam ca vatthasensanni ca); D III 258,18 (dnam deti... -am pnam vattham ynam); MIII 169,32 (na lbhi -assa pnassa vatthassa ynassa...); Sn240 (slinam -am paribhunjamno); Thi 146 (-am pnam ca dya); Ja III 156,12* (na hi -na pnena mato gono samutthahe); 522,17* (aham pi mamsni phalni bhunje -ni ca loniyateliyni); IV 273,5* (-am migo brhmana khattiyassa); Niddl 372,2 (-nan ti odano kummso sattu maccho mamsam); Ap 581,17 (tad -am chaddayitvna); ifc see aparanna, tur'-, kad-, pubbanna, sudh-; -da, mfn., giving food; SI 32,n* (-0 balado hoti); Sn297; JaIII 234,3* (agrino annadapnavatthad; 234,18': - pnad vatthad, Be, Ce, Se so); -pnbhivassa, m., a shower of food and drink; Ap 372,26; -psanamangala, n. [cf S. annaprSana], the ceremony of feeding a child rice for the first time; Mhv 62:53 (kannavedhamaham c' eva -am); -bhacca, m(fn)., "to be supported with food", a dependant; a servant; Ja II 370,13* (- c' abhacc ca); -bhra, m, a foodcarrier; a grass-seller; ? nesd,, grasssellers and fowlers; A III 122,16 (tathagato dhammam deseti antamaso nesdnam pi; Mp III 277,8 foil: annam vuccati yavasam, tarn bhro etesan ti annabhr, yvasiknam etam nmam, nesd vuccanti skunik, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se annam vuccati yavabhattam ... ycaknam etam nmam). annag, aor. 1 sg. o/amWg qv. annaya = anvaya qv; ifc see dur-. anna,/, a mother; Sadd 652,25. annupucchi in Ee at Ja VI 227,30* is prob, wr for anupucchi qv sv anupucchati. anvakri, aor. 3 sg. [of *anu1 + kirati], he threw, cast, scattered; Mil 100,6* (coro asim vudham ca sobbhe papte narake anvakri, Ce, Ee so; Se anvakri; Be akin; Ps III 334,6: anvakri ti khipi chaddesi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se akin ti) * Th 869 (eds anvaksi); see also anukinna, anvaksi. anvaksi, aor. 3 sg. [of *anu1 + kirati?], he threw, scattered; Th 869 (coro asim vudham ca sobbhe papte narake anvaksi; Th-aIII 58,31: anvaksi ti anu-aksi...

anukhipi chaddesi) * Mil 100,6 (Be akiri; Ce, Ee anvakri; Se anvakri); see also anvakri. anvakkharam, ind. [ami1 + ace. 0/akkhara], syllable by syllable; Vin IV 15,i (padam anupadam -am anuvyanjanam; Sp 741,30foil: rpam aniccan ti bhana smaner ti vuecamno rkramattam eva ekato vatv titthati); see also anupadam, anuvyanjanam. anvaga, mfn. [= anuga, influenced by aor. anvag etc], following; JaV 172,18* (tejo nu te nnvagam dantamlarn, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anvagatam; or aor. 3 sg. of amWg; 174,20': udhuvisam dantamlam na anvgatam, Eeso; Be, Ce, Se anvagatam; Se omits na); see also anvagata, anvag4. anvagam1, anvagam2, aor. 3 sg., 1 sg., o/amWg qv. anvagacchi, aor. 3 sg. o/anugacchati qv. anvagata, mfn. [= anugata, pp of anugacchati qv, influenced by aor. anvag etc], following; having followed; JaV 172,17* (bhayan nu te -am mahantam); 174,19' foil, (bhayam mahantam -am udhu visam dantamlam na -am, Be, Ce so; Se omits na; Ee anvagatam); see also anvaga, anvag4. anvagamum, aor. 3 pi. of anugacchati qv. anvag, aor. 3 sg. o/amWg qv. anvag 1 , anvag2, anvag3, aor. 3 sg., 1 sg., 3 pi, of amWg qv. anvag 4 , mfn. [= anuga qv; influenced by aor. anvag etc], gone into, falling into; Sn 586 (anutthunanto klakatam sokassa vasam -; or anvag1 qv; Pj II 461,2: -tivasam gato); Ja IV 121,20*(mham kmehi sammatto jarya vasam -; or anvag2? \2\,22 foil: mham... jarya vasagmi nma homi); see also anvaga, anvagata. anvattan in Ee at Vibh 373,19 is wr for anvvattan (or anvattan) qqv. anvaddhamsam, anvaddhamsam, ind. [anu1 + acc. of addhamsa2; BHS anvardhamsam], every fortnight; VinIV 144,13 (-am uddesam gacchati ti); Mil 8,30 (te -am sanghamaijhe osaranti ptimokkhuddesya); AIV 276,29 (-am bhikkhuniy bhikkhusanghato uposathapucchakam ca ovdpasankamanam ca pariyesitabbam); Ja II371,19 (ratthe -am anudasham devo vassati); see also anvaddhamsika, anvaddhamse. anvattha, mfn. [S. anvartha], conformable to the meaning, answering to the matter; adequate, appropriate; Thi-a229,25 (tass kira sarirvayav sobhavannayutt ahesum, tasm Subh ti -am eva nmam jtam); Mhv 78:53 (-am... nmam); Sadd879,i (-am nma nibbacanatthaspekkhanmam vuccati); -crik in Ee, Se at Niddll 116,11 is prob, wr for anavatthitaerik qv sv avatitthati; -patipad,/, an appropriate way; Niddl 14,i (anulomapatipadya apaccanikapatipadya -ya; Nidd-al 65,17: -y ti attham anugatya patipadya); -saflii, / , (gr.t.t.) a term whose meaning confor